JP2023117294A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of optimizing management of the game machine for granting a large number of putout balls.SOLUTION: A difference in balls is a difference between a first count value counted based on game balls consumed in a game and a second count value counted based on prize balls, a specific value is a value preset based on a difference when at least the second count value is larger than the first count value, and game control means controls following games in a suppression mode when difference ball determination means determines that a difference in balls reaches the specific value, and can output a particular signal to the outside when the difference ball determination means determines that a difference in balls reaches a particular value smaller than the specific value.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "pachislot machines").

Conventionally, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a big win is made based on the winning of a game ball in a starting hole, and when the result of the lottery is a big win, the big win pattern is stopped and displayed on a display device to generate a big win game. There is known a gaming machine that allows In addition, many gaming machines have been proposed that control the game to a state more advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game than during normal times (eg, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-26097 A

By the way, in recent years, even if a large number of balls are awarded to a fraudulent player due to a new fraudulent act, etc., it cannot be distinguished from a case where a large number of balls are awarded to a player due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing. First, there are cases where it is difficult for the game hall side to prompt the illegal player to stop playing, which poses a problem that it is difficult to manage the game machine. In addition, there are cases where a large number of balls are awarded to legitimate players due to biased odds of winning and losing, and problems such as so-called "addiction" have also arisen.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of optimizing the management of a gaming machine to which a large number of paid balls are provided. It is in.

Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

In a game machine equipped with a variable winning opening that allows a ball to be entered at the time of a big hit,
a prize ball awarding means for awarding a prize ball based on the winning to the variable prize opening;
difference ball determination means for determining whether or not the difference ball for a predetermined period has reached a specific value;
a game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
prepared,
The difference ball is a difference between a first count value counted based on the game balls consumed in the game and a second count value counted based on the prize balls,
The specific value is a value preset based on a difference when at least the second count value is greater than the first count value,
The game control means controls subsequent games in a restrained manner when the difference ball determination means determines that the difference ball has reached the specific value,
outputting a special signal to the outside when it is determined by the differential ball determination means that the differential ball has reached a special value smaller than the specific value;
A predetermined notification is performed when the special signal is output,
The suppression mode is characterized by being releasable by a predetermined operation.

In the above configuration, it is possible to avoid control in the suppression mode in advance by confirming whether or not the special signal is output, and it is possible to optimize the management of the game machine.

Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of optimizing the management of a gaming machine that provides a large number of paid balls.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine shown with its upper side tilted forward; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the door frame, the body frame, and the outer frame, which constitute the pachinko machine, are opened by rotating the hinges. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine for every main structure, and was seen from the back. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a door frame removed; FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the game board is separated from the body frame in FIG. 8. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a door frame and a game board removed; FIG. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the pachinko machine of FIG. 10; It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine of FIG. 10 from diagonally front. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the main body frame in an exploded state as seen from the front; FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the body frame in an exploded state, as seen from the rear; It is the plane sectional view which cut|disconnected the outer frame in the up-down direction center. It is a perspective view which shows the lower part of an outer frame. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which cut|disconnected the pachinko machine of FIG. 10 in the upper-lower center. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19; FIG. 9 is a front view of a main part showing a cross-section of a firing unit, a foul unit, etc. in the front view of FIG. 8; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame base unit of the main body frame, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a main body frame base unit of the main body frame, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; (a) is a front view of a main body frame base in the main body frame base unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing a state in which a plurality of main body frame bases are stacked. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit in the body frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball shooting unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball shooting unit as seen from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the firing unit cover of the ball firing unit as seen from the rear left, and (b) is an explanatory view of the ball firing unit showing only the firing unit cover in cross section when viewed from the front. FIG. 4 is a front view of the ball firing unit showing the firing subtraction sensor and firing mallet in dashed lines; (a) is a front perspective view of the foul unit in the body frame, and (b) is a back perspective view of the foul unit in the body frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the rear. (a) is an explanatory view showing a closed state of the foul shutter in a side cross section of the foul unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an open state of the foul shutter in the side cross section of the foul unit. (a) is a perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the rear. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the second embodiment of the foul unit. (a) is an explanatory view showing a closed state of the foul shutter in a side cross section of the foul unit of the second embodiment, and (b) is a side cross section of the foul unit of the second embodiment with the foul shutter open. It is an explanatory diagram showing. (a) is a front perspective view of the circulation ball path unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the circulation ball path unit in the body frame. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the circulating ball path unit disassembled and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the circulation ball path unit, viewed from behind; (a) is a plan view showing only the meandering ball member and the ball-removing shutter in the circulation ball path unit, and (b) is a front perspective view showing only the meandering ball member and the ball-removing shutter in the circulation ball path unit. be. (a1) is an explanatory view showing a side sectional view of the ball retracting shutter and the meandering ball member together with the ball receiving tray in the closed position, and (a2) is an explanatory view showing only the part of the ball retracting shutter in (a1) from the bottom. , (b1) is an explanatory view showing a side sectional view of the ball retracting shutter and the meandering member in the open position together with the ball receiving tray, and (b2) is an explanatory view showing only the part of the ball retracting shutter in (b1) from the bottom. be. (a) is an explanatory view showing a front cross section of the circulation ball path unit cut at the out ball sensor site, and (b) is an illustration showing a front cross section of the circulation ball path unit cut at the safe ball sensor site. It is a diagram. (a) is an enlarged perspective view of the lower part of the body frame together with the outer frame with the meandering cover of the circulation ball path unit removed, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front with the meandering cover of the circulation ball path unit removed. FIG. 10 is a perspective view seen from the back showing an enlarged lower part of the main body frame together with the outer frame in a state where it is folded. Fig. 10 is a plan view showing meandering sphere members, meandering covers, ball removal shutters, and gauges in the circulation ball path unit; (a) is an enlarged explanatory view showing a main part of a back cross-section cut at a position of an out-ball sensor with the cover member of the ball elimination mechanism closed in the circulating ball path unit attached to the body frame; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the cover member is opened in (a). (a) is an explanatory side cross-sectional view showing a state in which an iron ball is magnetically attached to the ball extraction shutter at the closed position together with the ball meandering member and the ball extraction tray; It is an explanatory view showing a side cross section together with the ball meandering member and the ball extraction tray in a state where the ball is magnetically attached, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the iron ball on the lower surface by sliding the ball extraction shutter from the state of (b) to the closed position. is an explanatory view showing a side cross section together with the meandering sphere member and the sphere extraction tray in a state where the is magnetically attached. (a) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame as seen from the front left, (b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame as seen from the front right, and (c) is a ball in the main body frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the lifting unit from the back. Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the ball lifting unit showing a state in which the ball polishing motor base and the cassette pressing piece are opened and the ball polishing cassette is removed; (a) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown without the ball rolling cassette installed, and (b) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown together with the ball rolling cassette with the ball rolling motor base and the cassette pressing piece opened. It is a figure and (c) is a top view of the ball lifting unit shown in the state with which the ball-grinding cassette is mounted|worn. (a) is an explanatory view showing how the door frame is closed with the Kuma cassette locked incompletely, and (b) is a projection of the door frame moved from the state of (a) in the direction in which the door frame closes. is an explanatory view showing a state in which the part is in contact with the tip of the Kuma motor base, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the door frame is closed from the state of (b) and the Kuma cut is locked. It is a front view showing an enlarged main part in a state in which the ball polishing cassette is removed from the ball lifting unit attached to the body frame. (a) is a right side view showing the main parts of the ball polishing mechanism and the ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit, (b) is a rear view showing the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism, and (c) is a ball It is the top view which looked at the principal part of the lifting mechanism from the arrow A of (b). FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the lifting spiral shaft and the polishing cloth in the ball lifting unit. (a) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit as seen from the rear left along with an enlarged view of the lifting inlet sensor and the lifting outlet sensor; (b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit at the lifting inlet sensor FIG. 3 is a plan cross-sectional view cut at a site; FIG. 4 is an explanatory view schematically showing parts before and after a sphere sensor made up of a photosensor in a sphere passage; (a) is a perspective view of the kuma cassette of the ball lifting unit seen from the front left, (b) is a perspective view of the kuma cassette seen from the rear right, and (c) cuts the kuma cassette at the center in the left-right direction. It is a right side cross-sectional view. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the body frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear. It is a front cross-sectional view of the ball feeding unit cut at the site of the sensor before firing. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame, and the back cover and the frame substrate unit are also opened; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged portion of the frame substrate unit in the outer frame and the main body frame; It is a reference photograph showing the rear side of the body frame with the frame substrate unit opened. It is an explanatory view showing various passages of game balls on the rear surface side of the body frame from the rear surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a flow chart which shows firing permission processing. It is a flow chart which shows possession ball subtraction processing. It is a flowchart which shows possession ball addition processing by a foul ball. It is a flow chart which shows firing control processing. 4 is a time chart showing operations of a firing solenoid and a ball feed solenoid in a firing sequence; 68(a) is a flow chart showing a firing control process different from that of FIG. 67, and (b) is a flow chart showing a possession ball subtraction process in the case of the firing control process of (a). It is a flow chart which shows prize ball processing. It is a flow chart which shows lifting motor operation processing. It is a table|surface which shows the relationship between a lift entrance sensor, a lift exit sensor, and operation|movement of a lift motor. It is a graph showing the relationship between the shooting motion of the game ball and the motion of the ball lifting unit. It is a graph which shows operation|movement of the ball lifting mechanism in a ball lifting unit. (a) is a flowchart showing security processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing security processing in an embodiment different from (a). It is a table|surface which shows the relationship between a circulating ball|bowl shortage sensor, a circulating ball|bowl excess sensor, and error alerting|reporting. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetic lines of force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor unable to detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet, and (c) Is an explanatory view schematically showing a detection range by the magnetic sensor in the game board in a perspective view, (d) is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body in which the line of magnetic force from the magnet becomes undetectable, (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body that enables detection of magnetic lines of force from the magnet, and (f) is an explanatory diagram showing the magnetic sensor and the holding section separately. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board showing the transparent center accessories and the like as opaque; FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 78 viewed from the front right; FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 78 viewed from the front left; FIG. 79 is a rear perspective view of the game board of FIG. 78; 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. (a) is a front view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory, and (b) is a perspective view of the lottery accessory as seen from the front above. It is a side cross-sectional view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a state in which a game ball cannot loop in a lottery accessory, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a game ball can loop in a lottery accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a lottery accessory. It is a front view of the game board shown in a normal state. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front lifting decorative body unit of the back front effect unit is dropped from the normal state to the effect position from the standby position. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the rear-back elevating decorative body of the rear-back production unit is moved from the normal state to the appearance position from the retracted position; From the normal state, the back front elevation decorative body unit of the back front production unit is dropped from the standby position to the production position, and the back rear elevation decoration body of the back rear production unit is shown moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view showing the center accessory of the first embodiment attached to the game panel, cut in the middle in the vertical direction, and showing it together with the front constituent member. (a) is an explanatory view showing the front decoration of the center accessory in a state where it is disassembled into a front decoration part and a rear decoration part, and (b) is a front view of the decoration consisting of the front decoration part and the rear decoration part. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing from . FIG. 95 is an explanatory view showing the center accessory of FIG. 94 with the rear end facing down and the center frame placed on the table; FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing a partial cross-section of a center accessory provided with a center frame to which a decorative body different from that in FIG. 94 is attached; (a) is an explanatory view of the main part of the center accessory of the second embodiment as seen from inside the frame, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in (a), and (c) is It is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the center frame was put on the stand in the center accessory of (a) with the rear end downward. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a game board provided with a center accessory according to a third embodiment, with the rear side of the game panel omitted. FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory and the game panel of FIG. 99 as seen from the front. 99. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the center accessory of FIG. 99, and was seen from the front. (a) to (g) are explanatory diagrams showing various joining patterns between the first frame and the second frame in the center accessory of the third embodiment. (a) is a front view showing a main part of a game board provided with a side unit of a second embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit exploded from the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit exploded from (a) from the front, (c) is an exploded perspective view of the side unit as seen from the rear of (b), and (d) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the game panel and the side unit in a longitudinal section. 105 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the side unit of FIG. 104 and the game panel in cross section. FIG. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing a longitudinal section of a side unit having a different form from the side unit of FIG. 103 together with a game panel; (a) is an explanatory view showing a longitudinal section of a side unit with a form different from the side unit shown in FIG. 105 together with a game panel, and (b) is an essential part of the LED board and board cover of the side unit in (a). is an explanatory view showing the in perspective view. FIG. 108 is an explanatory view showing a longitudinal section of a side unit having a form different from the side unit shown in FIG. 107 together with a game panel; Furthermore, it is explanatory drawing which shows the side unit of a different form with a game panel in the vertical cross section. Furthermore, it is explanatory drawing which shows the side unit of a different form with a game panel in the vertical cross section. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a side unit of a different form together with a game panel in a cross section, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing (a) in a longitudinal section. (a) is a front view showing a main part of a game board provided with a side unit and the like of a third embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of an out port in (a). , (c) is an explanatory view showing (b) in a longitudinal section. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of an out port portion of a game board provided with a side unit or the like having a finger hook portion of a form different from that shown in FIG. It is an explanatory view shown in the plane. FIG. 4 is an explanatory view schematically showing a panel plate of a game panel in which an opening to which a side unit is attached and an out port are continuously connected; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the LED substrate, and (b) is a different form from (a) in which the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the LED substrate. FIG. 12C is an explanatory diagram showing an example, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided so as to cover the LED substrate, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided over the entire circumference of the unit cover. and FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of holding. It is explanatory drawing which shows the frame decoration member which can be attached or detached with respect to a door frame. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the door frame is opened and the frame decoration member is removed during normal business hours. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame is being opened and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame is being opened in the reuse confirmation state A; 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame is being opened and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame is being opened in the reuse confirmation state B; 4 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is attached and detached while the door frame is open in the reuse confirmation state A. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is attached and detached while the door frame is open in the reuse confirmation state B; It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is attached after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the determination timing. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame is being opened and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame is being opened in the error state and reuse confirmation state A; 7 is a time chart showing an example of the amount of payout balls calculated with respect to transition of the stop counter. It is a table showing conditions for clearing "amount of balls to be paid out calculated before start of stop state" and "restrictions on games during stop state". 4 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value and the game is restricted. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game restriction is released when the power is turned off and then turned back on. This is a specific example of effect in the case where the amount of output balls reaches a specific value at the timing when the game ball enters the big winning hole during the big winning game. This is a specific production example in the case where the amount of balls to be output reaches a specific value at the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole during the variable display of the special symbols. This is the limit clear pattern table 4 selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "4". 4 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a slight abnormality occurs during normal state or stop state. 4 is a time chart showing behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during normal operation; 4 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during a stoppage state; 4 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a slight abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state; 4 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state; This is a specific example of production when a slight abnormality occurs during the normal state or stop state. This is a concrete example of the effect when a serious abnormality occurs during the normal state or stop state. This is a specific example of production when a minor abnormality or a severe abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state. 4 is a time chart showing transition of advance notice display after the start of advance notice display. It is a modified example of the restriction clear pattern table 4 at the time of power-on. 4 is a time chart showing that the output of a special external signal is started before the stop preparation state and the stop state are started; It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a stop-like state occurs after the stop state is cleared when the power is turned on. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the back side of the side unit of another different form. 144 is an enlarged side view in which the vicinity of the magnetic sensor shown in FIG. 143 is enlarged; FIG. 144 is an enlarged plan view in which the vicinity of the ball sensor shown in FIG. 143 is enlarged; FIG. It is a schematic perspective view which shows the back side of the starting port unit of a different form. 147 is an enlarged rear view in which the vicinity of the second start opening sensor shown in FIG. 146 is enlarged; FIG. FIG. 10 is a schematic rear view showing another aspect of the main wiring; It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2 when the power is cut off. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game board A1 is detached when the power is cut off. 4 is an enlarged view of a frame control board; FIG. It is a table showing conditions for clearing the number of balls in possession. It is a time chart showing establishment of conditions for generating a counting permission state in which the number of balls in possession can be settled. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the counting button switch is operated. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine in the case of shifting to the ball extraction state when the power is turned on. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine in the case of shifting to the ball extraction state when the power is turned on. It is a figure in which a magnetic sensor is provided around a foul ball sensor. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when various switches are operated when the power is turned on with no game board attached.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine shown with the upper side tilted forward. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door frame, main body frame, and outer frame that constitute the pachinko machine are each hinged and opened. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is used by being installed on an island facility of a game hall. In this pachinko machine 1, a large number (for example, 40 to 60) of game balls B are enclosed without being discharged to the outside or supplied from the outside. This game machine is a so-called enclosed game machine or a management game machine in which the ball B is not touched. In this pachinko machine 1, the number of balls held by the player is converted into data and handled as ball data.

The game ball B enclosed in the pachinko machine 1 may have the same diameter (hereinafter also referred to as diameter D. Diameter D=11 mm) as a game ball used in a conventional pachinko machine, for example, SUS304. It may be made of non-magnetizable stainless steel such as SB, or it may be a conventional iron ball (SB). When the game ball B is made of stainless steel, it does not rust like a conventional iron ball even if it is enclosed in the pachinko machine 1 for a long period of time.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16 and the like. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine with the door frame removed. 9 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the game board is separated from the body frame in FIG. 8. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine with the door frame and game board removed, FIG. 11 is a rear view of the pachinko machine of FIG. 10, and FIG. 12 is a diagonal front view of the pachinko machine of FIG. It is a perspective view. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the body frame when viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the body frame when viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional plan view of the outer frame cut at the center in the vertical direction. FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing the lower portion of the outer frame.

The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and the main frame 4 can be opened and closed forward and can be attached detachably. The outer frame 2 comprises an outer frame main body 10 formed in a vertically long frame shape, an outer frame assembly metal fitting 20 to which the outer frame main body 10 is assembled, and an outer frame hinge supporting the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. A mechanism 30, an outer frame lock fitting (not shown) for locking the body frame 4 in a closed state, a panel 45 attached to the lower frame body 14 of the outer frame body 10, and and a sliding plate 46 to which it is attached.

The outer frame body 10 of the outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the left frame body 11 and the right frame body 12, which extend vertically and are spaced apart in the left and right directions. and a lower frame 14 connecting the lower ends of the left frame 11 and the right frame 12 to each other. The left frame 11 and the right frame 12 are each made of extruded metal such as aluminum alloy. The upper frame 13 and the lower frame 14 are made of wood. The left frame 11, the right frame 12, the upper frame 13, and the lower frame 14 have the same dimension in the front-rear direction.

The outer frame assembly metal fittings 20 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left metal fitting connecting the left frame body 11 and the upper frame body 13, an upper right metal fitting connecting the right frame body 12 and the upper frame body 13, and a left A lower left metal fitting connecting the frame 11 and the lower frame 14 and a right lower metal fitting connecting the right frame 12 and the lower frame 14 are provided. The lower left metal fitting also serves as the outer frame lower hinge body 35 .

The outer frame hinge mechanism 30 has an outer frame upper hinge body 31 provided at the upper left end of the outer frame main body 10 and an outer frame lower hinge body 35 provided at the lower left end of the outer frame main body 10. ing.

The outer frame upper hinge body 31 of the outer frame hinge mechanism 30 is attached to the top surface of the left end of the upper frame body 13 , and its front end protrudes forward from the outer frame main body 10 . The outer frame upper hinge body 31 has a bearing groove 31a that penetrates vertically and is open on one side at a portion that protrudes forward from the outer frame main body 10, and a bearing groove 31a that is open at one side. and a lock member 32 which is provided on the lower surface of the portion projecting outward and which can open and close the released portion of the bearing groove 31a.

The bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 pivotally supports the main body frame hinge shaft 511a by inserting the main body frame hinge shaft 511a of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame 4 from the released portion. be able to. In a normal state, the locking member 32 of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 is positioned at the locking position where the released portion of the bearing groove 31a is closed by the urging force of the elastic piece (not shown). When the lock member 32 is moved to the release position against the urging force of the elastic piece, the bearing groove 31a is opened to the side, and the main body frame hinge shaft 511a is inserted into the bearing groove 31a from the side. , the body frame hinge shaft 511a inserted into the bearing groove 31a can be removed from the bearing groove 31a.

The outer frame lower hinge body 35 of the outer frame hinge mechanism 30 is attached to a portion (upper portion) overlapping the lower frame body 14 on the upper surface of the left end of the panel 45 , and the front end projects forward from the outer frame body 10 . ing. The outer frame lower hinge body 35 has a hinge shaft 35 a projecting upward at a portion projecting forward from the outer frame main body 10 . By inserting the hinge shaft 35a of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 into the outer frame shaft hole (not shown) of the main body frame lower hinge body 512 in the main body frame 4, the main body frame lower hinge body 512 is rotatably supported. can do.

The outer frame hinge mechanism 30 pivotally supports the main body frame hinge shaft 511a of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 in the main body frame 4 in the bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge body 31, and the hinge shaft 35a of the outer frame lower hinge body 35. is inserted into the outer frame shaft hole of the lower main body frame hinge body 512, the main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be openable and closable.

Two outer frame lock fittings of the outer frame 2 are provided on the inner side surface (left side surface) of the right frame body 12 so as to be spaced apart vertically. The outer frame locking metal fittings can lock the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a closed state so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened by engaging the outer frame locking claws 784 of the lock unit 780 in the main body frame 4 . .

A curtain plate 45 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the lower frame 14 and has a front end projecting forward beyond the lower frame 14 . The curtain plate 45 is made of synthetic resin. Two sliding plates 46 are provided on the upper surface of the curtain plate 45 so as to be separated from each other to the left and right. The sliding plate 46 abuts the lower end surface of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The sliding plate 46 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, making the body frame 4 slippery and facilitating opening and closing.

More specifically, the curtain plate 45 is formed so as to cover a portion of the upper end surface of the lower frame 14 on the front side of the center in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the lower frame 14. A plate body 45a, a hinge body cover portion 45b provided near the left end of the upper surface of the screen body body 45a, a rear wall portion 45c extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the hinge body cover portion 45b, and a guide display portion 45d provided on the upper surface of the curtain plate main body 45a.

The hinge body cover portion 45 b of the curtain plate 45 is provided so as to cover the lower surface and side surfaces of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 . As a result, when a player, a worker for maintenance, transportation, installation, etc., reaches out near the outer frame lower hinge body 35, the hand directly touches the outer frame lower hinge body 35 by means of the hinge body cover portion 45b. The edge of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 can prevent injury.

In addition, since the lower surface and side surfaces of the lower outer frame hinge body 35 are covered by the hinge body cover portion 45b, the lower outer frame hinge body 35 can be hidden from the player side, and the curtain plate 45 (curtain plate The sense of unity with the main body 45a) can be enhanced to improve the appearance.

The rear wall portion 45c of the curtain plate 45 is arranged so that when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the rear surface of the main body frame lower hinge body 512 of the main body frame 4 to be described later abuts against the front surface of the rear wall portion 45c. is provided in As a result, when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame lower hinge body 512 comes into contact with the rear wall portion 45c, thereby restricting the body frame 4 from further hinge-rotating to the rear side. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the guide display portion 45d of the curtain plate 45 is provided so as to protrude rearward from the rear side of the upper surface of the curtain plate main body 45a. , to the rear portion of the sliding plate 46 on the right side. An arrow pointing to the left near the left end and an arrow pointing to the right near the right end are displayed on the guidance display portion 45d, and between the two arrows, "! Fixed in this range" is displayed. Protruding nails and fixtures are prohibited!" is displayed. These arrows and letters are engraved by a mold for injection molding the curtain plate 45 .

The guide display portion 45d is provided so as not to come into contact with the body frame 4 which is provided so as to be openable/closable with respect to the outer frame 2 . This guidance display portion 45d is for calling attention to the worker when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility of the game hall. Specifically, when the lower frame body 14 of the outer frame 2 is fixed to the island facility with a mounting screw (not shown), the head of the mounting screw does not move within the range displayed on the guide display portion 45d. This is for calling attention not to protrude above the display portion 45d. By fixing the outer frame 2 with the mounting screws according to this warning, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the mounting screws do not come into contact with the main body frame 4, and the mounting screws do not touch the main body frame 4. do not interfere.

According to the guide display portion 45d, it is possible to prevent the mounting screws that fix the outer frame 2 from interfering with the main body frame 4. Therefore, the main body frame 4 may be damaged due to the interference of the mounting screws. can be avoided. Further, since the guide display portion 45d serves as a mark for the driving amount of the mounting screws for fixing the outer frame 2, it is not necessary to drive the mounting screws while opening and closing the body frame 4 so that the mounting screws do not interfere with each other. , can improve work efficiency.

Furthermore, since the guide display portion 45d is provided, when checking the fixed state of the outer frame 2 to the island facility, the guide display portion 45d can be used as a guide to easily visually check the condition of the mounting screws. can be confirmed.

In addition, since the guide display portion 45d indicating the fixing range of the mounting screws is formed integrally with the panel main body 45a, simply by attaching the panel main body 45a to the lower frame 14 and assembling it to the outer frame 2, the outer frame 2 can be displayed. The guide display portion 45d can be provided in the frame 2, and the cost can be reduced compared to the case where the guide display portion 45d is separately provided.

In the above-described embodiment, the guide display portion 45d projecting rearward from the rear end of the curtain plate main body 45a is shown to extend continuously in the left-right direction from the leftmost arrow to the rightmost arrow. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the left and right arrow portions may project rearward from the rear end of the curtain plate main body 45a.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the guide display portion 45d is engraved when the curtain plate 45 is injection-molded, but the present invention is not limited to this. , and the guidance display portion 45d may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the guidance display portion 45d is provided on the curtain plate 45, but it is not limited to this, and may be provided on the lower frame body 14, the sliding plate 46, or the like. . When the guide display portion 45d is provided on the lower frame 14, for example, a sticker may be attached, an ink stamp may be applied, or a brand mark may be applied. When the guide display portion 45d is provided on the slide plate 46, for example, the slide plate 46 may be engraved with a concave shape.

[3. door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3 and 5 to 7. FIG. The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 4, and when closed, the door frame body 100 has a game window 101 through which the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the body frame 4 faces forward. , a transparent glass 120 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame body 100 and closes the game window 101; A handle 160 operated by the player to hit the game ball B into the area 5a, a cylindrical handle cover 170 surrounding the outer periphery of the handle 160, and a count button switch 180 operable by the player. I have it.

In addition, the door frame 3 includes a door frame panel 190 extending from the lower end of the front surface of the door frame main body 100 over the entire width in the horizontal direction at a constant height, and a game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100. A shelf unit 200 protruding forward at a portion between the door frame curtain plate 190 and a performance operation unit 250 provided in the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction and operable by a player are provided. The number of balls displayed 140 and the counting button switch 180 are provided on the upper surface of the shelf unit 200 (the upper surface of the shelf 201).

Further, the door frame 3 includes a door frame top unit 300 provided above the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and a door frame top unit 300 provided on the front surface of the door frame main body 100 on the left side of the game window 101. A door frame left side unit 320 and a door frame right side unit 340 provided on the right side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100 are provided.

The door frame main body 100 has a door frame hinge mechanism 110 for attaching to the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The door frame hinge mechanism 110 includes a door frame upper hinge body 111 (see FIG. 6) provided at the upper left end of the door frame main body 100 and a door frame lower hinge body provided at the lower left end of the door frame main body 100. 112 and . The door frame upper hinge body 111 has a door frame upper hinge shaft 111a protruding upward. In the door frame hinge mechanism 110, the door frame upper hinge shaft 111a of the door frame upper hinge body 111 is inserted from below into the door frame upper shaft hole 511b of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 described later, and the door frame lower hinge body 112 is inserted. By inserting the door frame lower hinge shaft 112a from above into a door frame lower shaft hole 512b of a main body frame lower hinge body 512 described later, the door frame 3 can be supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4. .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the door frame main body 100 has a projecting portion 102 projecting rearward from near the lower end of the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the lower surface of the projecting part 102 abuts on a supporting stepped part 501q of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, which will be described later. It can be lifted. With this projecting portion 102, the door frame 3 is lifted by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, the load of the door frame 3 is transferred to the projecting portion 102 and the door frame lower hinge body 112. can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive load from continuing to be applied to the hinges (the door frame lower hinge body 112 and the outer frame lower hinge body 35) that enable the door frame 3 to be opened and closed, and the hinges are less likely to be distorted. In addition, since the door frame 3 can be lifted by the protrusion 102 even if the hinge is distorted, the door frame 3 can be closed with respect to the body frame 4 at a proper position. Although not shown, the lower surface of the protrusion 102 has a plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction, and these ribs increase strength and rigidity.

The projecting portion 102 has a guide surface 102a that is inclined so as to move leftward as it goes rearward. Although the details will be described later, the guide surface 102a of the protrusion 102 may be bent when the door frame 3 is about to be closed with respect to the main body frame 4 when the ball lifting unit 650 has the ball motor base 686 in a state other than the locked position. The front end of the motor base 686 comes into contact with the Kuma motor base 686 so that it can be moved (rotated) to the lock position.

The number-of-balls display unit 140 is composed of a 6-digit 7-segment LED. The number-of-balls-in-hand display section 140 is provided on the upper surface of the shelf unit 200 on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction and on the left side of the count button switch 180 .

The handle 160 is provided in the lower right corner on the front surface of the door frame main body 100 , that is, near the right end between the game window 101 and the door frame curtain plate 190 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100 . The handle 160 is attached so that the player can rotate it with the rotation axis facing forward and backward. The steering wheel 160 is shaped like an automobile steering wheel and includes a central hub portion 160a, a plurality (here, three) of spoke portions 160b extending outwardly from the hub portion 160a, and spoke portions 160a and 160b. and an annular ring portion 160c that connects the tips of 160b.

The ring portion 160c of the handle 160 is provided at a front portion slightly separated from the front end of the cylindrical handle cover 170 so that the player cannot grip the ring portion 160c. Therefore, when the player rotates the handle 160, he or she mainly operates the hub portion 160a with his or her fingers passing between the spoke portions 160b. In this state, the player's finger is thrust into the cylinder of the handle cover 170 .

The handle 160 includes a firing stop switch 161 that can be pressed by the player, a handle touch sensor 162 that detects changes in electrostatic capacity of the handle 160, and a handle rotation sensor 163 that detects the rotation angle of the handle 160. (see Figure 63).

When the player presses the firing stop switch 161 , the frame control board 740 stops driving the firing solenoid 553 . Therefore, when the player presses the shooting stop switch 161 while rotating the handle 160, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 160.例文帳に追加After that, when the pressing operation of the firing stop switch 161 is released while the rotating operation of the handle 160 is kept as it is, the game is played again with the impact strength before pressing the firing stop switch 161 (the impact strength corresponding to the rotating operation of the handle 160). A ball B can be hit into the game area 5a.

The handle touch sensor 162 detects static electricity acting on the handle 160. When the player touches the handle 160, the handle touch sensor 162 detects static electricity acting from the player and detects contact (touch) of the handle 160 by the player. ). When the handle 160 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 162 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation sensor 163 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160. Driving is controlled, and a game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 160 in some way without touching the handle 160, the handle touch sensor 162 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 553 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 160 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The handle rotation sensor 163 is a variable resistor. When the handle 160 is rotated, the detection shaft rotates and the internal resistance changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft. Therefore, when the handle 160 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation sensor 163, the driving force of the firing solenoid 553 in the ball shooting unit 550, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with the strength corresponding to the .

The handle cover 170 extends rearward from the rear portion of the annular portion of the handle 160 so as to widen in diameter, and is formed in a conical tubular shape. An opening 171 communicating with the inside is provided on the right peripheral surface and the lower peripheral surface of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 170 . Through these openings 171, even if dust, liquid, or the like enters the handle cover 170, it can be discharged downward.

The counting button switch 180 is provided on the upper surface of the shelf unit 200 on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction. The count button switch 180, which will be described later in detail, can be pressed when there is a ball in hand so that the ball can be sent to the game ball lending device 8 for settlement.

The door frame curtain plate 190 has a constant height and extends left and right with the same length as the width of the door frame main body 100 in the left and right direction, and is attached to the lower end of the front surface of the door frame main body 100 . The door frame curtain plate 190 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center in the left-right direction, and has a duct grill 191 positioned in front of a bass reflex duct 501e of the body frame 4, which will be described later. The duct grille 191 is elongated to the left and right and partitioned by a plurality of vertical lattices. The duct grille 191, which will be described later in detail, is for emitting air vibrations (wind) generated by driving the main body frame speaker 503 from the bass reflex duct 501e of the main body frame 4 forward.

The shelf unit 200 is provided at a portion between the game window 101 and the door frame curtain board 190 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100 . A spherical performance operation unit 250 is provided in the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction. The shelf unit 200 includes a shelf part 201 protruding forward in a shelf shape along the lower end of the game window 101 from the upper end, and a speaker grill provided below the shelf part 201 and on the right side of the production operation unit 250. 203, a setting adjustment button 204 which is provided on the upper surface of the shelf 201 and which is composed of four push buttons arranged in the front, back, left, and right, and a pair of projections 205 which are provided separately in the left and right. there is The setting adjustment button 204 can adjust the volume by operating the front and rear push buttons of the four push buttons arranged in front, back, left and right, and can adjust the amount of light by operating the left and right push buttons. I have to.

The shelf 201 has a smooth upper surface. On the upper surface of the shelf 201, on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction, a count button switch 180 is provided near the right end, and a ball number display section 140 is provided on the left side of the count button switch 180. A setting adjustment button 204 is provided on the right side of the direction center, and protrusions 205 are provided on both left and right sides near the rear end of the setting adjustment button 204 .

The pair of protrusions 205 protrude higher than the setting adjustment button 204 and have rounded upper ends. A pair of protrusions 205 are provided substantially parallel to the rear side of the shelf 201 . The pair of protrusions 205 can be used, for example, to prop up the smartphone on the upper surface of the shelf 201, which is convenient.

The speaker grille 203 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 503 in the body frame 4, which will be described later, and is formed of punching metal having a plurality of through holes. The speaker grille 203 is symmetrical with the handle 160 and has the same size with respect to the center of the door frame 3 in the middle direction, and is formed in a shape that bulges forward like the handle cover 170 .

The effect operation unit 250 is provided in the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction, and has a front end protruding forward from the shelf unit 200 and an upper end protruding upward from the shelf unit 200.例文帳に追加The production operation unit 250 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole. The effect operation unit 250 has a circular first effect button 251 provided near the center on the upper surface, and an annular second effect button 252 provided so as to surround the first effect button 251. are doing. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first effect button 251 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the second effect button 252 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The first effect button 251 and the second effect button 252 are coaxially provided, and the axis is inclined so as to move forward as it goes upward.

The first effect button 251 and the second effect button 252 are provided so as to move upward (pop up) as a whole according to the player participation type effect. The first effect button 251 can always be pressed, while the second effect button 252 can be pressed only when popped up.

Although illustration is omitted, a vibrator (vibration device) is provided inside the first effect button 251 .

The door frame top unit 300 is a portion above the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and both ends in the left and right direction are between the upper end portion of the door frame left side unit 320 and the upper end portion of the door frame right side unit 340. It is provided so as to be sandwiched between them. The door frame top unit 300 protrudes forward like an eave. The door frame top unit 300 includes a translucent semi-tubular door frame top decoration 301 that extends laterally along the front edge. The door frame top decoration 301 is curved in the front-rear direction so that the center in the left-right direction is located furthest forward in plan view.

Although illustration is omitted, the door frame top unit 300 includes a door frame top decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for decorating the door frame top decoration 301, and sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects. It has a pair of door frame top speakers 303 which output and are separated to the left and right, and a pair of door frame top side speakers 304 which are provided on both left and right outer sides of the pair of door frame top speakers 303. there is A pair of door frame top speakers 303 are full-range speakers (or mid-range speakers), and a pair of door frame top side speakers 304 are tweeters (high-pitched speakers).

The door frame left side unit 320 is a portion on the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and is vertically located from near the upper end of the door frame main body 100 to near the speaker grill 203 below the shelf portion 201 of the shelf unit 200. long established. The door-frame left-side unit 320 extends over the entire length in the vertical direction, and includes a semi-tube-shaped door-frame left-side decorative body 321 having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 321 is curved rightward in the vicinity of the lower end.

Although illustration is omitted, the door frame left side unit 320 has a door frame left side decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs for decorating the door frame left side decoration 321 are mounted.

The door frame right side unit 340 is a portion on the right side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and extends vertically from near the upper end of the door frame main body 100 to the handle cover 170 below the shelf portion 201 of the shelf unit 200. long established. The door-frame right-side unit 340 protrudes forward longer than the door-frame left-side unit 320, and is formed in a vertically elongated partition shape.

The door frame right side unit 340 extends vertically along the front end and is provided behind the semi-tubular door frame right side decoration 341 having translucency and the door frame right side decoration 341 . A light-transmitting door frame right side left side decorative body (not shown) forming the left side and a light transmitting body provided behind the door frame right side decorative body 341 and forming the right side a door frame right side right side decorative body (not shown), a door frame right side decorative body 341, a door frame right side left side decorative body, and a door frame right side right side decorative body for luminous decoration. and a door frame right side decorative substrate (not shown) on which LEDs are mounted. The door frame right side decorative body 341 is curved leftward in the vicinity of the lower end.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 340 has an opening 342 that penetrates in the vicinity of the lower end and that the keyhole 782 of the lock unit 780 faces forward.

[3-1. Count button switch]
The counting button switch 180 is provided on the upper surface of the shelf unit 200 on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction. The count button switch 180 can be pressed when there are balls in hand (the number of balls in hand>0), and the balls in hand can be sent to the game ball lending device 8 for settlement. The count button switch 180, which will be described later in detail, can be used to feed the balls one by one or by a predetermined number (for example, every 250) according to the pressing time. The number of possession balls sent to the game ball lending device 8 is sent to the management server 9 via the communication network, and the IC card storing the number of possession balls is discharged from the game ball lending device 8. - 特許庁

Here, the game ball lending device 8 is provided so as to be adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall (also called sand). Although not shown in detail, the game ball lending device 8 includes an insertion slot for inserting cash, a prepaid card, etc., a card slot for inserting/ejecting an IC card, a ball rental button switch 8a, a return button switch, an inserted amount, A display section for displaying the number of counting balls, etc. is provided. In the game ball lending device 8, when the ball lending button switch 8a is pressed while cash or the like is inserted into the slot, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent within the range of the inserted amount. In this embodiment, the number of rented game balls B is transmitted to the frame control board as digital data, and is also transmitted to the management server 9 via the communication network and managed.

In more detail about the count button switch 180, when the player "short presses" the count button switch 180 (for example, one pressing time is less than 500 ms) with a ball in hand, one game ball B is released from the ball in hand. Count. When the counting button switch 180 is "long pressed (for example, one pressing time is 500 ms or more)", count notification is given every predetermined time (for example, 300 ms) until the number of held balls becomes less than 250. 250 game balls B are counted at the timing. When the number of held balls becomes 250 or less during long pressing, game balls B are counted one by one. Also, when the counting button switch 180 is "long-pressed (for example, one pressing time is 500 ms or more)", even if the counting button switch 180 is not kept pressed, the total number of held balls is unconditionally counted. You can do it.

When counting is performed by pressing the counting button switch 180, the number of balls displayed in the number-of-balls display unit 140 is subtracted and displayed, and the number of counted balls is displayed on the display unit (not shown) of the game ball lending device 8. is displayed.

[4. Body frame]
The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 8 to 14, 17 to 21, and the like. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 19 is a plan view of the pachinko machine of FIG. 10 cut in the vertical center. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. 21 is a main part front view showing a section of a firing unit, a foul unit, etc. in the front view of FIG. 8. FIG.

The body frame 4 is formed in the shape of a box frame with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 2, a ball shooting unit 550 for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a ball. A foul unit 570 for recovering the game ball B that was not hit into the game area 5a despite being shot by the shooting unit 550, and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 and the foul unit 570 were recovered. A circulating ball path unit 600 for sending game balls B to the ball launching unit 550 side, a ball lifting unit 650 for moving game balls B upward from the downstream end of the circulating ball path unit 600, and a ball lifting unit 650 A ball sending unit 700 for sending the lifted game balls B one by one to the ball shooting unit 550 is provided.

The body frame 4 also includes a ball receiving tray 720 for receiving the game balls B ejected from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600, and a frame control for controlling the ball launching unit 550, the ball lifting unit 650, and the like. A frame substrate unit 730 having a substrate 740 and a lock unit 780 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
Main body frame base unit 500 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24 and the like. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame base unit of the main body frame disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 24(a) is a front view of the body frame base in the body frame base unit, and FIG. 24(b) is a perspective view showing a state in which a plurality of body frame bases are stacked.

The main body frame base unit 500 is supported so as to be openable and closable forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and is capable of supporting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable forward. The body frame base unit 500 includes a ball launching unit 550, a foul unit 570, a circulation ball path unit 600, a ball lifting unit 650, a ball feeding unit 700, a ball receiving tray 720, a frame substrate unit 730, a lock unit 780, and the like. installed.

The main body frame base unit 500 has a game board insertion portion 502 penetrating in the front and rear direction, into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front, and a base wall portion 501b provided below the game board insertion portion 502. A main body frame base 501 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a side reinforcing plate 509 reinforcing the left side of the main body frame base 501 are provided.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame speaker 503 attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a base wall portion 501b attached to cover the main body frame speaker 503 from the rear, and the front side is open. and a back cover 505 provided so that the game board insertion portion 502 of the main body frame base 501 can be opened and closed from behind.

Further, the main body frame base unit 500 includes a game board lock member 506 attached to the main body frame base 501, a door open switch 507 and a frame open switch 508 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a main body frame base 501. and an attached body frame hinge mechanism 510 .

The body frame base 501 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The body frame base 501 is made of black opaque synthetic resin. The main body frame base 501 includes a frame-shaped frame 501a having no left side, and a game board insert penetrating back and forth within the frame of the frame 501a from near the upper end to below in a range of about 2/3 of the total height. 502, a base wall portion 501b provided on the lower side of the game board insertion portion 502, and a game protruding upward (inside the game board insertion portion 502) near the center in the left-right direction of the upper end surface of the base wall portion 501b. A board restricting portion 501c, a main body frame speaker opening 501d that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the left end of the base wall portion 501b and through which the main body frame speaker 503 faces forward, and a horizontally elongated front-rear direction near the lower end of the center of the left-right direction of the base wall portion 501b. and a bass reflex duct 501e passing through.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward from the front side above the bass reflex duct 501e in the base wall portion 501b. and a ball storage passage insertion opening 501g through which the meandering ball member 613 and the meandering cover 614 of the circulation ball path unit 600 are inserted.

The body frame base 501 also includes a foul unit mounting portion 501h and a ball shooting unit mounting portion 501i, which are arranged side by side above the ball storage passage insertion opening 501g on the front surface of the base wall portion 501b, and the base wall portion 501b. A ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j provided on the right side of the ball shooting unit mounting portion 501i, and a ball feeding unit provided at a portion behind the ball firing unit mounting portion 501i on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b. The mounting portion 501k, the circulation ball path unit mounting portion 501l provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b, and the base wall portion 501b are penetrated in the front-rear direction near the upper right corner, through which the lock cylinder 781 of the lock unit 780 is inserted. and a cylinder insertion opening 501m.

Further, the main body frame base 501 protrudes from the left and right inner walls of the tray insertion recess 501f, respectively. A locking pawl 501n is provided for restricting forward movement of the tray 720 . The body frame base 501 also has a vertically long opening 501o penetrating back and forth at the location of the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j.

The body frame base 501 also includes an upper surface cover 502a extending rearward from the upper end of the game board insertion portion 502, a rear surface cover 502b extending in a short flat plate shape downward from the rear edge of the upper surface cover 502a, A left side cover 502c extending rearward from the left end of the game board insertion portion 502 and having an upper end connected to the upper surface cover 502a, and a left side cover 502c extending rearward from the right end of the game board insertion portion 502 and having an upper end connected to the upper surface cover 502a. and a lower cover 502e extending rearward from the lower end of the game board insertion portion 502. As shown in FIG.

The body frame base 501 also includes a plurality of ventilation holes 502f passing through the rear cover 502b, a plurality of upper recesses 502g provided in the upper cover 502a and recessed downward, and a lower cover 502e. It is provided with a plurality of lower surface concave portions 502h that are recessed downward, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 502i provided on the lower surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the upper surface of the lower surface cover 502e.

Further, the body frame base 501 is provided on the upper side of the ball shooting unit attachment part 501i, and further includes a canopy part 501p for blocking light from entering the ball shooting unit 550 from above. The eaves portion 501p can block external light from a firing subtraction sensor 554, which is a photosensor of the ball firing unit 550 attached to the ball firing unit attachment portion 501i. False detection can be prevented.

The main body frame base 501 includes a support step portion 501q provided at a portion between the tray insertion recess 501f and the opening 501o and slightly above the bottom surface of the tray insertion recess 501f, and a base wall portion 501b. A pair of support protrusions 501r are provided vertically apart near the right end on the rear surface and protrude rearward. The support step portion 501q has a surface (upper surface) facing upward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the support step portion 501q abuts so that the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 rides on the support step portion 501q, thereby lifting the door frame 3 to some extent. part of the load of The rear end face of the support projection 501r is provided with a locking hole for locking the ny latch 774 of the frame base unit 730. As shown in FIG.

The game board 5 is detachably inserted from the front into the game board insertion portion 502 of the main body frame base 501 . The game board insertion portion 502 is surrounded by a top cover 502a, a left side cover 502c, a right side cover 502d, and a bottom cover 502e around a portion behind the base wall portion 501b.

The game board 5 is placed on the upper end face of the base wall portion 501b. A door opening switch 507, a ball launching unit 550, a foul unit 570, and a ball receiving tray 720 are attached to the front surface of the base wall portion 501b. A body frame speaker 503, a body frame speaker box 504, a frame open switch 508, a circulating ball path unit 600, a ball lifting unit 650, and a ball feeding unit 700 are attached to the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b.

The game board regulating portion 501c regulates the movement of the game board 5 in the left-right direction and backward when the game board 5 is inserted into the game board insertion portion 502. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the main body frame speaker opening 501d is formed in a lattice shape, and is provided so as to be positioned behind the speaker grille 203 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. It is A main body frame speaker 503 is attached to the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b so as to close the main body frame speaker port 501d from the rear.

The bass reflex duct 501e is formed in a rectangular tubular shape elongated in the left and right direction. Although details will be described later, the bass reflex duct 501e communicates with an enclosure 504a of the main body frame speaker 503 composed of the base wall portion 501b and the main body frame speaker box 504, and the sound is output from the main body frame speaker 503 to the rear. It is for inverting the phase and emitting forward. In this embodiment, the cylindrical bass reflex duct 501e makes it possible to resonate and amplify the low range of the range of the sound output from the main body frame speaker 503, thereby producing a deeper bass sound. The bass reflex duct 501 e is provided so as to be positioned behind the duct grille 191 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 .

The tray insertion recess 501f can detachably support the ball receiving tray 720 from the front. The bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f is inclined so that the front end side is lowered (see FIG. 20). As a result, even if the game ball B spills into the tray insertion recess 501f while the ball receiving tray 720 is not inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f, it can be ejected forward. Further, since the bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f is inclined so that the front end side is lowered, the placed ball receiving tray 720 can be easily slid forward.

The ball storage passage insertion opening 501g is provided so that the front portions of the meandering ball member 613 and the meandering cover 614 of the circulation ball passage unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b pass through and project forward. The foul unit mounting portion 501h is provided near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b and on the right side of the main body frame speaker port 501d. The ball shooting unit attachment portion 501i is provided on the right side of the foul unit attachment portion 501h. The ball lifting unit attachment portion 501j is provided at a portion between the vicinity of the upper end and the vicinity of the lower end of the base wall portion 501b.

The ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k is provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b so that the upper surface of the ball feeding unit 700 faces upward (inside the game board insertion portion 502), so that the ball feeding unit 700 can be attached and detached from above. is provided in When the ball-feeding unit 700 is attached to the ball-feeding unit mounting portion 501k, the elastic claw 709b of the ball-feeding unit 700 passes through the locking hole of the base wall portion 501b on the right side of the ball-shooting unit 550 and faces forward. Become. In this state, the elastic claw 709b is pushed backward to be elastically deformed, and the knob 709a provided on the upper surface of the ball feeding unit 700 is picked up and lifted, so that the ball feeding unit 700 can be removed upward.

The circulating ball path unit attachment portion 501l is provided at a portion above a box extension portion 504c of the main body frame speaker box 504, which will be described later, in the central portion in the left-right direction of the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b. The cylinder insertion opening 501m is provided on the right side of the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b.

The top cover 502a extends rearward beyond the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the game board insertion portion 502. - 特許庁As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper surface cover 502a is provided with two upper surface recesses 502g separated from each other in the left and right direction. are omitted. With this configuration, the upper surface cover 502a can be positioned higher by the amount of the reinforcing ribs than when a plurality of reinforcing ribs are arranged in the horizontal direction on the upper surface of the upper surface cover. 502 internal volume is secured. Furthermore, if a plurality of reinforcing ribs are provided on the upper surface of the upper surface cover, they will be left unwiped during cleaning and spoil the aesthetic appearance. It is possible to maintain the aesthetic appearance.

The upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the bottom surfaces of the two upper surface recesses 502g are inclined by about 2 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane so as to become lower toward the rear. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 is usually installed so as to tilt backward, and since the angle is generally tilted backward by about 0.75 degrees, the total downward tilt is about 2.75 degrees. In addition, the width of the two upper surface recesses 502g increases toward the rear.

By making such a gentle slope, the game balls B falling from above the pachinko machine 1 flow down the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a or the upper surface recess 502g, and the island equipment provided below the pachinko machine 1 flows down. The game ball B falls on the recovery path of the game ball B and is recovered. In addition, falling objects such as metal powder and non-spherical objects such as screws stay on the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a or on the upper surface concave portion 502g. In order to obtain such an effect, it is desirable that the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a is inclined within 15 degrees from the horizontal plane.

Since the upper surface cover 502a is formed in a flat plate shape, the lower surfaces (rear surfaces) of the two upper surface recesses 502g that are recessed from above in the upper surface cover 502a protrude downward from the lower surface of the upper surface cover 502a (FIG. 24). (b)). In other words, the upper surface recess 502g is in the form of a protrusion projecting downward from the lower surface of the upper surface cover 502a. The end points of the two upper recesses 502g, that is, the front wall, are behind the abutment surface 502j.

In other words, the back side (lower side) of the top cover 502a has the back sides of the two top recesses 502g. The tips (front ends) on the back side of the two upper surface recesses 502g form an abutment surface 502j, which contacts the rear surface of the upper side of the game board 5 to position the game board 5. As shown in FIG.

Four reinforcing ribs 502i out of a plurality of reinforcing ribs 502i are provided on the back side (lower surface side) of the upper surface cover 502a, and together with the upper surface concave portion 502g, the upper surface cover 502a is reinforced. By thus providing the reinforcing ribs 502i not on the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a but on the inner lower surface, it is possible to maintain the appearance of the upper surface (outer surface) of the upper surface cover 502a.

As shown in FIG. 23, a plurality of ribs 502k are provided at the front end of the top surface of the top cover 502a. In addition, since the upper side is covered with the outer frame 2, metal powder or the like does not fall from the upper side, and the appearance is not affected.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the upper surface concave portion 502g are not provided with a gate for feeding molten resin during injection molding. This is because the unevenness caused by the gate does not prevent the game ball B from flowing down the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the upper surface recessed portion 502g.

Also, care is taken so that the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the upper surface recessed portion 502g are not left with traces of ejector pins for taking out the injection-molded body frame base 501 from the mold. Usually, the traces of the ejector pin are less likely to hinder the flow of the game ball B by properly treating the burrs, but when cleaning the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the upper surface recessed portion 502g where metal powder etc. are deposited, etc. may spoil the aesthetic appearance. Therefore, care is taken not to leave marks of the ejector pin.

The rear cover 502b of the body frame base 501 is connected to the left side cover 502c and the right side cover 502d at both left and right ends. The rear cover 502b is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped ventilation holes 502f arranged in a horizontal direction.

The left side cover 502c of the main body frame base 501 has the same depth in the front-rear direction as the top cover 502a. The left side cover 502c is inclined so as to move rightward as it goes rearward in a plan view. At the rear end of the left side cover 502c, two cover locking portions 502l for locking the back cover 505 are provided vertically separated from each other.

The right side cover 502d of the main body frame base 501 is inclined so as to move leftward as it goes rearward in plan view. A part of the right side cover 502d below the rear cover 502b is notched forward from the rear end, and the rear end of this part is located forward of the rear end of the top cover 502a. . That is, the right side cover 502d is formed to have a shorter depth than the rear cover 502b. At the rear end of the right side cover 502d below the rear cover 502b, a plurality of cover shaft supports 502m for hinge-rotatably supporting the rear cover 505 are provided at intervals in the vertical direction. .

The lower surface cover 502e of the main body frame base 501 extends rearward from a portion one step higher than the lower end of the game board insertion portion 502 (upper surface of the base wall portion 501b). The lower surface cover 502e is provided so as to exclude the portion above the circulation ball path unit attachment portion 501l, and the portion on the left side of the circulation ball path unit attachment portion 501l extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the left side cover 502c. A portion on the right side of the circulation ball path unit attachment portion 501l extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the portion of the right side cover 502d formed to have a short depth. The lower surface cover 502e is inclined so as to become higher toward the rear.

The lower surface recessed portion 502h of the main body frame base 501 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the lower surface cover 502e. The lower surface recessed portion 502h is open toward the front and is formed so that the left and right widths become narrower toward the rear. The bottom surface of the lower surface recessed portion 502h is inclined so as to become higher toward the rear, similarly to the lower surface cover 502e. Since the lower surface cover 502e is formed in a flat plate shape, the lower surface (back surface) of the lower surface recessed portion 502h that is recessed from above in the lower surface cover 502e protrudes downward from the lower surface of the lower surface cover 502e (FIG. 24B). See That is, the lower surface recessed portion 502h is in the form of a convex portion protruding downward on the lower surface of the lower surface cover 502e. Reinforcing ribs 502i are provided inside the lower surface recessed portions 502h.

A plurality of reinforcing ribs 502i are provided on the lower surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the bottom surface of the lower surface recess 502h. The top cover 502a is provided with four reinforcing ribs 502i, two of which extend forward from the two abutment surfaces 502j, and the remaining two extend from the two top recesses 502g. are also provided on both the left and right outer sides. Reinforcing ribs 502i provided on both left and right sides of the top recess 502g have rear ends connected to the rear cover 502b and extend forward shorter than the top recess 502g.

Of the plurality of reinforcing ribs 502i, two on both the left and right sides of the upper surface recess 502g of the upper surface cover 502a and two provided on the two lower surface recesses 502h, respectively, are provided in each of the two lower surface recesses 502h. is provided in More specifically, the body frame base 501 of this embodiment is configured so that it can be placed horizontally without rattling when placed on a workbench or the like with the front end side down. Further, the body frame base 501 is formed so that it can be stacked and stored, as shown in FIG. 24(b). At this time, the four reinforcing ribs 502i as ribs abut on the other side, so that the overlapped body frame bases 501 can be prevented from meshing with each other. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time it takes to remove the parts (body frame base 501) that are engaged with each other, and to improve the efficiency of the assembly work. In addition, since the body frame base 501 can be stacked, it is possible to increase the number of packages and reduce the size of the packaging box.

According to the main body frame base 501 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a of the main body frame base 501, which protects the game board 5 stored in the main body frame 4 from above, has a gently sloping rearward slope. Game balls B, metal powder, screws, etc. falling from above the machine 1 can be properly treated. Specifically, the spherical game ball B can be dropped under the pachinko machine 1 by causing the upper surface of the upper cover 502a to flow down, so that the game ball B can be recovered as it is without causing any trouble. In addition, non-spherical metal powder, screws, etc. can be retained on the upper surface cover 502a without flowing down, so that troubles do not occur.

Further, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a is not provided with the ventilation holes 502f. This prevents metal powder, screws, etc. from entering through the ventilation holes 502f, and does not adversely affect the electrical components of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the top surface of the top cover 502a molded by the injection molding machine is not provided with a gate for injecting molten resin into the mold during molding. As a result, unevenness derived from the gate does not occur on the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a, so that the game ball B does not flow down.

Similarly, care is taken not to leave traces of ejector pins when the injection-molded body frame base 501 is removed from the mold. Usually, the marks of the ejector pins are less likely to hinder the flow of the game ball B by properly treating the burrs, but when cleaning the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a where metal powder etc. are deposited, the ejector pin marks It may leave marks and spoil the aesthetic appearance. Therefore, by not leaving marks of the ejector pin, it is possible to easily restore the aesthetic appearance by cleaning.

Also, the top cover 502a is molded integrally with the main body frame base 501. As shown in FIG. By molding in this way, it is possible to save the number of assembly man-hours and improve the strength of the entire main body frame base unit 500 (game board accommodation frame).

The upper surface cover 502a not only protects the game board 5 housed inside on its upper surface, but also has a positioning portion (abutment surface 502j) for positioning the game board 5 in contact with the game board 5 inside. ing. As a result, the positional relationship between the game board 5 and the top cover 502a is fixed, and the purpose of the game board housing frame (body frame 4) to protect the game board 5 can be achieved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18 and the like, ribs for reinforcement are not provided on the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a, so that the ribs do not make cleaning difficult and maintenance is easy. Other members (for example, the frame 501a, the outer frame 2, etc.) may be provided to cover the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a, and ribs may be provided in areas where foreign matter does not fall.

The side reinforcing plate 509 is formed in a U-shape that is open to the right in a plan view, and is attached so as to replace the open left side of the frame 501a in the main body frame base 501. ing. The side reinforcing plate 509 is made of extruded metal such as aluminum alloy. The side reinforcing plate 509 is provided with two left position regulating members 509a separated vertically. The left position regulating member 509a is for positioning the left side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG.

The main body frame speaker 503 is attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b so as to close the main body frame speaker port 501d of the main body frame base 501 from behind. The body frame speaker 503 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low sounds.

The main body frame speaker box 504 is formed in a box shape that is open forward, and is attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b so as to cover the main body frame speaker 503 from the rear. The body-frame speaker box 504 forms an enclosure 504a for the body-frame speaker 503 by being attached to the base wall portion 501b.

The body-frame speaker box 504 includes a box body portion 504b positioned behind the body-frame speaker 503, a box extension portion 504c connected to the lower end of the box body portion 504b and extending rightward in front view, and a box body portion 504b. and a frame substrate unit shaft support portion 504d provided on the rear surface of the main body portion 504b. The box extended portion 504c of the main body frame speaker box 504 extends rightward to the vicinity of the right end of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover the rear of the bass reflex duct 501e, and a part of it extends further rearward than the box main body portion 504b. procrastinating.

The enclosure 504a is composed of a box body 504b and a box extension 504c, and communicates with the outside through a bass reflex duct 501e. In other words, the bass reflex duct 501e, the main body frame speaker 503, and the main body frame speaker box 504 constitute a phase-reversed bass reflex speaker.

Specifically, the body frame speaker 503 outputs a predetermined sound forward and backward. The sound output forward from the body frame speaker 503 is emitted forward of the pachinko machine 1 through the body frame speaker port 501 d and the speaker grill 203 .

On the other hand, the sound output from the body-frame speaker 503 to the rear vibrates the air inside the body-frame speaker box 504 (enclosure 504a). Since the enclosure 504a is opened forward (outside) by the cylindrical bass reflex duct 501e, it is discharged forward from the bass reflex duct 501e. At this time, since the bass reflex duct 501e is formed in a cylindrical shape with a predetermined length, the low frequency range is amplified by the resonance caused by the air column vibration inside it, and is emitted forward with the phase inverted. be.

As a result, the sound output to the front and the sound output to the rear from the main body frame speaker 503 do not cancel each other out and attenuate each other, but act to resonate and amplify each other. Therefore, even if the main body frame speaker 503 has a small diameter, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass, and the player can hear a sound with rich bass.

The box extension portion 504c of the main body frame speaker box 504 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is longer than the height in the vertical direction, and the rear end is provided so as to protrude slightly rearward from the rear end of the frame substrate unit 730. (see Figure 20). The box extension part 504c covers the bottom of the frame board unit 730 so that a gap is formed between it and the frame board unit 730 (the unit base 770 and the power supply board box 772) when assembled to the main body frame 4. there is As a result, the box extension portion 504c makes it difficult for various wirings connected to the frame substrate unit 730 to hang down.

As shown in FIG. 20, the box extension part 504c is inclined so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the rear. As a result, garbage, game balls B, etc. falling from above can be guided backward and discharged. In addition, the box extension portion 504c is inclined so that the lower surface becomes higher toward the rear. As a result, when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 , the box expansion portion 504 c does not come into contact with the lower frame body 14 of the body frame 4 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 20, the box extension portion 504c is inclined so that the lower surface thereof becomes higher toward the rear. Thus, when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame 4 can be guided into the outer frame 2 by the lower surface of the box extension portion 504c even if the body frame 4 is tilted.

The main body frame speaker box 504 is assembled to the main body frame 4 and supports the rear end side of the tray insertion recess 501f in the main body frame base 501 so as to be suspended. As a result, the game balls B discharged from the circulation ball path unit 600 are received by the ball receiving tray 720, and a load (the weight of the plurality of game balls B) is applied to the tray insertion recess 501f via the ball receiving tray 720 from above. ) does not deform the tray insertion recess 501f.

Further, the body-frame speaker box 504 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the body-frame speaker 503 can be confirmed from the outside.

The back cover 505 is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame base 501 so as to cover the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The back cover 505 is formed in an L shape in a plan view such that the right side of the flat plate is bent forward. The back cover 505 has two locking claws 505a vertically spaced apart at the left end, and a plurality of shafts 505b vertically aligned at the right end. The locking claw 505a is detachably locked to the cover locking portion 502l of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG. The shaft portion 505b is supported by the cover shaft support portion 502m of the body frame base 501 . As a result, the back cover 505 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The rear cover 505 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes, allowing heat from the game board 5 to escape to the outside. The back cover 505 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

When the rear cover 505 is to be closed to the main body frame unit 500 (main body frame base 501) after the frame substrate unit 730, which will be described later, is first closed to the main body frame unit 500, the closed frame substrate unit 730 is closed. It is formed so as to prevent it from being closed by interfering (abutting) with. The back cover 505 opens the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state where the back cover 505 is opened with respect to the body frame base 501. Then, it is formed so as to prevent it from interfering (abutting) with the outer frame 2 and being closed.

The game board lock member 506 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 501 (base wall portion 501b) so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 506 can prevent the lower end of the game board 5 from moving forward by rotating it to the lock position with the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion portion 502 .

The door open switch 507 is for detecting opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 . The door open switch 507 is attached to the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 below the cylinder insertion opening 501m.

A frame open switch 508 is for detecting opening and closing of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 . The frame open switch 508 is attached below the door open switch 507 on the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 .

The body frame hinge mechanism 510 has a body frame upper hinge body 511 attached to the upper left side of the body frame base 501 and a body frame lower hinge body 512 attached to the left side lower end of the body frame base 501 .

The main body frame hinge body 511 is provided adjacent to the main body frame hinge shaft 511a, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the bearing groove 31a of the outer frame hinge body 31 of the outer frame 2. A door frame upper shaft hole 511b into which the door frame upper hinge shaft 111a of the door frame upper hinge body 111 in the door frame 3 is inserted from below is provided. The main frame upper hinge body 511 has a flat plate-shaped portion extending horizontally and a portion extending downward from the rear end of the horizontally extending portion. A horizontally extending portion of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 is provided with a main body frame hinge shaft 511a and a door frame upper shaft hole 511b. In addition, the body frame upper hinge body 511 is attached to the body frame base 501 at a portion extending downward.

The main body frame lower hinge body 512 includes an outer frame shaft hole (not shown) into which the hinge shaft 35a of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below, and the door frame lower hinge body 112 of the door frame 3. and a door frame lower shaft hole 512b into which the door frame lower hinge shaft 112a is inserted from above. The main body frame lower hinge body 512 has a flat plate-shaped portion extending horizontally and a portion extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending portion. A horizontally extending portion of the main body frame lower hinge body 512 is provided with an outer frame shaft hole and a door frame lower shaft hole 512b. In addition, the body frame lower hinge body 512 is attached to the body frame base 501 at a portion extending downward. Further, the portion of the main frame lower hinge body 512 extending downward contacts the rear wall portion 45 c of the curtain plate 45 when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . As a result, the body frame 4 does not hinge backward any more.

The main body frame hinge mechanism 510 inserts the main body frame hinge shaft 511a of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 into the bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 of the outer frame 2, and inserts the body frame hinge shaft 511a of the main body frame lower hinge body 512 into the bearing groove 31a. By inserting the hinge shaft 35a of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 in the outer frame 2 into the hole, the main body frame 4 is supported to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the main body frame hinge mechanism 510 inserts the door frame upper hinge shaft 111a of the door frame upper hinge body 111 of the door frame 3 into the door frame upper shaft hole 511b of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 from below. The door frame 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge shaft 112a of the door frame lower hinge body 112 of the door frame 3 from above into the door frame lower shaft hole 512b of the lower hinge body 512. supported by

[4-2. Ball launch unit]
The ball shooting unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28 and the like. FIG. 25(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit in the body frame, and FIG. 25(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit in the body frame. FIG. 26(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball shooting unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 26(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball shooting unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 27(a) is a perspective view of the firing unit cover of the ball firing unit as seen from the rear left, and FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory view of the ball firing unit showing a cross section of only the firing unit cover when viewed from the front. FIG. 28 is a front view of the ball firing unit showing the firing subtraction sensor and firing mallet in dashed lines;

The ball shooting unit 550 is for shooting the game balls B to the game area 5a of the game board 5, and includes a ball inlet 550a for receiving the game balls B sent from the ball sending unit 700 and a game ball B that has been shot. It has a ball discharge port 550b for discharging the game balls B to the outside and a ball discharge port 550c for discharging the game balls B. The ball shooting unit 550 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 . The ball shooting unit 550 is attached to the ball shooting unit attachment part 501i provided below the opaque eaves part 501p on the upper part of the front surface of the base wall part 501b of the main body frame base 501 on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction. be done.

A ball entrance 550a of the ball launching unit 550 is provided on the rear surface, and has a square opening with a size through which one game ball B can pass. This ball inlet 550a is located in front of the ball delivery port 702 of the ball feeding unit 700 in a state assembled to the body frame 4, and communicates with the ball delivery port 702. As shown in FIG. The ball launch port 550b is opened obliquely at the left end of the upper surface so that the left end side is lower. This ball launching port 550b communicates with the top of the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570 in a state assembled to the body frame 4 . The ball outlet 550c is open on the left side. The ball discharge port 550c communicates with the lower part of the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570 when assembled to the main body frame 4 .

The ball launching unit 550 includes a flat plate-shaped unit base 551, a launching unit cover 552 attached to cover the front side of the unit base 551, and a unit so that a rotating shaft 553a protrudes forward from the unit base 551. A firing solenoid 553 attached to the rear side of the base 551, a firing subtraction sensor 554 capable of detecting the presence or absence of firing of the game ball B, a firing mallet 555 attached to the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553, and firing. A nut 556 that attaches the mallet 555 to the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553, an annular spacer 557 that is inserted into the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553, and two contact rubbers 558 that can contact the firing mallet 555. , is equipped with

A unit base 551 of the ball shooting unit 550 is made of a metal plate such as an iron plate. A ball inlet 550a is provided in the unit base 551, and penetrates squarely from the center to the upper part in a front view.

The firing unit cover 552 is formed by injection molding using transparent synthetic resin. The firing unit cover 552 includes a flat plate-like front plate 552a that is spaced forward from the unit base 551, and a portion that is directly below the ball inlet 550a of the unit base 551 on the rear side of the front plate 552a. It has a ball launch pad 552b inclined so that the left end side of the cage is higher, and a detection port 552c vertically penetrating the ball launch pad 552b.

In addition, the launching unit cover 552 forms a gap between the ball launching pad 552b on the rear side of the front plate 552a and the upper right of the ball launching pad 552b in the front view, through which the game ball B cannot pass. 552d, and a sensor lower mounting portion 552e and a sensor upper mounting portion 552f provided so as to sandwich the ball launch pad 552b and the launch pad upper wall portion 552d on the rear side of the front plate 552a.

Furthermore, the shooting unit cover 552 includes a barrier part 552g provided in the shooting direction of the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b, the upper end of which constitutes the lower end of the ball launching port 550b, and the ball on the rear side of the front plate 552a. A discharge guide wall portion 552h extending downward from the left end of the launch pad 552b and then extending downward to the left; A window portion 552i penetrating back and forth at a site, a wiring groove 552j recessed in the front surface of the front plate 552a and extending from the lower left to the upper right, and the bottom surface of the wiring groove 552j from the front end of the wiring groove 552j. and a plurality of wire locking portions 552k protruding in parallel.

A game ball B supplied through the ball inlet 550a is placed on the ball launch pad 552b. The top surface of the ball launch pad 552b is inclined so that the left end is higher in a front view. The ball launch pad 552b is recessed in a constant cross-sectional shape (trapezoidal shape) so as to narrow downward along the direction in which the upper surface is inclined. The length of the ball launching pad 552b in the direction of inclination (shooting direction) is almost the same as the diameter of the game ball B, and only one game ball B is placed so as to be in contact with the two trapezoidal recessed slopes. is formed to be In this embodiment, ball launch pad 552b is angled at an angle of about 27 degrees with respect to horizontal.

The detection port 552c is provided at the bottom of the trapezoidally recessed portion of the ball launch pad 552b. The launch pad upper wall portion 552d is provided above the inclined lower end side of the ball launch pad 552b. The launch pad upper wall portion 552d is provided so as to form a gap with the ball launch pad 552b through which the game ball B cannot pass and the tip of the launch mallet 555 can pass. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the ball launch pad 552b abuts against the left end of the upper wall portion 552d of the launch pad and is restricted from moving downstream (here, rightward) in the tilt direction of the ball launch pad 552b. It is placed on the ball launch pad 552b in the state of being folded.

When the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the center of the game ball B is located slightly to the right of the center of the ball entrance 550a. Also, the length of the ball launch pad 552b is the length on which only one game ball B can be placed. As a result, while the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the game ball B that has been launched returns, or the game ball B is thrown from the ball feeding unit 700, and another game ball Even if B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b, it is repelled by the game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b, and does not land on the ball launch pad 552b and moves toward the discharge guide wall portion 552h (foul unit 570 side). It is ejected and detected by the foul ball sensor 607 . Therefore, even if the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b and the game ball B is returned or supplied from the ball feeding unit 700, the game ball B is sent to the foul unit 570. Since the game ball B sent is added to the held ball as a foul ball, an error from the actual number of the game ball B that has been shot can be eliminated.

A light-emitting portion 554a and a light-receiving portion 554b, which constitute an emission subtraction sensor 554, are attached to the lower sensor attachment portion 552e and the upper sensor attachment portion 552f, respectively. Since the emission subtraction sensor 554 (here, the light emitting portion 554a) is attached facing upward in the lower sensor mounting portion 552e, there is a risk of false detection if dirt or dust adheres to the upper surface of the light emitting portion 554a. Since the is attached obliquely, it is difficult for dust and the like to accumulate.

The barrier part 552g is provided below the trajectory of the game ball B launched from the ball launch pad 552b at a portion away from the ball launch pad 552b to the left longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The barrier portion 552g is capable of contacting a game ball B with a weak hitting strength, and the game ball B that has hit the barrier portion 552g passes between the barrier portion 552g and the ball launch pad 552b and is discharged downward into the discharge guide wall portion 552h. It will flow upwards and will not return to the ball launch pad 552b. Further, since the barrier portion 552g extends vertically, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from entering from the foul unit 570 side.

The discharge guide wall portion 552h forms a ball discharge port 550c with the barrier portion 552g. The discharge guide wall portion 552h is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and guides the game ball B that has flowed down through the space between the ball launch pad 552b and the barrier portion 552g to the left, and the ball discharge at the left end. It can be discharged from the exit 550c to the foul unit 570 side. As a result, the game ball B, which was hit by the launching mallet 555 on the ball launch pad 552b but was not launched from the ball launch port 550b, is guided by the ejection guide wall portion 552h and fouled from the ball ejection port 550c. It is discharged to unit 570 .

The window portion 552i is provided at a portion between the ball launch pad 552b and the lower sensor mounting portion 552e and at a portion in front of the tip of the launching mallet 555 at the retracted position away from the hitting position. Since the emission subtraction sensor 554 (here, the light emitting portion 554a) is attached to the lower sensor mounting portion 552e facing upward, dirt and dust tend to accumulate on the upper surface of the light emitting portion 554a. Although there is a risk of detection, the upper surface of the light emitting part 554a can be easily cleaned by inserting a cleaning tool such as a cotton swab through the window part 552i between the ball launch pad 552b and the lower sensor mounting part 552e. can be done.

In addition, since the tip of the shooting mallet 555 contacts the game ball B, if dust or the like adheres to the tip of the shooting mallet 555, it may not be possible to shoot the game ball B satisfactorily. As shown in FIG. 28, since a window portion 552i is provided in front of the tip of the firing mallet 555 at the standby position, the tip of the firing mallet 555 can be easily moved by inserting a cleaning tool such as a cotton swab through the window portion 552i. can be cleaned to

The firing solenoid 553 is composed of a rotary solenoid having a rotating shaft 553a extending back and forth. Although the details will be described later, the firing solenoid 553 performs a series of hardware operations based on a predetermined firing sequence in association with the ball feed solenoid 706, which will be described later.

The launch subtraction sensor 554 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b. The firing subtraction sensor 554 is composed of a light emitting portion 554a that emits detection light and a light receiving portion 554b that receives the detection light. and can be mounted on. The detection light emitted from the light-emitting portion 554a passes through a detection port 552c provided at the bottom of the ball launch pad 552b and is received by the light-receiving portion 554b. At this time, if the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the detection light is blocked by the game ball B, and the detection light is not received by the light receiving portion 554b. Thereby, the presence or absence of the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b can be detected.

The launch subtraction sensor 554, which will be described later in detail, detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, and subtracts one from the number of balls possessed by the player.

In this embodiment, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted based on the OFF determination of the launch subtraction sensor 554. One-to-one reliability is required for launch. By the way, in the normal passing judgment for the game ball B, the light from the light emitting part in the light receiving part is detected, detected, detected (so-called "011") at predetermined time intervals (for example, the interrupt period is 4 ms). is switched from OFF to ON (from non-existence of game ball B to presence). There is concern about false detections other than the launch ball due to the tip of the.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, focusing on the fact that the game ball B is stationary on the ball launch pad 552b, it is first determined whether or not there is a game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b. When B runs out, it is determined that the shot has been fired. That is, ON (there is a game ball) is determined, and then OFF (there is no game ball = shooting). Specifically, a threshold for recognizing ON and OFF (for example, an ON threshold of 80 ms and an OFF threshold of 80 ms) is provided, and when the ON threshold is exceeded, it is first determined that "game balls are present", and then OFF. exceeds the threshold value, it is recognized that the game ball B has been shot ("no game ball"), and the number of possessed balls is subtracted. As a result, chattering of the game ball and malfunction due to noise can be prevented. It should be noted that the above threshold is desirably an integer multiple of the interrupt period (eg, 4 ms).

The shooting mallet 555 is for hitting and shooting the game ball B. The firing mallet 555 is attached to the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553 and rotates (pivots) together with the rotating shaft 553a. The tip of the launching mallet 555 passes between the ball launching platform 552b and the launching platform upper wall portion 552d, and is provided so as to be able to abut against the game ball B placed on the ball launching platform 552b.

By the way, in the mass production of the ball shooting unit 550, in order to secure the shooting accuracy of the game ball B, the insertion angle of the tip of the shooting mallet 555, the mounting angle of the ball launching pad 552b (shooting rail), and the ball shooting unit 550 It was necessary to adjust the position of the tip of the launching mallet 555 after assembly, etc. with severe values, and the difficulty of mass production was high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the method of determining the firing accuracy is based on the hit of the game ball B to the conventional firing rail and the shape of the firing rail, and only the contact between the firing mallet 555 and the game ball B is determined. changed to guarantee In this change, the accuracy of the tip of the firing mallet 555 is more important than the accuracy of the tip of the firing mallet 555 alone. contact area is made larger than before. As a result, it is possible to secure the stability of the shooting accuracy, allow some assembly error, and mass-produce the ball shooting unit 550 .

The nut 556 is screwed onto the rotating shaft 553 a of the firing solenoid 553 . The spacer 557 is into which the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553 is inserted. The rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553 is inserted through the spacer 557 and the firing mallet 555 in this order from the rear, and the firing mallet 555 is attached by screwing a nut 556 onto the tip projecting forward from the firing mallet 555 and tightening it. be done.

The rubber 558 is attached to the unit base 551 so as to restrict the range of rotation of the firing mallet 555 .

According to the ball launching unit 550 of this embodiment, only one game ball B is placed on the ball launching platform 552b, and the game ball B is launched from the ball launching platform 552b by the launch subtraction sensor 554. Since it is designed to detect that the game ball B is shot, it is possible to reliably detect the shooting of the game balls B one by one.

Further, according to the ball shooting unit 550, since the shooting unit cover 552 is made of transparent synthetic resin, the inside of the ball shooting unit 550 can be checked from the front by opening the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4. can do. Since the firing unit cover 552 is transparent, there is a risk that light will enter the interior and cause an erroneous detection in the firing subtraction sensor 554 consisting of a photo sensor. In this state, light from the front is blocked by the door frame 3, light from the rear is blocked by the unit base 551 made of a metal plate, and light from above is blocked by the eaves 501p of the body frame base 501, which is black and opaque. Since it is shielded, light does not enter the interior, and erroneous detection due to light in the emission subtraction sensor 554 is prevented.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 (circulating game machine) disclosed in the present embodiment is designed to subtract the number of held balls for the first time after completion of shooting. For this reason, compared to the method of subtracting the ball with the ball feed as a trigger before launching, which was adopted in the conventional circulation type game machine, when the game is settled, the game ball B left on the launching rail without being fired. (Possessed ball subtracted) is automatically blank-hit to be a foul ball to be returned to the player, and there is no need to add the held ball to make sense, and quick settlement processing can be performed.

Furthermore, according to the ball launching unit 550, since the launch subtraction sensor 554 is attached obliquely, it is possible to make it difficult for dirt, dust, etc., to get on the detection surface of the launch subtraction sensor 554. Even if dust adheres, the detection surface can be easily cleaned by inserting a cleaning tool such as a cotton swab from the window 552i of the firing unit cover 552, and erroneous detection (malfunction) due to adhesion of dust or the like can be easily prevented. can be resolved.

In addition, according to the ball shooting unit 550, since the window 552i is also provided at the site where the tip of the firing mallet 555 can be cleaned, by inserting a cleaning tool through the window 552i of the site, the firing mallet 555 The tip of the ball B can be easily cleaned, and unevenness in the shooting of the game ball B due to adhesion of dust or the like can be eliminated.

[4-3. foul unit]
The foul unit 570 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. FIG. 29(a) is a front perspective view of the foul unit in the body frame, and FIG. 29(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul unit in the body frame. FIG. 30(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 30(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 31(a) is a side cross-sectional view of the foul unit with the foul shutter closed, and FIG. 31(b) is a side cross-sectional view of the foul unit with the foul shutter open.

The foul unit 570 is a game ball B and the ball shooting unit 550 which were shot by the ball shooting unit 550 and struck between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 but were not shot into the game area 5a. This is for recovering game balls B, etc., which have been shot but have not reached the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) due to too weak firing strength. The foul unit 570 communicates with the foul upper opening 570a that opens on the upper surface, the foul right opening 570b that opens on the right side, and the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b. and a foul ball outlet 570c opening rearwardly.

The foul unit 570 is attached to a foul unit attachment portion 501h provided in the middle portion in the left-right direction of the front upper portion of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 . When the foul unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upper end of the foul unit 570 is approximately the same height as the upper end of the base wall portion 501b. is closed by That is, in the state assembled to the body frame 4, the foul right opening 570b communicates with the ball launch port 550b and the ball discharge port 550c. The upper foul opening 570a and the right foul opening 570b are formed by a unit base 572 and a front cover 573, which will be described later.

The foul unit 570 includes a foul shutter 571 capable of opening and closing the upper foul opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through, a unit base 572 attached to the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a unit base 572 attached to the front side of the unit base 572. The attached front cover 573, the rear cover 574 attached to the rear side of the unit base 572 so as to cover the rear part of the foul shutter 571, and the spring 575 biasing the foul shutter 571 forward. I have.

The foul shutter 571 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the unit base 572 and the front cover 573 working together. The foul shutter 571 includes a strip-shaped shutter portion 571a that is elongated in the left and right direction, two forward projecting portions 571b projecting forward from both the left and right ends of the shutter portion 571a, and downward extensions from the rear end sides of the shutter portion 571a. and a projecting flat rear wall portion 571c.

The foul shutter 571 can close the foul upper opening 570a by the shutter part 571a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. The two forward protrusions 571b are provided so that the front ends thereof protrude further forward than the front cover 573, and are provided so that the rear surface of the door frame main body 100 of the door frame 3 can come into contact therewith. The front end of the spring 575 contacts the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571c.

The unit base 572 is formed in an L shape that is long in the left-right direction and has a portion that extends downward near the right end. The unit base 572 has a shutter housing portion 572a extending left and right along the upper side and recessed rearward, and a right end extending downward under the shutter housing portion 572a. A sphere guiding portion 572b recessed toward the rear, a tubular portion 572c extending rearward in a square tube shape from the lower end of the sphere guiding portion 572b, and a flat plate extending forward from the lower end of the sphere guiding portion 572b. and a receiving portion 572d.

A shutter accommodating portion 572a of the unit base 572 accommodates the foul shutter 571 and the spring 575 from the front. The portion of the unit base 572 extending to the left and right of the ball guiding portion 572b is inclined downward to the right. A cylindrical portion 572c of the unit base 572 is inclined to be lowered rearward, and an opening at the rear end is a foul ball outlet 570c.

The receiving portion 572d of the unit base 572 is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The right edge of the receiving portion 572d constitutes the lower edge of the foul right opening 570b. The right edge of the receiving portion 572d constitutes the lower edge of the foul right opening 570b, and the lower portion including the lower end of the foul right opening 570b communicates with the ball outlet 550c of the ball launching unit 550. The game ball B, which falls from the ball launch pad 552b and is discharged from the ball discharge port 550c and passed through the foul right opening 570b, flows down onto the receiving portion 572d and is guided backward by the receiving portion 572d. , through the cylindrical portion 572c and discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c. In addition, when the foul shutter 571 is closed, the game ball B that is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 and hits the rear surface (lower surface) of the foul shutter 571 through the foul right opening 570b is pushed to the lower wall of the front cover 573. The ball is sent to the rear ball guiding portion 572b by the portion 573c, passes behind the receiving portion 572d, and is discharged from the foul ball outlet 570c via the tubular portion 572c.

In addition, the unit base 572 has a notch portion 572e recessed from the front near the right end of the bottom wall of the portion of the ball guiding portion 572b extending left and right. The notch portion 572e is formed in a size that does not hinder the circulation of the game ball B, and can downwardly discharge dust or the like that has entered the ball guide portion 572b from the upper foul opening portion 570a.

The front cover 573 has an L-shaped flat plate-like front plate 573a that is long in the left-right direction and has a portion that extends downward near the right end, and a left wall portion 573b that extends rearward from the left edge of the front plate 573a. , a lower wall portion 573c extending rearward from the lower end of the left wall portion 573b along the lower edge of the front plate 573a, and a lower wall portion 573c extending rearward from the right end of the lower wall portion 573c downwardly of the front plate 573a. A hanging wall portion 573d extending downward along the left edge of the extending portion and extending rearward, and a right wall portion 573f extending rearward from the upper right end of the front plate 573a. I have.

The upper edge and the right edge of the front plate 573a form the front edges of the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b. The right edge of the upper end of the left wall portion 573b constitutes the left edge of the upper opening 570a, and the left edge of the upper end of the right wall portion 573f constitutes the right edge of the upper opening 570a. The lower edge of the right wall portion 573f constitutes the upper edge of the foul right opening 570b.

The front cover 573 has a lower wall portion 573c positioned below the foul upper opening 570a. A lower wall portion 573c of the front cover 573 is gently slanted to the left and slanted to the rear. As a result, the impact of the game ball B dropped from above as a foul ball is not directly received, and the impact is released while the game ball B is delivered to the ball guide portion 572b of the unit base 572 provided behind. be able to. Then, the game ball B delivered to the ball guiding portion 572b passes through the cylindrical portion 572c from the lower end of the right end of the ball guiding portion 572b and is discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c.

Two springs 575 are provided with a space in the left and right, and are arranged inside a box-shaped shutter accommodating portion 572 a in the unit base 572 . The spring 575 has a front end in contact with the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571c of the foul shutter 571 and a rear end in contact with the front surface of the rear wall of the shutter accommodating portion 572a. A spring 575 biases the foul shutter 571 forward.

The foul unit 570 is attached to a foul unit attachment portion 501h provided near the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the base wall portion 501b of the body frame 4 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this state, the ball launching unit 550 is mounted adjacent to the right side of the foul unit 570 .

As shown in FIG. 21, the foul upper opening 570a of the foul unit 570 is located near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b and is located on the axis of the ball shooting unit 550 in the shooting direction of the game ball B. are doing. In other words, the upper foul opening 570a is provided at a portion between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and the ball launching port 550b of the ball launching unit 550. .

On the other hand, the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570 communicates with the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550 at its upper portion and with the ball discharge port 550c of the ball launch unit 550 at its lower portion. Therefore, a foul top opening 570a and a foul right opening are provided between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and the ball launching port 550b of the ball launching unit 550. 570b are provided. As a result, the game ball B launched from the ball launching port 550b of the ball launching unit 550 enters the foul unit 570 through the foul right opening 570b, passes through the foul upper opening 570a, and exits the game board 5. It will enter between the rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 .

In the foul unit 570 of this embodiment, when the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the body frame 4, as shown in FIG. A shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 protrudes between the front surface of the unit base 572 and the front plate 573a of the front cover 573 to close the upper foul opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. That is, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position. In this state, the stepped portion of the foul shutter 571 provided at the rear end of the forward projecting portion 571b is in contact with the front cover 573 and does not slide forward any further.

When the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 while the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position, the shot game ball B enters the foul unit 570 through the foul right opening 570b and then hits the foul shutter. 571, and flows down inside the foul unit 570 without being shot upward through the foul upper opening 570a. The game ball B flowing down inside the foul unit 570 is guided by the lower wall portion 573c, the ball guide portion 572b, the cylindrical portion 572c, etc., and supplied to the circulation ball path unit 600 from the foul ball outlet 570c on the rear side. As a result, even if the game ball B is shot while the door frame 3 is open, the game ball B will not leak outside from the foul unit 570.例文帳に追加

When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the door open switch 507 is turned off. Therefore, when the door open switch 507 is turned off, the shooting of the game ball B from the ball shooting unit 550 may be stopped. . Alternatively, when the door frame 3 is opened, the game may be temporarily stopped by the main control board 1310 instead of stopping the shooting of the game ball B, and when the door frame 3 is closed, the game may be resumed.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 (the frame opening switch 508 is OFF), the door frame 3 is closed and the game ball B does not leak outside. It is also possible not to stop the shooting of the game ball B. Alternatively, when the body frame 4 is opened, the same process as when the door frame 3 is opened may be performed.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 abuts against the front ends of the two forward protruding portions 571b of the foul shutter 571, and the foul shutter 571 is closed against the biasing force of the spring 575. slides backward (see FIG. 34(b)). In this state, the shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 is located behind the front surface of the unit base 572, and the upper foul opening portion 570a is opened so that the game ball B can pass therethrough. That is, the false shutter 571 is in the open position.

When the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 while the foul shutter 571 is in the open position, the shot game ball B enters the foul unit 570 through the foul right opening 570b, and then hits the foul. Through the opening 570a, it is launched upward toward the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Then, when the launched game ball B crosses over the backflow prevention member 1007 provided at the upper end of the inner rail 1002, the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that the game ball B that was shot from the ball shooting unit 550 but did not go over the backflow preventing member 1007 at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B that was not hit into the game area) is separated from the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 , enters through the upper foul opening 570 a as a foul ball, and is collected by the foul unit 570 . The game ball B collected through the upper foul opening 570a is guided by the lower wall portion 573c, the ball guide portion 572b, the cylindrical portion 572c, etc., and is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 from the foul ball outlet 570c on the rear side. Discharged (supplied).

Also, in the foul unit 570, the game ball B ejected from the ball ejection port 550c of the ball ejection unit 550 is received at the lower part of the foul right opening 570b. A game ball B that has entered the foul unit 570 from the bottom of the foul right opening 570b flows down onto the receiving portion 572d, is guided backward by the inclination of the receiving portion 572d, and travels from the foul ball exit 570c to the circulation ball path unit 600. Ejected.

In this way, according to the foul unit 570, the game balls B that have not been hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 in spite of being shot from the ball shooting unit 550 are collected without leaking to the outside, and the circulating balls are collected. It can be fed to routing unit 600 . In the circulating ball path unit 600, the game ball B supplied from the foul ball outlet 570c is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, details of which will be described later. When the game ball B is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, the number of balls possessed by the player is incremented by one.

Further, in the foul unit 570, the unit base 572, the front cover 573, and the like are made of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside can be seen from the outside, making it easy to find ball clogging inside.

[4-3a. Foul unit of the second embodiment]
Next, the foul unit 570A of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. FIG. FIG. 32(a) is a front perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment, and FIG. 32(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment. 33(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment and viewed from the rear. be. FIG. 34(a) is an explanatory view showing a closed state of the foul shutter in a side cross section of the foul unit of the second embodiment, and FIG. 34(b) is a side cross section of the foul unit of the second embodiment with the foul shutter open. It is an explanatory view showing a state.

The foul unit 570A is a game ball B and the ball shooting unit 550 which were shot by the ball shooting unit 550 and struck between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 but were not shot into the game area 5a. This is for recovering game balls B, etc., which have been shot but have not reached the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) due to too weak firing intensity. The foul unit 570A communicates with the foul upper opening 570a that opens on the upper surface, the foul right opening 570b that opens on the right side, and the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b. and a foul ball outlet 570c opening rearwardly.

The foul unit 570A is attached to a foul unit attachment portion 501h provided in the middle portion in the left-right direction of the front upper portion of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. As shown in FIG. When the foul unit 570A is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the foul unit 570A is approximately the same height as the upper end of the base wall portion 501b. is closed by That is, in the state assembled to the body frame 4, the foul right opening 570b communicates with the ball launch port 550b and the ball discharge port 550c. The upper foul opening 570a and the right foul opening 570b are formed by a unit base 572 and a front cover 573, which will be described later.

The foul unit 570A includes a foul shutter 571 capable of opening and closing the upper foul opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through, a unit base 572 attached to the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501, and A front cover 573 attached, a rear cover 574 attached to the rear side of the unit base 572 so as to cover the rear portion of the foul shutter 571, a spring 575 biasing the foul shutter 571 forward, and the unit and a foul ball ground sheet metal 576 provided between the base 572 and the front cover 573 .

The foul shutter 571 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the unit base 572 and the front cover 573 working together. The foul shutter 571 includes a strip-shaped shutter portion 571a that is elongated in the left and right direction, two forward projecting portions 571b projecting forward from both the left and right ends of the shutter portion 571a, and downward extensions from the rear end sides of the shutter portion 571a. and a projecting flat rear wall portion 571c.

The foul shutter 571 can close the foul upper opening 570a by the shutter part 571a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. The two forward protrusions 571b are provided so that the front ends thereof protrude further forward than the front cover 573, and are provided so that the rear surface of the door frame main body 100 of the door frame 3 can come into contact therewith. The front end of the spring 575 contacts the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571c.

The unit base 572 includes a flat T-shaped main body portion 572f that is long in the left and right direction and has a portion that extends downward near the right end, and a main body portion 572f that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the upper end of the main body portion 572f and extends in the left and right directions. and a plurality of rear support openings 572h that are provided along the lower edge on the left side of the downwardly extending portion of the main body portion 572f and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. ing.

The unit base 572 is provided with a foul ball outlet 570c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in the shape of a rectangular tube near the lower end of the downwardly extending portion of the main body portion 572f. The tubular foul ball outlet 570c is slanted downwards to the rear.

The body portion 572f is inclined such that the lower edge of the portion on the left side of the portion extending downward is lower rightward. The shutter insertion opening 572g is provided in such a size that the shutter portion 571a and the front projecting portion 571b of the foul shutter 571 can be inserted. The plurality of rear support openings 572h are elongated in the left and right direction so as to be lower rightward, and are arranged along the inclined lower edge of the main body portion 572f. The rear support opening 572h is provided so that the support piece 576a of the foul ball ground sheet metal 576 is inserted with a gap therebetween.

The front cover 573 has a flat plate-like front plate 573a that is long in the left-right direction and has a part that extends downward near the right end, and a left wall portion 573b that extends rearward from the left edge of the front plate 573a. , a lower wall portion 573c extending rearward from the lower end of the left wall portion 573b along the lower edge of the front plate 573a, and a lower wall portion 573c extending rearward from the right end of the lower wall portion 573c. A hanging wall portion 573d that extends downward along the left edge of the portion that extends to the front and extends rearward, and a portion of the front plate 573a that extends downward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 573d. It has a bottom wall portion 573e extending to the right along the lower edge and extending to the rear, and a right wall portion 573f extending to the rear from the upper right end of the front plate 573a.

The upper edge and the right edge of the front plate 573a form the front edges of the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b. The right edge of the upper end of the left wall portion 573b constitutes the left edge of the upper opening 570a, and the left edge of the upper end of the right wall portion 573f constitutes the right edge of the upper opening 570a. The lower edge of the right wall portion 573f forms the upper edge of the foul right opening 570b, and the right edge of the bottom wall portion 573e forms the lower edge of the foul right opening 570b.

The front cover 573 has a lower wall portion 573c positioned below the upper foul opening 570a, and guides the game ball B that has flowed down through the upper foul opening 570a to the right. It can flow down onto the bottom wall portion 573e. The bottom wall portion 573e is slanted so that the portion in front of the foul ball outlet 570c is lowered rearward, and the portion on the right side of this portion is slanted so that it is raised rightward. Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed down to the bottom wall portion 573e is guided rearward and discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c. In addition, since the right edge of the bottom wall portion 573e constitutes the lower edge of the foul right opening portion 570b, the game ball B entering from the foul right opening portion 570b flows down onto the bottom wall portion 573e. , is guided by the bottom wall portion 573e and discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c.

In addition, the front cover 573 has a plurality of front support openings 573g that are arranged in rows on the left and right sides of the front plate 573a along the lower wall portion 573c and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. The plurality of front support openings 573g are provided so as to face the rear support openings 572h of the unit base 572. As shown in FIG. Further, the front support opening 573g is provided so that the support piece 576a of the foul ball ground sheet metal 576 is inserted with a gap therebetween.

The rear cover 574 is formed in a box shape with an open front. Inside the rear cover 574, the rear part of the foul shutter 571 is inserted and a spring 575 is arranged. The rear end of the spring 575 contacts the front surface of the rear wall of the rear cover 574 .

Two springs 575 are provided in a left-right direction and are arranged inside the box-shaped rear cover 574 . The spring 575 has a front end in contact with the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571 c of the foul shutter 571 and a rear end in contact with the front surface of the rear wall of the rear cover 574 . A spring 575 biases the foul shutter 571 forward.

The foul ball ground metal plate 576 is formed of a metal plate such as an iron plate, and is finally connected to the ground of the game hall via a ground wire (not shown). The foul ball ground sheet metal 576 is formed in a strip shape elongated in the left and right direction, and a plurality of support pieces 576a extend outward from the front and rear long sides. The foul ball ground sheet metal 576 is placed on the upper surface of the lower wall portion 573c of the front cover 573, and the plurality of support pieces 576a are connected to the rear support opening 572h of the unit base 572 and the front support opening 573g of the front cover 573. , with play.

As a result, the game ball B, which has flowed down toward the lower wall portion 573c through the upper foul opening 570a, is guided to the right in a state where the static electricity charged in contact with the foul ball ground sheet metal 576 is removed. . At this time, since the support piece 576a is loosely fitted in the rear support port 572h and the front support port 573g, the contact of the game ball B vibrates the foul ball grounding plate 576, and the vibration causes the foul ball grounding plate 576 to vibrate. Dust and debris on 576 are discharged to the outside through gaps between the loosely fitted rear support opening 572h and front support opening 573g. In addition, this foul ball earth sheet metal 576 also serves as a reinforcement against the falling game ball B.

The foul unit 570A is attached to a foul unit attachment portion 501h provided near the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame 4 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this state, the ball launching unit 550 is mounted adjacent to the right side of the foul unit 570A.

As with the foul unit 570 of the first embodiment, the foul upper opening 570a of the foul unit 570A is located near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b, and the ball shooting unit 550 shoots the game ball B in the shooting direction. located on the axis of In other words, the upper foul opening 570a is provided at a portion between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and the ball launching port 550b of the ball launching unit 550. .

On the other hand, the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570A communicates with the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550 at its upper portion and with the ball discharge port 550c of the ball launch unit 550 at its lower portion. Therefore, a foul top opening 570a and a foul right opening are provided between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and the ball launching port 550b of the ball launching unit 550. 570b are provided. As a result, the game ball B launched from the ball launching port 550b of the ball launching unit 550 enters the foul unit 570A through the foul right opening 570b, passes through the foul upper opening 570a, and exits the game board 5. It will enter between the rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 .

In the foul unit 570A of this embodiment, when the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the body frame 4, as shown in FIG. A shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 protrudes between the front surface of the unit base 572 and the front plate 573a of the front cover 573 to close the upper foul opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. That is, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position. In this state, the rear wall portion 571c of the foul shutter 571 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 572f of the unit base 572 and will not slide forward any more.

When the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 while the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position, the shot game ball B enters the foul unit 570A through the foul right opening 570b and then hits the foul shutter. The ball 571 comes into contact with the lower surface of the shutter portion 571a of the ball 571, and flows down through the foul unit 570A without being shot upward through the foul upper opening 570a. The game ball B flowing down inside the foul unit 570A is guided by the lower wall portion 573c (foul ball ground sheet metal 576), the hanging wall portion 573d, the bottom wall portion 573e, etc., and is circulated from the foul ball outlet 570c on the rear side. It is supplied to routing unit 600 . As a result, even if the game ball B is shot while the door frame 3 is open, the game ball B will not leak outside from the foul unit 570A.

When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the door open switch 507 is turned off. Therefore, when the door open switch 507 is turned off, the shooting of the game ball B from the ball shooting unit 550 may be stopped. . Alternatively, when the door frame 3 is opened, the game may be temporarily stopped by the main control board 1310 instead of stopping the shooting of the game ball B, and when the door frame 3 is closed, the game may be resumed.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 (the frame opening switch 508 is OFF), the door frame 3 is closed and the game ball B does not leak outside. It is also possible not to stop the shooting of the game ball B. Alternatively, when the body frame 4 is opened, the same process as when the door frame 3 is opened may be performed.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 abuts against the front ends of the two forward protruding portions 571b of the foul shutter 571, and the foul shutter 571 is closed against the biasing force of the spring 575. slides backward (see FIG. 34(b)). In this state, the shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 is located behind the front surface of the unit base 572, and the upper foul opening portion 570a is opened so that the game ball B can pass therethrough. That is, the false shutter 571 is in the open position.

When the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 while the foul shutter 571 is in the open position, the shot game ball B enters the foul unit 570A through the foul right opening 570b and then hits the foul. Through the opening 570a, it is launched upward toward the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Then, when the launched game ball B crosses over the backflow prevention member 1007 provided at the upper end of the inner rail 1002, the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that the game ball B that was shot from the ball shooting unit 550 but did not go over the backflow preventing member 1007 at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B that was not hit into the game area) is separated from the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, enters the foul upper opening 570a as a foul ball, and is collected by the foul unit 570A. The game ball B collected through the upper foul opening 570a flows down onto the foul ball ground metal plate 576 placed on the upper surface of the lower wall portion 573c, and the foul ball ground metal plate 576 removes static electricity. At this time, since the foul ball grounding sheet metal 576 is loosely fitted, it vibrates when the game ball B comes into contact with it, and the vibration causes dust and dirt on the foul ball grounding sheet metal 576 to move to the rear support opening 572h and the front support. It is discharged out of the foul unit 570A through the mouth 573g.

The game ball B, which has flowed down onto the foul ball ground sheet metal 576 (lower wall portion 573c), is guided to the right by its inclination, flows down along the hanging wall portion 573d onto the bottom wall portion 573e, and reaches the bottom wall portion 573e. The ball is guided backward by the inclination and discharged from the foul ball outlet 570c to the circulating ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

In addition, in the foul unit 570A, the game ball B ejected from the ball ejection port 550c of the ball ejection unit 550 is received at the lower part of the foul right opening 570b. A game ball B that has entered the foul unit 570A from the lower part of the foul right opening 570b flows down onto the bottom wall 573e, is guided backward by the inclination of the bottom wall 573e, and passes through the foul ball exit 570c to the circulating ball path unit. 600 is discharged.

In this way, according to the foul unit 570A, the game balls B that have not been hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 in spite of being shot from the ball shooting unit 550 are collected without leaking to the outside, and the circulating balls are collected. It can be fed to routing unit 600 . In the circulating ball path unit 600, the game ball B supplied from the foul ball outlet 570c is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, details of which will be described later. When the game ball B is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, the number of balls possessed by the player is incremented by one.

In the foul unit 570A, since the unit base 572, the front cover 573, the rear cover 574, etc. are made of transparent synthetic resin, the inside can be visually recognized from the outside, and clogged balls can be found inside. easy.

[4-3b. Foul unit of the third embodiment]
Next, the foul unit 570 of the third embodiment will be described. A foul unit 570 of the third embodiment differs only in the opening/closing mechanism of a foul shutter 571, and the rest of the configuration is the same as that of the foul unit 570 described above. Although not shown, the foul unit 570 of the third embodiment is provided with an electric actuator such as a motor or a solenoid for opening and closing the foul shutter 571 .

In this embodiment, when the door open switch 507 is turned off by opening the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, the foul shutter 571 is slid to the closed position by the electric actuator. As a result, even if the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 while the door frame 3 is opened, the game ball B will not jump out from the upper foul opening 570a.

When the door frame 3 is closed and the door open switch 507 is turned on, the foul shutter 571 is slid to the open position by the electric actuator, and the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 is released through the upper foul opening 570a. It becomes possible to pass through and drive to the game board 5 side.

Even when the frame open switch 508 is turned off by opening the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the false shutter 571 may be slid to the closed position by the electric actuator. In this case, if the opening/closing processing of the false shutter 571 by the frame opening switch 508 is the same as the opening/closing processing by the door opening switch 507, the software configuration can be simplified.

Further, an open switch (not shown) that can detect both the opening of the door frame 3 and the opening of the body frame 4 may be provided, and the false shutter 571 may be opened and closed by an electric actuator. You can make it simple.

[4-4. Circulation ball path unit]
The circulating ball path unit 600 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42 and the like. FIG. 35(a) is a front perspective view of the circulation ball path unit in the body frame, and FIG. 35(b) is a rear perspective view of the circulation ball path unit in the body frame. FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the circulation ball path unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of the circulation ball path unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 38(a) is a plan view showing only the meandering ball member and the ball-removing shutter in the circulation ball path unit, and (b) is a perspective view from the front showing only the meandering ball member and the ball-removing shutter in the circulation ball path unit. It is a diagram. FIG. 39(a1) is an explanatory view showing a side sectional view of the ball retracting shutter and the meandering member in the closed position together with the ball receiving tray, and (a2) is an explanatory view showing only the portion of the ball retracting shutter in (a1) from the bottom. (b1) is an explanatory view showing a side cross section of the ball retracting shutter in the open position and the meandering ball member together with the ball receiving tray, and (b2) is an explanation showing only the portion of the ball retracting shutter in (b1) from the bottom. It is a diagram.

Also, FIG. 40(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a front cross section of the circulation ball path unit cut at the out ball sensor site, and (b) is a front view of the circulation ball path unit cut at the safe ball sensor site. It is explanatory drawing shown in a cross section. FIG. 41(a) is a front perspective view showing an enlarged lower part of the body frame together with the outer frame with the meandering cover of the circulation ball path unit removed, and (b) is a meandering cover of the circulation ball path unit. FIG. 10 is a rear perspective view showing an enlarged lower portion of the main body frame together with the outer frame with the cover removed; FIG. 42 is a plan view showing meandering sphere members, meandering covers, ball removal shutters, and gauges in the circulation ball path unit.

The circulating ball path unit 600 stores a plurality of game balls B discharged from the game board 5 and game balls B recovered by the foul unit 570 , and moves the stored game balls B through the ball lifting unit 650 . It is for sending to the ball launching unit 550 side via. The circulation ball path unit 600 is attached to a circulation ball path unit attachment portion 501l provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

The circulation ball path unit 600 has an out ball socket 600a that is long in the left and right direction and opens upward, and a safe ball socket that is provided in the rear of the out ball socket 600a and is long in the left and right direction and opens upward. 600b, a foul ball receiving port 600c that is open on the front, and a ball discharge port 600d that is open toward the right near the lower end. The out ball socket 600a and the safe ball socket 600b are formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B, and a plurality of game balls B can pass through in the left-right direction. The foul ball receptacle 600c and the ball discharge port 600d are formed to have sizes through which the game balls B can pass one by one.

A game ball B (out ball) received in the out port of the game board 5 is received in the out ball receiving port 600a. A game ball B (safe ball) received in a winning opening such as a general winning opening, a starting opening, a big winning opening, or the like of the game board 5 is received in the safe ball receiving opening 600b. A game ball B (foul ball) ejected from the foul ball outlet 570c of the foul unit 570 is received in the foul ball receptacle 600c. The ball discharge port 600d discharges the game balls B received and stored inside the out ball receiving port 600a, the safe ball receiving port 600b, and the foul ball receiving port 600c, and delivers them to the ball lifting unit 650. be.

In addition, the circulation ball path unit 600 includes an out ball passage 601 through which the game balls B received by the out ball receiving port 600a circulate, and a safe ball passage 602 through which the game balls B received by the safe ball receiving port 600b circulate. , the foul ball passage 603 through which the game ball B received by the foul ball socket 600c flows, the out ball passage 601, the safe ball passage 602, and the foul ball passage 603, respectively. and a ball storage passage 604, which is a ball discharge port 600d.

Furthermore, the circulating ball path unit 600 includes an out ball sensor 605 for detecting game balls B (out balls) circulating in the out ball path 601 one by one, and game balls B (out balls) circulating in the safe ball path 602 ( Safe ball sensors 606 for detecting safe balls one by one, and foul ball sensors 607 for detecting game balls B (foul balls) circulating in the foul ball passage 603 one by one. The safe ball sensor 606 has the meaning of an all winning hole sensor in a conventional pachinko machine, and can be used to determine fraudulent winning by comparing with the total number of winnings of all winning holes.

The circulating ball path unit 600 includes a flat ball receiving front plate 610, a ball receiving front member 611 attached to the rear side of the ball receiving front plate 610, and attached to the rear side of the ball receiving front member 611. A ball receiving rear member 612 is provided. A ball storage passage 604 is provided below the ball receiving front plate 610 , the ball receiving front member 611 and the ball receiving rear member 612 .

The circulating ball path unit 600 also includes meandering ball members 613 which are provided below the front ball receiving plate 610, the front ball receiving member 611, and the rear ball receiving member 612 and open upward, and the meandering ball members 613 A meandering cover 614 covering the upper side of the ball receiving member 613, a ball removing shutter 615 for discharging the game ball B from the meandering ball member 613, a magnet 616 attached to the ball removing shutter 615, and the ball receiving front member 611. A circulating ball path relay board 617 attached to the side and a gauge portion 620 provided on the meandering cover 614 are provided.

The ball receiving front plate 610 extends left and right, and is provided with a foul ball receiving opening 600c penetrating back and forth near the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction.

The ball receiving front member 611 cooperates with the ball receiving front plate 610 on the upper surface to form an out ball socket 600a. An out-ball passage 601 and a foul-ball passage 603 are formed in the front ball receiving member 611 so as to open forward, and the front side thereof is closed by attaching the front plate 610 to the ball receiving portion. The out ball passage 601 has its downstream end opened downward at the lower left end of the front ball receiving member 611 . The downstream end opening of the out ball passage 601 is located in front of the downstream end opening of the safe ball passage 602 . The downstream end of the foul ball passage 603 opens downward at a lower right portion than the downstream end of the out ball passage 601 in the front ball receiving member 611 .

The ball receiving front member 611 is formed by an out ball receiving plate upper portion 611a that slopes down rightward from the middle of the vertical wall forming the left edge of the out ball receiving opening 600a to near the center in the left-right direction. , the vertical wall forming the right edge of the out-ball socket 600a is lowered leftward from the part below the out-ball receiving plate upper part 611a to near the bottom of the left edge of the out-ball socket 600a. and a crank portion 611c extending in a crank shape from the left end of the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b toward the lower left with a width that allows the game balls B to circulate in a row, have.

The height between the right end of the upper out ball receiving plate portion 611a and the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b is about twice the diameter of the game ball B, thereby increasing the height of the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b on the left side. is formed so as to become lower toward the left. As a result, the game balls B received by the out ball socket 600a can be aligned in one row.

An out ball sensor 605 is attached to a vertically extending portion of the crank portion 611c directly below the downstream end of the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b.

In the ball receiving front member 611, an out ball passage 601 is formed by an upper out ball receiving plate portion 611a, a lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b, a crank portion 611c, and the like. Therefore, the out-ball passage 601 is formed wide enough to receive a large number of game balls B on the upstream side, and the received game balls B are aligned in a row to the downstream ball storage passage 604 (ball meandering member 613). I am trying to pass it on.

In addition, in the ball receiving front member 611, the foul ball passage 603 is located below the out ball receiving plate portion upper portion 611a and the out ball receiving plate portion lower portion 611b. After inclining leftward to a portion on the right side of the left end of the lower ball receiving plate portion 611b, it extends short downward. In the front ball receiving member 611, a foul ball sensor 607 is attached to a portion of the foul ball passage 603 extending leftward. The foul ball passage 603 is formed so that the game balls b flow in a line, and the game balls B that have circulated through the foul ball passage 603 are discharged from the out ball passage 601 in the ball storage passage 604 (ball meandering member 613). It is delivered to a site downstream of the site to which it is delivered.

The front ball receiving member 611 is attached to the front edge of the upper out ball receiving plate portion 611a, the front edge of the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b, and the front edge of the bottom wall forming the foul ball passage 603 and extending to the left and right. A concave portion 611d having a size that does not hinder the circulation of game balls B is provided. This concave portion 611d enables dust, dirt, and the like in the out-ball passage 601 and the foul-ball passage 603 to be discharged to the outside.

A circulating ball path relay board 617 is attached to a rear surface of the ball receiving front member 611 behind the foul ball passage 603 .

The rear ball receiving member 612 cooperates with the front ball receiving member 611 on the upper surface to form a safe ball receiving opening 600b. The safe ball passage 602 is formed in the rear ball receiving member 612 so as to open forward, and the front side of the safe ball passage 602 is closed by attaching the front ball receiving member 611 . The safe ball passage 602 opens downward at its downstream end at the lower left end of the rear ball receiving member 612 . The downstream end opening of the safe ball passage 602 is located behind the downstream end opening of the out ball passage 601 . That is, the opening at the downstream end of the out-ball passage 601 and the opening at the downstream end of the safe-ball passage 602 are aligned in the front-rear direction.

The rear ball receiving member 612 has a safe ball receiving plate upper portion 612a which is inclined downward from the middle of the vertical wall forming the left edge of the safe ball receiving port 600b to near the center in the left-right direction. , the vertical wall forming the right edge of the safe ball receiving port 600b is lowered leftward from the part below the safe ball receiving plate upper part 612a to near the bottom of the left edge of the safe ball receiving port 600b. a lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b inclined in this way, a crank portion 612c extending in a crank shape from the left end of the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b toward the lower left with a width that allows the game balls B to flow in a row; have.

The height between the right end of the upper safe ball receiving plate portion 612a and the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b is about twice the diameter of the game ball B, thereby increasing the height of the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b on the left side. is formed so as to become lower toward the left. As a result, the game balls B received by the safe ball receiving opening 600b can be aligned in one row.

A safe ball sensor 606 is attached to a vertically extending portion of the crank portion 612c directly below the downstream end of the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b.

In the ball receiving rear member 612, a safe ball passage 602 is formed by an upper safe ball receiving plate portion 612a, a lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b, a crank portion 612c, and the like. Therefore, the safe ball passage 602 is formed wide enough to receive a large number of game balls B on the upstream side, and the received game balls B are aligned in a line to form a ball storage passage 604 (ball meandering member 613) on the downstream side. I'm trying to hand it over to the most upstream part.

The rear ball receiving member 612 is provided with a concave portion 612d having a size that does not hinder the circulation of the game ball B at the front edge of the upper safe ball receiving plate portion 612a and the front edge of the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b. . This recessed portion 612d enables dust, dirt, and the like in the safe ball passage 602 to be discharged to the outside.

The ball meandering member 613 extends in the left-right direction so that the right end side is lower while meandering back and forth, forming a ball storage passage 604 capable of storing a large number of game balls B. As shown in FIG. 38 and the like, the spherical meandering member 613 includes a first straight portion 613a that slopes down toward the front with the rear portion serving as an upstream end, and a downstream end (front end) of the first straight portion 613a. ), the first folded portion 613b is bent so as to be further lowered rearward after being bent to the right, and the first straight portion is lowered rearward from the downstream end (rear end) of the first folded portion 613b. A second straight portion 613c that extends to a position near the rear end of 613a, and a second straight portion 613c that is bent rightward from the downstream end (rear end) of the second straight portion 613c and then further bent forward to be lower. A second folded portion 613d, a third straight portion 613e extending downward from the downstream end (front end) of the second folded portion 613d to the same position as the front end of the second straight portion 613c, and a third straight portion. A third folded portion 613f that is bent to the right from the downstream end (front end) of the third folded portion 613e and then bent to be further lowered rearward, and a third folded portion 613f that is lowered rearward from the downstream end (rear end) of the third folded portion 613f. and a fourth straight portion 613g extending to the same position as the rear end of the third straight portion 613e, and the fourth straight portion 613g bent rightward from the downstream end (rear end) and further lowered forward. A bent fourth folded portion 613h, and a fifth straight portion 613i extending downward from the downstream end (front end) of the fourth folded portion 613h to the same position as the front end of the fourth straight portion 613g. , a first bent portion 613j that bends downward to the right from the downstream end (front end) of the fifth straight portion 613i, and a first bent portion 613j that bends downward to the right from the downstream end (right end) of the first bent portion 613j. A first transverse portion 613k extending, a second bent portion 613l bent so as to be lower rearward from the downstream end (right end) of the first transverse portion 613k, and a downstream end (rear end) of the second bent portion 613l. A sixth straight portion 613m extending from the end) to a position near the downstream end of the fifth straight portion 613i so as to be lowered rearward, and a sixth straight portion 613m that is lowered rightward from the downstream end (rear end) of the sixth straight portion 613m. and a second transverse portion 613o extending downward to the right from the downstream end (right end) of the third bent portion 613n. An opening at the downstream end of the second transverse portion 613o forms a ball discharge port 600d that opens rightward.

In the meandering ball member 613 (ball storage passage 604), the opening of the downstream end of the safe ball passage 602 is positioned above the rear end of the first straight portion 613a, and the opening of the downstream end of the out ball passage 601 is located in front of it. Aperture is located. Further, the opening of the downstream end of the foul ball passage 603 is positioned above the rear end of the second straight portion 613c.

Further, the meandering ball member 613 has a ball outlet 613p penetrating vertically in the first transverse portion 613k, and extends forward and backward along the left and right edges of the ball outlet 613p on the lower surface of the first transverse portion 613k. a pair of rail portions 613q that protrude downward from each other, support pieces 613r that protrude from the lower ends of the pair of rail portions 613q so as to approach each other, and side surfaces of the pair of rail portions 613q that face each other; and a plurality of slits 613t provided through the rolling surface (bottom surface) on which the game ball B rolls.

A ball extraction port 613p of the meandering ball member 613 is closed by a ball extraction shutter 615, which will be described in detail later. The pair of rail portions 613q extends rearward from the ball outlet 613p. The pair of rail portions 613q supports the ball removal shutter 615 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The two support pieces 613r prevent the ball shutter 615 from falling. Also, the two support pieces 613r protrude from the respective rail portions 613q at the ball outlet 613p. Thereby, even if the load of the game ball B acts on the ball pull-out shutter 615 through the ball pull-out port 613p, the ball pull-out shutter 615 can be sufficiently supported, and the ball pull-out shutter 615 is prevented from falling off. The lock portion 613s can hold the ball pull-out shutter 615 at the open position by locking the lock protrusion 615f of the ball pull-out shutter 615. As shown in FIG.

The slit 613t of the meandering ball member 613 penetrates downward to a size that does not hinder the circulation of the game ball B, and can discharge garbage, dust, etc. in the ball storage passage 604. The slits 613t provided at the folded portion and the bent portion are provided at the outer portion of the curve.

The ball meandering member 613 is provided with a circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and a circulating ball excess sensor 622 capable of detecting the game balls B in circulation, the details of which will be described later.

According to this meandering ball member 613, it is possible to form the ball storage passage 604 that meanders back and forth and extends in the left-right direction so as to lower rightward. Further, the spherical meandering member 613 includes a plurality of folded portions (first folded portion 613b, second folded portion 613d, third folded portion 613f, fourth folded portion 613h) and multiple bent portions (first bent portion 613j, fourth folded portion 613h). Since the second bent portion 613l and the third bent portion 613n) are provided, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed at those portions, and the impact applied to the entrance side of the ball lifting unit 650 can be alleviated. can be done.

A serpentine cover 614 is attached to the spherical serpentine member 613 so as to cover the open upper end of the spherical serpentine member 613 . By attaching the meandering cover 614 to the meandering ball member 613, the game ball B leaks from the meandering ball member 613 (the ball storage passage 604) to the outside, or the game ball B that does not correspond to the ball storage passage 604 from the outside or is illegal It is possible to prevent a game ball B from being inserted or played.

The meandering cover 614 is formed such that the length of the portion extending forward and backward at the left end is shorter rearward than the first straight portion 613 a of the meandering spherical member 613 . As a result, when the meandering cover 614 is attached to the meandering ball member 613, the rear portion of the first straight portion 613a of the meandering ball member 613 is opened upward, and the out ball passage 601 and the safe ball pass through this portion. It becomes possible to communicate with the passage 602 .

Moreover, the meandering cover 614 has an opening 614a penetrating vertically at a portion above the rear end of the second straight portion 613c of the meandering spherical member 613 . The foul ball passage 603 can communicate with the ball storage passage 604 through this opening 614a.

The ball extraction shutter 615 is for extracting (discharging) game balls B (circulating game balls) from the circulation ball path unit 600 or the like, and is attached to the lower surface of the ball meandering member 613 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. . The ball removal shutter 615 includes a flat plate-like door portion 615a capable of closing the ball removal port 613p, a knob portion 615b extending vertically and horizontally from the front edge of the door portion 615a, and the rear ends of the left and right ends of the door portion 615a. a pair of poles 615c extending rearward from the door 615a, a connecting part 615e forming an opening 615d penetrating vertically by connecting the pair of poles 615c behind the door 615a, A locking projection 615f protruding from the outer surface between the connecting portion 615e and the rear end of the pair of poles 615c, and a hook extending outward from the rear ends of the pair of poles 615c. 615g, and a magnet support portion 615h cylindrically protruding from the lower surface of the door portion 615a.

The magnet support portion 615h of the ball extraction shutter 615 can support the magnet 616 by inserting the cylindrical magnet 616 into the cylinder. The magnet support portion 615h is provided upstream of the opening 615d. The magnet support portion 615h has a portion protruding into the cylinder at its lower end and is open rearward. However, the magnet 616 does not drop from the magnet support portion 615h.

When the sphere removal shutter 615 is attached to the sphere meandering member 613, the pair of rail portions 613q of the sphere meandering member 613 are positioned on the left and right outer sides of the door portion 615a and the pair of rod portions 615c, and the door portion 615a is positioned. The lower surface of the first transverse portion 613k and the upper surface of the pair of support pieces 613r are positioned on both upper and lower sides of the pair of rod portions 615c. As a result, the ball extraction shutter 615 is slidable in the front-rear direction between a closed position and an open position, which will be described later.

39(a1) and (a2), the ball removal shutter 615 is in a closed position in which the game ball B cannot pass through the ball removal opening 613p by means of the door portion 615a. . In this state, the rear surface of the knob portion 615b is in contact with the front surface of the first transverse portion 613k, and the pair of locking projections 615f are in contact with the rear end surfaces of the pair of rail portions 613q. As a result, the ball extraction shutter 615 is restricted from moving forward and backward and is held at the closed position. Therefore, when the ball removal shutter 615 is in the closed position, the game ball B is not discharged from the ball removal opening 613p to the ball receiving tray 720 below (see FIG. 20).

Further, when the ball removal shutter 615 is in the closed position, the magnet support portion 615h (magnet 616) is located below the vicinity of the upstream end of the ball removal port 613p. Although the details will be described later, when an iron ball SB (see FIG. 44) flows through the ball storage passage 604, the magnetic force of the magnet 616 magnetically attaches the iron ball SB to the door portion 615a, causing ball jamming. As a result, it is possible to detect the presence of iron balls SB.

When the knob portion 615b is pinched and pulled forward with the ball extraction shutter 615 in the closed position, the locking projection 615f provided on the rod portion 615c strongly contacts the rear end surface of the rail portion 613q. At this time, the rod portion 615c is elastically deformed inward by the force applied to the locking projection 615f, the locking projection 615f moves toward the inner side surface of the rail portion 613q, and the ball extraction shutter 615 slides forward from the closed position. It will happen. When the locking projection 615f reaches the locking portion 613s, the locking projection 615f is locked to the locking portion 613s by the elastic force of the rod portion 615c, and is provided at the rear end of the rod portion 615c. The hook portion 615g is in a state of approaching the rear end surface of the rail portion 613q. As a result, further forward sliding of the ball removal shutter 615 is restricted.

In this state, as shown in FIGS. 39(b1) and (b2), the opening 615d of the ball removal shutter 615 is aligned with the ball removal opening 613p, and the game ball B can pass through the ball removal opening 613p. It has become. That is, the ball extraction shutter 615 is in the open position. When the ball extraction shutter 615 is in the open position, the game ball B on the upstream side of the ball extraction opening 613p in the ball storage passage 604 is discharged to the ball receiving tray 720 below through the ball extraction opening 613p and the opening 615d. be. As a result, it is possible to pull out the circulating game ball B to the outside.

When the game balls B accumulate in the ball receiving tray 720 and become heavy, the ball receiving tray 720 is placed on the bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f which is inclined so that the front end side is lowered. Although it tries to slide forward, the forward sliding is blocked by the locking of the locking claw 501n. In this state, when the locking claw 501n is released, the ball receiving tray 720 automatically slides forward due to the weight of the stored game balls B, and the ball receiving tray 720 can be easily removed from the tray insertion recess 501f. can be taken out.

In addition, when the ball extraction shutter 615 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear surface of the door frame 3 is close to the front surface of the knob portion 615b. The portion 615b abuts against the door frame 3 to prevent the door from sliding to the open position. As a result, the circulating game balls B are not lost without permission, and the illegal game balls B passing through the ball extraction port 613p are not mixed.

The magnet 616 is formed in a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the magnet support portion 615 h of the ball removal shutter 615 . This magnet 616 is for attracting the iron ball SB. The magnet 616 uses a strong magnetic force such as a neodymium magnet.

By the way, in a game hall or the like, when the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment and a conventional pachinko machine in which a player can touch a game ball (iron ball SB) are mixed, the pachinko machine of this embodiment When the game ball B is replenished or replaced due to maintenance or the like in 1, there is a risk that the iron ball SB will be mixed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when the iron ball SB is mixed in, the ball extraction shutter 615 is provided with the magnet 616, so that when the iron ball SB flows through the ball storage passage 604, the ball extraction shutter at the closed position is closed. On the upper surface of the door portion 615a at 615, the iron ball SB is magnetized by the magnetic force of the magnet 616 and stops. At this time, since the magnet 616 with a strong magnetic force is used, even if a large number of game balls B accumulate on the upstream side of the magnetically attached iron ball SB and a force for pressing the door portion is applied to the downstream side. The iron ball SB never moves from the upper surface of 615a.

When the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door portion 615a (magnet 616) of the ball release shutter 615 in the ball storage passage 604, when the game ball B is continued to be shot from the ball shooting unit 550, The game balls B on the downstream side of the magnetized iron ball SB are sequentially consumed, and the consumed (shot) game balls B are sequentially supplied to the upstream side of the iron ball SB. Therefore, in the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the lifting inlet sensor 653 etc. provided downstream from the ball removing shutter 615, the detection of the game ball B is turned off, and the circulation provided upstream from the ball removing shutter 615 The game ball B detection is turned ON in the ball excess sensor 622, the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, the foul ball sensor 607, and the like. As a result, it is possible to detect and notify that ball clogging has occurred between the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the like and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 and the like. That is, it can be detected that the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door portion 615a.

With the iron ball SB magnetically attached to the upper surface of the door portion 615a of the ball removal shutter 615 by the magnetic force of the magnet 616, when the ball removal shutter 615 is slid forward from the closed position to the open position, the upper surface of the door portion 615a The front end of the iron ball SB that is magnetically attached to the contact surface abuts the front wall of the first transverse portion 613k, and only the iron ball SB is prevented from moving forward. Then, when the magnet 616 moves forward of the front wall of the first transverse portion 613k, the magnetic force acting on the iron ball SB weakens and the iron ball SB starts rolling downstream. At this time, the opening 615d of the ball removal shutter 615 is aligned with the ball removal opening 613p, and the game ball B can pass through the ball removal opening 613p. can be discharged to the ball receiving tray 720 below, and can be taken out from the ball storage passage 604.

The circulation ball path relay board 617 is attached to a portion behind the foul ball passage 603 on the rear surface of the front ball receiving member 611 and below the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611 b of the rear ball receiving member 612 . The circulating ball path relay board 617 relays connection between the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, the foul ball sensor 607, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball excess sensor 622, and the frame control board 740, which will be described later. belongs to.

The gauge portion 620 indicates an appropriate amount area having a predetermined length in the flow direction of the ball storage passage 604 in the meandering ball member 613 . Here, a state in which the rear end of the row of game balls B stored in a row is caught on the gauge portion 620 is defined as an appropriate amount. The gauge part 620 is for visually confirming an appropriate amount of the game balls B (circulating balls), and is formed of a partially colored transparent seal. This gauge portion 620 is attached to the upper surface of the meandering cover 614 . More specifically, on the upper surface of the meandering cover 614, it is attached to a portion upstream of the first transverse portion 613k of the spherical meandering member 613. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 42, characters and symbols (arrows) indicating the proper range (appropriate amount region) of the amount of game balls B stored are described in the gauge portion 620 .

The gauge portion 620 includes an upper gauge seal 620a attached to a portion above the third straight portion 613e and the third folded portion 613f of the spherical meandering member 613, and a middle gauge attached to a portion above the fourth straight portion 613g. It is composed of three seals, a seal 620b and a lower gauge seal 620c attached to a portion above the fifth straight portion 613i and the first curved portion 613j.

The upper gauge seal 620a has a line extending left and right near the center in the front-rear direction of the third straight portion 613e, and a line downstream (front) of the line extending along the passage with the tip of the arrow toward the line. An arrow with a rod portion extending to the downstream end of the third folded portion 613f, and the characters "up to here" are written (displayed) on the downstream right side of the arrow portion of the arrow.

The middle gauge seal 620b has a rod-shaped portion extending rearward (downstream) so as to follow the rod portion indicated by the arrow in the upper gauge seal 620a, and near the upstream end of the rod-shaped portion, " "Appropriate range" is written.

The lower gauge seal 620c includes a line extending back and forth at the downstream end of the first bent portion 613j, and a fifth direct portion 613i along the passage with the tip of the arrow portion on the upstream side of the line directed toward the line. An arrow with a rod portion extending to the upstream end of the arrow, and characters "from here" are described (displayed) on the upstream right side of the arrow portion of the arrow.

When the gauge portion 620 is viewed during maintenance or the like, the game ball B is placed in the portion of the gauge portion 620 (appropriate amount area), that is, the portion in the range from the line of the upper gauge seal 620a to the line of the lower gauge portion 620c. If it cannot be seen, it can be understood that the number of game balls B is less than the appropriate amount. When replenishing the game balls B, the game balls B are thrown in from the out port 1008 of the game board 5, or from the out ball receiving port 600a or the safe ball receiving port 600b until the appropriate amount is reached.

On the other hand, when looking at the gauge portion 620, if the game ball B can be seen in all parts of the gauge portion 620, that is, if the rear end of the row of the game ball B is "up to here" (the line of the upper gauge seal 620a) ), it can be seen that there is an excess of game balls B, which is more than the appropriate amount. When there are too many game balls B, the ball removal shutter 615 is pulled forward and slid to the open position to discharge the game balls B in the ball storage passage 604 from the ball removal port 613p to make the appropriate amount.

As described above, according to the gauge part 620 of the present embodiment, it is possible to determine at a glance whether or not the stored game balls B are appropriate (appropriate amount), and at the same time, the number of stored game balls B You can easily adjust the amount.

In the above embodiment, as the gauge portion 620 , a seal is attached to the meandering cover 614 . The parts may be formed in different colors, or the gauge part 620 may have colored lines drawn at the downstream end and the upstream end of the appropriate amount region.

Further, in the above embodiment, the gauge portion 620 is provided upstream of the ball release shutter 615, but the present invention is not limited to this. The downstream end of the gauge portion 620 may be provided downstream of the ball removal shutter 615 and near the upstream of the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 .

In the circulating ball path unit 600 of this embodiment, the ball receiving front plate 610, the ball receiving front member 611, the ball receiving rear member 612, the meandering ball member 613, and the meandering cover 614 are formed of transparent synthetic resin. . Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the internal state from the outside.

Circulation ball path unit 600 is attached with out ball sensor 605 and foul ball sensor 607 sandwiched between ball receiving front plate 610 and ball receiving front member 611, and safe ball sensor 606 It is mounted in a state of being sandwiched between the front ball receiving member 611 and the rear ball receiving member 612 . The out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606 are arranged side by side.

The out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, the foul ball sensor 607, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 detect the game ball B without contact, for example, by detecting changes in the induced current. is.

The circulation ball path unit 600 is attached to the base wall portion 501b of the body frame base 501 from the rear side. When the circulating ball path unit 600 is assembled to the body frame 4, the out ball socket 600a and the safe ball socket 600b are at the same height as the top surface of the base wall portion 501b, and the rear end of the top surface of the base wall portion 501b. It is mounted so that it touches the edge.

Also, the circulating ball path unit 600 is attached to the body frame 4 so that the ball feeding unit 700 is positioned between it and the base wall portion 501b in an assembled state.

Further, in the circulating ball path unit 600 assembled to the main body frame 4, the portion on the front side of the center of the meandering ball member 613 and the meandering cover 614 in the front-rear direction is provided in the base wall portion 501b. It protrudes forward through the mouth 501g from the rear. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B in the meandering ball member 613 (ball storage passage 604) can be visually recognized from the front (outside).

When the circulating ball path unit 600 is assembled to the main body frame 4 and the frame base unit 730 is opened rearward, the out ball path 601, the safe ball path 602, the foul ball path 603, and the ball storage path are opened. The inside of each portion of the base wall portion 501b on the rear side of the base wall portion 501b in 604 can be visually recognized from the rear. As a result, by opening the frame substrate unit 730, the inside of the out ball passage 601 and the like can be checked when a ball jam occurs, and the location of the ball jam can be easily identified.

In addition, in the state where the circulation ball path unit 600 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the second transverse portion 613o of the meandering ball member 613 is positioned behind the base wall portion 501b and below the ball shooting unit 550. located in That is, in the circulation ball path unit 600, the ball discharge port 600d opens rightward behind the base wall portion 501b and at a position lower than the ball discharge unit 550. As shown in FIG. This ball discharge port 600d communicates with a ball lifting inlet passage 651 of a ball lifting unit 650 which will be described later.

The circulating ball path unit 600 of this embodiment includes a circulating ball shortage sensor 621 for detecting that the number of stored game balls B (circulating balls) is insufficient, and a stored game ball B (circulating balls). and a circulating sphere excess sensor 622 for detecting that there is an excess of circulating spheres (see FIG. 62).

The insufficient number of circulating balls sensor 621 is provided downstream of the gauge portion 620 in the ball storage passage 604 . It should be noted that the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 may be provided near the upstream of the ball removal shutter 615 . The circulating ball excess sensor 622 is provided near the upstream end of the gauge portion 620 in the ball storage passage 604 . The circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 are connected to the frame control board 740 via the circulating ball path relay board 617 .

Although the details will be described later, when the number of game balls B is appropriate, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 detects the game balls B for a predetermined time (eg, 80 ms) or more, and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 detects the game balls B for a predetermined time ( For example, 80 ms) or more will not be detected. When the number of game balls B is insufficient, neither the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 nor the circulating ball excess sensor 622 detects the game balls B for a predetermined time (for example, 80 ms) or longer. On the other hand, when the number of game balls B is excessive, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 both detect the game balls B for a predetermined time (for example, 80 ms) or longer. In addition, when the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 does not detect the game ball B for a predetermined time (eg, 80 ms) or more, and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 detects the game ball B for a predetermined time (eg, 80 ms) or longer, the circulating balls Ball clogging including iron balls SB mixed in between the insufficient number of balls sensor 621 and the excess number of circulating balls sensor 622 has occurred.

Here, the reason for the predetermined time k80 ms as a threshold for detecting the presence or absence of game ball B will be described. For example, on the circulation path R, the positions where sensors such as the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the lifting inlet sensor 653, the lifting outlet sensor 654, and the firing front sensor 704 are placed are It is placed at the stopping position of the game ball B when the upper unit 650, the ball feeding unit 700, etc. are stopped. This position is the position where the next game ball B is positioned every time one game ball B is sent. Therefore, the game ball B is detected here by a detection method of whether or not it has been detected for 80 ms or longer. Since it takes about 50 ms to detect the game ball B rolling on a slope with an inclination of about 5 degrees, a margin of 80 ms is added to detect that the game ball B is surely present at that position. is detected. In other words, this value of 80 ms is a practical value obtained by experiment.

Thus, by combining the detection states of the game balls B by the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the frame control board 740 automatically judges and notifies the amount of the game balls B, ball clogging, etc. Is possible.

In the above-described embodiment, the circulating sphere shortage sensor 621 and the circulating sphere excess sensor 622 are provided. may be substituted with the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, and the foul ball sensor 607.

[4-4a. ball clogging mechanism]
Next, in the circulation ball path unit 600, as shown in FIG. 43, a ball clogging elimination mechanism 630 may be provided for facilitating the elimination of ball clogging at the out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606. FIG. FIG. 43(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged main part of a cross section of the rear surface of the circulation ball path unit attached to the body frame, cut at the position of the out-ball sensor with the cover member of the ball elimination mechanism closed. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the cover member is opened in (a).

The ball clogging elimination mechanism 630 has a cover member 631 that can be opened and closed on the wall above the out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606 in the ball receiving front member 611 and the ball receiving rear member 612 in the circulation ball path unit 600. It is. The lid member 631 is closed in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 43(a). The lid member 631 is held in a closed state by locking with locking claws (not shown).

This ball clogging elimination mechanism 630 is such that when ball clogging occurs in the out ball passage 601 or the safe ball passage 602, or when an illegal ball B' having a larger diameter than the game ball B is thrown as a fraudulent act, the out ball sensor 605 or the like is activated. It is used to clear them when they become blocked or when they do.

For example, when an illegal ball B' having a larger diameter than the game ball B is thrown from the out port 1008 of the game board 5 and the out ball sensor 605 is blocked, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the frame substrate unit 730 is opened above, the rear part of the circulation ball path unit 600 is revealed. In this embodiment, a gap into which a finger can be inserted is formed between the portion of the circulation ball path unit 600 where the clogged ball elimination mechanism 630 is provided and the box main body portion 504b of the main body frame speaker box 504. Therefore, the lid member 631 can be opened by releasing the locking claw of the lid member 631 through the gap and rotating the lid member 631 so that the lower end of the lid member 631 moves upward (FIG. 43(b)). ).

By opening the cover member 631, a finger can be inserted into the upper portion of the out-ball sensor 605 in the out-ball passage 601, blocking the out-ball sensor 605. An illegal ball B' can be easily taken out. In this manner, the irregular ball B' can be easily taken out without using a screwdriver to remove the circulating ball path unit 600 which is screwed.

Even if the safe ball sensor 606 is blocked by the illegal ball B', the illegal ball B' can be taken out by the same procedure as described above.

In the above description, the clogging mechanism 630 is provided with an openable and closable cover member 631, but for example, elastic claws are provided on the ball receiving rear member 612 and the ball receiving front member 611, and the elastic claws are locked. , the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611 may be detachable rearward. In this case, in a normal state, the frame base plate unit 730 is positioned behind the circulation ball path unit 600, and even if the locking of the elastic claws is loosened, the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611 will come off rearward. never. Then, when the out ball sensor 605 is blocked by the illegal ball B', the rear part of the circulation ball path unit 600 appears when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and then the frame substrate unit 730 is opened. Therefore, the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611 can be easily removed by releasing the engagement of the elastic claws attaching the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611, and the out ball sensor The illegal ball B' blocking 605 can be easily taken out.

Alternatively, in the ball receiving front member 611 sandwiched between the ball receiving front plate 610 and the ball receiving rear member 612, the portion above the out ball sensor 605 is slid upward and removed as the ball clogging elimination mechanism 630. It is good to be able to do so. In this case, in a normal state, the game board 5 is positioned above the circulating ball path unit 600, and the slidable portion of the ball receiving front member 611 does not move upward due to the action of gravity. When the out-ball sensor 605 is blocked by the illegal ball B', the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4. appears, the slidable portion of the ball receiving front member 611 is slid upward to remove it, thereby making it possible to easily take out the illegal ball B' blocking the out-ball sensor 605.

[4-4b. Ball extraction shutter of the second embodiment]
Next, in the circulating ball path unit 600, as shown in FIG. 44, in the ball removal shutter 615, the magnet 616 may be attached to a portion in front of the opening 615d. FIG. 44(a) is an explanatory side cross-sectional view showing a state in which an iron ball is magnetically attached to the ball shutter at the closed position together with the ball meandering member and the ball tray, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the ball shutter at the open position. (c) is an explanatory view showing a side cross section together with the ball meandering member and the ball extraction tray in a state where the iron ball is magnetically attached to the bottom surface, and (c) shows the ball extraction shutter being slid to the closed position from the state of (b). It is an explanatory view showing a side cross section together with the ball meandering member and the ball extraction tray in a state where iron balls are magnetically attached. The ball removal shutter 615 is such that the rear end side of the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 supported by the magnet support portion 615h is aligned with the front inner peripheral surface of the opening 615d.

According to the ball extraction shutter 615 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. When the ball release shutter 615 is slid forward from the closed position to the open position, the front end of the iron ball SB magnetically attached to the upper surface of the door portion 615a comes into contact with the front wall of the first transverse portion 613k, and the iron ball SB Only forward movement is blocked. When the ball removal shutter 615 slides further forward, the door portion 615a supporting the lower end of the iron ball SB disappears, and gravity causes the iron ball SB to move downward into the opening 615d. At this time, since the rear end side of the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 coincides with the front inner surface of the opening 615d, the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 (FIG. 44(b)). ).

The iron ball SB tries to move from the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 to the pole side where the magnetic force is strong (here, the lower end surface side), but when the ball removal shutter 615 is in the open position, the ball holder SB moves below the magnet 616. The upper end surface of tray 720 is positioned, and iron ball SB does not move below magnet 616 . Therefore, when the ball extraction shutter 615 is slid to the open position, the iron ball B is positioned at a portion overlapping the opening 615d, and the game ball B on the upstream side of the iron ball SB is located in the opening 615d, that is, the ball extraction opening 613p. There is no downward discharge through the

After the ball removal shutter 615 is slid to the open position, when the ball removal shutter 615 is slid rearward to the closed position, the game ball B on the upstream side of the iron ball SB is prevented from passing through the ball removal opening 613p by the door portion 615a. While blocking, the iron ball SB magnetized on the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 moves to the lower surface side of the magnet 616, and the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the lower surface of the magnet 616 (FIG. 44(c)). ). After that, the ball receiving tray 720 is pulled out and removed from the tray insertion recess 501f, and the iron ball SB magnetically attached to the lower surface of the magnet 616 is removed.

In this way, when the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door portion 615a of the ball removal shutter 615 by the magnet 616, when the ball removal shutter 615 is slid forward and backward, only the magnetically attached iron ball SB is stored. It can be taken out from the passage 604 .

[4-5. Ball lifting unit]
The ball lifting unit 650 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 to 54 and the like. FIG. 45(a) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the body frame as seen from the front left, (b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the body frame as seen from the front right, and (c) is the body frame. 1 is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in FIG. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the ball lifting unit showing a state in which the ball polishing motor base and the cassette pressing piece are opened and the ball polishing cassette is removed. FIG. 47(a) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit without the ball rolling cassette installed, and (b) is a ball lifting unit shown with the ball rolling cassette with the ball rolling motor base and the cassette pressing piece opened. and (c) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit with the ball polishing cassette attached.

FIG. 48(a) is an explanatory view showing how the door frame is closed with the kuma cassette locked incompletely, and (b) shows the state in which the door frame moves in the closing direction from the state of (a). FIG. 4C is an explanatory view showing a state in which the protrusion of the door frame is in contact with the tip of the Kuma motor base, and (c) shows a state in which the door frame is closed from the state of (b) and the Kuma cut is locked. It is a diagram. FIG. 49 is a front view showing an enlarged main part with the ball polishing cassette removed from the ball lifting unit attached to the body frame. FIG. 50(a) is a right side view showing the main parts of the ball polishing mechanism and the ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit, (b) is a rear view showing the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism, and (c). 4] is a plan view of the main part of the ball lifting mechanism as viewed from the arrow A in (b). [FIG.

Furthermore, FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the lifting spiral shaft and the polishing cloth in the ball lifting unit. FIG. 52(a) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit seen from the rear left along with an enlarged view of the lifting inlet sensor and the lifting outlet sensor. (b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit. FIG. 4 is a plan cross-sectional view cut at a sensor site; FIG. 53 is an explanatory view schematically showing the front and rear portions of the sphere sensor consisting of the photosensor in the sphere passage. FIG. 54(a) is a perspective view of the kuma cassette of the ball lifting unit as seen from the front left, (b) is a perspective view of the kuma cassette as seen from the rear right, and (c) is the center of the kuma cassette in the left-right direction. It is a right side cross-sectional view cut at .

The ball lifting unit 650 is for sending the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 and the foul unit 570 and circulated through the circulating ball path unit 600 to the ball shooting unit 550 via the ball sending unit 700 . The ball lifting unit 650 is attached to a ball lifting unit attachment portion 501j provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

The ball lifting unit 650 includes a ball lifting mechanism 660 for lifting the game ball B, and a ball lifting inlet passage 651 for supplying the game ball B sent from the circulation ball path unit 600 to the ball lifting mechanism 660. , a ball lifting exit passage 652 that supplies the game ball B lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660 to the ball feeding unit 700, and a ball lifting entrance passage 651 provided in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 to remove the game ball B circulating. A lifting inlet sensor 653 for detection and a lifting outlet sensor 654 for detecting the game ball B which is provided in the ball lifting outlet passage 652 and is circulating are provided.

In addition, the ball lifting unit 650 includes a ball lifting entrance ground sheet metal 655 provided so as to be able to contact the game ball B in the ball lifting entrance passage 651, and a ball lifting exit passage 652 so as to be able to contact the game ball B. A sphere-lifting outlet earth plate 656 provided, a sphere-lifting relay board 657 relaying connection with the frame control board 740, and a sphere-lifting unit 650 are lifted by a sphere-lifting mechanism 660. and a ball polishing mechanism 680 for polishing the game ball B that is present.

First, the ball lifting mechanism 660 of the ball lifting unit 650 includes a lifting spiral shaft 661 extending vertically and having a spiral lifting groove 661a on the outer peripheral surface, and a lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661. a motor gear 663 that is engaged with the shaft gear 662 and is rotatable around an axis perpendicular to the axis of the lifting spiral shaft 661; and a lifting motor index 665 having a detecting portion 665a provided so as to be cut out in a portion of the circumferential direction extending like a flange from the lower end of the shaft gear 662. , and a lifting motor index sensor 666 capable of detecting a detection portion 665 a of the lifting motor index 665 .

The sphere lifting mechanism 660 includes a motor base sheet metal 667 to which a lifting motor 664 is attached and which rotatably supports a motor gear 663, and a motor base sheet metal 667 to which a lifting spiral shaft is attached. 661 rotatably and mounted on the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a lifting mechanism cover 669.

The lifting spiral shaft 661 is provided with a spiral lifting groove 661a having a depth capable of accommodating the game balls B in a line on the outer peripheral surface. The lifting spiral shaft 661, when viewed from above in its axial direction (see FIG. 50(c)), rotates clockwise so that the game ball B can be lifted. An upper groove 661a is formed. The pitch of the spiral of the lifting groove 661a is formed longer near the upper and lower ends than between them. The lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotatably supported by a lifting mechanism base 668 and a lifting mechanism cover 669 . The uplift spiral shaft 661 has a rotation axis inclined with respect to the vertical so that the upper end is positioned to the right of the lower end when viewed from the front. As a result, the upper end side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 can be moved away from the ball feeding unit to the right, and the length of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 is relatively lengthened to increase the amount of game balls B stored. becomes possible. In this embodiment, the rotation axis of the lifting spiral shaft 661 is inclined at an angle of 12 degrees with respect to the vertical.

Furthermore, the lifting spiral shaft 661 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 51, the lifting spiral shaft 661 includes a small diameter portion 661b having a bottom diameter D1 equal to the bottom diameter (bottom diameter) of the lifting groove 661a, and a large diameter portion having a bottom diameter D2 larger than the small diameter portion 661b. 661 c , and the large-diameter portion 661 c is provided in an axially intermediate portion overlapping the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing cassette 681 . In addition, between the small-diameter portion 661b and the large-diameter portion 661c of the lifting spiral shaft 661, the diameter is configured to change gradually.

Further, the lifting spiral shaft 661 has a spiral pitch P2 at the large diameter portion 661c smaller than a spiral pitch P1 at the small diameter portion 661b. As the pitch of the spiral becomes smaller, the lifting speed of the game ball B becomes slower.

The lifting spiral shaft 661 is arranged so that a gap S1 smaller than the diameter D of the game ball B is formed between the large diameter portion 661c and the surface of the polishing cloth 682 in the ball polishing cassette 681.

By the way, in the lifting spiral shaft 661, if the bottom diameter of the lifting groove 661a is the bottom diameter D1 of the small diameter portion 661b over the entire length, the bottom diameter D1 is smaller than the bottom diameter D2 of the large diameter portion 661c. , the gap between the bottom of the lifting groove 661a and the polishing cloth 682 increases. Therefore, even if the game ball B lifted by the lifting groove 661a is to be polished by the polishing cloth 682 by rotating the lifting spiral shaft 661, the gap between the polishing cloth 682 and the game ball B is increased so that the game ball B cannot be lifted by the lifting groove. The ball escapes to the bottom side of 661a, and the area of contact between the game ball B and the polishing cloth 682 is reduced, resulting in a decrease in polishing efficiency.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bottom diameter D2 of the lifting groove 661a is set to the bottom diameter D1 of the small diameter portion 661b at the portion overlapping the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing cassette 681 at the intermediate portion in the axial direction of the lifting spiral shaft 661. Since the large diameter portion 661c has a larger diameter than the small diameter portion 661b, the gap from the bottom of the lifting groove 661a to the surface of the polishing cloth 682 in the large diameter portion 661c can be made smaller than the gap at the portion of the small diameter portion 661b. Further, in this embodiment, the gap S1 from the large diameter portion 661c to the polishing cloth 682 is made smaller than the diameter D of the game ball B. As shown in FIG. For these reasons, the game ball B cannot escape to the bottom side of the lifting groove 661a at the portion of the large diameter portion 661c, and the game ball B can be pressed against the polishing cloth 682 by the bottom of the lifting groove 661a. The polishing cloth 682 can be recessed together with the ball polishing sponge 683 provided on the back side of the cloth 682 . Thereby, the contact area of the polishing cloth 682 with respect to the game ball B can be increased, and the polishing efficiency of the game ball B can be improved.

In the lifting spiral shaft 661 of the present embodiment, the spiral pitch P2 in the large diameter portion 661c overlapping the polishing cloth 682 is smaller than the spiral pitch P1 in the small diameter portion 661b. The lifting speed of the game ball B at 661c can be slowed down. As a result, the contact time of the game ball B with the polishing cloth 682 can be lengthened, so that the game ball B can be polished more carefully.

Furthermore, the lifting spiral shaft 661 of this embodiment has a diameter that gradually changes between the small-diameter portion 661b and the large-diameter portion 661c. can be avoided, and the load in the lifting operation can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 50(b), the lifting spiral shaft 661 of the present embodiment is inclined at an angle of 12 degrees with respect to the vertical, so that it obliquely intersects the polishing cloth 682. Therefore, the entire width of the polishing cloth 682 can be used to polish the game ball B, and the polishing cloth 682 can be efficiently used for polishing.

Although the lifting spiral shaft 661 has the large-diameter portion 661c in the middle in the axial direction, it is not limited to this. The large diameter portion 661c may be provided up to .

The shaft gear 662 is a spur gear (worm wheel gear). Motor gear 663 is a worm gear. As a result, even if the spiral shaft 661 tries to rotate due to the load acting when a large number of game balls B are accommodated in the lifting groove 661a of the lifting spiral shaft 661, the shaft gear 662 is engaged. Rotation can be prevented by a motor gear 663 that is a worm gear. In addition, since the motor gear 663 is a worm gear, even if the lifting spiral shaft 661 tries to rotate due to the inertia when the driving of the lifting motor 664 is stopped, the rotation can be stopped immediately, and the game ball B can be overturned. Shoot can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the shaft gear 662 is made of POM (polyacetal resin), and the motor gear 663 is made of fiber reinforced plastic containing polyamide carbon fiber. This makes it difficult for the motor gear 663, which is a worm gear, to chip. Note that the motor gear 663 may be made of metal.

Lift motor 664 is a DC motor. The lifting motor index 665 is formed integrally with the shaft gear 662 in a flange shape. The detection portion 665a of the lifting motor index 665 is provided so as to cut out an angle range of 45 degrees with respect to the entire circumference. The lift motor index sensor 666 is a photosensor. The lifting motor index sensor 666 is in a state of receiving light at the detecting portion 665a in the lifting motor index 665, and is in a state of not receiving light at portions other than the detecting portion 665a. This makes it possible to detect the rotational position of the lifting spiral shaft 661 via the lifting motor index 665 .

Although details will be described later, the lifting spiral shaft 661 rotates once when the rotating shaft of the lifting motor 664 rotates 32 times due to the shaft gear 662 and the motor gear 663 . In the lifting motor index sensor 666, when the lifting motor 664 rotates 28 times after being positioned at a portion other than the detecting portion 665a and entering the non-light-receiving state, it reaches the detecting portion 665a and enters the light-receiving state. When the lifting motor 664 rotates four more times after this, it leaves the detecting portion 665a and enters a non-light-receiving state. In this embodiment, the origin is the position where the lifting motor 664 rotates two times after reaching the detector 665a and entering the light receiving state. In other words, the center of the detection portion 665a is the origin of rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661. As shown in FIG.

The motor base metal plate 667 has the lifting motor 664 attached to the left end side in front view, and rotatably supports the right end of the motor gear 663 on the right end side. The motor base sheet metal 667 is attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 at its upper end and attached to the lifting mechanism cover 669 at its lower end.

The lifting mechanism base 668 accommodates the lifting spiral shaft 661 in cooperation with the lifting mechanism cover 669 and rotatably supports the lifting spiral shaft 661 . The lifting mechanism base 668 has a kuma mouth 668a that penetrates forward and backward so that the lifting spiral shaft 661 faces forward and has a size that does not allow the game ball B to pass through, and is recessed from the front to the rear and has a kuma on the bottom. It has a cassette mounting recess 668b in which the mouth 668a is open and the rear end side of the ball polishing cassette 681 can be accommodated. The kuma mouth 668a extends vertically with a width narrower than the diameter of the game ball B. This kuma mouth 668a is provided so that a part of the game ball B lifted by the lifting spiral shaft 661 protrudes forward, and the portion of the game ball B that projects forward from the kuma mouth 668a However, the game ball B is polished by contacting the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing cassette 681 in the ball polishing mechanism 680 attached (mounted) to the cassette mounting recess 668b.

The lifting mechanism base 668 is provided with a downstream portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 at a portion to the right of the lifting spiral shaft 661 in the vicinity of the lower end in a front view. A portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 provided in the lifting mechanism base 668 is inclined such that the upstream end opens toward the rear and becomes lower toward the lower end of the left lifting spiral shaft 661 . there is A lifting inlet sensor 653 is attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 at a portion to the right of the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 in front view.

Also, the lifting mechanism base 668 is provided with an upstream portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 near its upper end. The portion of the sphere lifting outlet passage 652 provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 is inclined from the front of the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 to the left in front view and then to the rear. Then, the downstream end opens toward the rear. The sphere-lifting outlet passage 652 slopes leftward from the portion of the lifting mechanism base 668 that opens toward the rear, and then slopes downward toward the front. It is open towards the front. A lifting mechanism base 668 and a lifting mechanism cover 669 cooperate to form this part of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 .

Also, a ball-grinding motor base 686 to which a ball-polishing motor 688 of the ball-polishing mechanism 680 is attached is attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending shaft.

The lifting mechanism cover 669 accommodates the lifting spiral shaft 661 in cooperation with the lifting mechanism base 668 and rotatably supports the lifting spiral shaft 661 . It is attached from behind to the ball lifting unit attachment portion 501j of the portion 501b. A sphere lifting relay board 657 is attached to the rear surface of the lifting mechanism cover 669 .

The lifting mechanism cover 669 is provided with a portion upstream of the portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 . The portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 has a downstream end that opens forward at a portion near the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 on the right side in front view, and opens rearward. After extending, it bends leftward and passes behind the lifting spiral shaft 661, then extends obliquely forward and the upstream end opens leftward. In this lifting mechanism cover 669, behind the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661, there is a ball lifting entrance earth plate 655 provided so as to be able to contact the game ball B flowing through the ball lifting entrance passage 651. installed.

Further, the lifting mechanism cover 669 is provided with a portion downstream of the portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 . The portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 provided in the lifting mechanism cover 669 is open rearward at its upstream end, bends leftward when viewed from the front, extends leftward to the left end, and then bends forward. , the downstream end of the front end of the lifting mechanism cover 669 is open forward.

A lifting outlet sensor 654 is attached to the lifting mechanism cover 669 near the left end of a portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 that extends leftward in front view. Furthermore, in the lifting mechanism cover 669, a game that flows through the ball lifting outlet passage 652 is located upstream of the ball lifting outlet sensor 654 in the portion extending leftward in the ball lifting outlet passage 652. A sphere lifting exit ground sheet metal 656 is attached so as to be able to contact the sphere B.

Further, the lifting mechanism cover 669 has a supporting protrusion 669a projecting forward from the lifting mechanism base 668 from a portion near the lower center in the vertical direction at the right end, and a front surface of the supporting protrusion 669a penetrating therethrough. and a locking hole 669b in which the 694 is locked. When the sphere lifting unit 650 is attached to the sphere lifting unit mounting portion 501j of the main body frame 4 from the rear, the support protrusion 669a extends to the front side of the base wall portion 501b through the opening 501o passing through the base wall portion 501b. protrude.

The opening (entrance) at the upstream end of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 of the ball lifting unit 650 opens leftward near the lower part of the left side surface of the ball lifting unit 650 . This opening is provided so as to face the ball discharge port 600d of the circulation ball path unit 600 when assembled to the body frame 4 . The ball-lifting inlet passage 651 is inclined downward from the left-end inlet toward the right, and extends to the right of the lifting spiral shaft 661 so as to bypass the rear of the lifting spiral shaft 661 . After that, it folds forward and extends to the vicinity of the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 to the left. In the vicinity of the lifting spiral shaft 661, it is bent in a crank shape so as to turn around to the front side of the lifting spiral shaft 661, and communicates with the lifting groove 661a of the lifting spiral shaft 661 on the front side near the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661. ing.

The ball lifting inlet passage 651 is provided so that the opening at the upstream end faces the ball discharge port 600d that forms the opening at the downstream end of the ball storage passage 604 in the circulation ball passage unit 600. The game ball B that has circulated through the storage passage 604 is delivered and circulated.

The ball lifting inlet passage 651 is provided with a lifting inlet sensor 653 on the right side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 and a ball lifting inlet ground sheet metal 655 on the rear side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 . is installed.

The sphere lifting outlet passage 652 communicates with the lifting groove 661a on the front side near the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 at its upstream end in the vicinity of the upper end of the ball lifting unit 650. It extends to the rear, extends to the same position as the rear end of the lifting spiral shaft 661, and then bends to the left. From there, it extends leftward near the left end of the ball lifting unit 650 and bends forward, and the downstream end opens forward on the front surface of the ball lifting unit 650 (lifting mechanism cover 669). ing.

The ball lifting exit passage 652 is provided so that the opening at the downstream end thereof faces a ball supply port of a ball feeding unit, which will be described later, so that game balls B can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 700 .

The ball lifting outlet passage 652 is provided with a lifting outlet sensor 654 near the left end of a portion extending leftward near the rear end of the ball lifting unit 650, and on the upstream side (right side) thereof. A sphere lift outlet ground sheet metal 656 is attached to the . The bottom wall of the portion of the ball-lifting exit passage 652 where the ball-lifting exit earth sheet metal 656 is provided is provided with an opening that is large enough not to hinder the circulation of the game ball B. , dust and dirt can be discharged to the outside through the opening.

The lifting entrance sensor 653 detects the presence or absence of the game ball B to be lifted when the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by driving the lifting motor 664 to lift the game ball B. Although the details will be described later, the lift motor 664 is not driven when the game ball B is not detected by the lift entrance sensor 653 .

The lifting exit sensor 654 detects the presence or absence of game balls B supplied to the ball feeding unit. Although the details will be described later, in a state where the game ball B is detected by the lift entrance sensor 653, the game ball B is not detected by the lift exit sensor 654, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (here, the launch By subtraction of a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B by the subtraction sensor 554, the lift motor 664 is driven to rotate the lift spiral shaft 661 and a predetermined number of game balls B are lifted.

The lift entrance sensor 653 and the lift exit sensor 654 are photosensors having a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion. It detects.

Here, the relationship between the ball lifting inlet passage 651, the ball lifting outlet passage 652, and the lifting inlet sensor 653 and the lifting outlet sensor 654 will be described. Here, the relationship between the ball lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting inlet sensor 653 will be described, and the relation between the ball lifting outlet passage 652 and the ball lifting outlet sensor 654 will be omitted because they are the same. As shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the portion of the sphere lifting inlet passage 651 where the lifting inlet sensor 653 is provided is a V-shaped passage portion 651a having a V-shaped cross section (inverted trapezoidal shape narrowing downward). It is said that In addition, the portion other than the V-shaped passage portion 651a in the upper entrance passage 651 is a U-shaped passage portion 651b having a U-shaped cross section that opens upward.

The sphere lifting outlet passage 652 is the same. is a U-shaped passage portion 652b having a U-shaped cross section that opens upward.

In other words, the V-shaped passage portion 651a and the V-shaped passage portion 652a each have a pair of slanted surfaces with which the game ball B is in contact and which is slanted so that the distance increases upward. In addition, the U-shaped passage portion 651b and the U-shaped passage portion 652b have a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and a pair of sides erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface. a wall surface; The ball feeding passage 703 of the ball feeding unit 700 located downstream of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 is also formed in the same shape as the U-shaped passage portion 651b and the U-shaped passage portion 652b.

By the way, if the cross section of the passage at the position of the lift entrance sensor 653, which is a photo sensor, is made to have a U-shaped cross section that is open upward, the game ball B that circulates will contact the side wall. Scratches, stains, and the like that occur on the side walls of the passage due to exposure may interfere with the light receiving and emitting of the photosensor, resulting in erroneous detection. In addition, in the path having a U-shaped cross section, the position of the game ball B in the width direction of the path is not constant and is not stable, so the detection position by the sensor becomes different, and there is a risk of erroneous detection.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the portion of the lifting inlet sensor 653 (lifting outlet sensor 654) is a V-shaped passage portion 651a (V-shaped passage portion 652a) having a V-shaped cross section, the V-shaped By holding the game ball B at two points on both oblique sides, the movement in the width direction of the passage can be regulated, and the position of the game ball B in the width direction of the passage is kept constant and stable. be able to. As a result, since the game ball B does not come into contact with the side wall of the passage at the lift entrance sensor 653 (lift exit sensor 654), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of scratches and stains due to the contact of the game ball B. It is possible to eliminate erroneous detection and reliably detect a game ball.

In the above description, the V-shaped passage portion 651a (V-shaped passage portion 652a) having a V-shaped cross section (inverted trapezoidal shape) is shown as the shape of the passage for stabilizing the position of the game ball B with respect to the sensor. A pair of protrusions provided at an interval narrower than the diameter of the game ball B and extending in the distribution direction of the game ball B may be used.

A lifting spiral shaft 661 is provided at the downstream end of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 . Therefore, in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 upstream of the lifting spiral shaft 661, the game balls B are picked up one by one by the lifting groove 661a of the lifting spiral shaft 661, so that the ball is lifted intermittently. A game ball B stays in the entrance passage 651 . On the other hand, the ball lifting outlet passage 652 is provided with a ball feeding unit 700, which will be described later, at the downstream end. Therefore, in the ball lifting exit passage 652 on the upstream side of the ball feeding unit 700, the game balls B advance intermittently one by one due to the ball feeding operation of the ball feeding unit 700. B stops.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 (ball lifting outlet passage 652), only the part of the ball lifting inlet sensor 653 (ball lifting outlet sensor 654) is a V-shaped passage having a V-shaped cross section. A portion 651a (V-shaped passage portion 652a), and the other portion is a U-shaped passage portion 651b (U-shaped passage portion 652b) having a U-shaped cross section. Even if the ball pressure is applied to the downstream side by the plurality of game balls B, it is possible to reduce the ball pressure.

More specifically, as shown by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 53, a plurality of game balls B are arranged in a straight line (in a row on the axis of the passage) in the V-shaped passage portion 651a (V-shaped passage portion 652a). In the passage portion 651b (U-shaped passage portion 652b), a plurality of game balls B are pushed downstream so that they are arranged in a zigzag pattern so as to alternately contact the side walls on both sides, distributing the ball pressure to the side walls. It is possible to reduce the ball pressure due to the plurality of game balls B on the downstream side. Therefore, the portions (for example, the lifting spiral shaft 661, the ball feeding movable member 705 of the ball feeding unit 700, etc.) provided on the downstream side of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 (ball lifting outlet passage 652) are stopped. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced without being damaged by the ball pressure of a plurality of (stored) game balls B and without the need to excessively reinforce the relevant portion against the ball pressure. .

By the way, the detection of the game ball B at the winning opening or the like is performed by confirming the output from the ball sensor at predetermined interrupt intervals (for example, 4 ms). ”), it is determined that the game ball B is detected (ON). That is, when the output from the ball sensor is "011", it is determined to be ON, and when it is other than "011", it is determined to be OFF. However, like the ball-lifting entrance passage 651 and the ball-lifting exit passage 652, a ball sensor provided in a ball passage where a plurality of game balls B stay In the exit sensor 654), if the presence or absence of the game ball B is determined by the determination method as described above, the ball sensor generates only OFF when there is no game ball B in the ball passage, and the game ball is in the ball passage. When the balls B are supplied, many ONs occur at short intervals, and the game balls B stored in the ball passage are moving one by one (the game balls B are moving at intervals of shooting). , many short-interval OFFs occur. Therefore, with the determination method as described above, it was not possible to accurately determine that there is no game ball B in the ball passage.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a threshold value (for example, an ON threshold value of 200 ms and an OFF threshold value of 200 ms) is provided for ON determination and OFF determination, respectively. ON or OFF is determined only when. In other words, for example, when the output from the ball sensor is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. As a result, it is possible to reliably detect (determine) the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball passage where the game balls B stay.

The threshold for determining ON or OFF may be different depending on the type of ball passage, the number of stationary game balls B, etc. Alternatively, the threshold for ON and the threshold for OFF may be made different. Also good. In this embodiment, the ball lifting entrance sensor 653 of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 has an ON threshold of 80 ms and an OFF threshold of 200 ms, for example. Further, in the lifting exit sensor 654 of the ball lifting exit passage 652, for example, the ON threshold is set to 80 ms, and the OFF threshold is set to 200 ms. Further, in the before-fire sensor 704 of the ball feeding unit 700, which will be described later, for example, the ON threshold is set to 12 ms, and the OFF threshold is set to 12 ms. Further, as described above, the firing subtraction sensor 554 of the ball firing unit 550 has an ON threshold of 80 ms and an OFF threshold of 80 ms, for example.

If these thresholds are too small, a slight vibration or the like will result in erroneous detection and control noise. Also, if the threshold is too large, the state of the game ball B will be missed. Therefore, although the appropriate threshold varies depending on the location where the sphere sensor is provided, it is desirable that the minimum is 10 ms or more and the maximum is 300 ms or less. Also, if the threshold value is determined to be a multiple (eg, 3 to 60 times) of the interrupt period (eg, 4 ms), the burden on the software can be reduced because only the number of interrupts is counted in terms of software control. Basically, the threshold value is short in the sensor 704 before launch where the game ball B stays at a fixed position, but the game ball B stays at a fixed position, but there is a certain width in the staying position (for example, the lifting exit In the sensor 654), the threshold is lengthened to provide a margin. The game ball B stays (stays) at a fixed position in the portion of the launch subtraction sensor 554, but the threshold value is lengthened so as not to make an erroneous detection due to artificial vibration.

The ball lifting inlet ground sheet metal 655 removes static electricity from the game balls B supplied from the circulation ball path unit 600 to the ball lifting inlet passage 651 . The sphere lifting inlet ground sheet metal 655 is provided upstream of the lifting inlet sensor 653 . As a result, the static electricity of the game ball B passing through the lift entrance sensor 653 can be removed in advance, and the static electricity from the game ball B may cause an erroneous detection in the lift entrance sensor 653 or the frame control board 740 to malfunction. can be avoided.

The ball lifting exit ground sheet metal 656 removes static electricity from the game ball B which has been lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660 and polished by the ball polishing mechanism 680 . The sphere lift outlet ground sheet metal 656 is provided upstream of the lift outlet sensor 654 . As a result, the static electricity of the game ball B passing through the lifting exit sensor 654 can be removed in advance, and the static electricity from the game ball B may cause an erroneous detection in the lifting exit sensor 654 or the frame control board 740 to malfunction. can be avoided.

The sphere lifting relay board 657 relays connection between the lifting entrance sensor 653, the lifting outlet sensor 654, the lifting motor 664, the lifting motor index sensor 666, the ball motor 688, etc. and the frame control board 740. It is. The sphere lifting relay board 657 is attached to the rear side of the lifting mechanism cover 669 .

The ball polishing mechanism 680 is attached to the front side of the ball lifting mechanism 660 . The kneading mechanism 680 includes a box-shaped kneading cassette 681 having a vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped outer shape, an endless belt-like polishing cloth 682 partially exposed to the outside at the rear surface of the kneading cassette 681, and the polishing cloth 682 exposed to the outside. A sheet-like ball polishing sponge 683 provided between the portion where the ball is formed and the rear surface of the ball polishing cassette 681, and a ball polishing feed gear 684 supported rotatably around a lateral axis in the lower part of the ball polishing cassette 681. and a ball driven driven gear 685 which meshes with the ball driven gear 684 with a polishing cloth 682 therebetween and is rotatably supported around an axis in the horizontal direction.

The Kuma mechanism 680 has a flat Kuma motor base 686 which extends upward and downward with a constant front-to-rear depth on the left side of the Kuma cassette 681 and whose rear end side is rotatably attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 . , a gear cover 687 attached to the left surface of a Kuma motor base 686, a Kuma motor 688 attached to the left surface of the gear cover 687 and having a rotating shaft projecting between the gear cover 687 and the Kuma motor base 686, A spur gear-shaped motor gear 689 attached to the rotating shaft of a kumamoto motor 688, a spur gear-shaped large-diameter gear portion 690a that meshes with the motor gear 689, and a small-diameter spur gear that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear portion 690a. , and is rotatably supported between a Kuma motor base 686 and a gear cover 687; A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 691 rotatably supported between 686 and the gear cover 687, and a rotation connecting portion 692 that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 691 and protrudes rightward through the Kuma motor base 686. and have.

Furthermore, the Kuma mechanism 680 is in contact with the front surface of the Kuma cassette 681, and its left end is engaged with the front end of the Kuma motor base 686, while its right end is attached to the front surface of the base wall 501b of the body frame base 501. A plate-shaped cassette pressing piece 693, a ny latch 694 detachably attaching the right end side of the cassette pressing piece 693 to the front surface (locking hole 669b) of the support protrusion 669a in the lifting mechanism cover 669, and a ball-brushing motor. and a spring 695 that biases the cassette pressing piece 693 rearward (to the ball polishing cassette 681 side) with respect to the base 686 .

As shown in FIG. 54, the kneading cassette 681 of the kneading mechanism 680 is formed in the shape of a hollow box, and slits 681a through which the polishing cloth 682 can pass are provided on the upper and lower edges of the rear surface. The ball polishing cassette 681 is detachably attached from the front to the ball lifting mechanism base 668 of the ball lifting mechanism 660 so as to close the ball polishing port 668a.

The ball polishing cassette 681 also has a connecting hole 681b provided at the lower left side surface and a positioning hole 681c provided in front of the connecting hole. A rotary connecting portion 692 protruding to the right from the ball-shaped motor base 686 is inserted into the connecting hole 681b. be done. A positioning pin 686b, which will be described later, of the Kuma motor base 686 is inserted into the positioning hole 681c. At the same time, the ball polishing cassette 681 is restricted (locked) from moving forward with respect to the ball lifting mechanism 660 .

Further, the Kuma polishing cassette 681 includes a plurality of rollers 681d around which the polishing cloth 682 is wound, and a flat tension spring 681e that presses the polishing cloth 682 against the roller 681d provided near the upper slit 681a. and have The tension spring 681e presses the polishing cloth 682 against the roller 681d to apply tension to the portion of the polishing cloth 682 exposed outside from the ball polishing cassette 681, so that the polishing cloth 682 is stretched outside the rear surface. I try not to bend.

The polishing cloth 682 is formed in the shape of an endless ring belt having a constant width on both sides. As shown in FIGS. 50(a) and 54(c), the polishing cloth 682 is housed in the kneading cassette 681 while meandering back and forth. is exposed rearward from the rear surface of the Kuma cassette 681 .

The kneading sponge 683 is provided between the rear surface of the kneading cassette 681 and the portion of the polishing cloth 682 exposed to the rear, and attached to the rear surface of the kneading cassette 681 . The rear surface of the ball polishing sponge 683 is in contact with the inner surface of the polishing cloth 682 . The ball polishing sponge 683, assembled in the ball lifting unit 650, elastically presses the polishing cloth 682 against the game ball B exposed forward from the ball polishing opening 668a of the ball lifting mechanism 660. The polishing cloth 682 is brought into contact with the spherical surface of the game ball B in a wider range. The kneading sponge 683 is replaceably attached to the kneading cassette 681 .

The ball-fed feed gear 684 is provided so that its axial center coincides with the axial center of the transmission gear 691 (rotary coupling portion 692) in a state where the ball-fed cassette 681 is attached, and the left end of the rotary shaft is connected to the rotary coupling portion 692. , and integrally rotates with the transmission gear 691 .

The ball driven gear 685 meshes with the ball feed gear 684 so as to have a gap for receiving the polishing cloth 682. When the ball feed gear 684 rotates, it rotates in the opposite direction, It is possible to feed a polishing cloth 682 sandwiched between.

The Kuma motor base 686 extends vertically along the left side surface of the Kuma cassette 681, and its rear end side is attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction. . As a result, the kuma motor base 686 can be rotated between a lock position parallel to the left side of the kuma cassette 681 and a release position in which the front end side is away from the kuma cassette 681 to the left. The Kuma motor base 686 has a locking hole 686a penetrating from side to side at a portion above the center in the vertical direction of the front edge. A locking hook 693a provided at the left end of the cassette pressing piece 693 is inserted and locked into the locking hole 686a.

As shown in FIG. 46, the Kuma motor base 686 has a rotary connecting portion 692 protruding rightward from a portion near the lower end of the right side surface, which is near the rear in the front-rear direction. In addition, the Kuma motor base 686 has a positioning pin 686b that protrudes rightward in a columnar shape from a front-rear center portion near the lower end of the right side surface. The tip (right end) of the positioning pin 686b is formed in a conical shape. The positioning pin 686b is inserted into the positioning hole 681c of the ball polishing cassette 681, thereby positioning the ball polishing cassette 681 and restricting its forward movement.

More specifically, the Kuma motor base 686 is rotated to the release position with the front end moved leftward in the longitudinal direction, and the Kuma cassette 681 is attached to the cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668. In this state, when the Kuma motor base 686 is rotated so that its tip moves to the right and is moved to the locked position, the positioning pin 686b engages the positioning hole of the Kuma cassette 681 from a direction intersecting the front-rear direction. 681c to position the balling cassette 681 and prevent the balling cassette 681 from moving forward from the cassette mounting recess 668b.

This Kuma motor base 686 is provided so that the tip end thereof abuts on the protrusion 102 (guide surface 102a) of the door frame 3 . As a result, although the details will be described later, when the door frame 3 is to be closed with respect to the main body frame 4 while the Kuma motor base 686 is in a state other than the locked position, the guide surface 102a of the protrusion 102 is pushed to the front end of the Kuma motor base 686. , the Kuma motor base 686 rotates to the locked position, preventing forgetting to lock, and preventing the cassette pressing piece 693 and the like from being caught between the door frame 3 and being damaged. can be prevented.

The kuma motor 688 is controlled independently of the operation of the lifting motor 664, and is controlled so that the polishing cloth 682 moves 0.17 mm every time 1000 game balls B are shot.

The cassette pressing piece 693 extends to the left and right, and is provided with a hook-shaped locking hook portion 693a that is inserted into and locked to the locking hole 686a of the ball-shaped motor base 686 at the left end. The cassette pressing piece 693 is biased by a spring 695 so as to rotate counterclockwise in plan view. In other words, it is biased so as to push backward the balling cassette 681 mounted in the cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668 . The right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 extends further to the right than the Kuma cassette 681 , and the rear surface of the cassette pressing piece 693 is configured to contact the front surface of the support protrusion 669 a of the lifting mechanism cover 669 . A ny latch 694 is provided near the right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 .

With the right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 in contact with the supporting projection 669a of the lifting mechanism cover 669, when the operation part 694a is pushed, the tip of the ny latch 694 expands in diameter to fit into the locking hole of the supporting projection 669a. 669b, the cassette pressing piece 693 can be locked immovably, and the lock can be released by pulling the operating portion 694a forward. More specifically, the nylatch 694 includes an operating portion 694a composed of a disc-shaped disk portion and a rod-shaped portion projecting from the center of the disk portion, and a cylindrical portion into which the rod-shaped portion of the operating portion 694a is slidably inserted. A flange portion extending outward from a proximal end portion of the cylindrical portion near the disk portion and a distal end portion of the cylindrical portion opposite to the flange portion are notched toward the flange portion, and a plurality of notches are provided in the circumferential direction. and a tubular member (grommet) having a slit provided therein. With the cylindrical member inserted into the locking hole 669b of the support protrusion 669a, when the operating portion 694a is pushed toward the support protrusion 669a, the rod-shaped portion slides toward the distal end side in the cylindrical portion. Then, the diameter of the tubular portion divided by the plurality of slits is expanded so that the tip thereof is opened. As a result, the tubular member cannot be pulled out of the locking hole 669b and can be locked.

The sphere lifting unit 650 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b of the body frame base 501 in a state assembled to the body frame 4 . When the ball lifting unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the ball lifting mechanism 660 is assembled with the ball polishing cassette 681 of the ball polishing mechanism 680 removed (see FIG. 47(a)). , to the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b. At this time, the Kuma motor base 686 and the support protrusion 669a protruding forward from the lifting mechanism base 668 pass through an opening 501o that penetrates the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j in the front-rear direction, and the front end side of the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j passes through the base wall portion 501b. to protrude forward.

In this state, the spherical opening 668a of the ball lifting mechanism base 668 of the ball lifting mechanism 660 is located in the opening 501o penetrating the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b, and the opening 501o. And the game ball B lifted by the lifting spiral shaft 661 can be visually recognized from the front of the base wall portion 501b (body frame 4) through the kuma mouth 668a (see FIG. 49). Since the width of the kuma mouth 668a is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B, even if the kuma cassette 681 is removed, the game ball B will not spill out. As a result, the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4 and the kuma cassette 681 is removed, so that the lifting spiral shaft 661 and the game ball B lifted by the lifting spiral shaft 661 can be confirmed from the front. can be done.

After attaching the ball lifting mechanism 660 side of the ball lifting unit 650 to the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j of the base wall portion 501b, pull the operating portion 694a of the ny latch 694 projecting forward from the base wall portion 501b to lock. Released, the cassette pressing piece 693 is rotated to open forward and left against the urging force of the spring 695, and the Kuma motor base 686 is rotated to the release position so that the tip side thereof moves away from the Kuma cassette 681. so that the cassette pressing piece 693 and balled motor base 686 do not overlap the front of the cassette mounting recess 668 b of the lifting mechanism base 668 . Then, from the front of the base wall portion 501b, the kneading cassette 681 is placed with the exposed surface of the polishing cloth 682 facing rearward, and the cassette mounting recess in the lifting mechanism base 668 is closed so as to close the kneading opening 668a from the front. 668b (see FIGS. 46 and 47(b)).

In this state, the ball polishing cassette 681 is moved rearward and its rear end is inserted into the cassette mounting recess 668b. After that, the Kuma motor base 686 is rotated to the lock position so as to be parallel to the left side surface of the Kuma cassette 681, and the rotation connecting part 692 and the positioning pin 686b protruding from the right side surface of the Kuma motor base 686 are connected to the Kuma cassette. They are inserted into the connecting hole 681b and the positioning hole 681c of 681, respectively. As a result, the rotation connecting portion 692 and the positioning pin 686b are inserted into the ball polishing cassette 681 in a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, so that the forward movement of the ball polishing cassette 681 can be restricted.

When the Kuma motor base 686 is moved to the lock position, the cassette pressing piece 693 attached to the front end of the Kuma motor base 686 presses the Kuma cassette 681 rearward by the biasing force of the spring 695, and the right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 is pushed. contacts the support projection 669 a of the lifting mechanism cover 669 . In this state, when the operation portion 694a of the ny latch 694 is pushed to engage with the engagement hole 669b of the support projection 669a, the cassette pressing piece 693 is locked so as not to rotate, and the attachment of the ball polishing cassette 681 is completed.

When removing the kneading cassette 681, pull the operation portion 694a of the ny latch 694 forward to unlock it, and then reverse the above procedure to remove the kneading cassette 681.

By the way, when the Kuma cassette 681 is installed, if it is in an incomplete state such as forgetting to lock the Kuma motor base 686 or the cassette pressing piece 693, the Kuma cassette 681 will come off during the game, and the game will be interrupted. As a result, there is a risk that the interest of the player may be reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the user forgets to lock the Kuma motor base 686 or the cassette pressing piece 693, the Kuma cassette 681 will not come off. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 48(a), when the Kuma motor base 686 is not positioned at the lock position and the cassette pressing piece 693 does not press the Kuma cassette 681 backward, the door frame is opened. 3 to the main body frame 4, the inclined guide surface 102a of the protrusion 102 of the door frame main body 100 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end of the Kuma motor base 686 (FIG. 48(b)). ).

At this time, the cassette pressing piece 693 attached to the front end of the Kuma motor base 686 does not remain projected forward as shown in FIG. Since the cassette pressing piece 693 does not abut on the door frame 3 and rotate in the opposite direction to the kneading cassette 681, the cassette pressing piece 693 and the door do not rotate. The frame 3 will not be damaged.

Then, when the door frame 3 moves further in the closing direction, the leading end of the Kuma motor base 686 is pushed by the guide surface 102a and rotates rightward toward the locked position. As a result, the rotation connecting portion 692 protruding from the right side surface of the Kuma motor base 686 is inserted into the connection hole 681b of the Kuma cassette 681, and the positioning pin 686b of the Kuma motor base 686 is inserted into the positioning hole of the Kuma cassette 681. 681c to restrict (lock) the forward movement of the ball polishing cassette 681. Also, the cassette pressing piece 693 presses the ball polishing cassette 681 rearward by the biasing force of the spring 695 (see FIG. 48(c)). As a result, the kneading cassette 681 is locked and will not come off forward.

Although not shown, a protrusion may be provided on the rear surface of the door frame 3 so that the operating portion 694a of the ny latch 694 can be pushed backward. As a result, even if the cassette pressing piece 693 is forgotten to be locked by the ny latch 694, it can be locked, and the dropout (disengagement) of the balled cassette 681 can be reliably prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the protruding portion 102 of the door frame 3 moves the Kuma motor base 686 to the lock position to lock the Kuma cassette 681 in an unremovable manner. For example, the ball shooting unit 550 and the foul unit 570 are detachably provided, and locking means for locking the ball shooting unit 550 and the like in a non-detachable manner is provided. When closed with respect to the body frame 4, the projecting portion 102 may come into contact with the locking means so that the ball shooting unit 550 and the like can be locked in a non-detachable manner.

In the ball lifting unit 650 of the present embodiment, when it is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 faces the ball discharge port 600d of the circulation ball path unit 600. A game ball B that has flowed through the shaped ball storage passage 604 is supplied. The game ball B supplied to the ball-lifting entrance passage 651 touches the ball-lifting entrance ground sheet metal 655 to remove static electricity, and is detected by the lifting entrance sensor 653, and the lifting spiral shaft 661 supplied to the lower end. At this time, the front end of the game ball B is inserted into the ball polishing mouth 668a that penetrates forward, and the front end of the game ball B contacts the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing mechanism 680, and the vertically long ball polishing mouth 668a pushes left and right. Movement in any direction is restricted.

In this state, when the lifting spiral shaft 661 rotates in the direction in which the game ball B is lifted by the lifting motor 664, the game ball B is pushed from below by the lifting groove 661a and moves upward along the kuma mouth 668a. It will happen. At this time, the game ball B moves upward while rotating while being in contact with the vertically extending portion of the inner peripheral edge of the kuma mouth 668a and the lifting groove 661a. As a result, the portion of the game ball B in contact with the polishing cloth 682 on the front end side changes as the game ball B rises (rotates), and the entire surface of the game ball B can be evenly polished.

Then, when the game ball B reaches the upper end side of the lifting spiral shaft 661, it enters the ball lifting outlet passage 652, touches the ball lifting outlet ground sheet metal 656, and is detected by the lifting outlet sensor 654. From the downstream end of the ball lifting exit passage 652, the ball is sent to the ball feeding unit. At this time, even if the game ball B is polished by the polishing cloth 682 and charged with static electricity by being lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660, the ball lifting outlet ground sheet metal 656 upstream of the lifting outlet sensor 654 The static electricity is removed by the contact with the roller, so that the trouble due to the static electricity of Kuma does not occur in the lifting exit sensor 654, the frame control board 740, and the like.

On the other hand, in the kneading mechanism 680, with the kneading cassette 681 attached, when the kneading motor 688 rotates the kneading feed gear 684 clockwise in the right side view, the rear surface of the kneading cassette 681 on the polishing cloth 682 is rotated to the outside. The exposed portion is accommodated in the ball polishing cassette 681 through the slit on the lower side of the ball polishing cassette 681 . At this time, since the portion of the polishing cloth 682 exposed to the outside is pulled downward, the portion of the polishing cloth 682 housed in the ball polishing cassette 681 is pulled from the outside through the slit on the upper side of the ball polishing cassette 681. It will be sent out.

The polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing mechanism 680 intermittently moves at a slow speed. In this embodiment, every time 1000 game balls B are shot, the polishing cloth 682 moves by 0.17 mm.

Thus, according to the ball lifting unit 650 of this embodiment, the game balls B discharged from the circulation ball path unit 600 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 700 while polishing the game balls B.

[4-6. Ball forwarding unit]
The ball feeding unit 700 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57 and the like. FIG. 55(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the body frame, and FIG. 55(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the body frame. FIG. 56(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 56(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 57 is a front cross-sectional view of the ball feed unit cut at the position of the sensor before firing.

The ball feeding unit 700 is for supplying the game balls B lifted by the ball lifting unit 650 to the ball shooting unit 550 one by one. The ball feeding unit 700 is attached to the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k provided on the rear side of the base wall portion 501b of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding unit 700 faces upward from the upper surface of the base wall portion 501b so as to be sandwiched between the base wall portion 501b and the circulating ball path unit 600, and is detachably mounted upward.

The ball feeding unit 700 has a ball supply port 701 which is open at the rear and into which game balls B supplied from the ball lifting unit 650 can enter, and a ball launching pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550 which is open at the front. A ball delivery port 702 for delivering a game ball B, a ball delivery passage 703 connecting the ball supply port 701 and the ball delivery port 702 and through which the game ball B can flow, and a game ball circulating in the ball delivery passage 703. A sensor 704 before firing capable of detecting B, a movable member 705 for sending game balls B detected by the sensor 704 before firing from a ball delivery port 702 one by one, and a movable member 705 for moving the ball. A ball feed solenoid 706 for throwing the game ball B to the ball shooting unit 550, and a ball feed relay board 707 relaying the connection between the ball feed solenoid 706 and the ball-feeding sensor 704 and the frame control board 740. I have.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 700 includes a transmission member 708 that transmits forward and backward movement of the plunger in the ball feeding solenoid 706 to move the ball feeding movable member 705, and a box-like opening that is rearward and that contains a sensor 704 before firing and a ball. A unit base 709 on which a feed solenoid 706 and the like are provided, and a flat unit cover 710 attached so as to close an opening at the rear end of the unit base 709 are provided.

A ball supply port 701 of the ball feeding unit 700 is provided through a unit cover 710 constituting the rear surface of the ball feeding unit 700, and is provided in a portion on the upper right side from the center in front view. The ball supply port 701 is formed in a size through which the game balls B can pass one by one.

The ball delivery port 702 is provided so as to pass through a unit base 709 forming the front side of the ball delivery unit 700 in the front-rear direction, and is provided at a portion below the center in a front view. The ball delivery port 702 is formed to have a size through which the game balls B can pass one by one.

The ball feed passage 703 connects the ball feed port 701 and the ball feed port 702, and extends from the ball feed port 701 to the upper portion of the ball feed port 702 so as to be lowered leftward. It extends downward to the site of the delivery port 702 . A sensor 704 before firing is provided in the vicinity of the left end of the portion extending leftward in the ball feeding passage 703 . A ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 is positioned at a portion of the ball feeding passage 703 extending vertically behind the ball feeding port 702. As shown in FIG.

The before-fire sensor 704 is provided in the vicinity of the left end of the ball feed passage 703 extending downward to the left. In other words, the shooting front sensor 704 is provided in the ball feeding movable member 705 just upstream of the ball receiving portion 705a. This shooting front sensor 704 detects the game ball B in a non-contact manner, for example, by detecting a change in induced current.

In the ball feeding passage 703 provided with the shooting front sensor 704, the flow of the game ball B is stopped in the same manner as the ball lifting entrance passage 651 and the ball lifting exit passage 652.例文帳に追加Therefore, similarly to the lifting entrance sensor 653 and the lifting exit sensor 654, the pre-launch sensor 704 is provided with a threshold value for ON determination and OFF determination. Only, ON or OFF is determined, and the presence or absence of the game ball B can be reliably determined (detected). It should be noted that the sensor 704 before firing according to the present embodiment has an ON threshold of 12 ms and an OFF threshold of 12 ms, for example.

The ball-feeding movable member 705 is driven by the ball-feeding solenoid 706 to release the game balls B in the ball-feeding passage 703 one by one from the ball-feeding port 702 and supply them to the ball-throwing unit 550. is. The ball feeding movable member 705 has a U-shaped opening to the right and front and rear, a ball receiving portion 705a having a bottom wall inclined forward and capable of accommodating only one game ball B, and a ball receiving portion 705a. a rod portion 705b extending leftward from the left end of the rod portion 705b; a bearing portion 705c that penetrates the left end of the rod portion 705b in the front-rear direction and into which the first shaft pin 710a of the unit cover 710 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable; It has a movable gear portion 705d that is fan-shaped to the right and coaxial with the portion 705c, and a ball stop portion 705e that forms the upper portion of the U-shaped ball receiving portion 705a.

The ball feed solenoid 706 is for moving the ball feed movable member 705 to supply the game balls B in the ball feed passage 703 one by one from the ball feed port 702 to the ball shooting unit 550 . The ball feed solenoid 706 is provided at the upper left corner in a front view between the unit base 709 and the unit cover 710 with the magnetic pole portion that generates a magnetic force when energized directed downward. Although the details will be described later, the ball forwarding solenoid 706 performs a series of hard operations based on a predetermined firing sequence in association with the firing solenoid 553 .

The ball feeder relay board 707 is for relaying the connection between the before-fire sensor 704 and the ball feeder solenoid 706 and the frame control board 740 . The ball feed relay board 707 is provided on the right side of the firing front sensor 704 between the unit base 709 and the unit cover 710 .

The transmission member 708 transmits forward and backward movements of the plunger of the ball feed solenoid 706 so that the ball feed movable member 705 can move. The transmission member 708 includes a sheet metal holding portion 708b to which a sheet metal 708a that can be magnetically attached to the magnetic pole portion of the ball feed solenoid 706 is attached, a rod portion 708c extending rightward from the sheet metal holding portion 708b, and a rod portion 708c. and a bearing portion 708d through which the second shaft pin 710b of the unit cover 710 is inserted so that the second shaft pin 710b of the unit cover 710 is relatively rotatable. and a driving gear portion 708e that meshes with the movable gear portion 705d of the member 705 .

The unit base 709 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward, and a ball delivery port 702 is provided in the front surface near the bottom of the center so as to penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. The unit base 709 cooperates with the unit cover 710 to form a ball feed passage 703, and also includes a pre-firing sensor 704, a ball feed movable member 705, a ball feed solenoid 706, a ball feed relay board 707, and a transmission member 708. , holds

The unit base 709 has a knob portion 709a which is horizontally spaced on the upper surface and recessed downward, and an elastic claw 709b which is provided at the lower right corner of the front surface. The knob portion 709a is formed to be grasped by an operator from above, and is used when removing the ball feeding unit 700 from the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 upward. The side surfaces of the knob portion 709a that are close to each other are formed in a dovetail groove shape, and are inclined so as to approach downward. On the side surface of the knob portion 709a, a plurality of ridges extending back and forth are arranged vertically. When the ball feeding unit 700 is attached to the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501, the elastic claw 709b is engaged with the locking hole of the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k so that it cannot be removed upward. It is for

When the ball feeding unit 700 is to be removed from the main body frame base 501, the elastic claw 709b, which penetrates the locking hole of the base wall portion 501b and faces forward, is pushed backward to be elastically deformed. It can be removed upward from the ball feed unit mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 by grasping and pulling up the knob portion 709a.

The unit cover 710 is provided with a ball supply port 701 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right portion from the center in the front view. The unit cover 710 cooperates with the unit base 709 to form a ball feed passage 703, and also includes a pre-firing sensor 704, a ball feed movable member 705, a ball feed solenoid 706, a ball feed relay board 707, and a transmission member 708. , holds The unit cover 710 has a first shaft pin 710a and a second shaft pin 710b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape near the lower left corner when viewed from the front. By inserting the first shaft pin 710a into the bearing portion 705c of the movable ball feed member 705, the movable ball feed member 705 can be rotatably supported. By inserting the second shaft pin 710b into the bearing portion 708d of the transmission member 708, the transmission member 708 can be rotatably supported.

In the ball feed unit 700 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the first shaft pin 710a is inserted into the bearing portion 705c of the movable ball feed member 705, and the second shaft pin 710b is inserted into the bearing portion 708d of the transmission member 708. is inserted, and the movable gear portion 705d of the ball feeding movable member 705 and the drive gear portion 708e of the transmission member 708 are meshed with each other. In this state, the ball receiving portion 705a at the right end of the ball-feeding movable member 705 is positioned in the portion extending vertically behind the ball-feeding port 702 in the ball-feeding passage 703. When the feed movable member 705 rotates, the ball receiving portion 705a moves up and down in the vertically extending portion of the ball feed passage 703. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state of the ball feeding unit 700, the ball feeding solenoid 706 is de-energized (OFF). Therefore, the sheet metal 708a of the transmission member 708 is separated downward from the magnetic pole portion of the ball feed solenoid 706 by gravity. In this state, the lower surface of the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 is in contact with the bottom wall of the downstream end of the ball feeding passage 703, and the front end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a is aligned with the ball delivery port 702. , the right end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a does not match the ball feeding passage 703. Therefore, the game ball B flowing from the upstream toward the ball receiving portion 705a is not received by the ball receiving portion 705a by coming into contact with the U-shaped upper ball stop portion 705e of the ball receiving portion 705a. On the other hand, the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a rolls forward due to the inclination of the bottom wall of the ball receiving portion 705a and is discharged forward from the ball outlet 702. FIG.

The ball stopping portion 705e of the movable ball feeding member 705 is in contact with the center of rotation of the movable ball feeding member 705 as shown in FIG. It is located on the axis connecting the center of sphere B. As a result, since the ball pressure from the game ball B acting on the ball stop portion 705e can be received by the first shaft pin 710a, the ball pressure of the plurality of game balls B stored in the ball feeding unit 700 , the ball feed movable member 705 can be prevented from rotating and dropping to the ball shooting unit 550 side.

In addition, in a normal state, the ball stopper portion 705e is positioned on the axis connecting the center of the first shaft pin 710a and the center of the game ball B that is ball stoppered, so that vibrations from the surroundings may occur. Even if the game ball B in contact with the ball stop portion 705e vibrates up and down, the ball feed movable member 705 is moved so that the ball stop portion 705e follows the vibration of the game ball B. It can be rotated around the first shaft pin 710a, and it is possible to prevent the ball stopper from being released by the ball stopper portion 705e. This prevents the game ball B released from the ball stop by the ball stop portion 705e due to a thump or the like from being discharged to the foul unit 570 via the ball launching unit 550 and added to the number of held balls as a foul ball. can do.

In this normal state, when the ball feed solenoid 706 is energized (ON), the sheet metal 708a of the transmission member 708 is attracted to the upper magnetic pole portion by the magnetic force generated in the magnetic pole portion of the ball feed solenoid 706, and the transmission member 708 is moved. It rotates clockwise around the bearing portion 708d. When the transmission member 708 rotates in the clockwise direction, the movable gear portion 705d of the movable ball feed member 705 meshing with the driving gear portion 708e of the transmission member 708 causes the movable ball feed member 705 to move around the bearing portion 705c. As a result, the ball receiving portion 705a is moved upward.

When the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 moves upward, the front end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a does not coincide with the ball delivery port 702, and the right end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a moves toward the ball feeding passage 703. , and the game ball B is received from the ball feeding passage 703 by the ball receiving portion 705a. In this state, since the right end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a does not match the ball delivery port 702, the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a rolls forward and is discharged from the ball delivery port 702. no. In addition, since the ball receiving portion 705a has a size capable of accommodating only one game ball B, when one game ball B is received by the ball receiving portion 705a, the game ball B on the upstream side of the ball receiving portion 705a 705a is not accepted.

After that, when the energization of the ball feed solenoid 706 is stopped (OFF), the attraction of the transmission member 708 from the magnetic pole portion of the ball feed solenoid 706 to the sheet metal 708a is released. At this time, since the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 receives the game ball B, the weight of the game ball B causes the ball receiving portion 705a to move downward. The transmission member 708 rotates clockwise around the bearing portion 705c, and the transmission member 708 moves around the bearing portion 708d through the driving gear portion 708e that meshes with the movable gear portion 705d of the ball feeding movable member 705. and rotate counterclockwise to return to the normal state.

When the ball feeding unit 700 returns to its normal state, the front end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 coincides with the ball delivery port 702, so that the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a It rolls forward and is discharged from the ball delivery port 702 to the ball launching unit 550 .

Thus, according to the ball sending unit 700 of the present embodiment, the game balls B can be sent one by one to the ball shooting unit 550 by turning the ball sending solenoid 706 ON/OFF.

[4-7. Ball receiving tray]
The ball receiving tray 720 in the body frame 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 6, 7, 20, and the like. The ball receiving tray 720 is provided below the circulating ball path unit 600 and is for receiving game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 . The ball receiving tray 720 is formed in the shape of a container that is open upward, and the bottom wall is slanted downward toward the front.

The ball receiving tray 720 is attached by being inserted from the front into the tray insertion recess 501f of the main body frame base 501 . The ball receiving tray 720 has elastic claws 721 on both left and right side walls, and when attached to the main body frame base 501, the elastic claws 721 are locked by the locking claws 501n of the main body frame base 501 and move forward. It never leaves. When the ball receiving tray 720 is removed, the elastic claw 721 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the ball receiving tray 720 to release the lock and allow the ball receiving tray 720 to be pulled forward.

When attaching the ball receiving tray 720 to the tray insertion recess 501f of the main body frame base 501, the ball receiving tray 720 is moved rearward from the front of the tray insertion recess 501f and inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f. At this time, since the front end of the engaging claw 501n is inclined like an arrowhead, when the elastic claw 721 of the ball receiving tray 720 comes into contact with the engaging claw 501n from the front, the elastic claw 721 is pushed inward by the arrowhead-shaped inclination. and the ball receiving tray 720 can be inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f. Then, when the elastic claw 721 of the ball receiving tray 720 passes through the portion of the locking claw 501n and is no longer in contact with the locking claw 501n, the elastically deformed elastic claw 721 returns to its original state, and the locking claw returns to its original state. 501n to prevent the ball receiving tray 720 from sliding forward.

Since the ball receiving tray 720 is placed on the bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f which is inclined so that the front end side is lowered, the game balls B ejected from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 are stored. When it becomes heavy, it tries to slide forward due to the inclination of the bottom wall. Then, when the locking of the locking claw 501n by the elastic claw 721 is released, the ball receiving tray 720 automatically slides forward due to the weight of the stored game balls B, and the ball receiving tray 720 moves into the tray insertion recess 501f. can be easily removed from the

Although illustration is omitted, the ball feeder unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the body frame 4 so as to pass through the base wall portion 501b of the body frame base 501 from the front and to the ball feeder relay board 707. Since the wiring connector is connected, even if an attempt is made to remove upward from the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k with the wiring connector connected, the wiring connector interferes and cannot be removed.

Further, when the ball feeding unit 700 is attached to the main body frame 4 and assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is positioned above the ball feeding unit 700, and the ball feeding unit 700 is pulled out upward. never. In addition, when the game board 5 is inserted from the front into the game board insertion part 502 in a state in which the ball feeding unit 700 is not completely inserted into the ball feeding unit mounting part 501k of the main body frame 4, the upper part of the ball feeding unit 700 is pushed downward by the game board 5 (game panel 1100) and can be completely inserted.

[4-8. Frame substrate unit]
The frame substrate unit 730 in the body frame 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, FIGS. FIG. 58 is a perspective view showing a state in which the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame, and the back cover and the frame substrate unit are also opened. FIG. 59 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the frame substrate unit in the outer frame and main body frame. FIG. 60 is a reference photograph showing the rear side of the body frame with the frame substrate unit opened. Although details will be described later, the frame control board 740 displays the number of balls held in the number display unit 140, performs settlement processing by operating the counting button switch 180, ball launching unit 550, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit. 700, etc., and management (monitoring) of the game balls B in the circulating ball path unit 600, and the like.

The frame substrate unit 730 is attached to a portion behind the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable. The frame board unit 730 includes a frame control board 740 , a power supply board 750 , an interface board 760 , and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 765 .

The frame board unit 730 includes a unit base 770 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable, and a frame control board box 771 attached to the rear side of the unit base 770 and housing the frame control board 740 . , a power supply board box 772 mounted between the frame control board box 771 and the unit base 770 and containing the power supply board 750, and an interface board mounted on the unit base 770 on the left side of the frame control board box 771 in front view. 760 and a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 765, and an interface board box 773, and a ny latch 774 for fixing the unit base 770 to the main body frame base unit 500 so that it cannot be opened and closed. The nylatch 774 has the same configuration as the nylatch 694 described above, and a detailed description of the configuration thereof will be omitted.

Although not shown, the frame control board 740 includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, a CPU that executes processing programs and commands, and the like. .

The frame control board 740 has a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing the information stored in the RAM, and an enclosed game ball B from the ball outlet 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside. Clears the number of balls held by the player stored in the RAM or the like and the number of balls held by the player stored in the ball receiving switch 742 used when the ball is pulled out to (the ball receiving tray 720), and also clears the display on the number of balls held display section 140 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 63).

The frame control board 740 is connected to a main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 by two-way communication and to a game ball lending device connection terminal board 765 by two-way communication. The frame control board 740 is connected to the game ball lending device 8 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 765 .

The frame control board 740 is connected to the number display unit 140 of the door frame 3, the firing stop switch 161, the handle touch sensor 162, the handle rotation sensor 163, and the counting button switch 180.

In addition, the frame control board 740 includes the door open switch 507 of the main body frame 4, the frame open switch 508, the firing solenoid 553, the firing subtraction sensor 554, the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, the foul ball sensor 607, and the circulating ball shortage. A sensor 621, an excess ball circulation sensor 622, a lift inlet sensor 653, a lift outlet sensor 654, a lift motor 664, a lift motor index sensor 666, a ball motor 688, a sensor 704 before firing, and a ball feed solenoid 706 are connected. ing.

The power board 750 is for supplying power of a predetermined voltage to the frame control board 740, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. A power switch 751 is provided near the right end of the rear surface of the power board 750 . The power switch 751 is exposed rearward from the power board box 772 so that it can be operated.

The interface board 760 is for relaying connections between the frame control board 740 and various relay boards provided on the door frame 3 side and the game board 5 side.

The game ball lending device connection terminal plate 765 is for relaying the connection between the frame control board 740 and the game ball lending device 8 .

The unit base 770 is elongated in the left and right direction, and has a hinge shaft 770a at its left end which is supported by the frame substrate unit shaft support portion 504d provided on the rear surface of the main body frame speaker box 504 of the main body frame base unit 500. Two nylatches 774 are attached to the right end with the operating portion 774a facing rearward.

The unit base 770 includes a rear surface portion 770b extending rightward from the left end in a plan view by a quarter of the total length in the left-right direction, and a connecting portion extending short forward from the right end of the rear surface portion 770b. It has a portion 770c and a front portion 770d extending from the front end to the right end of the connecting portion 770c. Accordingly, the unit base 770 has a step in the front-rear direction between the rear surface portion 770b and the front surface portion 770d.

An interface board box 773 is detachably attached to the rear side of the rear surface portion 770 b of the unit base 770 . On the other hand, a power board box 772 is detachably attached to the rear side of the front face portion 770d of the unit base 770, and a frame control board box 771 is detachably attached to the rear side of the power board box 772.

In addition, the unit base 770 is provided with a power supply harness accommodating portion 770e that extends left and right and is recessed from the rear to the front above the portion where the frame control board box 771 and the power supply board box 772 are attached. there is The power harness accommodating portion 770e has a wide portion near the left end near the hinge shaft 770a. The power harness accommodating portion 770e is provided with guide ribs and can accommodate the bundled power harness PH (see FIG. 60). As a result, the power harness PH (power cord) does not interfere with assembly until the frame substrate unit 730 is attached to the main body frame base unit 500, and the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 59, since the rear part of the power harness housing part 770e overlaps part of the lower end of the back cover 505, the power harness can be removed when the body frame 4 and the like are conveyed. Even if the PH is in a free state, it is possible to prevent the power harness PH from popping out by contacting the back cover 505, thereby preventing the power harness PH from popping out and being damaged by accidental catching or the like.

The frame substrate unit 730 of this embodiment is configured such that the hinge shaft 770a provided at the left end of the unit base 770 is pivotally supported by the frame substrate unit shaft support portion 504d of the main body frame base unit 500 in a normal state (used state). A ny latch 774 attached to the right end of the unit base 770 is attached to a support projection 501r provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. As shown in FIG. In this state, the frame substrate unit 730 covers the rear of the circulating ball path unit 600 and the ball lifting unit 650 attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b, making it impossible to approach them.

In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 20, the front part 770d of the unit base 770, the power supply board box 772, and the frame control board box 771 of the frame board unit 730 are connected to the box expansion part 504c of the main body frame speaker box 504. located above. At this time, since the front face portion 770d and the power supply board box 772 are formed shorter in the vertical direction than the frame control board box 771, wiring and the like can be accommodated between the power supply board box 772 and the box extension part 504c. A space is formed.

Further, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 59, the front end of the back cover 505 is positioned behind the upper ny latch 774 so that the operating portion 774a of the ny latch 774 cannot be pulled. Also, in a normal state, the lower portion of the rear cover 505 overlaps the rear of the frame substrate unit 730 . As a result, unless the rear cover 505 is opened from the main body frame base 501, the rear cover 505 interferes (contacts) and the frame substrate unit 730 cannot be opened rearward (opening is prevented). is configured to

Therefore, in a normal state, even if for some reason the ny latch 774 is unlocked and the frame substrate unit 730 attempts to hinge backward, the bottom of the back cover 505 is positioned behind it so as to overlap. It is possible to prevent the frame substrate unit 730 from opening from the main body frame base 501 due to hinge rotation. As a result, by opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 while the frame substrate unit 730 is opened from the main body frame base 501, the frame substrate unit 730 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 and the frame substrate unit 730 is damaged. You can avoid being lost.

When checking the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, etc. on the rear side of the main body frame 4 from this normal state, first, the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2. . After the rear cover 505 is opened rearward from the main body frame base 501, the operation portion 774a of the ny latch 774 is pulled rearward to release the lock. , and the hinge shaft 770a at the left end, the frame substrate unit 730 can be opened rearward. By opening the frame substrate unit 730 rearward, the circulating ball path unit 600 and the ball lifting unit 650 attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b are exposed, making it possible to approach them (FIG. 58). and FIG. 60).

When the frame substrate unit 730 is opened rearward, as shown in FIG. 60, the main body frame base 501 is black and opaque, while the main body frame speaker box 504, the circulating sphere path unit 600, and the sphere lifting unit are shown. 650, etc. are made of a transparent member, and the inside thereof can be visually recognized (confirmed) from the outside.

In order to return the frame substrate unit 730 to the normal state from the state in which it is opened rearward, the normal state can be restored by performing the procedure opposite to that described above.

By the way, after opening the frame board unit 730 from the main body frame base 501, when returning to the normal state, if the rear cover 505 is first closed to the main body frame base 501, even if the frame board unit 730 is to be closed, The frame substrate unit 730 interferes (contacts) with the back cover 505 and cannot be closed. In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the frame substrate unit 730 is open (the back cover 505 is open), the frame substrate unit 730 and the back cover 505 are is prevented from closing by interfering (abutting) with. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the frame substrate unit 730 has not been closed.

Also, even if you forget to push (forget to lock) the operating portion 774a of the ny latch 774 after the frame substrate unit 730 is closed with respect to the main body frame base 501, closing the rear cover 505 with respect to the main body frame base 501 will The lower right front end of the cover 505 contacts the operation portion 774a of the ny latch 774 from behind, and can press and lock the operation portion 774a.

[4-9. lock unit]
The lock unit 780 in the body frame 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7 and the like. The lock unit 780 is attached from the rear along the right edge of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The lock unit 780 is for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 .

The lock unit 780 includes a cylindrical lock cylinder 781 that passes through the cylinder insertion opening 501m of the main body frame base 501 from the rear and the front end of which protrudes forward, a keyhole 782 that is provided on the front end surface of the lock cylinder 781, and a keyhole. When the key corresponding to 782 is inserted and rotated in a predetermined direction, the door frame lock claw 783 that unlocks the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is inserted, and the key corresponding to the key hole 782 is inserted. It has an outer frame lock claw 784 that unlocks the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 when rotated in the judgment direction.

[5. A brief description of the game board]
The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has the same board configuration as the game board 5 shown in FIG. The game board 5 includes a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a special winning opening 2005, in which a privilege is given by receiving the game ball B, in a game area 5a into which the game ball B is driven. etc. are provided, and the player operates the handle 160 so that the game ball B can be received in the winning hole, and enjoys hitting the game ball B. The game board 5 is detachably attached to the game board insertion portion 502 of the main body frame 4 from the front side. The game board 5 is visible from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and is a game area into which game balls B are hit by the player operating a handle 160. 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100 and a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement so as to be able to come into contact with the game balls B in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. ing.

The front constituent member 1000 of the game board 5 is entirely transparent. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front structural member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front and extending obliquely to the upper right side past the upper end of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front is a game area. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of 5a and inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

The front structural member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 which is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front structural member 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004. from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is discharged downward from the game board 5 behind the game panel 1100 (out ball receiving port 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600) without being returned to the game area 5a.

The game board 5 is provided behind the game panel 1100 and is controlled by a main control board 1310 that controls the contents of the game performed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, and a control signal from the main control board 1310. and a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on the function display unit 1400 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side.

The game board 5 is arranged behind the game panel 1100 and in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, with a peripheral control board 1510 provided behind the game panel 1100, and can display a predetermined effect image. A performance display device 1600, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided.

The game board 5 (front unit 2000) has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open and capable of receiving game balls B hit into the game area 5a, and provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a. A gate 2010 through which the game ball B can pass, and a first start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and where the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed by accepting the game ball B. 2003 and the second starting port 2004, and a large winning prize that allows the reception of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 and the second starting port 2004. a mouth 2005;

The first starting port 2003 is provided directly above the out port 1008 below the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided in the center of the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is provided in the attacker unit 2400, and opens and closes so as to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate 2010.例文帳に追加

The big winning opening 2005 is provided in the attacker unit 2400 attached to the lower right corner in the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a general prize winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general prize winning hole 2001, a gate sensor 2011 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate 2010, and a first start sensor. A first starting hole sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the hole 2003, a second starting hole sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2004, and a big winning hole 2005. and a large winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B (see FIG. 63).

The game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 is detected by the general prize winning port sensor 3001 behind the game panel 1100, and discharged from the game board 5 to the safe ball receiving port 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below. be done. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2101 behind the game panel 1100, and then reaches the safe ball receiving port 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below the game board 5. discharged to The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 behind the game panel 1100, and then reaches the safe ball receiving port 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below the game board 5. discharged to The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402 behind the game panel 1100, and discharged from the game board 5 to the safe ball receiving hole 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below. be done.

The main control board 1310 controls the game using the game ball B in the game area 5a in the pachinko machine 1. FIG. The main control board 1310 is connected to the frame control board 740 provided in the main body frame 4 for two-way communication, and is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 in one direction only for output signals.

The main control board 1310 receives detection signals of the game ball B from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2011, the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2402, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 outputs a drive signal to a starting opening solenoid 2412 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004, an attacker solenoid 2414 for opening and closing the big winning opening 2005, and the like.

The main control board 1310 outputs a command of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls when the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 . Since this is the same as the conventional pachinko machine, the software of the main control board 1310 does not have to be changed. When this winning ball command is received, the frame control board 740 interprets it as a winning ball addition signal. Also, when the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2003 is detected by the first starting hole sensor 2101, a predetermined number (for example, one) prize ball command is output. Also, when the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2004 is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401, a predetermined number (for example, one) prize ball command is output. Furthermore, when the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) winning ball commands are output.

In addition, the main control board 1310 outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 signals such as the lottery results of the normal symbols and the lottery results of the special symbols.

The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the lottery result of normal symbols, the lottery result of special symbols, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2010. A normal symbol display made up of two LEDs and a normal reserved display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserved normal symbols drawn by passing game balls B through a gate 2010 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, and a first starting A first special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the opening 2003, and a second special design drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004. A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery result, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 and have.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is "hit" or the like. A round indicator consisting of two LEDs.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 . The peripheral control board 1510 causes the effect display device 1600 to display an effect image or execute a light emitting effect, a movable effect, etc. based on a signal sent from the main control board 1310 .

[6. Game ball flow]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing various passages for game balls on the rear surface side of the body frame from the rear surface. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the flow of game balls in the body frame.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player does not operate the handle 160, as shown in FIG. It is stored in a portion below the disk 5 . The circulation path R of the game balls B in the main body frame 4 is provided with a foul unit 570, a circulation ball path unit 600, a ball lifting unit 650, a ball feeding unit 700, and a ball shooting unit 550 in order from the upstream side. The circulation path R is composed of an out ball passage 601, a safe ball passage 602, a foul ball passage 603, a ball storage passage 604, a ball lifting inlet passage 651, a ball lifting outlet passage 652, and the like.

A plurality of sensors for detecting game balls B circulating in the circulation path R are, from the upstream side, a safe ball sensor 606, an out ball sensor 605, a foul ball sensor 607, a circulating ball excess sensor 622, and a circulating ball shortage sensor. 621, a lift entrance sensor 653, a lift exit sensor 654, a firing near sensor 704, and a firing subtraction sensor 554 are provided in this order. Based on signals from these various sensors, the frame control board 740 executes various control processes, which will be described later.

When the player does not operate the handle 160, the safe ball sensor 606, the out ball sensor 605, the foul ball sensor 607, and the excessive ball circulation sensor 622 are OFF (non-detected), and the ball circulation is insufficient. The sensor 621, the lift entrance sensor 653, the lift exit sensor 654, the launch sensor 704, and the launch subtraction sensor 554 are ON (detection).

In the circulation path R in the body frame 4, a large number of game balls B are stored in a row. A large number of game balls B lined up in a row are located on the ball launch pad 552b of the launch unit cover 552 in the ball launch unit 550 at the top, and the gauge in the ball storage passage 604 of the circulation ball path unit 600 at the rear end. It is located upstream of the ball extraction shutter 615 within the range of the portion 620 .

In the circulation path R, the portion between the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 and the lifting outlet sensor 654 in the ball lifting unit 650 is the length of a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls B lined up. A specific number (for example, four) of game balls B less than a predetermined number are lined up. This is to secure a space for receiving the lifted game ball B even if one game ball B is lifted when returning the lifting spiral shaft 661 to the origin.

Also, in the circulation route R, a predetermined number (for example, 10) are arranged between the pre-launch sensor 704 and the lifting exit sensor 654 . As a result, even after the detection of the game ball B in the lifting exit sensor 654 is turned OFF (non-detection), when the game ball B continues to be shot in the ball shooting unit 550, the rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661 It is possible to avoid running out of the game balls B to be shot until the game balls B are lifted up and replenished.

Then, when the player operates the handle 160 to drive the shooting solenoid 553 of the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B placed on the ball shooting table 552b of the shooting unit cover 552 is shot, and the shooting subtraction sensor At 554, detection of game ball B becomes non-detection (OFF). As a result, the number of balls possessed by the player is subtracted by one (ball possession subtraction processing to be described later). After that, the ball-feeding solenoid 706 of the ball-feeding unit 700 is energized for a predetermined time, the ball receiving part 705a of the ball-feeding movable member 705 moves up and down, and one game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b. , the firing subtraction sensor 554 is in a detection (ON) state.

When game balls B are shot one by one by the operation of the player's handle 160, a plurality of game balls stored between the shooting front sensor 704 and the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 (ball lifting exit passage 652). The number of balls B decreases one by one, and eventually the detection of the game ball B in the lifting exit sensor 654 becomes non-detection (OFF). Then, when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls B are shot after the lifting exit sensor 654 becomes non-detected, the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by the lifting motor 664 of the ball lifting unit 650. , and after rotating three times and supplying three game balls B to the ball-lifting exit passage 652, it is stopped (lifting motor operation processing to be described later).

When the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by the lifting motor 664, the game ball B located at the downstream end of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 moves to the lower end side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 and is moved upward. . As a result, a large number of game balls B lined up in the ball-lifting entrance passage 651 and the ball storage passage 604 flow downstream, and the number of game balls B stored in the ball storage passage 604 is reduced.

The game ball B fired from the ball shooting unit 550 and hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 is an out port 1008 or a winning port (general winning port 2001, first start port 2003, second start port 2004, It is accepted in any of the big winning openings 2005). The game ball B received in the out port 1008 of the game board 5 is ejected downward from the game board 5 and delivered to the out ball receiving port 600 a of the circulation ball path unit 600 . The game ball B delivered to the out ball receiving port 600 a passes through the out ball passage 601 to be detected by the out ball sensor 605 and sent to the ball storage passage 604 .

On the other hand, the game ball B received in the winning opening of the game board 5 is ejected downward from the game board 5 and delivered to the safe ball receiving opening 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600. FIG. The game ball B delivered to the safe ball receiving port 600b passes through the safe ball passage 602, is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, and is sent to the ball storage passage 604.例文帳に追加

When the game ball B is detected by the out ball sensor 605, the number of out balls is counted, and when the game ball B is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, the number of safe balls is counted. As a result, it is possible to calculate the correct ball output rate of the game ball B. The calculated ball payout rate is displayed on a display section (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310 . Since this ball payout rate changes according to the game state, the ball payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) - number of safe balls within a predetermined period) / number of out balls within a predetermined period = ball output rate within a predetermined period.

By the way, the game ball B that was not hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 even though it was shot from the ball launching unit 550 (ball launching table 552b) is recovered as a foul ball by the foul unit 570, and then circulated. It is delivered to the foul ball receptacle 600 c of the ball path unit 600 . The game ball B delivered to the foul ball receiving port 600 c flows through the foul ball passage 603 and is detected by the foul ball sensor 607 and sent to the ball storage passage 604 . When the game ball B is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, the number of balls possessed by the player is added by one (ball possession addition process described later).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls B are enclosed without being discharged to the outside or supplied from the outside. never touch.

[7. Various control processing]
Next, various control processes in the frame control board 740 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 76 and the like. FIG. 63 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing firing permission processing. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the possession ball subtraction process, and FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the possession ball addition process using a foul ball. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the firing control process. FIG. 68 is a time chart showing the operation of the firing solenoid and ball feed solenoid in the firing sequence. FIG. 69(a) is a flow chart showing a firing control process different from that of FIG. 67, and (b) is a flow chart showing a possession ball subtraction process in the case of the firing control process of (a).

Also, FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing the prize ball processing. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the lifting motor operation processing, FIG. 72 is a table showing the relationship between the lifting entrance sensor, the lifting exit sensor, and the operation of the lifting motor, and FIG. It is a graph which shows the relationship with the operation|movement of a ball lifting unit. FIG. 74 is a graph showing the operation of the ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit. FIG. 75(a) is a flowchart showing security processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing security processing in an embodiment different from (a). FIG. 76 is a table showing the relationship between the circulating ball shortage sensor, the circulating ball excess sensor, and the error notification. In FIG. 63, some electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, and LEDs connected to the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are omitted.

The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. consists of The frame control board 740 mainly performs control processing such as shooting and circulation of game balls B, the number of balls held, and the like. The main control board 1310 mainly performs game control processing. The peripheral control board 1510 mainly performs control processing of effects.

The frame control board 740 includes a firing stop switch 161, a handle touch sensor 162, a handle rotation sensor 163, a counting button switch 180, a door opening switch 507, a frame opening switch 508, a firing subtraction sensor 554, an out ball sensor 605, and a safe ball sensor. 606, foul ball sensor 607, circulating ball shortage sensor 621, circulating ball excess sensor 622, lifting inlet sensor 653, lifting outlet sensor 654, lifting motor index sensor 666, firing front sensor 704, RAM clear switch 741, ball removal Signals are input from the switch 742, the pitch number storage/display clear switch 743, and the like.

In addition, the frame control board 740 outputs signals to the number display unit 140, the firing solenoid 553, the lift motor 664, the ball motor 688, the ball feed solenoid 706, and the like.

Furthermore, the frame control board 740 receives and outputs signals from the game ball lending device 8 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 765 . Also, the frame control board 740 receives and outputs signals from the main control board 1310 .

Signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2011, the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the special winning opening sensor 2402, and the like are input to the main control board 1310. FIG. The main control board 1310 also outputs signals to the starter solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like.

The game ball lending device 8 is provided outside the pachinko machine 1 and outputs a signal to the management server 9 via the communication network. The game ball lending device 8 receives signals from the ball lending button switch 8a, the return button switch, the frame control board 740, and the like. In addition, the game ball lending device 8 outputs signals to the display section, the frame control board 740, and the like.

[7-1. Launch permission processing]
The firing permission process will be described with reference to FIG. The launch permission process is a process of determining whether or not the game ball B should be launched. When the firing permission process is started, first, in step S101, it is checked whether or not the player is touching the handle 160, and if the player touches the handle 160 and the handle touch sensor 162 is ON (YES), , the process proceeds to the next step S102. If the handle touch sensor 162 is OFF in step S101 (NO), the process advances to step S107 to turn OFF the frame control firing permission signal and terminate the process.

In step S102, it is checked whether or not the firing stop switch 161 is OFF. If the firing stop switch 161 is ON, the determination is YES and the process proceeds to the next step S103. On the other hand, if the firing stop switch 161 is OFF in step S102, NO is determined and the process proceeds to step S107 to turn OFF the frame control firing permission signal and terminate the processing.

In step S103, it is checked whether the frame control board 740 is connected to the game ball lending device 8 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 765, and if it is connected to the game ball lending device 8, As YES, the process proceeds to the next step S104. On the other hand, if the connection with the game ball lending device 8 is not confirmed in step S103, it proceeds to step S107 as NO, turns off the frame control firing permission signal, and ends the processing.

In step S104, the presence or absence (ON/OFF) of the main control firing permission from the main control board 1310 is confirmed. On the other hand, if there is no main control firing permission in step S104, the process proceeds to step S107 as NO, the frame control firing permission signal is turned OFF, and the processing ends.

Here, the conditions for turning on the main control firing permission include "no fatal error such as a RAM error in the main control board 1310".

In addition to the above conditions of steps S101 to S105, the conditions for turning on the frame control firing permission (frame control firing permission signal) include "A fatal error such as a RAM error in the frame control board 740 has occurred. Other conditions may be included as necessary, such as "no".

In step S105, it is checked whether or not the number of balls held by the player is greater than 0. If the number of balls held by the player is greater than 0, the process advances to step S106 as YES to turn on the frame control firing permission signal. to end the process. On the other hand, in step S105, if the number of balls in possession is less than 0 (the number of balls in possession is 0), it proceeds to step S107 as NO, turns off the frame control firing permission signal, and ends the processing.

In this way, the game ball B is permitted to be shot by the shooting permission process, and when the player rotates the handle 160 in this state, the shooting solenoid 553 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. A game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 . When the firing solenoid 553 is driven, firing control processing, which will be described later, is executed.

[7-2. possession ball subtraction processing]
Possessed ball subtraction processing will be described with reference to FIG. The possession ball subtraction process is a process of subtracting the number of possession balls of the player by shooting the game ball B. FIG. In the possession ball subtraction process, first, in step S111, it is determined whether or not the firing subtraction sensor 554 of the ball firing unit 550 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. When the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launch unit 550, the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects the game ball B and is in the ON state. From this state, when the shooting mallet 555 hits the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b by driving the shooting solenoid 553 and the game ball B is shot, the shooting subtraction sensor 554 becomes non-detection and turns off.

Then, in step S111, when the game ball B is shot and the shooting subtraction sensor 554 turns from ON to OFF, YES is entered to proceed to the next step S112, the number of balls in possession is subtracted by one, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in step S111, if the firing subtraction sensor 554 does not turn from ON to OFF and remains ON, NO is determined and the process ends without subtracting the number of balls held.

As described above, when the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted by one.

[7-3. Possession ball addition processing]
With reference to FIG. 66, the ball possession addition processing due to a foul will be described. When the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550, the number of balls possessed by the player is subtracted by the possession ball subtraction process, but the shot game ball B is not hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5.例文帳に追加In this case, since the game with the game ball B is not played, the interest of the player will be lowered if the number of balls in possession remains decremented. Therefore, in the possession ball addition process, game balls B (foul balls) that have not been hit into the game area 5a are added to the number of possession balls of the player.

In the possession ball addition process, in step S121, it is determined whether or not the foul ball sensor 607 of the circulation ball path unit 600 detects game ball B (foul ball) to turn it on. If it is turned ON, it proceeds to the next step S122 as YES, adds one to the number of balls in hand, and terminates the process.

On the other hand, in step S121, if the foul ball sensor 607 is not turned ON and remains OFF, the process ends without adding the number of balls held.

In this way, by the possession ball addition processing, when the game ball B is not hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 even though it was shot from the ball shooting unit 550, the foul ball is added to the number of possession balls. By doing so, the player can avoid being disadvantaged.

[7-4. Launch control processing]
The firing control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68 and the like. In the shooting control process, it is determined whether or not the game ball B is actually shot by driving the shooting solenoid 553 after the player rotates the handle 160 after the frame control shooting permission signal is turned ON in the shooting permission process. It is something to do. In the firing control process, first, in step S131, it is determined whether or not frame control firing is permitted (ON/OFF). is turned ON to terminate the process. On the other hand, if there is no frame control firing permission (OFF) in step S131, the process proceeds to step S133, the firing permission signal is turned OFF, and the process ends.

Then, when the shooting permission signal is turned ON, when shooting the game ball B by the shooting solenoid 553, as shown in FIG. , moves the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 upward to receive the game ball B detected by the sensor 704 before firing. This first time t1 is set to a time sufficient for receiving the game ball B in the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705. As shown in FIG.

When the second time t2 (for example, 90 ms) shorter than the first time t1 has elapsed since the ball feed solenoid 706 was turned ON, the firing solenoid 553 is turned ON for the third time t3 (for example, 23 ms), A game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b is launched. Then, after the third time t3 has passed, the firing solenoid 553 is turned off. Note that the first time t1 is longer than the sum of the second time t2 and the third time t3.

Then, when the first time t1 has passed, the ball feed solenoid 706 is turned off, and the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b. This completes the firing sequence.

In addition, when the game ball B is continuously shot, after the first time t1 has passed, and after the fourth time t4 (for example, 450.5 ms) has passed, the ball feed solenoid 706 is turned on again for the first time t1. and the same operation as above is repeated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is not placed on the ball launch pad 552b the first time the pachinko machine 1 is installed. sensor ON?" becomes NO, and the ball feed solenoid 706 is turned ON in subsequent step S136, and the game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b. After that, since the game ball B is always placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the game ball B can be launched at any time.

On the other hand, when the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b due to a thud or vibration, the launch subtraction sensor 554 is turned off, so it is considered to have been launched and the number of balls possessed is subtracted by one by the possessed ball subtraction process. However, since the fallen game ball B is recovered by the foul unit 570 and detected by the foul ball sensor 607, the number of possessed balls is added by one by the possessed ball addition processing, and the number of possessed balls is returned to the number before the drop. , the player is not at a disadvantage.

Also, when the game ball B launched from the ball launch pad 552b returns to the ball launch pad 552b, as described above, the next game ball B is supplied by the ball feed solenoid 706 of the ball feed unit 700 after the launch. At the same time, since only one game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, either the previous game ball B that has returned or the next game ball B supplied from the ball feeding unit 700 is It falls and is collected by the foul unit 570 . Therefore, in the same manner as described above, even if the number of balls in possession is subtracted by shooting, either the returned game ball B or the next game ball B becomes a foul ball and is added to the number of balls in possession. It is possible to return to the number of balls held before shooting, and the player is not at a disadvantage.

If the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b while the number of balls in possession is "0", the number of balls in possession cannot be subtracted in the ball subtraction process, so the dropped game ball B is fouled. As a ball, the number of balls in possession becomes "1" by the process of adding balls in possession. In such a case, an alarm may be issued and the staff of the game hall may resolve the contradiction in the number of balls possessed.

In this embodiment, the ball launch pad 552b is short, so the game ball B always falls in a swing that causes the launch subtraction sensor 554 to be turned off due to a thump or the like. Therefore, even though the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, an erroneous detection such that the launch subtraction sensor 554 is turned off and the game ball B is considered to have been launched does not occur.

By the way, it is conceivable that a power failure occurs (the frame control board 740 or the main control board 1310 receives a power failure signal) during the firing sequence as described above. For example, if a power failure occurs before the firing solenoid 553 is turned on (before excitation), the firing mallet 555 does not move, but depending on the operation timing of the ball feed solenoid 706, the next game ball B can be received by the ball receiving portion 705a. The game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552 b and is bounced by the game ball B placed earlier and collected by the foul unit 570 . However, when the power failure signal is received, the frame control board 740 and the like do not go to see each sensor, so the signal of the foul ball sensor 607 is ignored. As a result, it is not added to the number of balls held as a foul ball, so the accuracy of the number of balls held before the power failure is maintained.

In addition, when the firing solenoid 553 is energized or when the power fails when the firing solenoid 553 has been energized, the firing mallet 555 moves and the game ball B from the ball launch pad 552b is fired, but before the firing subtraction sensor 554 determines that it is OFF ( Before the OFF threshold of 80 ms has passed), the frame control board 740 no longer looks at the fire subtract sensor 554 and therefore is not considered fired. At the time when the shooting solenoid 553 is energized, the game ball B is received by the ball receiving portion 705a by the ball feed solenoid 706. Therefore, after the game ball B is shot, the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a is It is fed to ball launch pad 552b and ready for launch. On the other hand, even if the launched game ball B enters the winning hole of the game board 5, the main control board 1310 does not go to see the winning sensor, so the winning becomes invalid and the number of balls in possession is added. never. Therefore, even in this case, the accuracy of the number of balls held before the power failure is maintained.

[7-4a. Launch control process and possessed ball subtraction process of the second embodiment]
In the above embodiment, the consistency of the number of balls held when the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b is maintained by a hard firing sequence. Consistency may be maintained by software. In this firing control process, first, in step S131, it is determined whether or not frame control firing is permitted (ON/OFF). On the other hand, if there is no frame control firing permission (OFF) in step S131, the process ends without driving the firing solenoid 553 as NO.

In step S134, it is determined whether or not the launch subtraction sensor 554 is ON, and if the launch subtraction sensor 554 is ON (the game ball B is present on the ball launch pad 552b), YES is given and the process proceeds to the next step S135 for subtraction. It is determined whether or not the completion flag is ON. As shown in FIG. 69(b), this subtraction completion flag is turned ON by step S113 when the number of possession balls is subtracted by the possession ball subtraction process of the second embodiment, and the subtraction is not performed. If so, the subtraction completion flag is turned off in step S114.

Therefore, in the normal state before launch, the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, and the subtraction completion flag is OFF. The solenoid 553 is turned on, and the game ball B is hit with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160, and the processing ends.

On the other hand, when the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b due to a thud or the like, the number of held balls is subtracted by the held ball subtraction process shown in FIG. 69(b), and the subtraction completion flag is turned ON. Therefore, YES is determined in step S135 of the firing control process, and the process proceeds to step S137.

In step S137, it is determined whether or not the sensor 704 before firing is ON, and if the sensor 704 before firing is not ON (when the game ball B is not detected), it proceeds to the next step S138 as NO. The error display indicating "out of shot ball" is turned on, the process returns to step S137, and the process is repeated until the before-shoot sensor 704 is turned on. The error display is displayed, for example, on the display screen of the effect display device.

The error display may be performed by providing an information lamp and turning it on, or by displaying an image on the performance display device. Alternatively, an error signal may be output to the hall computer (holcon) of the game hall via the game ball lending device 8 to light the notification lamp provided on the game hall side.

In this step S137, when the sensor 704 before shooting detects the game ball B and is ON, YES is determined and the process proceeds to the next step S139, the ball feed solenoid 706 is turned ON (energized), and the ball feed movable member 705 is moved. Let As a result, the game ball B detected by the sensor 704 before launch is delivered to the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705, and when the ball feeding solenoid 706 is turned off after a predetermined short time, the ball receiving portion 705a The delivered game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b. At this time, if there is a game ball B on the upstream side (ball lifting exit passage 652) of the game ball B sent to the ball launch pad 552b by the ball sending movable member 705, the game ball B moves to the downstream side. Then, the pre-fire sensor 704 is turned ON.

In step S139, when the ball forwarding solenoid 706 is turned ON, the process proceeds to the next step S140 to determine again whether or not the firing subtraction sensor 554 is ON. , and the above flow is repeated until the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned ON.

Then, in step S140, if the firing subtraction sensor 554 is ON, it proceeds to the next step S141 as YES, and after turning OFF the error display of "shooting ball out", it proceeds to step S136 and turns ON the firing solenoid 553. Then, the game ball B is hit with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160, and the process ends.

Thus, the game ball B can be launched after confirming that the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550 by the launch control process.

By the way, when the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b, the number of balls in possession is subtracted by the ball in possession subtraction process of FIG. 69(b). When detected by 607, possession ball addition processing is executed. As a result, since the number of balls in possession is added, the number of balls in possession before falling is restored, and the player is not disadvantaged.

As described above, the consistency of the number of possessed balls can be maintained when the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b by the launch control process and the possessed ball subtraction process of the second embodiment.

[7-5. Prize ball processing]
The prize ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 70 and the like. The prize ball processing is performed by receiving the game ball B in the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. A predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings are awarded, and the prize balls are added to the number of balls possessed by the player.

In the prize ball processing, when the signal (prize ball signal) output from the main control board 1310 is input to the frame control board 740 by receiving the game ball B in the winning hole on the game board 5, it is input in step S141. Analyze the winning ball signal. The prize ball signal output from the main control board 1310 may be the number of prize balls, or the type of winning hole in which the game ball B is received.

When the winning ball signal is analyzed in step S141, the number of winning balls corresponding to the analyzed winning ball signal is added to the number of balls possessed by the player in subsequent step S142, and the process ends.

In this way, by the prize ball processing, the number of game balls B (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the winning openings in which the game ball B has won on the game board 5 can be added to the number of waiting balls of the player.

[7-6. Lifting motor operation processing]
The lifting motor operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74 and the like. In the lifting motor operation process, when the game ball B in the ball lifting exit passage 652 decreases due to the game ball B being shot by the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 is lifted. The ball is lifted by the rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661 of the upper unit 650 and supplied to the ball lifting outlet passage 652 .

In the lifting motor operation process, first, in step S201, the retry counter 1 is cleared, and the process proceeds to the next step S202. In step S202, it is determined whether or not the lifting motor index sensor 666 for detecting the lifting motor index 665 attached to the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 in the ball lifting mechanism 660 of the ball lifting unit 650 is ON. to decide.

The lifting motor index 665 has a disc-shaped (flange-shaped) detection part 665 a that is partially cut out in the circumferential direction. When the detection portion 665a of the motor index 665 is positioned at the lift motor index sensor 666, the lift motor index sensor 666 is turned ON, and the lift motor index sensors 666 are turned OFF at portions other than the detection portion 665a.

In step S202, if the lifting motor index sensor 666 is ON, the process advances to step S203 as YES, and it is determined whether or not the lifting outlet sensor 654 has been ON for 80 ms or longer. In this step S203, if it is determined that the lifting outlet sensor 654 has not been ON for 80 ms or more (the lifting outlet sensor 654 is OFF), NO is determined and the process proceeds to the next step S204.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S203 that the lifting outlet sensor 654 is ON for 80 ms or more, the process returns to step S203 as YES until the lifting outlet sensor 654 is not ON for 80 ms or longer (the lifting outlet sensor 654 is turned OFF). until) is repeated. In other words, the rearmost part of the row of a plurality of game balls B in the ball lifting exit passage 652 is repeatedly reduced by the shooting of the game balls B and becomes downstream of the lifting exit sensor 654, and the lifting exit sensor 654 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, it is determined whether or not the lift entrance sensor 653 is ON for 80 ms or more, and if it is determined that the lift entrance sensor 653 is not ON for 80 ms or more (the lift entrance sensor 653 is OFF), step NO is entered. Proceeding to S205, the error display indicating "lifting inlet ball out" is turned ON, and the process returns to step S204. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the ball has run out in the ball-lifting entrance passage 651, and to encourage the player to eliminate the ball-running problem.

In step S204, if it is determined that the lifting inlet sensor 653 is ON for 80 ms or more, the process proceeds to the next step S206 as YES, and after turning OFF the error display indicating "lifting inlet ball burnout", the following step In S207, the lifting motor 664 is started to rotate after 1800 ms has passed, and the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated. As a result, lifting of the game ball B in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 is started. The lifting spiral shaft 661 discharges one game ball B when it rotates once.

Here, in other words, when the lifting motor 664 starts operating, as shown in FIG. In the state of ON (continuous ON) and the sensor 704 before firing is ON (continuous ON) for 80 ms or longer, the game balls B are continuously shot at intervals of a predetermined time (here, 600 ms) by operating the handle 160 . Then, when the lifting outlet sensor 654 is turned off, the lifting motor 664 starts to operate after a time ts (here, 1800 ms) has passed from there, and the ball lifting outlet passage 652 side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 from the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 Discharge of the game ball B to (lifting device ball discharge) starts.

In this embodiment, when three game balls B are shot after the lift exit sensor 654 is turned off, the lift motor 664 operates and the lift spiral shaft 661 starts rotating. The time interval for discharging the game balls B by the rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661 is set shorter than the time interval for continuously discharging the game balls B. As a result, the supply of the game balls B to the ball shooting unit 550 does not catch up with the shooting of the game balls B.例文帳に追加

In addition, the kuma motor 688 provided in the ball lifting unit 650 is controlled independently of the operation of the lifting motor 664, as shown in FIG. The polishing cloth 682 is actuated to move 0.17 mm.

As shown in FIG. 72, the lifting motor 664 does not operate and is stopped except when the lifting inlet sensor 653 is ON and the lifting outlet sensor 654 is OFF.

Returning to the description of the lifting motor operation process, when the lifting motor 664 starts operating in step S207, the retry counter 2 is cleared in the following step S208, and the lifting motor index 665 (lifting motor It is determined whether the index sensor 666) has turned ON again within 600 ms after turning OFF.

If it is determined in step S209 that the lifting motor index 665 has been turned ON again within 600 ms after being turned OFF (the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotating), the process proceeds to the next step S210 as YES, and the lifting exit It is determined whether or not the sensor 654 is ON for 80 ms or longer.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S210 that the lifting outlet sensor 654 has been ON for 80 ms or longer, YES is determined and the process proceeds to the next step S211. The lift motor 664 is stopped, the process returns to step S201, and the lift motor operation process is repeated.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, after the lift outlet sensor 654 is turned ON (continuously ON), the light is blocked by the rotation of the lift motor index 665 (the lift motor index sensor 666 is turned on by the detector 665a). ON) the third time, the lift motor 664 stops. At this time, the lifting spiral shaft 661 that rotates integrally with the lifting motor index 665 discharges one game ball B per rotation to the ball lifting exit passage 652 side (lifting device ball discharge). , three game balls B are discharged from when the lifting outlet sensor 654 is turned ON until the lifting motor 664 stops. In other words, when the lifting exit sensor 654 is turned ON, the three game balls B are discharged to the ball lifting exit passage 652 side and the lifting motor 664 stops. As a result, a sufficient number of game balls B are stored in the ball lifting exit passage 652 . It should be noted that, in order to smoothly execute a lifting motor origin return process, which will be described later, the inside of the ball lifting exit passage 652 is not filled with the game balls B, and a predetermined number of vacancies are created.

In this lifting motor operation process, if it is determined in step S202 that the lifting motor index 665 is not ON (the lifting motor index sensor 666 is OFF), the process proceeds to step S212 as NO, and the retry counter 1 It is determined whether or not it is less than 3.

If the retry counter 1 is less than 3 in step S212, YES is determined and the lifting motor origin return process is executed in step S213. back to

In the lifting motor origin return processing in step S213, when the lifting motor index sensor 666 is OFF, the lifting motor 664 is actuated to rotate the lifting motor index 665 together with the lifting spiral shaft 661. When the index sensor 666 is in the OFF state, it is turned ON by reaching the detection unit 665a. After that, the lifting motor 664 rotates twice and stops, and the lifting motor 664 (lifting motor index 665) reaches the origin. return to

Specifically, the lifting motor index 665 (lifting spiral shaft 661) is configured to rotate once when the lifting motor 664 rotates 32 times due to the gear ratio between the shaft gear 662 and the motor gear 663. Since the circumferential length of the detection portion 665a of the lifting motor index 665 is set to the length that the lifting motor 664 rotates four times, the lifting motor index sensor 666 is turned ON. The position where the motor 664 stops after two rotations is located in the center of the detection section 665a. That is, the center of the detection portion 665a in the lifting motor index 665 is the origin of the lifting motor 664 (lifting spiral shaft 661, lifting motor index 665) (see FIG. 74).

When the lifting motor origin return process is executed, the lifting spiral shaft 661 rotates about one time, so one game ball B is discharged to the ball lifting exit passage 652, but in the ball lifting exit passage 652 Since a predetermined number of vacancies are provided for housing the game balls B, the discharge of the game balls B from the lifting spiral shaft 661 is not hindered, and the lifting motor 664 can be returned to the origin.

If it is determined in step S212 that the retry counter 1 is not less than 3, the process proceeds to step S215 as NO, turns on the error display indicating "lifting ball jam error", and stops the operation in step S216. . This condition for canceling the operation stop can be canceled by turning on and off the power switch 751 provided on the power board 750 of the main body frame 4 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S209 that the lifting motor index 665 has not turned ON again within 600 ms after turning OFF (the lifting spiral shaft 661 is not rotating), it is turned ON and the process proceeds to step S217. It is determined whether or not the retry counter 2 is less than 3. If it is determined that the retry counter 2 is not less than 3, the process advances to step S215 as NO to turn on the error display indicating "lifting ball stick error". Then, the operation is stopped in the following step S216.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the retry counter 2 is less than 3 in step S217, the determination is YES, and the ball sticking cancellation process is executed in the next step S218. Then, the process returns to step S209.

In step S218, the ball jam removal process is performed by stopping the lifting motor 664 without monitoring the ON/OFF state of the lifting outlet sensor 654, then rotating the lifting motor 664 in the reverse direction for a predetermined period of time (for example, 100 ms). After the elapse of time, the lifting motor 664 is stopped, and the lifting motor 664 is operated (rotated forward) again.

In this way, when the game ball B in the ball lifting exit passage 652 decreases due to the game ball B being shot by the lifting motor operation processing, the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by the operation of the lifting motor 664. As a result, the game ball B in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 can be lifted from the lower end and discharged from the upper end to be supplied to the ball lifting outlet passage 652 .

It should be noted that the operating time of the lifting motor 664 and the number of game balls B to be ejected, etc., described above are examples, and the time and number may be set appropriately.

[7-7. Security processing]
Security processing will be described with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. Security processing is for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud. In the security process, as shown in FIG. 75(a), the contradiction counter is cleared in step S301, and the number of collected balls in the circulation ball path unit 600 within a predetermined time is calculated in the subsequent step S302. The number of recovered balls is calculated as the sum of the number of out balls, the number of safe balls, and the number of foul balls.

After calculating the number of collected balls in step S302, the process proceeds to the next step S303, where it is determined whether or not the number of discharged balls and the number of collected balls by the discharge subtraction sensor 554 are the same. It returns to step S302 as YES. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of shot balls and the number of collected balls are not the same, the process proceeds to the next step S304 as NO, adds "1" to the contradiction counter, and proceeds to the following step S305.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the contradiction counter is larger than n (eg, 50), and if it is determined to be smaller than n, NO is returned to step S302. On the other hand, if it is determined that the inconsistency counter is larger than n, the process proceeds to the next step S306 as YES, and after turning on the error display indicating that the fraudulent act is being performed, the game stop processing is performed in the following step S307. Execute and terminate the process.

The cancellation of the error display in step S306 can be canceled by turning on and off the power switch 751 provided on the power board 750 of the body frame 4 .

In addition, as the game stop processing in step S307, the ball launching unit 550 stops shooting the game ball B, the ball lifting unit 650 stops lifting the game ball B (circulation stop), the game on the main control board 1310 side stop, etc.

The security processing may be processing as shown in FIG. 75(b). In this security process, first, in step S311, the contradiction counter is cleared, and in subsequent step S312, it is determined whether or not the number of shot balls detected by the shot subtraction sensor 554 is greater than or equal to the number of foul balls detected by the foul ball sensor 607.

If it is determined in step S312 that the number of shot balls is greater than or equal to the number of foul balls, the determination is YES and the process returns to step S312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of shot balls is not equal to or greater than the number of foul balls, the process proceeds to the next step S313 as NO, adds "1" to the contradiction counter, and proceeds to the following step S314.

In step S314, it is determined whether or not the contradiction counter is larger than n (eg, 50), and if it is determined to be smaller than n, NO is returned to step S312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the inconsistency counter is larger than n, the process proceeds to the next step S315 as YES, and after turning on the error display indicating that the fraudulent act is being performed, the game stop processing is performed in the subsequent step S316. Execute and terminate the process.

The error display in step S315 can be canceled by turning on and off the power switch 751 provided on the power board 750 of the main body frame 4 .

In addition, as the game stop processing in step S316, the ball launching unit 550 stops shooting the game ball B, the ball lifting unit 650 stops lifting the game ball B (circulation stop), and the game on the main control board 1310 side stop, etc.

In this manner, the presence or absence of fraud can be determined based on the number of shot balls, the number of game balls B ejected from the game board 5 (the number of recovered balls), the number of foul balls, and the like.

[7-8. Enclosed ball amount detection process]
Enclosed ball amount detection processing will be described with reference to FIG. 76 and the like. The enclosed ball quantity detection process detects whether or not the quantity (number of balls) of game balls B enclosed is appropriate. In the enclosed ball amount detection process, it is determined whether or not the amount of game balls B is appropriate by combining ON/OFF of the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and ON/OFF of the circulating ball excess sensor 622 . The circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 are turned ON when the detection of game balls B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 80 ms) or more.

Specifically, in the ball storage passage 604 of the circulating ball path unit 600, which is upstream of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 in the ball lifting unit 650, the last part of the game balls B lined up in a row has an insufficient number of circulating balls. When positioned between the sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the circulation ball shortage sensor 621 is ON and the circulation ball excess sensor 622 is OFF. In such a combination, it is determined that the amount of game balls B is appropriate, and related errors are not notified.

On the other hand, when the last part of the game balls B lined up in the ball storage passage 604 is located downstream of the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is OFF and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is OFF. OFF. In such a combination, it is determined that the amount of game balls B is insufficient, and an error is notified to the effect of "too few game balls".

Further, when the rear end of the game balls B arranged in a row in the ball storage passage 604 exceeds the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 and is located upstream of the circulating ball excess sensor 622, The circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is ON and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is ON. In the case of such a combination, it is determined that the amount of game balls B is excessive, and an error is notified to the effect of "excessive game balls".

By the way, depending on the environment (game hall) in which the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is installed, it may be installed together with a pachinko machine that uses conventional iron balls SB as game balls. When the game ball B is replenished or replaced due to maintenance or the like, there is a risk that the iron ball SB will be mixed. When the iron ball SB is mixed in the pachinko machine 1, since a strong magnet 616 is provided in the ball extraction shutter 615 of the ball storage passage 604 in the circulation route R, the mixed iron ball SB is It is magnetized and stopped on the ball extraction shutter 615 .

When the ball shooting unit 550 continues to shoot the game ball B while the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the ball ejection shutter 615, the game ball B on the downstream side of the ball ejection shutter 615 in the ball storage passage 604 is lifted. It is lifted by the upper unit 650 and decreases, and eventually the circulating balls shortage sensor 621 is turned off. On the other hand, the game balls B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 are recovered by the out ball receiving port 600a and the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600, the foul unit 570, etc., and supplied to the upstream side of the ball storage passage 604. As a result, the ball-exhausting shutter 615 (iron ball SB) accumulates on the upstream side, and the circulating-ball excess sensor 622 is turned on before long. Thus, in the case of a combination in which the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is OFF and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is ON, it is determined that the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the ball removal shutter 615, and the "iron ball mixed ” is notified.

If ball clogging due to ball jam occurs between the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the same combination as above occurs, so an error indicating "iron balls mixed in" will appear. be notified.

In addition, the notification of the error may be made by providing a notification lamp and turning it on, or by displaying an image on the performance display device. Alternatively, an error signal may be output to the hall computer (holcon) of the game hall via the game ball lending device 8 to light the notification lamp provided on the game hall side.

Thus, by the enclosed ball amount detection processing, it is possible to appropriately manage the amount of enclosed game balls B and to detect the inclusion of iron balls SB.

[7-9. Ball removal process]
The ball removal process will be explained. The ball extraction process is executed when the game ball B is extracted to the ball receiving tray 720 by opening the ball extraction opening 613 p by the ball extraction shutter 615 in the circulation ball path unit 600 . In the ball removal process, the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the door open switch 507 is turned off, the ball removal shutter 615 is pulled forward to open the ball removal port 613p, and the ball removal port 613p is opened. This is executed by turning ON the ball removal switch 742 that is present.

[7-9. Ball removal process]
The ball removal process will be explained. The ball extraction process is executed when the game ball B is extracted to the ball receiving tray 720 by opening the ball extraction opening 613 p by the ball extraction shutter 615 in the circulation ball path unit 600 . In the ball removal process, the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main frame 4, the door open switch 507 is turned off, the ball removal shutter 615 is pulled forward to open the ball removal port 613p, and the ball removal port 613p is opened. This is executed by turning on the power while the ball extraction switch 742 is turned on (by turning on the ball extraction switch 742 when the power is turned on).

In the ball ejection process, ON/OFF of the lifting entrance sensor 653 is disabled, the firing solenoid 553 in the ball firing unit 550 repeats ON/OFF at predetermined time intervals, and the lifting motor 664 remains in operation. Become.

At this time, even if the shooting solenoid 553 is turned on and the game ball B is shot, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position because the door frame 3 is open, and the foul shutter 571 is released from the foul unit 570 to the outside. It is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being hit. It should be noted that during the ball removal process, although the game ball B is not stopped being shot, the game is stopped and, for example, even if there is a start winning prize, no game ball is paid out, and there is no lottery or fluctuation related to special symbols. It is in a state where normal games cannot be played, such as when there is no display. Also, during the ball extraction process, special notification is performed using the performance display device 1600, lamps, speakers, and the like. In addition, when the ball extraction switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on, the RAM clear which initializes the RAM built in the main control board 1310 is not executed. to maintain

In this way, the enclosed game ball B can be removed by the ball removal process. In addition, when inserting the game ball B, it is inserted from the out port 1008 of the game board 5, or from the out ball receiving port 600a or the safe ball receiving port 600b that is opened upward by removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4. It is possible to put in (replenish).

[7-10. others]
In the above embodiment, the description has been given on the premise that stainless steel balls made of stainless steel are used as the game balls B used in the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the game ball B, an iron ball SB may be used. When iron balls are used as the game balls B, the magnets 616 in the circulating ball path unit 600 are abolished so that the game balls B (iron balls SB) flow through the ball storage passage 604. Passing sensors (ball sensors) for the game ball B dedicated to the stainless steel ball provided on both sides of the game board 5 are replaced with those capable of detecting the iron ball SB. With these changes, the pachinko machine 1 becomes operable. Note that the optical sphere sensor can be used as it is without replacement.

By the way, when the iron ball SB is used as the game ball B, cheating by the magnet M (so-called magnet goto) becomes possible. Is required.

In the following, the arrangement of magnetic sensors with respect to a general game board will be described with reference to FIG. 77 and the like. FIG. 77(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetic lines of force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor unable to detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet, and (c ) is an explanatory view schematically showing the detection range of the magnetic sensor on the game board in a perspective view, and (d) is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body where the lines of magnetic force from the magnet cannot be detected. (e) is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body that can detect the magnetic lines of force from the magnet, and (f) is an explanatory view showing the magnetic sensor and the holding portion separated. . It should be noted that the arrangement examples of the magnetic sensors described in FIG. 77 and the like can be employed in the game board of each embodiment in this specification.

Generally, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 are provided in the pachinko machine 1, and are for detecting illegal magnetism (lines of magnetic force). As shown in FIG. 77(f), the magnetic sensor 1030 includes a sensor body 1031 for detecting magnetism, a sensor substrate 1032 having a white surface on which the sensor body 1031 is mounted, the sensor substrate 1032 and the sensor body 1031. and a transparent sensor case 1033 covering the . In addition to the sensor main body 1031, ICs, transistors, resistors, diodes, connectors for connection, and the like are mounted on the sensor substrate 1032, although illustration is omitted. In this embodiment, the sensor main body 1031 uses a magnetic sensor using a GMR element.

The magnetic sensor 1030 is rectangular in plan view and is formed in a cuboid shape with a height lower than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and one of the sides in the height direction is chamfered. In this magnetic sensor 1030 , the sensor main body 1031 and the sensor substrate 1032 inside can be visually recognized from the outside through a transparent sensor case 1033 .

The magnetic sensor 1030 is capable of detecting passage of magnetic lines of force parallel to the longest side of the rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1030 and the positional relationship between the magnet M and the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1030 are as shown in FIG. can be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1030 and the positional relationship between the magnet M and the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1030 are as shown in FIG. vertical direction), the magnetism of the magnet M (magnetic lines of force) cannot be detected.

For this reason, the magnetic sensor 1030 has magnetic detection areas of the magnet M on one side and the other side in the long side direction centering on the magnetic sensor 1030, as shown by shading in FIG. 77(c). have a DA. In other words, the magnetic sensor 1030 has a gourd-shaped detection area DA formed by combining two spheres with a diameter of about 10 cm. FIG. 77(c) is a diagram assuming that the magnetic sensor 1030 is placed near the first starting port 2003 of the game board 5 as an anti-fraud measure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(d), when the magnetic body M1 is arranged in parallel with the magnetic sensor 1030 capable of detecting the lines of magnetic force from the magnet M, the lines of magnetic force are attracted to the magnetic body M1. The lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1030 may decrease, and the magnetic sensor 1030 may become unable to detect the lines of magnetic force (magnetism) from the magnet M.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77(e), when the magnetic body M2 is arranged in series with the magnetic sensor 1030 capable of detecting the lines of magnetic force from the magnet M, the lines of magnetic force are attracted by the magnetic body M2, thereby The magnetic field lines passing through the sensor 1030 can be increased. As a result, the magnetism of a distant magnet M or a magnet M with a weak magnetic force can be detected.

By the way, in a conventional pachinko machine, the magnetic sensor is attached to the game board using a screw made of a magnetic material. However, there is a problem that the approach of the magnet M cannot be detected because the magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor are reduced by being attracted to the screw with high magnetic permeability. In contrast, in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1030 is attached without using screws.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 77(f), the magnetic sensor 1030 is connected to the game machine (body frame 4 or game board 5) via a holding portion 1035 made of a non-magnetic material (here, synthetic resin). ) frame. The holding portion 1035 is molded integrally with a member (not shown). The holding portion 1035 has an accommodating portion 1036 capable of accommodating the magnetic sensor 1030 from one side and an elastic claw 1037 engaged with the magnetic sensor 1030 accommodated in the accommodating portion 1036 . Further, the holding portion 1035 has projections 1038 protruding from the legs of the elastic claws 1037 into the accommodating portion. The holding portion 1035 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

Holding portion 1035 holding magnetic sensor 1030 has elastic claws 1037 elastically deformed in a direction away from accommodating portion 1036 when magnetic sensor 1030 is inserted into the accommodating portion from the outside, and magnetic sensor 1030 is accommodated in accommodating portion 1036. Then, the elastic claw 1037 returns and is locked to the end of the magnetic sensor 1030 . At this time, the projection 1038 provided on the leg portion of the elastic claw 1037 is in contact with the magnetic sensor 1030, and the magnetic sensor 1030 is pressed against the portion of the inner surface of the accommodating portion 1036 opposite to the elastic claw 1037. there is

By locking the elastic claws 1037, it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1030 from moving in the direction in which the magnetic sensor 1030 is pulled out of the accommodating portion 1036, thereby preventing the magnetic sensor 1030 from coming off. Further, since the magnetic sensor 1030 is pressed into the accommodating portion 1036 by the contact of the projection 1038, the magnetic sensor 1030 can be prevented from rattling in the accommodating portion 10361. FIG.

In this way, since the holding portion 1035 is made of a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent the holding portion 1035 from attracting magnetic lines of force from the magnet M when the magnet M is brought closer to the play area 5a. Reduction of the magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1030 can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, and it is possible to detect fraudulent activity using the magnet M at an early stage. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can dissuade a player from committing an act and has a high deterrence against fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the holding portion 1035 made of a non-magnetic material can avoid attracting the lines of magnetic force from the magnet M, and can prevent the reduction of the lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1030, the number of magnetic lines is smaller than that of the conventional pachinko machine The magnetic sensor 1030 can effectively detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, the number of the magnetic sensors 1030 can be reduced, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. can.

In addition, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1037 of the holding portion 1035, the magnetic sensor 1030 can be easily attached and detached from the holding portion 1035. Therefore, like a conventional pachinko machine, the magnetic sensor 1030 can be made of metal made of a magnetic material. The magnetic sensor 1030 can be attached by the elastic claw 1037 without using screws, and the time and effort required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. can be suppressed.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1030 is urged (pressed) toward the housing portion 1036 by the projection 1038 of the holding portion 1035, fine vibration of the magnetic sensor 1030 due to the urging by the projection 1038 can be suppressed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1030 is disconnected or the contact failure occurs due to the vibration, and the magnetic sensor 1030 can be reliably operated.

By the way, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 having the circulation path R in the main body frame 4 (game machine frame), if the iron ball SB is used as the game ball B, cheating (so-called magnet goto) into the circulation path R by the magnet M occurs. Therefore, illegal magnetism within the circulation route R (especially around the launch subtraction sensor 554, the foul ball sensor 607, the launch front sensor 704, etc., which are involved in the addition/subtraction of the number of balls possessed by the player) It is desirable to provide a magnetic sensor (magnetic sensor 1030) in a detectable manner. In this embodiment, it is the vicinity of the launch subtraction sensor 554 of the ball launching unit 550 that is particularly likely to be the target of fraud. , to the foul ball sensor 607 . Details of an embodiment relating to the arrangement of magnetic sensors capable of detecting illicit magnetism within the circulation path R will be described later.

[8. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 84. FIG. FIG. 78 is a front view of a game board showing a transparent center accessory and the like in an opaque manner. 79 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 78 as seen from the front right, FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 78 as seen from the front left, and FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 78 as seen from the rear. It is a diagram. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 84 is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 160. As shown in FIG. In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning port 2001, a normal prize winning port 2002, and a first starting prize winning port 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, addition of a predetermined number of balls) to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B. An opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a prize winning opening 2006, and a second V winning opening 2008 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening 2002, a first starting opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a prize winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. Secondly, it is intended to allow the user to enjoy the hitting operation of the handle 160 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 93) for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a, and vibrations for detecting vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1). and a sensor 1040 (see FIG. 93, etc.). A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 93, etc.) for controlling contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 to be mounted.

A production display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the production display device 1600. - 特許庁

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open and are capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. A normal prize winning opening 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B, and a second opening which is provided in the center in the horizontal direction below the center accessory 2500 and is always open to accept the game ball B. A first starting port 2003, a second starting port 2004 which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning prize port 2002, and a first starting port. The game ball B can be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B to 2003 and the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second start port 2004. and a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 that can receive the game ball B received in the winning opening 2006. . The game board 5 is also provided with a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 93) for detecting magnetism acting illegally within the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided at the most downstream in the game area 5a, is always open to receive the game ball B, and discharges the received game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning it. An out port 2020 is provided upstream of the out port 2020 in the game area 5a, and is always open to receive the game ball B, and the received game ball B is not returned to the outside of the game area 5a. and two sub-out ports 2021 for discharging. Two out ports 2020 are provided on the left and right with the first starting port 2003 therebetween. In addition, the two sub-out ports 2021 are provided in a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a and a portion to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, respectively.

Furthermore, the table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 when viewed from the front and having three general prize-winning ports 2001 and one sub-out port 2021, and the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A side upper left unit 2300 provided slightly above, and an attacker unit provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 and having a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and one sub-out opening 2021 2400, and a frame-shaped center role having a role winning opening 2006, a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008, which is provided slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. 2500, and a normal winning opening unit 2600 provided above the right end of the attacker unit 2400 and having a normal winning opening 2002. - 特許庁

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped main unit 2510 having a role winning opening 2006 and a first V winning opening 2007, and a second V winning opening 2008 provided in the lower part of the frame of the main unit 2510. and a lottery accessory 2550 having

The back unit 3000 includes a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a, a vibration sensor 1040 for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), and a panel in the game panel 1100. A back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the holder 1120 and having a box shape with an open front and having a square opening 3010a on the back wall, and a performance display device 1600 are detachably attached to the back wall of the back box 3010. and a back board unit 3040 arranged behind the effect display device 1600 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. - 特許庁

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guidance unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, and the back ball in the back box 3010. A back decoration unit 3200 provided behind the induction unit 3100, a back front effect unit 3300 provided to the left and above the back ball induction unit 3100 near the front end in the back box 3010, and and a rear back effect unit 3400 provided behind the back front effect unit 3300. - 特許庁

[8-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83 and the like. The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

The front structural member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 which is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front structural member 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004. from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. This out port 1008 is closed from the front by the starting port unit 2100 .

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention concave portion 1009 protrudes to the rear of the crime prevention cover (not shown) on the door frame 3. A state in which the projecting piece (illustration is omitted) is inserted is reached. As a result, the area between the crime prevention cover and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state due to the rear projecting piece of the security cover and the crime prevention concave portion 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through the gap between the crime prevention cover and the front component 1000 from the lower front, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece or the crime prevention recess 1009, and the game area 5a will be blocked. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 matches the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100 . This notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 and penetrates the lower normal payout passage and the lower part of the lower full-ball path unit when attached to the body frame of a pachinko machine that pays out game balls to a player. The front end opening of the full tank payout passage faces forward to supply game balls to the upper tray and the lower tray of the door frame.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower right corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[8-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 .

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The board thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the board thickness of the wooden game panel, which is about 20 mm, and it is sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are planted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. The minimum possible thickness is about 10 mm. In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front structural member 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In other words, in the present embodiment, the out port 1008 of the panel plate 1110 is formed in the shape of a notch that opens downward in the panel plate 1110 rather than in the shape of a hole. Note that the out port 1008 may be formed in the shape of a hole. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon. In the present embodiment, the opening 1112 is formed in the shape of a hole, but it may be formed in the shape of a notch that opens outward from the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are separated in the horizontal direction. and a plurality of engaging stepped portions formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting projecting pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging step portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . be.

The panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset above the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is the left side and the left side except for the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (in this embodiment, it is about 38 mm, which is the same thickness as the wooden game panel). formed. This is because regardless of whether the wooden game panel 1100 or the transparent synthetic resin game panel 1100 is used, the same pachinko machine 1 (game machine) can be attached to the body frame 4 to play a game.

The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed so as to match the notch portion 1010 of the front structural member 1000 . This notch 1122 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 and penetrates the lower normal payout passage and the lower part of the lower full ball path unit when attached to the body frame of a pachinko machine that pays out game balls to the player. The front end opening of the full tank payout passage faces forward to supply game balls to the upper tray and the lower tray of the door frame.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and recessed forward from the rear surface. Out recessed portion 1123 communicates with out port 1008 at its upper portion.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and arranged outside the holding stepped portion. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion. and a pair of engaging pieces respectively engaged with the two engaging stepped portions on the lower side of the . The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper side and the lower left side. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion by elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is held with the engaging claw. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

Since this game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front structural member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the boundary of the game area 5a from being clearly visible. It is possible to give a sense of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front structural member 1000, light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear to emit light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[8-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 from the lower side and the rear side, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejection portion 1201 is located directly above the out ball receiving port 600 a and the safe ball receiving port 600 b in the circulation ball path unit 600 of the main body frame 4 . As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 2020 or the sub-out port 2021 is discharged to the out ball receiving port 600a in the circulating ball path unit 600 and received by the out ball receiving port 600a. As a result, the ball passes through the out-ball passage 601 and is detected (counted) one by one by the out-ball sensor 605 . On the other hand, the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are received in winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. The game ball B discharged downward from the circulating ball path unit 600 is discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b, and received by the safe ball receiving port 600b, so that it flows through the safe ball passage 602 and is detected by the safe ball sensor 606. detected (counted) one by one.

[8-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 93) for controlling game content and awarding of special benefits to the player, and a main control board that accommodates the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. box 1320;

The main control board box 1320 includes a board base 1330 attached to the board holder 1200 and having the main control board 1310 attached to its rear surface, and a board cover 1340 attached to the board base 1330 so as to cover the main control board 1310 from behind. , consists of Substrate base 1330 and substrate cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate. A main control board 1310 is accommodated in the internal space formed by the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340 . Since the substrate base 1330 and the substrate cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be checked. ) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 .

In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1350 corresponding to the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism 1350, Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism 1350, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 760, the out ball sensor 605, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002, a first starting opening sensor 2101, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2402, and a prize winning opening sensor. 2501, first V winning opening sensor 2502, second V winning opening sensor 2503, losing opening sensor 2504, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2516, first distribution solenoid 2534, second distribution It is connected to a solenoid 2544, a lottery loop solenoid 2558, a striking piece drive motor 2561, a gutter swing drive motor 2564, a swing piece solenoid 2565, a magnetic sensor 1030, a vibration sensor 1040, and the like.

The main control board 1310 also has a base monitor consisting of four 7-segment LEDs (not shown). The base monitor can be viewed from behind through the transparent substrate cover 1340 . This base monitor is provided in the circulating ball path unit 600 of the main body frame 4 after the game balls B shot by the ball shooting unit 550 are discharged downward from the game board 5 after being hit into the game area 5a. The number of game balls B counted by being detected by the out ball sensor 605 is displayed. The base monitor of this embodiment displays the number of balls counted by the out-ball sensor 605 after 100 shots (the number of balls returned to the game hall side) as a percentage.

[8-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 78 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player's side) through the game window 101 of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the lottery result of normal symbols, the lottery result of special symbols, and the like. .

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and a lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002. A normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs to be displayed and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to acceptance of the game balls B to the normal winning opening 2002 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, and a first starting A first special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the opening 2003, and a second special design drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004. A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery result, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 and have.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "win". A round indicator consisting of an LED.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[8-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 81 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the performance display device 1600 provided behind the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . More specifically, the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 which attaches the performance display device 1600 to the rear surface of the back box 3010 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 93) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 250, various decoration boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 93). The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600, although the details will be described later.

[8-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the front surface of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 . Since the liquid crystal spacer 1610 is detachable from the back box 3010 , the effect display device 1600 can be detached from the back box 3010 via the liquid crystal spacer 1610 . The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-like center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 .

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and is mounted on the front surface of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 in a horizontally long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 is offset (decentered) so that the center of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 is positioned lower right than the center of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 so that a space is formed above and to the left of the liquid crystal spacer 1610. installed.

The liquid crystal spacer 1610 has the same size as the 19-inch liquid crystal display device and is formed in the shape of a transparent flat plate. The liquid crystal spacer 1610 has two upper fixing pieces 1611 protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1612 protruding downward from the lower end surface. The liquid crystal spacers 1610 are arranged in two fixed grooves 3010c opened in the upper inner peripheral surface of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 1600 facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1611 obliquely from the rear, the lower fixed piece 1612 side is moved forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1612 into the opening of the lock slider 3020, and the lock slider 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the left.

[8-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear end partially projects into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. there is

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, with a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. A normal winning opening 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B, and a first start opening 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open to accept the game ball B. A second starting port 2004 that enables the reception of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn when the game ball B is received in the normal winning port 2002, and the game ball to the first starting port 2003. A large winning opening 2005 and a role that can accept the game ball B according to the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B or the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 A product winning opening 2006, and a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 for receiving the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 are provided.

In addition, the front unit 2000 further includes an out port 2020 and a sub-out port 2021 for discharging the game ball B hit into the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 are always open so that the game ball B can be received. In addition, the out port 2020 is provided at the downstream end of the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a first start opening sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2003, and a second start opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. 2401, a big winning hole sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005, a first V winning hole sensor 2502 that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning hole 2007, A second V winning opening sensor 2503 for detecting the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, and a loss opening sensor 2504 for detecting the game ball B received in the losing opening 2009 act within the game area 5a. and a magnetic sensor 1030 for detecting illegal magnetism.

A plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part of the game area 5a. The normal winning opening 2002 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2003 is arranged between the two out ports 2020 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged below the normal winning opening 2002 near the right end in the game area 5a. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged on the right side of the first starting opening 2003 in the game area 5a. The accessory winning opening 2006 is arranged above the normal winning opening 2002 in the vicinity of the right end in the game area 5a.

The out port 2020 is arranged below the left and right sides of the first start port 2003 at the downstream end of the game area 5a. One of the sub-out openings 2021 is arranged to the left of the three general winning openings 2001 and the remaining one is arranged below the second starting opening 2004 .

The table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2003 and an out opening 2020. A start opening unit 2100 and a start opening unit 2100 A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view and has three general prize-winning ports 2001 and one sub-out port 2021, and a slightly upper side unit 2200 on the left side of the front view. and a side upper left unit 2300 provided in the .

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 and has a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and an attacker unit 2400 having one sub-out opening 2021. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided slightly above the center of the front view, and has an accessory winning opening 2006, a first V winning opening 2007, a second V winning opening 2008, and a losing opening 2009. and a normal winning opening unit 2600 provided above the attacker unit 2400 and having a normal winning opening 2002. - 特許庁

[8-8a. starting unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 includes a first starting port 2003 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received, and a game ball that is always open to receive the game ball B. It has two out ports 2020 that discharge outside the game area 5a without returning B. In addition, the starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening sensor 2101 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2003 (see FIG. 93).

Out port 2020 is provided at a position lower than first start port 2003 . The two out ports 2020 of the starting port unit 2100 are provided at symmetrical positions with the first starting port 2003 therebetween. The first starting port 2003 is open upward with a width through which one game ball B can pass. The out port 2020 is opened upward with a width of two game balls B, and is provided at the lowest position in the game area 5a.

The starting port unit 2100 is provided such that the height difference between the first starting port 2003 and the out port 2020 is smaller (lower) than the height difference between the first starting port and the out port (out port 1008) in the conventional pachinko machine. ing. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that the first starting port 2003 is provided below the conventional first starting port, and the inside of the game area 5a can be made to appear relatively wide. .

The starting port unit 2100 is provided below the first starting port 2003 and has a starting port display section 2110 capable of displaying a predetermined pattern. The starting opening display section 2110 is composed of one 7-segment LED. This starting point display section 2110 can display a predetermined pattern (including numbers) according to the progress of the game. When the starter unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, the starter display part 2110 closes the outlet 1008 from the front, making the outlet 1008 invisible to the player. This allows the player to recognize that the outlet 2020 is the lowest end of the game area 5a.

In the starting port unit 2100 assembled on the game board 5, the first starting port 2003 is located directly below the central release portion 2513a on the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500, and the game released from the central release portion 2513a. Ball B can be accepted with high probability. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2101, guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. and discharged to the safe ball receptacle 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

The game ball B received in the out port 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the circulating ball path unit below the back ball guiding unit 3100. 600 is discharged to the out ball socket 600a.

[8-8b. side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80, 84 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 which are always open to receive the game balls B, and one sub-out opening 2021 which is always open to receive the game balls B.

The three general winning holes 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002, and are provided at higher positions toward the left. Each general prize winning opening 2001 is opened with a size (width) corresponding to one game ball B. One sub-out port 2021 is provided to the left of the leftmost general winning port 2001 . The sub-out port 2021 is opened with a size (width) of one game ball B.

Also, the side unit 2200 has a shelf 2201 on the right side of the rightmost general prize winning opening 2001, which slopes down toward the right. The shelf 2201 extends rightward to the vicinity of the right end of the left outlet 2020 in the starting outlet unit 2100 . That is, when the game ball B rolls on the shelf 2201, it is received by the out port 2020 on the left side.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, three general prize winning openings 2001 and one sub-out opening 2021 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and discharged downward.

Also, the side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

[8-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[8-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 has a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and one sub-out opening 2021 (see FIG. 84, etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening 2004 provided in the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a big winning opening 2005 is provided in a position lower than the second start opening 2004 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. One sub-out port 2021 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the big prize winning port 2005 .

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a big winning opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005. , and a magnetic sensor 1030 for detecting illegal magnetism (see FIG. 93). Two big winning opening sensors 2402 are provided side by side on the left and right.

Also, the attacker unit 2400 has a dummy sensor 2403 at a position visible from the front behind the sub-out port 2021 . Although this dummy sensor 2403 cannot detect the game ball B, it is formed in the same manner as a through sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball B like the big winning hole sensor 2402 . According to this configuration, the dummy sensor 2403 can be replaced with a sensor that can actually detect the game ball B. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be changed to count out-balls or not. is. Although the dummy sensor 2403 is of the same type as the through sensor, it may be a spacer that eliminates a step that causes clogging of the ball at the relevant portion.

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starting opening door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starting opening 2004, and the second starting opening door 2411 according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2002. A starting opening solenoid 2412, a large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and a large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004. and an attacker solenoid 2414 opened and closed according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The second start opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 opens upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the left-right direction. The large winning opening 2005 has a width of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B and opens upward. A second starting opening door 2411 that can open and close the second starting opening 2004 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. A large prize winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by rotating around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the left end side is lower. are doing.

The second starting door 2411 is provided so as to move in the front-rear direction. When the start solenoid 2412 is not energized, the second start door 2411 moves forward due to the spring biasing force of the plunger of the start solenoid 2412, closing the second start door 2004. there is In addition, when the starting solenoid 2412 is energized, the second starting door 2411 moves backward by retracting the plunger of the starting solenoid 2412 against the biasing force of the spring. The mouth 2004 is opened.

The big prize gate door 2413 has a flat plate shape that is elongated in the left and right direction, and is provided so as to move forward and backward by rotating around an axis extending in the left and right direction provided below the big prize gate sensor 2402 . ing. The large winning opening door 2413 can open and close the large winning opening 2005 by moving the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 back and forth. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the large winning opening door 2413 is moved forward by the spring biasing force of the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 to close the large winning opening 2005 . In addition, when the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the large winning opening door 2413 moves rearward by retracting the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 against the urging force of the spring, thereby opening the large winning opening 2005. do.

The attacker unit 2400 forms a space in which the game ball B can flow between the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005 at its upper end, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left. It has an upper shelf portion 2421 provided to cover the top thereof. The upper shelf portion 2421 extends in the left-right direction from the upper right end of the second starting opening 2004 to the upper left end of the big winning opening 2005 .

The attacker unit 2400 is located above the second start opening 2004 and is located leftward from the right end (right rail 1005) of the attacker unit 2400 with a gap that allows one game ball B to pass therethrough. 2004, a second shelf 2423 that slopes downward from the left end of the second starting port 2004, and a second shelf 2423 that slopes downward to the left. The third shelf part that is inclined so as to be lower toward the left large winning opening 2005 from the part where the game ball B can pass between the second shelf part 2423 on the left and lower side of the 2424, and a fourth shelf portion 2425 which is inclined downward from the left end of the big prize opening 2005 toward the left.

In this attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B enters the clearance to the right of the first shelf 2422 and the clearance between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424, it is received by the sub-out port 2021. , the game ball B is discharged outside the game area 5a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the attacker unit 2400 has a front wall and a rear wall that form a space in which the game ball B can circulate leftward between the upper shelf portion 2421 and the big winning opening 2005. A plurality of triangular contact portions in plan view protrude into the space so as to be alternated in the left-right direction from the wall. These a plurality of abutting portions can circulate the game ball B rolling on the large winning opening door 2413 in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction when the large winning opening 2005 is closed. The circulation time of the game ball B which circulates on the entrance door 2413 is lengthened.

In the normal state of the attacker unit 2400, the starter solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are in a de-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starter solenoid 2412 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the second starter door 2411 protrudes forward. In this state, the second starting opening door 2411 is located above the second starting opening 2004, and the second starting opening door 2411 makes it impossible to accept the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004. ing. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411 .

Also, in a normal state, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the big winning opening door 2413 protrudes forward. In this state, the large winning opening door 2413 is located above the large winning opening 2005, and the receiving of the game ball B into the large winning opening 2005 is disabled. In other words, the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the big winning opening door 2413 .

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf 2422, the game ball B rolls leftward due to the inclination of the first shelf 2422, the upper surface of the second start door 2411, and the second After rolling on the second shelf portion 2423 , it is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf portion 2423 . The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 falls on the third shelf 2424 or the big winning entrance door 2413 according to its momentum, and rolls leftward due to their inclination. In addition, when the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 contacts the lower surface of the upper shelf 2421 and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424 may enter the

Then, the game ball B rolling on the big winning gate door 2413 closing the big winning gate 2005 hits a plurality of contact points provided in the space between the upper shelf 2421 and the big winning gate 2005. It alternately abuts against the parts, and rolls to the left while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that rolls leftward on the big winning opening door 2413 rolls on the fourth shelf 2425, and is released to the outside of the attacker unit 2400 from the left end thereof. Since the left end of the fourth shelf 2425 is positioned lower than the first starting port 2003 , the game ball B released leftward from the fourth shelf 2425 is received by the out port 2020 .

The attacker unit 2400 is guided to the left by the inclination when the game ball B falls on the upper shelf part 2421, and the attacker unit 2400 is not given an opportunity to be accepted by the second start hole 2004 or the big winning hole 2005. Released to the left. Since the left end of the upper shelf portion 2421 is provided at a position higher than the first starting port 2003, the game ball B released to the left from the upper shelf portion 2421 may be received by the first starting port 2003. .

In this attacker unit 2400 , when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf 2422 , it enters the sub-out port 2021 . Also, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2423 and the third shelf portion 2424 , it enters the sub-out port 2021 . The game ball B that has entered the sub-out port 2021 passes through the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below without being returned to the game area 5a, and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. It is delivered to the receptacle 600a. In this attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulated on the right side of the first shelf 2422 and the game ball B that passed through the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424 are both substantially two sub-out ports 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting opening solenoid 2412 is energized (turned on) according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2002, it resists the biasing force of the spring. The plunger retreats and the second starter door 2411 moves rearward. Then, by moving the second starting port door 2411 backward, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the receiving of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 becomes possible. That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the second start opening 2004 is in an open state, when the game ball B is received in the second start opening 2004, it is detected by the second start opening sensor 2401 and then released backward from the attacker unit 2400. - 特許庁The game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 and released backward from the attacker unit 2400 is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is delivered to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. discharged to

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004, When the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized (ON), the plunger moves backward against the biasing force of the spring, and the big winning opening door 2413 moves backward. By moving the large winning opening door 2413 backward, the large winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the game ball B can be received into the large winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加That is, the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state.

When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, it is detected by one of the two large winning opening sensors 2402 provided below, and then the attacker unit. 2400 is emitted backwards. The game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 and discharged backward from the attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and is sent to the safe ball receiving opening 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. Ejected.

As described above, according to the attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by either of the two large winning opening sensors 2402 and then released backward. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball B from being stuck between the big winning hole 2005 and the big winning hole sensor 2402, and to accept many game balls B in a short time.

[8-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role item 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85(a) is a front view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory, and FIG. 85(b) is a perspective view of the lottery accessory viewed from above. FIG. 86 is a side cross-sectional view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction. FIG. 87(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a state in which a game ball cannot loop in a lottery accessory, and (b) is a cross section showing a state in which a game ball can loop in a lottery accessory. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in a lottery accessory.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame.

Although the details will be described later, the center accessory 2500 is the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2003 and the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second start port 2004. A role prize winning port 2006 that opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of two special symbols, and a second V prize winning port 2008 that can accept only the game ball B accepted in the role prize winning port 2006. , and a loss opening 2009 for receiving the game ball B which was not received in the second V winning opening 2008 after being received in the accessory winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加

The center accessory 2500 includes an accessory winning opening sensor 2501 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006, and a first V winning opening that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. A sensor 2502, a second V winning opening sensor 2503 for detecting the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, and a loss opening sensor 2504 for detecting the game ball B received in the losing opening 2009. ing.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped body unit 2510 and a lottery accessory 2550 provided in the lower part of the frame of the body unit 2510 . The main unit 2510 has a prize winning port 2006 and a first V prize winning port 2007 . The lottery accessory 2550 has a second V winning opening 2008 and a losing opening 2009 .

[8-8e-1. main unit]
The main unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail. The main unit 2510 has a prize winning opening 2006 . The main unit 2510 includes a transparent frame-shaped center frame 2511 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a warp passage 2512 capable of guiding game balls B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame, and A stage 2513 is provided at the lower side within the frame of the center frame 2511 and releases the game ball B that has flowed through the warp passage 2512 into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction.

The center frame 2511 is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 to extend in the front-rear direction. A flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and flows down the game area 5a. An inflow restricting portion 2511c that restricts the game ball B from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511d projecting from the inner circumference of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a. have.

The insertion part 2511a is provided so that its rear end is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5 . The front end of the inflow restricting portion 2511c except for the frame-like (annular) lower side portion projects forward beyond the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, in a state assembled on the game board 5, the entry (inflow) of the game ball B from the outside of the center accessory 2500 (center frame 2511) to the inside of the frame is prevented (regulated) by the inflow regulation part 2511c. can be done.

The thickness of the flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511d is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511d protrude from the insertion portion 2511a at the same position in the front-rear direction.

A plurality of support portions 2511d are partially provided on the inner periphery of the insertion portion 2511a. The support portion 2511d is also provided at a portion of the insertion portion 2511a where the flange portion 2511b does not protrude, and reinforces the insertion portion 2511a (center frame 2511). In addition, the support portion 2511d has an edge protruding from the insertion portion 2511a formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the insertion portion 2511a or in a straight line so that the support portion 2511d is not conspicuous. The support portion 2511d protrudes from the insertion portion 2511a within a range (1 mm to 10 mm) from the thickness of the support portion 2511d to the thickness of the panel plate 1110, so that the player can It is made to be inconspicuous from.

The warp passage 2512 is open at the left side of the inflow restricting portion 2511c in front view so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. The warp passage 2512 can guide the entering game ball B to the stage 2513 . A part of the warp passage 2512 is formed by the center frame 2511 .

The stage 2513 is attached to the insertion portion 2511 a of the center frame 2511 . The stage 2513 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and is positioned directly above the first start-up port 2003 of the start-up unit 2100, that is, the state in which the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. , is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the stage 2513 is assembled on the game board 5 , the raised portion (central release portion 2513 a ) at the center in the left-right direction is located directly above the first starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2003 with a very high probability.

Also, the main body unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is provided at the upper right corner of the center frame 2511 and has a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages through which the game balls B can flow. The guide path group 2520 guides the game ball B above the normal winning opening 2002 and the attacker unit 2400 .

As shown in FIG. 84, the group of guide passages 2520 is provided outside the frame of the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511, and includes a first guide passage 2521 whose upper entrance is provided at the blocking portion 1006. , and a second guide passage 2522 whose upper entrance is provided adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 . The guide path group 2520 (the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522) are both made of a colorless and transparent member, and the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 vertically extends downward from the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 and then bends rightward at right angles. Extends to the left, bends to the left near the height of 3/4 from the bottom of the height of the game area 5a, extends to the left so as to be lower at a loose angle, and the game ball than the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 After bending downward at the position on the left side by one B and extending to the height of the center of the game area 5a, it bends to the right and extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bends downward to open the exit downward. It is formed in an open shape.

The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100 . A prize winning opening 2006 is provided at an upper left portion of the first guide passage 2521 . Further, below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, a normal prize winning opening 2002 opens upward.

On the other hand, the second guide passage 2522 is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521, and the entrance opens upward. The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the entrance at the upper end, and bends backward at a position lower than the height of the portion where the first guide passage 2521 first bends to the right. The leftmost portion of the first guide passage 2521 extending downward in the state of being aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction by bending downward behind the front surface of the panel 1100 and the left-right direction. extends downward so as to generally match, bends downward in a crank shape at the height of the center of the game area 5a, and then bends downward, and to the right of the lower side in the first guide passage 2521 After bending forward at a portion below the extending portion, the portion extending to the lower right side of the first guide passage 2521 in a state in which the front-rear direction is flush with the first guide passage 2521. It bends rightward so as to extend along the lower side, then bends downward so as to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, and the outlet is formed into a shape that opens downward. .

In addition, the main unit 2510 is provided in the middle of one passage (here, the first guide passage 2521) of the guide passage group 2520, and the game ball B is provided at the first start port 2003 and the second start port 2004. is accepted, the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result, and the game ball B accepted in the role prize winning opening 2006. A first distribution device 2530 that distributes to the chance opening 2531, a second distribution device 2540 that distributes the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 by the first distribution device 2530 to the first V winning opening 2007, A lottery guide passage 2545 for guiding the game ball B not allocated to the first V winning opening 2007 by the two distribution device 2540 (the game ball B distributed to the second prize opening 2541) to the lottery accessory 2550. ing.

The accessory winning opening 2006 in the main unit 2510 (the center accessory 2500) is provided in a portion extending leftward on the upper side of the first guide passage 2521. It extends upward and opens upward. The accessory prize-winning door 2515 is formed in a plate-like shape extending to the left and right so that the left end is lowered while extending forward and backward. can be opened and closed. The accessory winning opening door 2515 can close the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving forward. can be formed to guide the game ball B flowing from the upstream side to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521.

The accessory winning opening door 2515 is retracted by the driving of the accessory winning opening solenoid 2516 to open the accessory winning opening 2006, and the game ball B that has flowed through the first guide passage 2521 is pushed through the accessory winning opening 2006. can be accepted by This prize winning port door 2515 closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning solenoid 2516 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning solenoid 2516 is ON (when energized). The prize winning opening 2006 is opened.

The first sorting device 2530 is a chance opening 2531 and a first scarf opening 2532 into which the game ball B received by the role winning opening 2006 and detected by the role winning opening sensor 2501 can enter, and the game ball B A dividing rotator 2533 that has an accommodating portion 2533a that can accommodate only one piece on the outer peripheral surface and is rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a state in which the accommodating portion 2533a of the distributing rotator 2533 faces rightward. and a first distribution solenoid 2534 (see FIG. 93) for rotating the distribution rotor 2533 between the upward facing state and the state. The distribution rotator 2533 is formed in a truncated cone shape with an outer peripheral surface tapering toward the rear.

The chance opening 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 is provided downstream of the sorting rotor 2533 with respect to the flow of the game balls B, and the game balls accommodated in the accommodation portion 2533a of the sorting rotor 2533. B can enter, and is provided on the right side of the distribution rotor 2533 . The chance opening 2531 is connected to the second sorting device 2540 . The first slot 2532 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution rotor 2533 with respect to the flow of the game ball B, and the game ball B that has not been accommodated in the housing portion 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533 enters. , is provided above the distribution rotor 2533 . The first opening 2532 is open forward and guides the entered game ball B to the rear of the game panel 1100 .

In the first sorting device 2530, when the first sorting solenoid 2534 is OFF (non-energized), the accommodating portion 2533a of the sorting rotor 2533 faces rightward. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2501 and then flows down to the distribution rotor 2533 from above, it hits the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotor 2533. touch. Since the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotator 2533 is formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows backward, the game ball B is guided backward by the inclination of the outer peripheral surface, and enters the first opening 2532. Become.

On the other hand, when the first sorting solenoid 2534 is ON (energized), the sorting rotator 2533 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees, and the accommodating portion 2533a faces upward. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2501 and then flows downward to the distribution rotator 2533, only one is received in the receiving portion 2533a. . In a state where the game ball B is housed in the housing part 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533, when the game ball B further flows down from the accessory winning opening 2006 side to the distribution rotor 2533, the game ball B is received. After coming into contact with the game ball B housed in the portion 2533a, it enters the first opening 2532 in the rear. A game ball B that has entered the first opening 2532 is detected by a sensor, passed to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and passed from the back ball guidance unit 3100 to the safe ball of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. It is discharged to the receptacle 600b.

When the game ball B is housed in the housing portion 2533a, the first distribution solenoid 2534 rotates the distribution rotating body 2533 clockwise by 90 degrees, and the housing portion 2533a turns to the right. The game ball B housed in the housing portion 2533 a rolls rightward from the housing portion 2533 a and is received by the chance opening 2531 . The game ball B received in the chance opening 2531 is sent to the next second sorting device 2540 .

Thus, in the first distribution device 2530, the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 is placed on either the chance port 2531 side (second distribution device 2540 side) or the first prize port 2532 side. can be divided into

The second distribution device 2540 distributes the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 to either the second scoring opening 2541 or the first V winning opening 2007 . The second sorting device 2540 is provided at a height between the first sorting device 2530 and the exit of the guide passage group 2520 in front view. The second sorting device 2540 is provided behind the sorting rotor 2533 of the first sorting device 2530 .

The second sorting device 2540 has a second slot which is provided so that the game balls B housed in the storage part 2533a of the sorting rotor 2533 in the first sorting device 2530 and sorted to the chance slots 2531 can enter. 2541 and the first V winning opening 2007, a distribution piece 2543 that can open and close the second opening 2541 by moving forward and backward, and a second distribution solenoid 2544 (Fig. 93) and

The second opening 2541 is open upward at a position to the right of the distribution rotor 2533, and the game balls B distributed to the chance opening 2531 are supplied from above. The first V winning opening 2007 is provided adjacent to the right side of the second winning opening 2541 and opens upward. The distribution piece 2543 has a flat plate shape that is inclined downward to the right, and protrudes forward to close the upper end opening of the second opening 2541, thereby distributing the game ball B to the second opening 2541. Acceptance can be disabled, and the game ball B in contact with the upper surface can be guided to the right and accepted into the first V winning opening 2007 .

In the second sorting device 2540 , the sorting piece 2543 moves forward to close the second opening 2541 when the second sorting solenoid 2544 is OFF (non-energized). In this state, when the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 flows down, it contacts the upper surface of the distribution piece 2543 and is guided to the right by the inclination of the distribution piece 2543. It is accepted (divided) into the first V winning port 2007. The game ball B distributed to the first V winning hole 2007 is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2502, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is sent downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. is discharged to the safe ball receptacle 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600.

On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2544 is ON (energized), the distribution piece 2543 retreats, the second opening 2541 is opened upward, and the game ball B to the second opening 2541 can be accepted. In this state, when the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 flows down, the game ball B passes in front of the retreating distribution piece 2543 and passes through the second opening. 2541 will be accepted (distributed). The game ball B distributed to the second slot 2541 is guided to the left lottery accessory 2550 by the lottery guide passage 2545 .

Thus, in the second sorting device 2540, the game balls B housed in the housing portion 2533a of the sorting rotor 2533 in the first sorting device 2530, that is, the game balls B sorted into the chance openings 2531 are It can be distributed to either the second ska mouth 2541 (lottery accessory 2550) side or the first V winning mouth 2007 side.

A lottery entrance ball sensor 2546 for detecting the circulation of game balls B is provided in the lottery guide passage 2545 . When the game ball B is detected by the lottery accessory ball sensor 2546, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the effect display device 1600, the main body frame speaker 503, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the game board 5. , LEDs provided on the door frame 3, etc. are controlled, and an effect is executed to excite the lottery (distribution) of the game balls B in the lottery accessory 2550.例文帳に追加As a result, the game ball B is distributed to the second slot 2541 in the second distribution device 2540, thereby eliminating the player's disappointment and heightening expectations for the lottery accessory 2550.例文帳に追加

[8-8e-2. Lottery accessories]
The lottery prize 2550 in the center prize 2500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88 and the like. The lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is provided in the lower part of the frame of the main unit 2510 formed in a frame shape, and has a second V winning opening 2008 and a losing opening 2009 . This lottery accessory 2550 is supplied with the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 . Specifically, the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 and distributed to the chance opening 2531 by the first distribution device 2530 and further distributed to the second scoring opening 2541 by the second distribution device 2540 is supplied. In addition, the lottery accessory 2550 includes a second V winning opening sensor 2503 that detects the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, and a losing opening sensor 2504 that detects the game ball B received in the losing opening 2009. and has.

The lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied with the game ball B distributed to the second slot 2541 by the second sorting device 2540 and circulated through the lottery guide passage 2545 so that it becomes lower toward the left. An inclined guideway 2551, a distribution unit 2552 that distributes the game ball B that has circulated through the guideway 2551 to either the loop side or the non-loop side (loss port 2009 side), and the distribution unit 2552 to the loop side A hitting unit 2553 capable of hitting the game balls B distributed to the rear, and the game balls B hit backward by the hitting unit 2553 are supplied, and are inclined to be lower forward and upward and downward. A swing gutter 2554 that can reciprocate so as to swing about the axis of the game ball B guided by the swing gutter 2554 rolls and is lowered toward the front guideway 2551 Between the table 2555, which is wide in the front, rear, left, and right directions and is provided with the second V-winning opening 2008 near the downstream end, and the second V-winning opening 2008 and the rocking gutter 2554 on the table 2555 , and has a pair of swinging pieces 2556 that can swing around the axis in the vertical direction.

This lottery accessory 2550 will be described later in detail, but as long as the game ball B is distributed to the loop side by the distribution unit 2552, the game ball B released from the table 2555 provided with the second V winning port 2008 is The game ball B is supplied to the hitting section 2553 and can loop between the hitting section 2553 and the table 2555 .

The guide path 2551 of the lottery accessory 2550 extends from near the rear end to the front end along the right side of the lottery accessory 2550 so that the front is lower, and then along the front side of the lottery accessory 2550 to the vicinity of the left end. It extends so that the left side becomes lower, and is formed in an L shape in plan view. This guide path 2551 extends with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. A game ball B is supplied from a lottery guide passage 2545 to a portion extending in the front-rear direction along the right end side of the guide passage 2551 .

The distribution part 2552 of the lottery accessory 2550 is provided at a part near the downstream end (left end) of the part of the guideway 2551 extending in the left-right direction. The distributing portion 2552 is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction near the left end of the loss opening 2009 that penetrates the guide path 2551 and opens upward. It is provided with a swing bridge-shaped distribution bridge 2557 that can open and close the cage loss port 2009 and a lottery loop solenoid 2558 (see FIG. 93) for rotating the distribution bridge 2557 . The guideway 2551 is divided into an upstream side and a downstream side with the failure opening 2009 as a boundary.

The distribution bridge 2557 is formed in a flat plate shape elongated in the left and right direction in a plan view, the left side is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and the right side is a free end. The distribution bridge 2557 has a loop position (see FIG. 87(a)) in which the right side approaches the right side of the failure opening 2009 and extends in the horizontal direction and collapses (see FIG. 87(a)), and a vertical position with the right side positioned above the left side. and a non-looped position (see FIG. 87(b)) in an upright position.

The distribution bridge 2557 is in a state of a loop position, so that it is in a state of bridging the taxiway 2551 divided into two upstream and downstream sides by the loss port 2009, and passes over the distribution bridge 2557. The game ball B can roll from the upstream side to the downstream side. That is, the distribution bridge 2557 can close the loss opening 2009 and make it impossible to receive the game ball B by being in the state of the loop position. On the other hand, the distributing bridge 2557 is in a non-looping position, so that the loss opening 2009 is opened upward, and the game ball B rolling from the upstream is not passed to the downstream side. can be accepted into Thus, in the distribution section 2552, the distribution bridge 2557 can distribute the game ball B to either the loop side or the non-loop side.

This distribution bridge 2557 is provided with a distribution display portion 2557a formed in a flag shape with an X mark on the side opposite to the rolling surface of the game ball B. As shown in FIG. The distribution display portion 2557a becomes visible from the player side when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the non-loop position in which the loss opening 2009 is opened. This allows the player to recognize that the game ball B cannot go to the hitting portion 2553 on the downstream side (cannot loop).

In addition, the distribution bridge 2557 is provided so that the left end side rotatably supported is located to the left of the left end of the downstream end (front end side) of the table 2555 . Therefore, since the game ball B released from the table 2555 to the guideway 2551 side is released to the right side of the distribution bridge 2557 in the non-loop position, the game ball B is released from the table 2555 in the non-loop position. , and does not go to the downstream side of the guideway 2551 that is divided into two (downstream side of the distribution bridge 2557), and is accepted in the open loss port 2009.

The hitting part 2553 of the lottery accessory 2550 is inclined such that the front end is lower than the downstream end of the guide path 2551 and higher toward the rear, and the game balls B distributed to the loop side by the distribution part 2552 are supplied. and a fan-shaped hitting piece 2560 that is provided at the downstream end of the climbing portion 2559 and can hit the game ball B, and the hitting piece 2560 is rotated around the axis perpendicular to the climbing portion 2559. and a single drive motor 2561 (see FIG. 93).

The fan-shaped striking piece 2560 is rotated at a relatively high speed by a striking piece drive motor 2561 . Therefore, the strength with which the game ball B is hit varies depending on the timing when the game ball B reaches the site where the hitting piece 2560 is provided and the timing of the rotational position of the hitting piece 2560 . Therefore, when the game ball B is hit to some extent strongly, it can get over the climbing part 2559 and go to the swing gutter 2554 side behind, and when the hitting is weak, it can not get over the climbing part 2559 and moves forward. will come back. Thereby, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B is strongly hit and goes to the rocking gutter 2554 (table 2555) side, and the player can be entertained. In addition, since the game ball B returns when the hitting by the hitting piece 2560 is weak, it is possible to lengthen the time until the game with the game ball B is confirmed, and to make the player feel that he/she has won. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In this lottery accessory 2550, the game ball B that has climbed over the climbing part 2559 is supplied between the striking part 2553 and the swing gutter 2554, and the swing path is curved so that the left and right ends are high and the center is low. 2562 and a discharge port 2563 provided in the center of the swing passage 2562 for discharging the game ball B to the swing gutter 2554 . A plurality of unevennesses are provided in the vicinity of both left and right ends of the swing path 2562, and the rolling speed of the game ball B can be damped. The swing path 2562 is provided along the rear edge of the lottery accessory 2550 and behind the table 2555 . The game ball B supplied from the hitting part 2553 to the swing passage 2562 rolls in the left-right direction, and is then discharged from the center discharge port 2563 to the swing gutter 2554 in the same manner as the stage 2513 .

The swinging gutter 2554 of the lottery accessory 2550 is formed in a disc shape and has a gutter-like recessed gutter portion 2554a extending from the center toward the outer periphery. The disk-shaped rocking gutter 2554 has its rotation axis inclined so that the rear side is higher. The lottery accessory 2550 has a gutter rocking drive motor 2564 (see FIG. 93) for reciprocating the rocking gutter 2554 within a range of a predetermined angle. This swinging gutter 2554 is driven by a gutter swinging driving motor 2564 so that the tip of the gutter part 2554a is directed to the second V prize opening 2008 in front, and the tip of the gutter part 2554a is moved in the horizontal direction within a predetermined angle range. Rotate back and forth to face.

The rocking gutter 2554 is provided at the rear end (upper end) of the center in the left-right direction of the table 2555, and the game ball B released from the ejection port 2563 is delivered to the gutter portion 2554a. Since the swinging gutter 2554 reciprocates, the game ball B transferred to the gutter part 2554a is played within a fan-shaped range corresponding to the rotation direction in which the tip of the gutter part 2554a on the table 2555 is facing. Sphere B can be released. At this time, since the swinging gutter 2554 is rotating until the received game ball B rolls on the gutter portion 2554a and is released from the tip, the game ball B is given an inertial force by the rotation. will work. Therefore, the game ball B released from the tip of the gutter portion 2554a does not roll straight on the table 2555 in the direction in which the gutter portion 2554a faces, making it difficult to predict the rolling direction.

The table 2555 of the lottery accessory 2550 is inclined so that the front end side is lower, and the length of the front end side, which is the downstream end, in the horizontal direction is shorter than the length of the rear end in the horizontal direction. In addition, the table 2555 is provided with a rocking gutter 2554 at the upper end of the center in the left-right direction, and a second V winning opening 2008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction. The table 2555 has a central groove 2555a extending from the rocking gutter 2554 to the second V prize opening 2008 at the center in the left-right direction, and a recess 2555b that is recessed from the surroundings near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction. are doing. The recessed portion 2555b is recessed in the shape of a pentagonal home base, and the second V winning opening 2008 is provided at the bottom thereof.

Since this table 2555 has a central groove 2555a leading to the second V winning opening 2008 and a concave portion 2555b provided with the second V winning opening 2008 at the bottom, the player can When B enters, it can be made to appear to be accepted in the second V winning opening 2008, and the movement of the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 can be entertained.

The front end side, which is the downstream end of the table 2555, is provided at a position higher than the guideway 2551 in front. Therefore, the game ball B flowing through the guide path 2551 is not supplied onto the table 2555 without passing through the striking part 2553 and the rocking gutter 2554 .

The swing pieces 2556 of the lottery accessory 2550 are arranged in a pair symmetrically with respect to the center of the table 2555 in the left-right direction between the swing gutter 2554 and the second V prize opening 2008 on the table 2555. is provided. The rocking piece 2556 is formed in the shape of a drop, and has a circular base end facing forward and a sharp tip facing backward, and is rotatable about the circular base end side. It is

The lottery accessory 2550 has a swinging piece solenoid 2565 for swinging by reciprocally rotating a pair of swinging pieces 2556 about a vertical axis within a predetermined angle range. A pair of swinging pieces 2556 are provided so as to rotate in opposite directions by one swinging piece solenoid 2565 .

Since the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are rotated by the swinging piece solenoid 2565, the rotation speed is faster than when they are rotated by the drive motor. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the swing piece 2556 while the swing piece 2556 is swinging and moving, the game ball B can be strongly bounced. Therefore, depending on the rotating direction of the swinging piece 2556, the game ball B in contact with the table 2555 can be sent to the center side in the left-right direction or sent to both sides in the left-right direction, thereby changing the flow of the game ball B. can be granted.

When the sharp tips of the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are close to each other, the distance between the swinging pieces 2556 becomes narrower, and the rearward-facing surface portions of the swinging pieces 2556 move forward. , and the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are narrowed rearward. As a result, when the game ball B flowing down from the back of the rocking gutter 2554 or the table 2555 passes between the pair of rocking pieces 2556, the possibility of being accepted into the second V winning opening 2008 increases, and the pair of When the rocking piece 2556 comes into contact with the rear facing surface, the inclination of the rocking piece 2556 guides the ball away from the center in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, in a state in which the sharp ends of the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are receding from each other (the state indicated by the dashed lines in FIG. 88), the rearward-facing surface portions of the swinging pieces 2556 move left and right toward the front. It is inclined so as to approach the center of the direction, and the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are spread rearward. As a result, when the game ball B flowing down from the back of the rocking gutter 2554 or the table 2555 comes into contact with the surface of the pair of rocking pieces 2556 facing backward, it is guided to the center in the left-right direction by the inclination of the pair of rocking pieces 2556. There is a possibility of being accepted in the 2V winning slot 2008.

Therefore, in a state in which the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are spread rearward, the game ball B in contact with the swinging pieces 2556 is guided to the center in the left-right direction, so that the pair of swinging pieces 2556 move backward. Compared to the narrowed state, the possibility that the game ball B flowing down from the rear will be accepted by the second V winning opening 2008 is high. In other words, depending on the state of the pair of swinging pieces 2556, the acceptance probability of the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008 can be changed.

The lottery accessory 2550 of this embodiment has a transparent cover 2566 that covers the whole from above (see FIGS. 78 to 80, etc.). With this cover 2566, the game ball B supplied through the lottery guide passage 2545 can be prevented from jumping out of the lottery accessory 2550, and the game ball B from outside other than the lottery guide passage 2545 can be prevented. can be prevented from being supplied (intruded).

Next, the flow of the game ball B in the lottery accessory 2550 will be explained. In the lottery accessory 2550, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result (for example, "per role") drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004. Accordingly, one of the game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern is supplied near the upstream of the guide path 2551 through the lottery guide passage 2545 . The game ball B supplied near the upstream of the guideway 2551 rolls toward the distribution part 2552 on the left side according to the inclination of the guideway 2551 .

In the distribution section 2552, the distribution bridge 2557 collapses for a predetermined time and is in a state of a loop position, and the game ball B rolling from the upstream side passes through the distribution bridge 2557 to the downstream side. It rolls to the striking part 2553 . Then, the game ball B supplied to the hitting portion 2553 is hit backward by the rotating hitting piece 2560, and rolls so as to climb the climbing portion 2559 extending backward.

At this time, since the striking piece 2560 is fan-shaped and rotates at a relatively high speed, depending on the timing at which the game ball B abuts against the rotational position of the striking piece 2560, the game ball B may be hit strongly. The game ball B comes into contact with the game ball B in a graze-like manner, and the force of the game ball B hit backward varies. Therefore, if the hitting by the hitting piece 2560 is weak, it cannot climb the uphill part 2559 which is higher in the rear, and it returns up the uphill part 2559, and the game ball B goes back and forth on the uphill part 2559. Sometimes.

When the game ball B hit by the hitting piece 2560 climbs over the climbing part 2559, it enters the swing passage 2562 provided in the rear, and moves in the left-right direction through the swing passage 2562 whose center in the left-right direction is low. It will roll. At this time, since a plurality of irregularities are provided near the left and right ends of the swing path 2562, the game ball B passing through the irregularities causes the impact of the irregularities to attenuate the rolling speed. As a result, the momentum of the game ball B that has been hit by the hitting piece 2560 and climbs over the climbing portion 2559 can be reduced.

The game ball B that rolls in the swing path 2562 so as to swing in the horizontal direction is finally discharged onto the table 2555 through the swing gutter 2554 from the outlet 2563 provided in the center. At this time, the swing gutter 2554 is swung and rotated by the gutter swing drive motor 2564 so as to reciprocate within a predetermined angle range, so that the game ball B is released from the outlet 2563 to the swing gutter 2554. The game ball B is released in various directions from the swing gutter 2554 depending on the timing of the movement and the timing of the rotation position of the swing gutter 2554 .

The game ball B released from the rocking gutter 2554 to the table 2555 rolls forward according to the inclination of the table 2555 and is released to the guideway 2551 from the front edge. At this time, since a pair of rocking pieces 2556 are rocked in the vicinity of the center of the table 2555 in the front-rear direction, the game ball B in contact with the rocking pieces 2556 is moved. It can be flipped to change the rolling direction. In addition, since the second V winning opening 2008 is provided near the front end of the table 2555 at the center in the left-right direction, the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 can be received in the second V winning opening 2008. be.

The game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2503, and after being delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the ball is sent to the lower circulating ball path. It is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the unit 600. When the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008, a "jackpot game" is executed as an advantageous game state in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the game ball B is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted into the second V winning port 2008, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

The game ball B released from the front edge of the table 2555 to the guideway 2551 is within the predetermined time, and the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 is in the state of the loop position. to the striking portion 2553. Therefore, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, the game ball B can loop between the striking part 2553 and the table 2555 any number of times unless the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008. can. In other words, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, the opportunity to receive the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008 will come again and again. Thereby, even if the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 is not accepted in the second V winning opening 2008, it can be received in the second V winning opening 2008 by passing through the distribution bridge 2557 at the loop position. Since the opportunity to become will come again, the player can continue to be entertained.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 changes from the loop position to the raised non-loop position, and the failure opening 2009 closed by the distribution bridge 2557 is opened upward. be. In this state, the game ball B released from the front end side of the table 2555 or the game ball B rolling on the guide path 2551 is accepted in the loss opening 2009, and the game ball B does not loop and the lottery is performed. The lottery at object 2550 ends. At this time, an upright distribution bridge 2557 raises a distribution display section 2557a imitating a flag with an X mark to make it visible. It can be made to recognize that it does not loop.

The game ball B received in the loss opening 2009 is detected by the loss opening sensor 2504, and after being transferred to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the safe ball receiver of the circulation ball path unit 600 below. It is discharged to port 600b.

As described above, according to the lottery accessory 2550 of the present embodiment, the game ball B supplied from the accessory winning opening 2006 is received in the second V winning opening 2008, making the player nervous and excited. can be used to entertain players. Also, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the second V winning port 2008, when the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 is in the loop position, the game ball B is again sent through the hitting section 2553 to the second V Since it is sent to the swing gutter 2554 located upstream of the prize winning opening 2008 and looped, it is given an opportunity to be accepted into the second V prize winning opening 2008 again, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation again. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

[8-8f. Ordinary winning entrance unit]
Next, the normal winning slot unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The normal winning opening unit 2600 has a normal winning opening 2002, and is provided near the left end in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. This normal prize winning port unit 2600 is provided between the attacker unit 2400 and the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided so that the normal prize winning port 2002 is positioned directly below the exit of the first guide passage 2521. It is

The normal winning opening 2002 of the normal winning opening unit 2600 is always open upward to receive the game ball B. The game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the normal winning hole sensor 3002, and downward. is discharged to the safe ball receptacle 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600.

[8-9. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. Although not shown, in the game area 5a, in the left and right outer parts and lower parts of the center role 2500, and in the part between the attacker unit 2400 and the guide passage group 2520 in the center role 2500, A plurality of obstruction nails are installed in a predetermined gauge array. In addition, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

On the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are installed between the inner rail 1002 and the inner rail 1002 in a predetermined gauge arrangement. On the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, the entrance of the warp passage 2512 opens slightly upward from the left at a portion below the vertical center of the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511. there is A windmill is provided between the warp passage 2512 and the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 .

A game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp passage 2512 with a certain probability. The game ball B that has entered the warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2513 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls on the stage 2513 in the left-right direction, and is ejected from the central release portion 2513a or the side release portion 2513b. It is released so as to flow back into the game area 5a from either. Since the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2003 in the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release portion 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first It is received in the starting port 2003 . The game ball B released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a is received in the first starting port 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the first starting port sensor 2101 of the starting port unit 2100, and is guided to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is delivered and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100 . When the game ball B is detected by the first start sensor 2101, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are added to the number of balls held, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the first In a state where the reserved number of special symbols is less than 4), a lottery for the first special symbol is executed which enables the occurrence of an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, the lottery 1st special design is also called a 1st special lottery result.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2003 is received in the out port 2020 and discharged out of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the circulating ball path unit below the back ball guiding unit 3100. 600 is discharged to the out ball socket 600a.

A game ball B that is hit to the left outside of the center role 2500 and does not enter the warp passage 2512 has a high probability of moving along the lower side of the center role 2500 when it circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill. It flows down to the right so as to follow a plurality of obstacle nails arranged diagonally. A game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill may be received by the first starting opening 2003 or the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 . Also, the game ball B that has circulated on the right side of the center of the windmill may be received by the sub-out port 2021 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B that has not been received by the first starting port 2003, the general prize winning port 2001, and the sub-out port 2021 is received by the out port 2020 and discharged out of the game area 5a.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and downward. is discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of adding a predetermined number to the number of balls in possession is given.

On the other hand, when the water flows leftward from the center of the windmill, it flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down the shelf 2301 to the right. A game ball B that circulates on the left side of the center of the windmill may be received by the general prize winning opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then transferred to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guide unit 3100. - 特許庁The game ball B that has not been received by the general winning opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 is received by the out opening 2020 and discharged out of the game area 5a.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a guide passage group 2520, a role winning opening 2006, a normal winning opening 2002, a second start opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a sub-out opening 2021 are provided in this order from the top. It is A plurality of obstacle nails are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the second starting port 2004, respectively.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the strength with which the game ball B enters above the portion that is lowered toward the right from the vicinity of the center in the horizontal direction on the upper side of the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511 in the center accessory 2500 When the game ball B is hit with , the game ball B circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 .

More specifically, the game ball B is hit with a strength that makes contact with the impinging portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B in contact with the impingement portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 . The game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the prize winning opening door 2515 that closes the prize winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guiding path 2521, and then the guide path group. 2520 is discharged from the right exit of the lower end to the lower normal winning a prize unit 2600 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates, it is twisted backward and aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction, and then forward. It is twisted and released from the exit on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 to the normal winning opening unit 2600 side below.

Since the normal winning opening 2002 of the normal winning opening unit 2600 is provided directly under the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B that has circulated through the first guidance passage 2521 circulates through the second guidance passage 2522. There is a higher possibility of being accepted into the normal winning opening 2002 than the game ball B that has been played.

The game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the normal winning hole sensor 3002, and downwardly. is discharged to the safe ball receptacle 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600. When the game ball B is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 3002, a privilege to add a predetermined number of balls to the number of possession is given, and a state in which predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the number of reserved symbols in the normal pattern is less than 4) state), a normal symbol lottery that enables acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is executed. In addition, the normally drawn pattern is also called a normal lottery result.

A game ball B that is hit right into the game area 5a and circulated through the guide passage group 2520 and then not accepted in the normal winning opening 2002 flows down onto the attacker unit 2400 while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails. Then, when the game ball B flows down to the upper shelf portion 2421 of the attacker unit 2400, it is guided leftward and downward according to the inclination of the upper shelf portion 2421, and there is no opportunity to be accepted by the second start opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005, and the attacker unit 2400 is discharged to the left. In addition, since the downstream end (left end) of the upper shelf portion 2421 of the attacker unit 2400 is positioned above the first starting port 2003, the game ball B having circulated through the upper shelf portion 2421 is received by the first starting port 2003. there is a possibility.

On the other hand, when the game ball B flows down to the first shelf portion 2422 of the attacker unit 2400, it rolls leftward due to its inclination, and rolls on the upper surface of the second starting door 2411 and the second shelf portion 2423. , and is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf portion 2423 . Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 falls on the third shelf 2424 or the big winning entrance door 2413 according to its momentum, and rolls leftward due to their inclination. Then, after rolling on the fourth shelf portion 2425 from the big winning opening door 2413 , it is discharged to the left outside the attacker unit 2400 from the fourth shelf portion 2425 . A game ball B released from the fourth shelf 2425 is received in the out port 2020 .

Furthermore, when the game ball B does not flow down to either the upper shelf 2421 or the first shelf 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 and falls to the right of the first shelf 2422 , it is received in the sub-out port 2021 . Also, even if the game ball B falls onto the first shelf 2422, it is received by the sub-out port 2021 when it enters the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424.例文帳に追加The game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, and is sent to the out ball receiving port 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. Ejected.

When the game ball B flows down to the first shelf portion 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 , the game ball B rolls on the second starting door 2411 . Therefore, by the acceptance of the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002, "normal winning" is drawn as a normal pattern (normal lottery result), and the second starting opening door 2411 is retreated by the starting opening solenoid 2412, and the second starting opening. When the game ball B flows (rolls) from the side of the first shelf 2422 at the timing when 2004 is open, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 .

After being detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. is discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a privilege to add a predetermined number of balls is given, and a state in which predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the number of pending special symbols is less than 4), a lottery for the second special symbol that enables the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is executed. In addition, the drawn second special pattern is also referred to as a second special drawing result.

In addition, the game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 and rolled on the second starting door 2411 and the second shelf 2423 rolls on the big winning door 2413 . Therefore, the first special pattern (first special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2003, the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second start port 2004 (Second special lottery result), depending on (for example, when the lottery special symbol (special lottery result) is "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", etc.), the attacker solenoid 2414 When the game ball B circulates (rolls) from the second shelf part 2423 side at the timing when the winning opening door 2413 is retreated and the big winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball B moves to the big winning opening 2005. accepted by

The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by one of the two big winning hole sensors 2402 provided below, and is then guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 to be the back ball of the back unit 3000. After being delivered to the guide unit 3100, it is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600 below. When the game ball B is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege of adding a predetermined number to the number of possessed balls is given.

By the way, when the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004 and "per character" is drawn as the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first guide passage 2521 The provided accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution rotator 2533 of the first distribution device 2530 and the distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the "accessory win" is drawn, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes. "Right shot" can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the first guide passage 2521 provided with the winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the lottery is higher than that of the "jackpot". Three patterns of winning a prize are set, and in each of the patterns, the prize winning opening 2006 is roughly divided and opens and closes twice.

First, the opening and closing of the prize winning opening 2006 for each "winning prize" will be described in detail. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has passed from the start of execution of the "first prize winning", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short period of time (80 ms) and then closed for a short period of time (1252 ms). After that, it is opened again for a short period of time (80 ms) and then closed to complete the operation. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has passed from the start of the execution of the "second prize winning", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed. After a longer time (5420 ms) has passed, the switch is opened for a long time (9414 ms) and then closed to complete the operation. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution of the "third prize winning", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short period of time (80 ms), and then closed. After a longer time (19366 ms) has passed, the switch is opened for a long time (9404 ms) and then closed to complete the operation.

The second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "first winning prize" is started after the time when the "first winning prize" is completed from the start of execution. In addition, the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "third prize winning" is started after the time when the "second prize winning" is completed from the start of execution.

It should be noted that, in the second long-time open state in the "second winning prize" and the "third winning prize", eight open states (80 ms) are repeated at regular intervals (1252 ms). In other words, the prize winning port 2006 opens and closes (opens) twice for the "first winning prize" and nine times for the "second winning prize" and the "third winning prize".

Next, the operation of the sorting rotator 2533 of the first sorting device 2530 in the "handle hit" is rotated counterclockwise at the same time as the start of execution, and the accommodating part 2533a is turned upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms). After entering the first storable state, and then turning clockwise to turn the storable portion 2533a to the right and entering the non-storable state, after a predetermined time (4560 ms) has passed, a time longer than the first time (13446 ms) 2 . After entering the unaccommodable state for a short period of time (500 ms), it enters the unaccommodable state for the third time (13446 ms) for the same time as the second time, and then enters the unaccommodable state.

The distribution rotator 2533 is in a non-accommodable state when the first storable state ends in the middle of the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the ``winning prize''. Also, the distribution rotator 2533 will be in the second accommodable state after the time from the start of the execution to the completion of the "first award winning". Therefore, at the time of the "first award", the control of the distribution rotator 2533 ends before the second accommodative state is reached, and the second and third accommodative states are not executed. This distribution rotating body 2533 starts the second accommodating state before the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "second prize win", and the second open state is closed. After entering the state, it becomes uncontainable.

Also, the distribution rotator 2533 will be in the third accommodable state after the time from the start of the execution to the completion of the "second award winning". Therefore, at the time of the "second award winning", the control of the distribution rotator 2533 ends before the third accommodable state is reached, and the third accommodable state is not executed. In other words, the distribution rotator 2533 is put into a state of being able to be accommodated once in the case of "winning the first prize", twice in the case of winning the "second prize", and three times in the case of "winning the third prize". Become. This distribution rotor 2533 starts the third accommodating state before the second open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "third prize win", and the second open state ends. After being in a closed state, it will be in an unaccommodable state.

Next, the operation of the sorting piece 2543 of the second sorting device 2540 in the "handle hit" is the first closed state in which the second sorting device 2540 protrudes forward at the same time as the start of execution and closes the second opening 2541 for a predetermined time (3020 ms). (a state that can be distributed to the first V winning opening 2007), and then retreats and the second ska mouth 2541 is in an open state (a state that can be distributed to the lottery accessory 2550) for a predetermined time ( 23006 ms), the second closed state is set for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first open state, and then the open state is established.

The first closed state of the sorting piece 2543 ends in the middle of the first open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "winning prize" and becomes an open state. Further, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closed state of the sorting piece 2543 is started in the middle of the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "third prize winning". After the second open state of the port 2006 becomes the closed state, the distribution piece 2543 changes from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closed state of the sorting piece 2543 is executed only when "winning the third prize" and "winning the first prize" or "winning the second prize". , the second closing state of the distributing piece 2543 is not performed.

For this reason, in the "first prize win", the opening and closing of the prize winning port 2006 is executed twice in a short period of time. The possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 is low. In addition, since the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "second winning prize" and the "third winning prize" is also for a short time, the game ball B is accepted by the prize winning opening 2006. Unlikely. In addition, the time when the first accommodating state of the distribution rotating body 2533 in the first distribution device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "winning prize" is the prize winning. Since it is shorter than the opening time of the opening 2006 for the first time, the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is stored in the distribution rotator 2533 when the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time. It is even less likely to be accommodated in portion 2533a. Since the time at which the first storable state of the sorting rotor 2533 and the first closed state of the sorting piece 2543 in the second sorting device 2540 are completed is the same, the sorting rotator 2533 The game ball B housed in the housing portion 2533a is not distributed to the first V winning opening 2007 side at the time of the first housing possible state.

On the other hand, the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "second prize win" and the "third prize win" takes a long time. There is a high possibility that it will be accepted in the prize winning slot 2006 . At this time, after the distribution rotating body 2533 of the first distribution device 2530 is in a state that can be accommodated before the prize winning port 2006 is opened, the prize winning port 2006 is changed from the open state to the closed state. Since it will be in an unacceptable state after it becomes, there is a high possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 in the second open state will be accommodated in the accommodation portion 2533a of the distribution rotator 2533. .

Thus, in this example, the possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the prize winning opening 2006 in the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "second winning prize" and the "third winning prize" is In addition to being low, when the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time, the possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2533a of the distribution rotator 2533 is low. In spite of the fact that it is lower, at the same time as the performance of the per-accessory game state is started, the distribution rotating body 2533 is rotated counterclockwise to make the accommodating portion 2533a upwardly storable, and is accommodated for a predetermined period (3020 ms). After the portion 2533a is directed upward, it is rotated clockwise to turn the accommodating portion 2533a rightward, thereby making it impossible to accommodate. That is, immediately after the start of the per-accessory game state, the distribution rotor 2533 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side, but the distribution rotor 2533 distributes the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side. The sorting operation is executed to show the sorting operation by the sorting rotator 2533 in advance.

Similarly, although it is unlikely that the distribution rotator 2533 distributes the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side immediately after the start of the per-accessory game state, the second distribution is performed simultaneously with the start of execution of the per-accessory game state. By protruding forward the sorting piece 2543 of the device 2540 to close the second opening 2541, it is possible to distribute to the first V winning opening 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) has passed, it retreats to the second opening. By opening 2541, it is set to a state in which it is distributed to the lottery accessory 2550.例文帳に追加That is, immediately after the start of the per-accessory game state, although it is unlikely that the sorting piece 2543 sorts the game ball B to the first V winning port 2007 side, the sorting piece 2543 makes the game ball B win the first V prize. The sorting operation by the sorting piece 2543 is shown in advance by executing the sorting operation to the port 2007 side.

In this example, the distribution rotator 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 are operated at the same time as the execution of the role-winning game state is started, that is, the performance at the start of the role-winning game state (the opening performance of the role-winning game state, for example, " Aim for the prize winning opening 2006”, etc.), and after the action of the distribution rotator 2533 and the distribution piece 2543, the prize is won. The mouth 2006 is opened for the first time. This reduces the possibility of allocating the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side by the allocation rotator 2533 and allocating the game ball B to the second chance opening 2541 side by the allocation piece 2543. . In addition, there is no or unlimited possibility of allocating the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side by the allocation rotator 2533 and allocating the game ball B to the second chance opening 2541 side by the allocation piece 2543. As long as it is low, the accessory winning opening 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time when the distribution rotator 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 are operated.

Alternatively, only one of the distribution rotor 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, some of the movable parts (distribution rotator 2533, distribution piece 2543) for distributing the game ball B that has won the prize winning opening 2006 are operated in advance to show the distribution operation. , other movable parts may be disabled in advance. For example, the sorting piece 2543 that is highly likely to cause the game ball B to enter the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007) by operating (high V winning expectation) is not operated in advance. Only about the distribution rotor 2533 which is less likely to enter the game ball B into the V winning opening (in this example, the second V winning opening 2008) than the distribution piece 2543 (V winning expectation is low) You can make it work. As a result, although some of the distribution destinations of the game balls B that have won the prize winning opening 2006 can be known in advance, the other distribution destinations can be kept unknown, and the other distribution destinations are clear. When the ball becomes , the number of destinations to be distributed increases, thereby surprising the player and raising expectations, and making the player pay attention to the game ball B to be distributed to enjoy its movement, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest in the game.例文帳に追加can be suppressed.

In addition, the existence of the movable part (sorting piece 2543), which is highly expected to win the V prize, is hidden by not operating in advance. When the "third winning prize" is executed, the movable part (distribution piece 2543) with a high degree of expectation for V winning is operated to enter the game ball B into the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007). The game ball B enters an unexpected allocation destination, thereby improving the game amusement. In addition, the distribution to the first V winning prize opening 2007 side is hidden as a distribution destination, and it is possible to make the player think that there are only two, the first prize opening 2532 side and the lottery prize winning prize 2550 side, and the "third prize winning prize". A player is not discouraged even if a ``second prize win'' with a lower V winning expectation is executed and a game ball B is distributed to the side of the lottery prize 2550.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this example, the distribution rotator 2533 is arranged in a manner that the player can easily see it, while the distribution piece 2543 is formed in a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward on the game board 5, and the area on the front side is is narrow, it is difficult to notice the movement even if it is moving. As a result, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the side of the first V prize winning opening 2007 that can be entered by the sorting piece 2543 protruding forward. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the first V prize opening 2007 by operating the sorting piece 2543 when the "third prize hit" occurs, it becomes difficult to notice the behavior of the game ball B. It is possible to give the player a feeling as if a V prize had suddenly occurred and a 15R jackpot had been executed without making him aware that B had entered the first V prize opening 2007.例文帳に追加

In addition, by operating the distribution rotor 2533 in advance during the opening performance of the game state with the prize, the contents of the instruction in the opening performance, for example, "Aim for the prize winning opening 2006" can be added to the distribution rotor. The action of 2533 also makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the target to be hit, that is, the position to be aimed at during the state of the winning game.

As described above, when the "accessory prize winning" is drawn, the game ball B flowing down the first guide passage 2521 is accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 when the accessory winning opening 2006 is in an open state. When it is detected, it is sent to the first sorting device 2530 after being detected by the prize winning slot sensor 2501 . When the game ball B is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 2501, a privilege such as adding a predetermined number to the number of balls in possession is given.

In the "second winning prize" among the "winning winning prizes", when the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for the second time, the sorting piece 2543 of the second sorting device 2540 is open. When the minute rotating body 2533 rotates from the storable state to the unstorable state, the game ball B stored in the storage portion 2533a flows down to the second sorting device 2540 side through the chance opening 2531, and the second skating. After passing through the lottery guide passage 2545 from the mouth 2541 and being detected by the lottery accessory ball entry sensor 2546 , it is sent to the lottery accessory 2550 .

In the lottery accessory 2550, the distribution bridge 2557 in the non-loop position is in the loop position. For example, the distribution bridge 2557 is placed in the loop position in response to the opening of the second opening 2541 due to the retraction of the distribution piece 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 . Then, the game ball B sent from the second distribution device 2540 to the lottery accessory 2550 rolls leftward on the guide path 2551 and is sent to the hitting part 2553 through the distribution bridge 2557 at the loop position. Then, the game ball B sent to the hitting part 2553 is hit by the hitting piece 2560 rotating at high speed, and is supplied to the swing gutter 2554 provided at the rear end of the center of the table 2555. It will be released onto the table 2555 .

The game ball B released onto the table 2555 rolls forward due to its inclination, and is received in the second V winning opening 2008 provided at the center front end of the table 2555, or from the front end side of the table 2555. Either it is released forward (guideway 2551) or it moves. When the game ball B is released forward from the front end side of the table 2555, if the distribution bridge 2557 is still in the loop position, the game ball B is supplied to the hitting part 2553 through the distribution bridge 2557. It will happen. Therefore, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, until the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008, the game ball B is placed on the hitting part 2553, the swing gutter 2554, the table 2555, and the guide path 2551. loop so as to circulate in the order of

Then, the acceptance of the game ball B to the second V winning opening 2008, or the acceptance of the game ball B to the loss opening 2009 which is opened when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the non-loop position after the lapse of a predetermined time. , the lottery for the V prize in the lottery accessory 2550 ends.

The game ball B received in the second V winning hole 2008 is detected by the second V winning hole sensor 2503, and then passes through the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to the safe of the circulation ball path unit 600 below. It is discharged to the ball socket 600b. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the loss opening 2009 is detected by the loss opening sensor 2504, and passes through the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to the safe ball receiving opening 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2503, the privilege of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

By the way, in the "third prize win", when the prize winning port 2006 is opened for the second time, the distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540 is closed, so the distribution rotor 2533 is accommodated. When it rotates from the possible state to the unacceptable state, the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2533a passes through the chance opening 2531 and comes into contact with the upper surface of the closed state distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540. It is guided to the right and enters (accepted) the first V winning opening 2007 . After being detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2502, the game ball B that has entered the first V winning hole 2007 passes through the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to the safe ball receiver of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. It is discharged to port 600b. When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2502, a privilege of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in which the advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous is generated by opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006, the first start While the opening 2003 is always open to accept the game ball B, the second starting opening 2004 is selected by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002, and the ordinary lottery is "ordinary winning". Only the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined pattern. As a result, the first starting port 2003 is more likely to accept the game ball B than the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加

For this reason, in a normal state, the game ball B flows down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the first start port 2003. The driving operation of B can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 by the game ball B can be enjoyed, and the first start-up can be performed. It is possible to heighten expectations for receiving the game ball B into the mouth 2003 .

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2003, the lottery result of the first special symbol is "hit" (for example, "small hit", "middle hit", "big hit", "special hit"). , etc.) is drawn, the large winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. It is possible to enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B aimed at the right side of the object 2500 (so-called "right hitting"), and the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the big winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006. can be raised.

A guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided on the right side of the center role 2500 when hitting the game ball B to the right side of the center role 2500. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates in a desired flow path, and the player is instructed to hit the game ball B. You can enjoy the operation.

In addition, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a normal winning opening 2002 is provided, and when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004 can receive the normal lottery lottery. Therefore, the player can be entertained by whether or not the game ball B hit on the right side passes through the normal winning opening 2002, and when the second starting opening 2004 becomes acceptable, the second starting opening The player can also be entertained by whether or not game ball B is accepted at 2004 . At this time, since the normal prize winning port 2002 is provided directly below the exit of the first guide path 2521 in the guide path group 2520, the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the first guide path 2521 can be enjoyed. can be done.

Furthermore, in the accessory winning opening 2006, one game ball B accepted and sorted by the first distribution device 2530 is sent to either the first V winning opening 2007 or the second scoring opening 2541 in the second distribution device 2540 Since the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning port 2007 or not, the player can feel nervous and excited. And even if the game ball B is distributed to the second slot 2541 in the second distribution device 2540, the game ball B is a lottery accessory provided conspicuously in the lower center of the center accessory 2500. 2550 , the lottery accessory 2550 can make the player expect to receive the game ball B into the second V winning hole 2008 . After that, depending on whether or not the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 of the lottery accessory 2550 is accepted by the second V winning port 2008, the player can be excited again, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, or when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004, the first special When a "big win" is drawn as a pattern and a second special pattern, the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and an opportunity to add a large number of game balls B to the number of possessed balls comes. Therefore, it is possible to drive the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received in the open/closed big winning hole 2005, and amuse the player. can be suppressed.

[8-10. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83 and the like. The back unit 3000 includes a vibration sensor 1040 (see FIG. 93) for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), and a game ball received in the general prize winning opening 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. A normal winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting B and a normal winning hole sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received by the normal winning hole 2002 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 are provided. The general winning hole sensor 3001 and the normal winning hole sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball induction unit 3100 .

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100 and is open at the front. It has a lock slider 3020 which is slidable in the left-right direction for attaching and detaching the performance display device 1600, and a back substrate unit 3040 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 so as to be hinge-rotatable.

The back board unit 3040 includes a box-shaped board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and is thin in the front and rear, and a panel relay board and effect drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have. The board box 3041 has two shafts 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer sides of the vertically extending L-shaped portion. Further, the circuit board box 3041 has locking claws 3041b that are locked to the locking portions 3010g of the back box 3010 at the ends of the L-shaped portions extending to the left and right.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 flows, and the back ball in the back box 3010. A back decoration unit 3200 provided behind the induction unit 3100, a back front effect unit 3300 provided to the left and above the back ball induction unit 3100 near the front end in the back box 3010, and and a rear back effect unit 3400 provided behind the back front effect unit 3300. - 特許庁

The back ball guide unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the back decoration unit 3200 . The back decoration unit 3200 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 via an attachment supporter (not shown). The back front effect unit 3300 has its left end attached near the front end of the back box 3010 and its right end attached to the right front surface of the back rear effect unit 3400 . The rear rear effect unit 3400 has its upper portion attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010 via an attachment supporter (not shown), and its lower portion attached to the rear decoration unit 3200 .

The back decoration unit 3200, the back front effect unit 3300, and the back back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 can show predetermined movable effects and light emitting effects to the player according to the progress of the game.

[8-10a. back box]
Next, the back case 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), and the effect unit is attached to the inside of the box shape, and the effect display device 1600 and the back board unit 3040 are attached to the rear surface. is. The back box 3010 is formed transparent. As a result, the inside can be visually recognized from the outside even when assembled on the game board 5.例文帳に追加

The back box 3010 has a box-like shape with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a placement surface 3010b provided at the lower side of the opening 3010a on which the effect display device 1600 is placed. , two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and a lock slider 3020 provided below the center of the mounting surface 3010b in the left-right direction. and a lock mechanism portion 3010d slidably attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size in the left-right direction as the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. In addition, the opening 3010a is provided at a position that is vertically offset (eccentric) with respect to the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as the liquid crystal spacer 1610 (19-inch liquid crystal display device).

Upper fixing pieces 1611 of a liquid crystal spacer 1610 to which the effect display device 1600 is attached are inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. In addition, the lower fixing piece 1612 of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 to which the effect display device 1600 is attached can be inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010 from behind while the lock slider 3020 is slid leftward in a rear view. can be done. With the lower fixing piece 1612 of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 inserted into the locking mechanism portion 3010d, when the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in rear view, the lock slider 3020 prevents the lower fixing piece 1612 from moving rearward. The liquid crystal spacer 1610 (effect display device 1600) can be attached by

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG.

Further, the back box 3010 has a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 rotatably around the axis extending in the vertical direction on the rear surface, and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f. is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and has an engaging portion 3010g to which the engaging claw 3041b of the rear substrate unit 3040 is engaged.

The back box 3010 can mount the back substrate unit 3040 on the rear side across the opening 3010a (liquid crystal spacer 1610 and effect display device 1600) by means of a pair of shaft support portions 3010f and locking portions 3010g. When assembled to the game board 5, the vertically extending L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 is positioned to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. In addition, the L-shaped portion of the rear substrate unit 3040 extending to the left and right is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 .

In the state where the back box 3010 is assembled to the game board 5, the locking claws 3041b of the back board unit 3040 locked to the locking portion 3010g are released, and the locking claws 3041b are moved backward around the shaft portion 3041a. By rotating so as to move to the rear side, the rear of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 attached to the back box 3010 can be opened, and the liquid crystal spacer 1610, that is, the effect display can be opened without removing the back substrate unit 3040 from the back box 3010. Device 1600 can be removable.

In addition, the back box 3010 is provided on the surface facing in the front-rear direction except for the fixing piece portion 3010e, and has a plurality of functional holes in which two through-holes are arranged vertically or horizontally. and a functional surface facing in the front-rear direction that can be used when assembling the machine 1 (game board 5). The two through holes of the functional hole have the same diameter. The functional hole is for attaching the performance unit to the back box 3010 directly or via an attachment supporter.

[8-10b. back ball induction unit]
Next, the back ball guide unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 82 and the like. The back ball guide unit 3100 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010 and attached to the back box 3010 via the back decoration unit 3200 . The back ball induction unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2002, and a game and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 capable of detecting illicit magnetism acting within the region 5a.

The back ball induction unit 3100 includes the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first V winning opening 2007, and the second V winning opening in the front unit 2000. 2008, the lost opening 2009, and the first empty opening 2532, receive the game ball B behind the game panel 1100, guide it to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and then release the safe ball in the circulating ball path unit 600 below. It can be discharged to the receptacle 600b. In addition, the back ball guide unit 3100 receives the game ball B received in the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 of the front unit 2000 at the rear of the game panel 1100, guides it to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and then moves it downward. can be discharged to the out-ball socket 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600.

[8-10c. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back decoration unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83 and the like. The back decoration unit 3200 is provided behind the back ball guide unit 3100 in the back box 3010, and is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 via an attachment supporter. A vibration sensor 1040 is attached to the back decoration unit 3200 . A back ball guidance unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the back decoration unit 3200 .

The back decoration unit 3200 includes a bottom left decoration 3210 and a bottom right decoration 3220 for decorating the left and right outer rear portions of the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled to the game board 5, and a bottom bottom right decoration. It is provided with a lower back left decoration substrate and a lower back right decoration substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for lighting the left decoration body 3210 and the back lower right decoration body 3220, respectively.

The lower back left decoration body 3210 and the lower back right decoration body 3220 have translucency, and a plurality of unevennesses resembling a miniature town are formed on the upper surface of each. The lower back left decoration board and the lower back right decoration board are provided below the lower back left decoration body 3210 and the lower back right decoration body 3220, respectively, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs) are mounted on the upper surface. . By appropriately lighting the LEDs mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate and the lower back right decorative substrate, the lower back left decoration 3210 and the lower back right decoration 3220 can be decorated with light.

[8-10d. Back front production unit]
Next, the back front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The back front effect unit 3300 is provided on the left side and above the back ball induction unit 3100 near the front end in the back box 3010, the left end side is attached near the front end of the back box 3010, and the right end side is behind the back. It is attached to the right end side of production unit 3400 .

The back front effect unit 3300 includes a flat back front left decorative body 3301 provided on the left end side and elongated vertically, and a back front elevating decorative body provided on the right side of the back front left decorative body 3301 so as to be vertically movable. A unit 3310 and a back front elevating mechanism 3350 for elevating the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 are provided.

A back-front left decorative body 3301 of the back-front effect unit 3300 is provided with a magnetic sensor 1030 provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. The back front left decorative body 3301 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the total height inside the back box 3010 and has translucency. Behind the back front left decorative body 3301, a back front left decorative substrate (not shown) having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided. By appropriately lighting the LED of the back front left decorative substrate, the back front left decoration can be decorated with light.

The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is elongated in the left-right direction. The back front elevating decoration unit 3310 includes a back front elevating base 3311 in the form of a transparent plate elongated in the left and right direction, and a back front central decoration 3320 attached to the front center of the back front elevating base 3311 and having an effect count display section 3005. , the back front center left decoration 3330 attached to the left of the back front center decoration 3320 on the front surface of the back front lifting base 3311, and the back front center decoration 3330 attached to the front of the back front lifting base 3311 to the right of the back front center decoration 3320 and a back front center right decorative body 3340 attached.

The back front center decoration body 3320 includes a back front center decoration part 3321 formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape, and a back front center decoration provided behind the back front center decoration part 3321 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon. It has a substrate (not shown) and a back front central base 3323 that supports the back front central decorative substrate and the back front central decorative portion 3321 from behind and is attached to the back front elevating base 3311 . The back front central decorative portion 3321 has a portion that stereoscopically imitates a pine pattern, and is provided with an effect count display portion 3005 consisting of four 7-segment displays. The effect count display section 3005 uses some of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front central decoration board.

The back-front center-left decorative body 3330 is formed of a back-front-center-left decorative portion 3331 and a back-front-center-left decorative portion 3331 which are formed in a relief shape imitating the head of a predetermined character and have translucency. The back front center left decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is supported from the rear and the back front center left decorative board and the back front center left decorative part 3331 are supported from the rear and can be lifted up and down in the back front. and a back front center left base 3333 attached to the base 3311 . The back front center left decorative body 3330 can cause the back front center left decoration part 3331 to emit light by appropriately lighting the LED of the back front center left decoration substrate.

The back-front-middle-right decorative body 3340 includes a back-front-middle-right decorative portion 3341 and a back-front-center-right decorative portion 3341 which are formed in a relief shape imitating the head of a predetermined character and have translucency. The back front center right decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and which is provided behind, the back front center right decorative board and the back front center right decorative part 3341 are supported from the rear, and the back front can be raised and lowered. and a back front center right base 3343 attached to the base 3311 . The back-front-middle-right decorative body 3340 can light-embellish the back-front-middle-right decorative portion 3341 by appropriately causing the LEDs of the back-front-middle-right decorative substrate to emit light.

The back front elevating mechanism 3350 includes a back front left elevating rail (not shown) that is provided behind the back front left decoration 3301 and supports the left end side of the back front elevating decoration unit 3310 so that it can be lifted and lowered. A back front right elevating rail 3352 supporting the right end side of the front elevating decoration unit 3310 so as to be able to ascend and descend, and a back side provided behind the back front left decoration 3301 for elevating the back front elevating decoration unit 3310. and a front elevation drive unit (not shown). In addition, although illustration is omitted, the back front elevating mechanism 3350 includes a drop solenoid for dropping the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 from the state of the raised standby position, and the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 downward. and a back-front elevation driving motor for raising from the dropped performance position to the upper standby position.

A back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 of the back front effect unit 3300 is provided so as to be visible from the front through the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled on the game board 5.例文帳に追加In the normal state, the back front effect unit 3300 is positioned at the standby position where the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is the upper moving end, and is prevented from falling downward by engagement of the lock claw. In a normal state, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is positioned near the upper end of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 78 and the like.

In addition, in the state of the standby position, which is the normal state, the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 of the back front effect unit 3300 is behind the back elevating decorative body unit at the retracted position of the back rear effect unit 3400. , and the back rear elevation decorative body 3410 cannot be visually recognized from the front.

The back front effect unit 3300 moves the lifting slider to the lower end side by the back front lifting drive motor from the normal state, so that the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 can fall from the standby position to the lower effect position. Become. Then, from this state, when the locking by the lock claw is released by the drop solenoid, the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 freely falls toward the standby position. In the state where the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 has fallen to the performance position, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is above the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 and slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. located near.

When the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 drops and becomes the state of the performance position, the back rear elevating decorative body 3410 at the retracted position of the back rear performance unit 3400 provided at the rear becomes visible from the front. As a result, it is possible to surprise the player and make the player think that something good will happen (the arrival of a chance).

A damper for absorbing or mitigating the impact of the falling front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is provided at the lower part of the front lifting mechanism 3350 .

The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 that has fallen to the performance position is raised to the upper standby position by the upward movement of the elevating slider by the back front elevating drive motor, and the lock claw is automatically locked to the standby position. state.

Since this back front effect unit 3300 has a effect count display section 3005 consisting of four 7-segment displays in the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 (back front central decorative body 3320), the effect count display section 3005 By executing the countdown display in which the displayed numbers decrease, it is possible to show the player the countdown effect in which the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 falls. In the countdown effect, the rear elevating decorative body 3410 may be moved to the lower appearance position without dropping the front elevating decorative body unit 3310. You may make it move the rear raising/lowering decoration body 3410 to the downward appearance position.

[8-10e. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83 and the like. The back rear effect unit 3400 is provided after the back front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010, and the upper part is attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter, and the lower part is the back decoration unit 3200. installed in the The back-side effect unit 3400 includes a back-side elevating decorative body 3410 that is long in the left-right direction, and a back-side elevating mechanism 3450 for elevating the back-side elevating decorative body 3410. - 特許庁

The rear elevation decoration body 3410 in the rear production unit 3400 is provided behind the rear elevation elevation decoration part 3411 which is long in the left and right and has translucency, and behind the rear elevation elevation decoration part 3411, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted. a rear lift decorative substrate (not shown); a rear lift base (not shown) that supports the rear lift decorative substrate and the rear lift decorative portion from the rear and is lifted and lowered by a rear lift mechanism 3450; It has The back rear elevating decorative part 3411 includes a logo part 3411a formed of a predetermined logo that is applied over the entire length in the left-right direction, and a back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 that is provided in relief above the logo part 3411a. has a character portion 3411b in which a plurality of different characters are arranged in rows on the left and right. The back elevation decoration part 3411 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED of the back elevation decoration substrate.

The rear lifting mechanism 3450 in the rear rear effect unit 3400 includes a U-shaped rear rear base 3451 that opens downward, and a translucent flat plate-shaped rear that is provided in front of the upper side of the rear rear base 3451. A rear fixed decoration part 3452 and a rear fixed decoration substrate 3453 provided between the rear fixed decoration part 3452 and the rear base 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon are provided. The rear fixed decorative portion 3452 is formed to have substantially the same length in the horizontal direction as the rear lifting decorative body 3410, and has a predetermined pattern on the front surface. The rear fixed decorative portion 3452 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the LED of the rear fixed decorative substrate 3453 to emit light.

In addition, although not shown, the rear lifting mechanism 3450 is provided on the left side of the rear rear base 3451 and supports the left end side of the rear lifting decorative body 3410 so that it can be lifted and lowered. A rear rear right rail provided on the right side of the rear base 3451 and supporting the right end side of the rear lifting decorative body 3410 so as to be liftable, and a rear lifting decorative body 3410 provided on the left side of the rear rear base. and a rear elevation drive unit for raising and lowering the rear side.

The rear elevation drive unit has a rear elevation drive motor. By driving the rear elevation drive motor, the rear elevation decorative body 3410 is moved to the retracted position, which is the upper movement end, and the appearance position, which is the lower movement end. , and can be stopped at any position between the retracted position and the appearing position.

In a normal state, the back-side effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position where the back-side elevating decorative body 3410 is at the upper movement end. In this state, the rear lifting decorative body 3410 is positioned in front of the rear fixed decorative portion 3452 of the rear lifting mechanism 3450 . Therefore, the rear fixed decorative portion 3452 is hidden from the front by the rear lifting decorative body 3410 at the retracted position.

Since the rear back effect unit 3400 is provided behind the back front effect unit 3300 in the state assembled on the game board 5, the back front effect unit 3300 is placed in front of the rear rear elevation decorative body 3410 in a normal state. The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is located at the standby position, and is hidden by the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

In the back-side effect unit 3400, when the back-side elevating decoration body 3410 is moved from the normal state to the appearance position, which is the lower movement end, by driving the back-side elevating drive motor of the back-side elevating mechanism 3450, the back side elevation decoration body 3410 is moved from the normal state to the back side of the standby position. It is located below the front lifting decorative body unit 3310 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. As a result, the back rear elevation decorative body 3410 becomes visible from the player side.

Even when the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved downward from the retracted position, the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 is positioned in front of the fixed decorative portion 3452 when the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 is in the standby position. is positioned, the back fixed decorative portion 3452 cannot be visually recognized from the front. Therefore, when the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved downward (appearing position) from the retracted position and the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 is dropped from the standby position to the performance position below, the fixed decorative part 3452 in the back is the first time. becomes visible from the front. Thereby, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the fact that the rear fixed decorative portion 3452 can be seen.

When the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 is dropped to the production position while the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved to the lower appearing position, the rear elevating decorative body 3410 in the back elevating decorative part 3411 of the back elevating decorative body 3410 The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is positioned in front of the logo part 3411a, and the logo part 3411a is hidden, and the character part 3411b in which a plurality of characters are arranged is positioned in front of the back front elevating decorative body unit. It will be in a state facing forward from above 3310 (see FIG. 92).

In a state in which the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved to the appearing position, the reverse elevating drive motor of the back elevating mechanism 3450 is reversed to raise the back elevating decorative body 3410 and return it to the retracted position. can.

[8-11. Production with a game board]
Next, the effects of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92. FIG. FIG. 89 is a front view of the game board shown in a normal state. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front elevation decoration body unit of the back front effect unit is dropped from the standby position to the effect position from the normal state. FIG. 91 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-back elevating decorative body of the rear-back effect unit is moved from the normal state to the appearing position from the retracted position. In FIG. 92, the back front elevating decorative body unit of the back front effect unit is dropped from the standby position to the effect position from the normal state, and the back elevating decorative body of the back rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a folded state.

As shown in FIG. 89 and the like, the game board 5 of the present embodiment is such that the back unit 3000 provided behind and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized mainly through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It's becoming This game board 5 passes through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and in the vicinity of the lower side thereof, the lottery accessory 2550 and the lower back left decoration 3210 and the lower right decoration 3220 of the back decoration unit 3200 provided on the left and right of it. A back front left decorative body 3301 of the back front effect unit 3300 is provided in the vicinity of the left side in the frame of the center accessory 2500 so as to be always visible.

In the normal state of the game board 5, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 of the back front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is moved to the standby position which is the upper movement end, and the back of the back back effect unit 3400 is moved. The rear elevating decorative body 3410 has moved to the retracted position, which is the upper movement end. The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 moving to the standby position is visibly facing forward in the vicinity of the upper side in the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The rear elevating decorative body 3410 that has moved to the retracted position is positioned behind the front elevating decorative body unit 3310 and at the same height as the front elevating decorative body unit 3310 in the standby position. It is hidden by the unit 3310 and cannot be seen from the front.

In addition, in a normal state, the back rear elevating decorative body 3410 at the retracted position is positioned in front of the back rear fixed decorative portion 3452 of the back rear effect unit 3400, and the back front elevating decorative body 3410 at the standby position is further in front of it. The decoration unit 3310 is located, and is hidden by them and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

In this normal state, since the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is moved to the upper standby position, the production count display section 3005 provided in the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 (back front center decorative body 3320) is turned off. , is positioned above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and looks conspicuous from the player's side without obstructing the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game board 5 of the present embodiment can execute effects as shown in FIG. 90 using the back front effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 . In this effect, in the normal state in which the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is moved to the upper standby position, in the back front lifting mechanism 3350, after the lifting slider is moved to the lower end side by the back front lifting drive motor, The drop solenoid releases the engagement by the lock claw, and the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is allowed to freely fall to the production position. In the state where the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 has fallen to the performance position, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is above the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 and slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. It is positioned closer to the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction is hidden. Also, when the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 falls to the production position, the back rear elevating decorative body 3410 at the retracted position of the back rear production unit 3400 becomes visible in the vicinity of the upper side in the frame of the center accessory 2500 . As a result, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 freely falls, so that it is possible to surprise the player and to think that something good will happen to the player (the arrival of a chance). can let

Next, the game board 5 can execute an effect as shown in FIG. 91 using the back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 . In this effect, the rear lifting decorative body 3410 is moved to the lower moving end by the rear lifting driving motor of the rear lifting mechanism 3450 in a normal state in which the rear lifting decorative body 3410 is moved to the upper retracted position. to the appearance position. As a result, the rear rear elevation decoration body 3410, which has been invisible due to the back front elevation decoration body unit 3310, becomes visible, so that the player can be surprised, and the player is made to think that a chance has arrived, and expectations for the game. It can make you feel better. In addition, when the rear lifting decorative body 3410 moves to the appearance position, it is positioned substantially at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the vertical direction. , the player can see an effect in which the effect image is physically divided into upper and lower parts.

In addition, as an effect using the back side effect unit 3400, the back side lifting decorative body 3410 can be moved to an arbitrary height between the retracted position and the appearing position by the back side lifting drive motor. As an effect, the rear lifting decorative body 3410 may be moved slightly downward from the retracted position or vibrated up and down.

Subsequently, the game board 5 can execute an effect as shown in FIG. 92 using both the back front effect unit 3300 and the back back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 . In this performance, the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is dropped from the standby position to be in the state of the performance position, and the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved downward from the retracted position to be in the appearance position. As a result, the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is covered with the front front lifting decorative body unit 3310 and the rear lifting decorative body unit 3410, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. Since the rear fixed decorative part 3452 provided above the display screen, which has not been visually recognized until now, can be visually recognized, it is possible to impart a feeling of premium to the player, and advantageous game in which the player is advantageous. It is possible to heighten expectations for the occurrence of a state (for example, a jackpot game).

In this effect, the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 and the back elevating decorative body 3410 may be moved downward at the same time, or the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is first dropped and then the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved downward. may be moved downward, or the back front elevating decoration unit 3310 may be dropped after the back elevating decorative body 3410 is first moved downward.

In addition, since the game board 5 has the production count display section 3005 which is always visible from the front on the back unit 3000, the production using the production count display section 3005 can be executed. For example, the countdown display that decreases the number displayed in the effect count display section 3005 every moment counts down the timing of the falling of the back front elevation decoration body unit 3310 or the movement of the back rear elevation decoration body 3410 downward. You can let them do it. Alternatively, for example, the detection of the game ball B by the lottery accessory ball sensor 2546 may count down until the game ball B becomes unable to loop in the lottery accessory 2550 .

Further, in the effect count display section 3005, the degree of expectation for the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 may be displayed (suggested) as a number. Alternatively, since the effect count display unit 3005 has four 7-segment displays, the effect pattern is configured by combining the light emission of each segment, and after the effect pattern is variably displayed, the stop display is performed. The degree of expectation may be suggested by the stop-displayed production pattern.

[9. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 93 and the like. FIG. 93 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. Note that FIG. 93 omits some of the electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, and LEDs connected to the frame control board 740 .

The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a frame control board 740 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the .

[9-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU, a setting display for displaying set values and errors, and partitioning on the game board 5 and a base monitor for displaying the number of game balls B collected by an out port 2020 and a sub-out port 2021 provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU to identify the individual (there is only one code in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU can retrieve the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power failure processing described later, and the main control side power ON processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). Even if the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset signal will not be output from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU to the frame control board 740. MPU) is restarted, and the frame control board 740 is maintained in the started state.

In addition, the main control MPU is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in hardware Random number circuit”) is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of obtaining the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2003, and a second start opening that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. An opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2002, and received in the big winning opening 2005. A large prize winning slot sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received, a prize winning slot sensor 2501 for detecting the game ball B accepted in the role prize winning slot 2006, and a game ball B accepted in the first V winning slot 2007. First V winning opening sensor 2502 to detect, Second V winning opening sensor 2503 to detect game ball B received in second V winning opening 2008, Loss opening sensor to detect game ball B received in losing opening 2009 2504, out ball sensor 605 for detecting game ball B ejected from game board 5, safe ball sensor 606, magnetic sensor 1030 for detecting illegal magnetism in game area 5a, and vibration acting on game board 5 A detection signal from the vibration sensor 1040 or the like is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

Further, when the detection signal from the door opening switch 507 and the detection signal from the frame opening switch 508 are input to the main control board 1310 via the frame control board 740, they are sent to the main control board 1310 via the main control input circuit. They are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the control MPU.

The detection signals from the out-ball sensor 605, the first starting point sensor 2101, and the second starting point sensor 2401 are input directly to the main control board 1310 without going through other boards, and It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via a control input circuit. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the normal winning opening sensor 3002, the big winning opening sensor 2402, the accessory winning opening sensor 2501, the first V winning opening sensor 2502, the second V winning opening sensor 2503, the losing opening sensor 2504 , the magnetic sensor 1030, and the vibration sensor 1040 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, and are supplied to the main control MPU via the main control input circuit. Input to the input terminal of the input port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the starter solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 from the main control solenoid drive circuit. , Accessory prize winning solenoid 2516, first distribution solenoid 2534, second distribution solenoid 2544, lottery loop solenoid 2558, hitting piece drive motor 2561, gutter swing drive motor 2564, swing piece solenoid 2565, each drive Signals are output via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, and are output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the status indicator, normal pattern display, normal hold display, and first special display of the function display unit 1400. Each drive signal to the symbol display, the first special reserved number display, the second special symbol display, the second special reserved number display, and the round display, without going through another board, that is, directly, output or do Further, the main control MPU outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp of the setting change board by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU outputs various information (game information) about the game to the frame control board 740 by outputting various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permit signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the frame control board 740 . The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to the launch permission logic when launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic) inverts the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. is set to As for the logic of the launch permission signal, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process described later is started. Until then, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is set by inverting the firing permission logic.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 2101, the second start sensor 2401, the normal winning sensor 3002, the big winning sensor 2402, the accessory winning sensor 2501, the first V winning sensor 2502, the second A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the V winning sensor 2503, the losing sensor 2504, the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, and the foul ball sensor 607. 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, and the normal winning hole 2002, so the first starting hole sensor 2101, the second starting hole sensor 2401, and the normal winning hole Detection of game ball B by mouth sensor 3002 also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, and the normal winning opening sensor 3002. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous game state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006 are opened, and the game ball B enters frequently, resulting in a big winning. The detection of the game ball B by the mouth sensor 2402 and the prize winning mouth sensor 2501 also frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the big winning slot sensor 2402 and the accessory winning slot sensor 2501 as well. In addition, the game balls B launched into the game area 5a are recovered in large quantities by the out-port 2020 and the sub-out-port 2021 provided in the game area 5a that are partitioned and formed on the game board 5. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the out-ball sensor 605 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 . A proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used regardless of whether the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently or not.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to awarding of benefits to the frame control board 740, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the frame control board 740. receive. Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. The main control MPU, which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the frame control board 740, and then formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 750 of the frame board unit 730, although detailed description will be given later. A power supply board 750 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the frame control board 740 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 750, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when the voltages of these voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the frame control board 740 and the like.

[9-2. Frame control board]
A frame control board 740 for controlling the number of game balls B possessed by the player, etc. includes a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in the RAM, and a circulating ball path unit for enclosing game balls B. A ball extraction switch 742 used when the ball is extracted from the ball extraction port 613p of 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), and the number of balls held by the player stored in the RAM or the like is cleared, and the number of balls held by the door frame 3 is cleared. A number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 for clearing the display on the display unit 140 is provided.

[9-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[9-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. on one semiconductor chip. An integrated peripheral control IC, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that performs high-quality sound performance, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects that the sound source IC refers to. and a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip. The CPU of the control IC transmits game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 through the serial I/O for the lamp drive board. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 and for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is provided for the game board decoration drive board. Door-side drive data for transmitting from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or for outputting a drive signal to the vibrator or the like provided on the door frame 3, and each decoration of the door frame 3 Door-side drive light-emission data composed of door-side light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on the board is sent to the serial I/O for the frame decoration drive board. In addition to transmitting from the port to the door frame 3 side, transmitting control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512 Second, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the first effect button 251 and the second effect button 252 of the effect operation unit 250 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 to inform that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the performance display control unit 1512 activity is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound information to the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. , the main body frame speaker 503 of the main body frame 4 and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects in accordance with various presentations are played. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, By transmitting a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. Kilo (k) bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side, are multiple serial input/output signals different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

[9-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although not shown in detail, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have it.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer system. The "line buffer method" is to hold one line of drawing data for drawing in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the one line of drawing data held in this line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively, to pixels for one line.

[10. Game content]
The contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls B enclosed in the circulation path R are moved to the game board 5 by rotating the handle 160 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 by the player. A game with the game ball B is started by passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and being driven into the upper part of the game area 5a. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 160. The more the handle 160 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions. The flowing speed is suppressed, and various motions are given to the game ball B so that the motions can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, the left side of the center role 2500, that is, the inner side. It flows between the rail 1002 and the center accessory 2500 while coming into contact with a plurality of obstructing nails. On the left side of the center accessory 2500, the entrance of the warp passage 2512 is always open so that the game ball B can be received.

The game ball B that has entered the warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2513 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls on the stage 2513 in the left-right direction, and is ejected from the central release portion 2513a or the side release portion 2513b. It is released so as to flow back into the game area 5a from either. Since the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2003 in the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release portion 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first It is received in the starting port 2003 . The game ball B released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a may be received in the first start port 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2003, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is added to the number of balls held in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310, and the main In the control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "character hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit" , “Time reduction (time reduction) hit”, “Probability change time reduction hit”, “Probability change time reduction hit”, “Second jackpot”, etc.) will be drawn. If the lottery result of the lottered first special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time).

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2003 until the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special fluctuation time), the first start When the game ball B is received in the mouth 2003, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol. The start of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of retained lottery results of the first special symbols to be retained is up to 4 for each of the first starting ports 2003, and for more than that, the game balls B are accepted by the first starting ports 2003. However, the lottery result of the first special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp passage 2512, it will be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and the obstacle nail, There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001, the sub-out opening 2021, or the first starting opening 2003 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game ball B is added to the number of possessed balls in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the center role 2500 to the right of the highest portion of the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511, the center It passes through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520 of the accessory 2500 . The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening door 2515 that closes the accessory winning opening 2006 on the way, and then moves upward (directly above) the normal winning opening unit 2600. released to On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the second guide path 2522 is released upward to the left of the normal winning opening 2002 . Therefore, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, there is a possibility that it will be received in the accessory winning opening 2006.

The prize winning port 2006 is opened when the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004 is "small win" or "win a prize". , and opens and closes in a predetermined pattern so that the game ball B can be received. When the game ball B is received in the accessory winning opening 2006, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game ball B is added to the number of possessed balls in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310. be done.

The game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is sent to the first distribution device 2530 and distributed to either the chance opening 2531 or the first prize opening 2532 by the distribution rotating body 2533 . The game ball B distributed to the first slot 2532 is discharged. The game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 is sent to the second distribution device 2540 . The game ball B sent to the second sorting device 2540 is sorted to either the first V winning opening 2007 or the second scoring opening 2541 . When the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 by the distribution of the second distribution device 2540, a "jackpot" game is executed in which the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern.

When the game ball B is distributed to the second slot 2541 in the second distribution device 2540 , it is sent to the lottery accessory 2550 . The game ball B sent to the lottery accessory 2550 moves between the table 2555 provided with the second V winning port 2008 and the It loops with the hitting part 2553 that supplies the ball B to the table 2555 . Then, when the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008, a "jackpot" game is executed in which the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern.

On the other hand, when a predetermined time passes and the distribution bridge 2557 moves from the loop position to the non-loop position and the loss opening 2009 is opened, the game ball that has not been received in the second V winning opening 2008 of the table 2555 B is accepted in the loss opening 2009 . The game ball B received in the loss opening 2009 is discharged.

Since the normal winning opening 2002 provided downstream of the guide path group 2520 is provided directly below the exit of the first guide path 2521, the game ball B that has circulated through the first guide path 2521 is the second There is a higher possibility that the game ball B that has circulated through the guide passage 2522 will be accepted into the normal winning opening 2002 . A game ball B that has not been received by the normal winning hole 2002 flows down to the attacker unit 2400. - 特許庁

When the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2002 and detected by the normal winning opening sensor 3002, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and the lottery result of the drawn normal symbol is "normal hit". , The second starting port 2004 closed by the second starting port door 2411 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the reception of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is It becomes possible.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the lottery result of the normal symbol ( For example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also commonly referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2002 during the period from when the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2002 until the normal symbol drawing result is suggested, the normal symbol drawing result is suggested. Since it cannot be started, the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous normal symbol ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results of normal symbols is up to 4, and even if the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2002, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

The game ball B that has flowed down without being received in the normal winning opening 2002 flows down to either the upper shelf 2421, the first shelf 2422, or the right side of the first shelf 2422 in the attacker unit 2400. - 特許庁The game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2421 is guided to the left and released to the left of the big winning opening 2005 . Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed down onto the upper shelf portion 2421 is not received by the second starting opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 rolls leftward due to its inclination, and the second starting door 2411 closing the second starting port 2004, the second shelf portion 2423, After rolling over the big winning gate door 2413 closing the big winning gate 2005 and the fourth shelf 2425, it is released to the left. The game ball B released from the fourth shelf portion 2425 is received by the out port 2020 and ejected. Therefore, when the game ball B flows down to the first shelf portion 2422, there is a possibility that it will be received by the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

The game ball B flowing down to the right from the first shelf 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 is received by the sub-out port 2021 and discharged. Although rare, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2422 enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2423 and the third shelf portion 2424, it is received by the sub-out port 2021 and discharged. .

When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400, a predetermined number (for example, one) of the game ball B is added to the number of possessed balls in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310. In addition, in the main control board 1310, the second special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "character hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability variation (probability Change) hit”, “Time reduction (time reduction) hit”, “Probable variable time short hit”, “Probable variable time short hit”, “Second big hit”, etc.) lottery will be held. If the lottery result of the lottered second special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol takes a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special variation time) longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. suggested.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 until the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is suggested (special fluctuation time), the second start When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol. The start of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of retained lottery results of the second special symbols to be retained is up to four for each of the second start ports 2004, and for more than that, the game balls B are accepted by the second start ports 2004. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

The special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the second start port 2004 is the time of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2003. It is set longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result. As a result, the second special symbol lottery result takes more time to consume the number of reservations, so the number of accepted game balls B per unit time for the first start port 2003 and the second start port 2004 is the same. Also, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol to be executed in the second starting port 2004 is smaller. Therefore, in the normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that only the second starting port 2004 will be accepted, and the frequency with which the lottery result of the second special symbol is executed is low. , the player can be made to positively perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As described above, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004, the big winning port 2005 or The accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and enters a state in which the game ball B can be received.

Then, in the attacker unit 2400, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, or acceptance of the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, etc. When the game ball B flows down at the timing when the big winning hole 2005 can be received, the game ball B is received in the big winning hole 2005.例文帳に追加When the game ball B is received in the big winning hole 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game ball B is added to the number of possessed balls in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310. be.

After the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, a predetermined time (eg, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (eg, 10) of the large winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of the game ball B is satisfied, an opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is called one round) that makes the game ball B unacceptable in a closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). . For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, the probability that the first special symbol such as "big hit" and the second special symbol will be drawn is changed ("probability hit"), or the lottery result of the first special symbol And there is a "hit" that changes the display time of the effect image that suggests the lottery result of the second special pattern ("time saving hit").

If the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is the "second big hit", the big winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006 is a predetermined pattern After making it possible to accept the game ball B, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST maintains the state of probability variation and time saving during a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this way, when the game ball B can be received by the big winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006, by allowing the big winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006 to accept the game ball B, many game balls B can be received. Since the number of balls can be added to the number of balls held, the player can be entertained and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). Suggestion of the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs and blinking for a predetermined time, and thereafter suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern by the combination of the lit LEDs. .

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the result of the lottery for the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The performance image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern in the performance display device 1600 is displayed by changing each pattern row in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed. The pattern rows are successively stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern. When the lottery result of the special pattern is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁, an advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the drawn special symbols.

It should be noted that the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (special fluctuation time)) and the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the time until the finalized image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 A player-participation type effect can be performed by operating the first effect button 251 and the second effect button 252 in 250 . In the player participation type production, the first production button 251 and the second production button 252 can be popped up to make them stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the first production button 251 and the second production button 252. be able to.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, an effect display device 1600, a start opening display section 2110, an effect count display section 3005, The back decoration unit 3200, the back front effect unit 3300, the back back effect unit 3400, etc. can be appropriately used to perform lighting effect, display effect, movable effect, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player-participation type effect of operating the first effect button 251 and the second effect button 252, when the player makes a mistake in the operation to be operated or does not perform it, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to do so.

According to this embodiment, the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a by the player, and the lottery is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2003 and the second start port 2004 as satisfaction of the predetermined condition. The special pattern lottery result opens and closes the role winning opening 2006 in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball B received in the role winning opening 2006 passes through the first sorting device 2530 and the second sorting device 2540. is supplied to the guide path 2551 of the lottery accessory 2550 in the center accessory 2500, and the game ball B circulates toward the distribution section 2552 downstream. In this distribution section 2552, in a state in which the loss port 2009 opened in the guideway 2551 is closed by the distribution bridge 2557, the game ball B is distributed to the hitting section 2553 as the first side, and the distribution bridge 2557 is rotated by the lottery loop solenoid 2558 to open the loss port 2009, the game ball B is distributed to the loss port 2009 (second side), and the distribution state of the game ball B is the distribution bridge. 2557 is indicated by a distribution display portion 2557a. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the first side in the distribution section 2552 , it is supplied to the hitting section 2553 . On the other hand, when the game ball B is distributed to the second side (losing port 2009 ) in the distribution section 2552 , it is discharged from the lottery accessory 2550 without being supplied to the hitting section 2553 .

The game ball B supplied from the distribution part 2552 to the hitting part 2553 is hit backward by the rotating hitting piece 2560 of the hitting part 2553, and climbs the climbing part 2559 that rises toward the rear. It will be circulated (rolled) to. Depending on the timing at which the game ball B is supplied and the timing at which the striking piece 2560 hits the game ball B, the hitting portion 2553 hits the game ball B strongly or barely hits it. Since the momentum of the game ball B to be hit varies, if the momentum of the game ball B hit is weak, the game ball B cannot climb the climbing part 2559 and returns to the hitting part 2553. The uphill section 2559 is traversed back and forth. Then, when the game ball B is strongly hit by the hitting part 2553 and climbs over the climbing part 2559, it is supplied to the swing gutter 2554 provided in the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the table 2555, and from the swing gutter 2554 to the table. Released at 2555. At this time, since the rocking gutter 2554 is reciprocally rotated so as to rock around the axis in the vertical direction, the timing of supplying the game ball B and the timing of the rotation position of the rocking gutter 2554 As a result, the game ball B is released to the table 2555 in various directions from the gutter portion 2554a of the swing gutter 2554.

The game ball B released from the rocking gutter 2554 to the table 2555 rolls forward according to its inclination and is released from the front end of the table 2555 to the guide path 2551 . At this time, there is a possibility that the game ball B is received in the second V winning port 2008 provided on the central axis in the front-back direction passing through the center of the swing gutter 2554 near the front end of the table 2555, and the swing By contacting the game ball B with the swing piece 2556 provided symmetrically with respect to the central axis between the gutter 2554 and the second V winning port 2008, the distribution direction of the game ball B changes to the second direction. It moves toward the V winning opening 2008 or moves away from the second V winning opening 2008. - 特許庁When the game ball B is received in the second V winning hole 2008 of the table 2555, an advantageous game state (for example, a jackpot game) occurs. On the other hand, after the game ball B is released from the front end of the table 2555 to the guide path 2551 without being accepted by the second V winning port 2008, when the game ball B is distributed to one side by the distribution unit 2552, the game ball B is hit by the hitting unit. 2553 to swing trough 2554 . Therefore, as long as the game ball B is distributed to one side (striking portion 2553) by the distributing portion 2552, the guide path 2551, the distributing portion 2552, the hitting portion 2553, rocking gutter 2554, and table 2555 are looped in this order.

For this reason, when the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern and the game ball B can be supplied to the lottery accessory 2550, by looking at the distribution display section 2557a of the distribution section 2552, The player can confirm whether or not the game ball B is distributed to the first side (striking portion 2553) in the dividing portion 2552.例文帳に追加As a result, when the distribution unit 2552 is in a state of distributing to the first side (hitting unit 2553 and, by extension, the second V winning opening 2008) by looking at the distribution display unit 2557a, it is received in the accessory winning opening 2006. Whether the game ball B (here, the game ball B housed in the housing portion 2533a of the distribution rotating body 2533 in the first distribution device 2530) is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550 (guide path 2551) can excite the player. After that, when the game ball B received in the role winning opening 2006 is supplied to the lottery role 2550 (guideway 2551), whether or not it is distributed to the first side (hitting part 2553 side) in the distribution section 2552 It is possible to make the player nervous and excited. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the first side and supplied to the hitting portion 2553, the game ball B moves back and forth in the climbing portion 2559 depending on the timing at which the game ball B is hit. The player can be entertained by whether or not B is struck with enough strength to overcome the climbing section 2559 . In addition, since the game ball B that has climbed over the climbing part 2559 is supplied to the swing gutter 2554 that reciprocates, the timing at which the swing gutter 2554 can release the game ball B toward the second V winning opening 2008 As the game ball B is supplied to the rocking gutter 2554, whether the game ball B is hit with enough strength to overcome the climbing section 2559 can also make the player feel nervous and excited. can.

When the game ball B hit by the hitting part 2553 climbs over the climbing part 2559 and is supplied to the swinging gutter 2554, the game ball B moves toward the second V winning opening 2008 from the swinging gutter 2554 which is reciprocally rotating. It is possible to excite and throb the player depending on whether or not they are released. Even if the game ball B is released from this swinging gutter 2554 in a direction away from the central axis (second V winning port 2008), a pair of swinging pieces 2556 provided symmetrically with respect to the central axis is swinging. Depending on the movement situation, the game ball B in contact with the swinging piece 2556 may be drawn toward the central axis side and head toward the second V winning opening 2008. Therefore, the player will not be disappointed. can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted in the second V winning opening 2008 provided near the downstream end of the table 2555, the player can be made nervous and excited, and the second V winning opening 2008 accepts it. Then, an advantageous game state (a big win game in which the big winning port 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern) occurs, so that the player can be greatly entertained.

On the other hand, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the second V winning port 2008, it is released from the downstream end of the table 2555 to the guideway 2551, so Depending on whether or not the game ball B is distributed to the first side (hitting section 2553) again, the player's expectation can be heightened. Since the ball is supplied to the rocking gutter 2554 upstream of the table 2555 via the climbing section 2559, the player will not be disappointed when the chance of being accepted into the second V prize opening 2008 arrives again. At this time, when the distribution display portion 2557a of the distribution bridge 2557 is seen and the distribution portion 2552 is in a state of being distributed to the first side (hitting portion 2553), the game ball B is guided from the front end of the table 2555. It is also possible to excite the player by whether or not they are released onto the path 2551 . Therefore, various scenes of the lottery accessory 2550 can make the player nervous and throbbing, making it difficult for the player to get bored, making the player amused and suppressing a decline in interest. , a pachinko machine equipped with a lottery accessory 2550 that entertains the players can be provided.

In addition, since the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 has a planar table 2555 that is wide in the front, rear, left, and right directions, and is provided with a guideway 2551 in front of the front end of the table 2555, the lottery Since the accessory 2550 is large, the lottery accessory 2550 can make the pachinko machine 1 stand out and strongly attract the player's interest, and the game using the lottery accessory 2550. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player by making the player more likely to expect the pachinko machine 1 and making it easier for the player to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Furthermore, since the second V winning opening 2008 is provided on the central axis in the left-right direction of the table 2555 which is inclined so that the rear end becomes higher, the second V winning opening 2008 can be conspicuous, and the player can This can make it easier to direct the line of sight of the player to the second V winning hole 2008, and to make it easier to have a sense of expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the second V winning hole 2008. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected.

A rocking gutter 2554 is provided in the vicinity of the rear end on the central axis of the table 2555 whose rear end is raised, and a pair of rocking pieces 2556 are provided symmetrically with respect to the central axis. The swinging piece 2556 does not hinder the visibility of the rear swinging gutter 2554, and the player can see the second V winning port 2008 provided on the table 2555, the pair of swinging pieces 2556, and the swinging gutter. 2554 can be visually recognized well. Therefore, since it becomes easy to recognize the rotation state and the swing state of the pair of swing pieces 2556 and the swing gutter 2554, it becomes easy to predict the rolling path of the game ball B due to those movements, and the game can be played as predicted. The movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed depending on whether the ball B rolls or not.

In addition, in the distribution part 2552, since the guideway 2551 is provided with the loss port 2009 communicating with the second side, the distribution bridge 2557 is rotated by the lottery loop solenoid 2558 from the closed state by the distribution bridge 2557. 2009 is opened, the loss port 2009 is opened upward in the guideway 2551, so that the loss port 2009 can be conspicuous from the player, and the guideway 2551 is circulated. A state in which the playing game ball B is distributed to the second side (losing port 2009), that is, a state in which it is not distributed to the first side (hitting part 2553, and by extension, the second V winning port 2008) is recognized. can be made easier. Therefore, when the conspicuous failure opening 2009 is closed by the distribution bridge 2557, it is possible to easily recognize that it is in a state of being distributed to the first side (striking portion 2553), and just by looking at the guideway 2551, it is possible to recognize Therefore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in a state of being sorted to .

Furthermore, depending on the timing of hitting the game ball B by the hitting part 2553, etc., the game ball B moves up and down the climbing part 2559, so that the staying time of the game ball B in the lottery accessory 2550 can be earned (extended). It is possible to avoid the disappointment of the player due to the completion of the game in the lottery accessory 2550 in a short time, and the time earned by the climbing part 2559 is used to produce an effect image or the like on the effect display device 1600. can be sufficiently shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player more can be provided.

In addition, since the climbing part 2559 is provided between the hitting part 2553 and the swinging gutter 2554 (swinging passage 2562), even if the game ball B is strongly hit in the hitting part 2553, the climbing part 2559 cannot be climbed. In addition, the momentum can be further reduced by swinging in the horizontal direction in the swing passage 2562, so that the game ball B is vigorously supplied to the swing gutter 2554. As a result, although the swing gutter 2554 reciprocates to change the direction of release, the momentum of the game ball B causes the swing gutter 2554 to move in a direction different from the direction in which the swing gutter 2554 is released. If the game ball B is released, the player may feel uncomfortable, or if the game ball B is vigorously released from the swing gutter 2554 to the table 2555, the staying time of the game ball B on the table 2555 (rolling time) can be shortened or avoided. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the release of the game ball B from the rocking gutter 2554 without making the player feel uncomfortable, and the movement of the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 can be easily enjoyed. be able to.

Further, in the case where the player can select the timing at which the game ball B is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550 by the hitting operation of the game ball B, the game ball B is distributed to the first side in the distribution display section 2557a. At the timing of displaying that the state is displayed, it is possible to perform the driving operation so that the game ball B is supplied. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player's driving operation and can suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the loss opening 2009 is opened, the tip of the distribution bridge 2557 is positioned above the base end and becomes a state in which it stands upright from the guideway 2551. Even if the ball circulates and tries to jump over the loss opening 2009, it can be prevented from jumping over and entering the first side (striking part 2553) by the upright distribution bridge 2557, and the game ball B can be reliably thrown. It can be sorted to the loss opening 2009 (second side).

In addition, when the loss port 2009 is opened, the distribution bridge 2557 is placed in a state in which the tip thereof is positioned above the base end and stands upright from the taxiway 2551, so that the distribution bridge 2557 stands out from the player. In addition to being visible, the distribution display portion 2557a provided on the distribution bridge 2557 is visible, so the game ball B is also distributed to the second side by the distribution bridge 2557 (distribution display portion 2557a). state can be determined.

[11. Details of the center accessory on the game board]
Next, details of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 will be described.

[11-1. Center Accessory of First Embodiment]
The center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97 and the like. FIG. 94 is an explanatory view showing the center accessory of the first embodiment attached to the game panel, cut in the middle in the vertical direction, and showing the front constituent member. FIG. 95(a) is an explanatory view showing the front decoration of the center accessory in a disassembled state into a front decoration and a rear decoration, and FIG. 95(b) is a decoration composed of the front decoration and the rear decoration. It is an explanatory view showing from the front. FIG. 96 is an explanatory diagram showing the center accessory of FIG. 94 with the center frame placed on a table with the rear end facing down. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing a partial cross section of a center accessory provided with a center frame to which a decoration different from that shown in FIG. 94 is attached.

The center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment is provided on the game board 5 of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 78 to 83 and the like. The center accessory 2500 includes a transparent frame-shaped center frame 2511 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a warp passage 2512 capable of guiding game balls B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame. and a stage 2513 which is provided at the lower side within the frame of the center frame 2511 and releases the game ball B which has circulated in the warp passage 2512 into the game area 5a after rolling in the horizontal direction.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 further includes a decorative body 2570 attached to the center frame 2511 and having a predetermined decoration.

The center frame 2511 is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 to extend in the front-rear direction. A flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and flows down the game area 5a. An inflow restricting portion 2511c that restricts the game ball B from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511d projecting from the inner circumference of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a. have.

The rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion portion 2511a) is positioned forward of the rear end (rear surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The rear end of the center frame 2511 may not protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1100 or may protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1100 .

As shown in FIG. 94, the decorative body 2570 includes a flat transparent front plate 2571 attached to the front end of the center frame 2511, a front decorative portion 2572 attached to the front surface of the front plate, and the center frame 2511 (insert and a rear decorative portion 2573 provided in front of the rear end of the portion 2511a). In other words, the decorative body 2570 is provided so as to extend within the frame of the center frame 2511, and has a rear decorative portion 2573 provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a and a front decorative portion 2572 provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front. The front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 are decorated in harmony with each other.

The front plate 2571 is provided such that its rear surface contacts the front end surface of the inflow restricting portion 2511c. This front plate 2571 forms a ball passage 2517 through which the game ball B can flow between the support portion 2511d.

As shown in FIG. 95, the front decoration portion 2572 of the decoration body 2570 is decorated with a predetermined pattern (here, a pattern in which cloud-like patterns are arranged around the face of a demon). The front decorative portion 2572 includes a transparent transmissive portion 2572a provided in front of the ball passage 2517, and a point-like opaque transparent portion 2572a which is provided in the transmissive portion 2572a and constitutes a part of the design as decoration. and a plurality of dot portions 2572b (see FIG. 95(a)).

A transparent portion 2572a of the front decorative portion 2572 is formed to be colorless and transparent or colored and transparent. The colored transparent transparent portion 2572a is colored in the same color as the pattern so as to constitute a part of the pattern. In this embodiment, the transparent portion 2572a of the demon's face portion is colored and transparent, and the transparent portion 2572a of the cloud design portion is colorless and transparent.

Each dot portion 2572b of the front decorative portion 2572 is colored in the same color as the pattern. As shown in FIG. 95(a) in an enlarged manner, the plurality of dot portions 2572b are formed in a circular shape one by one, and are spaced at the same interval as the diameter in a diagonal direction at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal. It is set open.

The rear decorative portion 2573 is attached to the rear side of the transparent support portion 2511d in the center frame 2511. As shown in FIG. The rear decorative portion 2573 is provided so as to extend into the frame of the frame-shaped insertion portion 2511 a of the center frame 2511 . The decoration of the rear decoration part 2573 is opaquely applied with the same pattern as that of the front decoration part 2572 provided in front. In addition, when the game panel 1100 is a transparent member, the rear decoration part 2573 may be on the back surface of the game panel 1100 . In this case, there is an effect that the area for decoration can be widened.

The front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 are formed by printing patterns as decorations on a transparent resin film. The front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 of this embodiment are formed in a film shape.

As shown in FIG. 95(b), this decorative body 2570 has a rear decorative portion 2573 provided behind through a transparent transparent portion 2572a in the decoration (pattern) of the front decorative portion 2572 when viewed from the front (front). Since the decoration (picture) is visible, the pattern of the rear decorative portion 2573 supplements the transparent portion 2572a, so that the original pattern without the transparent portion 2572a can be seen.

On the other hand, when the game ball B flows through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573, the game ball B can be seen through the transparent transmission part 2572a of the front decoration part 2572. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of distrust or anxiety due to the game ball B being out of sight, even if only temporarily, and the enjoyment of the game with the game ball B reduces interest. can be suppressed.

The decorative body 2570 of this embodiment is attached to the center frame 2511 at a portion forward of the rear end of the insertion portion 2511a. In other words, when the decorative body 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511, the decorative body 2570 does not partially protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511. FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 96, when the center frame 2511 to which the decorative body 2570 is attached is placed on the table TA with the rear end of the center frame 2511 facing down, only the rear end surface of the insertion portion 2511a is placed on the table TA. abut (touch)

Although the details are omitted, the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment includes a pattern display device 2518, a first sorting device 2530, a second sorting device 2540, a lottery accessory 2550, etc. in addition to the decorative body 2570. It is attached to frame 2511 . The symbol display 2518 displays a special symbol, a fourth symbol, etc. drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 .

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, solenoids such as the first distribution solenoid 2534 of the first distribution device 2530 attached to the center frame 2511 and the second distribution solenoid 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 , and its metal case is positioned at the rear end. As a result, when the center frame 2511 (center accessory 2500) is placed on the table TA with the rear end of the center frame 2511 (center accessory 2500) facing down, the sturdy metal case of the solenoid comes into contact with the table TA, making it difficult to damage during assembly work. be able to. At this time, a resin cover may be provided to cover the metal case of the solenoid.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the center accessory 2500 is provided with wiring connected to an LED board, a relay board, a solenoid, and the like. The wiring is provided along the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511 of the center accessory 2500 and is provided so as to be hidden by the decoration of the decorative body 2570. As shown in FIG. As a result, deterioration in appearance due to the wiring being visible to the player is suppressed. It should be noted that the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511 may be formed in a double-walled shape, and the wiring may be passed between the walls. In this case, it is desirable to use a flexible flat cable (FFC) as wiring.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the transmissive portion 2572a and the dot portion 2572b may be reversed. More specifically, the transmissive portion 2572a may be an opaque patterned portion, and the dot portion 2572b may be a transparent portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the transmissive portion 2572a is shown as a transparent portion, but it is not limited to this, and may be a portion penetrating back and forth.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the front decoration portion 2572 having the transparent portion 2572a and the dot portion 2572b as the decoration (picture) and the rear decoration portion 2573 having the decoration (picture) supplementing the transparent portion 2572a. The decorative body 2570 is provided on the center frame 2511 of the center accessory 2500, but it is not limited to this, and the starting unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the attacker unit 2400, the back unit 3000, etc. You may make it provide the decoration body 2570 in.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the decoration of the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 that constitute the decoration body 2570, a pattern is printed on a transparent film, but the invention is not limited to this. A center accessory 2500 having a center frame 2511 to which a decorative body 2570A is attached as shown in FIG. 97 may be used. The decorative body 2570A is mounted within a flat plate-shaped front decorative portion 2572 attached to the front end of the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511 and a frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a behind the front decorative portion 2572. and a rear decorative portion 2573 that is three-dimensionally formed.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 of the decoration body 2570A are each decorated with three-dimensionally shaped decorations. The front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 are each provided with decorations that coordinate with each other. In addition, the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 are provided so that at least a portion thereof overlaps when viewed from the front.

The decorative body 2570A (rear decorative portion 2573) is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the decorative body 2570A is attached to the center frame 2511, no part of the decorative body 2570A protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511. FIG.

The decorative body 2570A may be formed by molding pre-colored resin, or may be formed by painting or attaching a seal after molding. Metallic pigments or plating may be used as the decoration of the decoration body 2570A, and the glittering decoration can strongly attract the player's interest, thus providing the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player. can provide.

Further, as the decorative body 2570A, a part of the rear decorative portion 2573 may protrude forward to the same position as the front decorative portion 2572 . This makes it possible to make it easier to give a sense of depth to the decorative body 2570A, thereby enhancing the decorative effect.

According to this embodiment, a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a rear decorative portion 2573 provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and the rear decorative portion 2573 Since the decoration body 2570 including the front decoration part 2572 provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front part is provided, the center frame 2511 is transparent, so that the decoration body 2570 is made relatively conspicuous by making it inconspicuous. In addition, by partially overlapping the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 of the decorative body 2570, the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572 and the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2573 can be made difficult to distinguish. Thus, the decoration by the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 can be shown to the player in good condition. As a result, the decoration body 2570 having a high decorative effect can be configured by the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573, so that the decoration body 2570 can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored. , it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing the decline in interest of the player.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, a portion of the front decoration portion 2572 (a portion in front of the ball passage 2517) of the decoration body 2570 is made up of the transmission portion 2572a and the plurality of dot portions 2572b. In addition, since a rear decorative portion 2573 decorated with decorations (decoration with the same pattern) that cooperates with the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572 is provided behind the relevant part, the rear decorative portion 2573 can be seen through the transparent transparent portion 2572a. By supplementing the part of the transparent part 2572a, one good decoration (picture) can be shown as if the transparent part 2572a does not exist. can entertain.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the decoration of the portion in front of the ball passage 2517 in the front decoration portion 2572 is composed of the transparent portion 2572a and the plurality of dot portions 2572b. can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent portion 2572a. Thereby, when the game ball B is not flowing through the ball passage 2517, the decoration of the rear rear decoration part 2573 can be seen through the transmission part 2572a, so that the good decoration by the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 can be enjoyed. On the other hand, when the game ball B is circulating in the ball passage 2517, the game ball B is visually recognized through the transmission part 2572a, and the game ball B becomes invisible, which gives the player a sense of distrust and anxiety. This can be avoided, and the game with the game ball B can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2573 of the decorative body 2570 is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511, the center frame 2511 can be attached to the center frame 2511 while the decorative body 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511. When placed on the table TA with the rear end facing down, only the rear end surface of the insertion portion 2511a contacts the table TA. Therefore, when the center frame 2511 is put on the table TA with the rear end side down and the assembly work or the disassembly work is performed, the center frame 2511 does not rattle and the assembly work or the like is facilitated. can do.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2573 of the decorative body 2570 is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511, the decorative body 2570 does not protrude rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame 2511. As a result, the space behind the center frame 2511 (game panel 1100) can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large decorative body, a movable decorative body, or the like behind the center frame 2511, thereby facilitating the construction of the pachinko machine 1 capable of further entertaining the players.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the symbol display 2518 for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame 2511, the symbol display 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511. As compared with the case where the pattern display device 2518 is attached separately, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be saved.

The decoration of the center frame 2511 (decorative body 2570, decorative body 2570A) may be coordinated with the decoration applied to the game panel 1100. FIG.

[11-2. Center role of the second embodiment]
The center accessory 2500 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98 and the like. FIG. 98(a) is an explanatory view of the main part of the center accessory of the second embodiment viewed from inside the frame, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in (a), and (c ) is an explanatory view showing the center accessory of (a) with the rear end facing down and the center frame placed on a table.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the center accessory 2500 of the second embodiment is a transparent frame-shaped center attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), similar to the center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment. A frame 2511, a warp passage 2512 capable of guiding the game ball B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame, and the game ball B circulating through the warp passage 2512 provided at the lower side of the frame of the center frame 2511. , and a stage 2513 for releasing into the game area 5a after rolling in the horizontal direction.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 further includes a decorative body 2580 attached to the center frame 2511 and having a predetermined decoration.

The center frame 2511 is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 to extend in the front-rear direction. A flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and flows down the game area 5a. An inflow restricting portion 2511c that restricts the game ball B from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511d projecting from the inner circumference of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a. have.

The rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion portion 2511a) is positioned forward of the rear end (rear surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The rear end of the center frame 2511 may not protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1100 or may protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1100 .

The decoration body 2580 includes a front decoration portion 2581, a rear decoration portion 2582, a transparent front cover 2583 covering the front side of the rear decoration portion 2582, and a transparent front cover 2583 provided on the rear side of the rear decoration portion 2582. A flat diffuser lens 2584 capable of irradiating the diffused light forward, a transparent rear cover 2585 attached to the rear side of the front cover 2583 so as to cover the diffuser lens 2584 from behind, and and an LED substrate 2586 on which an LED 2586a for emitting light is mounted.

The front decorative portion 2581 is provided forward of the rear decorative portion 2582 . The front decorative portion 2581 is attached to the center frame 2511 behind the transparent support portion 2511d.

The rear decorative portion 2582 extends into the frame of the center frame 2511 and partially protrudes rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion portion 2511a).

The front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 are decorated in harmony with each other, and are provided so as to at least partially overlap when viewed from the front. Although illustration is omitted, the decoration of the front decorative portion 2581 and the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2582 are each provided with a pattern corresponding to a single pattern, with the portions overlapping each other as a boundary in front view. .

The front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 are formed entirely opaque. In other words, the front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 are composed of opaque portions. In addition, the front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 are translucent. It should be noted that the front decoration portion 2581 and the rear decoration portion 2582 may be partially provided with a transparent transparent portion (transmissive portion).

The front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 are formed by printing decorative patterns on a transparent resin film. The front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 of this embodiment are formed in a film shape.

The LED board 2586 is provided behind the front decorative portion 2581 . As a result, the LED board 2586 and the wiring connected to the LED board 2586 are hidden by the front decorative portion 2581 so as to be invisible from the front. The LED board 2586 can light-embellish the rear decoration part 2582 by causing a plurality of mounted LEDs 2586a to emit light.

A part of the decorative body 2580 of the present embodiment protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511 when attached to the center frame 2511 . As a result, as shown in FIG. 98(c), when the center frame 2511 with the decorative body 2580 attached thereto is placed on the table TA with the rear end of the center frame 2511 facing down, the decorative body 2580 (rear decorative portion 2582) abuts (touches) the base TA, and a part of the rear end of the center frame 2511 abuts on the base TA.

Although the details are omitted, the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment includes a pattern display 2518, a first sorting device 2530, a second sorting device 2540, a lottery accessory 2550, etc. in addition to the decorative body 2580. It is attached to frame 2511 . The symbol display 2518 displays a special symbol, a fourth symbol, etc. drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 .

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, solenoids such as the first distribution solenoid 2534 of the first distribution device 2530 attached to the center frame 2511 and the second distribution solenoid 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 , and its metal case is positioned at the rear end. As a result, when the center frame 2511 (center accessory 2500) is placed on the table TA with the rear end of the center frame 2511 (center accessory 2500) facing down, the sturdy metal case of the solenoid comes into contact with the table TA, making it difficult to damage during assembly work. be able to. At this time, a resin cover may be provided to cover the metal case of the solenoid.

In the above-described embodiment, the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511 may be formed in a double-wall shape, and the wiring of the LED substrate 2586 may be passed between the walls. In this case, it is desirable to use a flexible flat cable (FFC) as wiring.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the decoration of the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 that constitute the decoration body 2580, a pattern is printed on a transparent film, but the invention is not limited to this. The front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 may be three-dimensionally shaped. Alternatively, the configuration of the decorative body 2570 shown in FIG. 95 may be applied to this embodiment.

According to this embodiment, the transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 includes a rear decorative portion 2582 partially protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a rear decorative portion. Since the decoration body 2580 including the front decoration part 2581 provided in front of the 2582 is provided, the decoration body 2580 can be relatively conspicuous because the center frame 2511 is transparent, making it inconspicuous. In addition, the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 of the decoration body 2580 allow the player to see a deep decoration. At this time, the rear decorative portion 2582 and the front decorative portion 2581 are decorated in cooperation with each other, and are provided so that each part overlaps when viewed from the front. Sometimes, it is possible to obscure the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part 2581 and the decoration of the rear decoration part 2582, and to show the player the large decoration by the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 in a good condition. The rear decorative portion 2582 and the front decorative portion 2581 can form a large, deep decoration body 2580 with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the center frame 2511 can be provided with the decorative body 2580 having a high decorative effect, the decorative body 2580 can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of

Further, according to this embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2582 that constitutes the decoration body 2580 is extended into the frame of the center frame 2511, the rear decoration part 2582 extends the game area in front of the game panel 1100. A player can enjoy the game with the game ball B in the game area 5a in a good condition without narrowing the game area 5a or making it difficult to see the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2582 constituting the decoration body 2580 is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, the effect display device provided behind the game panel 1100 1600, for the back front effect unit 3300, the back back effect unit 3400, etc., the periphery of the effect display device 1600 (display screen) is decorated, and the decoration body (movable decoration) of the back front effect unit 3300 and the back back effect unit 3400 It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of displaying or performing decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect in cooperation with the player's body, and capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player. .

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the wiring of electronic components such as the LED substrate 2586 is made difficult to see from the front by the opaque portion of the decorative body 2580, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion. The appearance can be prevented from deteriorating, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 2580 can be more easily exhibited.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the decoration 2580 (front decoration portion 2581) is provided in front of the LED board 2586, the LED board 2586 can be hidden by the decoration 2580 (decoration). It is possible to prevent the LED board 2586 from being seen and to make the appearance worse, and it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decoration body 2580 .

Further, according to this embodiment, since the symbol display 2518 for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame 2511, the symbol display 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511. As compared with the case where the pattern display device 2518 is attached separately, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be saved.

The decoration of the center frame 2511 (decorative body 2580) may be linked with the decoration applied to the game panel 1100. FIG.

[11-3. Center accessory of the third embodiment]
Next, the center accessory 2500A of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102 and the like. FIG. 99 is a front view showing a game board provided with a center accessory according to the third embodiment, with the rear side of the game panel omitted. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory and the game panel of FIG. 99 as seen from the front. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory of FIG. 99, seen from the front. FIGS. 102(a) to (g) are explanatory diagrams showing various joining patterns between the first frame and the second frame in the center accessory. In the following description, the same components as those of the center accessory 2500 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The center accessory 2500A of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. Installed on the front. It should be noted that the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, is composed of a single plate material.

The center accessory 2500A includes a transparent center frame 2700 formed in a frame shape, a warp path 2512 capable of guiding game balls B from the outside of the center frame 2700 to the inside of the frame, and a A stage 2513 is provided on the lower side and releases the game ball B, which has flowed through the warp passage 2512, into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction. Although the details will be described later, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 is divided into a plurality of frames in the circumferential direction of the frame. In this embodiment, a decoration body 2570 shown in FIG. 95 and a decoration body 2580 shown in FIG. 98 may be provided. Also, the decoration of the center frame 2700 (decoration body 2570, decoration body 2570A, decoration body 2580) may be coordinated with the decoration applied to the game panel 1100. FIG.

In addition, the center accessory 2500A has a connecting/holding portion 2710 that connects adjacent frames of the plurality of frames forming the center frame 2700 .

Furthermore, the center role 2500A includes a symbol display 2518 that displays the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004, the gate 2010 and the second start. It has a second starting opening unit 2720 having an opening 2004, an attacker unit 2730 having a big winning opening 2005, and a prize winning opening unit 2740 having a winning opening 2006. ing.

[11-3a. center frame]
The center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A of the third embodiment is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the game panel 1100, and the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a passes through the opening 1112. and a flange portion 2700b extending in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the rear end of the inflow restricting portion 2700a.

The inflow restricting portion 2700a of the center frame 2700 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when the center frame 2700 is attached to the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG.

The flange portion 2700b extends in a flat plate shape to the outside or inside of the center frame 2700 depending on the position in the circumferential direction. A part of the rear surface of the flange portion 2700b is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 when the center frame 2700 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 .

In addition, the center frame 2700 includes a non-flange portion 2700c where the flange portion 2700b does not extend from the rear end of the inflow restricting portion 2700a to at least one of the outside and inside of the frame, and a non-flange portion 2700c extending rearward from the flange portion 2700b. and an insertion portion (not shown) inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 . At the non-flange portion 2700c, the rear surface of the inflow restricting portion 2700a coincides with the rear surface of the flange portion 2700b. The insertion portion is provided partially around the entire circumference of the center frame 2700 .

The frame-shaped center frame 2700 of this embodiment is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction. Specifically, the center frame 2700 is divided into five frames, a first frame 2701, a second frame 2702, a third frame 2703, a fourth frame 2704, and a fifth frame 2705, each of which has a similar shape. formed into a configuration. This center accessory 2500A has a connection holding portion 2710 that connects adjacent frames.

The first frame 2701 constitutes the upper portion from the middle of the upper and left sides of the center frame 2700 . The second frame 2702 forms the lower side and the lower side from the upper and lower middle of the left side of the center frame 2700 so as to be continuous with the lower end of the left side of the first frame 2701 . The third frame 2703 forms the upper part of the right side of the center frame 2700 so as to be continuous with the right end of the first frame 2701 . The fourth frame 2704 continues to the lower end of the third frame 2703 and constitutes the middle part of the right side of the center frame 2700 . The fifth frame 2705 forms the lower part of the center frame 2700 so as to continue to the lower end of the fourth frame 2704 and the right end of the second frame 2702 .

A warp passage 2512 and a stage 2513 are attached to the second frame 2702 . A prize winning opening unit 2740 is attached to the third frame 2703 . A second starting port unit 2720 is attached to the fourth frame 2704 . An attacker unit 2730 is attached to the fifth frame 2705 .

A first frame 2701 and a second frame 2702 will be described in detail below as representatives of the plurality of frames forming the center frame 2700 .

First, the first frame 2701 of the center frame 2700 is made transparent. The first frame 2701 is formed so as to constitute the upper part and the upper part of the left side in the vertical direction in the center frame 2700 (center accessory 2500A).

The first frame 2701 is provided so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the game panel 1100, and restricts the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112. a first inflow restricting portion 2701a, a flat first flange portion 2701b connected to the rear end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and extending along the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the first inflow restricting It has a first non-flange portion 2701c where the first flange portion 2701b is not provided on at least one of the outside and inside of the frame at the rear end of the portion 2701a.

The first inflow regulating portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 is linearly inclined so that the right side of the upper side near the center in the left-right direction becomes lower rightward, and the left side of that portion becomes lower as it goes leftward. It bends in multiple steps and shifts to the left side, and the lower end of the left side extends vertically downward.

One end of the connection holding portion 2710 is detachable from the inner portion of the frame near the right end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the inner portion of the frame extending vertically downward from the lower left end. Mounted possible.

The first flange portion 2701b is provided so as to extend to both the outside and the inside of the frame at a portion that is linearly inclined so as to become lower rightward on the upper side of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a. In addition, the first flange portion 2701b is bent in multiple stages so as to become lower toward the left in the first inflow restricting portion 2701a so as to extend outside the frame except near the left end thereof. In the vicinity of its left end (a portion above the portion extending vertically downward from the lower left end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a), it is provided so as to extend to the inside of the frame.

Mounting holes for mounting to the game panel 1100 are provided at appropriate positions in the first flange portion 2701b.

The first non-flange portion 2701c is provided only inside the frame at the right end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a, and is provided outside the frame at a portion extending vertically downward from the lower left end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a. and inside.

Next, the second frame 2702 of the center frame 2700 is made transparent. The second frame 2702 is formed so as to constitute a vertically lower portion and a lower portion of the left side of the center frame 2700 (center accessory 2500A). A warp passage 2512 and a stage 2513 are attached to the second frame 2702 .

The second frame 2702 of the center frame 2700 is provided so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the game panel 1100, and the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a flows into the opening 1112. a second inflow restricting portion 2702a that restricts the movement of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a; a flat second flange portion 2702b that is connected to the rear end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a and extends along the front surface of the game panel 1100; It has a second non-flange portion 2702c where the second flange portion 2702b is not provided on at least one of the outside and the inside of the frame at the rear end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a.

The second inflow restricting portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 is divided into left and right portions extending vertically and a right end portion of the lower side. not More specifically, the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the left side extends downward along the left side from the upper end of the left side, moves to the lower side, and moves rightward (lower right) along the lower side so that the right end becomes lower. extended short. In addition, the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the right side extends vertically along the right end of the lower side.

One end of the connection holding portion 2710 can be detachably attached to the portion inside the frame at the upper end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the left side and the portion on the right side (right side) of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the right side. Mounted on.

The left second inflow restricting portion 2702a is provided with an entrance of the warp passage 2512, and a stage 2513 is provided between the left and right second inflow restricting portions 2702a.

The second flange portion 2702b is provided so as to extend inward of the frame at a portion (left side portion) extending vertically in the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the left side. A portion extending to the lower right along the lower side of the portion 2702a is provided so as to extend to both the outside and the inside of the frame. The second flange portion 2702b is provided so as to greatly extend to the outside of the frame at the lower side, and connects the two second inflow restricting portions 2702a that are separated left and right by the portion.

Mounting holes for mounting to the game panel 1100 are provided at appropriate positions on the second flange portion 2702b.

The second non-flange portion 2702c is provided outside the frame at the portion extending vertically along the left side of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the left side, and is provided on the right side (right side) of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the right side. surface).

The second frame 2702 extends further rearward than the second flange portion 2702b and further has a second insertion portion (not shown) that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 . The second insertion portion protrudes rearward from the second flange portion 2702b so as to connect the two left and right second inflow restricting portions 2702a. A stage 2513 is attached to this second insertion portion.

Next, the attachment of the center frame 2700 to the game panel 1100 will be described using the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 as examples. The first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are attached to the game panel 1100 with attachment screws through attachment holes provided in the first flange portion 2701b and the second flange portion 2702b.

For example, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, as shown in FIG. 99 and FIG. It is attached to the game panel 1100 so that the part 2702a is adjacent to the part 2702a.

More specifically, the second inflow regulating portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 is located on the right side of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 so as to slightly overlap in the vertical direction. , the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 . In other words, the right side of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a provided with the first non-flange portion 2701c and the left side of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a provided with the second non-flange portion 2702c are They are installed facing each other. This allows the first non-flange portion 2701c and the second non-flange portion 2702c to bring the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a as close as possible.

By the way, in the center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment that uses the center frame 2511 that is not divided in the circumferential direction, the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 is changed due to design changes. If it is desired to change the size, the center frame 2511 needs to be remade, which may increase the cost.

On the other hand, the center frame 2700 of this embodiment is divided into a plurality of frames (here, five of the first frame 2701 to the fifth frame 2705) in the circumferential direction of the frame. By changing the position, the size of the game area 5a can be freely changed.

Specifically, for example, when increasing the area below the second frame 2702 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. Install in the position moved to . This makes it possible to cope with enlargement and reduction of the game area 5a (the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100) in the vertical direction.

Alternatively, if the area to the left of the second frame 2702 in the game area 5a is made smaller, as shown in FIG. The second frame 2702 is moved to the left from the state shown in FIG. 102(a) so as to be positioned to the left of the inflow restricting portion 2701a. This makes it possible to cope with enlargement and reduction of the game area 5a (the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100) in the horizontal direction.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 102(d), the lower end of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 and the upper end of the second inflow regulating portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 are made to face each other. , may be attached to the game panel 1100 by abutting each other. As a result, the left and lower areas of the second frame 2702 in the game area 5a can be made smaller than in the state of FIG. 102(a). Further, in this case, the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a are joined to each other, so that the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 can appear to be integrated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 102(e), a gap C is formed between the first inflow restricting portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a of the second frame 2702. Also good. At this time, it is desirable to make the gap C smaller than the diameter of the game ball B. If the clearance C is larger than the diameter of the game ball B, an obstacle nail may be planted so that the game ball B does not pass through the clearance C.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 102(f), second non-flange portions 2702c, in which the second flange portions 2702b are not formed, are also provided on the left and right sides of the second frame 2702 on the side of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a. can be As a result, the first non-flange portions 2701c are provided on both left and right sides of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a, and the second non-flange portions 2702c are provided on both left and right sides of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a. The restricting portion 2701a and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a can be brought as close as possible in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the second frame 2702 with respect to the first frame 2701, and it is possible to correspond to the game areas 5a of various sizes due to design changes or the like. That is, the game area 5a (opening 1112 of the game panel 1100) can be easily scaled up and down in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 102(g), the first flange portion 2701b may be provided on the first frame 2701 to the lower end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a. As a result, the presence of the first flange portion 2701b can increase the rigidity of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a, so that even if the game ball B comes into contact with the first inflow restricting portion 2701a, it can be prevented from being damaged.

In this center frame 2700, a margin is provided between adjacent frames. The marginal portion is a portion (a portion of the end portion of the frame) that allows relative movement with respect to the end portions of the adjacent frames, as shown in FIG. surrounding area). If there is a possibility that the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 expands or contracts in the horizontal direction, at least two marginal portions are required to allow horizontal movement. Similarly, if the opening 1112 may expand or contract in the vertical direction, at least two margins are required to allow vertical movement. Furthermore, if there is a possibility that the opening 1112 may be enlarged or reduced in the vertical and horizontal directions, at least two vertical and horizontal movement margins are required.

Specifically, the vertical direction is provided at both ends of the second frame 2702, that is, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 and between the second frame 2702 and the fifth frame 2705. An allowance is provided (see Figures 99-101). In addition, there are two margins in the horizontal direction at both ends of the third frame 2703, that is, between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703 and between the third frame 2703 and the fourth frame 2704. is provided. Although FIG. 102 shows the clearance in the vertical direction, the same applies to the clearance in the horizontal direction.

By the way, as an allowance in the left-right direction, for example, in the portion between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, the top surface of the portion extending left and right in the first inflow restricting portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 is used as the game area. Since the ball B rolls, when the first frame 2701 is moved to the left and attached, a gap is formed between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, and the gap prevents the game ball B from flowing. You are likely to be blocked. In such a case, the flow of the game ball B is not hindered by providing a spacer or arranging obstacle nails in the margin. For this reason, it is more difficult to expand the game area 5a (the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100) in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction because of the flow of the game balls B and the like.

Thus, according to this embodiment, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame. Therefore, when it is desired to change the size of the game area 5a due to a design change or the like, the entire center frame 2700 does not have to be remade by changing the mounting positions of the divided frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of design freedom.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, the design of the center accessory 2500A can be partially In the case of systematic change, by changing only the frame corresponding to the part to be changed, the center accessory 2500A can be easily changed to a desired design, and the cost required for model change can be suppressed. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily cope with model changes.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the frame-shaped center frame 2700 is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame, each of the game panels can be By changing the mounting position of the frame, the size of the game area 5a can be easily changed without remaking the whole center frame 2700, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, according to this embodiment, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame. When a problem occurs in the pattern display 2518, the second starter unit 2720, the attacker unit 2730, etc. provided in the center accessory 2500A, the problem can be solved without removing the entire center frame 2700 from the game panel 1100. It is sufficient to remove only the frame on which the generated unit is installed, and maintenance work can be simplified.

[11-3b. Connection holding part]
The connection holding part 2710 connects adjacent frames in each frame of the center frame 2700 which is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame. It is a thing.

By the way, since the center frame 2700 of the present embodiment is configured to be divided into a plurality of frames in the circumferential direction of the frame as described above, some of the frames may become dislodged during assembly or maintenance work. It may fall and be damaged. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a connection holding portion 2710 is provided to connect adjacent frames. As shown in FIGS. 99 to 101, the connection holding portion 2710 is formed as a flexible linear (cord-like) member. The length of the connection holding portion 2710 is preferably such that it does not reach the lower end of the game board 5 when the center frame 2700 is removed with the game board 5 upright, for example, from the viewpoint of drop protection.

The connection holding part 2710 of this embodiment uses a decorative spherical chain. As a result, even if the connection holding portion 2710 is visible, it can serve as a decoration due to its decorativeness, so that the overall appearance of the game board 5 does not deteriorate.

For example, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, one end of the connection holding portion 2710 is detachably attached to the first inflow restricting portion 2701a of the first frame 2701, and the other is detachably attached to the second inflow restricting portion 2702 a of the second frame 2702 . The attachment of this connection holding portion 2710 is the same between other frames.

99 to 101, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, and between the second frame 2702 and the fifth frame 2705 are connected. Although those connected by the holding portion 2710 are shown, the third frame 2703 and the fourth frame 2704 and the fourth frame 2704 and the fifth frame 2705 are also connected by the similar connection holding portion 2710. It is

According to this connection holding portion 2710, in a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 that constitute the center frame 2700, adjacent frames are connected to each other. Even if one frame is removed, the removed frame will not drop onto the workbench, the floor, or the like, and damage to the frame due to dropping can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, the connecting/holding part 2710 is shown as a part that also serves as a decoration, but it is not limited to this, and it may be one that does not also serve as a decoration. In this case, it is desirable to provide the connection holding portion 2710 at a location that is hidden by the center frame 2700, the decorative body, or the like and is difficult to see from the front.

Also, in the above embodiment, the connection holding part 2710 is shown to be visible to the player, but it is not limited to this, and may be completely invisible to the player in the normal state. In other words, if the connection holding portion 2710 is provided at a portion of the center frame 2700 that is not visible to the player, it will not be seen by the player during a game.

Also, in the above embodiment, all the adjacent frames are connected by the connection holding portion 2710, but the present invention is not limited to this. A frame that does not have a connection may not be connected to an adjacent frame by the connection holding portion 2710 . For example, since the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 do not have any movable parts, maintenance is not required, and since they are light in weight, there is no risk of damage even if they fall, so there is no need to connect them. Conversely, since the third to fifth frames 2703 to 2705 have movable objects and are heavy, the need for connection increases. Therefore, the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are not connected for simplification, and the third frame 2703 to the fifth frame 2705 are not other frames but other strong frames behind the game board 5 (game panel 1100). It is desirable to removably connect it to any member.

Further, a plurality (pieces) of connecting holding portions 2710 may be provided in the above embodiment. In this case, it is desirable to bundle a plurality of connection holding portions 2710 so that the connection holding portion 2710 does not get entangled in the obstacle nail or the like and bend the obstacle nail during manufacturing, maintenance, or the like.

In addition, when a plurality of connection holding portions 2710 are provided and they are connected to a plurality of locations behind the game board 5 (game panel 1100), the center frame 2700 is attached to the game panel 1100 with the mounting screws removed. It becomes possible to maintain the posture of the center frame 2700 (each frame). Therefore, there is no need to support the center frame 2700 during manufacturing or maintenance, and workability is improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the center frame 2700 is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame, and then adjacent frames are divided into adjacent frames. are connected by the connection holding part 2710, so that when the mounting screws attached to the game panel 1100 are removed during detachment work such as assembly or maintenance, a part of the frame comes off the game panel 1100 and falls. Even if it tries to do so, since it is connected to another frame by the flexible string-like connecting and holding part 2710, the connecting and holding part 2710 acts like a lifeline and the detached frame hangs. As a result, the detached frame will not drop onto the workbench, floor, or the like, and the frame will not be damaged.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the connection holding portion 2710 is detachably attached to the first inflow restricting portion 2701a, the second inflow restricting portion 2702a, etc., the attaching portion of the connection holding portion 2710 is attached to the first inflow restriction portion. The first frame 2701 or the like can be removed from the game panel 1100 by itself by removing it from the restricting portion 2701a or the like.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the adjacent frames are connected by the flexible string-like connecting and holding portion 2710, for example, the first frame 2701 may be connected to the first frame 2701 by changing the design. Even if the position of the second frame 2702 is changed, the connection holding part 2710 deforms to follow the position change, so that the pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in design can be provided.

102(a), a gap between the first inflow restricting portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 is provided as the connection holding portion 2710. When the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are attached to the game panel 1100 so that C is formed, the connection holding that connects (connects) the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a The portion 2710 may have a function as a restricting portion that prevents the game ball B from passing through the gap C.

[12. Details of the side unit on the game board]
Next, the details of the side unit 2200 provided on the game board 5 will be described. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 which are always open to receive the game balls B, and one sub-out opening 2021 which is always open to receive the game balls B.

Although not shown in detail, the side unit 2200 forms a general prize-winning opening 2001 and a sub-out opening 2021, has a U-shaped cross section, extends short in the front-rear direction, and is open upward and rearward to the left-right direction. A plurality of ball receiving portions arranged in a row, and a shelf portion 2201 extending short in the front-rear direction in the same length as the ball receiving portion in a frame shape and provided to the right of the ball receiving portion on the right end in front view. , a flat plate-like front plate connecting the front ends of the plurality of ball receiving portions and shelf portions, and a flat plate shape extending outward from the rear ends of the ball receiving portion and shelf portion 2201 on the left end in front view, respectively. and a gutter portion extending rearward in a gutter shape from the rear end of each ball receiving portion.

The side unit 2200 also has two positioning projections projecting rearward from the flange portion and two mounting holes penetrating the flange portion. The positioning protrusion is for positioning the side unit 2200 with respect to the panel plate 1110 by being inserted into the positioning hole 1113 (see FIG. 104) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . With the flange part in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the mounting screw is inserted from the front and screwed into the mounting hole 1114 (see FIG. 104) of the panel plate 1110 to tighten the side unit. 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. FIG.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, a plurality of ball receiving parts, that is, three general winning holes 2001 and one sub-out hole 2021 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁Further, the rear end of the gutter portion extending rearward from the ball receiving portion is located within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and does not protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving portion) to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the gutter portion and delivers it to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . Then, the game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and discharged downward. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below in the same manner as described above. .

In the side unit 2200, the front ends of the plurality of ball receiving portions having a U-shaped cross section and the front end of the shelf portion 2201 having a frame-shaped cross section are connected by a flat front plate. Compared to conventional side units in which a plurality of ball receiving parts protrude forward from the base plate, the rigidity is higher. Therefore, when the side unit 2200 is pulled forward after removing the mounting screw that attaches the side unit 2200 to the panel plate 1110 in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the side unit 2200 is enhanced. , the side unit 2200 does not bend. As a result, the positioning projections of the side unit 2200 are not tilted with respect to the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2200 can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the disassembly work.

In addition, since a part of the front plate of the side unit 2200 protrudes above the shelf 2201 at the front end of the shelf 2201, when the pachinko machine 1 is disassembled, the fingers of the operator cannot protrude from the shelf. The side unit 2200 can be easily pulled forward by hooking it on the part where the side unit 2200 is located, and the workability of the disassembly work is good.

In addition, when the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the opening 1112 is blocked from the front by the flat base plate. Intrusion into the game area 5a on the front side of the panel board 1110 can be prevented.

[12-1. Side unit of the second embodiment]
Next, the side unit 2800 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 to 105 and the like. FIG. 103(a) is a front view showing the main part of the game board provided with the side unit of the second embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. 104(a) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit exploded from the game panel in the game board of FIG. 103, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit shown in (a) from the front. , (c) is an exploded perspective view of the side unit as seen from the rear of (b), and (d) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the game panel and the side unit in longitudinal section. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the side unit and the game panel in FIG. 104 in cross section.

In the game board 5 provided with the side unit 2800 of the present embodiment, the parts having the same configurations as those of the game board 5 shown in FIG.

The side unit 2800 of the second embodiment extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. It is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2800 is provided with three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times.

The side unit 2800, as shown in FIG. and a second component 2812 attached from. A side unit 2800 of this embodiment has a second component member 2812 attached to the rear side of a first component member 2811 .

A first constituent member 2811 of the side unit 2800 includes a flat base plate 2811a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a base plate 2811a that protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a and is open upward and rearward. and a plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b forming the general prize winning opening 2001.

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. The three ball receiving portions 2811b are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and the right ball receiving portion 2811b is positioned downward. The ball receiving portion 2811b at the left end is formed such that the front end surface is parallel to the base plate 2811a to the lower end. The remaining (central and right end) ball receiving portions 2811b are inclined such that the front end faces move rearward toward the lower ends.

In addition, the first component member 2811 includes two positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a and a plurality of (three in this case) mounting members penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting on the game panel 1100. It has a hole 2811d and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided in the rear end surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b (base plate 2811a) for mounting the second component member 2812 thereon.

The two positioning protrusions 2811c are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the two positioning protrusions 2811c have the same length.

The three mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A mounting screw inserted through a mounting hole (not shown) of a second component member 2812, which will be described later, is screwed into the mounting hole.

The second component member 2812 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is placed on the surface (plate) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). surface), a passage outlet 2812b that opens rearward at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting to the first component member 2811. ) and

As shown in FIGS. 104(d) and 105, the second component 2812 of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. designed to fit inside. In addition, FIG. 104(d) is cut at the ball receiving portion 2811b in the center in the left-right direction.

The ball passage 2812a of the second component member 2812 is formed along the inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000 and along the surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to become lower toward the right. The passage outlet 2812b opens rearward at the right end of the second component 2812, which is the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a.

The attachment hole of the second component member 2812 is provided at a portion corresponding to the attachment hole of the first component member 2811 . The second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side by inserting the attachment screw from the rear into the attachment hole of the second component member 2812 and screwing it into the mounting hole of the first component member 2811. be done.

As shown in FIG. 105, the side unit 2800 of this embodiment includes a branch portion 2801 (portion shown by light hatching in FIG. and a main stream portion 2802 (a portion shown by dark shading in FIG. 105) extending along the surface (plate surface) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . The sphere passage 2812 a is composed of a plurality of tributary portions 2801 and a main flow portion 2802 .

The branch portion 2801 extends rearward from a portion forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 to a portion behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and above the main flow portion 2802 (thickness of the panel plate 1110). .

The main stream portion 2802 extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from near the left end of the base plate 2811a to near the right end so as to be lower rightward. The length of the main flow portion 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B (8 to 10 times in this embodiment).

In the side unit 2800 of this embodiment, the second component member 2812 is positioned behind the first component member 2811, and the mounting screws are inserted from the rear of the second component member 2812 through the mounting holes of the second component member 2812. It is assembled by screwing it into the attachment hole of 2811 . As a result, a side unit 2800 is constructed in which the second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side.

The ball passage 2812a of the second component 2812 is open to the front as shown, but when the first component 2811 is attached to the front side to construct the side unit 2800, the front end of the ball passage 2812a is opened. The side is closed by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811, and the game ball B does not fall forward from the ball passage 2812a. That is, the first component member 2811 and the second component member 2812 constitute the ball passage 2812a. In other words, a ball passage 2812 a is provided between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812 .

This side unit 2800 is configured such that the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110 from the front of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. It abuts against the front surface of 1110 . At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811 c of the first component member 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 . In this state, the mounting hole 2811 d of the first component member 2811 is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 .

Then, the side unit 2800 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the attachment screws into the attachment holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the attachment holes 2811d of the first component member 2811 and tightening them. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 is provided in the vicinity of the positioning projection 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be securely inserted into the positioning hole 1113 by strongly pressing the positioning projection 2811c toward the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning projection 2811c from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

When the side unit 2800 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the second component member 2812 is positioned within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . In other words, when assembled on the game board 5, the side unit 2800 does not protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and a wide space behind the panel plate 1110 can be secured.

In this embodiment, the side unit 2800 and the panel plate 1110 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and the decoration of the production unit provided behind the panel plate 1110 can be seen from the front through the side unit 2800 and the like. . Here, behind the side unit 2800, a back side effect unit 3500 having a back side movable decorative body 3510 that can be raised and lowered according to the progress of the game is provided. This back and bottom movable decorative body 3510 has a standby position where most of the whole is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500, and a standby position that rises from the standby position and is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the application position and . In the state of the standby position where the back lower movable decorative body 3510 is lowered, it can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent side unit 2800 and the panel plate 1110 .

In the side unit 2800, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, it is guided to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning hole 2001, and the ball passes. After flowing down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 by 2812a, it is transferred to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind from the passage exit 2812b. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the passage outlet 2812b of the second component member 2812 is provided below the underside movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. In other words, the general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is provided below the movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800, the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 and the like do not interfere with the back lower movable decorative body 3510. - 特許庁

In addition, in this embodiment, the side unit 2800 is not provided with the general winning hole sensor 3001, and the back unit 3000 (back ball guiding unit 3100) is provided with the general winning hole sensor 3001. FIG. That is, the side unit 2800 has a non-wiring structure. In this way, for various units attached from the front side of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, by providing electronic components such as various sensors such as a ball sensor and a magnetic sensor with wiring in the back unit 3000, the panel When the mounting screws attached to the plate 1110 are removed and the unit is pulled forward, the wiring is connected to the unit through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the wiring can be cut or pulled out from the connector. The unit can be removed forward from the panel plate 1110 without worrying about the wiring, and the disassembly work can be efficiently performed.

According to the side unit 2800 of the present embodiment, since the flat base plate 2811a is provided in the first component member 2811, the mounting screws can be inserted into the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2811d passing through the base plate 2811a. By screwing the first component member 2811 onto the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing it into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 can be blocked from the front side by the base plate 2811a. ), the back of the panel board 1110 (game panel 1100) can be hidden through the opening 1112, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be improved. On the other hand, since the second component member 2812 is provided with a ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110, the cross section of the portion of the ball passage 2812a is U-shaped. , the rigidity of the second component 2812 can be increased due to the presence of the ball passage 2812a. Since the base plate 2811a has a flat plate shape, the rigidity of the first component member 2811 may be lowered. Since the side unit 2800 is formed by attaching the first component member 2811 from the rear side with the attachment screws, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is disassembled for recycling or the like, the side unit 2800 is pulled forward by removing the mounting screws screwed into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2811d of the first component member 2811. At times, since the side unit 2800 does not bend due to the increased rigidity of the side unit 2800, the positioning protrusion of the side unit 2800 (first component member 2811) with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily remove the side unit 2800 from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) without tilting the 2811c, and can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

By the way, since the two positioning protrusions 2811c on the first component member 2811 are provided so as to be separated in the longitudinal direction of the first component member 2811, when the first component member 2811 is pulled forward during the disassembly work, The center of the first component member 2811 bends in a curved shape so as to move forward, and the bending causes the positioning projections 2811c separated in the longitudinal direction to approach each other at their tips. There is a risk that the positioning protrusion 2811c will not come off from the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 due to the force that tends to tilt the 2811c. However, in this embodiment, as described above, the side unit 2800 is formed by attaching the second component 2812 from the rear side of the first component 2811, and the rigidity of the side unit 2800 is increased. Even if the side unit 2800 is pulled forward, the side unit 2800 is not bent and the positioning projections 2811c separated in the longitudinal direction are not tilted, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the disassembly work for sorting.

Furthermore, since the plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b are projected forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the side unit 2800 is pulled forward in order to remove it from the panel plate 1110 when disassembling the pachinko machine 1. At this time, the ball receiving portion 2811b can be picked and pulled, and the removal work of the side unit 2800 can be facilitated.

In addition, since the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is blocked from the front by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811, foreign matter such as dust and dirt can pass through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110. Intrusion into the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 can be prevented.

In addition, since the second component member 2812 is attached from the rear side of the first component member 2811 by means of attachment screws through attachment holes (not shown), the attachment screws attaching the second component member 2812 are difficult to see from the front. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

In addition, the game ball B that enters the ball receiving portion 2811b (general winning opening 2001) between the first component member 2811 and the second component member 2812 is caused to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Since the passage 2812a is provided so as to protrude into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the game ball B entered into the general winning hole 2001 is pushed backward from the rear surface of the game panel 1100 like the conventional side unit. Compared to the case where a ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel 1100 to guide and flow down, the thickness of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) can be effectively used, and the back of the panel plate 1110 can be used. empty space can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as the back side effect unit 3500 (the back side movable decorative body 3510) in the empty space, and the pachinko machine 1 with higher appeal to the players can be provided.

Furthermore, since the two positioning protrusions 2811c on the first component member 2811 are provided so as to be separated in the longitudinal direction of the first component member 2811, when the side unit 2800 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, The side unit 2800 does not rotate along the surface of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be reliably positioned at the desired position of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁

In the above-described embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively.

Further, in the side unit 2800, the ball passage 2812a, which is composed of a plurality of branch flow portions 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving portions 2812c and a main flow portion 2802 where the plurality of branch flow portions 2801 join, Although shown as having one, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2812a may be independent for each ball receiving portion 2811b.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800 described above, the ball sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 2811b is not provided, but the side unit 2800 is not limited to this, and a ball sensor is provided. Also good. When the side unit 2800 is provided with a ball sensor, it is desirable to provide the ball sensor within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, or to provide the ball sensor below the rear effect device (back and bottom effect unit 3500). .

Also, in the side unit 2800 described above, an LED board is not provided on the rear side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an LED for emitting decoration may be provided. When the side unit 2800 is provided with an LED board, a unit cover is provided which covers the LED board from the rear and whose front end surface abuts the rear surface of the side unit 2800 (second component member 2812), and the unit cover and the side unit contact each other. It is desirable to provide non-contact surface portions that are not in contact with each other on the contact surface portions that are in contact with each other. As a result, the side unit 2800 can be decorated with light using the LEDs of the LED substrate, and the heat from the LEDs can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion.

[12-2. Modification of side unit]
Next, various modifications of the side unit 2800 of the above embodiment will be described in detail.

[12-2a. Modification 1 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800A having a different form from the side unit 2800 shown in FIG. 103 and the like will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 106 and the like. FIG. 106 is an explanatory view showing a longitudinal section of a side unit having a form different from that of FIG. 103 together with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800A extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. A plurality of (2 to 4) general prize winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be able to receive the prizes at all times.

The side unit 2800A consists of a first component 2811 attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstacle nail of the game panel 1100 is implanted, and a second component provided behind the first component 2811. The member 2813 and .

The first constituent member 2811 of the side unit 2800A includes a flat base plate 2811a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a base plate 2811a that protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a and is open upward and rearward. and a plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b forming the general prize winning opening 2001. In addition, the first component member 2811 has a plurality of positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a and a plurality of mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the game panel 1100. (see Figure 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. A plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning projections 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper portion of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting decorative seal 2803 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 2811a and the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component member 2811. As shown in FIG.

The second component member 2813 of the side unit 2800A is configured so that the game ball B entering the ball receiving portion 2811b (general prize winning port 2001) of the first component member 2811 is within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. A ball passage 2813a that can flow down along the plate surface of the panel plate 1110 in the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110 as described above, and a ball sensor that detects the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2813a. 2813b and .

The second component member 2813 may be configured by one member, or may be configured by combining a plurality of members.

As shown in the figure, this ball passage 2813a is placed near the lower end of the opening 1112 and bent rearward, and then bent downward along the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 so that the downstream end is lower than the opening 1112. extended to In other words, the ball passage 2813a is bent rearward at a portion lower than the back-bottom effect unit 3500 (back-bottom movable decorative body 3510) provided at the rear. As a result, the space for arranging the underside effect unit 3500 can be sufficiently secured, and the movable range (lifting range) of the underside movable decorative body 3510 can be widened or the underside movable decorative body 3510 can be enlarged. can be done.

The ball sensor 2813b is provided at a portion extending along the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2813a. In other words, the sphere sensor 2813b is provided at a portion lower than the back side effect unit 3500 (back side movable decoration 3510) provided behind in the ball passage 2813a, and the back side movable decoration 3510 does not interfere with the ball sensor 2813b. will not be.

The first component member 2811 of the side unit 2800A moves the base plate 2811a from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 so that the base plate 2811a closes the corresponding opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110. , and a plurality of positioning projections 2811c protruding rearward from the base plate 2811a are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, the mounting screws are inserted into the panel through the mounting holes 2811d. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing it into the attachment hole 1114 of the plate 1110 and tightening it.

On the other hand, the second component 2813 of the side unit 2800A is attached to the back case 3010 of the back unit 3000. As shown in FIG. In the state where the second component member 2813 is attached to the rear unit 3000, although not shown, a part of the ball passage 2813a (a portion accommodated in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110) is located forward of the rear box 3010. protruding to

When the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, the portion of the second component member 2813 protruding forward from the back box 3010 is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from behind. The side unit 2800A is constructed with the part being inserted and positioned on the rear side of the first component member 2811 .

When the side unit 2800A is assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface of the portion of the ball passage 2813a of the second component member 2813 that extends into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 extends rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. Protruding. The projection amount TL is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a in which the obstacle nail is implanted depends on whether the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made of plywood or cut from a resin plate. Since the portion along the surface of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2813a of the second component member 2813 cannot fit within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 There is a risk that it will protrude backwards. If the amount of protrusion of the second component member 2813 to the rear from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is large, a sufficient rear space cannot be secured. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the projection amount TL from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the portion of the ball passage 2813a in the second component member 2813 is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, space can be sufficiently secured, and a desired size of the back side effect unit 3500 (back side movable decorative body 3510) can be provided.

In the side unit 2800A, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the ball passage 2813a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 is moved by the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component member 2811 forming the general winning opening 2001. , and delivered to the ball passage 2813 a of the second component 2813 . Then, the game ball B delivered to the ball passage 2813a of the second component member 2813 first flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to fall within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the lower end of the opening 1112 In the vicinity, after flowing rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 , it flows downward along the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . After that, the game ball B is ejected downward from an exit (not shown) after being detected by the ball sensor 2813b.

According to the side unit 2800A of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

Further, according to the side unit 2800A, since the second component member 2813 provided with the ball sensor 2813b is attached to the back unit 3000 provided behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the panel plate A first component 2811 attached to 1110 does not have a ball sensor 2813b. Therefore, since the electronic parts such as the ball sensor 2813b are integrated in the back unit 3000 and the wiring from the ball sensor 2813b is not extended from the game panel 1100 side, the game panel 1100 is When assembling the rear unit 3000, the wiring from the ball sensor 2813b will not be caught by obstacle nails, etc., and cutting of the wiring due to being caught can be avoided, and the workability of the assembly work can be improved. .

Further, according to the side unit 2800A, by assembling it to the game board 5, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side.

The side unit 2800A may be provided with an independent ball passage 2813a for each ball receiving portion 2811b. 2813a may be provided to merge the game balls B entering the respective ball receiving portions 2811b.

In the above side unit 2800A, the second component member 2813 is attached to the back unit 3000, but the second component member 2813 is attached to the rear side of the first component member 2811. It is good to be able to do so.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively.

[12-2b. Modification 2 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800B having a different form from the side units 2800 and 2800A described above will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 107(a) is an explanatory view showing a vertical cross section of a side unit with a form different from the side unit shown in FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a main part in a perspective view. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800B extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. A plurality of (2 to 4) general prize winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be able to receive the prizes at all times.

The side unit 2800B includes a unit body 2810 attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail is planted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810, and the unit body 2810. and an LED board 2825 provided between the unit cover 2820 and having a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. A unit body 2810 and a unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800B are made of transparent synthetic resin.

Further, the side unit 2800B has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and not in contact with each other. ing.

The unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800B includes a first component 2811 attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail of the game panel 1100 is implanted, and a second component 2811 attached from the rear to the first component 2811. It has a second component member 2812 and a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820 . In this embodiment, the second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811 . Further, in this embodiment, the support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the second component member 2812 .

The first constituent member 2811 of the unit main body 2810 includes a flat plate-like base plate 2811a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a base plate 2811a that protrudes forward and is open upward and rearward. and a plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b forming the general prize winning opening 2001. The first component member 2811 includes a plurality of positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d passing through the base plate 2811a for mounting to the game panel 1100, a base plate 2811a has a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812 (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. A plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning projections 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper portion of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting decorative seal 2803 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 2811a and the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component member 2811. As shown in FIG.

The second component member 2812 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is placed on the surface (plate) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). a ball passage 2812a that flows down along the surface), a passage outlet (not shown) that opens toward the rear at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and a plurality of mounting holes for mounting to the first component member 2811 (illustration omitted), and an attachment hole (illustration omitted) provided on the rear surface for attaching the unit cover 2820 .

The second component member 2812 is provided on the rear side with a support frame portion 2814 whose rear end contacts the front end of the unit cover 2820 . In other words, the second component member 2812 has a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end face abuts the front end face of the unit cover 2820. . The rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 abuts on the front end surface of a peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later, by assembling the side unit 2800B. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830) of the second component member 2812 is provided above a passage outlet (not shown) that is the outlet of the ball passage 2812a. In other words, the passage outlet of the second component member 2812 is provided below the support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830).

In the unit body 2810, the second component member 2812 is positioned behind the first component member 2811, and the mounting screw is passed from the rear of the second component member 2812 through the mounting hole of the second component member 2812 to be attached to the first component member 2811. It is assembled by screwing it into the hole. As a result, a unit body 2810 is constructed in which the second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 107, the second component member 2812 of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and formed so that the depth fits within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110. It is

A unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800B is formed into a shallow container shape that opens forward, and an LED substrate 2825 is housed inside. As shown in FIG. 107, the unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-like cover portion 2820a, a frame-like peripheral wall portion 2820b projecting forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover portion 2820a, and a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b extending from the front end. and a recessed notch 2820c. A plurality of slits for ventilation may be provided in the cover portion 2820a.

The unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and penetrates through the cover portion 2820a and a plurality of boss portions 2820d for mounting the LED substrate 2825. and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) through which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

A cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is sized to cover the LED substrate 2825 from behind. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has the same outer shape as the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810 . The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b contacts the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810 by assembling the side unit 2800B. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The notch portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. By assembling the notch 2820c into the side unit 2800B, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810. FIG. That is, the notch portion 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a portion of the contact surface portion 2830 that is configured by the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. The notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-like unit cover 2820, and heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside can be radiated to the outside, so that the heat is not trapped in the unit cover 2820. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800B is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss 2820d of the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED substrate 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them in the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800B can be decorated with various emission colors.

In the side unit 2800B, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820. It can be assembled by abutting (contacting) the unit cover 2820 and screwing the mounting screw into the mounting hole of the second component member 2812 of the unit main body 2810 through the mounting hole of the unit cover 2820 from behind.

To attach the side unit 2800B to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110. Then, the base plate 2811 a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811 c of the first component member 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 . In this state, the mounting hole 2811 d of the first component member 2811 is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 .

Then, the side unit 2800B is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the attachment screws through the attachment holes 2811d of the first component member 2811 from the front into the attachment holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 and tightening them. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 is provided in the vicinity of the positioning projection 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be securely inserted into the positioning hole 1113 by strongly pressing the positioning projection 2811c toward the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning projection 2811c from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

In the side unit 2800B, the second component 2812 of the unit body 2810 is provided with a ball passage 2812a through which the game ball B flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. Since the cross section of the ball passage 2812a in the second component member 2812 is U-shaped, the rigidity of the second component member 2812 can be increased due to the presence of the ball passage 2812a. Then, the second component member 2812, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage 2812a, is added to the first component member 2811, which may have low rigidity due to the flat base plate 2811a. Since the side unit 2800B is formed by attaching from the rear side of 2811, the rigidity of the side unit 2800B can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when the side unit 2800B is pulled forward after removing the mounting screw that attaches the side unit 2800B to the panel plate 1110 in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the side unit 2800B is increased. , the side unit 2800B does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800B (first component member 2811) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800B can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be removed and that can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

When the side unit 2800B is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the second component 2812 of the unit body 2810 is positioned within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

In addition, in the side unit 2800B of the present embodiment, when assembled on the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) of the unit cover 2820 ) protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, since the cutout portions 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) are provided on the upper and lower sides, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 is discharged upward through the cutout portions 2820c on the upper side, and the outside air is released from the cutout portions 2820c on the lower side. can be taken inside. In addition, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the outer circumference of the portion of the unit main body 2810 of the side unit 2800B inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, that is, the outer circumference of the second component member 2812 and the opening 1112 A gap is provided between the inner circumference of the As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be easily released to the outside through the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), and the heat can be efficiently released.

In addition, in the side unit 2800B of the present embodiment, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (the non-contact surface 2831) when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820. FIG. In other words, in plan view, the LED substrate 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). As a result, even if dust or dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch portion 2820c, it is possible to prevent the LED board 2825 from being affected by the dust and dirt. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2820c.

In addition, since the side unit 2800B of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110. FIG.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800B is assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the second component member 2813 of the unit body 2810 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. This protrusion amount is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B similarly to the side unit 2800A of FIG.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a in which the obstacle nail is implanted depends on whether the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made of plywood or cut from a resin plate. Therefore, the portion of the ball passage 2812a of the unit main body 2810 that is along the surface of the panel plate 1110 and the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2810 may be thinner than the panel plate 1110. There is a risk that the panel plate 1110 may protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 without being completely accommodated within the plate thickness. If the side unit 2800B protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 by a large amount, a sufficient rear space cannot be secured. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the side unit 2800B, the ball passage 2813a extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. Since the amount of protrusion is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, it is possible to secure a sufficient rear space, and the desired size of the back side effect unit 3500 (back side movable decorative body 3510) can be provided. can be provided.

In the side unit 2800B, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning opening 2001, and the ball passes. After flowing down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 by 2812a, it is delivered to the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 provided behind from a passage exit (not shown). The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

Although detailed illustration of the side unit 2800B of this embodiment is omitted, the passage exit (not shown) of the second component member 2812 in the unit main body 2810 is provided below the underside movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. . In other words, the general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is provided below the movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800B, the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 and the like do not interfere with the movable decorative body 3510 under the back.

Although detailed illustration of the side unit 2800B of this embodiment is omitted, the unit main body 2810 is the same as the side unit 2800 of FIG. and a main stream portion 2802 which merges with the branch portion 2801 and extends along the surface (plate surface) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . The sphere passage 2812 a is composed of a plurality of tributary portions 2801 and a main flow portion 2802 .

According to the side unit 2800B of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

In the above-described side unit 2800B, the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with the notch portion 2820c (the non-contact surface portion 2831). A notch portion (non-contact surface portion 2831) cut forward from the rear end may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 without providing the notch portion 2820c in 2820b. Alternatively, both the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 may be provided with notches (non-contact surface portions).

In the side unit 2800B described above, the frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 protruding rearward is provided on the unit main body 2810, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the side unit 2800B is not limited to this. The front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may contact the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 without providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810, and the contact surface portion 2830 may be used as the contact surface portion. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 protruding rearward is not provided, the amount of rearward projection from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the side unit 2800B can be reduced, and the empty space behind the panel plate 1110 can be further reduced. It can be secured widely.

Furthermore, in the above-described side unit 2800B, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the LED board 2825 is mounted behind the unit main body 2810 (second component member 2812). It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800B described above, a diffusing lens portion composed of a plurality of uneven surfaces for diffusing the light from the LEDs 2825a may be provided in front of the LED substrate 2825. FIG. This diffuser lens section may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 (second component member 2812), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810. FIG.

Furthermore, in the above-described side unit 2800B, the ball passage 2812a, which is composed of a plurality of branch portions 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving portions 2811b and a main flow portion 2802 where the plurality of branch portions 2801 join, Although shown as having one, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2812a may be independent for each ball receiving portion 2811b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED substrate 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 through the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate There is a risk that the light will diffuse within 1110 and reduce the amount of light emitted forward, weakening the presentation effect of light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112. Since the light can be reflected by the inner peripheral surface of 1112, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to sufficiently exhibit the presentation effect of light emission.

[12-2c. Modification 3 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800C having a form different from that described above will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 108 and the like. FIG. 108 is an explanatory view showing a longitudinal section of a side unit having a form different from that of the side unit shown in FIG. 107 together with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800B described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800C extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. A plurality of (2 to 4) general prize winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be able to receive the prizes at all times.

The side unit 2800C includes a unit body 2810 attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail is planted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810, and the unit body 2810. and an LED board 2825 provided between the unit cover 2820 and having a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. A unit body 2810 and a unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800B are made of transparent synthetic resin.

In addition, the side unit 2800C has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and not in contact with each other. ing.

The unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800B includes a first component 2811 attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail of the game panel 1100 is implanted, and a second component 2811 attached from the rear to the first component 2811. a second component member 2812, a support frame portion 2814 projecting rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and having a rear end surface in contact with the front end surface of the unit cover 2820; It has a ball sensor 2815 (general prize winning opening sensor 3001) which is provided between the constituent member 2812 and detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001. In this embodiment, the second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811 . Further, in this embodiment, the support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the second component member 2812 .

The first constituent member 2811 of the unit main body 2810 includes a flat plate-like base plate 2811a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a base plate 2811a that protrudes forward and is open upward and rearward. and a plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b forming the general prize winning opening 2001. The first component member 2811 includes a plurality of positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d passing through the base plate 2811a for mounting to the game panel 1100, a base plate 2811a has a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812 (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. A plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning projections 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper portion of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting decorative seal 2803 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 2811a and the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component member 2811. As shown in FIG.

The second component member 2812 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is placed on the surface (plate) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). surface), a passage outlet 2812b that opens rearward at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting to the first component member 2811. ) and an attachment hole (not shown) provided on the rear surface for attaching the unit cover 2820 .

The second component member 2812 is provided on the rear side with a support frame portion 2814 whose rear end contacts the front end of the unit cover 2820 . In other words, the second component member 2812 has a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end face abuts the front end face of the unit cover 2820. . The rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 abuts on the front end surface of a peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later, by assembling the side unit 2800C. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830 ) of the second component member 2812 is provided above the passage outlet 2812 b of the ball passage 2812 a and the ball sensor 2815 . In other words, the passage outlet 2812b and the ball sensor 2815 of the second component member 2812 are provided below the support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830). As a result, the ball sensor 2815 is less likely to interfere with the lighting decoration by the LEDs 2825a of the LED substrate 2825. FIG.

In the unit body 2810, the second component member 2812 is positioned behind the first component member 2811, and the mounting screw is passed from the rear of the second component member 2812 through the mounting hole of the second component member 2812 to be attached to the first component member 2811. It is assembled by screwing it into the hole. At this time, the ball sensor 2815 is arranged and assembled at a predetermined position of the ball passage 2812 a so as to be sandwiched between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812 . As a result, a unit body 2810 is constructed in which the second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 108, the second component member 2812 of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that the depth is within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110. It is

A unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800C is formed into a shallow container shape that opens forward, and an LED substrate 2825 is accommodated therein. The unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b projecting forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. ,have. A plurality of slit holes for ventilation may be provided in the cover portion 2820a.

The unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and penetrates through the cover portion 2820a and a plurality of boss portions 2820d for mounting the LED substrate 2825. and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) through which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

A cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is sized to cover the LED substrate 2825 from behind. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has the same outer shape as the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810 . The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b contacts the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810 by assembling the side unit 2800C. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The notch portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. The cutout portion 2820c can form a gap between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810 by assembling the side unit 2800C. That is, the notch portion 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a portion of the contact surface portion 2830 that is configured by the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. The notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-like unit cover 2820, and heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside can be radiated to the outside, so that the heat is not trapped in the unit cover 2820. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800C is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820 . A plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them into the side unit 2800C, the side unit 2800C can be decorated with various emission colors.

In the side unit 2800C, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820. It can be assembled by abutting (contacting) the unit cover 2820 and screwing the mounting screw into the mounting hole of the second component member 2812 of the unit main body 2810 through the mounting hole of the unit cover 2820 from behind.

To attach the side unit 2800C to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110. Then, the base plate 2811 a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811 c of the first component member 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 . In this state, the mounting hole 2811 d of the first component member 2811 is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 .

Then, the side unit 2800C is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 and tightening. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 is provided in the vicinity of the positioning projection 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be securely inserted into the positioning hole 1113 by strongly pressing the positioning projection 2811c toward the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning projection 2811c from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

In the side unit 2800C, the second component 2812 of the unit main body 2810 is provided with a ball passage 2812a through which the game ball B flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. Since the cross section of the ball passage 2812a in the second component member 2812 is U-shaped, the rigidity of the second component member 2812 can be increased due to the presence of the ball passage 2812a. Then, the second component member 2812, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage 2812a, is added to the first component member 2811, which may have low rigidity due to the flat base plate 2811a. Since the side unit 2800C is formed by attaching from the rear side of 2811, the rigidity of the side unit 2800C can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800C to the panel plate 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800C is pulled forward in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the side unit 2800C is increased. , the side unit 2800C does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800C (first component member 2811) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800C can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be removed and that can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

When the side unit 2800C is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the second component 2812 and the ball sensor 2815 of the unit main body 2810 are positioned within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It is positioned within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 and is positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

In addition, in the side unit 2800C of the present embodiment, when assembled on the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 (non-contact surface portion 2831 ) protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, since the cutout portions 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) are provided on the upper and lower sides, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 is discharged upward through the cutout portions 2820c on the upper side, and the outside air is released from the cutout portions 2820c on the lower side. can be taken inside. In addition, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the outer periphery of the portion inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800C, that is, the outer periphery of the second component member 2812 and the opening 1112 A gap is provided between the inner circumference of the As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be easily released to the outside through the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), and the heat can be efficiently released.

In addition, in the side unit 2800C of the present embodiment, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface 2831) when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820. FIG. In other words, in plan view, the LED substrate 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). As a result, even if dust or dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch portion 2820c, it is possible to prevent the LED board 2825 from being affected by the dust and dirt. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2820c.

Further, the side unit 2800C of the present embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, and the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110. FIG.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800C is assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the second component member 2813 of the unit body 2810 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. This protrusion amount is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B similarly to the side unit 2800A of FIG.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a in which the obstacle nail is implanted depends on whether the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made of plywood or cut from a resin plate. Therefore, the portion of the ball passage 2812a of the unit main body 2810 that is along the surface of the panel plate 1110 and the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2810 may be thinner than the panel plate 1110. There is a risk that the panel plate 1110 may protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 without being completely accommodated within the plate thickness. If the amount of protrusion of the side unit 2800C to the rear from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is large, a sufficient rear space cannot be secured. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the side unit 2800C, the ball passage 2813a extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. Since the amount of protrusion is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, it is possible to secure a sufficient rear space, and the desired size of the back side effect unit 3500 (back side movable decorative body 3510) can be provided. can be provided.

In the side unit 2800C, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning opening 2001, and the ball passage By 2812a, it flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, is detected by the ball sensor 2815, and is discharged from the passage outlet 2812b that opens toward the rear.

In the side unit 2800C of this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the passage outlet 2812b of the second component member 2812 in the unit main body 2810 is provided below the back lower movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. In addition, the ball sensor 2815 (general prize winning opening sensor 3001) for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is located within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 and the panel plate It is provided within the plate thickness of 1110. Therefore, the side unit 2800C, the ball sensor 2815, and the like do not interfere with the underside movable decorative body 3510. FIG.

Although detailed illustration of the side unit 2800C of this embodiment is omitted, the unit body 2810 is the same as the side unit 2800 of FIG. and a main stream portion 2802 which merges with the branch portion 2801 and extends along the surface (plate surface) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . The sphere passage 2812 a is composed of a plurality of tributary portions 2801 and a main flow portion 2802 .

According to the side unit 2800C of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

In the side unit 2800C described above, the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with the notch portion 2820c (the non-contact surface portion 2831). A notch portion (non-contact surface portion 2831) cut forward from the rear end may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 without providing the notch portion 2820c in 2820b. Alternatively, both the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 may be provided with notches (non-contact surface portions).

In the side unit 2800C described above, the unit main body 2810 is provided with the frame-like support frame portion 2814 projecting rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the side unit 2800C is not limited to this. The front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may contact the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 without providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810, and the contact surface portion 2830 may be used as the contact surface portion. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward is not provided, the amount of rearward projection from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the side unit 2800C can be reduced, and the empty space behind the panel plate 1110 can be further reduced. It can be secured widely.

Furthermore, in the above-described side unit 2800C, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but this is not a limitation, and the LED board 2825 is mounted behind the unit main body 2810 (second component member 2812). It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800C described above, a diffusing lens portion composed of a plurality of uneven surfaces for diffusing the light from the LEDs 2825a may be provided in front of the LED substrate 2825. FIG. This diffuser lens section may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 (second component member 2812), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810. FIG.

Furthermore, in the above-described side unit 2800C, the ball passage 2812a, which is composed of a plurality of branch portions 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving portions 2811b and a main flow portion 2802 where the plurality of branch portions 2801 join, Although shown as having one, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2812a may be independent for each ball receiving portion 2811b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED substrate 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 through the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate There is a risk that the light will diffuse within 1110 and reduce the amount of light emitted forward, weakening the presentation effect of light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112. Since the light can be reflected by the inner peripheral surface of 1112, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to sufficiently exhibit the presentation effect of light emission.

[12-2d. Modified example 4 of the side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800D having a form different from that described above will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 109 and the like. FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing a longitudinal section of a side unit with a different form together with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800, the side unit 2800B, and the side unit 2800C are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800D extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. A plurality of (2 to 4) general prize winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be able to receive the prizes at all times.

The side unit 2800D consists of a unit body 2810A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail is implanted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810A, and a unit body 2810A. and an LED board 2825 provided between the unit cover 2820 and having a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. A unit main body 2810A and a unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800D are made of transparent synthetic resin.

The side unit 2800D also has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and not in contact with each other. ing.

The unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800D includes a first component 2811A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstacle nail of the game panel 1100 is implanted, and a second component 2811A attached from the rear to the first component 2811A. and a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820 . In this embodiment, the second component 2812A is attached to the front side of the first component 2811A. A support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the first component member 2811A.

A first constituent member 2811A of the unit main body 2810A includes a flat base plate 2811a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a ball that passes through the base plate 2811a and allows the game ball B to circulate. and a passage 2811e. The upstream end of the ball passage 2811e of the first component member 2811A is located behind the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component member 2812A, which will be described later.

The first component member 2811A includes a plurality of positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the game panel 1100, and a base plate 2811a. 2811a and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812A, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear surface for mounting the unit cover 2820. , (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. A plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning projections 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper portion of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A support frame portion 2814 whose rear end contacts the front end of the unit cover 2820 is provided on the rear side of the first component member 2811A. In other words, the first component member 2811A has a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. . The support frame portion 2814 is provided at a portion below the ball passage 2811e on the rear surface of the base plate 2811a. The rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 abuts on the front end surface of a peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later, by assembling the side unit 2800D. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The second component member 2812A extends short in the front-rear direction and is open at the top and rear to form the general prize winning opening 2001. The plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c and the front ends of the plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c are connected to each other. It has a connecting flat front plate 2812d and a plurality of attachment holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component member 2811A. The ball receiving portion 2812c is located in front of the ball passage 2811e of the first component member 2811A.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the front plate 2812d of the second component member 2812A.

In the unit body 2810A, the second component member 2812A is positioned in front of the first component member 2811A, and the mounting screw is screwed into the mounting hole of the second component member 2812A from behind through the mounting hole of the first component member 2811A. Assembled. As a result, a unit main body 2810A is constructed in which the second component 2812A is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear side. In this unit main body 2810A, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component member 2812A protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A.

As shown in FIG. 109, the first constituent member 2811A of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and formed so that the depth fits within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110. It is

A unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800D is formed into a shallow container shape that opens forward, and an LED substrate 2825 is housed inside. The unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b projecting forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. ,have. A plurality of slit holes for ventilation may be provided in the cover portion 2820a.

Further, the unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and penetrates through the cover portion 2820a and a plurality of boss portions 2820d for attaching the LED substrate 2825 to the unit body 2810A. and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) through which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

A cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is sized to cover the LED substrate 2825 from behind. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has the same outer shape as the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b contacts the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A by assembling the side unit 2800D. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The notch portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. By assembling the cutout portion 2820c to the side unit 2800D, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. That is, the notch portion 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a portion of the contact surface portion 2830 that is configured by the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. The notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-like unit cover 2820, and heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside can be radiated to the outside, so that the heat is not trapped in the unit cover 2820. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800D is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss 2820d of the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED substrate 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling the side unit 2800D, the side unit 2800D can be decorated with various emission colors.

In the side unit 2800D, with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A. It can be assembled by abutting (contacting) the unit cover 2820 and screwing the mounting screws from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting holes of the unit cover 2820 into the mounting holes of the first component member 2811A of the unit main body 2810A.

To attach the side unit 2800D to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110. Then, the base plate 2811 a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component member 2811A are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811A is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG.

Then, the side unit 2800D is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screws into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the mounting holes 2811d of the first component member 2811A. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811A is provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be securely inserted into the positioning hole 1113 by strongly pressing the positioning projection 2811c toward the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning projection 2811c from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

In the side unit 2800D, by assembling it to the unit main body 2810A, the plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c of the second component member 2812A are arranged so that the front end side and the rear end side thereof are aligned with the front plate 2812d of the second component member 2812A and the first Since it has a structure sandwiched between the base plate 2811a of the component 2811A, it is possible to increase the rigidity as compared with the conventional side unit. Therefore, in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the attachment screws attaching the side unit 2800D to the panel plate 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800D is pulled forward, the rigidity of the side unit 2800D is increased. , the side unit 2800D does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800D (first component member 2811A) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800D can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be removed and that can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

When the side unit 2800D is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the ball passage 2811e and the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) of the first component member 2811A in the unit main body 2810A are connected to the panel plate. It is positioned within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and is positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . As a result, since the LED board 2825 is provided within the board thickness of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the inside of the board thickness of the panel board 1110 is effectively used. empty space can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a part of the performance device in the empty space, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a higher appeal to the players.

In addition, in the side unit 2800D of the present embodiment, since the cutouts 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) of the unit cover 2820 are provided at the top and bottom, heat from the LED substrate 2825 is discharged upward by the cutouts 2820c on the upper side. , external air can be taken into the interior from the lower notch 2820c. In addition, when assembled on the game board 5, there is a gap between the outer circumference of the portion of the unit main body 2810 of the side unit 2800D inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and the inner circumference of the opening 1112. is provided. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be easily released to the outside through the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), and the heat can be efficiently released.

In addition, in the side unit 2800D of the present embodiment, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface 2831) when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. In other words, in plan view, the LED substrate 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). As a result, even if dust or dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch portion 2820c, it is possible to prevent the LED board 2825 from being affected by the dust and dirt. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800D of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 is positioned within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and within the thickness of the panel plate 1110. , it is difficult for dust and dirt to enter the unit cover 2820 from above through the notch 2820c.

In addition, when the side unit 2800D of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, a gap is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 from the front. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 in the unit cover 2820 can be dissipated toward the rear of the panel plate 1110 through the gap between the notch 2820c and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the panel plate It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110. FIG.

In the side unit 2800D, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second constituent member 2812A forming the general winning opening 2001 moves the ball to the ball passage 2811e of the rear first constituent member 2811A. After being guided and circulated rearward within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 by the ball passage 2811e, the ball is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind the panel plate 1110 (game panel 1100). The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

According to the side unit 2800D of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the side unit 2800 and the like.

In the above-described side unit 2800D, the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with the notch portion 2820c (the non-contact surface portion 2831), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the peripheral wall portion of the unit cover 2820 A notch portion (non-contact surface portion 2831) cut forward from the rear end may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A without providing the notch portion 2820c in 2820b. Alternatively, both the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A may be provided with notches (non-contact surface portions).

In the side unit 2800D described above, the unit body 2810A is provided with a frame-like support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the side unit 2800D is not limited to this. The front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may contact the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A without providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810A, and the contact surface portion 2830 may be used as the contact surface portion. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 protruding backward is not provided, the LED board 2825 can be positioned further forward, and a brighter light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) can be presented to the player.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800D described above, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the LED board 2825 is mounted behind the unit main body 2810A (first component member 2811A). It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800D described above, a diffusing lens section composed of a plurality of uneven surfaces for diffusing the light from the LEDs 2825a may be provided in front of the LED substrate 2825. FIG. This diffuser lens portion may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A (the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810A.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED substrate 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 through the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate There is a risk that the light will diffuse within 1110 and reduce the amount of light emitted forward, weakening the presentation effect of light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112. Since the light can be reflected by the inner peripheral surface of 1112, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to sufficiently exhibit the presentation effect of light emission.

[12-2e. Modified example 5 of the side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800E having a form different from that described above will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 110 and the like. FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram showing a longitudinal section of a side unit with a different form together with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800D described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800E extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. A plurality of (2 to 4) general prize winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be able to receive the prizes at all times.

The side unit 2800E consists of a unit body 2810A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which obstacle nails are implanted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810A, and a unit body 2810A. and an LED board 2825 provided between the unit cover 2820 and having a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. A unit main body 2810A and a unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800E are made of transparent synthetic resin.

Further, the side unit 2800E has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and not in contact with each other. ing.

The unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800E includes a first component 2811A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail of the game panel 1100 is implanted, and a second component 2811A attached from the rear to the first component 2811A. and a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820 . In this embodiment, the second component 2812A is attached to the front side of the first component 2811A. A support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the first component member 2811A.

A first constituent member 2811A of the unit main body 2810A includes a flat plate-like base plate 2811a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the base plate 2811a that penetrates and opens forward to serve as a general winning opening. 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c), a ball path 2811e that causes the game ball B received in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) to flow down along the surface (plate surface), and an open passageway outlet (not shown).

The first component member 2811A includes a plurality of positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the game panel 1100, and a base plate 2811a. 2811a and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812A, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear surface for mounting the unit cover 2820. , (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. A plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning projections 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper portion of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A support frame portion 2814 whose rear end contacts the front end of the unit cover 2820 is provided on the rear side of the first component member 2811A. In other words, the first component member 2811A has a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. . The support frame portion 2814 is provided on the rear surface of the base plate 2811a. The rear end face of the support frame portion 2814 abuts on the front end face of a peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later, by assembling the side unit 2800E. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The second component member 2812A has a plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c that extend short in the front-rear direction and are open at the top and rear to form the general winning opening 2001, and the rear ends of the plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c. and a plurality of attachment holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component member 2811A.

In this embodiment, a transparent decorative seal 2803 is attached to the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2812c and the front surface of the rear plate 2812e of the second component member 2812A.

In the unit body 2810A, the second component member 2812A is positioned in front of the first component member 2811A, and the mounting screw is screwed into the mounting hole of the second component member 2812A from behind through the mounting hole of the first component member 2811A. Assembled. As a result, a unit main body 2810A is constructed in which the second component 2812A is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear side. In this unit main body 2810A, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component member 2812A protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A.

A unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800E includes a branch portion 2801 communicating with the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c), and a surface (plate surface) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, which joins the branch portion 2801. and a main stream portion 2802 extending along. The sphere passage 2811 e is composed of a plurality of tributary portions 2801 and a main flow portion 2802 .

The branch portion 2801 extends rearward from a portion forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 to a portion behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and above the main flow portion 2802 (thickness of the panel plate 1110). .

The main stream portion 2802 extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from near the left end of the base plate 2811a to near the right end so as to be lower rightward. The length of the main flow portion 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B (8 to 10 times in this embodiment).

In addition, in the state assembled to the unit main body 2810A, in the forwardly open ball passage 2811e of the first component member 2811A, the portion other than the rear of the ball receiving portion 2812c is covered by the rear plate 2812e of the second component member 2812A. It will be in a closed state, and the game ball B will not drop forward from the ball passage 2811e. That is, the first component member 2811A and the second component member 2812A constitute the ball passage 2811e. In other words, a ball passage 2811e is provided between the first component 2811A and the second component 2812A.

As shown in FIG. 110, the first component member 2811A of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 except for the base plate 2811a, and the depth of the panel plate 1110 is the same as that of the panel plate 1110. It is formed to fit within the plate thickness of

A unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800E is formed into a shallow container shape that opens forward, and an LED substrate 2825 is housed therein. The unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b projecting forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. ,have. A plurality of slit holes for ventilation may be provided in the cover portion 2820a.

Further, the unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and penetrates through the cover portion 2820a and a plurality of boss portions 2820d for attaching the LED substrate 2825 to the unit body 2810A. and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) through which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

A cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is sized to cover the LED substrate 2825 from behind. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has the same outer shape as the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b contacts the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A by assembling the side unit 2800E. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The notch portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. By assembling the cutout portion 2820c to the side unit 2800D, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. That is, the notch portion 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a portion of the contact surface portion 2830 that is configured by the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. The notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-like unit cover 2820, and heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside can be radiated to the outside, so that the heat is not trapped in the unit cover 2820. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800E is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss 2820d of the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED substrate 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them into the side unit 2800E, the side unit 2800E can be decorated with various emission colors.

In the side unit 2800E, with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A. It can be assembled by abutting (contacting) the unit cover 2820 and screwing the mounting screws from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting holes of the unit cover 2820 into the mounting holes of the first component member 2811A of the unit main body 2810A.

To attach the side unit 2800E to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110. Then, the base plate 2811 a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component member 2811A are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811A is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG.

Then, the side unit 2800E is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screws into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the mounting holes 2811d of the first component 2811A. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811A is provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be securely inserted into the positioning hole 1113 by strongly pressing the positioning projection 2811c toward the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning projection 2811c from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

In the side unit 2800E, the first component member 2811A is provided with a ball passage 2811e that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110, and the cross section of the portion of the ball passage 2811e is U-shaped. Therefore, the presence of the ball passage 2811e increases the rigidity of the first component member 2811A. On the other hand, the second component member 2812A has a form in which a plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c protrude forward from a flat plate-shaped rear plate 2812e. By assembling the unit main body 2810A, the first component member 2811A having increased rigidity can increase the rigidity more than the conventional side unit. Therefore, when the side unit 2800E is pulled forward after removing the mounting screw that attaches the side unit 2800E to the panel plate 1110 in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the side unit 2800E is increased. , the side unit 2800E does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800E (first component member 2811A) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800E can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be removed and that can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

When the side unit 2800E is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the first component 2811A of the unit body 2810A is positioned within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Also, in the side unit 2800E of the present embodiment, the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 when assembled on the game board 5 . At this time, since the cutout portions 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) are provided on the upper and lower sides, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 is discharged upward through the cutout portions 2820c on the upper side, and the outside air is released from the cutout portions 2820c on the lower side. can be taken inside. Also, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the outer circumference of the portion of the unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800E inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, that is, the outer circumference of the ball passage 2811e in the first component member 2811A. , and the inner periphery of the opening 1112, a gap is provided. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be easily released to the outside through the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), and the heat can be efficiently released.

Also, in the side unit 2800E of the present embodiment, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (the non-contact surface 2831) when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820. FIG. In other words, in plan view, the LED substrate 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). As a result, even if dust or dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch portion 2820c, it is possible to prevent the LED board 2825 from being affected by the dust and dirt. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800E of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 is positioned within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and within the thickness of the panel plate 1110. , it is difficult for dust and dirt to enter the unit cover 2820 from above through the notch 2820c.

In addition, when the side unit 2800E of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, a gap is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 from the front. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 in the unit cover 2820 can be dissipated toward the rear of the panel plate 1110 through the gap between the notch 2820c and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the panel plate It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110. FIG.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800E assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. protrudes forward beyond the front of the Here, the ball passage 2811e protrudes forward by the thickness of the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A. As a result, the amount of protrusion of the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 can be further reduced, so that a sufficient space behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) can be secured. It is possible to provide a back side effect unit 3500 (back side movable decorative body 3510) of a desired size.

In addition, the amount of protrusion from the panel plate 1110 to the rear is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B similarly to the side unit 2800A of FIG.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a in which the obstacle nail is implanted depends on whether the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made of plywood or cut from a resin plate. Therefore, the part along the surface of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2811e of the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2810A do not have the thickness of the panel plate 1110. There is a risk that the panel plate 1110 may protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 without being completely accommodated within the plate thickness. If the amount of protrusion of the side unit 2800E to the rear from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is large, a sufficient rear space cannot be secured. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the side unit 2800E, the amount of protrusion from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, so that a sufficient rear space can be secured. can be provided, and a desired size of the back side effect unit 3500 (the back side movable decorative body 3510) can be provided.

In the side unit 2800E, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided to the rear ball passage 2811e by the ball receiving portion 2812c forming the general winning opening 2001, and the board of the panel plate 1110 is guided by the ball passage 2811e. After flowing down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 while being applied within the thickness, it is delivered to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind from a passage exit (not shown). The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

In the side unit 2800E of this embodiment, detailed illustration is omitted, but the passage exit (not shown) of the first component member 2811A in the unit main body 2810A is provided below the underside movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. . In other words, the general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) is provided below the movable ornament 3510 at the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800E, the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 and the like do not interfere with the movable decorative body 3510 under the back.

According to the side unit 2800E of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the side unit 2800 and the like.

In the above-described side unit 2800E, the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with the notch portion 2820c (the non-contact surface portion 2831), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the peripheral wall portion of the unit cover 2820 A notch portion (non-contact surface portion 2831) cut forward from the rear end may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A without providing the notch portion 2820c in 2820b. Alternatively, both the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A may be provided with notches (non-contact surface portions).

In the side unit 2800E described above, the frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 projecting rearward is provided on the unit main body 2810A, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the side unit 2800E is not limited to this. The front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may contact the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A without providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810A, and the contact surface portion 2830 may be used as the contact surface portion. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward is not provided, the amount of rearward projection of the side unit 2800E from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 can be reduced, and the empty space behind the panel plate 1110 can be further reduced. It can be secured widely.

Furthermore, in the above-described side unit 2800E, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but this is not a limitation, and the LED board 2825 is mounted behind the unit main body 2810A (first component member 2811A). It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800E described above, a diffusing lens portion composed of a plurality of uneven surfaces for diffusing the light from the LEDs 2825a may be provided in front of the LED substrate 2825. FIG. This diffuser lens portion may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A (the first component member 2811A), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810A.

Further, in the above-described side unit 2800E, the ball passage 2811e, which is composed of a plurality of branch portions 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving portions 2812c and a main flow portion 2802 where the plurality of branch portions 2801 join, Although shown as having one, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2811e may be independent for each ball receiving portion 2812c.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED substrate 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 through the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate There is a risk that the light will diffuse within 1110 and reduce the amount of light emitted forward, weakening the presentation effect of light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112. Since the light can be reflected by the inner peripheral surface of 1112, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to sufficiently exhibit the presentation effect of light emission.

[12-2f. Modified example 6 of the side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800F having a form different from that described above will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 111 and the like. FIG. 111(a) is an explanatory view showing a side unit of a different form together with the game panel in cross section, and FIG. 111(b) is an explanatory view showing (a) in longitudinal section. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800D described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800F extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. A plurality of (2 to 4) general prize winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be able to receive the prizes at all times.

The side unit 2800F consists of a unit body 2810A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which obstacle nails are implanted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810A, and a unit body 2810A. and an LED board 2825 provided between the unit cover 2820 and having a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. A unit main body 2810A and a unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800F are made of transparent synthetic resin.

Further, the side unit 2800F has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and not in contact with each other. ing.

The unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800F includes a first component 2811A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail of the game panel 1100 is implanted, and a second component 2811A attached from the rear to the first component 2811A. and a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820 . In this embodiment, the second component 2812A is attached to the front side of the first component 2811A. A support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the first component member 2811A.

A first constituent member 2811A of the unit main body 2810A includes a flat plate-like base plate 2811a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the base plate 2811a that penetrates and opens forward to serve as a general winning opening. 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c), a ball path 2811e that causes the game ball B received in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) to flow down along the surface (plate surface), and an open passageway outlet (not shown).

The first component member 2811A includes a plurality of positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the game panel 1100, and a base plate 2811a. 2811a and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812A, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear surface for mounting the unit cover 2820. , (see FIG. 104).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. Also, in the side unit 2800F, the ball passage 2811e of the first component member 2811A is provided below the center of the base plate 2811a in the vertical direction.

A plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning projections 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper portion of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A support frame portion 2814 whose rear end contacts the front end of the unit cover 2820 is provided on the rear side of the first component member 2811A. In other words, the first component member 2811A has a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. . The support frame portion 2814 is provided on the rear surface of the base plate 2811a above the ball passage 2811e. The rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 abuts on the front end surface of a peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later, when assembled to the side unit 2800F. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The second component member 2812A extends short in the front-rear direction and is open at the top and bottom, and connects the front ends of the plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c forming the general winning opening 2001 and the front ends of the plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c. A flat plate-like front plate 2812d connected to the front plate 2812d and a ball provided below the ball receiving portion 2812c behind the front plate 2812d and opened rearward, through which the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 2812c circulates. It has a passage 2812f and a plurality of attachment holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component 2811A.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting decorative sticker 2803 is attached to the front surface of the front plate 2812d of the second component member 2812A.

In the unit body 2810A, the second component member 2812A is positioned in front of the first component member 2811A, and the mounting screw is screwed into the mounting hole of the second component member 2812A from behind through the mounting hole of the first component member 2811A. Assembled. As a result, a unit main body 2810A is constructed in which the second component 2812A is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear side. In this unit main body 2810A, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component member 2812A protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A.

The unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800F joins the tributary portion 2801 (portion shown by light hatching in FIG. 111) communicating with the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) and the tributary portion 2801 to form a game panel. and a main stream portion 2802 (a portion shown by dark shading in FIG. 111) extending along the surface (plate surface) of the panel plate 1110 in 1100 . The sphere passage 2811e and the sphere passage 2812f are composed of a plurality of branch flow portions 2801 and a main flow portion 2802. As shown in FIG.

The branch portion 2801 extends forward and downward from the panel plate 1110 at the ball receiving portion 2812c at the center in the left-right direction and the ball receiving portion 2812c at the left end thereof when viewed from the front. It extends rearward from a portion forward of the plate 1110 to a portion within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 .

The main flow portion 2802 extends from a portion below the ball receiving portion 2812c at the left end to a portion below the center ball receiving portion 2812c in the left-right direction in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. , bends backward at a portion below the ball receiving portion 2812c in the center in the left-right direction, and after extending into the thickness of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 It extends along the plate surface of 1110 to a portion behind the ball receiving portion 2812c on the right end. The length of the main flow portion 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B (8 to 15 times in this embodiment).

When assembled into the unit main body 2810A, the forwardly open ball passage 2811e in the first component member 2811A is closed by the ball passage 2812f and the rear surface of the second component member 2812A. Also, the ball passage 2812f that is open rearward in the second component member 2812A is closed by the base plate 2811a and the ball passage 2811e of the first component member 2811A. As a result, the game ball B does not fall out of the ball passage 2811e and the ball passage 2812f. That is, the first component member 2811A and the second component member 2812A constitute the ball passage 2811e and the ball passage 2812f. In other words, a ball passage 2811e and a ball passage 2812f are provided between the first component 2811A and the second component 2812A.

As shown in FIG. 111, the first structural member 2811A of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 except for the base plate 2811a, and the depth of the panel plate 1110 is the same as that of the panel plate 1110. It is formed to fit within the plate thickness of

A unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800F is formed into a shallow container shape that opens forward, and an LED substrate 2825 is accommodated therein. The unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b projecting forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. ,have. A plurality of slit holes for ventilation may be provided in the cover portion 2820a.

Further, the unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and penetrates through the cover portion 2820a and a plurality of boss portions 2820d for attaching the LED substrate 2825 to the unit body 2810A. and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) through which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

A cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is sized to cover the LED substrate 2825 from behind. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has the same outer shape as the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b contacts the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A by assembling the side unit 2800F. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The notch portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. By assembling the cutout portion 2820c to the side unit 2800D, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. That is, the notch portion 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a portion of the contact surface portion 2830 that is configured by the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. The notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-like unit cover 2820, and heat from the LED board 2825 attached inside can be radiated to the outside, so that the heat is not trapped in the unit cover 2820. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800F is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss 2820d of the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling the side unit 2800F, the side unit 2800F can be decorated with various emission colors.

In the side unit 2800F, the LED board 2825 is attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A. It can be assembled by abutting (contacting) the unit cover 2820 and screwing the mounting screws from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting holes of the unit cover 2820 into the mounting holes of the first component member 2811A of the unit main body 2810A.

To attach the side unit 2800F to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110. Then, the base plate 2811 a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811c of the first component member 2811A are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811A is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG.

The side unit 2800F is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screws into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the mounting holes 2811d of the first component member 2811A. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811A is provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be securely inserted into the positioning hole 1113 by strongly pressing the positioning projection 2811c toward the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning projection 2811c from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

In the side unit 2800F, the first component member 2811A is provided with a ball passage 2811e that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110, and the cross section of the portion of the ball passage 2811e is U-shaped. Therefore, the presence of the ball passage 2811e increases the rigidity of the first component member 2811A. On the other hand, the second component member 2812A is also provided with a ball passage 2812f that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110. Since the cross section of the ball passage 2812f is U-shaped, The presence of the ball passage 2812f increases the rigidity of the second component 2812A. Since the side unit 2800F is constructed by combining the first component member 2811A and the second component member 2812A with increased rigidity, the rigidity can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when the side unit 2800F is pulled forward after removing the mounting screw that attaches the side unit 2800F to the panel plate 1110 in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the side unit 2800F is increased. , the side unit 2800F does not bend. For this reason, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800F (first component member 2811A) is not tilted with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is moved from the side unit 2800F. can be easily removed, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the disassembly work for sorting can be provided.

When the side unit 2800F is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the ball passage 2811e and the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) of the first component member 2811A in the unit main body 2810A are connected to the panel plate. It is positioned within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and is positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . In other words, when assembled on the game board 5, the side unit 2800 does not protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and a wide space behind the panel plate 1110 can be secured.

In addition, in the side unit 2800F of the present embodiment, the cutouts 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) of the unit cover 2820 are provided at the top and bottom. , external air can be taken into the interior from the lower notch 2820c. In addition, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the outer circumference of the portion of the unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800F inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, that is, the outer circumference of the support frame portion 2814 of the first component member 2811A and the inner periphery of the opening 1112, a gap is provided. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be easily released to the outside through the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), and the heat can be efficiently released.

In addition, in the side unit 2800F of the present embodiment, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface 2831) when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820. FIG. In other words, in plan view, the LED substrate 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). As a result, even if dust or dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch portion 2820c, it is possible to prevent the LED board 2825 from being affected by the dust and dirt. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800F of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 is positioned within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and within the thickness of the panel plate 1110. , it is difficult for dust and dirt to enter the unit cover 2820 from above through the notch 2820c.

In addition, when the side unit 2800F of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, a gap is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 from the front. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 in the unit cover 2820 can be dissipated toward the rear of the panel plate 1110 through the gap between the notch 2820c and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the panel plate It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110. FIG.

Furthermore, the side unit 2800F is assembled to the game board 5, and as shown in FIG. A passage 2812f is provided forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁As a result, the unit cover 2820 (LED substrate 2825) provided on the rear side of the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A can be accommodated within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It is possible to prevent it from protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . Therefore, a sufficient space behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in the side unit 2800F can be secured, and the desired size of the lower back effect unit 3500 (lower back movable decorative body 3510) can be provided. .

In the side unit 2800F, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the ball receiving portion 2812c forming the general winning opening 2001 flows downward into the ball passage 2812f, and the ball passage 2812f passes through the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Anteriorly, it flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110, bends backward in the middle in a crank shape, flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and then flows down a passage (not shown) The ball is transferred from the exit to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 . On the other hand, when the game ball B flowing down toward the side unit 2800F is not received by the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) of the side unit 2800F, the game ball B is transferred to the base plate 2811a and the front plate 2812d. It flows down to the out port 1008 through the space between and is discharged rearward and downward of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 .

In the side unit 2800F of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111(b), the passage exit (not shown) of the first component member 2811A in the unit main body 2810A is provided below the underside movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. ing. In other words, the general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) is provided below the movable ornament 3510 at the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800F, the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 and the like do not interfere with the movable decorative body 3510 under the back.

According to the side unit 2800F of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the side unit 2800 and the like.

In the above-described side unit 2800F, the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with the notch portion 2820c (the non-contact surface portion 2831). A notch portion (non-contact surface portion 2831) cut forward from the rear end may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A without providing the notch portion 2820c in 2820b. Alternatively, both the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A may be provided with notches (non-contact surface portions).

In addition, in the side unit 2800F described above, the unit body 2810A is provided with the frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 projecting rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the side unit 2800F is not limited to this. The front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may contact the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A without providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810A, and the contact surface portion 2830 may be used as the contact surface portion. Since the support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward is not provided, the amount of rearward projection of the side unit 2800F can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the above-described side unit 2800F, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but this is not a limitation, and the LED board 2825 is mounted behind the unit main body 2810A (first component member 2811A). It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800F described above, a diffusing lens portion composed of a plurality of uneven surfaces for diffusing the light from the LEDs 2825a may be provided in front of the LED substrate 2825. FIG. This diffuser lens portion may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A (the first component member 2811A), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810A.

Furthermore, in the above-described side unit 2800F, the ball passage 2811e, which is composed of a plurality of branch portions 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving portions 2812c and a main flow portion 2802 where the plurality of branch portions 2801 join, Although shown as having one, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2811e may be independent for each ball receiving portion 2812c.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED substrate 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 through the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate There is a risk that the light will diffuse within 1110 and reduce the amount of light emitted forward, weakening the presentation effect of light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112. Since the light can be reflected by the inner peripheral surface of 1112, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to sufficiently exhibit the presentation effect of light emission.

[12-3. Side unit, etc. of the third embodiment]
Next, the side unit 2800G of the third embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 114 and the like. FIG. 112(a) is a front view showing a main part of a game board provided with a side unit, etc. of the third embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of an out port in (a). , and (c) is an explanatory view showing (b) in a longitudinal section. FIG. 113(a) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged view of an out port of a game board provided with a side unit or the like having a finger hook portion of a form different from that of FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical cross section of FIG. FIG. 114 is an explanatory view schematically showing the panel plate of the game panel in which the opening to which the side unit is attached and the out port are continuously connected. Here, the same components as those described above are assigned the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800G of the third embodiment extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. It is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) from the front. The side unit 2800G is provided with three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times.

In this embodiment, the game panel 1100 has an opening region 1101 penetrating the panel plate 1110 through which the game ball B can flow from the front side to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 . This opening area 1101 consists of a normal opening area 1102 through which game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2800G can circulate, and a specific opening area through which game balls B not received in the general winning opening 2001 can circulate. 1103 and . The normal opening area 1102 is the opening 1112 at the site where the side unit 2800G is attached, and the specific opening area 1103 is the out port 1008. As shown in FIG. This out port 1008 is formed in the shape of a notch that opens downward in the panel plate 1110 .

In the embodiment of FIG. 112 and FIG. 113, which will be described later, the normal opening region 1102 and the specific opening region 1103, which constitute the opening region 1101, are independent without being connected to each other. That is, the specific opening area 1103 is formed on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 separately from the normal opening area 1102 . In other words, the out port 1008 is constituted by a specific opening area 1103 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, separate from the normal opening area 1102 to which the side unit 2800G is fitted. As a result, in the panel plate 1110, it is possible to reduce the width of the portion of the panel plate 1110 that is notched outward from the outer peripheral surface. can be suppressed.

The side unit 2800G has a finger hook portion 2816 that partially overlaps the outer edge of the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103) penetrating the panel plate 1110 when attached to the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. In other words, the side unit 2800G is attached to the panel plate 1110 so that part of the outer edge overlaps with the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103).

Since the side unit 2800G is provided with the finger hooking portion 2816, when the pachinko machine 1 is disassembled for recycling or the like, a finger or a finger can be placed in the out port 1008 after the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800G to the panel plate 1110 are removed. By inserting a tool or the like, a finger or the like can be hooked on the finger hook portion 2816 to pull the side unit 2800G forward. As a result, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced.

To further explain the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, the side unit 2800G, like the side unit 2800 shown in FIG. It is composed of a first component member 2811 to be attached and a second component member 2812 attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side. A side unit 2800 of this embodiment has a second component member 2812 attached to the rear side of a first component member 2811 .

The first constituent member 2811 of the side unit 2800G includes a flat base plate 2811a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a base plate 2811a that protrudes forward and is open upward and rearward. and a plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b forming the general prize winning opening 2001.

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 112, the right end of the base plate 2811a of the present embodiment extends further to the right than the ball receiving portion 2811b at the right end so as to approach the starting port unit 2100. As shown in FIG. The base plate 2811a is provided so that a part of the outer edge overlaps with the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103). In other words, when attached to the panel plate 1110, a portion of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a is formed to protrude forward of the out port 1008 so as to overlap the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103) in a front view. ing. In this embodiment, the portion of the base plate 2811a that protrudes forward of the out port 1008 is the finger hook portion 2816 .

The outer edge of the base plate 2811a is inclined such that the front surface moves rearward toward the edge of the outer edge. Therefore, the portion of the out port 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811 a , that is, the front end surface of the finger hook portion 2816 is inclined toward the out port 1008 .

The three ball receiving portions 2811b are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and the right ball receiving portion 2811b is positioned downward. The ball receiving portion 2811b at the left end is formed such that the front end surface is parallel to the base plate 2811a to the lower end. The remaining (central and right end) ball receiving portions 2811b are inclined such that the front end faces move rearward toward the lower ends.

In addition, the first component member 2811 includes two positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a and a plurality of (three in this case) mounting members penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting on the game panel 1100. It has a hole 2811d and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided in the rear end surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b (base plate 2811a) for mounting the second component member 2812 thereon.

The two positioning protrusions 2811c are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. Here, two positioning projections 2811c are provided at a portion near the out port 1008 and a portion far from the out port 1008. As shown in FIG. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the two positioning protrusions 2811c have the same length.

The three mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A mounting screw inserted through a mounting hole (not shown) of a second component member 2812, which will be described later, is screwed into the mounting hole.

The second component member 2812 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is placed on the surface (plate) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). surface), a passage outlet 2812b that opens rearward at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting to the first component member 2811. ) and

The second component member 2812 of this embodiment is inserted (inserted) into the opening 1112 (ordinary opening region 1102) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the depth is within the thickness of the panel plate 1110. is formed in

The ball passage 2812a of the second component member 2812 is formed along the inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000 and along the surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to become lower toward the right. The passage outlet 2812b opens rearward at the right end of the second component 2812, which is the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a.

The attachment hole of the second component member 2812 is provided at a portion corresponding to the attachment hole of the first component member 2811 . The second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side by inserting the attachment screw from the rear into the attachment hole of the second component member 2812 and screwing it into the mounting hole of the first component member 2811. be done.

The side unit 2800G of this embodiment includes a branch portion 2801 that communicates with the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b), and a surface (board surface) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 that merges with the branch portion 2801. and a main stream portion 2802 extending along. The sphere passage 2812 a is composed of a plurality of tributary portions 2801 and a main flow portion 2802 .

The branch portion 2801 extends rearward from a portion forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 to a portion behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and above the main flow portion 2802 (thickness of the panel plate 1110). .

The main stream portion 2802 extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from near the left end of the base plate 2811a to near the right end so as to be lower rightward. The length of the main flow portion 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B (8 to 10 times in this embodiment).

In the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, the second component member 2812 is positioned behind the first component member 2811, and the mounting screws are inserted from the rear of the second component member 2812 through the mounting holes of the second component member 2812. It is assembled by screwing it into the attachment hole of 2811 . As a result, a side unit 2800G is constructed in which the second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side.

The ball passage 2812a of the second component member 2812 is open forward, but when the first component member 2811 is attached to the front side, the front end side of the ball passage 2812a is closed by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811. In this state, the game ball B does not fall forward from the ball passage 2812a. That is, the first component member 2811 and the second component member 2812 constitute the ball passage 2812a. In other words, a ball passage 2812 a is provided between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812 .

This side unit 2800G closes the opening 1112 (ordinary opening region 1102 of the opening region 1101) through which the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 penetrates the panel plate 1110 from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The base plate 2811a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to do so. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811 c of the first component member 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 . In this state, the mounting hole 2811 d of the first component member 2811 is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 .

Then, the side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 and tightening. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 is provided in the vicinity of the positioning projection 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be securely inserted into the positioning hole 1113 by strongly pressing the positioning projection 2811c toward the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning projection 2811c from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

When the side unit 2800G of this embodiment is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 (the game board 5 is assembled), the finger hook portion 2816 of the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 is out. It protrudes forward from the mouth 1008 (the specific opening area 1103 of the opening area 1101).

In addition, when the side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the second component member 2812 is positioned within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . In other words, when assembled on the game board 5, the side unit 2800G does not protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and a wide space behind the panel plate 1110 can be secured.

In the side unit 2800G, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, it is guided to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning hole 2001, and the ball passes. After flowing down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 by 2812a, it is transferred to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind from the passage exit 2812b. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the passage outlet 2812b of the second component member 2812 is provided below the underside movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. In other words, the general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is provided below the movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800G, the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 and the like do not interfere with the movable decorative body 3510 under the back.

According to the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the side unit 2800 and the like.

According to the side unit 2800G of the present embodiment, the second component member 2812 is provided with the ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the cross section of the portion of the ball passage 2812a is U-shaped, the rigidity of the second component member 2812 can be increased due to the presence of the ball passage 2812a. Since the side unit 2800G is formed by attaching the second component member 2812 having increased rigidity from the rear side of the first component member 2811, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. can be done. Therefore, when the side unit 2800G is pulled forward after removing the mounting screw that attaches the side unit 2800G to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 increases. The side unit 2800 does not bend because it is held. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800G (first component member 2811) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be removed and that can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

Further, according to the side unit 2800G of the present embodiment, since the finger hooking portion 2816 overlapping the out port 1008 of the panel plate 1110 is provided on a part of the outer edge, the side unit 2800G can be disassembled for recycling or the like. By inserting a finger, a tool, or the like into the out port 1008 in a state in which the mounting screw that attaches the unit 2800G to the panel plate 1110 is removed, the finger or the like can be hooked on the finger hook portion 2816 to pull the side unit 2800G forward. can be done. As a result, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced.

In addition, in the side unit 2800G of the present embodiment, the finger hooking portion 2816 is provided so as to overlap the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103), and the out port 1008 has a size of two or more game balls B. Therefore, the operator's finger or the like can be easily inserted into the outlet 1008 and the finger or the like can be easily hooked on the finger hooking portion 2816 .

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800G, since the finger hook portion 2816 of the base plate 2811a is projected forward of the out port 1008 so as to overlap the out port 1008, the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a passes through the out port 1008. When discharged, the game ball B flowing down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 from above the out port 1008 licks the corner of the front end of the out port 1008 and enters the out port 1008 or enters the out port. It is possible to prevent the game ball B rebounded upward in the out guide portion 1003 in front of the out port 1008 from coming into contact with the corner of the front end of the out port 1008 . That is, the finger hook 2816 can protect the game ball B from coming into contact with the front corner of the out port 1008 on the panel plate 1110 . This can prevent the front end of the out port 1008 from being chipped.

Further, in the side unit 2800G, since the front surface of the finger hook portion 2816 on the base plate 2811a is inclined toward the out port 1008, the outer edge has an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the disassembling work of the pachinko machine 1, the finger hooking portion 2816 (finger hooking portion) overlapping the out port 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G 2817), even if the operator's finger or the like touches the corner of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, the corner is obtuse, compared with the case where the corner is right. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to damage a finger or the like, and the side unit 2800G can be safely removed with a finger or the like.

In addition, in the side unit 2800G, since the front surface of the finger hook portion 2816 on the base plate 2811a is inclined toward the out port 1008, the game ball B flowing down to the out port 1008 along the front surface of the base plate 2811a can be smoothly moved. can be guided to the out port 1008 immediately, and the game ball B can be suppressed from being stagnated near the out port 1008.例文帳に追加Further, since the front surface of the finger hooking portion 2816 is inclined, the angle of the front end of the finger hooking portion 2816 is obtuse.

Also, in the side unit 2800G, by assembling it to the game board 5, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. Foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the side.

By the way, since the side unit 2800G is provided with two positioning projections 2811c and each is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, when the side unit 2800G is removed from the panel plate 1110 in the disassembly work, In addition, if the two positioning projections 2811c are to be pulled out from the positioning hole 1113 at the same time, it is necessary to pull the side unit 2800G forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the positioning protrusions 2811c are provided at a portion close to the outlet 1008 and a portion far from the outlet 1008, when the pachinko machine 1 is disassembled for recycling or the like, the panel of the game panel 1100 can be disassembled. When removing the side unit 2800G from the plate 1110, the worker's finger or the like is hooked on the finger hook portion 2816 overlapping the out port 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800, and the out port is pulled forward. A strong pullout force can be applied to the positioning projection 2811c near 1008 . As a result, during the disassembly work, the positioning projection 2811c closer to the out port 1008 can be pulled out from the positioning hole 1113 first of the two positioning projections 2811c, and then the remaining positions farther from the out port 1008 can be pulled out. Since the positioning projection 2811c can be pulled out from the positioning hole 1113, it can be pulled out with a weaker force than when pulling out two positioning projections 2811c at the same time.

In the above-described side unit 2800G, the finger hooking portion 2816 has a flat plate shape along the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, but is not limited to this, and has a form as shown in FIG. may be used as the finger hooking portion 2817.

When the side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the finger hook portion 2817 overlaps with the out port 1008 passing through the panel plate 1110 in a front view, and extends along the inner surface of the out port 1008. It extends rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . This finger hook portion 2817 is provided on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 of the side unit 2800G. Further, the front surface of the finger hook portion 2817 is inclined toward the out port 1008 .

In the embodiment of FIG. 113, the depth of the finger hook portion 2817 overlapping the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103) at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is increased, and the finger hook portion 2817 is inserted into the out port 1008. The part has a certain thickness. Therefore, the size of the out port 1008 becomes smaller due to the thickness of the finger hooking portion 2817 (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B becomes smaller), but in this embodiment, the thickness of the finger hooking portion 2817 is taken into consideration. , the size of the out port 1008 is widened (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B is increased). As a result, the game ball B can be ejected from the out port 1008 without delay.

According to this finger hooking portion 2817, it is possible to obtain the same effects as the finger hooking portion 2816 described above. Therefore, in disassembly work of the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, with the attachment screw attaching the side unit 2800G to the panel plate 1110 removed, by inserting a finger or a tool into the outlet 1008, the finger hook portion can be removed. A finger or the like can be hooked on 2817 to pull the side unit 2800G forward. As a result, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced.

In addition, since the finger hook portion 2817 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 along the inner surface of the out port 1008 , the finger hook portion 2817 can protect the inner surface of the out port 1008 . Also, when using the wooden game panel 1100, the inner surface of the out port 1008 where the wooden part is exposed can be hidden by the finger hook part 2817, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the side unit 2800G is provided with the finger hooking portion 2816 and the finger hooking portion 2817. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The starting port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2400 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 may be provided with a finger hooking portion 2816 and a finger hooking portion 2817 whose outer edge partially overlaps the out port 1008 .

More specifically, the starting port unit 2100 has a flat plate-like base plate 2103 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a finger hook portion 2816 and a A finger hook 2817 is provided. Although illustration is omitted, the starting port unit 2100 has a plurality of positioning projections that protrude rearward from the base plate 2103 and are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 .

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a flat base plate 2431 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a finger hook portion 2816 or a finger hook portion 2817 are provided. Although not shown, the attacker unit 2400 has a plurality of positioning projections that protrude backward from the base plate 2431 and are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 .

These starting port unit 2100 and attacker unit 2400 can also provide the same effects as the side unit 2800G described above.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the opening 1112 closed by the side unit 2800G and the out port 1008 are not connected and are provided separately. , but not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 114, the opening 1112 and the out port 1008 may be continuously connected. In other words, the panel plate 1110 may have an opening area 1101 in which the normal opening area 1102 closed by the side unit 2800G and the specific opening area 1103 forming the out port 1008 are connected. In other words, the out port 1008 is formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 so as to continue from the normal opening area 1102 to which the side unit 2800G is fitted, but is formed by the specific opening area 1103 to which the side unit 2800G is not fitted. You may make it be comprised.

Also according to the embodiment of FIG. 114, in the side unit 2800G, a finger hooking portion 2816 is provided so that a portion of the base plate 2811a overlaps the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103), and the same effects as above are achieved. In addition, since the specific opening area 1103 is formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 so as to be continuous from the normal opening area 1102, a cutting tool such as an end mill is not used for the panel plate 1110. When forming the normal opening region 1102 and the specific opening region 1103 by cutting the normal opening region 1102 and the specific opening region 1103 continuously, the cost of the panel plate 1110 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the base plate 2811a (base plate 2103, base plate 2431) in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided with the finger hook portion 2816 (finger hook portion 2817) overlapping the out port 1008. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a finger hook portion is provided on a portion separated in the front-rear direction from the plate surface of the panel plate 1110 (for example, the front plate 2812d separated forward from the panel plate 1110). 2816 (finger hooking portion 2817) may be provided.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively.

In addition, in the side unit 2800G, the ball passage 2812a, which is composed of a plurality of branch flow portions 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving portions 2812c and a main flow portion 2802 where the plurality of branch flow portions 2801 join, Although shown as having one, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2812a may be independent for each ball receiving portion 2811b.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800G described above, the ball sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 2811b is not provided, but the side unit 2800G is not limited to this, and a ball sensor is provided. Also good. When the side unit 2800G is provided with a ball sensor, it is desirable to provide the ball sensor within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, or to provide the ball sensor below the rear effect device (back and bottom effect unit 3500). .

In the above side unit 2800G, the LED board is not provided on the rear side. When the side unit 2800G is provided with an LED board, a unit cover is provided which covers the LED board from the rear and whose front end surface abuts the rear surface of the side unit 2800G (second component 2812), and the unit cover and the side unit contact each other. It is desirable to provide non-contact surface portions that are not in contact with each other on the contact surface portions that are in contact with each other. As a result, the side unit 2800G can be decorated with light using the LEDs of the LED substrate, and the heat from the LEDs can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion.

In the above embodiment, the side units 2800 (side unit 2800A, side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, side unit 2800D, side unit 2800E, side unit 2800F, side unit 2800G), but is not limited to this, starter unit 2100, attacker unit 2400 (attacker unit 2730), normal winning prize unit 2600, second starter unit 2720, accessory The thickness of the panel plate 1110 may be effectively used in the prize winning unit 2740 and the like.

[12-4. Regarding the relationship between the LED board and the non-contact surface part in the side unit]
Next, the relationship between the LED board 2825 and the non-contact surface portion 2831 in the side units 2800B to 2800F provided with the LED board 2825 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 115 and the like. FIG. 115(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the LED substrate, and (b) is a different form from (a) in which the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the LED substrate. (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided so as to cover the LED substrate, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided over the entire circumference of the unit cover. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a 115(a) and (c) show the side unit 2800B of FIG. 107 as an example, and FIGS. 115(c) and (d) show the side unit 2800D of FIG. 109 as an example. Here, the same components as those described above are assigned the same reference numerals.

The LED board 2825 shown in FIGS. 107 to 111 has a resistor mounted on another board for limiting the current driving the mounted LED 2825a. Therefore, in the LED board 2825, the amount of heat generated by the LED 2825a is the largest. That is, in the LED substrate 2825, much heat is emitted from the front side on which the LEDs 2825a are mounted. 107 to 111, a non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided near the front surface of the LED substrate 2825 where the amount of heat generated is large. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be quickly radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c), and the heat will not stay inside the unit cover 2820.

In the above embodiment, the resistor (current limiting resistor) is mounted on a separate substrate from the LED substrate 2825. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the resistor is mounted on the LED substrate. H.2825 may be implemented. For example, the resistor may be mounted on the same surface of the LED substrate 2825 as the LED 2825a is mounted. In this case, as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 107 to 111, a non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided on the side near the surface (here, the front surface) on which the LEDs 2825a and resistors are mounted on the LED substrate 2825. should be set.

When the LEDs 2825a and the resistors are mounted on the same surface of the LED substrate 2825, it is desirable that the LEDs 2825a and the resistors do not overlap in the vertical direction. This can prevent the heat emitted from the LED 2825a and the resistor from affecting each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115, on the LED board 2825, the LED 2825a and the resistor 2825b for limiting the current supplied to the LED 2825a may be mounted on different surfaces. In other words, the resistor 2825b is mounted on the surface of the LED substrate 2825 opposite to the surface on which the LEDs 2825a are mounted. In this case, since the resistor 2825b is larger in heat quantity than the LED 2825a, as shown in FIG. A non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) may be provided.

More specifically, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(a), the unit cover 2820 is arranged so that the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is located on the side closer to the resistor 2825b mounted on the rear surface of the LED 2825a. The boss portion 2820 d protrudes forward and the LED board 2825 is positioned within the frame of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 . As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be quickly radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c), and the heat will not stay inside the unit cover 2820.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(a), the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in plan view. Even if dust or dirt enters the LED board 2825, the influence of the dust or dirt can be prevented as much as possible. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2820c.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(a), the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided on the unit cover 2820 side. It may be provided on the frame portion 2814 ) side, or may be provided on both the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 .

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(b), a plurality of boss portions 2814a projecting rearward from a portion within the frame of the support frame portion 2814 on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 and to which the LED substrate 2825 is attached, and a frame-shaped support frame. and a cutout portion 2814b that is cut forward from the rear end surface of the portion 2814 . In this embodiment, the unit cover 2820 has only a flat cover portion 2820a, but may have a peripheral wall portion 2820b as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(b), an LED 2825a is mounted on the front surface of an LED board 2825, and a resistor 2825b is mounted on the rear surface. , the notch portion 2814b is located behind the rear surface of the LED substrate 2825. As shown in FIG. In other words, the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b) is provided on the side of the LED substrate 2825 near the surface (here, the rear surface) on which the resistor 2825b is mounted. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be quickly dissipated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b), and the heat will not stay inside the unit cover 2820.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(b), the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch 2814b (non-contact surface portion 2831) in plan view. Even if dust or dirt enters the LED board 2825, the influence of the dust or dirt can be prevented as much as possible. In addition, since the notch 2814b is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2814b can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2814b.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(b), the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b) is provided on the unit main body 2810 (support frame portion 2814) side, but the present invention is not limited to this. , may be provided on the unit cover 2820 side, or may be provided on both the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 .

In addition, in the above embodiment, the LED substrate 2825 does not overlap the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b, notch portion 2820c) in plan view. As shown in FIG. 115(c), the LED board 2825 may overlap the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c). More specifically, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(c), the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 attached to the support frame portion 2814 are connected to the opening portion of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. 1112 , it is provided so as to be located within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 . That is, the space formed by the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 and in which the LED substrate 2825 is accommodated is provided within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 . As a result, even if the LED substrate 2825 and the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) are provided so as to overlap each other, the notch portion 2820c is located within the thickness of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It is possible to reduce the possibility that foreign matter such as dust outside the 1110 enters the opening 1112 and further enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c. Foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from getting on the LED substrate 2825, and the influence of dust can be prevented as much as possible.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(c), the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided so as to cover the LED substrate 2825. Therefore, the heat from the LED 2825a mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 2825, Heat from the resistor 2825b mounted on the rear surface can be efficiently radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831, and the heat does not stay inside the unit cover 2820.

Although FIG. 115(c) shows that the LED 2825a and the resistor 2825b are mounted on different surfaces with respect to the LED substrate 2825, the LED 2825a and the resistor 2825b are not limited to this. may be provided on the same surface of the LED substrate 2825.

Also, FIG. 115(c) shows that the unit cover 2820 is provided with the notch portion 2820c as the non-contact surface portion 2831; 2814) side, or may be provided on both the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820. FIG.

In the embodiment of FIG. 115(c), part of the LED board 2825 is inserted into the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) between the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820. Alternatively, it may protrude outward as long as it does not block the opening of the non-contact surface portion 2831 . By entering the LED substrate 2825 into the non-contact surface portion 2831 or protruding outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831, the LED substrate 2825 is exposed to the outside air, and the heat radiation effect can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the contact surface portion 2830 between the unit main body 2810A (support frame portion 2814) and the unit cover 2820 is partially provided with the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c). 115(d), the non-contact surface portion 2831 may be provided over the entire circumference of the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. In other words, a gap is provided over the entire circumference between the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 . In this embodiment, the unit cover 2820 is attached to a boss 2814a projecting rearward from the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 115(d), part of the LED board 2825 is placed in the non-contact surface portion 2831 (gap) between the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A and the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820. They are letting it in and jumping out. Even in this case, the LED substrate 2825 does not block the opening of the non-contact surface portion 2831 . According to this embodiment, the LED substrate 2825 can be exposed to the outside air more easily, and the heat radiation effect can be further enhanced. Moreover, from the point of view of preventing entry of foreign matter such as dust and dirt, the usefulness of using the opening of the non-contact surface portion 2831 increases.

Although not shown, the LED board 2825 prevents solder from adhering to unnecessary parts when mounting electronic components on at least the board surface where the LED 2825a is mounted, and protects the circuit pattern from oxidation and insulation protection. A light-colored (for example, white) solder resist is used as the solder resist applied for . As a result, light from the LEDs 2825a and the like is reflected by the bright-colored solder resist, so that the luminous efficiency can be improved. Alternatively, when a full-color LED is used as the LED 2825a, the white solder resist allows the user to tune in to the viewer's sense of color with respect to the various colors of emitted light, thereby making it possible to present a natural light-emitting decoration.

On this LED board 2825, information (characters and symbols) such as the part number and mounting position of the electronic component to be mounted, the name, mounting position, mounting direction, etc. of the LED board 2825 is printed in a similar color (for example, , yellow) and applied by printing (eg, silkscreening).

By the way, electronic components such as resistors and LED drivers mounted on LED boards are often molded with black resin in their packages. Even when the LEDs are turned off, the electronic components stand out, which may affect the appearance of the gaming machine. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 115, since the resistor 2825b is mounted on the rear surface of the LED board 2825, the resistor 2825b can be hidden from the player and the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved. can.

Also, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 107 to 111, when the resistor 2825b is mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825, it is desirable that the resistor 2825b is inconspicuous from the player. In this embodiment, since the decorative seal 2803 having predetermined decoration and translucency is provided in front of the LED substrate 2825, the decorative seal 2803 can make the resistor 2825b inconspicuous.

Alternatively, when the resistor 2825b is mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825, the resistor 2825b may be made inconspicuous by providing a plate-like or sheet-like diffusion lens for diffusing light in front of the LED board 2825. good. In addition, in front of the LED substrate 2825, a plate-like or sheet-like decorative body designed to be partially opaque is provided, and the design of the decorative body hides the resistor 2825b so that it is not noticeable. Also good. Also, the resistor 2825b mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 2825 may be colored with bright paint or ink. These decorative seal 2803, diffuser lens, decorative body, and the like may be used in combination as appropriate.

As the game panel 1100, there are wooden ones that do not have translucency and ones made of resin that have translucency. Although light is blocked, if the opening 1112 is made of a transparent resin having translucency, even if the opening 1112 has the same tunnel shape, the outside can be seen through. If the configuration of (1) is used together, the effects as described above can be exhibited in utilizing the thickness of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110).

[13. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The protrusion 102 of the door frame main body 100 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment corresponds to the protrusion of the present invention, the ball launching unit 550 of the main body frame 4 of this embodiment corresponds to the ball launching means of the present invention, and the foul The unit 570, the circulation ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball feeding unit 700 constitute the ball circulation means of the present invention. The base 686 serves as the locking piece of the locking means of the present invention, the positioning pin 686b and the rotary connecting portion 692 in the present embodiment as the inserting body of the present invention, the cassette pressing piece 693 in the present embodiment as the pressing piece of the present invention, The Nairatch 694 in this embodiment respectively corresponds to the fixing means of the present invention.

[14. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 that shoots the game ball B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 is sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball lifter. Collected by the upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 and supplied to the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 based on the player's ball holding data. Then, in this pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed type game machine, management game machine), with the kuma cassette 681 attached to the body frame 4, the kuma motor base 686 of the kuma mechanism 680 in the ball lifting unit 650 is moved to the locked position. In this state, the positioning pin 686b and the rotary connecting portion 692 are inserted into the ball polishing cassette 681 in a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, and the ball polishing cassette 681 is pushed rearward by the cassette pressing piece 693 (spring 695). be. In this state, the pressing piece is immovably fixed by the ny latch of the locking means. As a result, even if the mounting of the kuma cassette 681 is incomplete, the mounting of the kuma cassette 681 can be brought into a favorable state by pressing backward, and the positioning pin 686b and the like can move the kuma cassette 681 forward. In addition to being able to prevent detachment, the ny latch 694 allows the pressing of the cassette pressing piece 693 to continue to press the balled cassette 681, so that the balled cassette 681 cannot be removed. At this time, by looking at the position of the operating portion 694a of the ny latch 694, it can be easily determined whether or not the ny latch 694 fixes the cassette pressing piece 693 immovably, thereby reducing the possibility of forgetting to lock. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the Kuma cassette 681 from being arbitrarily detached due to some reason such as vibration during the game, and to avoid interruption of the game caused by the detachment of the Kuma cassette 681. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 for maintenance or the like, the cassette pressing piece 693 is made immovable by the ny latch 694 in a state in which the kuma cassette 681 is pressed backward by the cassette pressing piece 693 . Therefore, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the pressing of the balled cassette 681 by the cassette pressing piece 693 is maintained, and the balled cassette 681 can be prevented from coming off immediately forward. To remove the Kuma cassette 681, after opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 supporting the game board 5, operate the Nairatch 694 to make the cassette pressing piece 693 movable, and then remove the Kuma motor. When the base 686 is rotated to move from the locked position to the unlocked position, the positioning pins 686b and the like are separated from the kneading cassette 681 and attached to the body frame 4 (cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668). The ball polishing cassette 681 can be removed forward. As a result, by removing the ball polishing cassette 681 having the polishing cloth 682 for polishing the circulating game balls B, the inside of the ball lifting mechanism 660 of the ball lifting unit 650 provided behind it (lifting spiral shaft 661 etc.) can be confirmed, and the workability|operativity concerning the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

When closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, even if the Kuma motor base 686 is not in the lock position, when the door frame 3 is closed, the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 is pushed into the Kuma motor base. 686, the Kuma motor base 686 rotates and moves to the locked position, and the positioning pin 686b and the like are inserted into the Kuma cassette 681 in a direction intersecting the front-rear direction. In addition to preventing the Kuma cassette 681 from coming off during play, the Kuma motor base 686, the cassette pressing piece 693, the Kuma cassette 681, etc. will not be damaged due to contact with the door frame 3. do not have.

Also, if the door frame 3 is closed in an incomplete state in which the Kuma motor base 686 has not moved to the locked position, the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the Kuma motor base 686, causing the Kuma motor base 686 to rotate. At the same time, the cassette pressing piece 693 pushes the kuma cassette 681 rearward by the biasing force of the spring 695. Therefore, in addition to the locking by the positioning pin 686b of the kuma motor base 686, the kuma cassette 681 is locked. Even if the attachment is incomplete, the attachment of the ball polishing cassette 681 can be maintained in a good condition, and the detachment of the ball polishing cassette 681 can be reliably prevented.

Furthermore, the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 lifts the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the door frame hinge mechanism 110 and the like that can open and close the door frame 3 are provided. It is possible to prevent excessive load from being continuously applied to the door frame 3, and it is possible to prevent the hinge from being distorted. 4 can be closed at the proper position.

Further, since the kuma cassette 681 has a polishing cloth 682 for polishing the circulating game balls B, when the polishing cloth 682 becomes dirty, the kuma cassette 681 is removed and the polishing cloth 682 is cleaned. , and the circulating game balls B can be kept in good condition without dirt. Further, by applying the above configuration to the Kuma cassette 681 (detachable unit) for which maintenance such as replacement is periodically performed, troubles associated with detachment of the detachable unit during maintenance can be minimized.

[15. Regarding another feature included in this embodiment]
[15-1. First technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-1a. Background of the first technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball shooting means shoots a game ball into a game area based on data of a player's ball holding data, and when the game ball is shot, the shot ball is shot from the ball holding data. It is proposed to add the recovered game ball to the held ball data when it is recovered by the foul ball recovery means without being supplied to the game area even if it is shot by the ball shooting means. (For example, Patent Document A: JP-A-2020-89489). According to the technique disclosed in Patent Document B, it is possible to circulate game balls in the game machine and reduce the burden on the game hall in which the game machine is installed.

However, in the technique of Patent Document A, if a game ball shot by the ball shooting means returns to the ball shooting means for some reason, the game ball is not recovered by the foul ball recovery means. The number of balls remains subtracted, and there is a possibility that an error from the actual number of game balls shot into the game area will occur, giving a disadvantage to the player.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, the following means provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating the error between the actual number of game balls shot into the game area and the error caused by the return of the shot game balls. .

[15-1b. Solution for the first technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
foul ball recovery means for recovering game balls that have been shot by the ball shooting means but have not been supplied to the game area;
a ball circulation means for collecting game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the player's ball possession data converted into data,
The ball launching means is
It has a shooting rail on which the game ball to be shot is placed, and the length of the shooting rail is such that only one game ball can be placed,
When a game ball is newly supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means while the game ball is placed on the launch rail, the game ball supplied to the launch rail later is transferred to the foul ball recovery means. will be collected by
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 1, a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls, a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and even if the ball is shot by the ball shooting means, the game area A player provided with a foul ball collecting means for collecting game balls not supplied and a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again, and converted into data. A game machine configured to shoot a game ball by means of ball shooting means based on ball holding data of (1), wherein the ball shooting means has a shooting rail on which the game ball to be shot is placed, and the shooting rail is It has a length that allows only one game ball to be placed, and when a game ball is newly supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means while the game ball is placed on the launch rail, it will be placed on the launch rail later. The supplied game balls are recovered by the foul ball recovery means (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [4-2. Ball launching unit] and [7-4. Launch control processing] sections , FIG. 27, FIG. 68, etc.).

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (so-called enclosed type gaming machine, controlled gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from the ball shooting means based on the number of balls of 1 or more), the length of the shooting rail in the ball shooting means is is the length that only one can be placed, so if the fired game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, if the next game ball has already been placed on the launch rail, it will be placed on the launch rail. It is possible to flip the returned game ball by the placed game ball to make it a foul ball. On the other hand, when the game ball that has been shot returns before the next game ball is placed on the shooting rail, the game ball that has returned will be placed on the shooting rail, but is supplied from the ball circulation means. The next game ball to be hit comes back and is repelled by the game ball placed on the launch rail to become a foul ball. Therefore, the player's ball data is subtracted by being shot from the launch rail, but even if the shot game ball returns to the launch rail, only one game ball is placed on the launch rail. Therefore, either the returning game ball or the next game ball becomes a foul ball and is recovered by the foul ball recovery means. The ball data can be returned to the state before shooting, and the error from the actual number of the game balls shot to the game area is eliminated so that the player does not suffer any disadvantages.

In addition, since the launch rail is long enough for only one game ball to be placed, there is a risk that it may fall from the launch rail due to vibrations, etc. In the event of a fall, even if it is misidentified as having been fired as a result of the fall and the ball holding data (number of balls held) is subtracted, it will be treated as a foul ball by being recovered by the foul ball recovery means in the same manner as above. to return to the state before the fall by adding to the holding ball data. On the other hand, when there is no held ball data (the number of held balls is 0) and the game ball falls from the launch rail and is recovered by the foul ball recovery means, it may not be added to the held ball data. Alternatively, an alarm may be issued to the game hall side where the game machine is installed.

Further, the ball circulating means may supply one game ball to the launch rail after the game ball shooting operation by the ball shooting means. As a result, when a game ball is launched from the launch rail, the ball circulation means always supplies one game ball to the launch rail. A game ball supplied to the launch rail by the circulation means can be flipped into a foul ball, and the game machine can reliably provide the above-described effects.

Further, as described above, when one game ball is supplied to the shooting rail after the game ball is shot by the ball circulation means, the shooting of the game ball by the ball shooting means and the ball shooting means (shooting rail) by the ball circulation means Since it is possible to make a series of actions between the supply of game balls to the Compared to the case of judging whether or not the player has returned to the launch rail (judging by programming), it is possible to reduce the load on the control of the gaming machine.

Further, when the game machine has the ball holding data and the game ball on the launch rail changes from being present to being absent, the ball holding subtracting means for subtracting one game ball from the ball holding data and the foul collecting means. Possessed ball addition means for adding one game ball to the possessed ball data when is collected may be further provided. As a result, when the ball shooting means shoots a game ball toward the game area of the game board in a state where the player's ball data exists (the number of balls in his possession is one or more), the ball holding data is subtracted from the ball holding data by the ball holding means. One game ball is subtracted from the number, and the game ball is supplied to the game area so that the player can enjoy the game with the game ball. On the other hand, when the game ball shot by the ball shooting means is not supplied to the game area, it is recovered as a foul ball by the foul ball recovery means, and the game ball is added to the possession ball data by the held ball addition means. Therefore, the player can continue to enjoy the game without being disadvantaged by the fact that the game balls are not supplied to the game area. Then, when the shot game ball returns to the shooting rail for some reason, the shooting rail has a length that allows only one game ball to be placed, so the next game ball has already been placed on the shooting rail. If so, it is possible to repel the returning game ball by the game ball placed on the launch rail to make it a foul ball, and the returning game ball is placed on the launch rail, ball circulation. The next game ball supplied from the means returns and is repelled by the placed game ball to become a foul ball. By adding one ball, the ball holding data can be returned to the state before shooting, and the error with the actual number of game balls shot into the game area can be eliminated.

Further, the game ball dropped from the launch rail may be recovered by the foul ball recovery means. As a result, the game ball that has fallen from the launch rail is recovered by the foul ball recovery means, so that the game ball that has been released and returned or the next game ball that is supplied from the ball circulation means can be recovered from the launch rail. To reliably provide a game machine capable of being added to ball possession data as a foul ball when flipped by a placed game ball, since the foul ball can be recovered by a foul ball recovery means. be able to.

Further, as described above, when the game ball that has fallen from the launch rail is recovered by the foul ball recovering means, even if the game ball falls from the launch rail due to vibration or the like, it can be recovered by the foul ball recovering means so that the foul ball is recovered. The ball can be added to the held ball data to return to the state before falling, and the player will not be disadvantaged.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The sphere circulation means
One game ball is supplied to the shooting rail after the game ball shooting operation by the ball shooting means.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the ball circulation means supplies one game ball to the shooting rail after the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means. [7-4.

As a result, when a game ball is launched from the launch rail, the ball circulation means always supplies one game ball to the launch rail. A game ball supplied to the launch rail by the circulation means can be flipped into a foul ball, and the game machine can reliably provide the above-described effects.

In addition, since it is possible to perform a series of operations in which the ball shooting means shoots game balls and the ball circulation means feeds game balls to the ball shooting means (shooting rail), for example, a game on the shooting rail can be performed. Compared to the case where it is judged whether or not the game ball that has been shot has returned to the launch rail based on the presence or absence of the ball, the operation of the ball launching means and the ball circulation means, etc. (judging by making a program) Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load on the control of the game machine.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
a ball holding subtracting means for subtracting one game ball from the ball holding data when the game ball on the launch rail changes from being present to being absent while the ball holding data is present;
Possessed ball adding means for adding one game ball to said possessed ball data when a game ball is recovered by said foul recovering means;
is further provided.

According to the configuration of the means 3, when the game machine has the ball holding data and the game ball on the launch rail changes from being present to being absent, the ball holding subtracting means for subtracting one game ball from the ball holding data; Possessed ball addition means for adding one game ball to the possessed ball data when the game ball is recovered by the recovering means (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [7 Possessed ball subtraction processing] and [7-3 Possessed ball addition processing], see descriptions in FIGS.

As a result, when the ball shooting means shoots a game ball toward the game area of the game board in a state where the player's ball data exists (the number of balls in his possession is one or more), the ball holding data is subtracted from the ball holding data by the ball holding means. One game ball is subtracted from the number, and the game ball is supplied to the game area so that the player can enjoy the game with the game ball. On the other hand, when the game ball shot by the ball shooting means is not supplied to the game area, it is recovered as a foul ball by the foul ball recovery means, and the game ball is added to the possession ball data by the held ball addition means. Therefore, the player can continue to enjoy the game without being disadvantaged by the fact that the game balls are not supplied to the game area. Then, when the shot game ball returns to the shooting rail for some reason, the shooting rail has a length that allows only one game ball to be placed, so the next game ball has already been placed on the shooting rail. If so, it is possible to repel the returning game ball by the game ball placed on the launch rail to make it a foul ball, and the returning game ball is placed on the launch rail, ball circulation. The next game ball supplied from the means returns and is repelled by the placed game ball to become a foul ball. By adding one ball, the ball holding data can be returned to the state before shooting, and the error with the actual number of game balls shot into the game area can be eliminated.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The foul ball collecting means is
It is possible to collect game balls that have fallen from the launch rail.”
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, game balls dropped from the launch rail can be recovered by the foul ball recovering means (in the [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the descriptions of the ball launching unit 550 and the foul unit 570 are described. reference).

As a result, since the game balls that have fallen from the launch rail are recovered by the foul ball recovery means, the game balls that have been released and returned or the next game balls that are supplied from the ball circulation means can be recovered from the launch rail. To reliably provide a game machine capable of being added to ball possession data as a foul ball when flipped by a placed game ball, since the foul ball can be recovered by a foul ball recovery means. be able to.

In addition, since the game balls dropped from the launch rail are recovered by the foul ball recovering means, even if the game balls fall from the launch rail due to vibration or the like, the foul balls can be recovered by the foul ball recovering means. can be added to the held ball data to return to the state before the fall, and the player is not at a disadvantage.

In addition, when there is no possession ball data (the number of possession balls is 0) and the game ball falls from the launch rail and is recovered by the foul ball recovery means, it may not be added to the possession ball data. Alternatively, an alarm may be issued to the game hall side where the game machine is installed.

Means 5: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board and having a shooting rail on which the game balls to be shot are placed;
a foul ball recovery means for recovering a game ball that has not been supplied to the game area after being shot by the ball shooting means and a game ball that has fallen from the shooting rail;
a ball circulation means that collects the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplies them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the player's ball possession data converted into data,
Possessed ball subtracting means for subtracting one game ball from the possessed ball data when the presence of the game ball on the launch rail changes from the present state to the absent state with the possessed ball data;
Possessed ball addition means for adding one game ball to said possessed ball data when a game ball is recovered by said foul recovering means;
further comprising
The launch rail has a length on which only one game ball can be placed,
The ball circulation means supplies one game ball to the shooting rail after the game ball shooting operation by the ball shooting means,
When a game ball is newly supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means while the game ball is placed on the launch rail, the game ball supplied to the launch rail later is transferred to the foul ball recovery means. will be collected by
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, it has a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls, and a shooting rail on which game balls can be supplied to the game area of the game board and the game balls to be shot are placed. ball shooting means, game balls that were not supplied to the game area even though they were shot by the ball shooting means, and foul ball recovery means for recovering game balls that fell from the shooting rails, and ball shooting means that were shot by the ball shooting means. A game machine comprising a ball circulation means for recovering game balls and supplying them to the ball shooting means again, and having the ball shooting means shoot the game balls based on the data of the player's ball holding data converted into data. When the game ball on the launch rail changes from being present to being absent in a state where the ball data is present, the game ball is recovered by the ball possession subtracting means for subtracting one game ball from the ball holding data and the foul recovery means. and a ball possession adding means for adding one game ball to the ball possession data, the launch rail has a length that allows only one game ball to be placed, and the ball circulation means is a ball launch means. One game ball is supplied to the launch rail after the game ball is launched by the means, and when a new game ball is supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means while the game ball is placed on the launch rail. In (1), the game balls supplied to the launch rail are recovered by the foul ball recovery means.

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (so-called enclosed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) that shoots game balls from the ball shooting means based on the number of balls is 1 or more), the state where the player's ball data is present (the number of balls held) is 1 or more), when the ball shooting means shoots the game ball toward the game area of the game board, the game ball is subtracted by one from the held ball data by the held ball subtracting means, and the game ball is supplied to the game area. By doing so, the player can enjoy the game with the game balls. On the other hand, when the game ball shot by the ball shooting means is not supplied to the game area, it is recovered as a foul ball by the foul ball recovery means, and the game ball is added to the possession ball data by the possession ball adding means. Therefore, the player can continue to enjoy the game without being disadvantaged by the fact that the game balls are not supplied to the game area.

Then, when the shot game ball returns to the shooting rail for some reason, since the shooting rail has a length on which only one game ball can be placed, the next game is already placed on the shooting rail by the ball circulation means. If the ball is placed, the returning game ball is flipped by the game ball placed on the launch rail, falls from the launch rail, and is recovered as a foul ball by the foul ball recovering means. On the other hand, when the game ball that has been shot returns before the next game ball is placed on the shooting rail by the ball circulation means, the game ball that has returned will be placed on the shooting rail, but the ball The next game ball supplied from the circulation means falls from the launch rail by being flipped by the game ball placed on the launch rail, and is recovered as a foul ball by the foul ball recovery means. Therefore, in the ball held data of the player, one game ball is subtracted from the ball held data by the ball held subtracting means when the game ball is shot from the shooting rail. Since only one game ball is placed on the launch rail, either the returned game ball or the next game ball becomes a foul ball and is recovered by the foul ball recovery means. One game ball is added to the held ball data by the ball adding means, the held ball data can be returned to the state before shooting, and the game is played by eliminating the error from the actual number of the game balls shot into the game area. no person will be disadvantaged.

In addition, when a game ball is launched from the launch rail, the ball circulation means always supplies one game ball to the launch rail. A game ball supplied to the launch rail by the means can be flipped into a foul ball, and the game machine can reliably provide the above-described effects.

In addition, after the game ball is shot by the ball circulation means, one game ball is supplied to the shooting rail. Since it is possible to make the supply of game balls a series of actions, for example, the game balls fired based on the presence or absence of game balls on the launch rail, the operation of the ball launching means and the ball circulation means, etc. It is possible to reduce the load on the control of the game machine compared to the case of determining whether or not the game has returned to the normal state (when determining by forming a program).

Furthermore, since the length of the launch rail is such that only one game ball can be placed, there is a risk that the game ball may fall from the launch rail due to vibrations, etc. is 1 or more), if the game ball falls from the launch rail due to vibrations, etc., it will be misidentified as having been launched as a result of the fall, and even if the possession ball data (number of possession balls) is subtracted, the foul ball recovery means will By being collected, one game ball can be added to the possession ball data by the possession ball addition means as a foul ball, and the state before falling can be restored, so that the player is not disadvantaged.

In addition, since the length of the launch rail is such that only one game ball can be placed, the game ball falls from the launch rail in a state where there is no held ball data (the number of held balls is 0), and a foul ball is generated. When collected by the collection means, the game balls may not be added to the possession ball data by the possession ball addition means, or an alarm may be issued to the game hall side where the game machine is installed.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating the error from the actual number of game balls shot to the game area due to the return of the shot game balls.

[15-1c. Relationship between Solution Means of First Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The ball launching unit 550 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment is the ball launching means of the above solution, the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550 in this embodiment is the launch rail of the above solution, and the foul unit in this embodiment. 570 is the foul ball collecting means of the above solution, the circulation ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball feeding unit 700 of the present embodiment are the ball circulation means of the above solution, and the frame control board of this embodiment. The ball possession subtraction process in 740 corresponds to the ball possession subtraction means of the above solution means, and the ball possession addition process in the frame control board 740 of the present embodiment corresponds to the ball possession addition means of the above solution means.

[15-1d. Characteristic Actions and Effects of the First Technical Feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 that shoots the game ball B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 is sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball lifter. Collected by the upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 and supplied to the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 based on the player's holding ball data (the number of held balls is 1 or more). I'm trying In this pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed type game machine, management game machine), in a state in which the player's ball data exists (state in which the number of balls in his possession is one or more), the ball shooting unit 550 shoots the game area of the game board 5. When the game ball B is shot toward the 5a, the game ball B is subtracted by one from the possession ball data by the possession ball subtraction processing, and the game ball B is supplied to the game area 5a, whereby the game ball B is delivered to the player. You can enjoy the game by On the other hand, when the game ball B shot by the ball shooting unit 550 is not supplied to the game area 5a, it is recovered as a foul ball by the foul unit 570, and the game ball B is added to the held ball data by the held ball addition process. Since the game ball B is not supplied to the game area 5a, the player is not disadvantaged and can continue to enjoy the game.

When the game ball B that has been shot returns to the ball launch pad 552b for some reason, since the ball launch pad 552b has a length on which only one game ball B can be placed, the ball feeding unit 700 If the next game ball B is already placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the returning game ball B is flipped by the game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b and falls from the ball launch pad 552b. is recovered to the foul unit 570 as a foul ball. On the other hand, when the game ball B that has been shot is returned before the next game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b by the ball feeding unit 700, the returned game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b. However, the next game ball B supplied from the ball feeding unit 700 is flipped by the game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b and falls from the ball launch pad 552b, resulting in a foul ball. is collected in the foul unit 570 as a Therefore, in the player's ball data, one game ball B is subtracted from the ball data by the ball subtraction process by being shot from the ball launch pad 552b. Since only one game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b even after returning, either the returning game ball B or the next game ball B becomes a foul ball and becomes a foul unit. Since it is collected by 570, one game ball B is added to the ball holding data by the ball holding addition process, and the ball holding data can be returned to the state before shooting, and the game ball shot to the game area 5a is returned. The player will not be disadvantaged by eliminating the error from the real number of B.

In addition, when the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the ball feeding unit 700 always supplies one game ball B to the ball launch pad 552b. To surely provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of repelling a game ball B supplied to a ball launching pad 552b by a ball feeding unit 700 to make a foul ball even after returning to a table 552b and exhibiting the above-mentioned effects. can be done.

In addition, after the game ball B is shot by the ball sending unit 700, one game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b. Since the supply of the game ball B to the launch pad 552b is a series of operations, for example, based on the presence or absence of the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b, the operation of the ball launch unit 550 and the ball feed unit 700, etc. Compared to the case of judging whether or not the launched game ball B has returned to the ball launch pad 552b (judging by programming), the load on the control of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. can.

Furthermore, since the length of the ball launch pad 552b is such that only one game ball B can be placed thereon, there is a risk that the game ball B may fall from the ball launch pad 552b due to vibration or the like. When the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b due to vibration or the like in a certain state (the number of held balls is 1 or more), it is mistakenly recognized as having been launched as a result of the fall, and the held ball data (the number of held balls) is subtracted. Even if the ball is recovered by the foul unit 570, it is possible to add one game ball B to the held ball data by carrying ball addition processing as a foul ball to return to the state before falling, and the player is disadvantaged. will not be.

In addition, when there is no held ball data (the number of held balls is 0) and the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b and is collected by the foul unit 570, the held ball data is added by the held ball addition process. The game ball B may not be added, or an alarm may be issued to the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[15-2. Second technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-2a. Background of the second technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a main body frame detachably supports a game board, a ball circulation means provided in the main body frame for circulating game balls in the game machine, and a rear surface of the main body frame. A substrate unit attached to a portion below the game board has been proposed (for example, Patent Document B: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-188537). According to the technique of Patent Document B, since the board unit having the control board for controlling the ball circulation means and the like is provided below the game board, the depth direction of the game board can be utilized as much as possible. , it is possible to achieve further differentiation from other gaming machines.

However, in the technique disclosed in Patent Document B, part of the sphere circulation means is positioned between the rear surface of the body frame and the board unit, and it is difficult to check and maintain that part. , it is necessary to remove the substrate unit, and there is a problem that it takes time and effort for maintenance and the like. As a solution to this problem, it is conceivable to provide a rear unit such as a substrate unit that can be opened and closed with respect to the body frame, thereby omitting the trouble of removing it and improving maintainability. There is a possibility that it may cause a malfunction.

Therefore, in the following means, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, it is proposed to provide a game machine capable of preventing the rear unit, which is provided to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame, from being forgotten to be closed during maintenance or the like. Make it an issue.

[15-2b. Solution for second technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A body frame that detachably supports from the front a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls,
a back cover that is openable and closable rearwardly with respect to the body frame so as to cover the game board supported by the body frame from the rear;
a ball launching means provided in the body frame and capable of supplying game balls to the game area;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
A rear unit is provided at a portion below the game board on the rear surface of the main body frame so as to be openable and closable rearward,
The rear unit is provided so as to interfere with the back cover when an attempt is made to close the back cover to the main body frame while it is open from the main body frame.
It is characterized by being

Here, the ``rear unit'' includes ``a board unit having a frame control board for controlling the ball launching means, the ball circulation means, etc., a power supply board for supplying power, etc.,'' and a ``ball circulation means. ball passage unit that constitutes a part of the ball passage in the above", "speaker unit having a speaker", "protective cover that protects the rear side of the substrate, passage member, etc.", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 1, a main body frame detachably supports a game board having a game area where a game is played with game balls from the front, and a main body covering the game board supported by the main body frame from the rear. A back cover provided to be openable and closable rearward with respect to the frame, a ball shooting means provided on the body frame and capable of supplying game balls to the game area, and recovering the game balls shot by the ball shooting means. and a ball circulation means for supplying the ball to the ball shooting means again, wherein the ball shooting means shoots the game balls based on the data of the ball held by the player, which is converted into data, wherein: A rear unit is provided so as to be openable and closable rearward at a portion below the game board on the rear surface of the body frame, and the rear unit closes the back cover to the body frame in a state of being open from the body frame. (In [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], see [4-8. Frame Substrate Unit] section, FIGS. 58 to 60, etc.). reference).

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (so-called enclosed type gaming machine, management gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from the ball shooting means based on the number of balls of 1 or more), Since the rear unit is provided, the member provided behind the game board in the conventional game machine is used as the rear unit of this configuration, so that the depth direction of the game board can be widened by the amount of the member. As a game machine having a wide game board in the depth direction, it is possible to further differentiate the game machine from other game machines, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is highly appealing to players. Since the rear unit is openable and closable, by opening the rear unit backward, the members provided in front of the rear unit on the rear surface of the body frame, the front side of the rear unit, etc. can be checked. Maintenance can be performed, and workability related to maintenance and the like can be improved. At this time, the rear unit and the back cover interfere with each other (contact), so when performing maintenance, etc., first open the back cover and then open the rear unit. , Close the rear unit and then the back cover. Therefore, when the rear unit is open with respect to the main frame, if you try to close the rear cover that covers the rear of the game board, the rear unit that is not closed interferes with the rear cover. Since the back cover is prevented from being closed by the rear unit that is not closed, it is possible to make the user aware that the rear unit is not closed, and to prevent forgetting to close it during maintenance or the like.

In addition, since the rear unit and the back cover are designed to interfere with each other, even if the rear unit tries to open from the body frame for some reason such as vibration during the game, the back cover interferes (blocks). , the large opening of the rear unit can be avoided, and the occurrence of trouble due to the opening of the rear unit can be prevented.

It is desirable that the rear unit be opened from the body frame so that at least part of the ball circulation means can be viewed from behind. As a result, by opening the rear unit with respect to the body frame, it is possible to check and perform maintenance on the portion between the body frame and the rear unit in the ball circulation means, thereby eliminating problems in the ball circulation means. can be made easier. Even if you forget to close the rear unit with respect to the body frame after maintenance, etc., when you try to close the back cover, the unclosed rear unit and the back cover interfere (abut) and close. Since it is blocked, it is possible to make the user aware that the rear unit is not closed, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close it during maintenance or the like.

Further, the game machine is provided with a lock means which is movable between a lock position and a release position, and locks the rear unit so that it cannot be opened and closed when the rear unit is moved to the lock position in a closed state with respect to the main body frame. Further, the locking means is provided so as to move to the locked position when the back cover is closed to the body frame in the unlocked position and the rear unit is closed to the body frame. can be As a result, when the locking means is moved to the locking position with the rear unit closed with respect to the body frame, the rear unit can be locked so that it cannot be opened or closed. It is possible to prevent the rear unit from opening and to prevent the occurrence of trouble due to the opening of the rear unit. Also, even if you forget to lock the rear unit with the locking means after closing the rear unit with respect to the body frame at the end of maintenance or the like, the locking means can be moved to the locking position by closing the back cover and locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock.

Further, when the locking means as described above is provided, since the locking means is adapted to move between the locking position and the unlocking position, it is possible to check whether or not the locking means is locked by confirming the position of the locking means. It can be easily discriminated, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock.

Furthermore, the game machine is further provided with a frame-like outer frame that supports the main body frame so as to be openable and closable forward, and the back cover is configured so that the main body frame is open with respect to the outer frame and attached to the main body frame. On the other hand, when the body frame is closed to the outer frame while the back cover is open, it may be provided so as to interfere with the outer frame. As a result, when the main body frame is opened forward with respect to the outer frame while the outer frame is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the rear side of the main body frame can be confirmed, and in this state, the back cover is opened. , the rear side of the game board can be checked, and when the rear unit is opened, the members between the main body frame and the rear unit can be checked, and workability such as confirmation and maintenance can be improved. be able to. When closing the body frame against the outer frame, if you try to close the back cover without closing the rear unit, the back cover interferes (contacts) with the rear unit and cannot be closed. It is possible to make the user aware of forgetting to close the door, and to prevent forgetting to close the rear unit. Furthermore, if the rear unit is closed and the back cover is open, or if both the rear unit and the back cover are open, and you try to close the body frame against the outer frame, the back cover interferes with the outer frame. Since it is prevented from being closed by (abutting), it is possible to make the user aware that the back cover or the like is open, and to prevent forgetting to close the back cover or the like.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The said rear unit
By opening from the body frame, at least a part of the ball circulation means is provided so as to be visible from the rear.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 2, the rear unit is provided so that at least a part of the ball circulation means can be visually recognized from the rear by opening from the body frame ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] ], see the description regarding the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, the frame substrate unit 730, etc.).

As a result, by opening the rear unit with respect to the body frame, it is possible to check and perform maintenance on the portion between the body frame and the rear unit in the ball circulation means, thereby eliminating problems in the ball circulation means. can be made easier. Even if you forget to close the rear unit to the body frame after maintenance, etc., when you try to close the back cover, the rear unit that is not closed interferes (contacts) with the back cover and closes. Since it is blocked, it is possible to make the user aware that the rear unit is not closed, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close it during maintenance or the like.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"Locking means that is movable between a locking position and a releasing position, and locks the rear unit so that it cannot be opened and closed when the rear unit is moved to the locking position in a state in which the rear unit is closed with respect to the body frame, It is also equipped with
The locking means are
When the back cover is closed with respect to the body frame at the release position and the rear unit is closed with respect to the body frame, it is provided to move to the lock position.
characterized by being

Here, the ``locking means'' includes ``what is fixed by enlarging the diameter of the front end by pushing the operating part into the locking position when the back cover abuts (for example, Nairatch)'', ``one end and has a locking piece that rotates from the unlocked position to the locked position when the back cover comes into contact with the other end on the opposite side. having a pressing piece that presses the rear unit against the main body frame when it moves from the unlocked position to the locked position by coming into contact with it; "having a lock pin inserted into the rear unit or body frame from a direction that intersects with it", and "having a slide from the unlocked position to the locked position when the back cover abuts", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 3, the game machine is movable between the locked position and the unlocked position, and when the rear unit is moved to the locked position in a closed state with respect to the body frame, the rear unit cannot be opened and closed. A locking means for locking is further provided, and the locking means moves to the locked position when the back cover is closed to the body frame in the unlocked position and the rear unit is closed to the body frame. (See description of back cover 505 and nylatch 774 in Detailed Description).

As a result, when the locking means is moved to the locking position with the rear unit closed with respect to the body frame, the rear unit can be locked so that it cannot be opened or closed. It is possible to prevent the rear unit from opening, thereby preventing the occurrence of trouble due to the opening of the rear unit. In addition, even if you forget to lock the rear unit with the locking means after closing the rear unit with respect to the body frame at the end of maintenance or the like, the locking means can be moved to the locking position by closing the back cover and locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock.

In addition, since the locking means is designed to move between the locking position and the unlocking position, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the locking means is locked by confirming the position of the locking means. Forgetting to do so can be prevented.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"Further comprising a frame-shaped outer frame that supports the body frame so that it can be opened and closed forward,
The back cover is
When the main body frame is open with respect to the outer frame and the back cover is open with respect to the main body frame, if the main body frame is to be closed to the outer frame, it interferes with the outer frame. It is set up as
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, the game machine is further provided with a frame-shaped outer frame that supports the main body frame so as to be openable and closable forward, and the back cover has the main body frame open with respect to the outer frame, Moreover, when the body frame is closed to the outer frame in a state where the back cover is open with respect to the body frame, it interferes with the outer frame ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] See the description regarding the back cover 505).

As a result, when the main body frame is opened forward with respect to the outer frame while the outer frame is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the rear side of the main body frame can be confirmed, and in this state, the back cover is opened. , the rear side of the game board can be checked, and when the rear unit is opened, the members between the main body frame and the rear unit can be checked, and workability such as confirmation and maintenance can be improved. be able to. When closing the body frame against the outer frame, if you try to close the back cover without closing the rear unit, the back cover interferes (contacts) with the rear unit and cannot be closed. It is possible to make the user aware of forgetting to close the door, and to prevent forgetting to close the rear unit. Furthermore, if the rear unit is closed and the back cover is open, or if both the rear unit and the back cover are open, and you try to close the body frame against the outer frame, the back cover interferes with the outer frame. Since it is prevented from being closed by (abutting), it is possible to make the user aware that the back cover or the like is open, and to prevent forgetting to close the back cover or the like.

Means 5: In the gaming machine,
"With a frame-like outer frame,
a main body frame which is supported forwardly to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and which detachably supports from the front a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls;
a back cover that is openable and closable rearwardly with respect to the body frame so as to cover the game board supported by the body frame from the rear;
a ball launching means provided in the body frame and capable of supplying game balls to the game area;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
a rear unit that is openable and closable rearward at a portion below the game board on the rear surface of the main body frame so that at least a part of the ball circulation means can be visually recognized from the rear by opening from the main body frame; ,
a lock means movable between a lock position and a release position for locking the rear unit so that it cannot be opened and closed when the rear unit is moved to the lock position in a state in which the rear unit is closed with respect to the body frame;
is further equipped with
the rear unit is provided so as to interfere with the back cover when an attempt is made to close the back cover to the body frame while the rear unit is open from the body frame;
The locking means is provided so as to move to the locking position when the back cover is closed with respect to the body frame in the unlocked position and in a state in which the rear unit is closed with respect to the body frame. and
When the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame and the back cover is opened with respect to the body frame, when the body frame is to be closed to the outer frame, the back cover is closed. It is designed to interfere with the outer frame.”
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 5, the frame-like outer frame and the game board which is supported forwardly to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and which has a game area in which games are played with game balls are detachably supported from the front. a back cover that can be opened and closed rearward with respect to the main body frame so as to cover the game board supported by the main body frame from behind; The ball data possessed by the player, which is provided with a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls and a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again, is converted into data. A game machine configured to shoot a game ball by a ball shooting means according to , wherein a part below the game board on the rear surface of the body frame is provided so as to be openable and closable rearward, and can be opened from the body frame. At least a part of the ball circulation means is visible from the rear, and the rear unit is movable between the locked position and the unlocked position, and the rear unit is moved to the locked position in a closed state with respect to the body frame. and locking means for locking the rear unit so that it cannot be opened and closed, and the rear unit interferes with the back cover when the back cover is closed to the main body frame while the rear unit is open from the main body frame. The locking means is provided so as to move to the locked position when the back cover is closed with respect to the body frame in the unlocked position and in a state where the rear unit is closed with respect to the body frame. The back cover is designed to interfere with the outer frame when the body frame is open with respect to the outer frame and the back cover is open with respect to the main body frame, and when the body frame is closed to the outer frame. It is provided in

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (so-called enclosed type gaming machine, management gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from the ball shooting means based on the number of balls of 1 or more), Since the rear unit is provided, the member provided behind the game board in the conventional game machine is used as the rear unit of this configuration, so that the depth direction of the game board can be widened by the amount of the member. As a game machine having a wide game board in the depth direction, it is possible to further differentiate the game machine from other game machines, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is highly appealing to players. In this game machine, when the main body frame is opened forward with respect to the outer frame while the outer frame is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the rear side of the main body frame can be seen. When opened, the rear side of the game board can be checked, and when the rear unit is opened, the part between the main body frame and the rear unit in the ball circulation means, the front of the rear unit on the rear surface of the main body frame The members provided, the front side of the rear unit, and the like can be checked and maintained, and workability related to maintenance and the like can be improved.

When closing the body frame against the outer frame, if you try to close the back cover without closing the rear unit, the back cover interferes (contacts) with the rear unit and cannot be closed. It is possible to make the user aware of forgetting to close the door, and to prevent forgetting to close the rear unit. Furthermore, if the rear unit is closed and the back cover is open, or if both the rear unit and the back cover are open, and you try to close the body frame against the outer frame, the back cover interferes with the outer frame. Since it is prevented from being closed by (abutting), it is possible to make the user aware that the back cover or the like is open, and to prevent forgetting to close the back cover or the like. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to close the rear unit or the back cover during maintenance or the like.

In addition, since the rear unit and the back cover are designed to interfere (abut) each other, even if the rear unit tries to open from the body frame for some reason such as vibration during game play, the back cover interferes (is blocked). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the rear unit from being opened wide, and to prevent the occurrence of problems due to the opening of the rear unit.

Further, when the locking means is moved to the locking position while the rear unit is closed with respect to the main body frame, the rear unit can be locked so that it cannot be opened and closed, so that the rear unit opens without permission due to vibration or other reasons. can be prevented, and the occurrence of problems due to the opening of the rear unit can be prevented. In addition, even if you forget to lock the rear unit with the locking means after closing the rear unit with respect to the body frame at the end of maintenance or the like, the locking means can be moved to the locking position by closing the back cover and locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock.

Furthermore, since the locking means is designed to move between the locking position and the unlocking position, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the lock is locked by confirming the position of the locking means. Forgetting to do so can be prevented.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of preventing the rear unit, which is openable and closable on the rear side of the body frame, from being forgotten to be closed during maintenance or the like. can be done.

[15-2c. Relationship between Solution Means of Second Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The ball launching unit 550 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment serves as the ball launching means of the above solving means, and the foul unit 570, circulating ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit 700 in this embodiment are the above solving means. The sphere circulation means of the means, the frame substrate unit 730 in this embodiment as the rear unit of the above solution, the Nairatch 774 in this embodiment as the lock means of the above solution, and the back cover 505 in this embodiment as the above solution. corresponding to the back cover of the .

[15-2d. Characteristic action and effect of the second technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 that shoots the game ball B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 is sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball lifter. Collected by the upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 and supplied to the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 based on the player's holding ball data (the number of held balls is 1 or more). In the pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed type game machine, management game machine), the frame substrate unit 730 as a rear unit is provided at a portion below the game board 5 on the rear surface of the main body frame 4, By using the frame substrate unit 730 of the present embodiment as the member provided behind the game board in the conventional pachinko machine, the depth direction of the game board 5 can be widened by the amount of the member. The pachinko machine 1 having a wide game board 5 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players can be provided. In this pachinko machine 1, when the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 with the outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall, the rear side of the main body frame 4 can be confirmed. In this state, when the back cover 505 is opened, the rear side of the game board 5 can be seen, and when the frame substrate unit 730 is opened, the main body frame speaker 503, the main body frame speaker box 504, and the circulation ball path unit 600 are displayed. , the sphere lifting unit 650, the front side of the substrate unit 730, and the like can be checked and maintained, and workability related to maintenance and the like can be improved.

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, if the rear cover 505 is closed without closing the frame substrate unit 730, the rear cover 505 interferes (contacts) with the frame substrate unit 730 and closes. Therefore, it is possible to make the user aware that the frame substrate unit 730 has been left unclosed, thereby preventing the frame substrate unit 730 from being left unclosed. Furthermore, if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 with the frame substrate unit 730 closed and the back cover 505 open, or with both the frame substrate unit 730 and the back cover 505 open, Since the back cover 505 interferes (contacts) with the outer frame 2 and is prevented from being closed, it is possible to make the user aware that the back cover 505 and the like are open, and to prevent forgetting to close the back cover 505 and the like. be able to. For this reason, it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the frame substrate unit 730 and the rear cover 505 during maintenance or the like.

Further, since the frame substrate unit 730 and the back cover 505 are designed to interfere (abut) each other, even if the frame substrate unit 730 tries to open from the main body frame 4 for some reason such as vibration during the game, the back cover does not open. By interfering with (blocking) 505, it is possible to prevent the frame substrate unit 730 from being opened wide, and to prevent problems due to the opening of the frame substrate unit 730.

In addition, when the frame substrate unit 730 is pressed against the main body frame 4 and moved to the lock position by pressing the ny latch 774 as locking means, the frame substrate unit 730 can be locked so that it cannot be opened and closed. Unintentional opening of the frame substrate unit 730 due to some reason such as vibration can be prevented, and problems caused by the opening of the frame substrate unit 730 can be prevented. Also, even if you forget to lock the ny latch 774 after closing the frame substrate unit 730 with respect to the main body frame 4 at the end of maintenance or the like, the ny latch 774 can be moved to the lock position by closing the back cover 505 and locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock.

Furthermore, since the Nylatch 774 as the locking means is designed to move between the locked position and the unlocked position, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the Nylatch 774 is locked by checking the position of the operating portion 774a of the Nylatch 774. It can be discriminated, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock.

[15-3. Third technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-3a. Background of the third technical feature]
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball sensor having a detection hole extending vertically in a ball passage through which game balls circulate is provided so as to detect a game ball circulating through the ball passage. (For example, Patent Document C: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-96868).

By the way, if a ball sensor having a detection hole as in Patent Document C is provided in a portion of the ball passage through which game balls flow in the left-right direction (or in the front-rear direction), the passage becomes narrow at the portion of the detection hole. As a result, there is a risk that the circulation speed of game balls will decrease or that ball jams will occur. Therefore, it is conceivable to use a photosensor that does not have a detection hole as the ball sensor. Frequent contact with the side wall may cause the side surface to become worn or scratched, making dirt such as dirt and dust more likely to occur. be.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, it is an object of the following means to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of game balls flowing through the ball passage.

[15-3b. Solution for Third Technical Feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The sphere circulation means is
A ball passage through which game balls circulate;
a photosensor for detecting a game ball circulating in the ball passage,
The ball passage is
At least the part where the photosensor is provided is provided so as to contact at two points below the center of the game ball."
It is characterized by being

Here, the part of the ball passage that "contacts at two points below the center of the game ball" is defined as "having a pair of sloped surfaces (with a V shape, an inverted trapezoid shape with a cross section narrowing downward, etc.)”, “having a pair of ridges extending in the distribution direction at intervals narrower than the diameter of the game machine”, and the like.

According to the configuration of means 1, there are a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls, a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and a game ball shot by the ball shooting means being collected. and a ball circulation means for supplying the ball to the ball shooting means again, wherein the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the data of the ball held by the player converted into data, The ball circulation means has a ball passage through which game balls circulate, and a photosensor for detecting the game balls circulating in the ball passage. , are provided so as to contact at two points below the center of the game ball (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [4-5. Ball lifting unit] chapter, FIG. 52 and the description of FIG. 53, etc.).

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. At least a photosensor portion in a ball passage through which game balls circulate in a game machine (a so-called closed-type game machine, a controlled game machine) configured to shoot game balls from a ball shooting means based on a ball number of 1 or more) However, since the game ball is in contact with two points below the center, the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage at the photosensor portion, and the game ball contacts the side wall of the ball passage. Thus, it is possible to avoid the generation of contamination such as dirt and dust due to abrasion or damage to the side wall. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of game balls circulating in the ball passage.

In addition, since the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage at least at the location of the photosensor in the ball passage, the positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball can be kept constant. To surely detect a game ball circulating in a ball passage without erroneous detection.

In addition, a pair of inclined surfaces are provided in the ball passage at least at a portion where the photo sensor is provided, and the game ball touches (contacts) with each of them. You may make it have the first shape passage part which has. As a result, since the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of inclined surfaces in the first shape passage portion in which the photosensor is provided in the ball passage, compared with the case where the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of ridges. As a result, it is possible to reduce the wear and damage of the contact portion caused by the game ball, prevent the occurrence of contamination such as dirt and dust, and reduce erroneous detection of the game ball by the photosensor.

In addition, as described above, when the ball passage is provided with the first shape passage portion, the first shape passage portion of the ball passage is provided with a pair of slanted surfaces, so dirt such as dirt and dust can be prevented from coming into contact with the game ball. Even if it occurs, the inclined surface can guide the dirt downward from the contact part with the game ball, reduce the influence of the dirt on the photosensor, and prevent the dirt from adhering to the game ball. can be avoided.

In addition, the ball passage may have an opening that is provided upstream of the portion where the photosensor is provided and opens downward to a size that does not hinder the circulation of game balls. As a result, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be discharged from the opening to the outside, so that the influence of dirt on the photosensor can be reduced, and the game ball caused by dirt on the photosensor can be discharged. false positives can be reduced.

Further, the ball passage is provided on at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the portion where the photosensor is provided, and a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and a flat bottom surface in contact with the game ball, and a width direction of the bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends. As a result, at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the portion where at least the photosensor is provided in the ball passage is the second shape passage portion composed of the flat bottom surface and the pair of side wall surfaces, so that the second shape passage When a plurality of game balls stop at the part, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls from the downstream side are lined up so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces. That is, when a plurality of game balls stop in the second shape passage portion, they are arranged in a zigzag pattern and are not arranged in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game balls to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, compared to the case where a plurality of game balls are arranged in a line on the axis, It is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the stationary member, to make it difficult to damage the member, and to suppress the increase in the cost of the game machine without the need to reinforce the member excessively. can.

In addition, if the portion of the ball passage where the photosensor is provided can temporarily stop the flow of the game ball, when the time and non-detection time of the game ball by the photosensor exceeds a predetermined threshold, It may be determined whether or not there is a game ball at a part of the ball passage where the game ball stays. By the way, the detection of a game ball at a winning opening or the like is performed by checking the output from a photo sensor (ball sensor) at predetermined interrupt intervals (for example, 4 ms). Then, when it becomes "011"), it is determined that the game ball has been detected (ON). That is, when the output from the photosensor is "011", it is determined to be ON, and when it is other than "011", it is determined to be OFF. However, if a photosensor provided in a portion (stationary portion) where the flow of game balls temporarily stops is used to determine the presence or absence of a game ball by the determination method described above, the photosensor may , When there are no game balls in the stationary portion, only OFF occurs, and when game balls are supplied to the stationary portion, ON occurs frequently at short intervals, and the game balls stored in the stationary portion are released one by one. When the ball is moving (the game ball is moving at intervals of shooting), many short-interval OFFs occur. Therefore, with the determination method as described above, it was not possible to accurately determine that there is no game ball in the stationary portion. On the other hand, the presence or absence of the game ball is determined when the detection time and the non-detection time of the game ball by the photosensor exceed a predetermined threshold value. In other words, a threshold value is provided for each of ON (presence) determination and OFF (absence) determination, and ON or OFF is determined only when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the photosensor is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, it is possible to reliably determine the presence or absence of a game ball in the stationary portion of the ball passage where a plurality of game balls are stationary.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"said sphere passage,
A first shape passage portion provided at least in a portion where the photosensor is provided, and having a pair of inclined surfaces with which a game ball contacts each other and which is inclined so that the interval widens as it goes upward. , have
It is characterized by being

According to the structure of the means 2, the ball passage is provided at least in the part where the photo sensor is provided, and the game ball touches (contacts) with each of them, and is inclined so that the interval increases as it goes upward. It has a first shape passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], a V-shaped passage portion 651a of a sphere-lifting entrance passage 651 and a sphere-lifting exit See the description regarding the V-shaped passage portion 652a of the passage 652).

As a result, since the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of inclined surfaces in the first shape passage portion in which the photosensor is provided in the ball passage, compared with the case where the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of ridges. As a result, it is possible to reduce the wear and damage of the contact portion caused by the game ball, prevent the occurrence of contamination such as dirt and dust, and reduce erroneous detection of the game ball by the photosensor.

In addition, since a pair of inclined surfaces are provided in the first shape passage portion of the ball passage, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surfaces remove the dirt from the contact portion with the game ball. It is possible to guide the ball further downward, reduce the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and avoid the adhesion of dirt to the game ball.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"said sphere passage,
It is provided on the upstream side of the part where the photosensor is provided, and has an opening that opens downward to a size that does not hinder the circulation of game balls.
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, the ball passage has an opening portion which is provided upstream of the portion where the photosensor is provided and opens downward in a size that does not hinder the circulation of game balls. (Refer to the description of the sphere entrance ground sheet metal 655 and the sphere exit ground sheet metal 656 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

As a result, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be discharged from the opening to the outside, so that the influence of dirt on the photosensor can be reduced, and the game ball caused by dirt on the photosensor can be discharged. false positives can be reduced.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"said sphere passage,
It is provided on at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the part where the photosensor is provided, a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and a game ball, and from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface and a second shape passage portion having a pair of standing side wall surfaces."
characterized by being

By the way, if the shape of the ball passage is such that it touches at two points below the center of the game ball, as described above, the game ball will not swing in the width direction of the ball passage. game balls are parked, the plurality of game balls are arranged in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, a large ball pressure due to the plurality of game balls acts on the member that holds the plurality of game balls, and there is a risk that the member will be easily damaged. Costs may increase.

According to the configuration of means 4, the ball passage is provided on at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the portion where the photosensor is provided, and a flat bottom surface that is in contact with the game ball and has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball. , and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], a sphere lifting (See the description regarding the U-shaped passage portion 651b of the inlet passage 651 and the U-shaped passage portion 652b of the ball lifting outlet passage 652).

As a result, at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the portion where at least the photosensor is provided in the ball passage is the second shape passage portion composed of the flat bottom surface and the pair of side wall surfaces, so that the second shape passage When a plurality of game balls stop at the part, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls from the downstream side are lined up so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces. That is, when a plurality of game balls stop in the second shape passage portion, they are arranged in a zigzag pattern and are not arranged in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game balls to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, compared to the case where a plurality of game balls are arranged in a line on the axis, It is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the stationary member, to make it difficult to damage the member, and to suppress the increase in the cost of the game machine without the need to reinforce the member excessively. can.

The second-shaped passage portion may be provided only on the downstream side of the photosensor, may be provided only on the upstream side of the photosensor, or may be provided on both the downstream side and the upstream side of the photosensor. . In the case of a ball passage in which many game balls are parked on the downstream side of the photosensor, it is desirable to provide the second shape passage portion at least on the downstream side of the photosensor.

Means 5: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The sphere circulation means is
A ball passage through which game balls circulate;
a photosensor for detecting a game ball circulating in the ball passage,
The ball passage is
It is provided in the part where the photosensor is provided, and the game balls are in contact with each other so that they are in contact with each other at two points below the center of the game ball. a first shape passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces that
an opening provided on the upstream side of the first shape passage portion and opening downward in a size that does not hinder the circulation of game balls;
It is provided on at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the first shape passage portion, a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball. and a second shape passage portion having a pair of side wall surfaces that
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 5, there are a game board having a game area where a game is played with game balls, a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and a game ball shot by the ball shooting means being collected. and a ball circulation means for supplying the ball to the ball shooting means again, wherein the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the data of the ball held by the player converted into data, The ball circulation means has a ball passage through which game balls circulate and a photosensor for detecting the game balls circulating in the ball passage, and the ball passage is provided at a portion where the photosensor is provided. A first shape having a pair of slanted surfaces that are slanted so that the game ball touches them at two points below the center of the game ball, and the interval widens as it goes upward. A passage portion, an opening provided on the upstream side of the first shape passage portion and opening downward in a size that does not hinder the circulation of the game ball, and a downstream or upstream side of the first shape passage portion A second shape passage portion provided on at least one side and having a flat bottom surface in contact with the game ball and having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface; ,

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a game machine (a so-called closed-type game machine, a controlled game machine) in which game balls are shot from a ball shooting means based on a ball number of 1 or more), at least a photosensor portion in a ball passage through which game balls circulate. as a first shape passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the interval increases as it goes upward, and the pair of inclined surfaces contact the game ball at two points below the center. Therefore, the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage at the portion of the photosensor, and the game ball contacts the side wall of the ball passage and the side wall is worn or scratched, and dirt such as dust and dirt is removed. can be avoided from occurring. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of game balls circulating in the ball passage.

In addition, in the first shape passage portion provided with the photosensor in the ball passage, the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage, so the positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball can be kept constant. Thus, it is possible to reliably detect a game ball circulating in the ball passage without erroneous detection due to the displacement of the positional relationship.

In addition, since the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of inclined surfaces in the first shape passage portion where the photosensor is provided, compared to the case where the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of ridges, the game ball It is possible to reduce wear and scratching of the contact portion due to the contact area, prevent the occurrence of dirt such as dust and dirt, and reduce erroneous detection of the game ball by the photosensor.

Furthermore, since a pair of inclined surfaces are provided in the first shape passage portion of the ball passage, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surfaces remove the dirt from the contact portion with the game ball. It is possible to guide the ball further downward, reduce the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and avoid the adhesion of dirt to the game ball.

In addition, since the opening is provided on the upstream side of the first shape passage portion in which the photosensor is provided in the ball passage, dirt such as dirt and dust inside the ball passage can be discharged to the outside through the opening. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and to reduce erroneous detection of a game ball caused by dirt in the photosensor.

In addition, since at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the first shape passage portion in which at least the photosensor is provided in the ball passage is the second shape passage portion composed of the flat bottom surface and the pair of side wall surfaces, When a plurality of game balls stop in the two-shaped passage portion, the game balls are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls are arranged so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. That is, when a plurality of game balls stop in the second shape passage portion, they are arranged in a zigzag pattern and are not arranged in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game balls to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, compared to the case where a plurality of game balls are arranged in a row on the axis, It is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the stationary member, making it difficult to damage the member, and avoiding an increase in the cost of the game machine because the strength and rigidity of the member do not need to be increased more than necessary. can be suppressed.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of game balls circulating in the ball passage.

[15-3c. Relationship between Solution Means of Third Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The ball launching unit 550 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment serves as the ball launching means of the above solving means, and the foul unit 570, circulating ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit 700 in this embodiment are the above solving means. In the ball circulation means of the means, the ball lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting outlet passage 652 of the ball lifting unit 650 in this embodiment, and the ball feeding passage 703 of the ball feeding unit 700 are the ball passages of the above solution, The V-shaped passage portion 651a and the V-shaped passage portion 652a in the present embodiment are the first shape passage portions of the above solution, and the U-shaped passage portion 651b, the U-shaped passage portion 652b, and the ball feeding passage 703 in the present embodiment are the above-mentioned The portions where the sphere-lifting entrance earth sheet metal 655 and the sphere-lifting exit earth sheet metal 656 in this embodiment are attached to the second shape passage portion of the solving means correspond to the openings of the solving means.

[15-3d. Characteristic Actions and Effects of the Third Technical Feature]
In the following, the actions and effects of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 in the ball lifting unit 650 will be described as the ball passage. Description is omitted. According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 that shoots the game ball B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 is sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball lifter. Collected by the upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 and supplied to the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 based on the player's holding ball data (the number of held balls is 1 or more). In a pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed type game machine, management game machine), a lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of a photo sensor in a ball lifting exit passage 652 of a ball lifting unit 650 through which game balls B circulate. The portion is a V-shaped passage portion 652a having a V-shaped cross section having a pair of slanted surfaces that are slanted so that the interval widens as it goes upward, and the pair of slanted surfaces allows the game ball B to be positioned below its center. Since they are in contact with each other at two points, the game ball B does not swing in the width direction of the ball lifting exit passage 652 at the portion of the lifting exit sensor 654, and the game ball B does not hit the side wall of the ball lifting exit passage 652. It is possible to avoid the generation of stains such as dirt and dust due to the side walls being worn or scratched due to contact. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the sphere lifting exit passage 652 can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing the occurrence of the above and reducing erroneous detection of the game ball B flowing through the ball lifting exit passage 652.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the V-shaped passage portion 652a provided with the lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of a photo sensor in the ball lifting exit passage 652, the game ball B does not swing in the width direction of the ball lifting exit passage 652. The positional relationship between the lifting exit sensor 654 (photosensor) and the game ball B can be made constant, and the game ball circulating in the ball lifting exit passage 652 can be eliminated by eliminating erroneous detection due to the deviation of the positional relationship. B can be reliably detected.

In addition, since the game ball B is brought into contact with the pair of inclined surfaces in the V-shaped passage portion 652a provided with the lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of a photo sensor, the game ball B is brought into contact with the pair of ridges. Compared to the case where the game ball B is brought into contact with the ball, it is possible to reduce the wear and damage of the contact part by the game ball B, prevent the occurrence of stains such as dirt and dust, and prevent the erroneous detection of the game ball B by the lifting exit sensor 654. can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage portion 652a of the ball lifting exit passage 652 is provided with a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to the contact of the game ball B, the inclined surfaces remove the dirt. It can be guided downward from the contact portion with the ball B, the influence of dirt on the lifting exit sensor 654 can be reduced, and the adhesion of dirt to the game ball B can be avoided.

In addition, an opening to which a sphere lifting outlet ground sheet metal 656 is attached is provided on the upstream side of the V-shaped passage 652a in which the sphere lifting outlet sensor 654, which is a photo sensor, is provided in the sphere lifting outlet passage 652. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball lifting outlet passage 652 can be discharged to the outside from the opening, so that the influence of dirt on the lifting outlet sensor 654 can be reduced. False detection of the game ball B caused by dirt in the upper exit sensor 654 can be reduced.

In addition, at least one of the downstream side or the upstream side (here, both the upstream side and the downstream side) of the V-shaped passage portion 652a in which the lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of the photo sensor in the ball lifting exit passage 652 is provided Since the U-shaped passage 652b and the ball feeding passage 703 are formed with a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces, when a plurality of game balls B stop in the U-shaped passage 652b and the ball feeding passage 703, , By being pushed by the game ball B on the upstream side, the game balls B are arranged so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. That is, when a plurality of game balls B are stopped in the U-shaped passage portion 652b and the ball feeding passage 703, they are arranged in a staggered manner and are not arranged in a line on the axis of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 and the ball feeding passage 703. Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game ball B to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, compared to the case where the game balls are arranged in a row on the axis, the plurality of game balls It is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the ball-feeding movable member 705 (the ball stop portion 705e) of the ball-feeding unit 700 that stops the ball B, thereby making it difficult to damage the ball-feeding movable member 705. There is no need to reinforce the movable member 705 excessively, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[15-4. Fourth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-4a. Background of the fourth technical feature]
A game machine such as a pachinko machine is proposed in which a ball sensor is provided in a ball passage through which game balls circulate, and the presence or absence of a game ball in the ball passage is determined by detection of the game ball by the ball sensor. (For example, Patent Document D: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-188537). In the technique of Patent Document 1, two ball sensors are provided at intervals in the ball passage, and the presence or absence of game balls is determined by combining detection signals from the two ball sensors.

However, in the technique of Patent Document D, since a plurality of ball sensors are provided to determine the presence or absence of a game ball in a predetermined portion of the ball passage, the cost increases and the load on the control means involved in the determination is increased. There was a problem of increasing Therefore, it is conceivable to determine the presence or absence of a game ball by a single ball sensor, but it is difficult to accurately determine the absence of a game ball at a portion (stationary portion) where the circulation of the game ball temporarily stops. was difficult.

Therefore, in the following solution means, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, a game that can reliably detect the presence or absence of a game ball at a stationary portion where the game ball is temporarily stopped in the passage through which the game ball circulates. The challenge is to provide the machine.

[15-4b. Solution for the fourth technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
a control means capable of controlling the ball circulation means and the ball launch means;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The ball launching means and the ball circulation means are
a stopping part provided on a circulating ball path through which the game balls circulate and capable of temporarily stopping the circulation of the game balls;
a ball sensor for detecting a game ball stationary at the stationary portion;
and
The control means is
When the game ball detection time and non-detection time by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold value, the presence or absence of the game ball in the stationary portion is determined, and the ball circulation means is controlled.
It is characterized by being

Here, the ``retaining portion'' includes a ``launching rail (launch pad) in the ball launching means'', a ``ball feeding passage of the ball feeding unit that supplies game balls one by one to the ball firing means in the ball circulation means'', and a ``ball feeding passage''. A ball lifting inlet passage and a ball lifting outlet passage of a ball lifting unit that lifts game balls in the ball circulation means, a ball storage passage of a circulation ball path unit that stores game balls in the ball circulation means, etc. mentioned.

Further, the "ball sensor" includes a "photosensor having a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion," a "dielectric sensor that detects changes in induced current," a "contact sensor that detects contact with a game ball," and a "magnetic change sensor." magnetic sensor for detecting ", "capacitance sensor for detecting change in electrostatic capacity", and the like. When a plurality of stationary portions are provided, the ball sensors provided in the respective stationary portions may be of the same type or of different types.

By the way, conventionally, the detection of a game ball at a prize-winning hole or the like is performed by checking the output from a photosensor (ball sensor) at each predetermined interrupt period (for example, 4 ms). (In other words, "011"), it is determined that the game ball has been detected (ON). That is, when the output from the photosensor is "011", it is determined to be ON, and when it is other than "011", it is determined to be OFF. However, when a ball sensor is provided in a stationary portion where the flow of a game ball temporarily stops, if the presence or absence of a game ball is determined by the conventional determination method as described above, the ball sensor cannot detect the stationary portion. When there are no game balls in the stationary portion, only OFF occurs, and when game balls are supplied to the stationary portion, ON occurs frequently at short intervals, and the game balls stored in the stationary portion move one by one. If there is (the game ball is moving at the shooting interval), many short-interval OFFs will occur. Therefore, in the conventional determination method, it was not possible to accurately determine that there is no game ball in the stationary portion.

According to the configuration of means 1, a game board having a game area where a game is played with game balls, a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and a game ball shot by the ball shooting means are collected. and a control means capable of controlling the ball circulation means and the ball launching means, and the ball launching means is operated based on the data of the player's ball held in the form of data. A gaming machine that shoots game balls, wherein the ball shooting means and the ball circulation means are provided on a circulation ball path through which the game balls circulate, and a stopping section capable of temporarily stopping the circulation of the game balls. and a ball sensor for detecting a game ball stationary at the stationary portion, and the control means detects when the game ball detection time and non-detection time by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold value, and the stationary portion (In [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [4-5. Ball lifting unit] chapter, Figures 52 and 53, etc.). see description).

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (a so-called enclosed-type gaming machine, a controlled gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from a ball shooting means based on a number of balls of 1 or more), game balls on a circulating ball path through which game balls circulate are A ball sensor is provided in the stationary portion which can be temporarily stopped, and when the detection time and the non-detection time of the game ball by the ball sensor exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the presence or absence of the game ball in the stationary portion is determined by the control means. It is arranged to control the circulation means. In other words, in the conventional determination, only the condition (threshold value) that the game ball is present (ON) is used to determine the presence or absence (ON/OFF) of the game ball. A threshold value is provided for each of the (present) determination and the OFF (absent) determination, and ON or OFF is determined only when the non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the ball sensor is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, it is possible to reliably determine the presence or absence of a game ball in the stationary portion of the ball passage where a plurality of game balls are stationary.

In addition, since the presence or absence of game balls in the stationary portion is reliably determined and the ball circulation means is controlled, the ball running out occurs in the circulating ball path (stationary portion) and the held ball data (number of held balls) is lost. In spite of the presence of the game balls, the game balls cannot be shot, or the ball circulation means is damaged or clogged due to the further supply of game balls when the retaining part is full. It can be avoided, and the player can continue to enjoy the game.

If the threshold value is too small, even a slight vibration or the like causes erroneous detection and noise in control. Also, if the threshold is too large, the state of the game ball will be missed. Therefore, the appropriate threshold varies depending on the location where the sphere sensor is installed, but it is desirable that the minimum is 10 ms or more and the maximum is 300 ms or less. Also, if the threshold value is determined to be a multiple of the interrupt cycle, it is only necessary to count the number of interrupts in terms of software control, so the load on the software can be reduced.

Also, a plurality of stationary parts may be provided on the circulating ball path, and the presence or absence of game balls may be determined by the same threshold value or different threshold value according to the stationary part by the control means. As a result, the threshold for determining the presence or absence of game balls can be changed according to the stationary portion (ball sensor). For the ball sensor in the stationary part such as the passage, the threshold value is decreased, and the ball sensor in the stationary part such as the ball lifting inlet passage and the ball lifting outlet passage of the ball lifting unit that lifts the game ball to the ball feeding unit , it is possible to increase or decrease the threshold. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game balls according to the circulation speed (stop frequency) of game balls in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls, etc., it is possible to efficiently perform control by the control means. , the load on the control can be reduced.

Further, a plurality of stationary parts are provided on the circulating ball path, and the control means determines the presence and absence of game balls with the same threshold value or the presence and absence of game balls with different threshold values according to the stationary parts. You can let them do it. As a result, it is possible to change the threshold value for the existence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball according to the stationary portion (ball sensor). In the ball sensor of the stationary part such as the launch rail, the threshold value for the presence of the game ball and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball are made the same, and the ball lifting entrance passage and the ball lifting It is possible to make the threshold value for the presence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball different from each other in the ball sensor at the stationary portion such as the upper exit passage. Therefore, depending on the circulation speed (stop frequency) of the game balls in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls, etc., the threshold value for the existence of the game ball and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball may be made the same or different. , the control by the control means can be efficiently performed in accordance with the stationary portion, and the load on the control can be reduced.

In addition, at least a part of the stopping portion has a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and with which the game ball comes into contact, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface. A passage may be provided. As a result, at least a part of the stopping portion where the game balls temporarily stay is provided with a U-shaped passage portion consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces, so that a plurality of game balls can pass through the U-shaped passage portion. When stopped, the game balls are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls are arranged so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. That is, when a plurality of game balls stop in the U-shaped passage, they are arranged in a staggered manner, and the game balls are not arranged in a row on the axis of the stop (passage). Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game ball to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, it is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the predetermined member that holds the game ball. This makes it possible to make the member less likely to break, and to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine without the need to reinforce the member excessively.

Further, a photo sensor is included as the ball sensor, and at least the part of the photo sensor in the stationary portion has a pair of slanted surfaces which are in contact with the game ball and are slanted so that the interval widens as it goes upward. A V-shaped passage may be provided. As a result, since the V-shaped passage portion is provided in the portion where the photosensor is provided in the stopping portion, the game ball contacts the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage portion, and the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the passage (ball passage) of the stationary part, and the game ball contacts the side wall and the side wall is worn or damaged, thereby avoiding the generation of stains such as dust and dirt. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dirt such as dirt and dust in the stationary portion as much as possible, so that it is possible to prevent erroneous detection from occurring due to interference of light receiving and emitting of the photosensor due to dirt etc. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of a game ball parked at a parking portion.

Further, as described above, when the V-shaped passage is provided, at least at the portion of the photo sensor in the stopping portion, the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage prevent the game ball from swinging in the width direction of the ball passage. The positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball can be made constant, and erroneous detection due to deviation of the positional relationship can be eliminated, and the game ball can be reliably detected.

Furthermore, when the V-shaped passage portion is provided as described above, since the V-shaped passage portion has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to contact with the game ball, the The slanted surface can guide the dirt below the contact part with the game ball, reduce the influence of the dirt on the photosensor, and prevent the dirt from adhering to the game ball. The V-shaped passage portion may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage having a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected to each other. It may be an inverted trapezoidal passage narrowing down.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The said stop is
A plurality are provided on the circulation ball path,
The control means is
Determining whether or not there is a game ball with the same threshold value or different threshold values according to the stationary portion.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 2, a plurality of stationary parts are provided on the circulating ball path, and the presence or absence of game balls is determined by the same threshold value or different threshold value according to the stationary part by the control means. Yes (see descriptions regarding launch subtraction sensor 554, lift entry sensor 653, lift exit sensor 654, pre-launch sensor 704, etc. in Detailed Description).

As a result, the threshold for determining the presence or absence of game balls can be changed according to the stationary portion (ball sensor). For the ball sensor in the stationary part such as the passage, the threshold value is decreased, and the ball sensor in the stationary part such as the ball lifting inlet passage and the ball lifting outlet passage of the ball lifting unit that lifts the game ball to the ball feeding unit , it is possible to increase or decrease the threshold. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game balls according to the circulation speed (stop frequency) of game balls in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls, etc., it is possible to efficiently perform control by the control means. , the load on the control can be reduced.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The stop is
A plurality are provided on the circulation ball path,
The control means is
Depending on the stationary part, the presence and absence of game balls are determined by the same threshold value, or the presence and absence of game balls are determined by different threshold values.
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, a plurality of stationary parts are provided on the circulating ball path, and the control means sets the presence and absence of game balls to the same threshold value or the presence and absence of game balls according to the stationary parts. Different thresholds are used for determination (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], see the descriptions regarding the launch subtraction sensor 554, the lift entrance sensor 653, the lift exit sensor 654, the before-fire sensor 704, etc. ).

As a result, it is possible to change the threshold value for the existence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball according to the stationary portion (ball sensor). In the ball sensor of the stationary part such as the launch rail, the threshold value for the presence of the game ball and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball are made the same, and the ball lifting entrance passage and the ball lifting It is possible to make the threshold value for the presence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball different from each other in the ball sensor at the stationary portion such as the upper exit passage. Therefore, depending on the circulation speed (stop frequency) of the game balls in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls, etc., the threshold value for the existence of the game ball and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball may be made the same or different. , the control by the control means can be efficiently performed in accordance with the stationary portion, and the load on the control can be reduced.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The said stop is
A U-shaped passage portion having a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction is provided at least in part. ing"
characterized by being

By the way, since the circulation of the game balls is temporarily stopped by a predetermined member in the retaining portion of the circulating ball path, the more game balls are retained in the retaining portion, the more the game balls are retained. The ball pressure applied to a predetermined member that is in contact with the ball may increase, and the member may be easily damaged, and reinforcing the member to avoid damage may increase the cost.

According to the configuration of means 4, at least a part of the stopping portion is provided with a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball with which the game ball contacts, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface. (In [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the U-shaped passage portion 651b of the sphere lifting inlet passage 651 and the U-shaped passage portion of the sphere lifting outlet passage 652 are provided. See the description regarding section 652b).

As a result, at least a part of the stopping portion where the game balls temporarily stay is provided with a U-shaped passage portion consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces, so that a plurality of game balls can pass through the U-shaped passage portion. When stopped, the game balls are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls are arranged so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. That is, when a plurality of game balls stop in the U-shaped passage, they are arranged in a staggered manner, and the game balls are not arranged in a row on the axis of the stop (passage). Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game ball to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, it is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the predetermined member that holds the game ball. This makes it possible to make the member less likely to break, and to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine without the need to reinforce the member excessively.

Means 5: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 4,
"The sphere sensor
contains a photosensor,
The stop portion is
A V-shaped passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces inclined so that a game ball touches them and the interval widens as it goes upward is provided at least at the location of the photosensor.”
It is characterized by being

By the way, when a photo sensor is used as a ball sensor, if the inner peripheral shape of the photo sensor portion in the stationary portion is square, the game ball tends to swing in the width direction of the stationary portion (ball passage). By contacting the side wall, the side surface is worn or damaged, and dirt such as dirt and dust is likely to be generated.

According to the configuration of the means 5, a photo sensor is included as the ball sensor, and a game ball is in contact with at least the portion of the photo sensor in the stationary portion, and the pair is inclined so that the distance increases as it goes upward. (In the [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the V-shaped passage portion 651a of the upper ball-lifting inlet passage 651 and the V-shaped portion of the ball-lifting outlet passage 652 are provided. (See the passage 652a, the lift inlet sensor 653, lift outlet sensor 654, etc.).

As a result, since the V-shaped passage portion is provided in the portion where the photo sensor is provided in the stationary portion, the game ball contacts the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage portion, and the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the passage (ball passage) of the stationary part, and the game ball contacts the side wall and the side wall is worn or damaged, thereby avoiding the generation of contamination such as dust and dirt. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce contamination such as dirt and dust in the stationary portion as much as possible, so that it is possible to prevent erroneous detection from occurring due to obstruction of light reception and emission of the photosensor due to contamination. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of a game ball parked at a parking portion.

In addition, at least at the portion of the photosensor in the stationary portion, the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage prevents the game ball from swinging in the width direction of the ball passage, so that the positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball is kept constant. It is possible to eliminate erroneous detection due to the displacement of the positional relationship and reliably detect the game ball.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage portion has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surface removes the dirt from the contact portion with the game ball. It is possible to guide it downward, reduce the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and avoid the adhesion of dirt to the game ball.

The V-shaped passage portion may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage having a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected to each other. It may be an inverted trapezoidal passage narrowing down.

Means 6: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
a control means capable of controlling the ball circulation means and the ball launch means;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The ball launching means and the ball circulation means are
a plurality of stopping portions provided on a circulating ball path through which game balls circulate and capable of temporarily stopping the circulation of game balls;
a plurality of ball sensors including photosensors for detecting game balls stationary at each of the stationary portions;
and
The stop portion is
``V-shaped passages having a pair of sloping surfaces which are in contact with each other and which are slanted such that the distance between them widens upward'' is provided at least at the location of the photosensor, and ``the game ball A U-shaped passage portion having a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface” excludes the V-shaped passage portion is provided in the part,
The control means is
When the game ball detection time and non-detection time by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold value, the presence or absence of the game ball in the stationary portion is determined to control the ball circulation means, and further, "according to the stationary portion , determine the presence or absence of a game ball by the same threshold value or a different threshold value”, and “depending on the stationary portion, the same threshold value or the presence and absence of a game ball are determined. and are determined by different thresholds.
It is characterized by

According to the configuration of means 6, there are a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls, a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and a game ball shot by the ball shooting means being recovered. and a control means capable of controlling the ball circulation means and the ball launching means, wherein the ball launching means operates based on the data of the player's ball held in the form of data. A gaming machine that shoots game balls, wherein the ball shooting means and the ball circulation means are provided on a circulation ball path through which the game balls circulate, and a plurality of devices capable of temporarily stopping the circulation of the game balls. It has a stationary portion and a plurality of ball sensors including a photosensor that detects a game ball stationary at each stationary portion. A V-shaped passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the interval is widened is provided at least at the photosensor portion, and a flat surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball with which the game ball comes into contact. A U-shaped passage portion having a bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface is provided in a portion other than the V-shaped passage portion, and the control means is a game ball using a ball sensor. When the detection time and the non-detection time exceed a predetermined threshold value, the presence or absence of the game ball in the stationary portion is determined to control the ball circulation means, and further, "the same threshold value or a different threshold value depending on the stationary portion, "Determine the presence or absence of the game ball by" and "Determine the presence and absence of the game ball with the same threshold value or the presence and absence of the game ball with different threshold values according to the stationary part". It is a thing.

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (a so-called enclosed-type gaming machine, a controlled gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from a ball shooting means based on a number of balls of 1 or more), game balls on a circulating ball path through which game balls circulate are A ball sensor is provided in the stationary portion which can be temporarily stopped, and when the detection time and the non-detection time of the game ball by the ball sensor exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the presence or absence of the game ball in the stationary portion is determined by the control means. It is arranged to control the circulation means. In other words, in the conventional determination, only the condition (threshold value) that the game ball is present (ON) is used to determine the presence or absence (ON/OFF) of the game ball. A threshold value is provided for each of the (present) determination and the OFF (absent) determination, and ON or OFF is determined only when the non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the ball sensor is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, it is possible to reliably determine the presence or absence of a game ball in the stationary portion of the ball passage where a plurality of game balls are stationary.

In addition, since the presence or absence of game balls in the stationary portion is reliably determined and the ball circulation means is controlled, the ball running out occurs in the circulation ball path (stationary portion) and the held ball data (number of held balls) is lost. In spite of the presence of the game balls, the game balls cannot be shot, or the ball circulation means is damaged or the balls are clogged due to the further supply of the game balls in the state where the retaining part is full. It can be avoided, and the player can continue to enjoy the game.

Furthermore, since the threshold value for determining the presence or absence of game balls can be changed according to the stationary portion (ball sensor), for example, the ball feeding path of the ball feeding unit that supplies game balls to the ball launching means For ball sensors in stationary parts such as It is possible to increase or decrease the threshold. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game balls according to the circulation speed (stop frequency) of game balls in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls, etc., it is possible to efficiently perform control by the control means. , the load on the control can be reduced.

In addition, since the threshold value for the presence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball may be changed according to the stationary portion (ball sensor), for example, the ball shooting means for shooting the game ball In the ball sensor of the stationary part such as the launch rail, the threshold value for the presence of the game ball and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball are set to be the same, or the ball lifting entrance passage and the ball lifting It is possible to make the threshold value for the presence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball different from each other in the ball sensor at the stationary portion such as the exit passage. Therefore, depending on the circulation speed (stop frequency) of the game balls in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls, etc., the threshold value for the existence of the game ball and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball may be made the same or different. , the control by the control means can be efficiently performed in accordance with the stationary portion, and the load on the control can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage is provided in the portion where the photo sensor is provided in the stopping portion, the game ball contacts the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage, and the game ball is moved to the photo sensor. To prevent a game ball from swinging in the width direction of a passage (ball passage) of a stationary part and preventing the side wall from being worn or scratched by a game ball coming into contact with the side wall, thereby preventing dirt such as dirt and dust from being generated. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dirt such as dirt and dust in the stationary portion as much as possible, so that it is possible to prevent erroneous detection from occurring due to interference of light receiving and emitting of the photosensor due to dirt etc. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of a game ball parked at a parking portion.

In addition, since a U-shaped passage consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces is provided in a portion other than the V-shaped passage where the photo sensor is provided in the stopping portion, a plurality of games can be played in the U-shaped passage. When the ball stops, it is pushed by the game ball on the upstream side, and the game balls are arranged so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. That is, when a plurality of game balls stop in the U-shaped passage, they are arranged in a staggered manner, and the game balls are not arranged in a row on the axis of the stop (passage). Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game ball to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, it is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the predetermined member that holds the game ball. This makes it possible to make the member less likely to break, and to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine without the need to reinforce the member excessively.

Furthermore, at the location of the photo sensor in the stationary portion, the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage prevent the game ball from swinging in the width direction of the ball passage, so the positional relationship between the photo sensor and the game ball is kept constant. It is possible to eliminate erroneous detection due to the displacement of the positional relationship, and to reliably detect the game ball.

In addition, since the V-shaped passage portion has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surface removes the dirt from the contact portion with the game ball. It is possible to guide it downward, reduce the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and avoid the adhesion of dirt to the game ball. The V-shaped passage portion may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage having a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected to each other. It may be an inverted trapezoidal passage narrowing down.

If the threshold value is too small, even a slight vibration or the like causes erroneous detection and noise in control. Also, if the threshold is too large, the state of the game ball will be missed. Therefore, the appropriate threshold varies depending on the location where the sphere sensor is installed, but it is desirable that the minimum is 10 ms or more and the maximum is 300 ms or less. Also, if the threshold value is determined to be a multiple of the interrupt cycle, it is only necessary to count the number of interrupts in terms of software control, so the load on the software can be reduced.

Thus, according to the above solution, a gaming machine is provided that can reliably detect the presence or absence of a game ball at a stationary portion where the game ball is temporarily stopped in the path through which the game ball circulates. can provide.

[15-4c. Relationship between the solution means of the fourth technical feature and the embodiment]
The ball launching unit 550 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment serves as the ball launching means of the above solving means, and the foul unit 570, circulating ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit 700 in this embodiment are the above solving means. In the ball circulation means of the means, the circulation path R in this embodiment is the circulation ball path in the above solution, the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550 in this embodiment, the ball storage passage 604 of the circulation ball path unit 600, the ball The ball-lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball-lifting outlet passage 652 in the ball-lifting unit 650, the ball-feeding passage 703 of the ball-feeding unit 700, and the ball-feeding subtraction sensor 554 of the ball-launching unit 550 in this embodiment , the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 of the circulation ball path unit 600, the lifting inlet sensor 653 and the lifting outlet sensor 654 of the ball lifting unit 650, and the before-fire sensor 704 of the ball feeding unit 700 are the above solving means. , and the launch subtraction sensor 554, the lift entrance sensor 653, and the lift exit sensor 654 in this embodiment correspond to the photosensors of the above solution.

The ball launch pad 552b, the V-shaped passage portion 651a of the ball lifting inlet passage 651, and the V-shaped passage portion 652a of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 in this embodiment are the V-shaped passage portions of the above-described solution means, and the ball in this embodiment The storage passage 604, the U-shaped passage portion 651b of the upper ball-lifting inlet passage 651, the U-shaped passage portion 652b of the upper ball-lifting outlet passage 652, and the ball-feeding passage 703 are the U-shaped passage portions of the above-described means for solving the problem. The control board 740 corresponds to the control means of the above solution.

[15-4d. Characteristic Actions and Effects of the Fourth Technical Feature]
In the following, the function and effect of a ball lifting entrance sensor 653 of a ball lifting entrance passage 651 in a ball lifting unit 650 as a stationary part in which the circulation of the game ball B is temporarily stopped to be in a fixed position stop state will be described. Since the subtraction sensor 554, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the lifting exit sensor 654, the firing front sensor 704, and the like have similar effects, their actions are omitted unless particularly necessary. Description of effects is omitted. According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 that shoots the game ball B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 is sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball lifter. Collected by the upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 and supplied to the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 based on the player's holding ball data (the number of held balls is 1 or more). In a pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed type game machine, management game machine), a ball lifting unit as a stopping part capable of temporarily stopping a game ball B on a circulation route R in which the game ball B circulates. A lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photo sensor is provided in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 of 650, and the frame control board 740 detects when the detection time and non-detection time of the game ball B by the lifting entrance sensor 653 exceeds a predetermined threshold value. , the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 is determined to control the drive of the lifting motor 664 . In other words, in the conventional determination, the presence (ON/OFF) of the game ball B is determined using only the condition (threshold value) that the game ball B is present (ON), whereas this embodiment determines whether the game ball B is present (ON/OFF). In this method, a threshold value is set for each of ON (presence) determination and OFF (absence) determination, and ON or OFF is determined only when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the lifting inlet sensor 653 is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, it is possible to reliably determine the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 where the plurality of game balls B stay.

In addition, since the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 is reliably determined and the driving of the lifting motor 664 is controlled, the circulation route R (here, the ball lifting inlet passage 651) A game ball B cannot be fired despite having ball data (the number of balls held) due to run out of balls, or a game ball B is supplied while the ball-lifting inlet passage 651 is full. As a result, the ball lifting unit 650 can be prevented from being damaged or clogged with balls, and the player can continue to enjoy the game.

Furthermore, since the threshold for determining the presence or absence of the game ball B may be changed according to the stationary portion where the circulation of the game ball B is temporarily stopped, the game ball B is supplied to the ball shooting unit 550. The ball of the ball lifting unit 650 that lifts the game ball B to the ball feeding unit 700 is reduced in the sensor 704 before firing provided in the stationary part such as the ball feeding passage 703 of the ball feeding unit 700. A lifting inlet sensor 653 and a lifting outlet sensor 654 provided in a stationary portion such as the lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting outlet passage 652 can increase or decrease the threshold value. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of the game ball B according to the circulation speed (stop frequency) of the game ball B in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls B, etc., the control by the frame control board 740 can be efficiently performed. can be performed, and the load on control can be reduced.

In addition, the threshold value for presence of game ball B and the threshold value for absence of game ball B may be different depending on the stationary portion where the circulation of game ball B is temporarily stopped. A launch subtraction sensor 554 provided in a stationary portion such as the ball launching pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550 that launches the game ball B makes the threshold for the presence of the game ball B equal to the threshold for the absence of the game ball, In the lifting entrance sensor 653 and the lifting exit sensor 654 provided in the stationary part such as the ball lifting entrance passage 651 and the ball lifting exit passage 652 of the ball lifting unit 650 that lifts the game ball B, the game ball It is possible to make the threshold for B present and the threshold for no game ball B different. Therefore, depending on the circulation speed (stop frequency) of the game ball B in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls B, etc., the threshold value for the presence of the game ball B and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball may be set to be the same or different. By making a judgment by setting the frame control board 740 to the stationary portion, the control can be efficiently performed in accordance with the stationary portion, and the load on the control can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage portion 651a is provided in the portion of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 where the lifting entrance sensor 653 made of a photo sensor is provided, the game ball B is placed on the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage portion 651a. By contacting, the game ball B does not swing in the width direction of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 at the part of the lifting entrance sensor 653, and the game ball B contacts the side wall and the side wall is worn or damaged. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of contamination such as dirt and dust. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing the occurrence of detection and reducing erroneous detection of a game ball B stationary at a stationary portion.

In addition, a U-shaped passage portion 651b consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces is provided in a portion other than the V-shaped passage portion 651a in which the lifting entrance sensor 653, which is a photo sensor, is provided in the ball lifting entrance passage 651. Therefore, when a plurality of game balls B stop in the U-shaped passage portion 651b, the game balls B are pushed by the game balls B on the upstream side, thereby alternately contacting the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. They will be lined up like this. That is, when a plurality of game balls B are stopped in the U-shaped passage portion 651b, they are arranged in a staggered manner, and the game balls B are not arranged in a line on the axis of the ball lifting entrance passage 651.例文帳に追加Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game ball B to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, the ball pressure applied to the lifting spiral shaft 661 that stops the game ball B can be reduced. It is possible to make the lifting spiral shaft 661 less likely to be damaged, and it is not necessary to reinforce the lifting spiral shaft 661 excessively, so that an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, at the part of the lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photo sensor in the ball lifting entrance passage 651, the game ball B is prevented from swinging in the width direction of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 due to the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage portion 651a. Therefore, the positional relationship between the lift entrance sensor 653 and the game ball B can be kept constant, and the game ball B can be reliably detected without erroneous detection due to deviation of the positional relationship.

In addition, since the V-shaped passage portion 651a of the ball-lifting entrance passage 651 has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to the contact of the game ball B, the inclined surface will stain the ball. can be guided downward from the contact portion with the game ball B, the influence of dirt on the lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photo sensor can be reduced, and the adhesion of dirt to the game ball B can be avoided. can be made The V-shaped passage portion 651a may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage having a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected to each other. It may be an inverted trapezoidal passage narrowing downward.

[15-5. Fifth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-5a. Background of the Fifth Technical Features]
A game machine such as a pachinko machine that circulates a large number of game balls enclosed inside during a game so that a player does not touch the game balls (so-called enclosed type game machine, management game machine) is known (for example, Patent Document X: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-162850). In a gaming machine such as that disclosed in Patent Document X, game balls hit into the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means.

Such a so-called enclosed game machine is not popular at present, and it is expected that in the process of popularization, it will be mixed with conventional pachinko machines in island facilities for conventional pachinko machines.

For this reason, even in a so-called enclosed type gaming machine, it is placed in an environment where supplied balls flow above the back surface of the gaming machine and collected balls flow below the back surface of the gaming machine. For this reason, game balls, metal powder generated from the game balls, and screws that have been forgotten to be collected during replacement work fall from above.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means are intended to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately processing objects falling from above the gaming machine.

[15-5b. Means for solving the fifth technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game machine that encloses game balls in the game machine and plays games with game balls that circulate inside the machine,
The game machine has a game board housed in a game machine frame, and the game machine frame comprises a top cover that protects the game board from above and a rear cover that protects the game board from behind,
The upper surface of the upper surface cover is provided with a gentle slope that allows game balls that are spherical in shape to flow down backward, while the non-spherical member can stay on the upper surface of the upper surface cover.

Here, "game machines in which game balls are enclosed and games are played with game balls that circulate inside the machine" correspond to game machines called enclosed pachinko machines, circulating pachinko machines, and controlled game machines. do.

Further, the "upper surface cover" and the "rear surface cover" include a plate-shaped member made of synthetic resin. As for the "rear cover", it is desirable that it can be opened and closed for maintenance, but it is desirable that it cannot be opened and closed easily from the viewpoint of crime prevention.

The gentle slope has an angle of several degrees to 15 degrees from the horizontal plane, and a deeper angle than that is not suitable because non-spherical screws and metal powder may slide down.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine in which game balls are enclosed and a game is played with game balls circulating inside the game machine, the game machine accommodates a game board in a game machine frame, and The game machine frame includes a top cover that protects the game board from above and a rear cover that protects the game board from behind. It has a gentle slope that can be retained on the top surface of the top cover (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [4-1. ).

With the above configuration, for example, game balls that have fallen from the ball supply path flow down the upper surface of the top cover, drop as they are, and fall into the game ball recovery passage to be recovered, so no problem occurs. In addition, metal powder, screws, etc. do not flow down because of the gentle slope, but remain on the upper surface of the cover that protects the upper surface. For this reason, foreign matter such as a screw falls into the collection passage, and inconvenience such as obstruction of collection of game balls does not occur.

By making the slope gentle as described above, the falling object selectively flows down or stays there. In other words, it is possible to appropriately process objects falling from above the gaming machine.

In the embodiment of this means, the inclination of the upper surface of the cover that protects from the upper surface is 2.00 degrees from the horizontal plane, and the so-called laying (generally tilting backward about 0.75 degrees) in the installed state of the pachinko machine is prevented. Considering this, the downward slope is 2.75 degrees.

It should be noted that the protective cover for the game machine frame that houses the game board must have ventilation holes to dissipate the heat generated by the game board. desirable. By not providing ventilation holes in the top cover, it is possible to prevent metal powder from adversely affecting electrical parts of the game board. In addition, unevenness due to ventilation holes does not hinder the flow of game balls.

Furthermore, when the top cover is molded by a resin injection molding machine, it is desirable not to provide a so-called gate for injecting resin into the mold on the top surface of the top cover. This is because if a gate is provided, irregularities may occur, which may hinder the flow of game balls.

Also, when the top cover is molded by a resin injection molding machine, it is desirable not to leave marks of ejector pins, which are caused by ejecting the molded product from the mold, similarly to the gate. Naturally, although the ejector pin marks are few, unevenness may occur, which may hinder the flow of game balls, and when cleaning is performed, metal powder may enter and make the appearance worse.

By maintaining the top surface of the top cover as smooth as possible in this way, the effect of the present invention, which is the effect of appropriately handling objects falling from above the game machine, can be exhibited more effectively.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
It is characterized in that ``no ventilation holes are provided in the upper surface of the upper surface cover, but ventilation holes are provided in the rear cover''.

According to the configuration of means 2, the upper surface of the upper cover is not provided with ventilation holes, but the rear cover is provided with ventilation holes. In other words, the ventilation holes are an essential component of the protective cover for the game machine frame that houses the game board, in order to dissipate heat from the game board that generates heat. It is desirable that there be none (see the description regarding the ventilation holes 502f in the Detailed Description).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the electrical parts of the game board from being adversely affected by falling metal powder by not providing ventilation holes on the top surface of the top cover. In addition, unevenness due to ventilation holes does not hinder the flow of game balls.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
It is characterized in that "the top cover is made of resin, and a resin injection port is not provided on the top surface of the top cover."

According to the configuration of means 3, the top cover is made of resin, and a resin injection port is not provided on the top surface of the top cover. See the description regarding top cover 502a).

With this configuration, unevenness caused by a resin injection port (a so-called gate) does not occur on the top surface of the top cover, so that game balls do not flow down.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
The feature is that the upper surface cover is made of resin, and the upper surface of the upper surface cover is not provided with traces of ejector pins.

According to the configuration of means 4, the top cover is made of resin, and the top surface of the top cover is designed not to leave traces of ejector pins (in the [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the description of the top cover 502a ).

With this configuration, the smoothness of the top surface of the top cover is improved because there is no trace left by the ejector pin when the molded product is pushed out of the mold during injection molding. Although the marks of the ejector pins do not form such large irregularities, the absence of the marks of the ejector pins does not hinder the flow of the game ball. Also, when cleaning, there is no unevenness left by the marks of the ejector pin, so metal powder or the like does not enter, and the appearance is improved.

Means 5: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 4,
"The game machine frame includes an outer frame fixed to the game hall island equipment and a game board housing frame pivotally supported by the outer frame, and the top cover is molded integrally with the game board housing frame. It is characterized by

According to the configuration of means 5, the game machine frame includes an outer frame fixed to the game hall island equipment and a game board accommodation frame pivotally supported by the outer frame, and the top cover is molded integrally with the game board accommodation frame. (See the description regarding the main body frame base 501 in [Description of the Invention]).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to save the assembly man-hours by integrally molding and to improve the strength of the entire game board housing frame (body frame).

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
``When the game board is accommodated in the game board accommodation frame, the upper surface cover includes a positioning portion for positioning the game board in contact with the inner side thereof''.

According to the configuration of the means 6, when the game board is accommodated in the game board accommodation frame, the upper surface cover is provided with a positioning portion for positioning the game board by coming into contact with the inside of the upper cover. Embodiment], see the description of the abutment surface 502j).

With this configuration, the positional relationship between the game board and the top cover is firmly fixed, and the purpose of protecting the game board of the game board housing frame can be achieved.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately handling objects falling from above the gaming machine.

[15-5c. Relationship between the solution means of the fifth technical feature and the embodiment]
The main body frame 4 of the game board 5 of this embodiment serves as the game board housing frame of the above solving means, the upper surface cover 502a of the main body frame base 501 of this embodiment serves as the upper surface cover of the above solving means, and the rear surface cover 502b of this embodiment. corresponds to the rear cover of the above solution, and the ventilation hole 502f in this embodiment corresponds to the ventilation hole of the above solution.

[15-5d. Characteristic Actions and Effects of the Fifth Technical Feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a of the main body frame base 501 which protects the game board 5 housed in the main body frame 4 from above has a gently sloping rearward slope. Game balls B, metal powders, screws, etc. falling from above 1 can be properly treated. Specifically, the spherical game ball B can be dropped under the pachinko machine 1 by causing the upper surface of the upper cover 502a to flow down, so that the game ball B can be recovered as it is without causing any trouble. In addition, non-spherical metal powder, screws, and the like can be retained on the top cover 502a without flowing down, so that troubles do not occur.

Further, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a is not provided with the ventilation holes 502f. This prevents metal powder, screws, etc. from entering through the ventilation holes 502f, and does not adversely affect the electrical components of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the top surface of the top cover 502a molded by the injection molding machine is not provided with a gate for injecting molten resin into the mold during molding. As a result, unevenness derived from the gate does not occur on the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a, so that the game ball B does not flow down.

Similarly, care is taken not to leave traces of ejector pins when the injection-molded body frame base 501 is removed from the mold. Usually, the marks of the ejector pins are less likely to hinder the flow of the game ball B by properly treating the burrs, but when cleaning the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a where metal powder etc. are deposited, the ejector pin marks It may leave marks and spoil the aesthetic appearance. Therefore, by not leaving marks of the ejector pin, it is possible to easily restore the aesthetic appearance by cleaning.

Also, the top cover 502a is molded integrally with the main body frame base 501. As shown in FIG. By molding in this way, it is possible to save the number of assembly man-hours and improve the strength of the entire main body frame base unit 500 (game board housing frame).

The upper surface cover 502a not only protects the game board 5 housed inside on its upper surface, but also has a positioning portion (abutment surface 502j) for positioning the game board 5 in contact with the game board 5 inside. ing. As a result, the positional relationship between the game board 5 and the top cover 502a is fixed, and the purpose of the game board housing frame (body frame 4) to protect the game board 5 can be achieved.

In addition, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a is not provided with ribs for reinforcement, so that the ribs do not make cleaning difficult, and maintenance is facilitated. Other members (for example, the frame 501a, the outer frame 2, etc.) may be provided to cover the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a, and ribs may be provided in areas where foreign matter does not fall.

[15-6. Sixth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-6a. Background of the Sixth Technical Feature]
In recent years, effective use of resources has become more important against the background of environmental problems. From such a point of view, in game machines, development is underway to form more parts from recyclable materials. On the other hand, the replacement cycle of machines at game halls (amusements) where game machines are installed is becoming shorter, and the number of discarded and dismantled game machines is on the rise. As a result, the burden of disassembling and sorting game machines is increasing, and there is a demand to reduce the work as much as possible.

For example, in a conventional gaming machine as shown in Patent Document Y (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018185), a side unit (ball entry unit) provided with a plurality of general winning holes as a ball entry hole is disassembled. If you try to pull it forward to remove it from the game panel, the ball-in unit bends and the positioning projections inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel tilt, which makes disassembly work time-consuming. Ta.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means provide a game machine capable of reducing the disassembly work required for sorting for recycling or the like.

[15-6b. Solution for the Sixth Technical Feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entering unit
Positioning projections to be inserted into positioning holes provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, and an opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front a first component attached to the gaming panel in a blocking manner;
a second component having a second attachment hole for attachment to the first component and attached from the rear side of the first component;
It is characterized by having ".

Here, the "entrance" is defined as "a winning opening that provides a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters (for example, a general winning opening, a normal winning opening, a starting winning opening (starting opening), a large winning opening, a special winning opening, etc.). , ``out slot for ejecting a game ball out of the gaming machine without returning it to the player without awarding a privilege even if it enters the game ball'', and the like.

Further, the "entrance" may be provided in the first structural member or may be provided in the second structural member.

In addition, the "game panel" includes "things made of wooden plywood such as plywood" and "things made up of a panel plate made by cutting a transparent resin plate and a panel holder holding the outer periphery of the panel plate. , "Injection-molded transparent resin", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit is , a positioning projection to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, so as to block the opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. and a second component that has a second mounting hole for attaching to the first component and is attached from the rear side of the first component. There is (see [12-1. Side unit of second embodiment] in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention] and the descriptions of FIGS. 103 to 105, etc.).

As a result, the second component is attached to the front surface of the game panel by the mounting screws through the first mounting holes, and the second component is attached by the mounting screws through the second mounting holes. It is possible to increase the rigidity of the ball-entering unit configured by the and the second component. Therefore, when disassembling the game machine for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws screwed into the game panel through the first mounting holes are removed and the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased. Since the ball-entering unit does not bend due to the positioning hole in the game panel, the positioning protrusion of the ball-entering unit (first component) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole of the game panel, and the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel. It is possible to provide a game machine which can be easily removed and can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

In addition, since the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component with the mounting screws through the second mounting holes, it is possible to make it difficult to see the mounting screws attaching the second component from the front. , the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, it is desirable to provide the first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel in the first structural member in the vicinity of the positioning projection. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole, the positioning projection can be strongly pressed against the game panel side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

Also, the second component may be attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening. As a result, the second component attached from the back side of the first component projects into the opening of the game panel. The board thickness of the game panel can be effectively used, and empty spaces in front and behind the game panel can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decorative body, an LED board, or a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, the second component member is attached from the rear side of the first component member so as to protrude into the opening, and the game ball that has entered the ball entrance between the first component member and the first component member is moved along the surface of the game panel. It is also possible to have a ball passage through which the water flows down. As a result, since the second component member is provided with a ball passage that allows the game ball to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the cross section of the part of the ball passage is U-shaped, so the existence of the ball passage can increase the rigidity of the second component. Since the ball-entering unit is formed by attaching the second component whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage from the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit can be further increased. It is possible to provide a game machine that can reliably achieve the above effects.

In addition, as described above, the second component attached from the back side of the first component is projected into the opening of the game panel, and the ball entrance is between the first component and the second component. Since a ball passage is provided to allow a game ball that enters the game panel to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the board thickness of the game panel is effectively used compared to the case where the ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel. This makes it easier to secure an empty space behind the game panel. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decorative body, an LED board, or a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Also, it is desirable to provide at least two positioning projections spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member. As a result, since the plurality of positioning projections on the first component member are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member, when the ball-entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball-entering unit is positioned on the game panel. The ball entering unit can be reliably positioned at the desired position of the game panel without rotating along the surface.

By the way, in the case where a plurality of positioning projections are provided separately in the longitudinal direction of a conventional ball-entering unit with low rigidity, the center of the ball-entering unit moves forward when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward during disassembly work. As a result of the bending, the respective positioning projections tend to tilt so that the ends of the positioning projections separated in the longitudinal direction approach each other, and the game panel is bent. The positioning projection cannot be removed from the positioning hole. On the other hand, as described above, when the plurality of positioning projections on the first component member are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member, the second component member is attached to the first component member. This increases the rigidity of the ball-entering unit, so even if the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, the positioning projections separated in the longitudinal direction will not tilt due to the bending of the ball-entering unit. To provide a game machine in which a ball unit can be easily removed and disassembly work for sorting can be reduced.

Furthermore, it is desirable to provide the ball entrance in the first component member so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel. As a result, since the plurality of ball entrances protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel, when pulling the ball entrance unit forward in order to remove it from the game panel during disassembly of the game machine, the ball entrances can be easily removed. It can be picked and pulled, making it easier to remove the ball-entering unit.

In addition, the second component member has a plurality of ball entrances projecting forward from the front surface of the first component member, and a flat front plate connecting the front ends of the plurality of ball entrances. You can do it. As a result, the second component, which connects the front ends of the plurality of ball entrances protruding forward with the flat plate-like front plate, is attached to the front surface of the game panel through the first attachment hole. Since the ball-entering unit is configured by attaching the ball-entering unit from the rear side, the rigidity can be increased compared to the conventional ball-entering unit, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Also, the first component member may have a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel. As a result, since the first component member is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the first component member to the front surface of the game panel through the first mounting hole, the base plate can cover the opening of the game panel from the front side. The back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved. At this time, the rigidity of the first structural member may be low because the base plate is flat, but since the second structural member is attached from the rear side of the first structural member, the first structural member and The rigidity of the ball-entering unit with the second component can be made higher than the rigidity of the conventional ball-entering unit, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The second component is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening."
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 2, the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the side unit 2800 for second component 2812).

As a result, the second component attached from the back side of the first component projects into the opening of the game panel. The board thickness of the game panel can be effectively used, and empty spaces in front and behind the game panel can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decorative body, an LED board, or a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The second component member is attached from the rear side of the first component member so as to protrude into the opening, and the game ball entering the ball entrance between the first component member and the first component member It has a ball passage that allows the to flow down along the surface of the game panel.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, the second component member is attached from the rear side of the first component member so as to protrude into the opening, and the game in which a ball is entered into the ball entrance between the first component member and the first component member. It has a ball passage that allows balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel (see the description of the second component member 2812 of the side unit 2800 in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the second component member is provided with a ball passage that allows the game ball to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the cross section of the part of the ball passage is U-shaped, so the existence of the ball passage can increase the rigidity of the second component. Since the ball-entering unit is formed by attaching the second component whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage from the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit can be further increased. It is possible to provide a game machine that can reliably achieve the above effects.

In addition, the second component attached from the back side of the first component is projected into the opening of the game panel, and the game in which the ball is entered between the first component and the second component Since the ball passage for causing the balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel is provided, the board thickness of the game panel can be effectively used compared to the case where the ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel. An empty space behind the game panel can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decorative body, an LED board, or a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

When providing a ball sensor for detecting game balls circulating in the ball passage, it is desirable to provide the ball sensor within the plate thickness (inside the opening) of the game panel. Alternatively, it is desirable to provide the ball sensor below the production device (movable accessory) provided behind. As a result, the ball sensor does not interfere with the performance device, and the movable range of the movable accessory can be increased.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"At least two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member."
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, at least two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be separated in the longitudinal direction of the first component member (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the side unit 2800 See description regarding first component 2811).

As a result, since the plurality of positioning projections on the first component member are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member, when the ball-entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball-entering unit is positioned on the game panel. The ball entering unit can be reliably positioned at the desired position of the game panel without rotating along the surface.

By the way, in the case where a plurality of positioning projections are provided separately in the longitudinal direction of a conventional ball-entering unit with low rigidity, the center of the ball-entering unit moves forward when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward during disassembly work. As a result of the bending, the respective positioning projections tend to tilt so that the ends of the positioning projections separated in the longitudinal direction approach each other, and the game panel is bent. The positioning projection cannot be removed from the positioning hole. In contrast, in this configuration, as described above, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased by attaching the second component to the first component, so even if the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, , the ball-entering unit does not bend and the positioning projections separated in the longitudinal direction are not tilted, the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel, and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. Amusement machines can be provided.

Means 5: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
"The ball entrance is provided in the first structural member so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, the ball entrance is provided in the first component member so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the side unit 2800 for first component 2811).

As a result, since the plurality of ball entrances protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel, when pulling the ball entrance unit forward in order to remove it from the game panel during disassembly of the game machine, the ball entrances can be easily removed. It can be picked and pulled, making it easier to remove the ball-entering unit.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
"The second structural member includes a plurality of ball entrances projecting forward from the front surface of the first structural member, a flat front plate connecting the front ends of the plurality of ball entrances, have"
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 6, the second component includes a plurality of ball entrances projecting forward from the front surface of the first component, and a flat front plate connecting the front ends of the plurality of ball entrances. and (see the description of the second component 2812A of the side unit 2800D in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, the second component, which connects the front ends of the plurality of ball entrances protruding forward with the flat plate-like front plate, is attached to the front surface of the game panel through the first attachment hole. Since the ball-entering unit is configured by attaching the ball-entering unit from the rear side, the rigidity can be increased compared to the conventional ball-entering unit, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Means 7: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 6,
"The first constituent member has a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 7, the first component member has a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the side unit 2800 (see description of first component 2811 in ).

As a result, since the first component member is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the first component member to the front surface of the game panel through the first mounting hole, the base plate can cover the opening of the game panel from the front side. The back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved. At this time, the rigidity of the first structural member may be low because the base plate is flat, but since the second structural member is attached from the rear side of the first structural member, the first structural member and The rigidity of the ball-entering unit with the second component can be made higher than the rigidity of the conventional ball-entering unit, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Means 8: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entering unit
Positioning projections to be inserted into positioning holes provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, and an opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front a first component attached to the gaming panel in a blocking manner;
a second component having a second attachment hole for attachment to the first component and attached from the rear side of the first component;
with
The first component member has a flat plate-like base plate from which the positioning projection protrudes and the first mounting hole penetrates and can abut against the front surface of the game panel, and the positioning projection is At least two ball entrances are provided so as to be separated in the longitudinal direction of the base plate, and the ball entrance is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the base plate,
The second component member is attached from the rear side of the first component member so as to protrude into the opening, and the game ball that entered the ball entrance between the first component member and the first component member It has a ball passage that flows down along the surface of the game panel.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 8, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit is , a positioning projection to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, so as to block the opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. A first component that is attached to the game panel, and a second component that has a second attachment hole for attachment to the first component and is attached from the rear side of the first component, The constituent member has a flat plate-shaped base plate having a positioning protrusion protruding therethrough and a first mounting hole penetrating therethrough and capable of coming into contact with the front surface of the game panel, and the positioning protrusion is spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate. At least two ball entrances are provided so as to project forward from the front surface of the base plate, and the second component member protrudes into the opening. It is attached from the rear side and has a ball passage between it and the first structural member for allowing a game ball entering the ball inlet to flow down along the surface of the game panel.

As a result, since the first component member is provided with a flat base plate, the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel through the first mounting hole penetrating the base plate, and the first component member is attached to the front surface of the game panel. By attaching it to the base plate, the opening of the game panel can be closed from the front side, and the back side of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), improving the appearance of the game machine. be able to. On the other hand, since the second component member is provided with a ball passage that allows game balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the cross section of the part of the ball passage is U-shaped, so the existence of the ball passage can increase the rigidity of the second component. Since the base plate is a flat plate, the rigidity of the first component may be low. Since the ball-entering unit is formed by attaching from the rear side of the first component member, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit can be made higher than that of the conventional ball-entering unit. Therefore, when disassembling the game machine for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws screwed into the game panel through the first mounting holes are removed and the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased. Since the ball-entering unit does not bend due to the positioning hole in the game panel, the positioning protrusion of the ball-entering unit (first component) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole of the game panel, and the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel. It is possible to provide a game machine which can be easily removed and can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

By the way, since the plurality of positioning projections on the first component member are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member, when the first component member is pulled forward during disassembly work, the first component member The force that causes the respective positioning projections to tilt so that the tips of the positioning projections that are separated in the longitudinal direction approach each other due to the bending. will act, and there is a risk that the positioning projections will not come off from the positioning holes of the game panel. However, in this configuration, as described above, the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component to form the ball-entering unit, and the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased. Even if the unit is pulled forward, the ball-entering unit does not bend and the positioning projections separated in the longitudinal direction are not tilted, and the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel, enabling disassembly work for sorting. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of reducing

Furthermore, since the plurality of ball entrances protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel, the ball entrances can be easily pulled forward to remove the ball entrance unit from the game panel during disassembly of the game machine. It can be pulled by pressing, and the work of removing the entering ball unit can be facilitated.

In addition, since the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component with the mounting screws through the second mounting holes, it is possible to make it difficult to see the mounting screws attaching the second component from the front. , the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, a ball passage is provided between the first component member and the second component member so as to protrude into the opening of the game panel for allowing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance to flow down along the surface of the game panel. Therefore, there is a case where a game ball entering the ball entrance is guided backward from the rear surface of the game panel as in the conventional ball entry unit, and a ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel to flow downward. In comparison, the board thickness of the game panel can be effectively utilized, and an empty space behind the game panel can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decorative body, an LED board, or a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the plurality of positioning projections on the first component member are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member, when the ball-entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball-entering unit is positioned on the surface of the game panel. The ball-entering unit can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the game panel without rotating along the axis.

In addition, if the first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel in the first component member is provided in the vicinity of the positioning projection, the positioning projection can be obtained by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole. can be securely inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel by strongly pressing it against the game panel side, and lifting due to incomplete insertion of the positioning projection can be prevented.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting for recycling or the like.

[15-6c. Relationship between Solution Means of Sixth Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of this embodiment is the game panel of the above solving means, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of this embodiment is the opening of the above solving means, and the positioning hole of this embodiment is 1113 is the positioning hole of the solving means, and the general winning hole 2001 in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 2811b of the first component 2811, and the ball receiving part 2812c of the second component 2812 are the ball entrances of the above solving means. In addition, the side unit 2800, side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, side unit 2800D, side unit 2800E, side unit 2800F, and side unit 2800G in this embodiment correspond to the ball entering units of the above solving means, respectively.

Further, the first component member 2811 and the first component member 2811A in the present embodiment are the first component members of the above-described solving means, the base plate 2811a in the present embodiment is the base plate of the above-described solving means, and the positioning in this embodiment. The protrusion 2811c serves as the positioning protrusion of the solving means, the mounting hole 2811d in this embodiment serves as the first mounting hole of the solving means, and the second component 2812 and the second component 2812A in this embodiment serve as the positioning protrusion of the solving means. As the second component, the ball passages 2812a and 2812f in this embodiment are the ball passages of the above solution, the front plate 2812d in this embodiment is the front plate of the above solution, and the second component in this embodiment. The mounting holes of 2812 respectively correspond to the second mounting holes of the above solution.

[15-6d. Characteristic effects of the sixth technical feature]
Here, the side unit 2800 will be described as a representative feature of the side unit 2800, the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800C, the side unit 2800D, the side unit 2800E, the side unit 2800F, and the side unit 2800G in this embodiment. According to this embodiment, in the side unit 2800 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, since the first component member 2811 is provided with the flat base plate 2811a, the base plate 2811a is penetrated. By screwing mounting screws into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2811d and mounting the first component member 2811 on the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 is closed from the front side by the base plate 2811a. The members behind the game panel 1100 can be hidden by the base plate 2811a through the opening 1112 from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. On the other hand, since the second component member 2812 is provided with a ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the cross section of the portion of the ball passage 2812a is U-shaped. Therefore, the rigidity of the second component member 2812 can be increased due to the existence of the ball passage 2812a. Since the base plate 2811a has a flat plate shape, the rigidity of the first component member 2811 may be lowered. Since the side unit 2800 is formed by attaching the first component member 2811 from the rear side with the attachment screws, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) for recycling or the like, when the side unit 2800 is pulled forward by removing the mounting screws screwed into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2811d, Since the side unit 2800 does not bend due to the increased rigidity of the side unit 2800, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the first component member 2811 of the side unit 2800 does not flex with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that does not tilt, allows the side unit 2800 to be easily removed from the panel plate 1110, and reduces the disassembly work for sorting.

By the way, in the side unit 2800, since the plurality of positioning projections 2811c on the first component member 2811 are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member 2811, the first component member 2811 can be disassembled. When pulled forward, the center of the first component member 2811 bends in a curved shape so as to move forward. A force acts to tilt each positioning projection 2811c, and there is a possibility that the positioning projection 2811c cannot be removed from the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. However, in this embodiment, as described above, the side unit 2800 is formed by attaching the second component 2812 from the rear side of the first component 2811, and the rigidity of the side unit 2800 is increased. Even if the side unit 2800 is pulled forward, the side unit 2800 is not bent and the positioning projections 2811c separated in the longitudinal direction are not tilted, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the disassembly work for sorting.

Furthermore, according to the side unit 2800, since the plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b (general prize winning opening 2001) protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, the panel plate When pulling the side unit 2800 forward to remove it from 1110, the ball receiving portion 2811b can be picked and pulled, making the removal of the side unit 2800 easier.

In addition, according to the side unit 2800, the second component member 2812 is attached from the rear side of the first component member 2811 with the attachment screw through the attachment hole, so the second component member 2812 is attached from the front. The screw can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, according to the side unit 2800, the game ball B entered into the ball receiving portion 2811b (general winning opening 2001) between the first component member 2811 and the second component member 2812 is placed on the surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. Since the ball passage 2812a that flows down along is provided so as to protrude into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the game ball B that has entered the general winning hole 2001 can be transferred to the game panel 1100 like the conventional side unit. Compared to the case where a ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel 1100 to guide the balls backward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 and flow downward, the thickness of the panel plate 1110 can be effectively used. , the empty space behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decorative body, an LED board, and a movable accessory (back and bottom performance unit 3500) in the empty space, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 with a higher appeal to players. can.

Furthermore, according to the side unit 2800, since the plurality of positioning projections 2811c on the first component member 2811 are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member 2811, the side unit 2800 can be attached to the panel of the game panel 1100. When attached to the plate 1110, the side unit 2800 does not rotate along the surface of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be reliably positioned at the desired position on the panel plate 1110.

Further, according to the side unit 2800, since the mounting hole 2811d for mounting the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the first component member 2811 is provided in the vicinity of the positioning projection 2811c, the mounting hole 2811d By screwing the mounting screw into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and tightening it, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110. Lifting due to incomplete insertion of the projection 2811c can be prevented.

[15-7. Seventh technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-7a. Background of the seventh technical feature]
In recent years, effective use of resources has become more important against the background of environmental problems. From such a point of view, in game machines, development is underway to form more parts from recyclable materials. On the other hand, the replacement cycle of machines at game halls (amusements) where game machines are installed is becoming shorter, and the number of discarded and dismantled game machines is on the rise. As a result, the burden of disassembling and sorting game machines is increasing, and there is a demand to reduce the work as much as possible.

For example, in a conventional gaming machine as shown in Patent Document Y (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018185), a side unit (ball entry unit) provided with a plurality of general winning holes as a ball entry hole is disassembled. When you try to remove it from the game panel by pulling it forward, the positioning projection of the ball-in unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel, so it is difficult to remove the positioning projection due to the resistance with the inner surface of the positioning hole. , there was a problem that the disassembly work was time-consuming.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means provide a game machine capable of reducing the disassembly work required for sorting for recycling or the like.

[15-7b. Seventh technical feature solution]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The game panel is
It has an opening area where game balls can flow from the front side to the rear side,
The ball entering unit
Positioning protrusions to be inserted into positioning holes provided in the game panel, and mounting holes for mounting to the game panel, allowing game balls entering the ball entrance of the opening area to flow. It is attached to the game panel so as to block the normal opening area from the front side, and the outer edge of the ball entry unit is attached to the specific opening area in which the game ball that has not entered the ball entrance of the opening area can flow. It is attached to the game panel so that a part overlaps."
characterized by being

Here, the "entrance" is defined as "a winning opening that provides a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters (for example, a general winning opening, a normal winning opening, a starting winning opening (starting opening), a large winning opening, a special winning opening, etc.). , ``out slot for ejecting a game ball out of the gaming machine without returning it to the player without awarding a privilege even if it enters the game ball'', and the like.

In addition, the "game panel" includes "things made of wooden plywood such as plywood" and "things made up of a panel plate made by cutting a transparent resin plate and a panel holder holding the outer periphery of the panel plate. , "Injection-molded transparent resin", and the like.

Furthermore, as the "opening area", there are "a hole-shaped thing that penetrates the game panel and the inner peripheral surface is connected over the entire circumference", "a hole that penetrates the game panel and is partially A notch that opens to the side of the panel", etc. In addition, as the "opening area", there are a normal opening area where game balls that have entered the ball entrance can circulate, and a specific opening area (out opening) where game balls that have not entered the ball entrance can circulate. , and the specific opening area may be connected to the normal opening area, or the specific opening area may be independent from the normal opening area without being connected.

In addition, as a "ball entry unit", there is a "first component attached to the front surface of the game panel so as to block the normal opening area penetrating the game panel from the front, and a first component attached from the rear side of the game panel. and a second component, wherein the ball entrance is provided in the first component or the second component”, “so as to block the normal opening area penetrating the game panel from the front A flat base plate attached to the front surface of the game panel, and a ball receiving portion projecting forward from the base plate and opening upward and rearward to form a ball entrance. At least a plate-shaped base plate attached to the front of the game panel so as to block the normal opening area penetrating the game panel from the front, and a ball entrance penetrating the base plate. What is being done", etc.

Furthermore, the ``portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps the ball discharge port'' may be any part that overlaps the ball discharge port when viewed from the front, and the outer edge that constitutes the portion is the game panel. It may be in contact with the front surface of the game panel, or the outer edge may be separated from the surface of the game panel.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the game panel: It has an opening area through which game balls can flow from the front side to the rear side. It has a hole and is attached to the game panel so as to block from the front side a normal opening area through which a game ball that enters the ball entrance of the opening area can flow, and does not enter the ball entrance of the opening area. It is attached to the game panel so that a part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit overlaps with the specific opening area through which the game ball can flow ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], see [12-3. Side Unit, etc. of Embodiment] section, see descriptions in FIGS. 112 and 114, etc.).

As a result, after inserting the positioning projections of the ball-entering unit into the positioning holes of the game panel from the front, the mounting screws are screwed into the game panel through the mounting holes and tightened, whereby the ball-entering unit is mounted on the front surface of the game panel. A game ball entering the ball entrance of the ball entering unit can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the opening areas of the game panel. At this time, since the normal opening area of the game panel is closed from the front by the ball entry unit, the rear side of the game panel can be hidden through the normal opening area so that it is difficult to see, and the appearance of the game machine is improved. can be done. When the ball-entering unit is attached to the front surface of the game panel, part of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit overlaps the specific opening area of the opening area (in a front view, the projection range of the specific opening area is part of the outer edge). overlap), a portion of the outer edge protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. When disassembling a gaming machine for recycling or the like, when removing the ball-entering unit from the game panel, it is possible that a worker's finger or a tool, etc., may be caught in a portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps the specific opening area. Therefore, by hooking a finger or the like, the ball-entering unit can be pulled forward with a strong force. Therefore, to provide a game machine in which a ball entry unit can be easily removed from a game panel against resistance between a positioning hole and a positioning projection, and disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. be able to.

In addition, it is desirable to provide an attachment hole for attaching the ball-entering unit to the game panel in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screws into the game panel through the mounting holes and tightening them, the positioning projections can be strongly pressed against the game panel side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

Also, the front surface of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit may be inclined rearward. Since the front surface of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is slanted toward the rear, the angle of the outer edge is obtuse. Therefore, in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel during disassembly work of the game machine, when a worker's finger or the like is hooked on a portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps the specific opening area, the finger or the like may be caught at the corner of the outer edge. Even if the ball comes into contact with the ball, the angle is obtuse, so compared to the case where the angle is right, it is less likely to damage the finger, etc., and the ball entry unit can be safely removed by the finger, etc. be able to.

Also, as described above, when the front surface of the outer edge is inclined, the angle of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit becomes an obtuse angle. Even if the game ball rolls so as to lick the outer edge in order to enter the area, the corner of the outer edge is not chipped, and the durability of the ball-entering unit can be improved.

Further, as described above, by tilting the outer edge of the ball-entering unit backward, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the specific opening area, and the stagnation of the game ball in the specific opening area can be avoided.

Furthermore, it is desirable to make the outer edge of the ball entry unit transparent. As a result, since the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is made transparent, it is possible to prevent the size of the specific opening area from appearing small even if part of the outer edge overlaps the specific opening area.

Moreover, it is desirable to provide the positioning projections at a portion close to the specific opening area and a portion far from the specific opening area. As a result, since the two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be separated from each other, when the ball entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball entering unit does not rotate along the surface of the game panel. can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the game panel.

By the way, in the case where the ball-entering unit is provided with two positioning projections to be inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel, the two positioning projections must be removed when the ball-entering unit is removed from the game panel during the disassembly work. At the same time, if the ball-entering unit is to be pulled out from the positioning hole, it is necessary to pull the ball-entering unit forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. On the other hand, as described above, when the positioning projections are provided at a portion close to the specific opening area and at a portion far from the specific opening area, since one positioning projection is provided near the specific opening area, recycling, etc. When removing the ball-entering unit from the game panel during the disassembly work of the game machine, by hooking the operator's finger etc. on the part overlapping the specific opening area on the outer edge of the ball-entering unit and pulling it forward, the specified A strong pull-out force can be applied to the positioning projections near the opening area. As a result, in the disassembly work, of the two positioning projections, the positioning projection closer to the specific opening region can be pulled out from the positioning hole first, and then the remaining positioning projection farther from the specific opening region can be pulled out. Since it can be pulled out from the positioning hole, it can be pulled out with a weaker force than when pulling out two positioning projections at the same time, and the burden on the type of work can be reduced.

Also, the portion of the outer edge that overlaps the specific opening area may penetrate the specific opening area and protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel. By the way, in the disassembly work of the game machine, in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel, when a worker's finger or the like is hooked on a portion of the outer edge overlapping the specific opening area and pulled forward, the strength of the portion is reduced. If it is weak, the outer edge may crack and the ball-entering unit may remain on the game panel side. On the other hand, as described above, since the depth of the portion overlapping the specific opening area in the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is increased, the outer edge (extended portion) is partially overlapped on the front surface of the game panel. Compared to the method, the size of the specific opening area (ball discharge port) becomes smaller (the passage volume for discharging game balls becomes smaller), or the size of the specific opening region (ball discharge port) is expanded in advance ( However, since the strength of this part can be increased, even if a worker's finger or the like is hooked on this part and pulled forward, it will break (damage The ball-entering unit can be reliably removed from the game panel.

Further, as described above, if the portion of the outer edge that overlaps the specific opening region is caused to penetrate the specific opening region and protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel, the portion covers the inner surface of the specific opening region and prevents the player from It can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

Further, the ball-entering unit may have a base plate having a positioning protrusion protruding therethrough, a mounting hole penetrating therethrough, and a plate-like base plate capable of coming into contact with the front surface of the game panel and forming an outer edge. As a result, since the ball-entering unit is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the ball-entering unit to the front surface of the game panel through the mounting hole, the normal opening area of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate. The back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the normal opening area from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

Means 2: In the game machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game panel that allows game balls to flow down,
a ball entry unit having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
a ball outlet into which game balls that have not entered the ball inlet can enter,
The ball-entering unit has positioning projections to be inserted into positioning holes provided on the game panel, and mounting holes for mounting on the game panel, and fits into a normal opening area formed on the game panel. attached to the gaming panel so as to fit together;
The ball discharge port is configured by a specific opening area formed in the game panel separately from the normal opening area in which the ball entry unit is fitted,
An extended portion is formed on the outer edge of the ball entering unit,
The extension part is formed so that at least a part thereof overlaps the edge of the specific opening area in a state in which the positioning protrusion of the ball-entering unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. Become"
characterized by being

Here, the "ordinary opening area" and the "specific opening area" include "a hole-shaped opening that penetrates the game panel and whose inner peripheral surface is connected over the entire circumference", and "a hole that penetrates the game panel." and a cut-out part of which is open to the side of the game panel.

According to the configuration of means 2, in a game machine having a game panel through which a game ball can flow down, a ball-entering unit having a ball-entering opening into which a game ball can enter and a game ball not entering the ball-entering opening are provided. and a ball discharge port into which a ball can be entered, the ball entry unit has a positioning projection inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, and the game panel The ball ejection port is attached to the game panel so as to fit in the normal opening area formed in the An extension part is formed on the outer edge of the ball-entering unit, and at least a part of the extension part is a specific opening in a state in which the positioning protrusion of the ball-entering unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. It is formed so as to overlap the edge of the region (see the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 112 and 113 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

As a result, after inserting the positioning projections of the ball-entering unit into the positioning holes of the game panel from the front, the mounting screws are screwed into the game panel through the mounting holes and tightened, whereby the ball-entering unit is mounted on the front surface of the game panel. can be attached, and a game ball entered into the ball entrance of the ball entry unit can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the game panel. At this time, since the ball-entering unit is attached to the game panel so as to be fitted into the normal opening area of the game panel, the back of the game panel can be hidden through the normal opening area so that it is difficult to see, and the game machine is equipped with a ball-entering unit. It can make you look better. When the ball-entering unit is attached to the front surface of the game panel, the extending portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit partially overlaps the edge of the specific opening area (in front view, the projection range of the specific opening area part of the outer edge overlaps with the opening), part of the extension protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. In the disassembly work of the game machine for recycling, etc., when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel, the part (extended part) overlapping the edge of the specific opening area in the outer edge of the ball entry unit is attached to the operator. Since it is possible to hook a finger, a tool, or the like, the ball-entering unit can be pulled forward with a strong force by hooking the finger or the like. Therefore, to provide a game machine in which a ball entry unit can be easily removed from a game panel against resistance between a positioning hole and a positioning projection, and disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. be able to.

In addition, since the ball discharge port (specific opening area) is formed in the game panel separately from the normal opening area, the strength of the game panel is greater than when the normal opening area and the specific opening area are connected. can be suppressed.

Means 3: In the game machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game panel that allows game balls to flow down,
a ball entry unit having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
a ball outlet into which game balls that have not entered the ball inlet can enter,
The ball-entering unit has positioning protrusions to be inserted into positioning holes provided in the game panel, and mounting holes for attachment to the game panel, and is inserted into a normal opening area formed in the game panel. attached to the gaming panel so as to
The ball discharge port is formed in the game panel so as to be continuous from the normal opening area to which the ball entering unit is fitted, but is configured by a specific opening area to which the ball entering unit is not fitted,
An extended portion is formed on the outer edge of the ball entering unit,
The extension part is formed so that at least a part thereof overlaps the edge of the specific opening area in a state in which the positioning protrusion of the ball-entering unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. Become"
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, in a gaming machine having a game panel through which a game ball can flow down, a ball-entering unit having a ball-entering opening into which a game ball can enter and a game ball not entering the ball-entering opening are provided. and a ball discharge port into which a ball can be entered, the ball entry unit has a positioning projection inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, and the game panel The ball discharge port is formed in the game panel so as to be continuous from the normal opening area in which the ball entering unit is fitted, It is composed of a specific opening area where the ball unit is not fitted, and an extension part is formed on the outer edge of the ball entry unit, and the extension part has the positioning projection of the ball entry unit inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. 114 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].

As a result, after inserting the positioning projections of the ball-entering unit into the positioning holes of the game panel from the front, the mounting screws are screwed into the game panel through the mounting holes and tightened, whereby the ball-entering unit is mounted on the front surface of the game panel. can be attached, and a game ball entered into the ball entrance of the ball entry unit can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the game panel. At this time, since the ball-entering unit is attached to the game panel so as to be fitted into the normal opening area of the game panel, the back of the game panel can be hidden through the normal opening area so that it is difficult to see, and the game machine is equipped with a ball-entering unit. It can make you look better. When the ball-entering unit is attached to the front surface of the game panel, the extending portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit partially overlaps the edge of the specific opening area (in front view, the projection range of the specific opening area part of the outer edge overlaps with the opening), part of the extension protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. In the disassembly work of the game machine for recycling, etc., when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel, the part (extended part) overlapping the edge of the specific opening area in the outer edge of the ball entry unit is attached to the operator. Since it is possible to hook a finger, a tool, or the like, the ball-entering unit can be pulled forward with a strong force by hooking the finger or the like. Therefore, to provide a game machine in which a ball entry unit can be easily removed from a game panel against resistance between a positioning hole and a positioning projection, and disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. be able to.

In addition, since the ball discharge port (specific opening area) is formed in the game panel so as to be continuous from the normal opening area, the normal opening area and the specific opening can be formed by using a cutting tool such as an end mill on the game panel. When forming the regions, the normal opening region and the specific opening region can be cut continuously, and the cost of the game panel can be reduced.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The ball-entering unit is inclined so that the front surface of the outer edge faces backward."
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, the ball-entering unit is inclined so that the front surface of the outer edge faces backward (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811, (See description regarding finger hook 2816 and finger hook 2817).

As a result, since the front surface of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is inclined backward, the angle of the outer edge is an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel during disassembly work of the game machine, when a worker's finger or the like is hooked on a portion of the outer edge (extending portion) of the ball-entering unit that overlaps with the specific opening area, the outer edge Even if a finger or the like comes into contact with the corner of the ball, the angle is obtuse. The unit can be safely removed.

In addition, as described above, since the angle of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is an obtuse angle, compared to the case where the angle is a right angle, the game ball is more likely to lick the outer edge to enter the specific opening area. Even if the game ball rolls on the ground, the corners of the outer edge are not chipped, and the durability of the ball-entering unit can be improved.

In addition, since the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is inclined backward, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the specific opening area, and the stagnation of the game ball in the specific opening area can be avoided.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The outer edge of the ball-entering unit is transparent."
It is characterized by

According to the configuration of means 5, the ball-entering unit is characterized by having a transparent outer edge (see the description of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is made transparent, it is possible to prevent the size of the specific opening area from appearing small even if part of the outer edge overlaps the specific opening area.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
"The positioning projections are provided at a portion close to the specific opening area and at a portion far from the specific opening area."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 6, the positioning projections are provided at a portion close to the specific opening area and a portion far from the specific opening area (see [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] , see the description of the positioning projection 2811c of the first component 2811).

As a result, since the two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be separated from each other, when the ball entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball entering unit does not rotate along the surface of the game panel. can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the game panel.

By the way, in the case where the ball-entering unit is provided with two positioning projections to be inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel, the two positioning projections must be removed when the ball-entering unit is removed from the game panel during the disassembly work. At the same time, if the ball-entering unit is to be pulled out from the positioning hole, it is necessary to pull the ball-entering unit forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. On the other hand, in this configuration, one positioning protrusion is provided near the specific opening area. A strong pull-out force acts on the positioning protrusion near the specific opening area by hooking a worker's finger or the like on the part overlapping the specific opening area in the outer edge (extending part) of the and pulling it forward. becomes possible. As a result, in the disassembly work, of the two positioning projections, the positioning projection closer to the specific opening region can be pulled out from the positioning hole first, and then the remaining positioning projection farther from the specific opening region can be pulled out. Since it can be pulled out from the positioning hole, it can be pulled out with a weaker force than when pulling out two positioning projections at the same time, and the burden on the type of work can be reduced.

Means 7: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 6,
"A portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the game panel through the specific opening area."
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 7, the portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the game panel through the specific opening area (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], See the description regarding finger hook 2817).

By the way, in the disassembly work of the game machine, in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel, when a worker's finger or the like is hooked on a portion of the outer edge (extended portion) overlapping the specific opening area and pulled forward, If the strength of this portion is weak, the outer edge may crack and the ball-entering unit may remain on the game panel side. On the other hand, in this configuration, since the depth of the part overlapping the specific opening area in the outer edge of the ball entry unit is increased, a method of overlapping a part of the outer edge (extended portion) on the front surface of the game panel. Compared to , the size of the specific opening area (ball discharge port) is smaller (the passage volume for discharging game balls is smaller), or the size of the specific opening area (ball discharge port) is expanded in advance (game However, since the strength of the part can be increased, even if the operator's finger etc. is hooked on the part and pulled forward, it will break (damage ), and the ball-entering unit can be reliably removed from the game panel.

In addition, since the portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening region penetrates the specific opening region and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the game panel, the portion covers the inner surface of the specific opening region and makes it difficult for the player to see it. It is possible to improve the appearance of the gaming machine.

Means 8: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 7,
"The ball-entering unit has a base plate in which the positioning projection protrudes and the mounting hole penetrates, and which is a flat plate capable of coming into contact with the front surface of the game panel and forms the outer edge. ” is characterized by

According to the configuration of means 8, the ball-entering unit has a base plate having a positioning projection protruding therethrough and a mounting hole penetrating therethrough. (See the description regarding the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

As a result, since the ball-entering unit is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the ball-entering unit to the front surface of the game panel through the mounting hole, the normal opening area of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate. The back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the normal opening area from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

Means 9: In any one configuration of Means 1 and Means 4 to Means 8,
"The specific opening area is provided so as to pass through the game panel independently without being connected to the normal opening area."
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 9, the specific opening area is provided so as to pass through the game panel independently without being connected to the normal opening area (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the figure 112 and the description of the embodiment shown in FIG. 113).

As a result, in addition to having the same effect as the above, since the specific opening area is provided independently on the game panel without being connected to the normal opening area, when the normal opening area and the specific opening area are connected , it is possible to suppress a decrease in the strength of the game panel.

Means 10: In any one configuration of Means 1 and Means 4 to Means 8,
"The specific opening area is provided so as to be connected to the normal opening area."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 10, the specific opening area is provided so as to be connected to the normal opening area (see the description of the embodiment shown in FIG. 114 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

As a result, in addition to the same effects as above, since the specific opening area and the normal opening area are provided so as to be connected, a cutting tool such as an end mill is used for the game panel. area and specific opening area), the normal opening area and the specific opening area can be cut continuously, and the cost of the game panel can be reduced.

Means 11: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The game panel is
A game ball can circulate from the front side to the rear side, and a normal opening area in which a game ball that has entered the ball entrance can circulate and a game ball that has not entered the ball entrance can circulate. a specific opening area, and the specific opening area penetrates the game panel independently without being connected to the normal opening area, or the specific opening area is connected to the normal opening area, has an open area,
The ball entering unit
A flat plate-shaped base plate that can abut on the front surface of the game panel, a positioning projection protruding from the base plate and inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a positioning projection that penetrates the base plate. It has an attachment hole for attachment to the game panel, and is attached to the game panel so as to block the normal opening area from the front side of the opening area, and the base plate is attached to the specific opening area of the opening area. attached to the game panel so that a part of the transparent outer edge overlaps;
Further, the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate is inclined rearward, and the positioning projections are provided at a portion close to the ball discharge port and a portion far from the ball discharge port. ing"
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 11, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the game panel: A game ball can circulate from the front side to the rear side, and a normal opening area in which game balls that enter the ball entrance can circulate, and a game ball that does not enter the ball entrance can circulate. The opening area consists of an opening area in which the specific opening area penetrates the game panel independently without being connected to the normal opening area, or the specific opening area is connected to the normal opening area. , the ball-entering unit includes a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel, a positioning projection that protrudes from the base plate and is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a base plate that penetrates. It has an attachment hole for attachment to the game panel, and is attached to the game panel so as to block the normal opening area from the front side of the opening area, and one of the transparent outer edges of the base plate is attached to the specific opening area of the opening area. In addition, the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate is slanted toward the rear, and the positioning projections are positioned near the ball discharge port and from the ball discharge port. It is provided at a distant site.

As a result, the positioning protrusion protruding from the base plate of the ball-entering unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front, and after the base plate is brought into contact with the front surface of the game panel, it penetrates the base plate. By screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the mounting hole and tightening it, the ball entry unit can be attached to the front surface of the game panel, and the game ball that has entered the ball entry port of the ball entry unit can be removed from the game panel. It can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the opening areas. At this time, since the normal opening area of the game panel is blocked from the front by the base plate of the ball entry unit, the rear side of the game panel can be hidden by making it difficult to see through the normal opening area, thereby improving the appearance of the game machine. can do better. When the ball-entering unit is attached to the front surface of the game panel, part of the transparent outer edge of the base plate of the ball-entering unit overlaps the specific opening area of the opening area (when viewed from the front, the projection of the specific opening area part of the outer edge overlaps the range), the part of the outer edge protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. When dismantling a game machine for recycling, etc., when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel, it is possible to hook a worker's finger or a tool on the part overlapping the specific opening area on the outer edge of the base plate. Therefore, by hooking a finger or the like, the ball-entering unit can be pulled forward with a strong force together with the base plate. Therefore, to provide a game machine in which a ball entry unit can be easily removed from a game panel against resistance between a positioning hole and a positioning projection, and disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. be able to.

By the way, in the case where the ball-entering unit is provided with two positioning projections to be inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel, the two positioning projections must be removed when the ball-entering unit is removed from the game panel during the disassembly work. At the same time, if the ball-entering unit is to be pulled out from the positioning hole, it is necessary to pull the ball-entering unit forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. On the other hand, in this configuration, since the positioning projections are provided at the part close to the specific opening area and the part far from the specific opening area, the ball entering unit is removed from the game panel when the game machine is disassembled for recycling or the like. At this time, a strong pulling force is applied to the positioning protrusions near the specific opening area by hooking the operator's finger or the like on the portion overlapping the specific opening area on the outer edge of the ball entry unit and pulling it forward. becomes possible. As a result, in the disassembly work, of the two positioning projections, the positioning projection closer to the specific opening region can be pulled out from the positioning hole first, and then the remaining positioning projection farther from the specific opening region can be pulled out. Since it can be pulled out from the positioning hole, it can be pulled out with a weaker force than when pulling out two positioning projections at the same time, and the burden on the type of work can be reduced.

In addition, since the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate of the ball-entering unit is inclined backward, the angle of the outer edge is an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel during disassembly work of the game machine, when a worker's finger or the like is hooked on a portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps the specific opening area, the finger or the like may be caught at the corner of the outer edge. Even if the ball comes into contact with the ball, the angle is obtuse, so compared to the case where the angle is right, it is less likely to damage the finger, etc., and the ball entry unit can be safely removed by the finger, etc. be able to.

In addition, as described above, since the angle of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is an obtuse angle, compared to the case where the angle is a right angle, the game ball is more likely to lick the outer edge to enter the specific opening area. Even if the game ball rolls on the ground, the corners of the outer edge are not chipped, and the durability of the ball-entering unit can be improved.

In addition, since the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate of the ball-entering unit is inclined backward, the angle of the outer edge is an obtuse angle. Therefore, even if the game ball rolls so as to lick the outer edge in order to enter the specific opening area, the outer edge is not chipped because the angle of the outer edge is obtuse, and the durability of the ball-entering unit is improved. can improve sexuality.

Further, since the outer edge of the base plate of the ball-entering unit is inclined backward, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the specific opening area, and the stagnation of the game ball in the specific opening area can be avoided.

Furthermore, since the outer edge of the base plate in the ball-entering unit is made transparent, even if the outer edge partially overlaps the specific opening area, it is possible to prevent the size of the specific opening area from appearing small.

In addition, since the two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be separated from each other, when the ball-entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball-entering unit does not rotate along the surface of the game panel, so that the ball-entering unit can be moved. The game panel can be reliably positioned at a desired position.

In addition, it is desirable to provide an attachment hole for attaching the ball-entering unit to the game panel in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screws into the game panel through the mounting holes and tightening them, the positioning projections can be strongly pressed against the game panel side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting for recycling or the like.

[15-7c. Relationship between Solution Means of Seventh Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The out-port 1008 and the specific opening area 1103 in the game board 5 of this embodiment are the ball discharge opening (specific opening area) of the above solving means, and the opening area 1101 of the game panel 1100 in this embodiment is the opening area of the above solving means. , the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in this embodiment is the game panel of the above solution, the opening 1112 and the normal opening area 1102 of the panel plate 1110 in this embodiment are the normal opening area of the above solution, and the present embodiment The positioning hole 1113 in the above is the positioning hole of the solving means, the general winning hole 2001 in this embodiment and the ball receiving part 2811b of the first component member 2811 are the ball entrance of the above solving means, the side The unit 2800G corresponds to the ball-entering unit of the above solution.

In addition, the base plate 2811a in the present embodiment is the base plate (extended portion) of the above solution means, the positioning protrusion 2811c in the present embodiment is the positioning protrusion of the above solution means, and the mounting hole 2811d in the present embodiment is the above They correspond respectively to the mounting holes of the solution. Furthermore, the finger hooking portion 2816 and the finger hooking portion 2817 in the present embodiment are provided at the outer edge (base plate, extension) of the ball discharge port (out port 1008, specific opening region 1103) of the ball entry unit (side unit 2800G) in the above solution. It corresponds to a part where a part of the set part) overlaps.

[15-7d. Characteristic action and effect of the seventh technical feature]
According to this embodiment, the positioning projection 2811c projecting from the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G in the game board 5 is inserted from the front into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, and the base plate 2811a is inserted. After being brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate of the game panel 1100 is attached by screwing the mounting screws into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a and tightening them. The side unit 2800G can be attached to the front surface of the side unit 2800G. It can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the normal opening area 1102). At this time, since the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is blocked from the front by the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G, the rear of the game panel 1100 can be hidden by making it difficult to see through the opening 1112. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). When the side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, part of the transparent outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G (finger hooking portion 2816 and finger hooking portion 2817) is an out port 1008. (Specific opening area 1103 of opening area 1101) (a part of the outer edge overlaps the projection range of out port 1008 in a front view). 2817) protrudes toward the center of the out port 1008 . When the side unit 2800G is removed from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the finger hooking portion 2816 (finger hooking portion) overlapping the out port 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a 2817), a worker's finger, a tool, or the like can be hooked on the base plate 2811a to pull the side unit 2800G forward with a strong force. Therefore, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 against the resistance between the positioning hole 1113 and the positioning projection 2811c, and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. A possible pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

By the way, since the side unit 2800G is provided with two positioning projections 2811c and each is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, when the side unit 2800G is removed from the panel plate 1110 in the disassembly work, In addition, if the two positioning projections 2811c are to be pulled out from the positioning hole 1113 at the same time, it is necessary to pull the side unit 2800G forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the positioning protrusions 2811c are provided at a portion close to the outlet 1008 and a portion far from the outlet 1008, when the pachinko machine 1 is disassembled for recycling or the like, the panel of the game panel 1100 can be disassembled. When removing the side unit 2800G from the plate 1110, the operator's finger or the like is hooked on the finger hooking portion 2816 (finger hooking portion 2817) overlapping the out port 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800 and pushed forward. By pulling, it is possible to apply a strong pull-out force to the positioning protrusion 2811c near the out port 1008. FIG. As a result, during the disassembly work, the positioning projection 2811c closer to the out port 1008 can be pulled out from the positioning hole 1113 first of the two positioning projections 2811c, and then the remaining positions farther from the out port 1008 can be pulled out. Since the positioning projection 2811c can be pulled out from the positioning hole 1113, it can be pulled out with a weaker force than when pulling out two positioning projections 2811c at the same time.

In addition, since the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is inclined rearward, the outer edge has an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the disassembling work of the pachinko machine 1, the finger hooking portion 2816 (finger hooking portion) overlapping the out port 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G 2817), even if the operator's finger or the like touches the corner of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, the corner is obtuse, compared with the case where the corner is right. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to damage a finger or the like, and the side unit 2800G can be safely removed with a finger or the like.

In addition, as described above, since the angle of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is formed at an obtuse angle, the game ball B enters the out port 1008 compared to when the angle is a right angle. Even if the game ball B rolls so as to lick the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, the outer edge is not chipped, and the durability of the side unit 2800G can be improved.

In addition, since the outer edge of the base plate 2811a in the side unit 2800G is inclined backward, the game ball B can be smoothly guided to the out port 1008, and the stagnation of the game ball B at the out port 1008 can be avoided. can be done.

Furthermore, since the outer edge of the base plate 2811a in the side unit 2800G is transparent, even if part of the outer edge overlaps with the out port 1008 like the finger hooking portion 2816 (finger hooking portion 2817), the out port 1008 does not. It is possible to prevent the size from appearing small.

In addition, since the two positioning protrusions 2811c are provided so as to be separated from each other, when the side unit 2800G is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the side unit 2800G can be rotated along the surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the side unit 2800G can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG.

Also, since the mounting hole 2811d for mounting the game panel 1100 on the panel plate 1110 of the side unit 2800G is provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw can be inserted through the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 through the mounting hole 2811d. By screwing in and tightening, the positioning projection 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 and can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning projection 2811c from rising due to incomplete insertion. be able to.

By the way, in disassembling the pachinko machine 1, in order to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the worker's finger or the like is hooked on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, which overlaps with the out port 1008, and the operator's finger or the like is hooked forward. When pulled to the side, if the strength of the relevant portion is weak, the outer edge may crack and the side unit 2800G may remain on the game panel 1100 side. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 113, since the depth of the finger hook portion 2817 overlapping the out port 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is increased, the panel plate of the game panel 1100 Compared to the method of partially overlapping the outer edge (extended portion) of the base plate 2811a on the front surface of 1110, the size of the specific opening area 1103 (out port 1008) is smaller (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B is smaller). ), or the size of the specific opening area 1103 (out port 1008) is expanded in advance (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B is increased), but the strength of the finger hook portion 2817 Therefore, the side unit 2800G can be reliably removed from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 without being broken (damaged) even if the operator's finger or the like is hooked on the finger hooking portion 2817 and pulled forward. be able to.

In addition, since the finger hook portion 2817 overlapping the out port 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G penetrates the out port 1008 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. , the finger hook portion 2817 can cover the inner surface of the outlet 1008 to make it difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

[15-8. Eighth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-8a. Background of the eighth technical feature]
In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as a means for performing an effect that can attract the interest of a player, the effect device is enlarged, the movable area of the effect device is widened, and the effect device is used. are decorated with flashy luminescence.

By the way, in conventional gaming machines such as those disclosed in Patent Document Y (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018185), a plurality of ball entrances (for example, general prize winning openings) are provided on the front surface of a game panel through which game balls flow down. The incoming ball unit is installed. A game ball that enters the ball entrance of the ball entry unit is guided to the rear of the game panel, and discharged downward after being detected by a ball sensor in a ball guide unit provided behind the game panel. be done. In order to make such a ball-entering unit luminous and decorated, it is necessary to provide an LED mounted with an LED on the rear side of the ball guiding unit provided behind the ball-entering unit, and an LED substrate is provided. , the space behind the ball-entering unit becomes narrower, and it becomes difficult to secure a wider space for installing the effect device.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine capable of presenting a more impactful presentation by making it easier to secure a space behind the ball-entering unit. .

[15-8b. Eighth technical feature solution]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entering unit
Positioning projections to be inserted into positioning holes provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, and an opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front a first component attached to the game panel so as to block it;
A second configuration that has a second attachment hole for attachment to the first component and is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to form a predetermined space in the opening together with the first component and
An LED board on which an LED is mounted is provided in the space formed by the first component and the second component."
It is characterized by being

Here, the "entrance" is defined as "a winning opening that provides a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters (for example, a general winning opening, a normal winning opening, a starting winning opening (starting opening), a large winning opening, a special winning opening, etc.). , ``out slot for ejecting a game ball out of the gaming machine without returning it to the player without awarding a privilege even if it enters the game ball'', and the like.

In addition, the "game panel" includes "things made of wooden plywood such as plywood" and "things made up of a panel plate made by cutting a transparent resin plate and a panel holder holding the outer periphery of the panel plate. , "Injection-molded transparent resin", and the like.

Further, the "LED board" may be attached to the first component or may be attached to the second component. Further, the "non-contact surface portion" may be provided in the first component portion, may be provided in the second component portion, or may be provided in both the first component portion and the second component portion. It's okay to be there.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit is , a positioning projection to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, so as to block the opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. It has a first component to be attached to the game panel and a second mounting hole for attaching to the first component, and the first component so as to form a predetermined space in the opening with the first component. and a second component that is attached from the rear side, and an LED board on which LEDs are mounted in a space formed by the first component and the second component ([Invention Mode for implementation], refer to the section [12-2b.

As a result, after attaching the second component from the rear side of the first component with the mounting screw through the second mounting hole, the positioning protrusion of the first component is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front. After that, by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole and tightening it, the ball entry unit can be mounted on the front surface of the game panel, and the game panel is penetrated by the first component. Since the opening can be blocked, the rear side of the game panel can be made difficult to see through the opening, the appearance of the game machine can be improved, and foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the game through the opening from the rear side of the game panel. Intrusion into the front side of the panel can be prevented. Then, a space is formed in the opening of the game panel by the first component and the second component that is attached from the rear side of the first component by means of a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, and the space is Since the LED board is provided in the , the ball entry unit can be decorated with light by the LED of the LED board. At this time, since the space in which the LED board is provided is formed in the opening of the game panel, it is possible to fit the space and the LED board within the board thickness of the game panel. It is possible to reduce the amount of protrusion to the ball as much as possible, and it is possible to secure a wider space behind the ball entering unit. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large performance device or a performance device with a wide movable area behind the ball-entering unit, so that it is possible to present a performance with a greater impact to the player, which is highly appealing to the player. It is possible to provide high-end gaming machines.

In addition, it is desirable to provide the first attachment hole for attaching the ball-entering unit to the game panel in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole and tightening it, the positioning protrusion can be strongly pressed against the game panel side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion of the projection can be prevented.

In addition, it is desirable to provide the ball-entering unit with a non-contact surface portion that is not in contact with a part of the contact surface portion where the first component portion and the second component portion are in contact with each other. As a result, the LED substrate is provided in the space between the first component and the second component, and a part of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other is in contact with each other. Since the non-contact surface portion is provided, the heat from the LED substrate can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion, and the influence of heat can be avoided.

Furthermore, when the non-contact surface portion is provided as described above, the front end side of the opening of the game panel is blocked by the first component, so the heat released from the non-contact surface portion to the outside flows to the front side of the game panel. Therefore, the heat can be dissipated to the rear side of the game panel.

In addition, when the non-contact surface portion is provided as described above, the ball entry unit is formed so as to have a gap between it and the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel, and the non-contact surface portion is at least the upper contact surface. It is desirable to provide it on the face portion. Thereby, the non-contact surface portion capable of dissipating heat from the LED substrate provided in the space formed by the first component portion and the second component portion to the outside is provided on at least the upper portion of the contact surface portion. Therefore, the heat from the LED substrate can be reliably radiated to the outside by the non-contact surface portion, and the heat will not stay in the space. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer circumference of the portion of the ball-entering unit inserted into the opening of the game panel and the inner circumference of the opening. In other words, since a gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion and the inner periphery of the opening, the heat from the LED board can be reliably radiated from the non-contact surface portion to the gap, and the heat is exhausted from the opening through the gap. can do.

Further, when providing the non-contact surface portion as described above, it is desirable to provide the LED substrate so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in plan view. As a result, even if foreign matter such as dust enters the space in which the LED substrate is provided through the non-contact surface portion, it is possible to prevent the LED substrate from being easily affected, and the influence of the foreign matter can be prevented as much as possible.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the gaming panel be opaque. As a result, since the game panel is made opaque, light from the LEDs of the LED board does not enter the inside of the game panel from the inner peripheral surface of the opening of the game panel, and is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the opening. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the presentation effect of the light emission of the LED.

Further, when the non-contact surface portion is provided as described above, the non-contact surface portion may be provided behind the rear surface of the game panel. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate provided in the space between the first component and the second component can be reliably radiated backward from the rear surface of the game panel through the non-contact surface portion, It is possible to avoid the influence of heat.

In addition, the first component part may have a flat plate-like base plate which has a positioning projection projecting therethrough and a mounting hole penetrating therethrough, and which can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel. As a result, since the ball entry unit is provided with a flat base plate, the opening of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate by attaching the ball entry unit to the front surface of the game panel through the mounting hole. , the back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

Further, as described above, if the first component has a base plate, the opening of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate of the ball-entering unit. Heat from the LED substrate provided in the space between can be radiated to the rear side of the game panel through the non-contact surface portion, and foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be removed from the back side of the game panel. Intrusion into the front side of the game panel through the opening of the game panel can be prevented.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The ball-entering unit
A non-contact surface portion that is not in contact with each other is provided in a part of the contact surface portion where the first component portion and the second component portion are in contact with each other.”
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 2, the ball-entering unit is provided with a non-contact surface portion that does not contact each other in a part of the contact surface portion where the first component portion and the second component portion are in contact with each other ([Invention Embodiments], see the description regarding the side unit 2800B, the contact surface portion 2830, and the non-contact surface portion 2831).

As a result, the LED substrate is provided in the space between the first component and the second component, and a part of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other is in contact with each other. Since the non-contact surface portion is provided, the heat from the LED substrate can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion, and the influence of heat can be avoided.

In addition, since the front end side of the opening of the game panel is blocked by the first component, the heat released from the non-contact surface portion to the outside does not flow to the front side of the game panel, and is radiated to the rear side of the game panel. can be made

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 2,
"The ball-entering unit is formed so that a gap is provided between it and the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel,
The non-contact surface portion is provided at least on the contact surface portion on the upper side."
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, the ball entry unit is formed so as to have a gap between it and the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel, and the non-contact surface portion is provided at least on the upper contact surface portion. (See the description regarding the side unit 2800B and the non-contact surface portion 2831 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

Thereby, the non-contact surface portion capable of dissipating heat from the LED substrate provided in the space formed by the first component portion and the second component portion to the outside is provided on at least the upper portion of the contact surface portion. Therefore, the heat from the LED substrate can be reliably radiated to the outside by the non-contact surface portion, and the heat will not stay in the space. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer circumference of the portion of the ball-entering unit inserted into the opening of the game panel and the inner circumference of the opening. In other words, since a gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion and the inner periphery of the opening, the heat from the LED board can be reliably radiated from the non-contact surface portion to the gap, and the heat is exhausted from the opening through the gap. can do.

Means 4: In the configuration of Means 2 or Means 3,
"The LED substrate is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in plan view."
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, the LED substrate is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in plan view (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the description regarding the LED substrate 2825 and the non-contact surface portion 2831 ).

As a result, even if foreign matter such as dust enters the space in which the LED substrate is provided through the non-contact surface portion, it is possible to prevent the LED substrate from being easily affected, and the influence of the foreign matter can be prevented as much as possible.

Means 5: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 4,
"The game panel is opaque"
It is characterized by

By the way, if the game panel is made transparent, the light from the LED substrate enters the inside of the game panel from the inner peripheral surface of the opening of the game panel and diffuses, thereby reducing the amount of light emitted forward. As a result, there is a risk that the effect of light emission from the LED will be weakened.

According to the configuration of means 5, the game panel is made opaque (see the description regarding the game panel 1100 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

As a result, since the game panel is made opaque, light from the LEDs of the LED board does not enter the inside of the game panel from the inner peripheral surface of the opening of the game panel, and is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the opening. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the presentation effect of the light emission of the LED.

Means 6: In the configuration of any one of Means 2 to 5,
"The non-contact surface portion is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel"
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 6, the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel (see the description regarding the side unit 2800B in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, the heat from the LED substrate provided in the space between the first component and the second component can be reliably radiated backward from the rear surface of the game panel through the non-contact surface portion, It is possible to avoid the influence of heat.

Means 7: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 6,
"The first component part has a flat base plate through which the positioning projection protrudes and the mounting hole penetrates, and which can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel."
It is characterized by being

According to the structure of the means 7, the first component part has a positioning projection protruding and a mounting hole penetrating therethrough, and has a flat base plate that can abut on the front surface of the game panel. (See the description regarding the unit main body 2810 of the side unit 2800B in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the ball entry unit is provided with a flat base plate, the opening of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate by attaching the ball entry unit to the front surface of the game panel through the mounting hole. , the back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, since the opening of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate of the ball entry unit, the heat from the LED board provided in the space between the first component and the second component is Heat can be dissipated to the rear side of the game panel through the contact surface portion, and foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the front side of the game panel through the opening of the game panel from the rear side of the game panel. .

Means 8: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entering unit
It has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, and an opening provided to penetrate the game panel is opened from the front side. a first component attached to the game panel so as to block it;
A second configuration that has a second attachment hole for attachment to the first component and is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to form a predetermined space in the opening together with the first component Department and
and is formed so that a gap is provided between the game panel and the inner circumference in the opening,
A non-contact surface portion that is not in contact with each other is provided at least on the upper side of the contact surface portion where the first component portion and the second component portion are in contact with each other,
An LED board on which an LED is mounted is provided in the space formed by the first component and the second component so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in plan view.”
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 8, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit is , a positioning projection to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, so as to block the opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. It has a first component to be attached to the game panel and a second mounting hole for attaching to the first component, and the first component so as to form a predetermined space in the opening with the first component. and a second component that is attached from the rear side, and is formed so that a gap is provided between the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel and the first component and the second component. A non-contact surface part that is not in contact with each other is provided at least on the upper side of the contact surface part, and the LED is placed in the space formed by the first component part and the second component part so as not to overlap the non-contact surface part in plan view. is provided with an LED substrate on which is mounted.

As a result, after attaching the second component from the rear side of the first component with the mounting screws through the second mounting holes, the positioning protrusion protruding from the flat base plate in the first component is moved forward. After inserting it into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front of the game panel, screw the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole and tighten it so that the base plate comes into contact with the front of the game panel. Since the ball-entering unit can be attached and the opening penetrating the game panel can be blocked by the base plate of the first component, it is possible to make it difficult to see behind the game panel through the opening. The appearance can be improved, and foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the front side of the game panel through the opening from the rear side of the game panel. Then, a space is formed in the opening of the game panel by the first component and the second component that is attached from the rear side of the first component by means of a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, and the space is Since the LED board is provided in the , the ball entry unit can be decorated with light by the LED of the LED board. At this time, since the space in which the LED board is provided is formed in the opening of the game panel, it is possible to fit the space and the LED board within the board thickness of the game panel. It is possible to reduce the amount of protrusion to the ball as much as possible, and it is possible to secure a wider space behind the ball entering unit. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large performance device or a performance device with a wide movable area behind the ball-entering unit, so that it is possible to present a performance with a greater impact to the player, which is highly appealing to the player. It is possible to provide high-end gaming machines.

Further, the LED board is provided in the space between the first component and the second component, and at least the upper part of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other, Since the non-contact surface portions that are not in contact with each other are provided, the heat from the LED substrate can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portions, and the influence of heat can be avoided. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer circumference of the portion of the ball-entering unit inserted into the opening of the game panel and the inner circumference of the opening. That is, since the gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion and the inner periphery of the opening, the heat from the LED substrate can be reliably radiated from the non-contact surface portion to the gap. Since the front end side of the opening of the game panel is closed by the base plate of the first component, the heat emitted from the non-contact surface portion to the gap does not flow to the front side of the game panel through the gap. It can be guided to the rear surface side of the game panel, and the heat from the LED substrate can be reliably radiated.

In addition, since the LED board is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in a plan view, even if foreign matter such as dust enters the space where the LED board is provided through the non-contact surface portion, the LED board It is possible to prevent the influence of foreign matter as much as possible.

Furthermore, since the game panel is made opaque, the light from the LEDs of the LED substrate does not enter the inside of the game panel from the inner peripheral surface of the opening of the game panel, and the light can be reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the opening. Since it becomes possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the presentation effect of the light emission of the LED.

In addition, since the base plate of the ball entry unit blocks the opening of the game panel from the front side, the heat from the LED board provided in the space between the first component and the second component is It is possible to dissipate heat to the rear side of the game panel through the non-contact surface portion, and to prevent foreign matter such as dust from the rear side of the game panel from entering the front side of the game panel through the opening of the game panel. can.

In addition, in the first component of the ball-entering unit, it is desirable to provide a first attachment hole passing through the base plate for attachment to the game panel, near the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole and tightening it, the positioning protrusion can be strongly pressed against the game panel side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion of the projection can be prevented.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of presenting a more impactful presentation by making it easier to secure the space behind the ball-entering unit.

[15-8c. Relationship between Solution Means of Eighth Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of this embodiment is the game panel of the above solving means, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of this embodiment is the opening of the above solving means, and the positioning hole of this embodiment is 1113 is the positioning hole of the solving means, the general winning hole 2001 in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 2811b of the first component member 2811 is the ball entrance of the above solving means, the side unit 2800B in this embodiment, the side A unit 2800C, a side unit 2800D, a side unit 2800E, and a side unit 2800F correspond to the ball-entering units of the above solution.

In addition, the unit main body 2810 and the unit main body 2810A in this embodiment are the first constituent parts of the above solving means, the base plate 2811a in this embodiment is the base plate of the above solving means, and the positioning protrusion 2811c in this embodiment is the above The positioning protrusion of the solving means, the mounting hole 2811d in this embodiment to the mounting hole of the solving means, the unit cover 2820 in this embodiment to the second component of the solving means, and the LED board 2825 in this embodiment These correspond to the LED substrates of the above solution. In addition, the contact surface portion 2830 (the portion where the support frame portion 2814 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact) in this embodiment is the contact surface portion of the above solution, and the non-contact surface portion 2831 (the cutout portion of the support frame portion 2814) in this embodiment. 2814b and the notched portion 2820c) of the unit cover 2820 correspond to the non-contact surface portion of the above solution, respectively.

[15-8d. Characteristic effects of the eighth technical feature]
Here, as a feature of the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800C, the side unit 2800D, the side unit 2800E, and the side unit 2800F in this embodiment, the side unit 2800B will be described as a representative. According to this embodiment, in the side unit 2800B attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, after attaching the unit cover 2820 from the rear side of the unit main body 2810 with the mounting screws through the mounting holes, the unit main body After inserting the positioning projection 2811c protruding from the flat base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 of 2810 into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the base plate 2811a is inserted into the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2800B can be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screws into the panel plate 1110 through the mounting holes 2811d so as to abut on the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Since the opening 1112 passing through can be blocked, it is possible to make it difficult to see the back of the game panel 1100 through the opening 1112, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the panel in the game panel 1100 Foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the front side (game area 5 a ) of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the plate 1110 . A space is formed in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 by the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit main body 2810 by mounting screws through the mounting holes. Since the substrate 2825 is provided, the LED 2825a of the LED substrate 2825 can be used to decorate the side unit 2800B. At this time, since the space in which the LED board 2825 is provided is formed in the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the space and the LED board 2825 can be accommodated within the board thickness of the panel board 1110. As a result, the amount of rearward projection from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 can be minimized, and a wider space behind the side unit 2800B can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large production device, a production device with a wide movable area, etc. behind the side unit 2800B, so that a more impactful production can be presented to the player, and the appeal to the player can be increased. An expensive pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, an LED board 2825 is provided in the space between the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 in the side unit 2800B, and at least the upper part of the contact surface portion 2830 where the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other. Since the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) that is not in contact with each other is provided, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831, and the influence of heat can be avoided. can. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer circumference of the portion of the side unit 2800B inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and the inner circumference of the opening 1112 . That is, since the gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion 2831 and the inner periphery of the opening 1112, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be reliably radiated from the non-contact surface portion 2831 to the gap. Since the front end side of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is blocked by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 of the unit main body 2810, the heat released from the non-contact surface portion 2831 to the gap is Through the gap, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be reliably dissipated by being guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 without flowing to the front side of the panel plate 1110 .

In addition, since the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion 2831 in plan view, foreign matter such as dust and dirt cannot enter the space where the LED board 2825 is provided through the non-contact surface portion 2831. Also, it is possible to make it difficult for the LED substrate 2825 to get caught, and the influence of foreign matter can be prevented as much as possible.

Furthermore, when the game panel 1100 is made opaque, light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the game panel 1100 through the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. Since it is possible to reflect the light, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the presentation effect of the light emission of the LED 2825a.

In addition, since the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is blocked from the front side by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 in the side unit 2800B, the space between the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 is closed. The heat from the LED substrate 2825 provided in the panel plate 1110 can be radiated to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 through the non-contact surface portion 2831, and foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from the rear side of the panel plate 1110. Intrusion into the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 can be prevented.

In addition, in the side unit 2800B, in the first component member 2811 of the unit main body 2810, a mounting hole 2811d passing through the base plate 2811a for mounting on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided near the positioning projection 2811c. Therefore, by screwing the mounting screw into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d and tightening it, the positioning projection 2811c is strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and is securely attached to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110. It is possible to prevent the positioning projection 2811c from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

[15-9. Ninth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-9a. Background of the ninth technical feature]
In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as a means for performing an effect that can attract the interest of a player, the effect device is enlarged, the movable range of the effect device is widened, and the effect device is used. are decorated with flashy luminescence.

As a game machine of this kind, for example, in a conventional game machine such as Patent Document Y (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018185), a plurality of ball entrances (for example, and a ball guide unit that detects a game ball that has entered the ball entrance of the ball unit at the rear of the game panel and discharges it downward. It is

However, in the technique of Patent Document Y, since the ball guiding unit is provided behind the game panel, the presence of the ball guiding unit narrows the space behind the ball entering unit, and the space for providing the effect device. could not be secured more widely.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine capable of presenting a more impactful presentation by making it easier to secure a space behind the ball-entering unit. .

[15-9b. Solution for the ninth technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game board through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entering unit
It has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board, and a mounting hole for mounting to the game board, and closes an opening extending through the game board from the front side. a first component attached to the game board in
It is provided on the rear side of the first component part, and along the board surface of the game board in the opening so that the game ball that enters the ball entrance enters the board thickness of the game board a second component having a flowable sphere passage; and
characterized by comprising

Here, the "entrance" is defined as "a winning opening that provides a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters (for example, a general winning opening, a normal winning opening, a starting winning opening (starting opening), a large winning opening, a special winning opening, etc.). , ``out slot for ejecting a game ball out of the gaming machine without returning it to the player without awarding a privilege even if it enters the game ball'', and the like.

In addition, the "game board" includes obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, "a board made of wooden plywood such as plywood", and "a panel board made by cutting a transparent resin board". "mono", "transparent resin injection-molded", and the like.

Furthermore, the "ball passage" may extend so as to extend entirely within the thickness of the game board, or may extend so as to partially extend within the thickness of the game board.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which a game ball can enter and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game board through which a game ball can flow down, the ball entry unit is , a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board, and a mounting hole for mounting to the game board, and the opening provided to penetrate the game board is closed from the front side. A first constituent part attached to the board, and a first constituent part provided on the rear side of the first constituent part. and a second component having a ball passage that can flow down along the plate surface (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [12-1. Side unit of second embodiment] section , see descriptions in FIGS. 103 to 108, etc.).

As a result, after inserting the positioning projections of the first component into the positioning holes of the game panel from the front, the mounting screws are screwed into the game board through the mounting holes and tightened, so that the front surface of the game board is secured to the first position. Since the constituent part (ball entry unit) can be attached and the opening penetrating the game board can be blocked by the first constituent part, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear side of the game board through the opening, thereby improving the gaming machine. The appearance of the game board can be improved, and foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the front side of the game board through the opening from the rear side of the game board. A ball passage extending along the board surface of the game board in the opening is provided in the second component part provided on the rear side of the first component part so as to extend within the thickness of the game board. Therefore, the game ball entering the ball entrance through the ball passage can flow down so as to fall within the thickness of the game board. The amount of rearward protrusion of the unit from the rear surface of the game board can be minimized, and a wider space behind the ball-entering unit can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large performance device or a performance device (movable accessory) with a wide movable area behind the ball-entering unit, so that a more impactful performance can be presented to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly appealing to people.

In addition, it is desirable to provide a mounting hole for mounting the ball-entering unit to the game board in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screws into the game board through the mounting holes and tightening them, the positioning projections can be strongly pressed against the game board side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning holes of the game board. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

Also, at least the portion in front of the movable accessory in the ball passage may be provided within the thickness of the game board. As a result, since the front part of the movable accessory as a production device in the ball passage is made to extend within the plate thickness of the game board, there is sufficient space in the front-rear direction of the part where the movable accessory is provided. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of ensuring a wide range of movement of a movable accessory and showing a player a performance with a higher impact.

Further, as described above, when the front part of the movable accessory in the ball passage is provided within the thickness of the game board, the movable accessory is provided on the rear side of the game board as described above. Since it is possible to secure a sufficient space in the front-rear direction of the part where it is, for example, a decoration can be placed between the ball-entering unit and the movable accessory, and the movable accessory in the lowered position can be moved by the decoration. It can be hidden so that it is difficult for the player to see it. To provide a game machine capable of showing a player a performance in which a movable accessory appears when the movable accessory is raised from a lowered position, giving a strong impact to the player and entertaining the player. be able to.

Further, a ball sensor for detecting a game ball flowing down the ball passage may be provided at a portion below the movable accessory provided behind the ball passage. As a result, the ball sensor for detecting the game ball entering the ball entrance is provided at a portion below the movable accessory provided behind, so that the ball sensor does not interfere with the movable accessory. However, it is possible to sufficiently exhibit the desired performance effect of the movable accessory.

In addition, the ball passage includes a branch portion communicating with the ball entrance and extending backward, and a main flow portion joining the branch portion and extending downward along the board surface of the game board. You may make it have. As a result, since the respective tributaries communicating with each ball entrance are merged with the main stream and flowed down, there is no need to provide ball passages for each of the plurality of ball entrances. It is possible to collectively discharge balls in one ball passage and to easily secure a space behind the ball-entering unit.

Also, the second component may be attached to the rear side of the first component. Accordingly, since the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the first component can be increased by the second component. More specifically, for example, in disassembling a game machine for recycling or the like, when the first component is pulled forward to be removed from the game board, if the rigidity of the first component is low, the first component may bend. Due to the deflection, the positioning projections inserted into the positioning holes of the game board are tilted, making it difficult to get out of the positioning holes, and there is a risk that the disassembly work will be troublesome. On the other hand, if the second constituent part is attached to the rear side of the first constituent part, the second constituent part is provided with a ball passage, and the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped. Since the rigidity of the second component is increased by the existence of the ball passage, the rigidity of the first component (ball entry unit) can be increased by attaching the second component. Therefore, when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward in disassembly work of the game machine for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased, so that the first constituent part from which the positioning projection protrudes does not bend. Therefore, the positioning protrusions are not inclined with respect to the positioning holes of the game board, the ball entry unit can be easily removed from the game board, and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. can be provided.

Furthermore, the second component may be attached to a back member provided behind the game board. As a result, since the second component part of the ball-entering unit is attached to the rear surface member behind the game board, the ball passage extends downward from the opening penetrating through the game board on the rear side of the game board. becomes possible. More specifically, when the second component is attached to the first component, the first component closes the opening of the game board from the front side, so the second component where the ball passage is provided is positioned closer to the opening than the opening. Therefore, it is difficult to extend part of the ball passage below the opening on the rear side of the game board. On the other hand, if the second component part is attached to the back surface member provided behind the game board, a part of the ball passage extends below the opening on the rear side of the game board. be able to. Therefore, since the ball passage can be extended to the lower end of the game board, the drop height of the game balls discharged downward can be reduced, and the impact caused by the discharged game balls can be reduced. can. In addition, since part of the ball passage can be extended downward from the opening on the rear side of the game board, it is necessary to extend the opening penetrating through the game board downward to the lower end of the game board. There is no loss, and the strength of the game board does not decrease.

Also, as described above, if the second component of the ball-entering unit is attached to the rear surface member behind the game board, when the ball sensor is provided in the ball passage, the electronic parts such as the ball sensor are installed behind the game board. Therefore, electronic parts can be arranged on the back member side, and there is no need to provide electronic parts such as ball sensors on the game board side. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling the game machine, since the wiring of the electronic parts does not extend from the game board side, the wiring may get caught on a member such as an obstructing nail, which may interfere with the work or break the wiring. never do.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The second component part is provided so that at least the front part of the movable accessory in the ball passage is within the thickness of the game board."
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 2, the second component part is provided so that at least the part in front of the movable accessory in the ball passage is within the thickness of the game board ([In order to carry out the invention form], see the description regarding the ball passage 2812a of the second component member 2812).

As a result, since the front part of the movable accessory as a production device in the ball passage is made to extend within the plate thickness of the game board, there is sufficient space in the front-rear direction of the part where the movable accessory is provided. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of ensuring a wide range of movement of a movable accessory and showing a player a performance with a higher impact.

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to secure a sufficient space in the front-rear direction of the part where the movable accessory is provided on the rear side of the game board, for example, the ball-entering unit and the movable accessory can be separated from each other. By arranging the decoration between them, the movable accessory at the lowered position can be hidden from the player so that it is difficult to see. To provide a game machine capable of showing a player a performance in which a movable accessory appears when the movable accessory is raised from a lowered position, giving a strong impact to the player and entertaining the player. be able to.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The second component part is provided with a ball sensor for detecting a game ball flowing down the ball passage at a portion below a movable accessory provided at the rear in the ball passage."
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 3, the second constituent part is provided with a ball sensor for detecting a game ball flowing down the ball passage at a portion below the movable accessory provided at the rear of the ball passage. (See description regarding sphere sensor 2813b in Detailed Description).

As a result, the ball sensor for detecting the game ball entering the ball entrance is provided at a portion below the movable accessory provided behind, so that the ball sensor does not interfere with the movable accessory. However, it is possible to sufficiently exhibit the desired performance effect of the movable accessory.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The ball passage includes a branch portion that communicates with the ball entrance and extends backward, and a main stream portion that joins the branch portion and extends downward along the board surface of the game board. and have
characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 4, the ball passage has a branch portion communicating with the ball entrance and extending backward, and a branch portion joining the branch portion and extending downward along the board surface of the game board. (See the description of the tributary portion 2801 and the main flow portion 2802 in the ball passage 2812a in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the respective tributaries communicating with each ball entrance are merged with the main stream and flowed down, there is no need to provide ball passages for each of the plurality of ball entrances. It is possible to collectively discharge balls in one ball passage and to easily secure a space behind the ball-entering unit.

Means 5: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 4,
"said second component is attached to the rear of the first component"
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component (see [Description of the Invention] for the second component 2812 of the side unit 2800). see description).

Accordingly, since the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the first component can be increased by the second component. More specifically, for example, in disassembling a game machine for recycling or the like, when the first component is pulled forward to be removed from the game board, if the rigidity of the first component is low, the first component may bend. Due to the deflection, the positioning projections inserted into the positioning holes of the game board are tilted, making it difficult to get out of the positioning holes, and there is a risk that the disassembly work will be troublesome. On the other hand, in the present means, the ball passage is provided in the second component, and the ball passage has a U-shaped cross section. The rigidity of the first component (ball-entering unit) can be increased by attaching this second component because it is enhanced by its presence. Therefore, when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward in disassembly work of the game machine for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased, so that the first constituent part from which the positioning projection protrudes does not bend. Therefore, the positioning protrusions are not inclined with respect to the positioning holes of the game board, the ball entry unit can be easily removed from the game board, and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. can be provided.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 4,
"The second constituent part is attached to a back member provided behind the game board."
characterized by being

Here, the "back member" includes a "back decoration", a "back unit", a "back box", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 6, the second component is attached to the back member provided behind the game board (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the second component of the side unit 2800A See description for component 2813).

As a result, since the second component part of the ball-entering unit is attached to the rear surface member behind the game board, the ball passage extends downward from the opening penetrating through the game board on the rear side of the game board. becomes possible. More specifically, when the second component is attached to the first component, the first component closes the opening of the game board from the front side, so the second component where the ball passage is provided is positioned closer to the opening than the opening. Therefore, it is difficult to extend part of the ball passage below the opening on the rear side of the game board. On the other hand, in this means, since the second constituent part is attached to the back surface member behind the game board, a part of the ball passage extends below the opening on the rear side of the game board. be able to. Therefore, since the ball passage can be extended to the lower end of the game board, the drop height of the game balls discharged downward can be reduced, and the impact caused by the discharged game balls can be reduced. can. In addition, since part of the ball passage can be extended downward from the opening on the rear side of the game board, it is necessary to extend the opening penetrating through the game board downward to the lower end of the game board. There is no loss, and the strength of the game board does not decrease.

In addition, since the second component part of the ball entry unit is attached to the back member behind the game board, when a ball sensor is provided in the ball passage, electronic parts such as the ball sensor are attached to the back member side behind the game board. Therefore, the electronic parts can be put together on the back member side, and there is no need to provide electronic parts such as ball sensors on the game board side. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling the game machine, since the wiring of the electronic parts does not extend from the game board side, the wiring may get caught on a member such as an obstructing nail, which may interfere with the work or break the wiring. never do.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game board through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entering unit
It has a positioning projection inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board, and an attachment hole for attachment to the game board, and closes an opening extending through the game board from the front side. a first component attached to the game board in
It is provided on the rear side of the first component part, and along the board surface of the game board in the opening so that the game ball that enters the ball entrance enters the board thickness of the game board a second component having a flowable ball passage;
with
The second component part is attached to the rear side of the first component part or to a rear member provided behind the game board, and the ball passage is positioned below the movable accessory. A ball sensor is provided to detect the flowing game ball,
The ball passage includes a branch portion communicating with the ball entrance and extending rearward, and a main flow portion joining the branch portion and extending downward along the board surface of the game board. , and is provided so that at least the front portion of the movable accessory is within the thickness of the game board.”
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 7, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which a game ball can enter and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game board through which a game ball can flow down, the ball entry unit is , a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board, and a mounting hole for mounting to the game board, and the opening provided to penetrate the game board is closed from the front side. A first constituent part attached to the board, and a first constituent part provided on the rear side of the first constituent part. a second component having a ball passage that can flow down along the plate surface, and the second component is on the rear side of the first component or on the back member provided behind the game board A ball sensor for detecting a game ball flowing down the ball passage is provided at a portion below the movable accessory, and the ball passage communicates with the ball entrance and extends rearward. It has a protruding tributary part and a main stream part which merges with the tributary part and extends downward along the board surface of the game board, and at least a part in front of the movable accessory is the board of the game board. It is provided so as to be applied within the thickness.

As a result, after inserting the positioning projections of the first component into the positioning holes of the game panel from the front, the mounting screws are screwed into the game board through the mounting holes and tightened, so that the front surface of the game board is secured to the first position. Since the constituent part (ball entry unit) can be attached and the opening penetrating the game board can be blocked by the first constituent part, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear side of the game board through the opening, thereby improving the gaming machine. The appearance of the game board can be improved, and foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the front side of the game board through the opening from the rear side of the game board. A ball passage extending along the board surface of the game board in the opening is provided in the second component part provided on the rear side of the first component part so as to extend within the thickness of the game board. Therefore, the game ball entering the ball entrance through the ball passage can flow down so as to fall within the thickness of the game board. The amount of rearward protrusion of the unit from the rear surface of the game board can be minimized, and a wider space behind the ball-entering unit can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large performance device or a performance device (movable accessory) with a wide movable area behind the ball-entering unit, so that a more impactful performance can be presented to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly appealing to people.

In addition, since the front part of the movable accessory as a production device in the ball passage is designed to be within the thickness of the game board, there is sufficient space in the front and back direction of the part where the movable accessory is provided. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of ensuring a wide range of movement of a movable accessory and showing a player a performance with a higher impact.

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to secure a sufficient space in the front-rear direction of the part where the movable accessory is provided on the rear side of the game board, for example, the ball-entering unit and the movable accessory can be separated from each other. By arranging the decoration between them, the movable accessory at the lowered position can be hidden from the player so that it is difficult to see. To provide a game machine capable of showing a player a performance in which a movable accessory appears when the movable accessory is raised from a lowered position, giving a strong impact to the player and entertaining the player. be able to.

Furthermore, since the ball sensor for detecting the game ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided below the movable accessory provided behind, the ball sensor does not interfere with the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently exhibit the desired performance effect of the movable accessory.

In addition, since the tributaries communicating with each ball inlet are merged with the main stream to flow down, there is no need to provide ball passages for each of the plurality of ball inlets. It is possible to collectively discharge the ball through one ball passage, and to easily secure a space behind the ball entering unit.

Moreover, if the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the first component can be increased by the second component. More specifically, for example, in disassembling a game machine for recycling or the like, when the first component is pulled forward to be removed from the game board, if the rigidity of the first component is low, the first component may bend. Due to the deflection, the positioning projections inserted into the positioning holes of the game board are tilted, making it difficult to get out of the positioning holes, and there is a risk that the disassembly work will be troublesome. On the other hand, if the second constituent part is attached to the rear side of the first constituent part, the second constituent part is provided with a ball passage, and the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped. Since the rigidity of the second component is increased by the existence of the ball passage, the rigidity of the first component (ball entry unit) can be increased by attaching the second component. Therefore, when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward in disassembly work of the game machine for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased, so that the first constituent part from which the positioning projection protrudes does not bend. Therefore, the positioning protrusions are not inclined with respect to the positioning holes of the game board, the ball entry unit can be easily removed from the game board, and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. can be provided.

Furthermore, when the second component part of the ball-entering unit is attached to the back surface member behind the game board, the ball passage extends downward from the opening penetrating the game board on the rear side of the game board. becomes possible. More specifically, when the second component is attached to the first component, the first component closes the opening of the game board from the front side, so the second component where the ball passage is provided is positioned closer to the opening than the opening. Therefore, it is difficult to extend part of the ball passage below the opening on the rear side of the game board. On the other hand, if the second component part is attached to the back surface member provided behind the game board, a part of the ball passage extends below the opening on the rear side of the game board. be able to. Therefore, since the ball passage can be extended to the lower end of the game board, the drop height of the game balls discharged downward can be reduced, and the impact caused by the discharged game balls can be reduced. can. In addition, since part of the ball passage can be extended downward from the opening on the rear side of the game board, it is necessary to extend the opening penetrating through the game board downward to the lower end of the game board. There is no loss, and the strength of the game board does not decrease.

In addition, when the second component of the ball-entering unit is attached to the back member behind the game board, the electronic parts such as the ball sensor provided in the ball passage are provided on the back member side behind the game board. As a result, electronic parts can be put together on the back member side, and there is no need to provide electronic parts such as ball sensors on the game board side. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling the game machine, since the wiring of the electronic parts does not extend from the game board side, the wiring may get caught on a member such as an obstructing nail, which may interfere with the work or break the wiring. never do.

In addition, it is desirable to provide a mounting hole for mounting the ball-entering unit to the game board in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screws into the game board through the mounting holes and tightening them, the positioning projections can be strongly pressed against the game board side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning holes of the game board. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of presenting a more impactful presentation by making it easier to secure the space behind the ball-entering unit.

[15-9c. Relationship between the solution means of the ninth technical feature and the embodiment]
The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of the present embodiment is the game plate of the above solving means, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the present embodiment is the opening of the above solving means, and the positioning hole of the present embodiment. 1113 is the positioning hole of the solving means, the general winning hole 2001 in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 2811b of the first component member 2811 is the ball entrance of the above solving means, the side unit 2800 in this embodiment, the side The unit 2800A, the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800C, and the side unit 2800G correspond to the ball-entering units of the above solution.

Further, the first component 2811 of the unit main body 2810 in the present embodiment is the first component of the solving means, the positioning protrusion 2811c in the present embodiment is the positioning protrusion of the solving means, and the mounting hole in the present embodiment 2811d is the mounting hole of the above solution, the second component 2812 and the second component 2813 in this embodiment are the second component of the above solution, and the ball passages 2812a and 2813a in this embodiment are the above solution. In the ball passage of the means, the ball sensor 2813b and the ball sensor 2815 in this embodiment are the ball sensors of the above solution, the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) in this embodiment is the back member of the above solution, this embodiment The back and bottom effect unit 3500 in the above corresponds to the movable accessory of the above-described solution means.

[15-9d. Characteristic effects of the ninth technical feature]
Here, the side unit 2800 will be described as a representative feature of the side unit 2800, the side unit 2800A, the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800C, and the side unit 2800G in this embodiment. According to this embodiment, in the game board 5, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the first component member 2811 of the side unit 2800 is inserted from the front into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and then the mounting hole 2811d is inserted. By screwing the mounting screws into the panel plate 1110 and tightening them, the first component member 2811 (side unit 2800) can be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the first component member 2811 penetrates the panel plate 1110. Since the opening 1112 can be closed, the rear of the panel plate 1110 can be made difficult to see through the opening 1112, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the panel plate 1110 can be seen from the rear side. Foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from entering the front surface (game area 5 a ) of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 . Then, the second component member 2812 provided on the rear side of the first component member 2811 extends along the plate surface of the panel plate 1110 in the opening 1112 so as to cover the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 . Since the ball passage 2812a is provided, the game ball B entered into the ball receiving portion 2811b (general prize winning port 2001) through the ball passage 2812a is allowed to fall within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, by utilizing the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, the amount of rearward projection of the side unit 2800 from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 can be minimized, and the space behind the side unit 2800 can be secured more widely. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large production device such as the back and bottom production unit 3500 or a production device with a wide movable area behind the side unit 2800, so that a more impactful production can be presented to the player. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the part of the ball passage 2812a that is in front of the lower back effect unit 3500 is placed within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, the space in the front and back direction of the part where the lower back effect unit 3500 is provided is reduced. To provide a Pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently securing, widening the movable range of the back side performance unit 3500, and capable of showing a player a performance with a higher impact.

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to sufficiently secure a space in the front-rear direction of the portion where the backside effect unit 3500 is provided on the rear side of the panel plate 1110, for example, the side unit 2800 and the backside By arranging the decoration between the performance unit 3500 and the decoration, the back and bottom movable decoration 3510 at the lowered position can be hidden from the player. As a result, when the back bottom movable decorative body 3510 is lifted from the lowered position, the player can see an effect in which the back bottom movable decorative body 3510 appears, and the player can be entertained with a strong impact. A possible pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, in the side unit 2800, each of the tributary portions 2801 communicating with each ball receiving portion 2811b is made to join the main flow portion 2802 and flow down. There is no need to provide the ball passage 2812a, and the ball passage 2812a can be used to collectively discharge the ball, and the space behind the side unit 2800 can be easily secured.

Further, in the side unit 2800A, a ball sensor 2813b for detecting a game ball B that has entered the ball receiving portion 2811b (general prize winning opening 2001) is provided at a portion below the back and bottom effect unit 3500 provided behind. Therefore, the ball sensor 2813b does not interfere with the backside effect unit 3500, and the desired effect of the backside effect unit 3500 can be sufficiently exhibited.

Moreover, if the second component member 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component member 2811 as in the side unit 2800, the rigidity of the first component member 2811 can be increased by the second component member 2812. More specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is disassembled for recycling or the like, when the first component member 2811 is pulled forward to be removed from the panel plate 1110, if the rigidity of the first component member 2811 is low, the first component member 2811 is bent, and the bending tilts the positioning protrusion 2811c inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, making it difficult to remove from the positioning hole 1113, and the disassembly work may be troublesome. On the other hand, if the second component member 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component member 2811, the second component member 2812 is provided with a ball passage 2812a, and the cross section of the ball passage 2812a is a cone. Since the second component member 2812 is shaped like a letter, the rigidity of the second component member 2812 is enhanced by the presence of the ball passage 2812a. Rigidity can be increased. Therefore, when the side unit 2800 is pulled forward in disassembly of the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the increased rigidity of the side unit 2800 bends the first component member 2811 from which the positioning protrusion 2811c protrudes. Therefore, the positioning projections 2811c do not incline with respect to the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel plate 1110, reducing the disassembly work for sorting. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800A, since the second component member 2813 is attached to the back member such as the back unit 3000 behind the panel plate 1110, the ball passage 2813a is positioned behind the panel plate 1110 so that the panel plate 1110 is attached. It is possible to extend downward beyond the penetrating opening 1112 . More specifically, when the second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811, the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 from the front side. It is necessary to make the second component 2812 smaller than the opening 1112, which makes it difficult to partially extend the ball passage 2812a below the opening 1112 on the rear side of the panel plate 1110. On the other hand, in the side unit 2800A, since the second component member 2813 is attached to a rear member such as the rear unit 3000 provided behind the panel plate 1110, part of the ball passage 2813a is It can be made to extend below the opening 1112 on the rear side of 1110 . Therefore, since the ball passage 2813a can be extended to the lower end of the panel plate 1110, the drop height of the game ball B discharged downward can be reduced, and the impact of the discharged game ball B can be reduced. can be reduced. Further, since a part of the ball passage 2813a can be made to extend below the opening 1112 on the rear side of the panel plate 1110, the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110 can be There is no need to extend downward to the lower end of the panel plate 1110, and the strength of the panel plate 1110 is not lowered.

In addition, in the side unit 2800A, since the second component member 2813 is attached to the back member such as the back unit 3000 behind the panel plate 1110, electronic components such as the ball sensor 2813b provided in the ball passage 2813a is provided on the back member side behind the panel plate 1110, electronic components can be integrated on the back member side, and there is no need to provide electronic components such as the ball sensor 2813b on the panel plate 1110 side. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling the pachinko machine 1, since the wiring of the electronic parts does not extend from the panel board 1110 side, the wiring may get caught on a member such as an obstructing nail, which may hinder the work or may break the wiring. Never chill out.

In addition, in the side unit 2800, since the mounting hole 2811d for mounting the first component member 2811 to the panel plate 1110 is provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw can be attached to the panel plate 1110 through the mounting hole 2811d. By screwing and tightening, the positioning projection 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning projection 2811c from being lifted due to incomplete insertion. can be done.

[15-10. Tenth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-10a. Background of the tenth technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a center accessory having a decorative body with a predetermined decoration is attached from the front to an opening of a game panel forming a game area in which game balls can flow down, There is known one provided (for example, Patent Document Z: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074434). In the technique of Patent Document Z, the appearance of the gaming machine is improved by the decorative body provided on the center accessory.

However, in the technique of Patent Document Z, since the flat plate-shaped decoration is provided near the front end of the center role, even if the decoration is decorated with a relief-like decoration, it lacks a sense of depth, and depending on the player, it may be difficult for the player to feel the depth. There is a risk that the player will get tired of watching it and lose interest in the player.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the decline in the player's interest by providing a decorative body with a higher decorative effect.

[15-10b. Solution for the tenth technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed,
The game board is
a frame-shaped center frame mounted from the front in an opening formed in the game panel;
a decoration attached to the center frame and having a predetermined decoration;
with
The decoration is
a rear decorative portion extending into the frame of the center frame and partly protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame; a front decorative portion provided forward of the rear decorative portion; has
The rear decoration and the front decoration are decorated in harmony with each other."
It is characterized by being

Here, the "game panel" includes an "opaque panel such as plywood", a "panel plate made of transparent resin", and a "panel plate made of transparent resin and a frame for holding the outer peripheral edge of the panel plate". and a panel holder having a shape.

In addition, the ``center frame'' includes a ``flat plate-shaped flange portion that can contact the front surface of the game panel, and a game ball that extends forward from the flange portion and flows down the game area inside the opening of the game panel. having an inflow restricting portion that restricts inflow”, “an inserting portion that is inserted into the opening of the game panel and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening, and the front end of the inserting portion A flat plate-shaped flange portion that extends in a direction along the surface of the game panel and can contact the front surface of the game panel, and a game ball that extends forward from the flange portion and flows down the game area is an opening in the game panel. and an inflow regulating part that regulates the inflow into the interior of the

In addition, as the "decorative body", there are "things that are decorated with patterns by printing or painting", "things that are three-dimensionally shaped decorations", and "metallic luster like plating". "A thing decorated with", etc.

Furthermore, the "decorative body" includes "things that are decorated with light emitted by LEDs mounted on the LED board", "electronic parts provided behind (for example, LED boards, relay boards, ball sensors, magnetic Sensors, indicators (displays with special patterns), solenoids, etc.) have an opaque part to make it difficult to see the wiring from the front", "It protrudes backward beyond the rear end of the center frame. Those having electronic parts (for example, LED substrates, relay substrates, ball sensors, magnetic sensors, indicators (indicators with special patterns), solenoids, etc.).

In addition, "decoration that cooperates with each other" includes "decoration that constitutes one decoration (picture) with the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part", "the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part". Pattern (figure) decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the front part", "The decoration of the front decoration part or the decoration of the rear decoration part complements (emphasizes) the decoration of the rear decoration part or the decoration of the front decoration part. such as decoration”, and the like.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine provided with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed, the game board is a frame mounted from the front in an opening formed in the game panel. and a decorative body attached to the center frame and having a predetermined decoration, the decorative body extending into the frame of the center frame and partly behind the center frame. It has a rear decoration part projecting rearward from the end and a front decoration part provided in front of the rear decoration part, and the rear decoration part and the front decoration part are decorations that cooperate with each other. It is applied. (In [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], see the chapter [11-2. Center function of the second embodiment] and the description of FIG. 98, etc.)

As a result, the center frame attached to the game panel of the game board is provided with a rear decorative portion partially protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame and a front decorative portion provided forward of the rear decorative portion. Since the decoration body is provided, the decoration with depth can be shown to the player by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part of the decoration body. At this time, since the rear decoration part and the front decoration part are decorated in cooperation with each other, a large decoration can be shown to the player, and the rear decoration part and the front decoration part are large and deep. A decorative body having a high decorative effect can be configured. Therefore, since the center frame can be provided with a decorative body with a high decorative effect, the decorative body can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing. It is possible to provide a game machine that is possible.

In addition, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration is extended into the frame of the center frame, the rear decoration part narrows the game area in front of the game panel or causes the game ball to flow down the game area. The player can enjoy the game with the game ball in the game area in a good condition without making it hard to see.

Furthermore, since the rear decoration portion that constitutes the decoration body is extended into the frame of the center frame, when the performance display device, the movable decoration body, the decoration body, etc. are provided behind the game panel. , the rear decoration part can decorate the periphery of the performance display device (display screen), and cooperate with the decoration body (movable decoration body) to show decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect, It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

In addition, it is desirable to provide the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion so that at least a portion thereof overlaps when viewed from the front. As a result, the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion, which are decorated with decorations that cooperate with each other, are provided so that they partially overlap when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the boundary between the decoration of the decoration and the decoration of the rear decoration part, and the large decoration by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part can be shown to the player in a better state, and the decoration effect of the decoration body. can be further enhanced.

Also, it is desirable to form the center frame transparent. Thereby, since the center frame is transparent, the center frame can be hardly seen by the player and can be made inconspicuous, and the decorations (the front decoration part and the rear decoration part) can be made relatively conspicuous, The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, the decorative body may have an opaque portion that makes the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front. As a result, since the wiring of the electronic component is difficult to see from the front due to the opaque part of the decorative body, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque part, so that the visibility of the wiring can be prevented from deteriorating. , the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exhibited more easily.

Also, the decorative body may be provided in front of the LED substrate on which the LEDs are mounted. As a result, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration). It is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Further, the center frame may be provided with a display capable of displaying the lottery result of the special symbols drawn by the start ball entry by the game ball in the game area. As a result, since the display for displaying the special pattern is attached to the center frame, the display can be attached to the game panel together with the center frame, and the display can be attached separately. In comparison, it is possible to save labor for assembling the game machine.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The front decorative part and the rear decorative part are provided so that at least a part thereof overlaps when viewed from the front."
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 2, the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion are provided so that at least a portion thereof overlaps when viewed from the front. (Refer to the description regarding the decorative body 2580 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention])

As a result, the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion, which are decorated with decorations that cooperate with each other, are provided so that they partially overlap when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the boundary between the decoration of the decoration and the decoration of the rear decoration part, and the large decoration by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part can be shown to the player in a better state, and the decoration effect of the decoration body. can be further enhanced.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 and Means 2,
It is characterized in that "the center frame is transparently formed".

According to the configuration of means 3, the center frame is made transparent. In other words, the center frame is made of a transparent member. (See the description regarding the center frame 2511 in [Description of the Invention])

Thereby, since the center frame is transparent, the center frame can be hardly seen by the player and can be made inconspicuous, and the decorations (the front decoration part and the rear decoration part) can be made relatively conspicuous, The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the center frame is transparent, when the game panel is made transparent and a decorative body or effect display device is provided behind the game panel, the center frame becomes inconspicuous and can be seen through the transparent game panel. To provide a game machine capable of making a decoration body, a performance image and the like more conspicuous and entertaining a player more.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The said ornament is
It has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame from the front.
characterized by being

Here, the "electronic parts" include "LED board", "relay board", "ball sensor for detecting game balls", "magnetic sensor", "display for displaying special symbols", "variable winning "solenoid for opening and closing the mouth", "solenoid or driving motor for moving the movable decoration", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 4, the decorative body has an opaque portion that makes the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front. (Refer to the description regarding the decorative body 2580 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention])

As a result, since the wiring of the electronic component is difficult to see from the front due to the opaque part of the decorative body, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque part, so that the visibility of the wiring can be prevented from deteriorating. , the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exhibited more easily.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The said decoration is
It is installed in front of the LED board on which the LED is mounted.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board on which the LED is mounted. (See the description regarding the LED substrate 2586 of the decoration 2580 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration). It is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

In addition, when light from the LEDs mounted on the LED board is irradiated onto the decorative body, the decorative body can be illuminated by the LED board. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decline of interest.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
"In the center frame,
A display capable of displaying the lottery result of the special symbols drawn by the starting ball entry of the game ball in the game area is attached.
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 6, a display capable of displaying the lottery result of the special symbol lottered by the start ball entry of the game ball in the game area is attached to the center frame. (See the description regarding the pattern display 2518 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the display for displaying the special pattern is attached to the center frame, the display can be attached to the game panel together with the center frame, and the display can be attached separately. In comparison, it is possible to save labor for assembling the game machine.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed,
The game board is
A frame-shaped transparent display that can display the lottery result of the special pattern drawn by the starting ball entry of the game ball in the game area is attached, and is attached from the front to the opening formed in the game panel. center frame and
It is attached to the center frame and has a predetermined decoration, and has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame from the front, and the LED is mounted. a decorative body provided in front of the LED board located in the
with
The decoration is
a rear decorative portion extending into the frame of the center frame and partly protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame; a front decorative portion provided forward of the rear decorative portion; has
The rear decorative portion and the front decorative portion are decorated with decorations that cooperate with each other, and are provided so that at least a portion of them overlaps when viewed from the front.”
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 7, in a game machine having a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed, the game board is configured such that a game ball starts entering the game area within the game area. A display that can display the lottery result of the special pattern drawn by the game panel is attached, and it is attached to the frame-shaped transparent center frame that is attached from the front to the opening formed in the game panel. It has a predetermined decoration and has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame from the front, and is provided in front of the LED board on which the LED is mounted. a decorative body extending into the frame of the center frame and partially projecting rearward from the rear end of the center frame; and a rear decorative part extending forward from the rear decorative part. and a front decorative part provided, wherein the rear decorative part and the front decorative part are provided with decorations that cooperate with each other and are provided so that at least a part of them overlaps when viewed from the front. It is.

As a result, the transparent center frame attached to the game panel of the game board is provided with a rear decorative portion partially protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative portion provided forward of the rear decorative portion. Since the decorative body is provided with the decorative part, the transparent center frame makes it inconspicuous and makes the decorative body relatively conspicuous, and the front decorative part and the rear decorative part of the decorative body are combined. A decoration with depth can be shown to a player. At this time, since the rear decorative part and the front decorative part are decorated in cooperation with each other and are provided so that each part overlaps when viewed from the front, when viewed from the front (front), The boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part can be made difficult to understand, and the large decoration by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part can be shown to a player in a good condition, and the rear decoration part can be displayed. A large and deep decorative body having a high decorative effect can be formed by the front decorative portion and the front decorative portion. Therefore, since the center frame can be provided with a decorative body with a high decorative effect, the decorative body can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing. It is possible to provide a game machine that is possible.

In addition, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration is extended into the frame of the center frame, the rear decoration part narrows the game area in front of the game panel or causes the game ball to flow down the game area. The player can enjoy the game with the game ball in the game area in a good condition without making it hard to see.

Furthermore, since the rear decoration portion that constitutes the decoration body is extended into the frame of the center frame, when the performance display device, the movable decoration body, the decoration body, etc. are provided behind the game panel. , the rear decoration part can decorate the periphery of the performance display device (display screen), and cooperate with the decoration body (movable decoration body) to show decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect, It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

In addition, since the wiring of the electronic parts is difficult to see from the front due to the opaque part of the decorative body, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque part, so that the visibility of the wiring can be prevented from deteriorating. It is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Furthermore, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration). , the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exhibited more easily.

In addition, since the center frame is equipped with a display for displaying special patterns, the display can be installed on the game panel together with the center frame, compared to the case where the display is installed separately. As a result, the labor involved in assembling the game machine can be saved.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the player's interest by providing a decorative body with a higher decorative effect.

[15-10c. Relationship between Solution Means of Tenth Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The game panel 1100 consisting of the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120 in the game board 5 of the present embodiment is the game panel of the above solving means, and the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the present embodiment is the opening of the game panel of the above solving means. In addition, the center frame 2511 of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment is the center frame of the above solution, the pattern display 2518 in this embodiment is the display of the above solution, and the decoration 2580 in this embodiment is the above solution. The front decoration part 2581 of the present embodiment is the front decoration part of the solution means, the rear decoration part 2582 of the present embodiment is the rear decoration part of the solution means, and the LED board 2586 of the present embodiment is Each corresponds to the LED substrate of the above solution.

[15-10d. Characteristic action and effect of the tenth technical feature]
According to this embodiment, the transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 includes a rear decorative portion 2582 partially protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a rear decorative portion. Since the decoration body 2580 including the front decoration part 2581 provided in front of the 2582 is provided, the decoration body 2580 can be relatively conspicuous because the center frame 2511 is transparent, making it inconspicuous. In addition, the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 of the decoration body 2580 allow the player to see a deep decoration. At this time, the rear decorative portion 2582 and the front decorative portion 2581 are decorated in cooperation with each other, and are provided so that each part overlaps when viewed from the front. Sometimes, it is possible to obscure the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part 2581 and the decoration of the rear decoration part 2582, and to show the player the large decoration by the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 in a good condition. The rear decorative portion 2582 and the front decorative portion 2581 can form a large, deep decoration body 2580 with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the center frame 2511 can be provided with the decorative body 2580 having a high decorative effect, the decorative body 2580 can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get tired of the game. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of

Further, according to this embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2582 that constitutes the decoration body 2580 is extended into the frame of the center frame 2511, the rear decoration part 2582 extends the game area in front of the game panel 1100. A player can enjoy the game with the game ball B in the game area 5a in a good condition without narrowing the game area 5a or making it difficult to see the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2582 constituting the decoration body 2580 is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, the effect display device provided behind the game panel 1100 1600, for the back front effect unit 3300, the back back effect unit 3400, etc., the periphery of the effect display device 1600 (display screen) is decorated, and the decoration body (movable decoration) of the back front effect unit 3300 and the back back effect unit 3400 It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of displaying or performing decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect in cooperation with the player's body, and capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player. .

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the wiring of electronic components such as the LED substrate 2586 is made difficult to see from the front by the opaque portion of the decorative body 2580, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion. The appearance can be prevented from deteriorating, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 2580 can be more easily exhibited.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, since the decoration 2580 (front decoration portion 2581) is provided in front of the LED board 2586, the LED board 2586 can be hidden by the decoration 2580 (decoration). It is possible to prevent the LED board 2586 from being seen and to make the appearance worse, and it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decoration body 2580 .

Further, according to this embodiment, since the symbol display 2518 for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame 2511, the symbol display 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511. As compared with the case where the pattern display device 2518 is attached separately, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be saved.

[15-11. Eleventh technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-11a. Eleventh Technical Features Background]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a center accessory having a decorative body with a predetermined decoration is attached from the front to an opening of a game panel forming a game area in which game balls can flow down, There is known one provided (for example, Patent Document Z: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074434). In the technique of Patent Document Z, the appearance of the gaming machine is improved by the decorative body provided on the center accessory.

However, in the technique of Patent Document Z, since the flat plate-shaped decoration is provided near the front end of the center role, even if the decoration is decorated with a relief-like decoration, it lacks a sense of depth, and depending on the player, it may be difficult for the player to feel the depth. There is a risk that the player will get tired of watching it and lose interest in the player.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to enhance the decorativeness by providing the center accessory with a three-dimensionally formed decoration in the front-rear direction, but the rear end of the decoration is behind the center accessory (center frame). If it protrudes outward, the protruding portion tends to be a hindrance during the manufacturing of the game machine, and there is a risk that the manufacturing cost will increase due to poor handling (handleability).

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means provide a game machine capable of improving handleability at the time of manufacturing while maintaining decorativeness.

[15-11b. Eleventh technical feature solution]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed,
The game board is
a frame-shaped center frame mounted from the front in an opening formed in the game panel;
a decoration attached to the center frame and having a predetermined decoration;
with
The decoration is
a rear decorative portion extending into the frame of the center frame and provided forward of the rear end of the center frame;
and a front decorative portion provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front of the rear decorative portion.

Here, the "game panel" includes an "opaque panel such as plywood", a "panel plate made of transparent resin", and a "panel plate made of transparent resin and a frame for holding the outer peripheral edge of the panel plate". and a panel holder having a shape.

In addition, the ``center frame'' includes a ``flat plate-shaped flange portion that can contact the front surface of the game panel, and a game ball that extends forward from the flange portion and flows down the game area inside the opening of the game panel. having an inflow restricting portion that restricts inflow”, “an inserting portion that is inserted into the opening of the game panel and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening, and the front end of the inserting portion A flat plate-shaped flange portion that extends in a direction along the surface of the game panel and can contact the front surface of the game panel, and a game ball that extends forward from the flange portion and flows down the game area is an opening in the game panel. and an inflow regulating part that regulates the inflow into the interior of the

In addition, as the "decorative body", there are "things that are decorated with patterns by printing or painting", "things that are three-dimensionally shaped decorations", and "metallic luster like plating". "A thing decorated with", etc.

Furthermore, the "decorative body" includes "things that are decorated with light emitted by LEDs mounted on the LED board", "electronic parts provided behind (for example, LED boards, relay boards, ball sensors, magnetic Sensors, indicators (displays with special patterns), solenoids, etc.) have an opaque part to make it difficult to see the wiring from the front", "It protrudes backward beyond the rear end of the center frame. Those having electronic parts (for example, LED substrates, relay substrates, ball sensors, magnetic sensors, indicators (indicators with special patterns), solenoids, etc.).

In addition, the relationship between the rear decoration part and the front decoration part that constitute the decoration body is as follows: "the rear decoration part has a decoration that cooperates with the decoration of the front decoration part"; The same decoration is given to the part as to coordinate with the decoration of the front decoration part", "The decoration different from the decoration of the front decoration part is given to the posterior decoration part", "The front decoration part The decoration of the front decoration (front decoration) has a transparent part that allows the decoration of the rear decoration part (rear decoration) to be visible", "The decoration of the front decoration part (front decoration) has a rear decoration part a transparent part where the decoration (rear decoration) is visible, and a plurality of dot parts with decorations that are provided in the transparent part and constitute a part of the front decoration", etc. is mentioned.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine provided with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed, the game board is a frame mounted from the front in an opening formed in the game panel. and a decorative body attached to the center frame and having a predetermined decoration, the decorative body extending into the frame of the center frame and extending from the rear end of the center frame. It has a rear decorative portion provided in front and a front decorative portion provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front of the rear decorative portion. (In [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention], see the chapter [11-1. Center role of the first embodiment] and the descriptions of FIGS. 94 to 97, etc.)

As a result, the center frame attached to the game panel of the game board has a rear decorative portion provided in front of the rear end of the center frame, and a rear decorative portion provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front side of the rear decorative portion. Since the decoration body is provided with the front decoration part and the rear decoration part of the decoration body, the player can see the decoration with depth by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part of the decoration body. At this time, since a part of the rear decorative part and the front decorative part overlap each other, the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative part and the decoration of the rear decorative part is difficult to understand when viewed from the front (front). Thus, a player can see a large decoration by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, and the rear decoration part and the front decoration part form a large, deep decoration with a high decorative effect. can. Therefore, since the center frame can be provided with a decorative body with a high decorative effect, the decorative body can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing. It is possible to provide a game machine that is possible.

In addition, since the rear decorative part is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame, there is no part that protrudes backward from the center frame and interferes with the manufacturing of the game machine, so It is possible to improve the handling (handleability) and improve the workability, thereby suppressing an increase in manufacturing costs. Specifically, for example, when the center frame is placed on a workbench or the like with the rear end side down, the center frame does not rattle. Alternatively, when handling the center frame during assembly work, transportation work, etc., since part of the decorative body does not protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame, the part protruding from the center frame may not interfere with other members. There is no risk of damage or damage due to contact. For this reason, it is not necessary to perform the work while paying close attention, and workability can be improved.

Furthermore, since the rear decoration part constituting the decoration body is extended into the frame of the center frame, the rear decoration part narrows the game area in front of the game panel or causes the game ball to flow down the game area. The player can enjoy the game with the game ball in the game area in a good condition without making it hard to see.

In addition, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration body is extended into the frame of the center frame, when the performance display device, the movable decoration body, the decoration body, etc. are provided behind the game panel. , the rear decoration part can decorate the periphery of the performance display device (display screen), and cooperate with the decoration body (movable decoration body) to show decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect, It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

It is desirable that the rear decorative portion be decorated in harmony with the decoration of the front decorative portion. As a result, since the rear decoration part is decorated in cooperation with the decoration of the front decoration part, the decoration of the rear decoration part and the decoration of the front decoration part make it possible for the player to see one large decoration, The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

It is also desirable to make the center frame transparent. Thereby, since the center frame is transparent, the center frame can be hardly seen by the player and can be made inconspicuous, and the decorations (the front decoration part and the rear decoration part) can be made relatively conspicuous, The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

Also, the decorative body may have an opaque portion that makes the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front. As a result, since the wiring of the electronic component is difficult to see from the front due to the opaque part of the decorative body, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque part, so that the visibility of the wiring can be prevented from deteriorating. , the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exhibited more easily.

Further, the rear decoration part is provided with the same rear decoration as the part overlapping the front decoration of the front decoration part in the front view, and the front decoration part has at least the front decoration part in the front decoration. At a part in front of the ball passage through which the game balls circulate, which is partly between the rear decoration portion, there is a transparent portion that allows the game balls circulating through the rear decoration and the ball passage to be visually recognized from the front. You can do it. Thereby, when the game ball is not flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration portion and the rear decoration portion, the transparent portion provided in front of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decoration portion is provided. The rear decoration of the rear decoration portion provided at the rear can be visually recognized through it. At this time, since the rear decoration of the rear decoration part is the same decoration as the front decoration of the front decoration part, the rear decoration of the rear decoration part supplements the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration part, so that the front decoration of the front decoration part The original decoration can be shown to the player so that the decoration does not have a transparent part, and the decoration effect of the decoration body can be surely exhibited. On the other hand, when the game ball circulates through the ball passage provided between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, the game ball can be seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration part. In any case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the game ball being out of sight, and to enjoy the game with the game ball and suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, as described above, in the case where the transmission part is provided in the front part of the front decoration of the front decoration part in front of the ball passage, and the rear decoration part behind the transmission part is given the same rear decoration as the front decoration, the front decoration part is Alternatively, the transparent part may have a plurality of dot parts with decorations that are smaller than the game ball and form a part of the front decoration. As a result, the decoration of the rear decoration seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration is blocked by the game balls flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration and the rear decoration. Even if it disappears, the decoration of a plurality of dot parts provided in the transparent part in front of the game ball can be seen, thereby making the game ball in the ball passage visually recognizable to the player and making the appearance of the decoration worse. This can be avoided, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be fully exhibited.

Also, the decorative body may be provided in front of the LED substrate on which the LEDs are mounted. As a result, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration). It is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Further, the center frame may be provided with a display capable of displaying the lottery result of the special symbols drawn by the start ball entry by the game ball in the game area. As a result, since the display for displaying the special pattern is attached to the center frame, the display can be attached to the game panel together with the center frame, and the display can be attached separately. In comparison, it is possible to save labor for assembling the game machine.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"said posterior decoration has a decoration that is in harmony with the decoration of said front decoration"
characterized by being

Here, "collaborating decoration" includes "decoration that constitutes one decoration (picture) with the decoration of the front decoration and the decoration of the rear decoration", "the decoration of the front decoration and the decoration of the rear decoration". Pattern (figure) decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the front part", "The decoration of the front decoration part or the decoration of the rear decoration part complements (emphasizes) the decoration of the rear decoration part or the decoration of the front decoration part. such as decoration”, and the like.

According to the configuration of means 2, the rear decoration part is provided with a decoration that cooperates with the decoration of the front decoration part. (Refer to the description regarding the decoration 2570 and the decoration 2570A in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the rear decoration part is decorated in cooperation with the decoration of the front decoration part, the decoration of the rear decoration part and the decoration of the front decoration part make it possible for the player to see one large decoration, The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The center frame is transparently formed"
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, the center frame is made transparent. In other words, the center frame is made of a transparent member. (See the description regarding the center frame 2511 in [Description of the Invention])

Thereby, since the center frame is transparent, the center frame can be hardly seen by the player and can be made inconspicuous, and the decorations (the front decoration part and the rear decoration part) can be made relatively conspicuous, The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the center frame is transparent, when the game panel is made transparent and a decorative body or effect display device is provided behind the game panel, the center frame becomes inconspicuous and can be seen through the transparent game panel. To provide a game machine capable of making a decoration body, a performance image and the like more conspicuous and entertaining a player more.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The said ornament is
It has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame from the front.
characterized by being

Here, the "electronic parts" include "LED board", "relay board", "ball sensor for detecting game balls", "magnetic sensor", "display for displaying special symbols", "variable winning "solenoid for opening and closing the mouth", "solenoid or driving motor for moving the movable decoration", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 4, the decorative body has an opaque portion that makes the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front. (Refer to the description regarding the decoration 2570 and the decoration 2570A in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the wiring of the electronic component is difficult to see from the front due to the opaque part of the decorative body, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque part, so that the visibility of the wiring can be prevented from deteriorating. , the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exhibited more easily.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The rear decoration part has the same rear decoration as the part that overlaps the front of the front decoration of the front decoration part when viewed from the front,
In the front decoration part, the rear decoration and the It has a transparent part that allows the game balls circulating in the ball passage to be seen from the front.
It is characterized by being

Here, the “transmissive portion” includes a “colorless and transparent portion”, a “colored and transparent portion”, a “through hole portion”, and the like.

According to the configuration of means 5, the rear decoration is provided with the same decoration as the portion overlapping the front decoration of the front decoration in the front view, and the front decoration has the same decoration as that of the front decoration. A game ball circulating in the rear decoration and the ball passage is visible from the front at a portion in front of the ball passage through which the game balls circulate provided at least partly between the front decoration portion and the rear decoration portion. It is intended to have a transmission portion. (Refer to the description regarding the decorative body 2570 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention])

Thereby, when the game ball is not flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration portion and the rear decoration portion, the transparent portion provided in front of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decoration portion is provided. The rear decoration of the rear decoration portion provided at the rear can be visually recognized through it. At this time, since the rear decoration of the rear decoration part is the same decoration as the front decoration of the front decoration part, the rear decoration of the rear decoration part supplements the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration part, so that the front decoration of the front decoration part The original decoration can be shown to the player so that the decoration does not have a transparent part, and the decoration effect of the decoration body can be surely exhibited.

On the other hand, when the game ball circulates through the ball passage provided between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, the game ball can be seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration part. In any case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the game ball being out of sight, and to enjoy the game with the game ball and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 6: In the configuration of Means 5,
"The front decoration part
It has a plurality of dot portions which are provided in the transparent portion and are decorated with decorations that are smaller than the game ball and constitute a part of the front decoration.”
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 6, the front decoration part has a plurality of dot parts provided in the transmission part and decorated with decorations smaller than the game ball and constituting a part of the front decoration. It is. (Refer to the description regarding the decorative body 2570 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention])

As a result, the decoration of the rear decoration seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration is blocked by the game balls flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration and the rear decoration. Even if it disappears, the decoration of a plurality of dot parts provided in the transparent part in front of the game ball can be seen, thereby making the game ball in the ball passage visually recognizable to the player and making the appearance of the decoration worse. This can be avoided, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be fully exhibited.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed,
The game board is
a frame-shaped transparent center frame mounted from the front in an opening formed in the game panel;
a decoration attached to the center frame, having a predetermined decoration, and having an opaque portion that makes wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front;
with
The decoration is
a rear decorative portion extending into the frame of the center frame and provided forward of the rear end of the center frame;
a front decorative portion provided so as to overlap at least a part of the rear decorative portion in front;
The rear decorative portion is provided with the same rear decoration as the portion of the front decoration that overlaps the front of the front decoration in a front view in cooperation with the front decoration of the front decorative portion,
In the front decoration part, the rear decoration and the There are a transparent part through which the game balls circulating in the ball passage can be seen from the front, and a decoration that is provided in the transparent part and that is smaller than the game ball and constitutes a part of the front decoration. and a plurality of dot portions that are
It is characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 7, in a game machine provided with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed, the game board is a frame mounted from the front in an opening formed in the game panel. and a transparent center frame attached to the center frame, which is decorated with a predetermined decoration, and has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic parts attached to the center frame from the front. a decorative body, wherein the decorative body extends into the frame of the center frame and is provided in front of a rear end of the center frame; and a front decoration part provided so as to overlap, and the rear decoration part has the same decoration as the front overlapping part of the front decoration of the front decoration part in a front view in cooperation with the front decoration of the front decoration part. The front decoration is provided with a rear decoration, and the front decoration is provided at least in a part between the front decoration and the rear decoration in the front part of the ball passage through which the game balls circulate, There is a transparent part where the game balls circulating in the rear decoration and the ball passage can be seen from the front, and a decoration that is smaller than the game ball and forms part of the front decoration provided in the transparent part. and a plurality of dot portions.

As a result, the transparent center frame attached to the game panel of the game board is provided with a rear decorative portion provided in front of the rear end of the center frame, and a rear decorative portion provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front side of the rear decorative portion. Since the center frame is transparent, it is difficult to stand out and the decoration can be made relatively conspicuous, and the front decoration and the rear of the decoration are provided. A player can see a decoration with a depth with the decoration part. At this time, since the rear decorative part and the front decorative part are decorated in cooperation with each other and are provided so that each part overlaps when viewed from the front, when viewed from the front (front), The boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part can be made difficult to understand, and the large decoration by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part can be shown to a player in a good condition, and the rear decoration part can be displayed. A large and deep decorative body having a high decorative effect can be formed by the front decorative portion and the front decorative portion. Therefore, since the center frame can be provided with a decorative body with a high decorative effect, the decorative body can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing. It is possible to provide a game machine that is possible.

In addition, the rear decoration part is provided with the same decoration as the part overlapping the front decoration of the front decoration part in the front view, and the front decoration part includes at least the front decoration part and the rear decoration part in the front decoration. In the front part of the ball passage through which the game balls circulate, which is provided in part between the and a plurality of decorated dot portions that are smaller than the size of the game ball and form a part of the front decoration, so that the front decoration portion and the rear decoration portion are separated from each other. When the game ball is not flowing through the provided ball passage, the rear decoration of the rear decoration provided behind is passed through the transparent portion provided in the front portion of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decoration. can be visually recognized. At this time, since the rear decoration of the rear decoration part is the same decoration as the front decoration of the front decoration part, the rear decoration of the rear decoration part supplements the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration part, so that the front decoration of the front decoration part The original decoration can be shown to the player so that the decoration does not have a transparent part, and the decoration effect of the decoration body can be surely exhibited.

On the other hand, when the game ball circulates through the ball passage provided between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, the game ball can be seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration part. In any case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the game ball being out of sight, and to enjoy the game with the game ball and suppress the decrease in interest. At this time, since a plurality of dot portions constituting a part of the front decoration are provided in the transmission portion, the decoration of the rear decoration portion visible through the transmission portion in the front decoration of the front decoration portion is the front decoration portion and the rear decoration portion. The decoration of a plurality of dot parts provided in the transmission part in front of the game ball can be seen even if it is blocked by the game ball circulating in the ball passage provided between the decoration part and cannot be seen. Thus, the game ball in the ball passage can be visually recognized by the player while the appearance of the decorative body is prevented from being deteriorated, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exhibited sufficiently.

In addition, since the rear decorative part is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame, there is no part that protrudes backward from the center frame and interferes with the manufacturing of the game machine, so It is possible to improve the handling (handleability) and improve the workability, thereby suppressing an increase in manufacturing costs. Specifically, for example, when the center frame is placed on a workbench or the like with the rear end side down, the center frame does not rattle. Alternatively, when handling the center frame during assembly work, transportation work, etc., since part of the decorative body does not protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame, the part protruding from the center frame may not interfere with other members. There is no risk of damage or damage due to contact. For this reason, it is not necessary to perform the work while paying close attention, and workability can be improved.

In addition, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration is extended into the frame of the center frame, the rear decoration part narrows the game area in front of the game panel or causes the game ball to flow down the game area. The player can enjoy the game with the game ball in the game area in a good condition without making it hard to see.

Furthermore, since the rear decoration portion that constitutes the decoration body is extended into the frame of the center frame, when the performance display device, the movable decoration body, the decoration body, etc. are provided behind the game panel. , the rear decoration part can decorate the periphery of the performance display device (display screen), and cooperate with the decoration body (movable decoration body) to show decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect, It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

In addition, since the wiring of the electronic parts is difficult to see from the front due to the opaque part of the decorative body, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque part, so that the visibility of the wiring can be prevented from deteriorating. It is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the handleability at the time of manufacturing while maintaining the decorativeness.

[15-11c. Relationship between Solution Means of Eleventh Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The game panel 1100 consisting of the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120 in the game board 5 of the present embodiment is the game panel of the above solving means, and the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the present embodiment is the opening of the game panel of the above solving means. 2, the center frame 2511 of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment is the center frame of the above solution, the ball passage 2517 in this embodiment is the ball passage of the above solution, and the decorations 2570 and 2570A in this embodiment. is the decoration body of the above solving means, the front decoration part 2572 in this embodiment is the front decoration part of the above solving means, the transparent part 2572a in this embodiment is the transparent part of the above solving means, and the dot part 2572b in this embodiment corresponds to the dot portion of the above solution, and the rear decoration portion 2573 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decoration portion of the above solution.

[15-11d. Characteristic action and effect of the eleventh technical feature]
According to this embodiment, a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a rear decorative portion 2573 provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and the rear decorative portion 2573 Since the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) composed of the front decoration part 2572 provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front part is provided, the center frame 2511 is transparent and thus inconspicuous and relatively The decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) can be conspicuous, and the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 of the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) can show a deep decoration to the player. At this time, the rear decorative portion 2573 and the front decorative portion 2572 are decorated in cooperation with each other, and are provided so that each part overlaps when viewed from the front. Sometimes, it is possible to obscure the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part 2572 and the decoration of the rear decoration part 2573, so that the player can see the large decoration by the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 in a good condition. The rear decorative portion 2573 and the front decorative portion 2572 form a large, deep decoration 2570 (decoration 2570A) with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the decoration 2570 (decoration 2570A) having a high decorative effect can be provided on the center frame 2511, the decoration 2570 (decoration 2570A) can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing the decline in interest of the player.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, in the decorative body 2570, the rear decoration portion 2573 has the same decoration (rear decoration) as the portion that overlaps in front of the decoration (front decoration) of the front decoration portion 2572 when viewed from the front. The front decoration part 2572 is provided at least in part between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 in the decoration of the front decoration part 2572. A transmission part 2572a that allows the decoration of the rear decoration part 2573 and the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2517 to be visible from the front, and a size smaller than the game ball B provided in the transmission part 2572a. and a plurality of decorated dot portions 2572b forming part of the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572. When the game ball B is not circulating in the ball passage 2517, the decoration of the front decoration portion 2572 passes through the transparent portion 2572a provided in the front part of the ball passage 2517, and the rear decoration portion 2573 provided behind. decoration can be seen. At this time, since the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2573 is the same decoration as the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572, the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2573 supplements the transparent portion 2572a in the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572. The original decoration can be shown to the player so that the decoration does not have the transparent part 2572a, and the decoration effect of the decoration body 2570 can be surely exhibited.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is flowing through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573, the game ball B can be seen through the transparent part 2572a in the decoration of the front decoration part 2572. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the game ball B being out of sight, even if only temporarily. A decrease can be suppressed. At this time, since a plurality of dot portions 2572b forming part of the decoration of the front decoration portion 2572 are provided in the transmission portion 2572a, the rear decoration portion 2573 visible through the transmission portion 2572a in the decoration of the front decoration portion 2572 Even if the decoration is blocked by the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 and becomes invisible, the transparent part 2572a in front of the game ball B is displayed. By making the decorations of the plurality of dot portions 2572b provided in the can be seen, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the game ball B in the ball passage 2517 while avoiding the deterioration of the appearance of the decoration body 2570. The decorative effect of the decorative body 2570 can be fully exhibited.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A), the rear decoration part 2573 is provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and protrudes rearward from the center frame 2511, whereby the pachinko machine can be used. Since there is no part that will interfere with the manufacturing of 1, it is possible to improve the handling (handleability) during manufacturing, and the increase in manufacturing costs is suppressed by improving workability. can be made Specifically, for example, when the center frame 2511 is placed on the workbench TA or the like with the rear end side of the center frame 2511 facing down, the center frame 2511 does not rattle. Alternatively, when handling the center frame 2511 in assembly work, transportation work, or the like, a part of the decoration 2570 (decoration 2570A) does not protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511, so it does not protrude from the center frame 2511. There is no risk that the part where the contact is made will be damaged or damaged by coming into contact with other members or the like. For this reason, it is not necessary to perform the work while paying close attention, and workability can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2573 constituting the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) is extended into the frame of the center frame 2511, the rear decorative portion 2573 can be used to open the game panel 1100. The game area 5a on the front side of the game area 5a is not narrowed and the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a are not difficult to see, and the player can enjoy the game with the game balls B in the game area 5a in a good condition. can let

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2573 constituting the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, it is provided behind the game panel 1100. For the effect display device 1600, the back front effect unit 3300, the back rear effect unit 3400, etc., the periphery of the effect display device 1600 (display screen) is decorated, and the back front effect unit 3300 and the back back effect unit 3400 are displayed. To provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of showing or performing decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect in cooperation with a decoration body (movable decoration body) and capable of strongly attracting the interest of a player. can provide.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the wiring of electronic components such as an LED substrate is made difficult to see from the front by the opaque portion of decoration 2570 (decoration 2570A), the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the appearance due to the wiring being visible, and it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decoration body 2570 (the decoration body 2570A).

[15-12. Twelfth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-12a. Background of the twelfth technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is attached from the front to an opening of a game panel forming a game area in which game balls can flow down, so that the game balls flowing down the game area are prevented from flowing into the opening of the game panel. There is a known one provided with a center function serving as an inflow regulation section for regulation (for example, Patent Document Z: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074434). According to the technique of Patent Document Z, it is possible to divide the game area into a desired size by using the center accessory.

However, in the technique of Patent Document Z, when the size of the opening of the game panel differs depending on the model of the game machine, it is necessary to separately manufacture the center accessory (inflow control portion), and it is not possible to divert the inflow control portion. It was difficult.

Therefore, in view of the above situation, the following means aims to provide a game machine capable of using the inflow restricting portion even if the opening of the game panel differs depending on the model.

[15-12b. Means for solving the twelfth technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down,
The game board is
a game panel in which the game area is formed on the front side;
an inflow regulating portion provided corresponding to an edge of an opening formed in the game panel and regulating game balls flowing down the game area from flowing into the opening;
with
The inflow restricting portion has at least a first inflow restricting portion and a second inflow restricting portion,
The first inflow regulating portion and the second inflow regulating portion are each formed with a flange portion along the front surface of the game panel, and at least one of each end portion is formed with the flange portion. A non-flanged portion is formed so that the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion are adjacent to each other on the front surface of the game panel by the mounting portion provided on the flange. be mounted on
It is characterized by being

Here, the "game panel" includes an "opaque panel such as plywood", a "panel plate made of transparent resin", and a "panel plate made of transparent resin and a frame for holding the outer peripheral edge of the panel plate". and a panel holder having a shape.

In addition, the ``flange portion'' may be ``extending toward the outside of the opening of the game panel bordering on the inflow restricting portion'', or ``extending toward the inside of the opening of the game panel bordering on the inflow restricting portion. "extending", "extending in both directions of the outside and inside of the opening in the game panel with the inflow restricting portion as a boundary", and the like.

In addition, the "non-flange portion" may be provided on the side surface of the inflow restriction portion facing the center of the game panel, or may be provided on the side surface of the inflow restriction portion facing the center of the game panel. It may be provided on the side surface, or may be provided on both side surfaces of the inflow restricting portion.

Furthermore, as a configuration in which "the end of the first inflow restricting portion and the end of the second inflow restricting portion are attached so as to be adjacent to each other", "the end face of the end of the first inflow restricting portion and the second inflow restricting portion The inner side surface of the end of the first inflow restricting portion and the outer side surface of the end of the second inflow restricting portion are attached so as to face each other. and "attached so that the outer side surface of the end of the first inflow restricting part and the inner side surface of the end of the second inflow restricting part face each other", etc. . Also, the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion may be in contact with each other or may be separated from each other.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine provided with a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down, the game board comprises a game panel having a game area formed on the front side and an opening formed in the game panel. and an inflow regulating portion that is provided corresponding to the edge of the game area and regulates that the game ball flowing down the game area flows into the opening, and the inflow regulating portion includes the first inflow regulating portion and the second inflow a regulating portion, wherein the first inflow regulating portion and the second inflow regulating portion each have a flange portion along the front surface of the game panel, and a flange portion at least one of each end portion. is formed so that the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion are adjacent to each other on the front surface of the game panel by the mounting portion provided on the flange. It can be attached to (In [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention], see the chapter [11-3. Center role of the third embodiment] and the descriptions of FIGS. 99 to 102, etc.)

As a result, the inflow restricting portion provided corresponding to the edge of the opening of the game panel having the game area formed on the front side and restricting the inflow of game balls into the opening is at least the first inflow restricting portion. and a second inflow regulating portion, and the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion are adjacent to each other on the front surface of the game panel via the mounting portions of the flange portions provided respectively. Since it is attached so as to match, by appropriately selecting the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow restricting portion and the second inflow restricting portion with respect to the game panel, various inflow restricting portions can be manufactured without newly manufacturing the inflow restricting portion. It can be attached to a game panel having an opening of different size and shape, and the inflow restricting part can be used even if the model is different.

More specifically, for example, by mounting the ends of the first inflow restricting portion and the end of the second inflow restricting portion away from each other, a game panel with a large opening can be accommodated. In this case, the gap between the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion is preferably of a size that the game ball cannot pass through, but it is of a size that the game ball can pass through. In that case, the game ball may be prevented from passing by planting an obstacle nail.

Alternatively, by attaching the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion so that the respective side faces face each other, it is possible to cope with a game panel with a small opening. At this time, since the non-flanged portion is provided at the end of at least one of the first inflow restricting portion and the second inflow restricting portion, the side surface of the end of the first inflow restricting portion and the end of the second inflow restricting portion Since it is possible to bring the side of the part as close as possible, the degree of freedom in arranging the first inflow regulating part and the second inflow regulating part can be increased, and the game panel having openings of various sizes can be made easier to deal with.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to deal with game panels having openings of various sizes, when it is desired to change the size of the game area due to design changes, etc., the first inflow restricting portion and the second The size of the game area can be easily changed by changing the mounting position relationship with the inflow restricting portion, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be enhanced. Therefore, there is no need to newly manufacture an inflow restricting portion that matches the size of the game area to be changed, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In addition, on the game board, a plurality of frames from the first frame provided with the first inflow restricting portion to the nth frame provided with the nth inflow restricting portion (n is an integer of two or more), and at least one A connection holding part that prevents the two frames from falling from the game panel may be further provided. As a result, since the inflow restricting portion is composed of a plurality of frames, by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame with respect to the game panel, the same effect as described above can be obtained. In addition, since the inflow restricting portion is composed of a plurality of frames, when a problem occurs in some of the frames, it is sufficient to replace only the relevant frames, and maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connection holding portion is provided, it is possible to avoid damage or breakage of the frame due to falling from the game panel during assembly or maintenance of the game machine.

Further, as described above, when the connection holding portion is provided, it is desirable that the connection holding portion be formed in a flexible cord shape. As a result, since the connecting and holding portion is formed in a flexible string-like shape, for example, the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow regulating portion (first frame) and the second inflow regulating portion (second frame) Even if is changed, the connection holding portion can be flexibly deformed to follow, and it is possible to cope with the size and shape of the opening of the game panel while preventing the frame from falling from the game panel.

In addition, as described above, if a flexible string-like connection holding portion is provided, when the frame is about to be removed from the game panel, the connection holding portion tends to be flexibly deformed to create resistance, and the game can be played immediately. Detachment from the panel can be suppressed. Then, when the frame is detached from the game panel, the connection holding portion is flexibly deformed, which makes it possible to reduce the falling speed and absorb the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame. .

Furthermore, as described above, when the connection holding portion is provided, it is desirable that adjacent frames are connected by the connection holding portion. As a result, compared to the case where one end of the connection holding portion is connected to the game panel or another member, the plurality of frames can be easily handled as a single unit, and the workability at the time of manufacturing the game machine can be improved. can be improved.

Further, as described above, when the connection holding portion is provided, it is desirable to provide the connection holding portion so as to be detachable from the frame. As a result, for example, when a plurality of frames are attached to the game panel in order, or some frames are removed from the game panel for maintenance or the like, the connection holding portion can be removed or attached. As a result, the frame can be easily routed and handled, and workability can be improved.

Also, as described above, if the connection holding portion is detachable, it is possible to connect the frame by the connection holding portion until the frame is attached to the game panel, and then remove the connection holding portion after the frame is attached to the game panel. As a result, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance due to the presence of the connection holding portion.

Furthermore, as described above, when a plurality of frames are provided, the game board may further include electronic components attached to at least one frame. As a result, electronic components are attached to at least one frame, and since the weight of the frame to which the electronic components are attached increases, the frame may come off from the game panel and fall during the assembly work of the game machine. Then, although the frame is easily damaged by its weight, the frame is prevented from being damaged by falling onto a workbench, floor, or the like, because a connection holding part is provided to prevent the frame from falling. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably exhibit the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The game board is
a plurality of frames from a first frame provided with the first inflow restricting portion to an nth frame provided with an nth inflow restricting portion (n is an integer of 2 or more);
A connection holding part for preventing the at least one frame from falling from the game panel.

Here, the number "n" of the plurality of frames is preferably in the range of 2-6. This is because if the number of frames exceeds this range, it will take time and effort to attach the frames when manufacturing the game machine, and there is a risk that the cost will increase. An electronic component such as an LED board may be attached to some of the frames.

Further, the "connection holding part" includes a "flexible cord-like part", a "flexible belt-like part", and the like. In addition, the ``connecting and holding portion'' includes ``connecting adjacent frames'', ``connecting a frame to another member'', and ``connecting a frame to a game panel''. , etc. Furthermore, the "connection holding part" may or may not have decorativeness. Further, it is desirable that the "connection holding part" has a length that prevents the frame from coming into contact with the table or floor when the frame is detached from the game panel with the game board upright and falls.

According to the configuration of means 2, the game board includes a plurality of frames from the first frame provided with the first inflow restricting portion to the nth frame provided with the nth inflow restricting portion (n is an integer of two or more). It further comprises a frame and a connection holding part for preventing the at least one frame from falling from the game panel. (See the description regarding the center frame 2700 and the connection holding portion 2710 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the inflow restricting portion is composed of a plurality of frames, by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame with respect to the game panel, the same effect as described above can be obtained. In addition, since the inflow restricting portion is composed of a plurality of frames, when a problem occurs in some of the frames, it is sufficient to replace only the relevant frames, and maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connection holding portion is provided, it is possible to avoid damage or breakage of the frame due to falling from the game panel during assembly or maintenance of the game machine.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 2,
"The connection holding part
It is characterized by being "formed in the shape of a string having flexibility".

According to the structure of the means 3, the connection holding part is formed in a flexible cord shape. (See the description regarding the connection holding portion 2710 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the connecting and holding portion is formed in a flexible string-like shape, for example, the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow regulating portion (first frame) and the second inflow regulating portion (second frame) Even if is changed, the connection holding portion can be flexibly deformed to follow, and it is possible to cope with the size and shape of the opening of the game panel while preventing the frame from falling from the game panel.

In addition, since the connecting and holding part is formed in a flexible string shape, when the frame is about to be removed from the game panel, the flexible deformation of the connecting and holding part acts as a resistance, and the frame is immediately removed from the game panel. can be suppressed. Then, when the frame is detached from the game panel, the connection holding portion is flexibly deformed, which makes it possible to reduce the falling speed and absorb the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame. .

Means 4: In the configuration of Means 2 or Means 3,
"The connection holding part
It is characterized by connecting the adjacent frames.

According to the configuration of the means 4, the connection holding part connects adjacent frames. (See the description regarding the connection holding portion 2710 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, compared to the case where one end of the connection holding portion is connected to the game panel or other member, the plurality of frames can be easily handled as a single unit, and the workability at the time of manufacturing the game machine can be improved. can be improved.

Means 5: In any one configuration from Means 2 to 4,
"The connection holding part
It is provided detachably with respect to the frame.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the connection holding portion is detachably provided with respect to the frame. (See the description regarding the connection holding portion 2710 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, for example, when a plurality of frames are attached to the game panel in order, or some frames are removed from the game panel for maintenance or the like, the connection holding portion can be removed or attached. As a result, the frame can be easily routed and handled, and workability can be improved.

In addition, since the connection holding portion is detachable, it is possible to connect the frame by the connection holding portion until the frame is attached to the game panel, and then remove the connection holding portion after the frame is attached to the game panel. It is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming poor due to the existence of the part.

Means 6: In the configuration of any one of Means 2 to 5,
"The game board is
an electronic component attached to at least one of said frames;
It is characterized by being "further provided".

Here, the "electronic parts" include "LED board", "relay board", "ball sensor", "magnetic sensor", "display (display with special pattern)", "solenoid", "motor", etc.

According to the configuration of means 6, the game board further comprises electronic components attached to at least one frame. (See the description regarding the pattern display 2518 and the center frame 2700 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, electronic components are attached to at least one frame, and since the weight of the frame to which the electronic components are attached increases, the frame may come off from the game panel and fall during the assembly work of the game machine. Then, although the frame is easily damaged by its weight, the frame is prevented from being damaged by falling onto a workbench, floor, or the like, because a connection holding part is provided to prevent the frame from falling. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably exhibit the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down,
The game board is
a game panel in which the game area is formed on the front side;
It is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening formed in the game panel, and regulates the inflow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the opening, and the first inflow regulating portion to the nth inflow regulating portion (n is an integer of 2 or more);
a plurality of frames from a first frame provided with the first inflow restricting portion to an nth frame provided with an nth inflow restricting portion (n is an integer of two or more);
a connection holding part for preventing the at least one frame from falling from the game panel;
an electronic component attached to at least one of said frames;
with
The inflow control unit is
The m-th inflow regulating portion (m is an integer between 1 and n−1) and the (m+1)th inflow regulating portion are each formed with a flange portion along the front surface of the game panel, A non-flange portion having no flange portion is formed on at least one of the respective ends, and the end of the m-th inflow restricting portion is attached to the front surface of the game panel by a mounting portion provided on the flange portion. is attached so that the part and the end of the (m+1)th inflow regulating part are adjacent to each other,
The connection holding part is
It is formed in a flexible cord-like shape, connects the adjacent frames, and is detachably attached to the frame.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 7, in a game machine provided with a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down, the game board comprises a game panel having a game area formed on the front side and an opening formed in the game panel. It is provided corresponding to the edge of the game area, and regulates that the game ball flowing down the game area flows into the inside of the opening, from the first inflow regulation part to the nth inflow regulation part (n is an integer of two or more) an inflow restricting portion having an inflow restricting portion, a plurality of frames from a first frame provided with the first inflow restricting portion to an nth frame provided with an nth inflow restricting portion (n is an integer of two or more), and at least one The inflow regulating portion comprises a connection holding portion that prevents the two frames from falling from the game panel, and an electronic component attached to at least one frame. Integer up to 1) and (m+1)-th inflow restricting portion are each formed with a flange portion along the front surface of the game panel, and at least one of each end portion is formed with a flange portion. A non-flanged portion is formed, and the end of the m-th inflow regulating portion and the end of the (m+1)th inflow regulating portion are attached to the front of the game panel by the mounting portion provided on the flange so that the end is adjacent. The connecting/holding portion is formed in a flexible cord-like shape, connects adjacent frames, and is provided detachably with respect to the frames.

As a result, the inflow restricting portion provided corresponding to the edge of the opening of the game panel having the game area formed on the front side and restricting the inflow of game balls into the opening is at least the first inflow restricting portion. to the n-th inflow regulating portion (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the m-th inflow regulating portion (m is from 1 to n−1) end and the end of the (m+1)th inflow regulating portion are attached adjacent to each other, so that the mth inflow regulating portion and the (m+1)th inflow regulating portion with respect to the game panel By appropriately selecting the relationship of the mounting position with the restricting part, it is possible to attach the inflow restricting part to game panels having openings of various sizes and shapes without manufacturing a new inflow restricting part, and even if the model is different, the inflow is possible. A regulation part can be diverted.

In the following, m is assumed to be 1. For example, by attaching the end of the first inflow control part and the end of the second inflow control part away from each other, it is possible to correspond to a game panel with a large opening. can. In this case, the gap between the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion is preferably of a size that the game ball cannot pass through, but it is of a size that the game ball can pass through. In that case, the game ball may be prevented from passing by planting an obstacle nail.

Alternatively, by attaching the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion so that the respective side faces face each other, it is possible to correspond to a game panel with a small opening. At this time, since the non-flange portion is provided at the end of at least one of the first inflow restricting portion and the second inflow restricting portion, the side surface of the end of the first inflow restricting portion and the end of the second inflow restricting portion Since it is possible to bring the side of the part as close as possible, the degree of freedom in arranging the first inflow regulating part and the second inflow regulating part can be increased, and the game panel having openings of various sizes can be made easier to deal with.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to deal with game panels having openings of various sizes, when it is desired to change the size of the game area due to design changes, etc., the first inflow restricting portion and the second The size of the game area can be easily changed by changing the mounting position relationship with the inflow restricting portion, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be enhanced. Therefore, there is no need to newly manufacture an inflow restricting portion that matches the size of the game area to be changed, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the inflow restricting portion is composed of a plurality of frames, by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame with respect to the game panel, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. In addition, since the inflow restricting portion is composed of a plurality of frames, when a problem occurs in some of the frames, it is sufficient to replace only the relevant frames, and maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connection holding portion is provided, it is possible to avoid damage or breakage of the frame due to falling from the game panel during assembly or maintenance of the game machine.

In addition, since the connecting and holding portion is a flexible string-like member, for example, the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow regulating portion (first frame) and the second inflow regulating portion (second frame) can be changed. Even if it is changed, it can be followed by the flexible deformation of the connection holding part, and it is possible to cope with the size and shape of the opening of the game panel while preventing the frame from falling from the game panel.

In addition, since a flexible string-like connecting and holding part is provided, when the frame is about to be removed from the game panel, the connecting and holding part flexibly deforms and acts as a resistance, and the frame is immediately removed from the game panel. can be suppressed. Then, when the frame is detached from the game panel, the connection holding portion is flexibly deformed, which makes it possible to reduce the falling speed and absorb the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame. .

Furthermore, since the adjacent frames are connected by the connection holding portion, the plurality of frames are united as one, compared to the case where one end of the connection holding portion is connected to the game panel or other member. It is possible to make it easy to handle, and to improve workability at the time of manufacturing the game machine or the like.

In addition, since the connection holding part is detachably attached to the frame, for example, when attaching a plurality of frames to the game panel in order or when removing some frames from the game panel for maintenance etc. By detaching or attaching the connecting/holding portion, the handling and handling of the frame can be improved, and workability can be improved.

In addition, since the connection holding portion is detachable, it is possible to connect the frame by the connection holding portion until the frame is attached to the game panel, and then remove the connection holding portion after the frame is attached to the game panel. It is possible to prevent the presence of the holding portion from deteriorating the appearance.

Furthermore, since electronic components are attached to at least one frame, the weight of the frame to which the electronic components are attached increases. Although the frame is easily damaged due to its weight, the frame is prevented from being damaged by falling onto a workbench, floor, or the like, because a connection holding portion is provided to prevent the frame from falling. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably exhibit the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the inflow restricting portion can be used even if the opening of the game panel differs depending on the model.

[15-12c. Relationship between the solution means of the twelfth technical feature and the embodiment]
The game panel 1100 (see FIG. 100) in the game board 5 of the present embodiment is the game panel of the above solution, and the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment is the opening of the game panel of the above solution. The pattern display device 2518, the second starter unit 2720, the attacker unit 2730, and the prize winning unit 2740 in the form are the electronic components of the above solution, and the inflow regulating part 2700a of the center frame 2700 in the center role 2500A in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the flange portion 2700b of the center frame 2700, the first flange portion 2701b of the first frame 2701, and the second flange portion 2702b of the second frame 2702 are the flange portions of the above solving means. In addition, the non-flange portion 2700c of the center frame 2700, the first non-flange portion 2701c of the first frame 2701, and the second non-flange portion 2702c of the second frame 2702 in this embodiment correspond to the non-flange portions of the above solution. are doing.

Further, the first frame 2701, the second frame 2702, the third frame 2703, the fourth frame 2704, and the fifth frame 2705 in this embodiment are the frames of the above solution means, and the first inflow restricting portion 2701a in this embodiment is the above-mentioned The first inflow regulating portion of the solving means, the second inflow regulating portion 2702a in this embodiment is the second inflow regulating portion of the above-mentioned solving means, and the flanges such as the first flange portion 2701b and the second flange portion 2702b in this embodiment The mounting hole provided in the portion 2700b corresponds to the mounting portion of the above solution, and the connection holding portion 2710 in this embodiment corresponds to the connection holding portion of the above solution.

[15-12d. Characteristic effects of the twelfth technical feature]
According to this embodiment, the center frame 2700 of the center accessory 2500A of the game board 5 is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 on which the game area 5a is formed on the front side. The inflow restricting portion 2700a that restricts B from flowing into the opening 1112 is composed of at least a first inflow restricting portion 2701a and a second inflow restricting portion 2702a, and flange portions 2700b ( It is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 via the mounting portions of the first flange portion 2701b and the second flange portion 2702b) so that the end portion of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the end portion of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a are adjacent to each other. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a with respect to the game panel 1100, the inflow restricting portion 2700a (center frame 2700) is newly manufactured. It can be attached to game panels 1100 having openings 1112 of various sizes and shapes, and the inflow restricting portion 2700a (center frame 2700) can be used even if the model is different.

More specifically, for example, by attaching the end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a away from each other, the game panel 1100 having the large opening 1112 can be supported. . In this case, the gap C between the end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a is desirably large enough to prevent the game ball B from passing through. In the case of a possible size, the game ball B may be prevented from passing by planting an obstacle nail.

Alternatively, the end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a are attached so that their side faces face each other, so that the game panel 1100 with the small opening 1112 can be supported. can. At this time, since the non-flange portion 2700c (the first non-flange portion 2701c or the second non-flange portion 2702c) is provided at the end of at least one of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a, Since the side surface of the end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the side surface of the end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a can be brought as close as possible, the first inflow restricting portion 2701a (first frame 2701) and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a (second frame 2702) can be arranged more freely, making it easier to accommodate game panels 1100 having openings 1112 of various sizes.

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to correspond to the game panel 1100 having openings 1112 of various sizes, when it is desired to change the size of the game area 5a due to design change or the like, the first inflow regulation By changing the positional relationship between the portion 2701a (first frame 2701) and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a (second frame 2702), the size of the game area 5a can be easily changed. 1 can be improved in design freedom. Therefore, there is no need to newly manufacture an inflow restricting portion 2700a (center frame 2700) that matches the size of the game area 5a to be changed, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the inflow restricting portion 2700a (center frame 2700) is composed of a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 to the fifth frame 2705, by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame with respect to the game panel 1100, Effects similar to those described above can be obtained. In addition, since the inflow restricting portion 2700a is composed of a plurality of frames, if a problem occurs in a part of the frames, only the relevant frames need to be replaced, and maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connection holding part 2710 is provided, it is possible to prevent the frame from being damaged or damaged by falling from the game panel 1100 during assembly or maintenance of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the connection holding portion 2710 is formed in a flexible string-like shape, for example, the first inflow restricting portion 2701a (first frame 2701) and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a (second frame 2702) Even if the relationship of the mounting position is changed, it can be followed by the flexible deformation of the connection holding part 2710, and while preventing the frame from falling from the game panel 1100, the size of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the It can correspond to the shape and the like.

In addition, since the flexible string-like connection holding portion 2710 is provided, when the frame such as the first frame 2701 is about to be detached from the game panel 1100, the connection holding portion 2710 is prevented from being flexibly deformed. , it becomes a resistance, and it is possible to suppress the immediate separation from the game panel 1100 . When the frame is detached from the game panel 1100, the connection holding portion 2710 is flexibly deformed to reduce the falling speed and absorb the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame. can be done.

Furthermore, since the connection holding portion 2710 connects adjacent frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, one end of the connection holding portion 2710 can be connected to the game panel 1100 or other members. A plurality of frames can be handled more easily as a single unit compared to the case of connecting to , and workability in manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or the like can be improved.

In addition, since the connection holding part 2710 is detachably attached to the frame, for example, a plurality of frames can be sequentially attached to the game panel 1100, or some frames can be removed from the game panel for maintenance or the like. In this case, by detaching or attaching the connecting/holding portion 2710, it is possible to improve the handling and handling of the frame, thereby improving workability.

In addition, since the connection holding part 2710 is detachable, the connection holding part 2710 is connected until the frame is attached to the game panel 1100, and the connection holding part 2710 is removed after the frame is attached to the game panel 1100. is possible, and it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance due to the presence of the connection holding portion 2710 .

Furthermore, electronic parts such as the pattern display 2518 are attached to at least one frame. If the frame comes off the game panel 1100 and falls, the weight of the frame will easily damage it. it will not be damaged. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably exhibit the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

[Regarding the ID code of the frame decoration]
In this embodiment, the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the game area 5a can be viewed from the front. A door frame top unit 300 provided above the game window 101, a door frame right side unit 340 provided on the right side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction A performance operation unit 250 (operating device) that is provided in and is operable by the player is attached. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame decoration member that can be attached to and detached from the door frame.

As shown in FIG. 116, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250 can be attached and detached while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall. It is possible to install a predetermined game board 5, a door frame top unit 300, a door frame right side unit 340, and an effect operation unit 250 as one group for each model series. It is possible. That is, when changing to a new model series, the game board 5 corresponding to the model series before the change, the door frame top unit 300, After removing the door frame right side unit 340 and the effect operation unit 250, the game board 5 corresponding to the new model series, the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340 and the effect operation unit 250 are attached. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the cost of changing the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when not only the playability but also the appearance of the game machine is to be renewed at the time of model change, thereby efficiently improving the playability and the game machine. You can refresh your appearance.

The door frame right side unit 340 of this example is integrally formed with the door frame top unit 300, and the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are integrally formed with respect to the door frame 3. I'm trying to put on and take off. In this regard, the door frame right side unit 340 may be separate from the door frame top unit 300 and may be separately attachable to and detachable from the door frame 3 . With regard to such a door frame right side unit 340, in addition to the renewal of the appearance of the game machine, the protrusion of the side part becomes a blocking wall from the player who is away from the seat, and it is disliked by the players who care about the eyes of the surroundings. The sense of feeling can be reduced, and a space specific to the player can be created by the projection of the upper portion and the side portion.

A peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached to the door frame top unit 300 . The door-frame top relay board includes a door-frame top decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for decorating the door-frame top decoration 301 of the door-frame top unit 300, and a door-frame right-side board of the door-frame right-side unit 340. For relaying the connection with the door frame right side decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for lighting the side decoration 341, the door frame right side left side decoration, and the door frame right side right side decoration. It is. As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control light emission of various LEDs mounted on, for example, the door frame top decoration board and the door frame right side decoration board via the door frame top relay board. can.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the operation section relay board (not shown) attached to the effect operation unit 250 . The operation part relay board relays the connection with the operation part decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for decorating the first effect button 251 and the second effect button 252 of the effect operation unit 250. It is for As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control light emission of various LEDs mounted on, for example, the operation part decoration board via the operation part relay board.

The door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 and the operation part relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250 are provided with a unique code (only one in the world) for identifying the model series. (non-existent code) is stored in advance as special information. This ID code is unique to each model series and cannot be rewritten using an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can extract and refer to the ID code from the door frame top relay board and the operation part relay board. The RAM built in the peripheral controller 1511 stores a table for referring to the ID code attached to the door frame top relay board and the operation part relay board. The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 whose model series matches that of the game board 5. The ID code of the operation part relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250 and the ID code of the operation part relay board are matched with each other.

When the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300. It is determined within a predetermined determination period whether or not they match and whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation section relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250 match. is judged to Here, when the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 that match the model series (have a regular relationship) are attached to the game board 5, they are stored in the reference table. The ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300. On the other hand, the model series does not match the game board 5. ) When the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are attached, their ID codes do not match. Similarly, when an effect operation unit 250 matching the model series (in a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table and the effect operation unit The ID code of the operation part relay board attached to 250 matches, and on the other hand, the production operation unit 250 whose model series does not match (not in a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5. In that case, the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation section relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250 do not match.

Here, in this example, the following power-on patterns A to C are provided as modes of power-on operation. Power-on pattern A is a case where the power switch 751 is operated without turning on the RAM clear switch 743, and the RAM built in the main control board 1310 is not initialized, and the information about the game is initialized. It does not become Power-on pattern B is a case where the power switch 751 is operated while the RAM clear switch 743 is being turned on, and the RAM clear is executed to initialize the game-related information. In power-on pattern C, the RAM clear switch 743 is not turned ON, but the power switch 751 is operated while the ball removal switch 742 is ON, and the ball removal process described above is executed. In such a power-on pattern C, the RAM clear is not executed and the game-related information is not initialized, but the progress of the game is stopped during the ball extraction process. The determination of whether or not the ID codes match is executed when the power is turned on with the power-on patterns A and B, but is not executed when the power is turned on with the power-on pattern C. ing. In other words, when the power is turned on in the power-on pattern C, the progress of the game during the ball extraction process is stopped, and there is no need to execute the light emission effect using the frame decoration member, so the ID code does not match. It is set so as not to confirm whether or not it is a member.

Further, when only the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 does not match the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to display the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side of which model series do not match. An error informing pattern 1 (for example, display of "Please check the type of the door frame top unit") for notifying that the unit 340 is installed is executed. Further, when only the ID code of the effect operation unit 250 does not match the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to indicate that the effect operation unit 250 whose model series does not match is attached. In-error notification pattern 2 to be notified (for example, display of "Please check the type of the effect operation unit") is executed. In addition, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 and the ID code of the effect operation unit 250 for the game board 5 do not match, the effect display device 1600 is used to display the model series. In-error notification pattern 3 (for example, "Door frame top unit and door Please check the type of the frame right side unit and the production operation unit").

On the other hand, when the door frame top unit 300 and the effect operation unit 250 are not attached to the door frame 3, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the door frame top relay board and the operation part relay board. The ID code cannot be retrieved from the board and referenced. In such a case, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 reads the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300. and whether the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation part relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250 match. At this time, the ID code is not input to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the ID code cannot be confirmed. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 detects the unconnected status if the ID code is not input from the door frame top relay board or the operation part relay board even after a predetermined determination period has passed. state.

Also, when only the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 cannot be confirmed (cannot be obtained) with respect to the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to attach the effect operation unit 250 and the door frame right side unit 340. In-error notification pattern 4 (for example, display of "Please check the connection of the door frame top unit and the door frame right side unit") is executed. In addition, when only the ID code of the effect operation unit 250 cannot be confirmed (cannot be obtained) with respect to the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to notify that the effect operation unit 250 is not attached. Information pattern 5 (for example, display of "Please check the connection of the production operation unit") is executed. Further, when neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 nor the ID code of the effect operation unit 250 can be confirmed (acquired) with respect to the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to display the door frame. In-error notification pattern 6 that notifies that the top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 and the effect operation unit 250 are not attached (for example, "connection of the door frame top unit and the door frame right side unit and the effect operation unit Please check" is displayed).

Here, regarding the game board 5, whether the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 and the ID code of the operation section relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250 match. Regardless of whether or not, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light during execution of normal effects (effects during variation and effects during non-variation). Similarly, regarding the game board 5, even if there is a part for which the ID code has not been confirmed among the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250, the normal effect (changing Various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light when the performance or non-fluctuation performance is executed.

Also, for the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340, the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300. In this case, at the time of execution of normal effects (effects during fluctuation and effects during non-variation), for example, the door frame top decoration board of the door frame top unit 300, Various LEDs mounted on the door frame right side decorative board of the door frame right side unit 340 can be controlled to emit light. 2) The various LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrates of the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are turned off. Moreover, when the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are not attached and the ID code of the door frame top relay board cannot be confirmed, the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 There is no need to control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate.

Similarly, for the effect operation unit 250, when the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation section relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250, normal effect At the time of execution of (variation effect and non-variation effect), various LEDs mounted on the front decoration substrate 321 and the rear decoration substrate 322 can be controlled to emit light via the operation unit relay board. On the other hand, if they do not match, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the production operation unit 250 that does not match the series of the model (not in a regular relationship) are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board are not controlled. The LED turns off. Further, when the performance operation unit 250 is not attached and the ID code of the operation part relay board cannot be confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the performance operation unit 250 are not controlled to emit light.

Further, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, when controlling the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 300 as members positioned around the game board 5 Light emission control of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate of the side unit 340 and various LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate of the effect operation unit 250 is performed in cooperation. As a result, not only the game board 5 but also the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250 can be used to perform an integrated lighting effect. However, among the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250, for the parts whose ID codes do not match the game board 5, various Since there is no light emission control of the LED, it is not possible to participate in the light emission effect. Similarly, among the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250, for the parts that are not attached to the door frame 3 and whose ID code has not been confirmed, the parts that have not been confirmed Since there is no light emission control of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board, it is not possible to participate in the light emitting performance.

As described above, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the door frame top unit is used as a member positioned around the game board 5 when controlling light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5. 300 and the door frame right side unit 340, and various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 250. Various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting substrate of the frame 3 can also be cooperatively controlled to emit light. As a result, not only the game board 5, the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250, but also the door frame 3 can be used to perform an integrated light emitting effect.

[Confirmation of operation of frame decoration parts (reusable products)]
In recent years, as the performance of game machines has improved, there is a risk that the cost of manufacturing the game machines will increase if new parts are always procured to manufacture the game machines. In order to suppress such an increase in cost, it is conceivable to reuse some or all of the specific decorative parts (including drive-related, light-emitting-related parts, etc.) that are part of the game machine. For example, the game board 5 can be easily attached/detached to/from the door frame 3, and the above-described frame decoration member can also be easily attached/detached to/from the door frame 3. It can be used as a reusable part. By the way, for such reusable parts, it is necessary to ascertain whether or not they operate normally at the time of inspection at the shipping site. must be confirmed. However, when removing reusable parts, it may be necessary to temporarily remove the game board 5 from the door frame 3 because the reusable parts are attached to the game board 5 or the like. If it is possible to check the operation status of reusable parts only in the situation where the power is turned off and then turned on again after removing and installing reusable parts, remove and install reusable parts. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 5 or turn off the power every time, it takes time and effort to confirm the operation state of reusable parts. In this regard, in this example, the trouble of removing the game board 5 and turning off the power is eliminated, and the efficiency of checking the operation state of reusable parts is improved, thereby making the pachinko machine highly convenient. 1 is to be provided.

The frame decoration member mentioned above is a specific decorative part which is a part of the pachinko machine 1, but is not a part mounted on the game board 5 but a part mounted on the door frame 3. Therefore, the frame decoration member can be attached to and detached from the door frame 3 while the game board 5 is attached to the door frame 3 without removing the game board 5 from the door frame 3. ing. In addition, the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the production operation unit 250, which are the frame decoration members, can be attached and detached by tool-less locking portions in order to ease the installation work of the hall manager. A mounting structure will be adopted. Examples of the locking portion without tools include a hand screw having a hand-cranked knob on the head, a well-known snap lock (not shown) that can be attached and detached by one-touch operation to move the lever up or down, and a lever rotation A well-known crescent lock that can be attached and detached by , etc. can be exemplified. As described above, the frame decoration member can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame 3, and the operation state of the frame decoration member can be checked without trouble.

Further, the frame decoration member can be attached and detached before and after the power is turned on. However, if the operation state of the detached frame decoration member is checked by removing the frame decoration member after turning off the power supply in the power-on state and turning on the power again, the operation state of the frame decoration member cannot be confirmed. It will take a lot of time and effort. For this reason, in this example, in the power-on state, if a specific operation is performed before detaching the frame decoration member, the operation of turning off the power and then turning on the power again is not performed. After the member is attached and detached, the state is shifted to a special state (reuse check state) in which it is possible to check the operating state of the detached frame decoration member. In addition, in the power-on state, whether or not the reuse permission switch is operated as a specific operation is monitored. It is determined whether or not the reuse permission switch has been turned on before. Specifically, the operation information of the reuse permission switch is referred to at the judgment timing when a predetermined period has passed after the power is turned on, and if the operation information is "operated" (for example, before the judgment timing or at the judgment timing). When the reuse permission switch is turned on at the same time, etc.), the reuse confirmation state is started, and the frame decoration member is detached in the reuse confirmation state, and the operation state of the detached frame decoration member is confirmed. making it possible. On the other hand, when the operation information of the reuse permission switch is referred to at the determination timing after a predetermined period has passed after the power is turned on, and the operation information is "no operation" (for example, the reuse permission switch is turned ON after the determination timing). If the reuse confirmation state is not started and the normal state is maintained, even if the frame decoration member is removed in the normal state, the operating state of the removed frame decoration member cannot be confirmed. I have to. In addition, in order to notify the operator that the ON operation of the reuse permission switch can be accepted until a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on, it may be notified to the outside.

Here, in this example, the following power-on patterns A to C are provided as modes of power-on operation. Power-on pattern A is a case where the power switch 751 is operated without turning on the RAM clear switch 743, and the RAM built in the main control board 1310 is not initialized, and the information about the game is initialized. It does not become Power-on pattern B is a case where the power switch 751 is operated while the RAM clear switch 743 is being turned on, and the RAM clear is executed to initialize the game-related information. In power-on pattern C, the RAM clear switch 743 is not turned ON, but the power switch 751 is operated while the ball removal switch 742 is ON, and the ball removal process described above is executed. In such a power-on pattern C, the RAM clear is not executed and the game-related information is not initialized, but the progress of the game is stopped during the ball extraction process. In the determination timing described above, whether or not the reuse permission switch has been turned ON before the determination timing is determined when the power is turned on in the power-on patterns A and B, but the power-on pattern C is executed. It is set not to run when the power is turned on with In other words, when the power is turned on according to the power-on pattern C, only the ball extraction process is executed, but the reuse confirmation state is not started, and the operation state of the frame decoration member cannot be confirmed.

To explain the above-mentioned specific operation in detail, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is an operation unit for work that the player cannot touch (a button for switching between the ON state and the OFF state, a key insertion A reuse permission switch is provided on the main control board 1310 as a key switch or the like that enables switching between an ON state and an OFF state. In addition, before the judgment timing when a predetermined period has passed after the power is turned on, each time the reuse permission switch is turned on, it is input to the main control board 1310 as operation information of the reuse permission switch, and the main control board 1310 operates the reuse permission switch. It stores the number of times information is entered. At the determination timing after a predetermined period of time has passed after the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 refers to the memory of the number of inputs of the operation information of the reuse permission switch, and the memory of the number of times of input of the referred operation information is "1". (For example, when the reuse permission switch is turned on once before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the reuse confirmation state A is started, and the number of times of input of the operation information is stored as "2 times or more." (for example, when the reuse permission switch is turned on twice before the determination timing or at the same time as the determination timing), the reuse confirmation state B is started. These reuse confirmation states may be terminated when a certain period of time has passed, but the operator's termination operation (for example, an operation unit operated at the start of the reuse confirmation state) operation of the same operation unit as ). As a result, the period during which the reuse confirmation state is generated can be arbitrarily set, and convenience can be improved when the operator detaches the frame decoration member and confirms the operation state of the detached frame decoration member. In this example, which of the reuse confirmation state A and the reuse confirmation state B is to be started is determined by the number of times of inputting the operation information of the reuse permission switch. good too.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, the door frame right side unit 340, and other frame decoration members are electrically connected. In this example, each of the frame decoration members is connected to the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 using drawer connectors. When the electrical connection by the drawer connector is interrupted, the frame decoration member is detached from the pachinko machine 1 or is out of position. is determined to be That is, for example, when the operator removes the frame decoration member while the power is on, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is disconnected, and when the frame decoration member is attached again. , the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is connected. In addition, unlike this example, a detection switch is provided to detect whether or not each of the frame decoration members is positioned at a proper position. 2, the frame decoration member is detached from the pachinko machine 1 or is out of position, and the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that the frame decoration member is not connected.

In the following, first, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with a focus on the operating state of the frame decoration member when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is removed during normal business hours. During normal operation, when the power is turned on, the reuse permission switch is not operated before the judgment timing when a predetermined period has passed after the power is turned on, and the frame decoration member is attached and detached in the normal state, not in the reuse confirmation state. I am planning to Subsequently, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with a focus on the operating state of the frame decoration member when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state. The reuse confirmation state is a state in which the reuse permission switch is operated before the judgment timing when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on in the power-on state, and the frame decoration member is attached and detached after shifting to the reuse confirmation state. I'm doing it.

(Detachment and attachment of frame decoration members during normal business hours)
FIG. 117 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is removed during normal business hours. First, the case where the reuse permission switch is not operated before the predetermined determination timing, the normal state is not changed to the reuse confirmation state, and the frame decoration member is attached/detached in the normal state will be described. In addition, regarding the attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member during normal business hours, in the event that a problem (abnormality, failure, etc.) occurs in the frame decoration member, such as the LED of the frame decoration member not emitting light, the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration It is assumed that after removing the member, the door frame 3 is temporarily closed while the frame decoration member remains unconnected, and the door frame 3 is opened again to attach the same frame decoration member or another frame decoration member. there is

As shown in FIG. 117, first, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the game state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state. , during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. That is, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when the start winning is made, the variable display of the special symbols can be started. It is possible to perform a normal game in which a jackpot game can be started when the variable display of the special symbols is stop-displayed with winning symbols. In the normal state, regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is removed at timing t2 or the like, which will be described later, the period during which the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side continues. . In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to frame decoration members such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the production operation unit 250. After the power is turned on, it is determined that the frame decoration member has not been removed and the frame decoration member has been connected until timing tx, which will be described later, arrives.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 includes an internal frame decoration LED (lamp A) mounted on various decoration boards of the frame decoration member, and a frame decoration outside LED (lamp B) mounted on various decoration boards other than the frame decoration member. ), the liquid crystal display device 1600, the speaker, etc. are controlled, and the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are made to perform normal operations after the power is turned on at the timing ts. ing. In addition, as the lamp B, as members other than the frame decoration member, the frame decoration outside LED 1 mounted on the various decoration substrates of some members and the frame decoration outside mounted on the various decoration substrates of the other members As for the LED 1 outside the frame decoration, the normal operation is executed regardless of whether the door frame 3 is opened or whether the frame decoration member is attached. Here, in the normal operation, when the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, the operation corresponding to the standby effect (for example, demonstration effect) in the state of waiting for the start of the variable display of the special symbols is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command, so as to execute the operation corresponding to the variation performance (performance based on the variation pattern) I have to. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display including the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, the reach effect) and the like, and the lamp A (LED in the frame decoration) and In lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1) and lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2), the LEDs are lit up or blinked in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device is output from the speaker. Sound is output in conjunction with the effect display executed in 1600 .

In addition, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 perform normal operations after the power is turned on at the timing ts. By doing so, the volume and the amount of light are assumed to change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation is received and the sound volume and light intensity are internally adjusted so that it is reflected in the sound volume and light intensity during execution. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the light intensity of the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration) is fixed, and even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and light intensity do not change. I'm trying

In addition, the external terminal board can output predetermined signals to the hall computer, and by receiving these signals at the hall computer, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 can also be grasped on the hall side. ing. Here, since the door frame 3 is in a closed state, a door frame open signal, which will be described later, is not output, and since the normal state is not a reuse confirmation state, which will be described later, a reuse confirmation signal, which will be described later, is output. do not have.

At timing tz1 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on at timing ts, a determination timing is provided to determine whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated prior to timing tz1. That is, at the determination timing, it is determined whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated between timing ts and timing tz1. Here, since the reuse permission switch is not operated before timing tz1, there is no transition to the reuse confirmation state at timing tz1, and the normal state continues thereafter. It is also assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tz1. For example, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is performing normal operation even after the timing tz1.

After determining that the reuse permission switch has not been operated at timing tz1, even if the reuse permission switch is operated at timing tz2, the normal state does not shift to the reuse confirmation state, and the normal state follows. is continuing. In other words, the operation of the reuse permission switch at timing tz2 is treated as invalid. It is also assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tz2. For example, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is performing normal operation even after the timing tz2.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, an open switch signal for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the door frame is opened. A door frame open command for conveying the opening of No. 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are operating normally. The opening operation is executed based on the reception of the opening command.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame open command, the lamp A (inside the frame decoration LED) and the lamp B (outside the frame decoration LED 2) emit light in a single color with high brightness when the door is opened. , the effect display device 1600 displays the message "The door frame is open" as a display when opening, and the speaker outputs "Door frame is open" as an opening sound. is open." is output. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration) continues its normal operation without executing the opening operation.

Further, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, except for the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration), are operated when opened. However, in the operation at the time of opening, the light intensity of the LED or the like is kept constant, and the volume from the speaker is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the amount of light of the members that are performing the opening operation do not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is not reflected in the sound volume and light intensity during execution. ing. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when returning to normal operation. It will happen. Note that the effect display device 1600 may change the amount of light when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

At timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, the external terminal board outputs a door frame open signal to the hall computer, and the door frame 3 is opened on the hall side. It is made possible to grasp that there was. Output of such a door frame open signal to the hall computer ends when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. Thus, even if the opening and closing time of the door frame 3 is short, the opening of the door frame 3 can be easily noticed on the hall side.

Next, when the frame decoration member is removed in the normal state at timing tx after the door frame 3 is opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is disconnected. At this time, after the door frame 3 is opened at timing t1, the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 is executing the opening operation, but at timing tx, the frame decoration member is opened. After removal, it is possible to execute the operation when the frame decoration is not connected to the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, but the operation when the frame decoration is not connected is prioritized. is performing the action of The operation when the frame decoration is not connected is executed after the door frame 3 is closed and the opening operation is completed. As described above, if the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are preferentially executed when the frame decoration is not connected, the opening of the door frame 3 is not notified to the outside and the hall manager is not aware of it. In addition, although there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is performed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, such a situation can be prevented by giving priority to executing the operation at the time of opening. In the normal state, regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is removed at timing t2, the period during which the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side continues.

However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 performs the operation when the frame decoration is not connected in addition to the operation when the opening is performed. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 not only displays the message "The door frame is open" as the display when the door is opened, but also displays the message "The frame decoration member is not connected" as the display when the frame decoration is not connected. is displayed. In other words, in the normal state, removal of the frame decoration member is not permitted without executing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. Further, regarding the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), since the frame decoration member has been removed, the LED will not light up or flash after that.

Next, after the frame decoration member is removed, at timing t2, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is sent to the main control board 1310. A door frame closing command is input to the control MPU 1310 a and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that the door frame 3 is closed. At this time, after the frame decoration member is removed at the timing tx, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is prioritized over the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. However, at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, ends the opening operation, and executes the operation when the frame decoration is not connected.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, the lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) emits light in a single color (a different color from the light emitted when the door is opened) as light emission when the frame decoration is not connected. ), the LED lights up or blinks with strong brightness, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message "The frame decoration member is not connected" as a display when the frame decoration is not connected. is designed to output the sound "The frame decoration member is not connected" as the frame decoration disconnection notification sound. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) continues normal operation without executing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. In addition, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) emits light at the time of closing for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after receiving the door frame closing command. After the predetermined period has passed, the light emission when the frame decoration is not connected is executed. As a result, even if the opening/closing time of the door frame 3 is short, the opening of the door frame 3 can be easily noticed on the hall side by executing light emission at the time of closing.

At timing t2, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are not connected to the frame decoration except for the lamp B (outside the frame decoration LED 1). In the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, the amount of light from the LED and the like is kept constant, and the volume from the speaker is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the amount of light of the member executing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected do not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to receive the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is not reflected in the sound volume and light intensity during execution. ing. Regarding such internally adjusted volume and light intensity, when returning to normal operation, it will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity. It will happen. Note that the effect display device 1600 may change the amount of light when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Next, at timing t3, when the door frame 3 is opened again in order to attach the frame decoration member in the normal state, at timing t1, the behavior is substantially the same as when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state. showing. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again while the frame decoration member is removed, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is opened with priority over the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. When running. However, since the frame decoration member is removed for the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), the opening operation is not executed. Among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600 performs the operation when the frame decoration is not connected in addition to the operation when the opening is performed.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again in the normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. At this time, after the door frame 3 is opened at the timing t2, the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are executing the opening operation. Even after being attached, the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 continue to operate at the time of opening. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, even after attaching the frame decoration member at timing ty, is added to the operation at the time of opening and when the frame decoration is not connected. continues to operate. After the frame decoration member is attached, at timing t4, which will be described later, after the door frame 3 is closed, the opening operation is completed, but the normal operation is not resumed, and the frame decoration is not connected. When the operation continues. As a result, when the frame decoration member is removed in the normal state, even if the frame decoration member is attached again, a trace of the unconnected frame decoration member can be left. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

At timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state, the supply of electricity to lamp A (frame decoration LED) is started by attaching the frame decoration member. It is in the off state without lighting or blinking. As a result, when the frame decoration member is removed in a normal state, even if the frame decoration member is attached again, a trace of the unconnected frame decoration member can be left. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out. In this example, the reuse permission switch is not operated before the determination timing of the timing tz1, and the reuse confirmation state is not shifted to the normal state after the timing tz1. Even if the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in (1), the operating state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member cannot be confirmed. In other words, in the normal state, attachment of the frame decoration member does not allow movement of the frame decoration member.

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, at timing t4, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is sent to the main control board 1310. A door frame closing command is input to the control MPU 1310 a and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that the door frame 3 is closed. At this time, after the frame decoration member is attached at the timing ty, the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 to operate are being opened. receives the door frame closing command, it terminates the opening operation and performs the normal operation. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (the LED 2 outside the frame decoration) emits light at the time of closing for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after receiving the door frame closing command. After the predetermined period has passed, normal light emission is performed. As a result, even if the opening/closing time of the door frame 3 is short, the opening of the door frame 3 can be easily noticed on the hall side by executing light emission at the time of closing.

As described above in detail, after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t4 after the frame decoration member is attached, the opening operation is terminated, but the normal operation is not resumed. Continues the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. At timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is turned off, but at timing t4, the door frame 3 is closed. Even after the light is turned off, the light-off state is continued. In such a case, unless the power is turned on again after that, the lighted state will not be canceled and the lighted state will not be turned on. ing.

(Detachment and attachment of the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A 1)
118 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is being opened in the reuse confirmation state A and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame 3 is being opened. . First, a case will be described in which the frame decoration member is attached and detached after the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A by operating the reuse permission switch before the predetermined determination timing. Regarding the attachment and detachment of the frame decoration members in the reuse confirmation state A, when confirming the operation state of a plurality of frame decoration members used as reusable parts, the door frame 3 was opened and the frame decoration members were removed. Later, the door frame 3 is once closed with the frame decoration member unconnected, and the door frame 3 is opened again to attach another frame decoration member, or the same frame decoration member is attached again for reconfirmation. It is assumed that

As shown in FIG. 118, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the behavior is the same as when the power is turned on at the timing ts shown in FIG. For example, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the game state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state, and the main control board 1310 side It is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed. That is, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when the start winning is made, the variable display of the special symbols can be started. It is possible to perform a normal game in which a jackpot game can be started when the variable display of the special symbols is stop-displayed with winning symbols. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to frame decoration members such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the production operation unit 250. After the power is turned on, it is determined that the frame decoration member has not been removed and the frame decoration member has been connected until timing tx, which will be described later, arrives. Also, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 perform normal operations after the power is turned on at the timing ts.

At timing tz1 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on at timing ts, a determination timing is provided to determine whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated prior to timing tz1. That is, at the determination timing, it is determined whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated between timing ts and timing tz1. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch at timing tx3 prior to timing tz1, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1. In addition, after the main control board 1310 shifts to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, even if the player operates the handle 160, the game ball cannot be shot to the game area 5a, and even if there is a starting prize, the variable display of the special symbols can be started. It is in a state where normal games cannot be played. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment/detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by normal game play. In the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, to end the reuse confirmation state A. period.

Further, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, some of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are used to perform the operation at the time of reuse confirmation. Specifically, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "You can confirm the operation of the frame decoration member" as a display at the time of reuse confirmation. Then, from the speaker, as a reuse confirmation sound, a voice saying "You can check the operation of the frame decoration member" is output. On the other hand, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, lamp A (inside frame decoration LED), lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1), and lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2) are operated during reuse confirmation. Continues normal operation without In this way, after the transition to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, only some of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are executing the operation at the time of reuse confirmation. The transition to confirmation state A is caused by the operator operating the reuse permission switch, and there is no need to notify the outside that it is easy to recognize. The lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1) and the lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2) are assumed not to perform the operation at the time of reuse confirmation. Further, such an operation at the time of confirmation of reuse is assumed to continue until the reuse confirmation state A is ended by operating the reuse permission switch again at timing tz4, which will be described later.

Further, after the transition to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, some of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are performing the operation at the time of reuse confirmation. As for the members, the amount of light emitted from the LED and the like is kept constant, and the sound volume from the speaker is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the amount of light of the member executing the reuse confirmation operation do not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to receive the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is not reflected in the sound volume and light intensity during execution. ing. When the reuse confirmation state A is changed to the normal state and returned to the normal operation by operating the reuse permission switch again at timing tz4, which will be described later, the internally adjusted volume and light amount are changed. In addition, based on the internally adjusted sound volume and light intensity, the sound volume and light intensity during execution will be reflected. On the other hand, even after the transition to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, the lamp A (inside the frame decoration LED) and the lamp B (outside the frame decoration LED 2), which are the members that are executing the normal operation, can be set by pressing the setting adjustment buttons. 204, the amount of light is changed by operating the button 204. However, the amount of light of the lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) is fixed so that the amount of light does not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. I have to. As described above, in this example, since the member with the constant LED light amount is provided, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the light amount of the member with the LED light amount not constant is changing. can. Note that the effect display device 1600 may change the amount of light when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

In addition, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, the external terminal board outputs a reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer to indicate that the hall side has shifted to the reuse confirmation state A. making it comprehensible. Output of such a reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer ends when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, and the reuse confirmation state A ends. The output of the reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the reuse confirmation state A is completed. As a result, even if the transition period to the reuse confirmation state A is short, it is possible to make it easier for the hall side to notice that the transition to the reuse confirmation state A has occurred.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, an open switch signal for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, A door frame open command for notifying the opening of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510 . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t1. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t1, and when the reuse is confirmed, As for the members that are performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing t1. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame open command, the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 to operate do not operate at the time of opening. It is not executed and does not change before and after timing t1. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to prevent the attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member from being hindered by the execution of the opening operation.

At timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, the external terminal board outputs a door frame open signal to the hall computer, and the door frame 3 is opened on the hall side. It is possible to grasp that there was a release of The output of such a door frame open signal to the hall computer is finished when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. Thus, even if the opening/closing time of the door frame 3 is short, the opening of the door frame 3 can be easily noticed on the hall side.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, at timing tx, when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing tx. The member that is performing the operation continues the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after the timing tx. Also, when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 despite the removal of the frame decoration member is executed when the frame decoration is not connected. and does not change before and after the timing tx. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, the removal of the frame decoration member is allowed without executing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment/detachment of the decorative frame member and confirmation of the operating state of the decorative frame member can be prevented from being hindered by the execution of the operation when the decorative frame is not connected. .

Although the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up or flashes after the frame decoration member has been removed. It has become something that will never happen.

Next, after the frame decoration member is removed, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is output to the main control board 1310. is input to the main control MPU 1310a, and a door frame closing command for transmitting closing of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t2. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t2, and when the reuse is confirmed, The member that is performing the operation continues the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after the timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not operate at the time of closing. It is not executed and does not change before and after timing t2. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by execution of the closing operation.

Next, at timing t3, when the door frame 3 is opened again in order to attach the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A. Approximately the same behavior is shown. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again while the frame decoration member is being removed, the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation at the time of opening, and timing t3 is executed. It is assumed that there is no change before and after . For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t3, and when the reuse is confirmed, The member that is performing the operation continues the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after the timing t3.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, when the frame decoration member is attached again in the reuse confirmation state A at timing ty, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing ty. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing ty, and when the reuse is confirmed, As for the member that is performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing ty.

Also, at the timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the reuse confirmation state A, the supply of electricity to the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) is started by attaching the frame decoration member. and is operating normally. As described above in detail, in the normal operation, when the variable display of special symbols is not executed, it corresponds to a standby effect (for example, a demonstration effect) in a state of waiting for the start of the variable display of special symbols. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command, the operation corresponding to the variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern) is performed. I am trying to execute. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up or blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. . However, when the frame decoration member is attached, there are problems such as a situation where the wiring to lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is disconnected and electricity is not supplied, or a situation where lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) itself breaks down. occurs, the normal operation is not executed, and the LED does not light up or blink.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is not operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, the normal state is maintained and the reuse confirmation state is not entered, and the frame decoration member is removed and then attached again. However, if the reuse permission switch is operated once before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A, After the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the normal operation is performed by attaching the frame decoration member again at timing ty. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, the operation of the frame decoration member is allowed by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on condition that the reuse permission switch is operated once before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A. In reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is attached (detached ), the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member can be checked.

In this example, during the period from timing tx to timing ty, that is, during the period in which the frame decoration member is removed for attachment and detachment in the reuse confirmation state A, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is , the LED does not light up or blink. However, during such a period, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is reflected in the light intensity of the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration). It is in a state where it will not be done. With respect to such internally adjusted volume and light intensity, the internally adjusted light intensity can be obtained by attaching the frame decoration member again at timing ty, which will be described later, when the LED can be lit or blinked. is reflected in the amount of light for the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration). As described above, in this example, when the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, which will be described later, the internally adjusted light amount is not reset to the initial state, and the internally adjusted light amount is not returned to the initial state. Since the amount of light applied is reflected as it is, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the amount of light for the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) of the attached (removed) frame decoration member changes normally. . Regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is removed, the light amount of the lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1) is kept constant, and even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the light amount changes. I'm trying not to. For this reason, when the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, does the amount of light of the frame decoration member for the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) change normally compared to the lamp B (the LED outside the frame decoration LED 1)? It is possible to easily determine whether or not

The above-described lamp A (frame decoration LED) is a frame decoration LED mounted on various decoration substrates of the frame decoration member, and is provided in the frame decoration member. In addition to the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), the LED 2 (the lamp A') inside the frame decoration mounted on various decoration substrates of the frame decoration member may be provided. As for the lamp A' (the LED 2 inside the frame decoration), the light intensity of the LED is kept constant so that even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the light intensity do not change. As a result, since the lamp A' (the LED 2 inside the frame decoration) is provided on the frame decoration member like the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), when the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, the frame The amount of light for the lamp A of the frame decoration member (LED 2 inside the frame decoration) is internally adjusted while the frame decoration member is removed, compared with the lamp A′ (the LED 2 inside the frame decoration). It is possible to easily determine whether or not is changing normally.

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing t4, the case where the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing t2. Approximately the same behavior is shown. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed after the frame decoration member is attached, the closing operation of the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is not performed. assumed to be unchanged. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t4, and when the reuse is confirmed, As for the members that are performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing t4.

Next, when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 after the door frame 3 is closed, the reuse confirmation state A is terminated and the state shifts to the normal state. Here, the normal state is the same as the normal state after the power is turned on at timing ts. That is, after the main control board 1310 shifts to the normal state at the timing tz4, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. In addition, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 performs normal operation after transitioning to the normal state at timing tz4. As described above, in this example, the reuse confirmation state A can be returned to the normal state after the operation state of the frame decoration member is confirmed while the frame decoration member as a reusable part is removed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game (main game) proceeds normally after confirming the operation state of the frame decoration member.

In this example, after the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, so that the lamp A (frame decoration LED) performs normal operation. However, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the normal operation is not executed, and by operating the operation permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, the lamp A (frame decoration LED ) may perform normal operation. As for the operation permission switch, it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and is an operation unit for work that cannot be touched by the player (a button that enables switching between the ON state and the OFF state, and a button that enables switching between the ON state and the ON state by inserting a key). It is provided on the main control board 1310 as a key switch or the like that enables switching between the OFF state and the OFF state. Also, at the timing ty, after the frame decoration member is attached again and before the operation permission switch is operated, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up as an operation during standby, for example. state or turned off. As a result, confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be arbitrarily started by the hall manager by operating the operation permission switch, and convenience can be improved.

The operation permission switch described above is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also function as the operation permission switch. In other words, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the normal operation is not executed, and by operating the reuse permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is turned on. Ordinary operations may be executed. In addition, the reuse permission switch may be configured so that one option can be selected from a plurality of options. and options for performing time actions.

Further, in this example, after the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, at timing ty, the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open, so that the lamp A (frame decoration LED) is turned on. The normal operation is executed, but at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open, the normal operation is not executed, and at timing t2, the opening is executed. By closing the door frame 3, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) may perform normal operation. At this time, at timing ty, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is on standby from when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open to when the door frame 3 is closed. As the operation of the time, for example, the LED is turned on or turned off. As a result, the hall manager can arbitrarily start checking the operation state of the frame decoration member by closing the door frame 3, thereby improving convenience.

Also, in this example, at timing tz4, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed before the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state. At timing tz4, when the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. Even before the reuse confirmation state is ended by operating the reuse permission switch again, by operating the game permission switch, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. You may make it shift to a possible period. As for the game permission switch, it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and is an operation unit for work that cannot be touched by the player (a button that allows switching between the ON state and the OFF state, and a button that switches between the ON state and the ON state by inserting a key). It is provided on the main control board 1310 as a key switch or the like that enables switching between the OFF state and the OFF state. As a result, during the period in which the game (main game) can be progressed on the side of the main control board 1310, when the handle 160 is operated, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when there is a starting prize. In addition, it is possible to start the variable display of the special symbols by performing a lottery, and when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols, the jackpot game can be started, so that the game (main game ) can be started at will by the hall manager by operating the game permission switch, thereby improving convenience.

The above-described game permission switch is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also function as the game permission switch. In other words, by operating the reuse permission switch at a timing before ending the reuse confirmation state by operating the reuse permission switch again, it is possible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. You may make it shift to a certain period. In addition, the reuse permission switch may be configured so that one option can be selected from a plurality of options. and an option for transitioning to a period in which the game can be progressed.

In the above, when the number of input times of the operation information of the reuse permission switch is stored as "1 time" at a predetermined judgment timing after the power is turned on is turned on, etc.), the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached and detached in the reuse confirmation state A, but the number of inputs of the reuse permission switch operation information is stored as " 2 times or more" (for example, when the reuse permission switch is turned on twice before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state B, and the reuse confirmation state is changed. At B, it is possible to attach and detach the frame decoration member. Here, in the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed, but in the reuse confirmation state B, the game on the main control board 1310 side (main game ) can be progressed. In addition, the reuse confirmation state B shows the same behavior as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the reuse confirmation state A except for this point. For example, at the determination timing of timing tz1, even if the reuse confirmation state is changed to the reuse confirmation state B on the condition that the number of input times of the operation information of the reuse permission switch is "two or more". When the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in B, it is possible to confirm the operation state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member.

119 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is being opened in the reuse confirmation state B and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame 3 is being opened. . Here, the points different from the reuse confirmation state A are mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 119, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the game state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state. This is a period during which a game (main game) can be progressed on the control board 1310 side. At timing tz1 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on at timing ts, there is provided a judgment timing for judging whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated before timing tz1. The timing also determines the number of times the reuse permission switch is operated from the timing ts to the timing tz1. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch twice before timing tz1, the normal state shifts to reuse confirmation state B at timing tz1. In the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when the start winning is made, the variable display of the special symbols can be started, A normal game can be performed in which a big winning game can be started when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with winning symbols. In the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 to end the reuse confirmation state A. shall be continued.

Further, when the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B, and after removing the frame decoration member in reuse confirmation state B, at timing ty By attaching the frame decoration member again, normal operation is performed. That is, in the reuse confirmation state B, the operation of the frame decoration member is allowed by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B. In reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is attached (detached ), the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member can be checked.

In this example, when the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to the reuse confirmation state B. Regarding the reuse confirmation state B, the main control board 1310 side It is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed. Therefore, in the reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game (main game) progresses normally. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to check the operation state of the frame decoration member as a reusable part while detaching the frame decoration member. Confirmation of whether or not it is good can be performed at the same time without waiting for returning from the reuse confirmation state B to the normal state again, and it is possible to check the pachinko machine 1 including confirmation of the operation state of a plurality of frame decoration members. Efficiency can be improved.

(Detachment and attachment of the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A 2)
FIG. 120 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is open in the reuse confirmation state A. First, a case will be described in which the frame decoration member is attached and detached after the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A by operating the reuse permission switch before the predetermined determination timing. Regarding the detachment of the frame decoration member, when checking the operating state of a plurality of frame decoration members used as reusable parts, after the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is removed, the door frame 3 It is envisioned that another framing member will be installed without closing the , or the same framing member will be re-installed for reconfirmation.

As shown in FIG. 120, after the power is turned on at timing ts, the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing tx through predetermined work. After the power is turned on at the timing ts shown in 118, the behavior is the same as the period until the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tx. That is, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the reuse permission switch is operated at the timing tz3, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, and the reuse confirmation state is reached at the timing t1. In A, the door frame 3 is opened, and at timing tx, the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A. In this respect, the same operation as that shown in FIG. 118 is performed, and the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is shows the same behavior.

In this example, after the door frame 3 is opened, the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tx. During the opening of the frame 3, the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty. In this way, when the frame decoration member is attached again in the reuse confirmation state A at timing ty while the door frame 3 is being opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. there is

Then, when the frame decoration member is attached in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing ty while the door frame 3 is open, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is electrically connected by attaching the frame decoration member. supply has started and normal operations are being performed. As described above in detail, in normal operation, when the variable display of special symbols is not executed, it corresponds to a standby effect (for example, demonstration effect) in a state of waiting for the start of variable display of special symbols. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command, the operation corresponding to the variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern) is performed. I am trying to execute. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up or blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. . However, when the frame decoration member is attached, there are problems such as a situation where the wiring to lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is disconnected and electricity is not supplied, or a situation where lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) itself breaks down. occurs, the normal operation is not executed, and the LED does not light up or blink.

It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing ty. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing ty. As for the member that is performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing ty.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is not operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, the normal state is maintained and the reuse confirmation state is not entered. Although it was in the off state without blinking, if the reuse permission switch is operated once before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached again. I'm trying to get it to work normally. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, the operation of the frame decoration member is allowed by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on condition that the reuse permission switch is operated once before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A. In reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is attached (detached) ), the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member can be checked. In this example, the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing tx while the door frame 3 is open, and the frame decoration member is removed again at timing ty while the door frame 3 is open. is attached, it is possible to check the operating state of the attached (removed) frame decoration member. In other words, after removing the decorative frame member in the reuse confirmation state A at timing tx, the door frame 3 is necessarily closed and then opened again until the decorative frame member is attached again at timing ty. no need to do any work. In this way, even when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A during one opening of the door frame 3, it is possible to confirm the operation state of the removed frame decoration member. It is possible to improve the efficiency of confirming the operation states of the plurality of frame decoration members.

In this example, during the period from timing tx to timing ty, that is, during the period in which the frame decoration member is removed for attachment and detachment in the reuse confirmation state A, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is , the LED does not light up or blink. However, during such a period, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is reflected in the light intensity of the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration). It is in a state where it will not be done. With respect to such internally adjusted volume and light intensity, the internally adjusted light intensity can be obtained by attaching the frame decoration member again at timing ty, which will be described later, when the LED can be lit or blinked. is reflected in the amount of light for the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration). As described above, in this example, when the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, which will be described later, the internally adjusted light amount is not reset to the initial state, and the internally adjusted light amount is not returned to the initial state. Since the amount of light applied is reflected as it is, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the amount of light for the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) of the attached (removed) frame decoration member changes normally. . Regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is removed, the light amount of the lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1) is kept constant, and even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the light amount changes. I'm trying not to. For this reason, when the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, does the amount of light of the frame decoration member for the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) change normally compared to the lamp B (the LED outside the frame decoration LED 1)? It is possible to easily determine whether or not

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is output to the main control board 1310. is input to the main control MPU 1310a, and a door frame closing command for transmitting closing of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t2. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t2, and when the reuse is confirmed, The member that is performing the operation continues the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after the timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not operate at the time of closing. It is not executed and does not change before and after timing t2. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by execution of the closing operation.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened again, when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is attached or detached, the period from timing t1 to timing t2 is repeated. That is, the door frame 3 is opened at timing t1′, the frame decoration member is removed at timing tx′, another frame decoration member is attached at timing ty′, and another frame decoration member is attached at timing t2′. , in terms of closing the door frame 3, the same work as the period from timing t1 to timing t2 described above is performed, and the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 shows the same behavior.

Next, when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 after the door frame 3 is closed, the reuse confirmation state A is terminated and the state shifts to the normal state. Here, the normal state is the same as the normal state after the power is turned on at timing ts. That is, after the main control board 1310 shifts to the normal state at the timing tz4, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. In addition, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 performs normal operation after transitioning to the normal state at timing tz4. As described above, in this example, the reuse confirmation state A can be returned to the normal state after the operation state of the frame decoration member is confirmed while the frame decoration member as a reusable part is detached. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether the game (main game) proceeds normally after confirming the operating state of the frame decoration member.

In the above, when the number of input times of the operation information of the reuse permission switch is stored as "1 time" at a predetermined judgment timing after the power is turned on is turned on, etc.), the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached and detached in the reuse confirmation state A, but the number of inputs of the reuse permission switch operation information is stored as " 2 times or more" (for example, when the reuse permission switch is turned on twice before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state B, and the reuse confirmation state is changed. At B, it is possible to attach and detach the frame decoration member. Here, in the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed, but in the reuse confirmation state B, the game on the main control board 1310 side (main game ) can be progressed. In addition, the reuse confirmation state B shows the same behavior as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the reuse confirmation state A except for this point. For example, if the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, even if the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in reuse confirmation state B. ), it is possible to check the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member.

FIG. 121 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is detached while the door frame 3 is open in the reuse confirmation state B. FIG. Here, the points different from the reuse confirmation state A are mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 121, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the game state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state. This is a period during which a game (main game) can be progressed on the control board 1310 side. At timing tz1 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on at timing ts, there is provided a judgment timing for judging whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated before timing tz1. The timing also determines the number of times the reuse permission switch is operated from the timing ts to the timing tz1. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch twice before timing tz1, the normal state shifts to reuse confirmation state B at timing tz1. In the reuse confirmation state B, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. That is, in the reuse confirmation state B, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when the start winning is made, the variable display of the special symbols can be started, A normal game can be performed in which a big winning game can be started when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with winning symbols. In the reuse confirmation state B, a period during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 and the reuse confirmation state B ends. shall be continued.

Further, when the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B, and after removing the frame decoration member in reuse confirmation state B, at timing ty By attaching the frame decoration member again, normal operation is performed. That is, in the reuse confirmation state B, the operation of the frame decoration member is allowed by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B. In reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is attached (detached ), it is possible to confirm the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member.

In this example, when the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to the reuse confirmation state B. Regarding the reuse confirmation state B, the main control board 1310 side It is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed. Therefore, in the reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game (main game) progresses normally. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to check the operation state of the frame decoration member as a reusable part while detaching the frame decoration member. Confirmation of whether or not it is good can be performed at the same time without waiting for returning from the reuse confirmation state B to the normal state again, and it is possible to check the pachinko machine 1 including confirmation of the operation state of a plurality of frame decoration members. Efficiency can be improved.

(Regarding the attachment of the frame decoration member when the frame decoration member is not connected at the judgment timing)
FIG. 122 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is attached after it is determined at the determination timing that the frame decoration member is not connected. In the above, when it is determined that the reuse permission switch is operated before the predetermined determination timing and the frame decoration member is connected at the predetermined determination timing, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A. , when the frame decoration member is mounted (demounted) in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to confirm the operation state of the mounted (demounted) frame decoration member. On the other hand, even if the reuse permission switch is operated before the predetermined determination timing, if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the predetermined determination timing, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A. never. Even when the frame decoration member is attached after that, the LED does not turn on or blink, so that the operation state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member cannot be confirmed. A specific example of such is described below.

As shown in FIG. 122, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the behavior is substantially the same as when the power is turned on at the timing ts shown in FIG. For example, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the game state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state, and the main control board 1310 side It is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed. That is, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when the start winning is made, the variable display of the special symbols can be started. It is possible to perform a normal game in which a jackpot game can be started when the variable display of the special symbols is stop-displayed with winning symbols. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to the production operation unit 250 and the frame decoration members such as the production operation unit 250. Until the timing tx arrives, it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected. That is, since the frame decoration member is not connected to the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), the LED does not light up or blink. Also, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 perform normal operations after the power is turned on at the timing ts.

At timing tz1 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on at timing ts, there is provided a judgment timing for judging whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated before timing tz1. At the timing, it is also determined whether or not the frame decoration member is unconnected. In the situation where the reuse permission switch is operated before the timing tz1, if it is determined that the frame decoration member is connected at the determination timing, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A. , when it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the determination timing, the normal state is not changed to the reuse confirmation state A, and the normal state is continued thereafter. In the normal state, regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is disconnected at timing tz1 or the like, the period during which the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side continues. there is

Further, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are used to execute the operation when the reuse check is not activated. ing. Specifically, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, the production display device 1600 displays "Unable to check the operation of the frame decoration member" as a display when the reuse confirmation is not activated. A message is displayed, and a sound "The operation of the frame decoration member cannot be confirmed" is output from the speaker as the reuse confirmation non-operation sound. On the other hand, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), and lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) operate when the reuse confirmation is not activated. continue normal operation without executing In this way, after it is determined at the timing tz1 that the frame decoration members are not connected, only some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 execute the operation when the reuse check is not activated. However, the determination that the frame decoration member was not connected at timing tz1 was caused by the operator operating the reuse permission switch, and it is necessary to notify the outside in an easy-to-recognize manner. Therefore, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame), the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame), and the lamp B (the LED 2 outside the frame) do not perform the operation when the reuse confirmation is not confirmed. Regarding the operation when such reuse confirmation is not yet activated, whether or not the frame decoration member is attached after it is determined at timing tz1 that the frame decoration member is not connected, or whether the door frame 3 is opened or closed. Regardless, it will continue.

Further, after it is determined at timing tz1 that the frame decoration member is not connected, some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are subjected to the operation when the reuse check is not yet performed. However, for such members, the amount of light emitted from the LED is kept constant, and the volume from the speaker is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the amount of light of the member that is executing the operation when the reuse confirmation is not performed does not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is not reflected in the sound volume and light intensity during execution. ing. On the other hand, even after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the timing tz1, the setting adjustment button 204 can be operated for the lamp B (frame decoration LED 2) as a member that is executing the normal operation. However, the light amount of the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration) is kept constant so that even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the light amount does not change. As described above, in this example, since the member with the constant LED light amount is provided, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the light amount changes with respect to the member with the LED light amount not constant. can. Note that the effect display device 1600 may change the amount of light when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Further, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at the timing tz1, the external terminal board does not output the reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, an open switch signal for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the door frame is opened. A door frame open command for conveying the opening of No. 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510 . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t1. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t1, and the reuse confirmation is not performed. As for the member executing the time operation, even after the timing t1, the operation of the reuse confirmation non-operation is continued. That is, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame open command, but the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue an operation instruction. It is assumed that the members that are closed do not perform the opening operation and do not change before and after the timing t1. As a result, in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is disconnected, confirmation of whether or not the game (main game) proceeds normally is hindered by the execution of the opening action. can be prevented.

At timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, the external terminal board outputs a door frame open signal to the hall computer, and the door frame 3 is opened on the hall side. It is possible to grasp that there was The output of such a door frame open signal to the hall computer is finished when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. Thus, even if the opening/closing time of the door frame 3 is short, the opening of the door frame 3 can be easily noticed on the hall side.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing ty. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing ty, and the reuse confirmation is not performed. As for the member executing the time operation, even after the timing ty, the operation when the reuse confirmation is not performed is continued.

At timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state, the supply of electricity to lamp A (frame decoration LED) is started by attaching the frame decoration member. It is in the off state without lighting or blinking. As a result, even if the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is unconnected, it is possible to leave a trace that the frame decoration member was not connected, so that the attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member can be performed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent use of the system. In addition, when the frame decoration member is attached, assuming that the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up or blinks, the operator who wants to check whether the game (main game) progresses normally. For us, that confirmation may be hindered. In this regard, in this example, if the reuse permission switch is operated before the determination timing of timing tz1 and the frame decoration member is disconnected at that determination timing, even if the frame decoration member is attached after that, , the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) does not turn on or blink, and it is possible to prevent such confirmation from being hindered. On the other hand, if the reuse permission switch is operated before the judgment timing of timing tz1 and the frame decoration member is connected at that judgment timing, when the frame decoration member is attached after that, the lamp A (frame As for the decoration LED), the LED lights up or blinks. For this reason, depending on whether the operator wants to check the operation state of the frame decoration member as a reusable part or whether the game (main game) progresses normally, etc. It is selectable.

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, at timing t2, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is sent to the main control board 1310. A door frame closing command is input to the control MPU 1310 a and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that the door frame 3 is closed. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t2. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t2, and the reuse confirmation is not performed. As for the member executing the time operation, even after the timing t2, it continues the operation when the reuse confirmation is not yet performed. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, but the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation. It is assumed that the members that are closed are not changed before and after the timing t2 without executing the closing operation. As a result, in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is disconnected, confirmation of whether or not the game (main game) progresses normally is hindered by the execution of the closing operation. can be prevented.

Next, at timing t3, when the door frame 3 is opened again in order to remove the frame decoration member in the normal state, at timing t1, the behavior is substantially the same as when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state. showing. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again while the frame decoration member is attached, the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation at the time of opening. It is assumed that there is no change before and after . For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t3, and the reuse confirmation is not performed. As for the member executing the time operation, even after the timing t3, the operation when the reuse confirmation is not performed is continued.

Next, at timing tx after the door frame 3 is opened, when the frame decoration member is removed again in the normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is disconnected. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx. In other words, when the frame decoration member is removed again after the door frame 3 is opened, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. It is assumed that it does not change before and after tx. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing tx, and the reuse confirmation non-operation is performed. As for the member executing the time operation, even after the timing tx, the operation during the reuse confirmation non-operation is continued.

Although the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up or flashes after the frame decoration member has been removed. It has become something that will never happen.

Next, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t4 after the frame decoration member is removed, the behavior is substantially the same as when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t2. showing. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed after the frame decoration member is removed, the closing operation of the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is not performed. assumed to be unchanged. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t4, and the reuse confirmation non-operation is performed. As for the member that is executing the time operation, the operation during the reuse confirmation non-operation is continued even after the timing t4.

In this example, after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are used to perform the operation when the reuse check is not activated. However, such operation when the reuse confirmation is not activated is continued regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is attached and whether or not the door frame 3 is opened or closed. As a result, even if the frame decoration member is attached after it is determined that the frame decoration member is unconnected at timing tz1, it is possible to leave traces of the fact that the frame decoration member was unconnected. It is possible to prevent all illegal acts from being carried out. Further, as described above, in a situation where the frame decoration member is connected, if it is determined that the reuse permission switch is not operated at the timing tz1, when the frame decoration member is removed after that, the peripheral control For the members whose operation is instructed by the board 1510, the operation when the frame decoration is not connected is executed. When it is determined that the frame decoration member is being operated, even if the frame decoration member is removed after that, the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. As a result, in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is disconnected, it is confirmed whether or not the game (main game) proceeds normally, and the operation when the frame decoration is not connected is executed. can be prevented from being hindered by Also, in this example, the purpose of the operation when the reuse confirmation is not activated is to inform that the operation confirmation of the frame decoration member cannot be performed, and is different from the operation when the frame decoration is not connected as described above. However, these operations may be made common.

(Confirmation of error light emission when the frame decoration member is removed in reuse confirmation state A)
FIG. 123 shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is being opened and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame 3 is being opened in the error state and reuse confirmation state A. Chart. In the above, when the reuse permission switch is operated before the predetermined determination timing, the normal state shifts to the reuse confirmation state A, and when the frame decoration member is attached (removed) in the reuse confirmation state A, It is possible to check the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member. On the other hand, when an abnormality is detected, such as detection of magnetism, vibration, or radio waves for the pachinko machine 1, the state shifts to an error state. In such an error state, the LED of the frame decoration member erroneously emits light. To confirm the operation state of the frame decoration member, it is also possible to check whether the LED of the frame decoration member normally emits error light. Confirmation is required. In this regard, in this example, when the reuse confirmation state A and the error state are generated at the same time, when the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in that state, it is attached (detached). It is possible to confirm that the LED of the frame decoration member emits light in error. A specific example of such is described below.

In this example, as an error detection unit, a magnetic sensor that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 is used to detect magnetism. A configuration for detecting vibration by a vibration sensor that detects vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1, and a radio wave sensor that detects the radio wave applied to the pachinko machine 1 by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with illegal radio waves. It has a configuration to detect After the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 monitors whether magnetism, vibration, and radio waves for the pachinko machine 1 are detected.

As shown in FIG. 123, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the behavior is the same as when the power is turned on at the timing ts shown in FIG. For example, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the game state on the main control board 1510 side is controlled to the normal state, and the main control board 1310 side It is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed. That is, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when the start winning is made, the variable display of the special symbols can be started. It is possible to perform a normal game in which a jackpot game can be started when the variable display of the special symbols is stop-displayed with winning symbols. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to frame decoration members such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the production operation unit 250. After the power is turned on, it is determined that the frame decoration member has not been removed and the frame decoration member has been connected until timing tx, which will be described later, arrives. Also, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 perform normal operations after the power is turned on at the timing ts.

After the power is turned on at timing ts, at timing t0, signals from the magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism, the vibration sensor for detecting vibration, and the radio wave sensor for detecting radio waves are output to the main control board 1310. When input to the main control MPU 1310a, the main control board 1310 detects anomalies in magnetism, vibration, and radio waves, and sends an anomaly notification command to the peripheral control board for notifying execution of anomaly notification based on the occurrence of an anomaly. Output towards 1510. At this time, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are operating normally. An error condition occurs based on receiving the command. In an error state, the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform normal operation, but performs error operation. It should be noted that the main control board 1310 controls the game state to the normal state in the same manner as the state in which no abnormality has occurred even after transmitting the abnormality notification command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t0, and the main control board 1310 side It is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives an anomaly notification command, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) and the lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) light up in a single color with high brightness as an error light emission. Lighting and blinking are performed, and the effect display device 1600 displays messages such as "a magnetic error has occurred", "a vibration error has occurred", and "a radio wave error has occurred" as error displays. Then, from the speaker, as an error sound, sounds such as "a magnetic error has occurred", "a vibration error has occurred", and "a radio wave error has occurred" are output. In addition, in this example, by changing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, for example, by changing the message display, the LED emission color, and the notification sound, depending on when magnetism, vibration, and radio waves are detected, It is possible to grasp whether vibration or radio wave was detected. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration) continues normal operation without executing the error operation.

Further, when an abnormality is detected at timing t0, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 except for the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration) are executed at the time of the error. However, in the operation at the time of error, the light quantity of the LED is kept constant, and the sound volume from the speaker is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the amount of light of the members that are executing the operation at the time of error do not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to receive the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is not reflected in the sound volume and light intensity during execution. ing. Regarding such internally adjusted volume and light intensity, when returning to normal operation, it will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity. It will happen. Note that the effect display device 1600 may change the amount of light when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

When an abnormality is detected at timing t0, an error signal is output from the external terminal board to the hall computer so that the hall side can recognize that an abnormality has been detected. .

Next, at timing tz1 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the power is turned on at timing ts, a determination timing is provided to determine whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated prior to timing tz1. That is, at the determination timing, it is determined whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated between timing ts and timing tz1. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch at timing tx3 prior to timing tz1, the normal state shifts to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1. After the main control board 1310 shifts to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state A, even if the player operates the handle 160, the game ball cannot be shot to the game area 5a, and even if there is a starting prize, the variable display of the special symbols can be started. It is in a state where normal games cannot be played. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by the normal game being played. In the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, to end the reuse confirmation state A. period.

Further, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, some of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are used to perform the operation at the time of reuse confirmation. Specifically, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, the effect display device 1600 displays an error message "You can confirm the operation of the frame decoration member" as a display at the time of reuse confirmation. is added to and displayed. The speaker outputs a voice saying "You can check the operation of the frame decoration member" as a reuse confirmation sound. On the other hand, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame), the lamp B (the LED 2 outside the frame), and the speaker continue to operate in the event of an error. Further, such an operation at the time of confirmation of reuse is assumed to continue until the reuse confirmation state A is ended by operating the reuse permission switch again at timing tz4, which will be described later.

In addition, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, the external terminal board outputs a reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer to indicate that the hall side has shifted to the reuse confirmation state A. making it comprehensible. Output of such a reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer ends when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, and the reuse confirmation state A ends. The output of the reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the reuse confirmation state A is completed. As a result, even if the transition period to the reuse confirmation state A is short, it is possible to make it easier for the hall side to notice that the transition to the reuse confirmation state A has occurred.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, an open switch signal for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, A door frame open command for notifying the opening of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510 . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t1. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are executing the operation at the time of the error are made to continue the operation at the time of the error even after the timing t1. As for the members that are performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing t1. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame open command, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the opening operation. It is not executed and does not change before and after timing t1. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by execution of the opening operation.

At timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, the external terminal board outputs a door frame open signal to the hall computer, and the door frame 3 is opened on the hall side. It is possible to grasp that there was a release of Output of such a door frame open signal to the hall computer ends when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. Thus, even if the opening and closing time of the door frame 3 is short, the opening of the door frame 3 can be easily noticed on the hall side.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, at timing tx, when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are executing the operation at the time of the error are made to continue the operation at the time of the error even after the timing tx. As for the members that are performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing tx. Also, when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 despite the removal of the frame decoration member is executed when the frame decoration is not connected. It is assumed that there is no change before and after the timing t1. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, the removal of the frame decoration member is permitted without executing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment/detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by the operation performed when the frame decoration is not connected. .

Although the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up or flashes after the frame decoration member has been removed. It has become something that will never happen.

Next, after the frame decoration member is removed, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is output to the main control board 1310. is input to the main control MPU 1310a, and a door frame closing command for transmitting closing of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t2. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are executing the operation at the time of the error are made to continue the operation at the time of the error even after the timing t2. As for the members that are performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not operate at the time of closing. It is not executed and does not change before and after timing t2. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operating state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by execution of the closing operation.

Next, at timing t3, when the door frame 3 is opened again in order to attach the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A. Approximately the same behavior is shown. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again while the frame decoration member is being removed, the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the operation at the time of opening, and the timing t3 is reached. It is assumed that there is no change before and after . For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are executing the operation at the time of the error are made to continue the operation at the time of the error even after the timing t3. The member that is performing the operation continues the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after the timing t3.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, when the frame decoration member is attached again in the reuse confirmation state A at timing ty, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing ty. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are executing the operation at the time of the error are made to continue the operation at the time of the error even after the timing ty, so that the operation at the time of the error is continued after the timing ty. As for the member that is performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing ty.

Also, at the timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the reuse confirmation state A, the supply of electricity to the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) is started by attaching the frame decoration member. However, as for the operation, the operation at the time of error is executed instead of the normal operation. As described above in detail, in the error operation of the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), the LED lights or blinks in a single color with high luminance as error light emission. However, when the frame decoration member is attached, there are problems such as a situation where the wiring to lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is disconnected and electricity is not supplied, or a situation where lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) itself breaks down. is generated, the operation at the time of the error is not executed, and the LED does not light up or blink.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is operated before the judgment timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A. After the frame decoration member is removed, the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, thereby restarting the operation at the time of error. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state A, by attaching the frame decoration member, it is allowed to restart the operation at the time of error with the frame decoration member as the target. Then, on condition that the reuse permission switch is operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A. When the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in reuse confirmation state A, , it is possible to check whether the attached (detachable) frame decoration member normally emits error light.

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing t4, the case where the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing t2. Approximately the same behavior is shown. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed after the frame decoration member is attached, the closing operation of the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is not performed. assumed to be unchanged. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the member that is executing the error operation continues even after timing t4. As for the members that are performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing t4.

Next, when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 after the door frame 3 is closed, the reuse confirmation state A is terminated and the state shifts to the normal state. Here, the normal state is the same as the normal state before shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at timing t1. That is, after the main control board 1310 shifts to the normal state at the timing tz4, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. In addition, for the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, after the transition to the normal state at the timing tz4, the error operation based on the error state is executed. As described above, in this example, the reuse confirmation state A can be returned to the normal state after the operation state of the frame decoration member is confirmed while the frame decoration member as a reusable part is removed. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game (main game) proceeds normally after confirming the operation state of the frame decoration member.

In this example, after the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, so that the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) performs the error operation. However, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the error operation is not executed, and by operating the operation permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, the lamp A (frame decoration LED ) may perform the action on error. As for the operation permission switch, it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and is an operation unit for work that cannot be touched by the player (a button that enables switching between the ON state and the OFF state, and a button that enables switching between the ON state and the ON state by inserting a key). It is provided on the main control board 1310 as a key switch or the like that enables switching between the OFF state and the OFF state. Also, at the timing ty, after the frame decoration member is attached again and before the operation permission switch is operated, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up as a standby operation, for example. state or turned off. As a result, confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be arbitrarily started by the hall manager by operating the operation permission switch, and convenience can be improved.

The operation permission switch described above is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also function as the operation permission switch. In other words, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the error operation is not executed, and by operating the reuse permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is turned on. You may make it perform the operation|movement at the time of an error. In addition, the reuse permission switch may be configured so that one option can be selected from a plurality of options. and an option to perform a time action.

Further, in this example, after the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, at timing ty, the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open, so that the lamp A (frame decoration LED) is turned on. Although the error operation is executed, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open, the error operation is not executed, and at timing t2, the door frame 3 is opened. By closing the door frame 3, the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) may perform the error operation. At this time, at timing ty, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is on standby from when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open to when the door frame 3 is closed. As the operation of the time, for example, the LED is turned on or turned off. As a result, the hall manager can arbitrarily start checking the operation state of the frame decoration member by closing the door frame 3, thereby improving convenience.

Also, in this example, at timing tz4, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed before the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state. At timing tz4, when the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. Even before the reuse confirmation state is ended by operating the reuse permission switch again, by operating the game permission switch, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. You may make it shift to a possible period. As for the game permission switch, it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and is an operation unit for work that cannot be touched by the player (a button that allows switching between the ON state and the OFF state, and a button that switches between the ON state and the ON state by inserting a key). It is provided on the main control board 1310 as a key switch or the like that enables switching between the OFF state and the OFF state. As a result, during the period in which the game (main game) can be progressed on the side of the main control board 1310, when the handle 160 is operated, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when there is a starting prize. In addition, it is possible to start the variable display of the special symbols by performing a lottery, and when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols, the jackpot game can be started, so that the game (main game ) can be started at will by the hall manager by operating the game permission switch, thereby improving convenience.

The above-described game permission switch is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also function as the game permission switch. In other words, by operating the reuse permission switch at a timing before ending the reuse confirmation state by operating the reuse permission switch again, it is possible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. You may make it shift to a certain period. In addition, the reuse permission switch may be configured so that one option can be selected from a plurality of options. and an option for transitioning to a period in which the game can be progressed.

[Setting value change and confirmation display]
In the following example, as the pachinko machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, a setting function is added to the pachinko machine 1 of each embodiment described above. The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a set value related to the probability of winning or losing, and by performing a predetermined operation when the power is turned on, the set value can be changed or the set value can be displayed for confirmation. making it possible.

First, the main control board 1310 is connected to the frame control board 740 provided in the body frame 4 for two-way communication, and is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 for output signals only in one direction. there is In addition, the main control board 1310 receives detection signals of the game ball B from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2011, the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2402, and the like. be. In addition, the main control board 1310 outputs a drive signal to a starting opening solenoid 2412 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004, an attacker solenoid 2414 for opening and closing the big winning opening 2005, and the like.

The main control board 1310 also includes a setting key switch having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, a setting change permission lamp that can emit a single color (for example, red), and a setting change permission lamp with a decimal point. A setting display composed of a single 7-segment LED display (with so-called dots) (one 7-segment LED) is arranged. In addition, it is possible to display the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 on the setting display.

For the setting key switch, the setting key switch is positioned at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch (for example, the longitudinal direction of the insertion opening having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). position), the setting key switch is turned off as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key made of metal can be inserted into the insertion port and can be pulled out from the insertion port. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 is detached from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the member of the other pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) arranged opposite to the island facility of the game hall and the setting key do not interfere with each other. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch is adopted so as not to damage it.

In addition, the setting key switch can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on. 1310 is input to the main control MPU. In addition, the setting key cylinder rotates counterclockwise so that the setting key switch is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch is turned OFF). The setting key switch can be turned off by turning it 60 degrees toward the direction and turning it off. This OFF signal is input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 .

Next, the setting key switches and setting display on the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the setting of the set value will be explained, and the case of displaying the confirmation of the current set value will be explained. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

First, when changing the settings of the set values, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on. It is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch is turned ON in and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 of the frame control board 740 is operated. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then check the outer frame 2. After the body frame 4 is opened, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. The setting key is turned ON, and then the power switch 751 is operated while operating the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 .

A person who changes the setting values must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Then, insert a metal setting key into the opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, rotate the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise, and turn on the setting key. Turn the switch to the setting key ON. Subsequently, while operating the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 , the power switch 751 is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, ON signals of the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key are input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU stores the current set value (set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch is turned ON) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. current value) is displayed on the setting display, and the setting change permission lamp is switched from off to on.

When a person who changes the set value presses the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 741 of the frame control board 740, the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 741 is transmitted from the frame control board 740 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to Each time the person who changes the setting of the set value presses the push operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current set value by one based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 741. When it reaches the set value 6, which is the maximum value, it returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, and is again incremented by 1, and the set value is displayed on the setting display.

When determining a set value, a person who changes the setting value must move the setting key switch from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (i.e., turn the setting key switch OFF). 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction so as to return to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder) and turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the set value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU, and changes the setting display from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed. , and switch the setting change permission lamp from lighting to turning off.

A person who changes the setting value pulls out the metal setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch, closes the body frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value. complete the work of

Next, when confirming and displaying the set values currently set, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (momentary power failure that occurs momentarily), The body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on. Therefore, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch is turned ON and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 is not operated. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the setting values that are currently set must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Perform the work of opening the body frame 4 from the frame 2, then insert a metal setting key into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch and turn it clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it ON. By doing so, the setting key switch is turned on, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 751 without subsequently operating the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 .

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Next, a metal setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it ON. By doing so, the setting key switch is turned on. Subsequently, the power switch 751 is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 . As a result, a setting key ON signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU stores the current set value (set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch is turned ON) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. current value) is displayed on the setting display. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp is extinguished is maintained, and even if the person who confirms and displays the set value currently set presses the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741, the pressing operation is supported. setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display.

A person who confirms and displays the set values currently set, after completing the confirmation of the set values currently set, turns the setting key switch to the initial position, which is the original position, from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON. (That is, the turning position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch is turned off) is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU switches from the state of displaying the setting value to the state of not displaying the setting value on the setting display.

The person who confirms and displays the set values currently set pulls out the metal setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, Complete the task of displaying the confirmation of the setting value currently set.

In addition, as described above, the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" is, as described above, when the power is restored when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). The body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on. Therefore, it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 is operated. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key of the setting key switch A setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on, whereby the setting key is turned on. Must not be manipulated. In this way, the "predetermined set value change permission condition" and the "predetermined set value display permission condition" are set when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (instantaneous power failure). When power is restored at the time of power recovery, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned ON by turning it 60 degrees and turning it ON. When the power is restored after a power failure (an instantaneous In the setting value display permission condition, ``when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs instantaneously), the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 is operated. It is different in that it is a requirement that the

Here, if the set value is briefly explained, the "set value" in this example can change the probability that the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a big hit. , and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (that is, the number of game balls that the player can obtain can be increased) is set in advance. In this embodiment, the set values are set value 1 (jackpot probability is 1/319), set value 2 (jackpot probability is 1/310), set value 3 (jackpot probability is 1/300), set value 4 (jackpot probability probability is 1/290), set value 5 (big hit probability is 1/280), and set value 6 (big hit probability is 1/270) are prepared in advance. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to is set in advance. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won). or select various tables used for various distribution ratios associated with set values (for example, a distribution table that defines the distribution time, a block that manages the driving of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, etc.) do. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Various tables used for various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and various tables used for various sorting rates are set so that at least some values differ from each other. The value may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. can be anything. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

In this example, setting values 1 to 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and each of them is set to have a different jackpot probability. are the same (the jackpot probabilities are the same). For example, six setting values can be set, but all setting values can be set to one step. In this way, when all the setting values are set value 1, even if a state in which the setting values can be changed occurs in the setting change state and the setting values are switched, the setting value is changed from the setting value 1 to the setting value It is only switched to 1, and the set value remains unchanged. Also, even if the setting value is confirmed in the setting confirmation state, the setting value 1 is always confirmed. Here, as the pachinko machine 1, there are a pachinko machine 1 that requires a change in setting value (change in the probability of a big win) and a pachinko machine 1 that does not require a change in the setting value (change in the probability of a big win). By enabling all set values to be the same, the control program can be used in common regardless of whether the set values need to be changed. In addition, for the pachinko machine 1 that does not require changing the set value (change of the jackpot probability), it is possible to set only one set value without allowing six set values to be set while leaving the configuration of the setting key switch and the like. , and the setting in one step may be achieved.

In addition, during the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value, the main control board 1310 is in a state where the game cannot be played, for example, when the game ball B enters various ball entrances such as the first start opening 2003 Even if it does, it controls to the state where the variable display of the pattern is not started. In addition, the frame control board 740 is in a state in which game balls cannot be circulated, for example, a state in which the game balls B are not shot from the ball shooting unit 550 even if the handle 160 is operated, and a settlement by operating the counting button switch 180. Processing, ball launching unit 550, ball lifting unit 650, ball feeding unit 700, etc. are stopped, and control is performed so that game balls B in circulation ball path unit 600 are not managed (monitored). . As a result, if the game or ball circulation progresses while the setting value is being changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, there is a possibility that the work related to the setting value will be hindered, but by stopping the game or ball circulation It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring. After that, when the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are completed and the setting value is not displayed on the setting display, the state where the game and ball circulation can be performed, for example, the handle 160 is operated. By doing so, the state where the game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550, the state where the game ball B enters various ball entrances such as the first start port 2003, and the state where the symbol variation display is started, and counting Settlement processing by operating the button switch 180, various controls such as the ball launching unit 550, the ball lifting unit 650, the ball transporting unit 700, etc. are started, and the game balls B in the circulation ball path unit 600 are managed (monitored). state will be controlled.

However, during the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value, the state in which the ball circulation can be performed, for example, the state in which the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 by operating the handle 160, and the counting Settlement processing by operating the button switch 180, various controls such as the ball launching unit 550, the ball lifting unit 650, the ball transporting unit 700, etc. are started, and the game balls B in the circulation ball path unit 600 are managed (monitored). state can be controlled. As a result, the game can be started quickly after the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value are completed.

In addition to displaying the set values as described above, the setting indicator also checks the contents of the RAM built into itself when the main control MPU recovers power to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control-side power-off processing has not ended normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the RAM built in itself (or is not possible), an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display as an error indication.

In addition to the setting display, the main control board 1310 is provided with a base monitor in which six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) are arranged in a row. Here, it is possible to display the set values of the pachinko machine 1 on the setting display, while on the base monitor, the number of payouts for the number of entered balls (the prize for the number of entered balls, which will be described in detail later) Although it is possible to display the calculation result of the ratio of the number of balls), only the base monitor is provided, and the function to display the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered may be combined with the function of displaying . In such a case, on the base monitor, the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state) or in a state in which the setting value is displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state). While the set value is displayed, the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed in a state excluding the change permission state and the confirmation display state. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 741 is provided on the frame control board 740, and the operation-related parts (setting key switches, setting display, RAM clear switch 741) related to setting values are provided on the frame control board 740. They are arranged separately from the main control board 1310 . By doing so, it is necessary to operate multiple operation units provided at different positions to change the setting value, and compared to the case where the operation related parts related to the setting value are collectively arranged on one board. This is effective in terms of countermeasures against fraud because it can make it difficult to change settings illegally. It should be noted that the RAM clear switch 741 may be provided not on the frame control board 740 but on the main control board 1310 on which the setting key switches and the setting display are provided. Although the anti-fraud measures are less effective than , the arrangement makes it easier to recognize various operation parts and confirmation parts at a glance, and it is possible to improve the operation efficiency when setting and confirming setting values.

Manage Base Monitor
Next, the base monitor of the pachinko machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be explained. In the other embodiment described above, the base monitor (four 7-segment LED ), the base monitor of the fourth embodiment counts the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) that increase as the game progresses, and calculates the base value (ratio of the number of payouts to the number of ) shall be displayed. The basic configuration of the base monitor, such as having four 7-segment LEDs, is common to other embodiments.

A game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls B can enter. Among the plurality of ball entrances, the prize winning opening to which prize balls are paid out (to which the number of prize balls is given) is always open so as to be able to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. A plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001, a normal winning opening 2002 provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and always open to accept the game ball B, and the game area 5a A first starting port 2003 which is provided at a predetermined position and is always open to accept the game ball B, and a lottery result of a normal pattern drawn when the game ball B is received in the normal prize winning port 2002. Accordingly, the game ball B to the second start port 2004 that can accept the game ball B and the first special symbol or the second start port 2004 that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2003 It is provided with a big prize winning port 2005 and a prize winning port 2006 which enable the reception of the game ball B according to the second special symbol drawn by receiving the lottery. In addition, the game ball B entering the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, It is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 3002 , the first starting opening sensor 2101 , the second starting opening sensor 2401 , the big winning opening sensor 2402 and the accessory winning opening sensor 2501 .

In addition, among the plurality of ball entrances, as an out port for collecting the game balls B that did not enter the prize winning port, it is provided at the most downstream in the game area 5a, and is always capable of receiving the game balls B. An out port 2020, which is open and discharges the received game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning it, is provided upstream of the out port 2020 in the game area 5a, and can receive the game ball B. It is provided with two sub-out ports 2021 which are always open to and discharge the received game balls B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning them.

Then, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out-port 2020 and the sub-out-port 2021 among the plurality of ball entrances is discharged to the out ball receiving port 600a in the circulation ball path unit 600, By being received by the out-ball socket 600a, it flows through the out-ball passage 601 and is detected (counted) by the out-ball sensor 605 one by one. On the other hand, the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are accepted by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. The game ball B discharged downward from the circulating ball path unit 600 is discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b, received by the safe ball receiving port 600b, flows through the safe ball passage 602, and is detected by the safe ball sensor 606. detected (counted) one by one.

The main control MPU controls the number of game balls B entered (the number of balls entered) (the number of balls entered) provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, that is, the number of balls in the game area 5a. The number of game balls B discharged from is counted. Specifically, the number of game balls B detected by the safe ball sensor 606 and the number of game balls B entered into the winning hole are calculated as the number of game balls B entering the winning hole from which prize balls are paid out. The number of game balls B that entered the out hole for collecting the game balls B that did not hit the ball, and the number of game balls B detected by the out ball sensor 605 are counted as the number of entering balls. there is

Further, the main control MPU counts the number of game balls B paid out (given) as prize balls (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) by entering the winning hole. Specifically, a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, 3 for entering the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004) corresponding to the winning hole to which the prize ball is paid out by entering the ball , etc.), and when detected by a detection sensor corresponding to a winning opening from which winning balls are to be paid out, the predetermined number of game balls B is counted. , is counted as the number of payouts. For example, when the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, ten game balls B are put out, and when the game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2002, one game ball B is put out, and the first game ball B is put out. When the game ball B enters the starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, 3 game balls B are put out, and when the game ball B enters the big winning port 2005 or the accessory winning port 2006, 10 balls. game balls B are put out, and the number of game balls B put out as prize balls is counted as the number of payouts. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since real balls are not paid out, the number of game balls B paid out (given) as prize balls is added to the number of balls possessed by the player. and

The main control MPU then calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, stores the calculation result as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor. A formula for calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is "base value=(number of payouts/number of incoming balls)×100". For example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is too large, there is a possibility that only the winning holes from which prize balls are paid out are being entered. , By monitoring the information displayed on the base monitor, it is possible to ascertain whether or not the ball has been entered into the winning hole due to fraudulent acts.

In addition, in this example, among the plurality of game states, only when the low probability non-time saving state, the number of balls B (entered ball number) that entered the ball entrance (winning mouth, out mouth), The number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of payouts) is counted and reflected in the display on the base monitor. Here, in the low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state) and high-probability time-saving state (probability variable state), since the second start port 2004 is frequently entered, the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls also increases. , the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls tends to increase. In other words, whether or not the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls increases depends on the period of time when it is in a low probability time saving state (time saving state) or a high probability time saving state (variable state), but such By excluding the period, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls can be kept within a certain range if there is no fraudulent activity.

In addition, the base monitor displays the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls. The number of game balls B paid out as balls (number of payouts) may be displayed.

As for the base monitor, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered, and the calculation result is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM and displayed on the base monitor. there is Also, the information stored in the specific area of the RAM (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls put in) is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch 741 is operated when the power is turned on. However, regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, each time the number of game balls B entered into the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) reaches 60000 balls, a new entry will be made. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls that has become old is stored as a history up to a predetermined number of calculation results. In the specification of such a base monitor, for example, from the point of time when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is newly calculated, the number of game balls B entering at least the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) Until the number of balls reaches 1000, execution of the display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of incoming balls may be restricted. This is because immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, the number of entering balls continues to enter the winning hole, which is the target for paying out winning balls, and the number of entering balls is lower than the standard value. The ratio of the number of payouts is high, or the number of payouts to the number of balls that are paid out is lower than the standard value due to a situation where the balls do not enter the winning opening that is the target of paying out the prize balls. Bias is more likely to occur. For this reason, immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, it is determined that the information obtained from the base monitor information command is unreliable, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed. should not be executed.

Further, in this example, the game balls B collected in the out port 2020 or the sub-out port 2021 are detected (counted) by the out ball sensor 605 provided on the main body frame 4 side, and the general winning port 2001 and the normal winning port are detected (counted). 2002, the first starting hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, the big winning hole 2005, and the prize winning hole 2006. For the game ball B entering the winning hole, a safe ball sensor provided on the body frame 4 side Although detected (counted) by 606, these sensors may be provided on the game board 5 side. In addition, a passage is formed so that the game balls B collected in the out port 2020 or the sub-out port 2021 and the game balls B entering various prize-winning ports merge, and one sensor is provided on the passage. , and the number of game balls B entering the entrance (winning entrance, out exit) may be counted by detection of the one sensor.

Also, in this example, the base monitor is arranged on the main control board 1310 , but may be arranged on the frame control board 740 . In such a case, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, and the calculation result is displayed on the base monitor via the frame control board 740, but another method is used. may be used. For example, at a predetermined timing, the main control board 1310 transmits commands relating to the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts to the frame control board 740, and the frame control board 740 calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls. , the calculation result may be displayed on the base monitor. In this way, by taking part of the control related to the base monitor on the frame control board 740 side, the control load on the main control board 1310 side can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) is calculated using the out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606. Another configuration may be used to calculate the number of game balls B that have entered a ball entry opening (award winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls). For example, when calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls on the side of the frame control board 740, the number of game balls shot into the game area 5a is calculated based on the detection result of the shooting subtraction sensor 554 in the ball shooting unit 550. Calculate and replace this numerical value (the number of game balls shot into the game area 5a) with "the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered)" can be It should be noted that the "number of game balls shot into the game area" referred to here preferably excludes the number of balls treated as foul balls as described above. In this case, the calculation of the base value on the side of the frame control board 740 can be exemplified by "base value=(number of payouts/number of game balls shot into the game area)×100)". In this way, the control load on the main control board 1310 side can also be reduced by having the frame control board 740 side take part of the control related to the base monitor.

[New mode of game management]
In recent years, even if a large number of balls are awarded to a fraudulent player due to a new fraudulent act, etc., it cannot be distinguished from a case where a large number of balls are awarded to a player due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing. In some cases, it is difficult for the game hall side to prompt the illegal player to stop the game, and there arises a problem that it is difficult to manage the game machine. In addition, there are cases where a large number of balls are awarded to legitimate players due to biased odds of winning and losing, and problems such as so-called "addiction" have also arisen. Therefore, as one embodiment to solve these problems, the purpose is to optimize the management of gaming machines that provide a large number of paid balls. A new game control that newly extracts "the amount of output balls" and reflects it in the progress of the game will be described below. For convenience of explanation, the pachinko machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be explained below.

(Extraction of number of balls paid out for a predetermined period)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the main control board 1310 can calculate and derive the following two types of payout ball amount A and payout ball amount B as the payout ball amount (difference ball amount) for a predetermined period.

First, the main control MPU counts the number of game balls B that are shot into the game area 5a by operating the handle 160 (the number of shots). Specifically, when the handle 160 is operated to shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a, the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b. The number of game balls B (excluding the number of balls treated as foul balls) is counted as the "number of shots" for calculating the amounts A and B of the balls. The number of shots may be counted by another method. For example, a sensor other than the shot subtraction sensor 554 may be installed to detect and count game balls that have entered the game area 5a.

Further, the main control MPU counts the number of game balls B paid out (given) as prize balls (number of payouts) by entering the winning hole. Specifically, a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, entering the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004 corresponding to the winning hole to which the prize ball is paid out (given) by entering the ball 3, etc.) is predetermined to be paid out (given), and when the detection sensor corresponding to the winning hole to which the winning ball is paid out is detected by the entering ball, the predetermined number The number of game balls B is counted as the "number of payouts (number of awards)" for calculation of the amount of balls A and B. For example, when the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, 15 game balls B are put out, and when the game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2002, one game ball B is put out, and the first game ball B is put out. When the game ball B enters the starting hole 2003 or the second starting hole 2004, 3 game balls B are put out, and when the game ball B enters the big winning hole 2005 or the accessory winning hole 2006, 15 balls. are put out, and the number of game balls B put out as prize balls is counted as the number of payouts for calculation of the amounts A and B of put-out balls. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since real balls are not paid out, the number of game balls B given as the number of prize balls is counted as the number of payouts for calculating the amounts A and B of the balls put out. .

Then, the main control MPU sets a predetermined clear condition (to be described later) separately from the normal number of owned balls (the number of owned balls displayed on the number of owned balls display section 140) that can be settled by the player by operating the counting button switch 180. The difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts is calculated within the period until is established, and the calculation result can be stored in the "stop counter" as a value for calculating the amount of balls A and B. . The value of the stopping counter is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. As a formula for calculating the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts, "the value of the stop counter=the number of payouts−the number of shots" can be used. For example, when the value of the stop counter is too large, it can be grasped that a large number of balls are provided from the pachinko machine 1 regardless of whether or not the players are replaced. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of balls normally possessed by the player A is subtracted by shooting the game balls B, and the number of balls normally possessed by the player A is added by paying out the prize balls. It manages the increase or decrease in the normal number of balls held by Person A (the number of balls held displayed in the number of held balls display section 140), but as described above, the value of the stop counter is different from the normal number of held balls. It is separately stored (stored) in a specific area of the RAM and managed by the main control MPU. The value of this stopping counter is also decremented when the game ball B is fired and incremented when the prize ball is paid out. ing. However, the value of the stop counter cannot be settled by the player by operating the counting button switch 180, and in this respect it is greatly different from the number of balls held normally. In the following, the payout ball amounts A and B calculated using the value of the stop counter will be described.

The ball output amount A is the value at the time when the stopping counter reaches the maximum within the period until a predetermined clear condition described later is satisfied, and the value for stopping within the period until the predetermined clear condition described later is satisfied. This is the difference from the value when the counter is the lowest. In other words, the main control MPU memorizes the transition of such a stop counter, calculates the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the stop counter, updates the calculation result as the amount A of balls paid out as needed, and incorporates stored in a specific area of the RAM. The ball-out amount A is cleared when a predetermined clearing condition, which will be described later, is satisfied, and is reset to 0, which is the initial value. It should be noted that the clearing conditions described later do not include "settlement of balls in possession (operation of count button switch 180)", and even if player B starts the game after player A's settlement of accounts, the clearing conditions is not satisfied, the amount A of balls put out by both the player A and the player B in the process of progressing the game is stored (maintained) in a cumulative manner. As a result, not only when one gaming machine gives an unexpectedly large number of balls to one player, but also when one gaming machine gives an unexpectedly large number of balls to a plurality of players It is also possible to grasp the case where

The ball output B is the difference between a predetermined initial value of 0 and the value at the point when the stopping counter reaches the maximum during a period until a predetermined clear condition (to be described later) is satisfied. That is, the main control MPU memorizes the transition of such a stopping counter, and starts from the initial value of 0, and the difference in value when the stopping counter reaches the maximum (i.e., a difference of 0 or more) ) is calculated, and the result of the calculation is updated as needed as the amount of paid balls B, and stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. Then, the ball-out amount B is cleared when a predetermined clearing condition, which will be described later, is satisfied, and is reset to 0, which is the initial value. It should be noted that the clearing conditions described later do not include "settlement of balls in possession (operation of count button switch 180)", and even if player B starts the game after player A's settlement of accounts, the clearing conditions is not established, the amount B of balls put out by both the player A and the player B in the process of progressing the game is accumulated and stored (maintained). As a result, not only when one gaming machine gives an unexpectedly large number of balls to one player, but also when one gaming machine gives an unexpectedly large number of balls to a plurality of players It is also possible to grasp the case where

FIG. 124 is a time chart showing an example of the amount of payout calculated with respect to transition of the stop counter. Here, a specific example will be described in which the stopping counter starts from the initial value of 0, and the stopping counter repeatedly increases and decreases as the game is played.

As shown in FIG. 124, the stopping counter starts from the initial value of 0, decreases from the initial value of 0 to -2000, increases to 3000, decreases to -4000, and reaches 2000. It continues to increase, decrease to -500, increase to 4000, and decrease to 2500. In such a case, 8000 is calculated and stored as the difference between 4000 when the stop counter reaches its maximum and -4000 when the stop counter reaches its minimum. retained. On the other hand, the ball amount B is calculated from 0, which is the initial value of the stop counter, as 4000 when the stop counter reaches the maximum, and is stored as 4000. FIG. Note that the maximum difference between the payout ball amounts A and B is stored and held, and the stored and held payout ball amounts A and B are updated by newly calculating the maximum difference value.

In this example, the main control board 1310 calculates two types of payout ball amounts A and B as the payout amount. It is configured so that it can be freely selected. Specifically, an operation switch A that can be operated by the hall manager is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310). It is assumed that either A or the amount of balls to be put out B is selected. On the other hand, with respect to the ball output amount, considering the control load of the main control board 1310, only one of the ball output amount A and the ball output amount B may be adopted and mounted. Further, the operation of the operation switch A for selecting either the amount of played balls A or the amount of played balls B may be determined only when the power is turned on, and which one is selected may be reflected. It may also be possible to determine at any time afterward and reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time).

Further, while the calculation of the base value described above calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, the calculation of the amount of balls put out calculates the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. , these calculation programs are executed by separate programs in the main control MPU. As a result, even if the calculation of the base value is not performed normally, it does not affect the calculation of the amount of played balls, and the base value and the amount of played balls are initialized, including the predetermined clear conditions described later. , etc., can be easily controlled separately. In addition, it becomes easy to rewrite the calculation program for the amount of balls put out for each model. Become.

Also, the above-mentioned base value is displayed on the base monitor, but unlike the base value, it is desirable not to display the amount of balls paid out at all times from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. However, when the hall manager performs a predetermined operation (for example, when a dedicated switch is operated to turn on the power, etc.), the amount of balls output is displayed on a predetermined display (for example, the effect display device 1600, or may be displayed on a dedicated display device provided in the

Also, in this example, the amount of balls to be played is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, but another method may be used. For example, a stop counter is provided on the side of the frame control board 740, and at a predetermined timing, commands related to the number of shots and the number of payouts are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740. The frame control board 740: A stop counter may be managed, and the number of balls to be paid out may be calculated from the increase or decrease of the stop counter. Further, a stop counter is provided on the main control board 1310 side, and a command related to the stop counter is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 at a predetermined timing, and the frame control board 740 receives the command. The number of balls to be played may be calculated from the increase/decrease of the stop counter. In addition, from the viewpoint of reducing the control load, while the ball output amount is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, the base value described above may be calculated on the frame control board 740 side. . In addition, from the viewpoint of reducing the control load, the normal number of balls held and the management of the counter for stopping may be calculated separately on the main control board 1310 side and the frame control board 740 side.

In addition, the amount of balls released is calculated using a stopping counter, which is the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. Alternatively, the "difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out" may be stored in a stop counter to calculate the number of balls to be played. In other words, the "number of shots" for calculating the amounts of balls A and B should be replaced with "the number of game balls B that have entered the entrance (winning entrance, out exit)" (number of entering balls). can be In this case, the value of the stop counter can be exemplified by "the value of the stop counter=the number of payouts−the number of balls entered". In this way, as the value to be stored in the stop counter, the number of incoming balls used in the base value described above is used, and the main control board 1310 side can be shared with a part of the control related to the base monitor. The control load on the control board 1310 side can be reduced. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a game ball shot into the game area 5a by operating the handle 160 enters a ball entrance (a prize winning opening, an exit opening) and is discharged to the outside. As a result, regardless of whether the number of shots or the number of hits is used, the amount of balls put out will show substantially the same value.

(Restrictions on games)
The pachinko machine 1 of this example executes one of the following three types of restriction patterns when the above-mentioned amount of paid balls (the amount of paid balls A, B) reaches a specific value, and the main control board 1310 stops. In this state, it is possible to restrict the game. It should be noted that, when the amount of output balls reaches a specific value, the subsequent game restrictions are executed, but the game state (high probability state, time saving state, information on the number of reservations stored, information on changing symbols ) are retained without being cleared. As will be described later in detail, the game-related information is configured so that it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the information when the power is turned off and then turned on again.

First, the specific value is configured so that one of the predetermined 50,000 shots, 80,000 shots, and 100,000 shots can be selected. Specifically, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), an operation switch B that can be operated by the hall manager is provided. Either 80,000 shots or 100,000 shots is selected. Here, the lower the value selected as the specific value, the higher the possibility of executing the game restriction, and the higher the value selected as the specific value, the lower the possibility of executing the game restriction. As for the specific value, only one of them may be adopted from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM storing various processing programs. Further, the specific value to be selected may be commonly used for the payout ball amounts A and B, or may be separately selectable for the payout ball amounts A and B. The operation of the operation switch B for selecting one of a plurality of specific values may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or may be determined at any time after the power is turned on. It may reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time).

In addition, as for the restriction pattern, any one of restriction patterns 1 to 3 having different game restriction contents can be selected. Specifically, an operation switch C that can be operated by the hall manager is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), and by operating the operation switch C, the restriction pattern 1 1 to 3 are to be selected. As for the restriction pattern, only one of the restriction patterns 1 to 3 may be adopted from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM storing various processing programs. Further, the operation of the operation switch C for selecting one of a plurality of restriction patterns may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or may be determined at any time after the power is turned on. It may reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time).

Restriction pattern 1 is a pattern in which, when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value, a stoppage state accompanied by "game stop" is performed. When the game is "stopped", when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, but even if there is a starting win, no game ball is paid out and no special symbol is displayed. The variable display cannot be started, and a normal game cannot be played. That is, although the shooting of game balls is permitted, the game (main game) being executed on the side of the main control board 1310 is forcibly stopped, and the game (main game) on the side of the main control board 1310 proceeds. It will be in a state where it cannot be done.

Restriction pattern 2 is a pattern in which a stop state accompanied by "shooting stop" is performed when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. In the case of "shooting stop", when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball cannot be shot to the game area 5a. However, if there is a starting prize, game balls will be paid out, a variable display of special symbols can be started, and a normal game can be played. In other words, since the launching of game balls is not permitted, there is no start-up winning in the first place, and although it is allowed to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side during execution, after that, the main game The game (main game) on the control board 1310 side cannot proceed. A specific situation of "shooting stop" is a state in which the frame control board 740 cannot circulate the game balls. Stop various controls such as the ball launching unit 550, the ball lifting unit 650, the ball feeding unit 700, etc., and control to a state where the game balls B in the circulation ball path unit 600 are not managed (monitored). can be exemplified.

Restriction pattern 3 is a pattern in which, when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value, a stop state accompanied by both "game stop" and "fire stop" is performed. In the case of "game stop" and "shooting stop", when the player operates the handle 160, not only can the game ball not be shot to the game area 5a, but even if there is a starting prize, the game ball is not paid out, variable display of special symbols cannot be started, and a normal game cannot be played. That is, the shooting of game balls is not permitted, and the game (main game) being executed on the side of the main control board 1310 is also forcibly stopped, and the game (main game) on the side of the main control board 1310 proceeds. It will be in a state where it cannot be done.

In this example, in any of the restriction patterns 1 to 3, the settlement processing by operating the counting button switch 180 is enabled (allowed) without being disabled. As a result, even if the player cannot continue playing the game due to any of the restriction patterns 1 to 3, the counting button switch 180 can be operated to execute the settlement process, which confuses the player. can be deterred. However, in consideration of the fact that a large number of balls are awarded to the cheater due to cheating, etc., in any of the restriction patterns 1 to 3, the settlement process by operating the count button switch 180 is also impossible. You can leave it as In such a case, after it is confirmed that there is no fraudulent act, the operation of the count button switch 180 is enabled by a predetermined operation (for example, operation of a preliminary count button switch provided on the frame control board 740) by the hall manager. It is conceivable to make it possible (make the settlement process executable).

Further, while any one of the above-described restriction patterns 1 to 3 is being applied, the "stop state" is forcibly continued until a clear condition, which will be described later, is satisfied. Clear conditions, which will be described later, exclude conditions that are met by some operation on the part of the player, and cannot be canceled by the player. As described above, even if it is permitted for the player to operate the count button switch 180 to execute the settlement process in the stop state, the count button switch 180 is operated to cancel the settlement process. Even after execution, the stop state continues. In addition, if the stoppage state continues after the settlement process is executed, the normal number of balls possessed by the new player is added and the number of game balls is increased so that the new player cannot start the game. It is preferable to disable data transfer from the rental device 8 . Furthermore, in such a case, the display mode of the number-of-balls display unit 140 is controlled in a non-acceptable mode corresponding to the stopping state, such as "EEEE", so that a new player is notified that the game cannot be started. It is possible to let them know.

In this example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, a stop state is generated in which the game is restricted based on one of the restriction patterns 1 to 3, so that a large number of balls are put out due to cheating or the like. Fraud can be prevented without being given to a fraudulent person. Also, a large number of balls will not be awarded to a regular player due to a biased probability of winning or losing, and problems such as so-called "addiction" can be prevented from occurring. As a result, it is possible to optimize the management of a gaming machine that provides a large number of paid balls.

In addition, in this example, the patterns of "game stop", "shooting stop", and both "game stop" and "shooting stop" are listed as the contents of game restrictions to be restricted in the stop state. Any restriction content that makes it difficult to increase the number of paid balls after the amount reaches a specific value is not limited to these methods. For example, as another restriction content, the time (fluctuation time) required for the variable display of all special symbols to be started after the amount of balls paid out reaches a specific value is set to be long, and even if there is a start winning, the special symbols It may take a long time until the result of the variable display is displayed, and the progress of the game may be restricted. In addition, in a gaming machine that controls either a low-probability state or a high-probability state in which the winning probability is higher than the low-probability state as the game state, regardless of whether or not the winning state should be set to the high-probability state, After the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the control may be forcibly performed only to the low probability state, thereby restricting the progress of the game. In these cases, it takes longer to win than before the game is restricted. can. In addition, after the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 or the like does not perform "game stop" or "stop firing", but gives a special notification corresponding to the amount of paid balls reaching a specific value. You may make it perform using the production|presentation apparatus. In such a case, the progress of the effect is hindered by the special notification, and the desire to continue the game can be reduced. Also, when performing special notification, it is preferable to display a special image on the entire screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the conventional effect display cannot be seen at all. is greatly hindered, and the desire to continue playing can be more effectively reduced.

Further, in this example, even if the above-described amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the information on the amount of paid balls is not erased and held in memory until a clear condition, which will be described later, is satisfied. Note that after the ball payout amount reaches a specific value, the updating of the ball payout amounts A and B (updating the stop counter) may be forcibly stopped, or the calculation may be continued without stopping. You can do it. Also, for example, if the update of the ball output amounts A and B (update of the counter for stopping) is continued without stopping, the game ball may be dropped due to some trouble or fraud when the above-mentioned "shooting stop" is not performed. It is conceivable that the firing counter acted in a downward trend. In such a case, there is a possibility that the stopping counter will fall below a specific value, but in consideration of that, once the amount of balls issued reaches the specific value, the stopping counter will decrease after that. It is preferable to continue the stop state without terminating it even if a problem occurs.

(clearing the amount of balls and game restrictions)
The pachinko machine 1 of this example is designed to generate a stop state when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. With regard to "restrictions on games in the middle", it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the game hall side when the power is turned off and then turned on again.

First, the following five types of power-on patterns are provided as modes of power-on operation. Power-on pattern 1 is a case in which the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch are not turned ON when the power is turned on (when the power switch 751 is operated), and the power is turned off without changing the setting value or displaying the confirmation. The current game state (game information) is maintained without being initialized.

Power-on pattern 2 is a case where the RAM clear switch 741 is turned ON and the setting key switch is not turned ON when the power is turned on. RAM clear is executed to initialize the built-in RAM, and the game state when the power is cut off is initialized. However, information about setting values is not initialized by RAM clear.

Power-on pattern 3 is a case where the RAM clear switch 741 is turned on and the setting key switch is turned on when the power is turned on. RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM, and the game state at the time of power shutdown is initialized. However, information about setting values is not initialized by RAM clear.

Power-on pattern 4 is a case where the setting key switch is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on. maintained without being altered.

Power-on pattern 5 is the same as power-on pattern 1 in that the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch are not turned ON when the power is turned on, but the ball removal switch 742 provided on the frame control board 740 is turned on. This is a case where the ON operation is performed, and the game state (game information) at the time of power shutdown is maintained without changing the set value or performing confirmation display. Here, when the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON, the ball removal process described above is executed and the enclosed game ball B is discharged from the ball removal opening 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). can be pulled out. When the power is turned on, if the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch are turned ON and the ball removal switch 742 is also turned ON, the setting value is changed, the confirmation display is performed, and the RAM is cleared. Instead, the ball removal process described above is preferentially executed.

As described above, in the power-on patterns 2 and 3 among the power-on patterns 1 to 5, the game state at the time of power-off is initialized by turning ON the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on. , power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, by not turning on the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained. In addition, the game state at the time of power shutdown includes, in addition to game states such as a high probability state, a time saving state, and a winning game state, presence or absence of variable display of special symbols being executed, presence or absence of suspension, and the like. When the power is turned on with power-on patterns 2 and 3, the game state at the time of power-off is not restored, but when the power is turned on with power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, the game state at the time of power-off is restored. will return.

FIG. 125 is a table showing conditions for clearing "amount of balls to be paid out calculated before start of stop state" and "restrictions on games during stop state". In this example, one of the restriction clear pattern tables 1 to 3 with different clear conditions can be selected. Specifically, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), a restriction clear pattern selection switch that can be operated by the hall manager is provided, and by operating the restriction clear pattern selection switch , one of the restriction clear pattern tables 1 to 3 is selected. As for the limit clear pattern table, only one of the limit clear pattern tables 1 to 3 may be used from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM for storing various processing programs. Further, the operation of the restriction clear pattern selection switch when selecting one of the restriction clear pattern tables 1 to 3 may be determined only when the power is turned on, and the selected one may be reflected, or may be performed at any time after the power is turned on. It may be determined and reflected at any time (in real time) which one is selected. 125 also includes the "counter value for stopping". In this example, when the amount of played balls is maintained, the value of the stopping counter is also maintained. , the value of the stop counter is also cleared when the number of balls put out is cleared.

FIG. 125(A) shows the limit clear pattern table 1 selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "1". In the power-on pattern 1, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "amount of balls output before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state" We also maintain the "restrictions on playing in the middle". When such a stop state is maintained, a state in which the game (main game) cannot be progressed on the main control board 1310 side is maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light for a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. The sound "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stopping is maintained" is output, and the message image "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stopping is maintained" is also displayed on the effect display device 1600. there is

In the power-on pattern 2, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized). And "restrictions on games during stoppage state" are also cleared (initialized). Specifically, when the game is restricted by the above-described restriction pattern 1, the game is "stopped". If the game is restricted by the pattern 3, the game is "stopped", but by clearing the stop state, the "shooting stop" is released, and if the game is restricted by the restriction pattern 3 , "Stop game" and "Stop firing", but by clearing the stop state, "Stop playing" and "Stop firing" are released, and in either case, the main control board 1310 side It is possible to restart the game (main game). In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state have been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state has been cleared."

In the power-on pattern 3, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized). And "restrictions on games during stoppage state" are also cleared (initialized). In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state have been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state has been cleared."

In the power-on pattern 4, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "the amount of balls released before the start of the stop state and after the start of the stop state" We also maintain the "restrictions on playing in the middle". In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light for a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state have been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state has been cleared."

In the power-on pattern 5, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "the amount of balls released before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state" We also maintain the "restrictions on playing in the middle". In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. The sound "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stopping is maintained" is output, and the message image "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stopping is maintained" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. there is

As described above, in the restriction clear pattern table 1, only when the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) like the power-on patterns 2 and 3 when the power is turned on, "before the stop state starts or , the number of balls released after the start of the stop state” and “restrictions on games during the stop state” are cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, "outgoing before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state is performed. The amount of balls” and “restrictions on games during the stop state” are maintained. According to this, not only the game state at the time of power cutoff, but also the amount of balls paid out and the state of stoppage are cleared collectively, so that the operation error of the hall manager regarding whether or not to clear the amount of balls paid out and the stoppage state can be eliminated. can be made less likely to occur.

FIG. 125B shows the limit clear pattern table 2 selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "2". Of the power-on patterns 1-5, the power-on patterns 2-5 are the same as in the restriction clear pattern table 1, so the description thereof is omitted.

In the power-on pattern 1, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "amount of balls output before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state" The "restrictions on games inside" have been cleared (initialized). In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light for a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state have been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state has been cleared."

In this way, the power-on pattern 1 is the same as the power-on pattern 4 in that the game state at the time of power-off is maintained when the power is turned on. This pattern is different from the power-on pattern 4 in that the "number of balls to be put out after the start" and the "restrictions on the game during the stop state" are cleared (initialized). In other words, in the limit clear pattern table 2, when the power is turned on, if the gaming state at the time of the power shutdown is maintained, as in the power-on pattern 1, "before the stop state starts or after the stop state starts Clear (initialize) the amount of balls released” and “Restrictions on games during the stop state”, or, as in power-on pattern 4, “Before the stop state starts or after the start state The hall manager can select whether to maintain the "ball amount" and "restrictions on games during stoppage state". In addition, in the power-on pattern 1, since it is not necessary to turn on the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch when the power is turned on, it is possible to perform the following operations: The clearing (initialization) of "the amount of balls" and "restrictions on games during the stop state" can be performed by a hall manager with a simple operation.

FIG. 125(C) shows the limit clear pattern table 3 selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "3". Of the power-on patterns 1 to 5, the power-on patterns 1 and 3 to 5 are the same as in the restriction clear pattern table 1, so the description thereof is omitted.

In the power-on pattern 2, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized). And the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. The sound "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stopping is maintained" is output, and the message image "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stopping is maintained" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. there is

In this way, the power-on pattern 2 is the same as the power-on pattern 3 in that the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) when the power is turned on, but "before the stop state starts or , and the power-on pattern 3 in that the amount of balls to be put out after the start of the stop state and the "restrictions on the game during the stop state" are maintained. In other words, in the limit clear pattern table 3, when the power is turned on, when the game state at the time of power shutdown is cleared (initialized), like the power-on pattern 2, "before the stop state starts or when the stop state is Either maintain the amount of balls put out after the start and the "restrictions on the game during the stop state", or, as in power-on pattern 3, "before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state." The hall manager can select whether to clear (initialize) the "number of balls" and "restrictions on games during the stop state". In addition, only when the power is turned on with power-on pattern 3, "the amount of balls to be played before the start of the stop state and after the start of the stop state" and "restrictions on games during the stop state" are cleared (initialized ), and for power-on pattern 3, it is necessary to turn on both the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch when the power is turned on. The clearing (initialization) of the amount of balls to be put out after the start of the stop state and the "restrictions on games during the stop state" can be performed under the strict control of the hall manager.

In this example, the ball output amount can be cleared (initialized) by turning on the power according to a predetermined power-on pattern. It may be possible to clear (initialize) each time. According to this, if the amount of paid balls is not cleared (initialized) every unit time (for example, 3 hours), the amount of paid balls can be determined by the previous player in terms of whether or not the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. However, by clearing (initializing) the amount of balls released every unit time (for example, 3 hours), the amount of balls played by the previous player will be affected. It is possible to make it difficult for the amount of balls to be put out to affect the next player.

(Details of game restrictions)
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value, the main control board 1310 starts a stop state in which the game is restricted, the details of which will be described below.

FIG. 126 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value and the game is restricted. Here, at timing t1, when it is determined that the amount of paid balls has reached a specific value due to the payout of prize balls entered into the winning hole, it is determined that the stopping flag has been turned ON, and the game shifts to the stopping state. It describes the case. In addition, when the amount of output balls reaches a specific value, a restriction pattern 3 is selected in which both "game stop" and "shooting stop" are performed as restrictions on the game in the stop state. In addition, after shifting to the stop state, when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, as a power turn-on pattern, the game state at the time of the power cut is maintained, and the number of balls paid out and the stop state are maintained as a power turn-on pattern. have selected.

As shown in FIG. 126, before the timing t1, the game state on the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state (not the stop state), and the game on the main control board 1310 side (main game) is controlled. It is a period during which progress can be made. In other words, in the normal state, which is not the stopping state, when there is a start winning, the variable display of the special symbols can be started, and when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols, the jackpot game is started. You can play normal games that you can.

Also, effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of game board 5), lamp C (function display unit 1400 The LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate of (1), the speaker, and the movable body perform their normal operations before timing t1. The lamp C is controlled by the main control board 1310, while the other members are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Here, regarding the lamp C, a plurality of LEDs in the function display unit 1400 are lit up or blinked as the game progresses. On the other hand, for the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, when the variable display of special symbols is not executed, a standby effect (for example, a demonstration When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command, the variation performance (performance based on the variation pattern) is performed. I am trying to perform the corresponding action. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display including the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, ready-to-win effect), and the lamps A and B execute the effect display device. The LED lights up and blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600, and the speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. A predetermined action is performed in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

In addition, the external terminal board can output predetermined signals to the hall computer, and by receiving these signals at the hall computer, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 can also be grasped on the hall side. ing. For example, when there is a start winning, when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols and the jackpot game is being executed, when an abnormality is detected, etc., the corresponding signals are output. .

Also, before the timing t1, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a.

Also, on the base monitor, the number of game balls B entered into the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of payouts) are displayed. is counted, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is calculated, and the calculation result is displayed as a base value.

Further, before the timing t1, it is possible to put out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when it is detected that the ball has entered the winning hole, and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls is equal to the number of game balls. Only the number of balls possessed by the player is added, and the stopping counter can be updated.

Next, at timing tx before timing t1, when the main control board 1310 detects that the ball has entered the winning hole, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some members such as the effect display device 1600 to Pre-announced actions are being performed. Here, regarding the ball entering the winning hole at the timing tx, it is the ball entering the winning hole one before the ball entering the winning hole at the timing t1, and based on the ball entering the winning hole at the timing tx Even if the number of prize balls is paid out (the number of prize balls is given), the amount of the paid balls does not reach a specific value, but when the number of prize balls is paid out based on the balls entering the winning hole at timing t1 (the number of prize balls is given), the amount of output balls reaches a specific value.

The performance display device 1600 and the lamp B are used to execute the operation at the time of prior notification. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "remaining until the game limit + XX shots" as the advance notice display, and the lamp B flashes the LED as the advance notice light emission. ing. This allows the player to know that the game will be restricted in the near future. In addition, since only some members such as the effect display device 1600 are used for the operation at the time of advance notification, the variable effect based on the winning can be executed, and the interest in the variable effect is lost. never

In this example, the operation at the time of advance notice is executed at the time when the ball enters the winning hole at the timing t1 one ball before the ball enters the winning hole. The operation at the time of prior notification may be executed at any timing, such as execution from the fifth previous ball entry), as long as it is timing before reaching a specific value. Further, before the ball enters the winning hole at the timing t1, the operation at the time of prior notification may be executed every time the ball enters the game a predetermined number of times or the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, as another example of the operation at the time of advance notification, for a certain period of time after turning on the power, or at all times after turning on the power, based on the amount of balls released at that time, "Remaining until game limit + XX shots" is displayed. , the player may be made to recognize a guideline until the stop state is reached.

Next, at timing t1, it is determined that the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value due to the payout of the winning balls based on the winning balls entering the winning opening, but the main control board 1310 detects the entering of the winning opening. Occasionally, the stop flag is turned ON, and the game shifts to a "stop state" in which restriction pattern 3 is applied to perform both "game stop" and "fire stop". In the stopped state, the game ball cannot be shot, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be advanced. That is, in the stopping state, no variable display of special symbols or a big hit game is executed, and even if there is a start winning, variable display of special symbols is not newly started.

Also, the effect display device 1600, the lamps A to C, the speaker, and the movable body perform the operation when progress is impossible after a predetermined time has passed from the timing t1. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "game is restricted" as a progress impossibility display, and the lamps A and B light up or blink in a single color as light emission for progress impossibility. , and the speaker outputs a sound indicating that the player is unable to progress, saying, "Since the daily ball limit has been reached, the game is restricted."

In addition, in the lamp C, as the function display unit 1400, the status indicator, the normal symbol indicator, the normal reservation indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special number indicator, the second special symbol indicator, the second A special hold number indicator, a round indicator, etc. are provided, but all of their LEDs are lit. However, as another example, the function display unit 1400 may be provided with an LED dedicated to notification of stopping, and in the stopped state, the LED dedicated to notification of stopping may be lit and the other LEDs may be turned off.

Further, the movable body is put into an inoperable state in which it does not move after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t1. For example, if the movable body is in motion before a predetermined time elapses from timing t1, the movable body is forcibly stopped in the middle of its motion when the predetermined time elapses from timing t1. However, as another example, the movable body may be stopped after returning the movable body that is not in the initial position to the initial position after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t1. As a result, even if the movable body is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the predetermined time has passed since the timing t1, the movable body will return to the initial position after the predetermined time has passed since the timing t1. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to miss the progress impossibility display being executed by the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

In this example, at the timing t1, the state is shifted to the stop state. When running. This means that if a ball enters the winning hole at timing t1, the prize ball will be paid out based on the ball entering the winning hole after that, but a predetermined time has passed since timing t1. By executing the operation when the progress is impossible later, the operation when the progress is impossible can be executed after waiting for the payout of the prize balls based on the balls entering the prize winning opening, thereby preventing the occurrence of a sense of incongruity. be able to. However, the effect display device 1600, the lamps A to C, the speaker, and the movable body may be configured to perform the operation when progress is impossible from the timing t1.

Further, the external terminal board outputs a security signal while shifting to the stop state at the timing t1. This security signal is output when an abnormality is detected, when the setting value is changed, or when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. . In other words, in the stop state, the security signal is forcibly output even though an abnormality is not being detected, the setting value is not being changed, or the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation. As a result, a security signal is output to the hall computer in the halted state, and the hall side can recognize that the state has shifted to the halted state.

Also, in this example, at timing t1, the state is shifted to the stop state and the security signal is output. terminates the security signal that is being output and does not output a new security signal, and continues to output the security signal that is being output. This prevents the hall side from erroneously recognizing that the abnormality detection has ended.

In this example, the external terminal board outputs various signals to the hall computer, in addition to the security signal, to inform the gaming state, the ball entering the winning hole, the payout of the winning ball, and the like. At timing t1, when such various signals are being output, the security signal is output after the various signals being output are terminated. As a result, the hole side can surely grasp that the game has shifted to the stopping state.

Also, at timing t1, after the game has shifted to the stop state, when the player operates the handle 160, it is disabled to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a. However, in this example, the limit pattern 3, in which both "game stop" and "shooting stop" are performed when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, is selected. When the limit pattern 1 is selected in which only "game stop" is performed and "shooting stop" is not performed when reaching , making it possible to shoot a game ball to the game area 5a.

In addition, at timing t1, after the transition to the stop state, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (award winning entrance, out entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls The number of balls of B (the number of payouts) is not counted. In other words, it is disabled to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, and is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. However, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) is counted, and by calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering, It may be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Further, at timing t1, after shifting to the stop state, it is possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls for those that have detected balls entering the prize winning opening before timing t1. , the number of game balls paid out as prize balls can be added to the number of balls possessed by the player. As a result, the player can obtain prize balls for the number of game balls until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value. On the other hand, at the timing t1, after the transition to the stop state, if a ball entering the winning hole is detected, the predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player will be reduced. cannot be added. However, at timing t1, after the transition to the stop state, it may be configured not to detect the ball entering the winning hole. Even if a ball enters the box, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls and are not added to the number of balls possessed by the player.

In this example, when the ball entering the winning hole is detected at timing t1, the winning ball based on the entering ball into the winning hole is not paid out, but the ball entering the winning hole is not paid out. It is determined that the number of balls to be paid out reaches a specific value due to the payout of the prize balls based on the above, and the state is shifted to the stop state, but another method may be adopted. For example, at timing t1, when a ball entering a winning hole is detected, the payout of prize balls based on the entering ball into the winning hole is completed without transitioning to the stop state, and the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. When it reaches it, you may make it transfer to a stopping state. As a result, it is possible to wait until the payout of the prize balls based on the balls entering the prize winning opening is completed and the amount of payout balls reaches a specific value, and then it is possible to shift to the stop state, thereby preventing the occurrence of a sense of discomfort. can.

Further, in this example, at the timing t1, after shifting to the stopping state, no abnormality determination is made as to whether or not an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration has been detected. In other words, even if an abnormality is detected after shifting to the stop state, the abnormality is not notified to the outside because the abnormality determination is not performed. In this way, after shifting to the stop state, by executing the action when progress is impossible corresponding to the stop state with priority over the abnormality notification, the player and the hall manager are notified of the transition to the stop state. You can make sure that you know what you are doing. However, at timing t1, after transitioning to the stopping state, it may be configured not to detect an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration. There is no anomaly notification to inform the outside that the anomaly has occurred.

Next, after shifting to the stopping state, the power is turned off at timing t2, and the power is turned on again at timing t3. In this example, after shifting to the stop state, when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, as a power-on pattern, the game state at the time of the power shutdown is maintained, and the number of balls released and the stop state are maintained. You are choosing a pattern. For this reason, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the normal state (non-stopped state) is not restored, and the stopped state is maintained similarly to timings t1 and t2.

In addition, the mode of the stop state is maintained in the same mode as the stop state at timings t1 to t2. That is, at the timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the stop state is maintained, so, for example, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed, and the effect is displayed. The device 1600, the lamps A to C, the speaker, and the movable body are performing actions when the vehicle is unable to advance. As a result, when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, the player and the hall manager can be made to recognize that the game has returned to the stop state. In this example, although illustration is omitted, before executing the action when progress is impossible, the speaker outputs a sound saying "The amount of balls put out and the state of stopping is maintained." is temporarily displayed with a message image that says, "The amount of balls put out and the stoppage state are maintained." Further, the LEDs of the lamps A to C emit light in an emission color corresponding to the power-on pattern selected when the power is turned on again. In addition, the period during which the speaker outputs the sound "The amount of balls put out and the state of stopping is maintained." may be omitted.

At time t3, after the power is turned on again, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "game is restricted" as a progress impossibility display. , the message content may be changed. In addition, at the same time as or prior to the display of "Playing restricted", the display of "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stoppage is maintained" is displayed, and the power is turned on on the next business day In this case, it is possible to make the hall manager recognize that it is a continuation from the previous day, and it is possible to suppress confusion of the hall manager in a situation where the game is suddenly stopped.

Also, when the power is turned on normally, instead of turning on the power again after turning off the power in the stopped state, a normal power-on sound is output from the speaker. However, in this example, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the voice output from the speaker is "The amount of balls played and the state of stopping is maintained." is not output. In this way, when the game returns to the stop state when the power is turned on again, the sound "The number of balls played and the stop state is maintained" is output from the speaker, prior to the normal power-on sound. As a result, the player and the hall manager can be made to surely recognize that the game has returned to the stop state.

In addition, when the power is normally turned on, not when the power is turned off after the power is turned off in the stop state, an initial operation is performed to check whether the movable body operates normally and to align the movable body with the initial position. ing. However, in this example, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the movable body has stopped its operation and has not performed its initial operation. In this way, when the movable body returns to the stopped state when the power is turned on again, the movable body does not perform the initial operation, so that it can be recognized that the movable body has not been returned to the normal state (the non-stopped state). However, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the initial operation may be performed for the movable body.

FIG. 127 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game restriction is lifted when the power is turned on again after the power has been turned off. In the above explanation, after the number of balls put out reaches a specific value and the state shifts to the stop state, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the gaming state at the time of power off is maintained, as well as the number of balls put out and the state of the stop state. However, in this example, when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off, the game state at the time of power cut-off is cleared (initialized), and the number of balls output and the stop state are also cleared (initialized). Specifically, after moving to the stop state, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the power-on pattern is to clear (initialize) the game state at the time of power shutdown, and clear (initialize) the game state at the time of power shutdown, as well as the number of balls and the stop state. (initialization) is selected. Here, the description is the same as the above until the power is turned off at timing t2, so the power is turned on again at timing t3.

As shown in FIG. 127, after the power is turned off in the stop state, the power is turned on again at the timing t3. is cleared (initialized), and a power-on pattern is selected that clears (initializes) the amount of balls paid out and the stop state. Therefore, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the stop flag is turned OFF and the stop state is not maintained. It is controlled to a return waiting state that waits for return to (a state that is not in the stop state). In the return waiting state, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed. That is, in the stopping state, no variable display of special symbols or a big hit game is executed, and even if there is a start winning, variable display of special symbols is not newly started.

Also, the effect display device 1600, the lamps A to C, the speaker, and the movable body are performing the return operation at the timing t3. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "The amount of balls put out and the stop state has been cleared." The LED will emit light in the color corresponding to the selected power-on pattern, and the speaker will output the sound "The amount of balls thrown and the stop state has been cleared" as the return sound. there is

At time t3, the movable body is in an inoperable state in which it does not move.

In addition, the security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing t3, as in the case of shifting to the stop state. In other words, in the recovery waiting state, a forced output state is set in which a security signal is forcibly output even though an abnormality is not being detected, setting values are not being changed, and setting values are not being displayed for confirmation. As a result, a security signal is output to the hole computer in the return waiting state, and the hole side can grasp the possibility that the stop state will be canceled.

Further, at timing t3, after shifting to the return waiting state, when the player operates the handle 160, it is disabled to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a. In addition, as described above in detail, when the amount of output balls reaches a specific value, only "game stop" is performed, and if the restriction pattern 1 in which "shooting stop" is not performed is selected, the game will be stopped. After the transition, when the player operates the handle 160, it is possible to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a. After the shift, when the player operates the handle 160, it is disabled to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a.

In addition, at timing t3, after the transition to the return waiting state, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (award winning entrance, out entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls The number of balls B (number of payouts) is not counted. In other words, it is disabled to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, and is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Further, at timing t3, after the transition to the return waiting state, even if a ball entering the winning hole is detected, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls possessed by the player is determined. cannot be added to However, after shifting to the return waiting state at timing t3, it may be configured not to detect the ball entering the winning hole. Even if a ball enters the mouth, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls and are not added to the number of balls possessed by the player.

Next, at timing t4 after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from timing t3, the return waiting state is terminated, and the game state on the main control board 1310 side shifts to the normal state (not the stop state). ing. Here, the mode of the normal state (non-stopped state) is the same mode as the normal state (non-stopped state) before timing t1, and the restrictions on the game in the stopped state are released. The timing for ending the return waiting state is not limited to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t3, and may be triggered by the hall manager performing a predetermined restart operation. As the restart operation, for example, if the power-on operation at timing t3 is power-on pattern 3, the setting key switch is returned to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch) counterclockwise. For example, turning the switch 60 degrees toward the direction to perform the OFF operation can be exemplified.

Note that at timing t4, after returning to the normal state (not the stop state), the lamps A to C perform initial light emission when the power is turned on. Note that the lamps A to C perform initial light emission when the power is turned on, not when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off in the stop state, but when the power is turned on normally.

Also, at timing t4, after returning to the normal state (the state that is not the stop state), the normal power-on sound is output from the speaker. Note that the normal power-on sound is output from the speaker when the power is normally turned on, not when the power is turned off after the power is turned off in the stop state.

Also, at timing t4, after returning to the normal state (the state that is not the stopping state), the movable body performs an initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to match the initial position. ing. It should be noted that the initial operation of the movable body is similarly performed when the power is normally turned on, not when the power is turned off after the power is turned off in the stop state. However, as for the movable body, the initial action may be performed at timing t3 before returning to the normal state (state that is not in the stop state). As a result, the initial action of the movable body can be completed before returning to the normal state (state that is not in the stop state), and immediately after the return, the action corresponding to the variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern) can be performed. It can be carried out.

In addition, the external terminal board outputs a security signal at timing t3 in the return waiting state. Although it has recovered, it continues to output the security signal. As a result, even if the return waiting state ends in a short period of time, the output of the security signal to the hall computer is continued, so that the hall side can grasp the possibility that the stop state will be canceled.

In this example, the power is turned on again at timing t3 after the power is turned off in the stopped state. state). However, as another example, when the power is turned on again after the power has been cut off, the normal state (not the halted state) may be restored without the return waiting state. As a result, when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, the game can be started immediately after that.

(Example of effect when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value during a jackpot game or during a variable display of special symbols)
In this example, the game is restricted when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value. Out of the ball-out amount, the ball-out amount A is the difference between the value when the stop counter reaches its maximum value and the value when the stop-counter reaches its minimum value. is the difference between the predetermined initial value of 0 and the value at the time when the counter for stopping is the maximum, and both involve the value at the time when the number of balls held is the maximum. ing. Then, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 during a big hit game, or when a special symbol is displayed during variable display or non-variable display, a winning hole other than the big winning hole 2005 (general winning hole 2001, normal winning hole 2002) , first starting port 2003, second starting port 2004), the number of payouts increases due to the payout of prize balls and the counter for stopping increases, so at the timing of those balls entering, When it is determined that the number of paid balls reaches a specific value, the game is restricted. Here, first, a specific effect example in the case where the amount of output balls reaches a specific value at the timing when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 during the big winning game will be explained, and then, during the variable display of the special symbol. Next, a specific effect example in the case where the amount of output balls reaches a specific value at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning hole 2001 will be described.

FIG. 128 is a specific example of effect when the amount of output balls reaches a specific value at the timing when the game ball enters the big winning hole during the big winning game. In this example, 80000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and restriction pattern 1 or restriction pattern 3 is selected as the "restriction pattern" described above. That is, if the limit pattern 1 is set, when the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value (80000 shots), it will be in a stop state with "game stop", and if the limit pattern 3 is set, the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value (80,000 shots), it becomes a stop state accompanied by "game stop" and "fire stop". In addition, in this example, when the lottery result of the special pattern results in a big win, a 10-round big win game of opening and closing the big win port 2005 and the prize winning port 2006 is given, and after the big win game ends, the high probability state is reached. shall be given.

As shown in FIG. 128(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, and in the central region of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are varied. displaying. Here, depending on the lottery result of the special pattern, or by accepting the game ball B into the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, etc., during the "Renso mode" in which the high probability state continues , "777" is displayed as a decorative design stop design in the central region of the effect display device 1600 by winning the lottery result of the special design. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative design is performed, but since the lottery result of the special design is a win, "O" is displayed as the stop design of the second decorative design. are doing. In addition, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, even though the game ball entered the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, the reserved display is displayed only for the amount of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, in the lower right area of the performance display device 1600, a message of "Renso mode" indicating that the "Renso mode" is being displayed, and the game area 5a on the right side of the performance display device 1600 during the jackpot game. A "right-handed" arrow is displayed to instruct the user to aim for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2005 provided in the .

As shown in FIG. 128(B), at the start of the jackpot game, the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" Along with starting to open and close the object winning opening 2006, it is informed that the game ball should aim to enter the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 128(C), during the execution of the jackpot game, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device 1600, and the central area of the effect display device 1600 displays "Renso Mode". Inside, the total number of prize balls paid out by the game balls entering the big prize opening 2005 is displayed. Here, "3R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "18,000 GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

In this example, the main control board 1310 side determines the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value before the game is restricted when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. A pre-flag is set to ON when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 where the number of remaining balls is "+1500 shots", and ON information of the pre-flag is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. I'm trying to send it to the side. Then, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the ON information of the advance flag is received, and the operation at the time of the advance notice is continued until the amount of output balls reaches a specific value (until the number of remaining balls becomes 0). running It should be noted that the amount of balls to be paid out is calculated on the side of the main control board 1310 based on the stopping counter, which is the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. In other words, regarding the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the number of remaining balls increases as the number of shots increases, and the number of remaining balls decreases as the number of payouts increases. In addition, regarding the operation at the time of advance notice, a predetermined number before the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value (in this example, the number of balls remaining until the amount of paid balls reaches the specific value is After the amount of paid balls reaches 78500), the game is continuously executed until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, so that the player does not miss the information on the restriction of the game.

Further, in this example, once the advance notice is given, even if the number of balls remaining until the ball output reaches the specific value after that exceeds a predetermined value (remaining 1500 shots), the advance notice is given. The notification is continued without ending until the amount of balls issued reaches a specific value. Specifically, after the ON information of the advance flag is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 side, only the number of shots increases, and the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls output reaches a specific value is a predetermined number ( The remaining 1500 shots) is exceeded, the main control board 1310 side does not turn off the pre-flag but keeps it on. As a result, when the number of remaining balls reaches a state of 1500 shots until the amount of balls output reaches a specific value, the number of remaining balls exceeds 1500 shots, and then the number of remaining balls reaches a state of 1500 shots again. Even in such a case, the switching of the advance flag does not occur frequently on the main control board 1310 side, and the ON information of the advance flag is suppressed from being repeatedly transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, thereby reducing the control burden and control complexity. can be avoided.

As shown in FIG. 128(D), when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 during a jackpot game, and the number of balls remaining until the amount of output balls reaches a specific value becomes "+1500". , in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as an operation at the time of advance notice, an advance notice display of "remaining +1500 shots until game limit" is displayed to convey the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value. there is Here, the final "10R" is displayed as the number of current rounds, and "18800 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. In the performance display device 1600, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area, and the game ball entered the big winning opening 2005 during the "Renso mode" is displayed in the upper area continuously from before the advance notice display is displayed. The total number of prize balls paid out by hitting the ball, the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern in the upper right area, and the arrow of "right hit" in the lower right area are displayed, but "remaining +1500 shots until game limit". Although the advance notice display is displayed so as to overlap the background image, it is displayed so as not to overlap the important information display regarding the jackpot game being executed. Specifically, in this example, the ``current round number'', ``total number of prize balls'', and ``right-handed arrow'' are important information displays that should be recognized by the player. The advance notification display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display. In addition, regarding these information displays, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized without the player not being able to see the information due to overlapping, at least a part of the information display should be overlapped with the advance notice display. may Thus, it is possible to smoothly play the game during the big win game without missing the information display regarding the big win game being executed. As for the movable body, it is possible to move toward the front of the effect display device 1600 during the jackpot game. You may make it operate|move a movable body toward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 128(E), at the end of the jackpot game, in the center area of the effect display device 1600, the message "Continue Mode! It conveys that the state will continue (that the "Renso mode" will continue). Here, even at the end of the jackpot game, the advance notice display of "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed as during the jackpot game. Since the display of the message "Continue in Renso mode! (10th time)" is also an important information display that should be recognized by the player, an advance notification display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with such information display. It's like In addition, regarding these information displays, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized without the player not being able to see the information due to overlapping, the advance notice display should overlap at least a part of the information display. may

As shown in FIG. 128(F), during the "Renso mode", when the variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols is executed again, in the center area of the effect display device 1600, Variation display of decorative patterns is performed. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative pattern is performed. Also, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four pending displays are displayed, and it is possible to change the mode of the pending display with a high probability of winning. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the setting adjustment button 204, but during the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light, the adjustment An image corresponding to medium volume and light intensity is displayed. The image corresponding to the sound volume and the amount of light being adjusted is started to be displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of display.

In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols in the "Renso mode", an advance notice display of "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed as in the big win game. In the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in the center area, the variable display of the second decorative pattern is displayed in the upper right area, the message "Renso mode" and the arrow "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right area, and the lower left area is displayed. , and an image corresponding to the volume and light intensity is displayed in the left area. It is displayed so as not to overlap with the important information display related to the variable game. Specifically, in this example, "variable display of decorative patterns", "variable display of second decorative patterns", "message of ``Continuous Mode'', ``arrow of ``right stroke'', ``hold display'', Since the "image corresponding to volume and amount of light" is an important information display that should be recognized by the player, the advance notice display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with these information displays. In addition, regarding these information displays, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized without the player not being able to see the information due to overlapping, the advance notice display should overlap at least a part of the information display. may As a result, it is possible to smoothly play the game during the variable game without missing the information display regarding the variable game being executed. As for the movable body, it is possible to move toward the front of the effect display device 1600 during the variable game. You may make it operate|move a movable body toward. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing during the variable game.

As shown in FIG. 128(G), when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is won again during the "Renso mode", "777" is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the center area of the effect display device 1600. it's shown. Here, too, the advance notification display of "+1500 shots left until game limit" is displayed so as to overlap the background image, but the display of "777", which is a decorative pattern stop pattern (a kind of important information display) are displayed so as not to overlap each other, and the player can visually recognize the display of "777", which is the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIG. 128(H), when starting the big win game again, the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" , and the opening and closing of the accessory winning opening 2006 is started, and it is informed that the game ball should aim to enter the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the jackpot game. At this point in time, the pre-announcement display of "+1500 shots remaining until game limit" is displayed as in the previous jackpot game. Here, too, the advance notification display of “+1500 shots left until game limit” is displayed so as to overlap the background image, but the message “Special bonus! Aim for V!” (a type of important information display) They are displayed so as not to overlap each other, and the player can visually recognize the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!".

As shown in FIG. 128(I), during the execution of the jackpot game, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device 1600, and the central area of the effect display device 1600 displays "Renso mode". Inside, the total number of prize balls paid out by the game balls entering the big prize opening 2005 is displayed. Here, "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19900 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. At this point, the number of balls remaining until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value is reduced due to the payout of prize balls during the jackpot game, and an advance notice display of "remaining +10 shots until game limit" is displayed.

In this example, the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid balls reaches the specific value is monitored before the game is restricted when the amount of paid balls reaches the specific value. When the number of remaining balls becomes "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the opening 2005, the stop flag is turned ON when the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value, and a predetermined number of balls is played. Until the clear condition is met, the game moves to the stop state and performs the action when progress is impossible. Then, at the point of transition to the stop state, the big winning hole 2005 is forcibly closed by stopping (interrupting) the big winning game being executed, and more game balls enter the big winning hole 2005.例文帳に追加You have started restricting your playing without any problems.

As shown in FIG. 128(J), due to the payout of prize balls based on the game balls entering the big prize opening 2005 during the jackpot game, the number of remaining balls until the number of balls to be released reaches a specific value is "+0". At the point of time (at the time of transition to the stop state), in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as an operation at the time of advance notification, the number of remaining balls until the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value is communicated. A pre-notification display of "+0 shots left until the end of the day" is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example). Here, "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19915 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. Then, when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) elapses after the display of the advance notice display of "remaining +0 shots until game limit" is displayed, an image corresponding to the stopping state shown in FIG. 128(K) is displayed.

In this example, the total number of prize balls displayed on the performance display device 1600 and the content of the advance notification display are reflected by the amount of the prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the big winning hole 2005. However, regarding the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display, the total number of prize balls is not the time when the game ball enters the big prize hole 2005 when the amount of balls to be output reaches a specific value. The display is continued until a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the number of prize balls and the details of the advance notice display have been reflected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the information on whether or not the number of paid balls has reached the specific value, and to allow the player to surely recognize the reason for starting the stopping state after that. Also, just before the number of remaining balls until the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value becomes "+0 shots", an advance notification display of "+10 shots remaining until game limit" is displayed. Regarding the prize balls (15 in this example) paid out by the game balls entering, even if the number of prize balls exceeds the number of balls remaining until the number of prize balls reaches a specific value, the excess prize balls ( In this example, 5 pieces) are paid out. As a result, even though the game balls enter the big winning hole 2005, the number of prize balls exceeding a specific value is not paid out, and the player is less likely to be dissatisfied. can be done. However, if it is important to monitor the number of balls to be played from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the number of prize balls exceeding a specific value may not be paid out.

In the above, regarding the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display, the number of prize balls will be reflected in the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display, not when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value. Although the display is continued until the game is played, it may be terminated when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value, and an image corresponding to the stop state may be displayed. In other words, the image shown in FIG. 128(J) may not be displayed, and the process may proceed to the image shown in FIG. 128(K), which will be described later. As a result, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the game shifts to the stopped state, and at the same time, by displaying an image corresponding to the stopped state, it is possible to immediately grasp that the state has shifted to the stopped state. can.

In addition, when the number of balls produced reaches a specific value, the state shifts to the stop state, and the game is restricted. It is preferable that the player cannot see the "right hit" arrow that promotes the shooting of the game ball after being hit, and is erased in this example. Also, under other circumstances, the amount of balls released reaches a specific value while displaying a display that encourages the shooting of game balls (e.g. right-handed display, left-handed display, Aim for V! display, etc.) In this case, at that time, the display prompting the shooting of the game ball is made invisible to the player (erased).

As shown in FIG. 128(K), when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopping state. As an image corresponding to the stop state, a message "Game limit" is displayed, accompanied by "The game is restricted because the limit of 80000 balls per day has been reached.", "Please call a staff member." The checkout button is active." is displayed. The settlement button here means the count button switch 180 for executing settlement processing. In addition, before the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays the current round number, the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern, the total number of prize balls, and advance notice display. , Regarding such information about games, when the message "game limit" is displayed after the number of balls released reaches a specific value, it will not be displayed (not visible), and the message will be displayed on the darkened screen. I am trying to display it. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the number of balls put out has reached a specific value and that the game is restricted, and it is possible to grasp that the game restriction cannot be released without the operation of the hall manager. . Also, it can be understood that the number of balls held by the player can be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180 .

In the above, before the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays the current number of rounds, the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern, the total number of prize balls, and advance notification display. However, when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the information about such a game is executed so that it cannot be recognized at all. However, when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value, part of the game-related information may be made unrecognizable, and other information may be made recognizable. For example, since the total number of prize balls and advance notice display are information on whether or not to execute game restrictions, they are made unrecognizable, and the current number of rounds and the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern are made unrecognizable. may be recognizable. This makes it possible to grasp under what circumstances the amount of paid balls reached the specific value even after the amount of paid balls has reached the specific value.

In this example, in order to satisfy a predetermined clear condition for terminating the stop state, it is necessary to turn on the power again according to a predetermined power-on pattern after the power has been turned off. Here, as the power-on pattern at the time of power-on, when a power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and maintains the number of balls output and the stop state is selected (in this example, in the limit clear pattern table 1 When power-on patterns 1, 4, 5, power-on patterns 4, 5 in the limit clear pattern table 2, and power-on patterns 1, 4, 5 in the limit clear pattern table 3 are selected), the game state at the time of power shutdown is cleared. When a power-on pattern is selected to (initialize) and to clear (initialize) the ball payout amount and the stop state (in this example, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in limit clear pattern table 1, limit clear pattern table 2 If power-on patterns 2 and 3 in , or power-on pattern 3 in the restriction clear pattern table 3) is selected, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, and power-on to clear (initialize) the amount of balls played and the stop state. A case where a pattern is selected (in this example, a case where power-on pattern 1 in the restricted clear pattern table 2 and power-on pattern 2 in the restricted clear pattern table 3 are selected) will be described.

First, after shifting to the stop state, when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off, if a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of the power cut-off, as well as the number of balls output and the stop state, the stop state is selected. 128(K) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. In this example, although illustration is omitted, before displaying the image shown in FIG. The display device 1600 is adapted to temporarily display a message image saying "the amount of balls paid out and the state of stoppage are maintained". Here, the dedicated period for displaying the message image "The amount of balls put out and the state of stopping is maintained" on the effect display device 1600 may be omitted. While omitting the dedicated period in order to make the manager aware of it, the image shown in FIG. may also be displayed.

In addition, after moving to the stop state, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the power-on pattern clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power shutdown, and also clears (initializes) the amount of balls and the stop state. When it is selected, the number of balls to be put out and the stopped state are cleared (initialized), and the restriction on the game as the stopped state is released. Here, when clearing (initializing) the amount of paid balls and the stop state, all information related to calculation of the amount of paid balls, such as the counter for stopping, the number of payouts, and the number of shots, is cleared (initialized). In addition, regarding the information on the remaining jackpot game when it was interrupted at the time of shifting to the stop state and the information on the "Continuous Mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game, after shifting to the stop state or turning off the power However, when the power is turned off and then turned back on, the information on the remaining jackpot game at the time of such interruption and the information on the "Renso mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game are lost. By doing so, it is assumed to start in a low-probability state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128(L), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which the decorative symbols are stopped at the initial symbols.

On the other hand, if you select a power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and clears (initializes) the amount of balls and the stop state when the power is turned off and then turned back on after moving to the stop state. , the amount of balls to be put out and the stopped state are cleared (initialized), so that the restriction on the game as the stopped state is lifted. In addition, regarding the information on the remaining jackpot game when it was interrupted at the time of shifting to the stop state and the information on the "Continuous Mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game, after shifting to the stop state or turning off the power However, even when the power is turned off and then turned back on, the information on the remaining jackpot game at the time of interruption and the information on the "Renso mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game are maintained. , the game is restarted in the state in which it was interrupted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128(L'), the effect display device 1600 returns to display the image related to the "Renso mode" (high probability state), which is the ending period when the final round of the jackpot game ends. I am trying to In addition, if you select a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the amount of balls and the stop state, before returning to the game after turning it back on after turning off the power, a special A return notification (an image and sound to the effect that the game will return to the state before the game restriction) may be performed. This special return notification corresponds to the return display, return light emission, and return sound in the return waiting state from timing t3 to timing t4 in FIG. Cleared.", or displaying a message image saying "The number of balls paid out and the stoppage state are cleared."

FIG. 129 is a specific example of effect in the case where the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value at the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole during the variable display of the special symbols. In this example, 80000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and restriction pattern 1 or restriction pattern 3 is selected as the "restriction pattern" described above. That is, if the limit pattern 1 is set, when the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value (80000 shots), it will be in a stop state with "game stop", and if the limit pattern 3 is set, the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value (80,000 shots), it becomes a stop state accompanied by "game stop" and "fire stop".

As shown in FIG. 129(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (effect based on the variation pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, and in the central region of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols change. displaying. Here, according to the lottery result of the special pattern, or by receiving the game ball B into the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, etc., during the "Renso mode" in which the high probability state continues , "777" is displayed as a decorative design stop design in the central region of the effect display device 1600 by winning the lottery result of the special design. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative design is performed, but since the lottery result of the special design is a win, "O" is displayed as the stop design of the second decorative design. are doing. In addition, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, even though the game ball entered the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, the reserved display is displayed for the amount of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, in the lower right area of the effect display device 1600, a message of "continuous mode" indicating that the "continuous mode" is being displayed, and a game area 5a on the right side of the effect display device 1600 during the jackpot game. A "right hit" arrow is displayed to instruct the user to aim for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2005 provided in the .

As shown in FIG. 129(B), at the start of the jackpot game, the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" Along with starting to open and close the object winning opening 2006, it is informed that the game ball should aim to enter the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 129(C), during execution of the jackpot game, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device 1600, and the central area of the effect display device 1600 displays "Renso Mode". Inside, the total number of prize balls paid out by the game balls entering the big prize opening 2005 is displayed. Here, "3R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "17,500 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

In this example, the main control board 1310 side determines the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value before the game is restricted when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. A pre-flag is set to ON when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 where the number of remaining balls is "+1500 shots", and ON information of the pre-flag is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. I'm trying to send it to the side. Then, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the operation at the time of advance notice is continuously executed until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value after receiving the ON information of the advance flag. It should be noted that the amount of balls to be paid out is calculated on the side of the main control board 1310 based on the stopping counter, which is the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. In other words, regarding the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the number of remaining balls increases as the number of shots increases, and the number of remaining balls decreases as the number of payouts increases. In addition, regarding the operation at the time of advance notice, a predetermined number before the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value (in this example, the number of balls remaining until the amount of paid balls reaches the specific value is After the amount of paid balls reaches 78500), the game is continuously executed until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, so that the player does not miss the information on the restriction of the game.

Further, in this example, once the advance notice is given, even if the number of balls remaining until the ball output reaches the specific value after that falls below a predetermined value (remaining 1500 shots), the advance notice is given. The notification is continued without ending until the amount of balls issued reaches a specific value. Specifically, after the ON information of the advance flag is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 side, only the number of shots increases, and the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls output reaches a specific value is a predetermined number ( 1500 shots remaining), the main control board 1310 side keeps the pre-flag ON without turning it OFF. As a result, when the number of remaining balls reaches a state of 1500 shots until the amount of balls output reaches a specific value, the number of remaining balls falls below 1500 shots, and then the number of remaining balls reaches a state of 1500 shots again. Even in such a case, the switching of the advance flag does not occur frequently on the main control board 1310 side, and the ON information of the advance flag is suppressed from being repeatedly transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, thereby reducing the control burden and control complexity. can be avoided.

As shown in FIG. 129(D), when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 during a jackpot game, and the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls output reaches a specific value becomes "+1500". , in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as an operation at the time of advance notice, an advance notice display of "remaining +1500 shots until game limit" is displayed to convey the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value. there is Here, the final "10R" is displayed as the number of current rounds, and "18800 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. In the performance display device 1600, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area, and the game ball entered the big winning opening 2005 during the "Renso mode" is displayed in the upper area continuously from before the advance notice display is displayed. The total number of prize balls paid out by hitting the ball, the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern in the upper right area, and the arrow of "right hit" in the lower right area are displayed, but "remaining +1500 shots until game limit". Although the advance notice display is displayed so as to overlap the background image, it is displayed so as not to overlap the important information display regarding the jackpot game being executed. Specifically, in this example, the ``current round number'', ``total number of prize balls'', and ``right-handed arrow'' are important information displays that should be recognized by the player. The advance notification display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display. In addition, regarding these information displays, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized without the player not being able to see the information due to overlapping, at least a part of the information display should be overlapped with the advance notice display. may Thus, it is possible to smoothly play the game during the big win game without missing the information display regarding the big win game being executed. As for the movable body, it is possible to move toward the front of the effect display device 1600 during the jackpot game. You may make it operate|move a movable body toward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 129(E), at the end of the jackpot game, the central area of the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Continue Mode! It conveys that the state will continue (that the "Renso mode" will continue). Here, even at the end of the jackpot game, the advance notice display of "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed as during the jackpot game. Since the display of the message "Continue in Renso mode! (10th time)" is also an important information display that should be recognized by the player, an advance notification display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with such information display. It's like In addition, regarding these information displays, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized without the player not being able to see the information due to overlapping, the advance notice display should overlap at least a part of the information display. may

As shown in FIG. 129(F), during the "Renso mode", when the variable effect (the effect based on the variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is executed again, in the center area of the effect display device 1600, Variation display of decorative patterns is performed. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative pattern is performed. In addition, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four pending displays are displayed, and it is possible to change the mode of the pending display with a high probability of winning. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the setting adjustment button 204, but during the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light, the adjustment An image corresponding to medium volume and light intensity is displayed. The image corresponding to the sound volume and the amount of light being adjusted is started to be displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of display.

In addition, during the variable display of the decorative symbols in the "Renso mode", an advance notice display of "+10 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed as in the jackpot game. In the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in the central area, the variable display of the second decorative pattern is displayed in the upper right area, the message "Renso mode" and the arrow "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right area, and the lower left area is displayed. , and an image corresponding to the volume and light intensity is displayed in the left area. It is displayed so as not to overlap with the important information display related to the variable game. Specifically, in this example, "variable display of decorative patterns", "variable display of second decorative patterns", "message of ``Rental mode'', ``arrow of ``right stroke'', ``hold display'', Since the "image corresponding to volume and amount of light" is an important information display that should be recognized by the player, the advance notice display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with these information displays. In addition, regarding these information displays, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized without the player not being able to see the information due to overlapping, at least a part of the information display should be overlapped with the advance notice display. may As a result, it is possible to smoothly play the game during the variable game without missing the information display regarding the variable game being executed. As for the movable body, it is possible to move toward the front of the effect display device 1600 during the variable game. You may make it operate|move a movable body toward. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered during the variable game.

In this example, the number of balls remaining until the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value is monitored before the game is restricted when the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value. When the number of remaining balls becomes "+0 shots" due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the general prize winning opening 2001, the stop flag is turned ON when the amount of payout balls reaches a specific value, Until a predetermined clear condition is satisfied, the game moves to a stop state and performs an action when progress is impossible. Then, at the point of transition to the stop state, the timing of the variable time is stopped (interrupted) so that the variable display of the special symbols being executed does not progress, the game is forced to stop, and the game restriction is started. are doing. Here, the function display unit 1400 in the case of stopping (interrupting) the clocking of the variable time so as not to progress the variable display of the special symbols being executed will be described. In the function display unit 1400, the LED in the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator continues blinking (control mode during variable display) (variation time is not counted, so it blinks until the clear condition is satisfied) continue). However, in the function display unit 1400, the LEDs in the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device may be all lit or all extinguished instead of blinking. In this case, not limited to the LED of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator, other LEDs in the function display unit 1400 (status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal pending indicator, first special pending number LEDs such as indicators, second special pending number indicators, and round indicators) are also all lit, all lit, or all extinguished. Further, when the function display unit 1400 is provided with an LED dedicated to informing that the game has been stopped, the LED dedicated to informing that the game has been stopped may be turned on, and the other LEDs may be turned off. Note that the remaining variable time after stopping (interrupting) the measurement of the variable time is stored in the RAM built in the main control board 1310 .

As shown in FIG. 129(G), the number of remaining balls until the number of balls to be paid out reaches a specific value by paying out prize balls based on the game balls entering the general winning hole 2001 during the variable display of the special symbols. becomes "+0 shots", in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as an operation at the time of prior notification, the number of balls remaining until the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value is communicated "remaining +0 shots until the game limit". is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example). Here, just before the number of remaining balls until the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value becomes "+0 shots", the variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable display of the second decorative pattern are performed. When the number of balls remaining until reaching a specific value reaches "+0", the variable display of the decorative pattern is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stop pattern ("767" in this example), and the second The variable display of decorative symbols is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stop symbol ("x" in this example). Then, when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has elapsed after the display of the advance notification display of "remaining +0 shots until game limit" is displayed, an image corresponding to the stopping state shown in FIG. 129(H) is displayed.

In this example, the contents of the advance notice display displayed on the effect display device 1600 are reflected in the content of the advance notice display by the amount of the prize balls paid out by the game balls entering the general prize winning opening 2001. Regarding the content, it is not the time when the game ball enters the general winning hole 2001 when the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value, but a predetermined time (this In the example, it is displayed continuously until 5 seconds) elapses. As a result, information about whether or not the amount of balls put out has reached a specific value is not overlooked, and the player can surely recognize the reason for starting the stop state after that. In addition, just before the number of remaining balls until the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value becomes "+0 shots", an advance notice display of "+10 shots left until game limit" is displayed. Regarding the prize balls (15 in this example) paid out by the game balls entering, even if the number of prize balls exceeds the number of balls remaining until the number of prize balls reaches a specific value, the excess prize balls ( In this example, 5 pieces) are paid out. As a result, even though the game balls enter the general winning hole 2001, the number of prize balls exceeding a specific value is not paid out, and the player is less likely to be dissatisfied. can be done. However, if it is important to monitor the number of balls to be played from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the number of prize balls exceeding a specific value may not be paid out.

In the above, the contents of the advance notice display are displayed continuously until the amount of prize balls is reflected in the contents of the advance notice display, not when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value. However, the game may be terminated and an image corresponding to the stop state may be displayed when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value. In other words, the image shown in FIG. 129(G) may not be displayed, and the process may proceed to the image shown in FIG. 129(H), which will be described later. As a result, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, the game shifts to the stopped state, and at the same time, by displaying an image corresponding to the stopped state, it is possible to immediately grasp that the state has shifted to the stopped state. can.

In addition, when the amount of balls produced reaches a specific value, the state shifts to the stop state, and the game is restricted. It is preferable that the player cannot see the "right hit" arrow that promotes the shooting of the game ball after being hit, and is erased in this example. Also, under other circumstances, the number of balls released reaches a specific value when displaying a display that encourages the shooting of game balls (e.g. right-handed display, left-handed display, Aim for V! display, etc.) In this case, at that time, the display prompting the shooting of the game ball is made invisible to the player (erased).

As shown in FIG. 129(H), when the number of balls put out reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopping state. As an image corresponding to the stop state, a message "Game limit" is displayed, accompanied by "The game is restricted because the limit of 80000 balls per day has been reached.", "Please call a staff member." The checkout button is active." is displayed. The settlement button here means the count button switch 180 for executing settlement processing. In addition, when the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays a stop pattern of the decorative pattern, a stop pattern of the second decorative pattern, a pending display, or a pre-announcement display. Regarding the information, when the message "Play limit" is displayed after the amount of balls released reaches a specific value, it will not be displayed (make it invisible), and the message will be displayed on the darkened screen. there is As a result, it is possible to grasp that the number of balls put out has reached a specific value and that the game is restricted, and it is possible to grasp that the game restriction cannot be released without the operation of the hall manager. . Also, it can be understood that the number of balls held by the player can be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180 .

In the above description, before the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays the stop design of the decorative design, the stop design of the second decorative design, the pending display, and the advance notification display. Such game-related information is executed in such a way that it becomes unrecognizable when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value. However, when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value, part of the game-related information may be made unrecognizable, and other information may be made recognizable. For example, since the advance notice display is information on whether or not to execute the game restriction, it is made unrecognizable, and the decorative pattern stop pattern, the second decorative pattern stop pattern, and the pending display are: You may make it recognizable. This makes it possible to grasp under what circumstances the amount of paid balls reached the specific value even after the amount of paid balls has reached the specific value.

Here, when the game ball enters the general prize winning port 2001 during the variable display of the special symbols and the amount of the game balls reaches a specific value, the game ball enters the big prize winning port 2005 during the big win game. By doing so, as in the case where the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value, the action when progress is impossible is executed, and an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed. In this way, when the amount of balls paid out reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, regardless of the trigger, a common notification is made to the effect that the game has shifted to the stop state. can be grasped with certainty.

In this example, in order to satisfy a predetermined clear condition for terminating the stop state, it is necessary to turn on the power again according to a predetermined power-on pattern after the power has been turned off. Here, as the power-on pattern at the time of power-on, when a power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and maintains the number of balls output and the stop state is selected (in this example, in the limit clear pattern table 1 When power-on patterns 1, 4, 5, power-on patterns 4, 5 in the limit clear pattern table 2, and power-on patterns 1, 4, 5 in the limit clear pattern table 3 are selected), the game state at the time of power shutdown is cleared. When a power-on pattern is selected to (initialize) and to clear (initialize) the ball payout amount and the stop state (in this example, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in limit clear pattern table 1, limit clear pattern table 2 If power-on patterns 2 and 3 in , or power-on pattern 3 in the restriction clear pattern table 3) is selected, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, and power-on to clear (initialize) the amount of balls played and the stop state. A case where a pattern is selected (in this example, a case where power-on pattern 1 in the restricted clear pattern table 2 and power-on pattern 2 in the restricted clear pattern table 3 are selected) will be described.

First, after shifting to the stop state, when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off, if a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of the power cut-off, as well as the number of balls output and the stop state, the stop state is selected. 129(H) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again.

In addition, after moving to the stop state, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the power-on pattern clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power shutdown, and also clears (initializes) the amount of balls and the stop state. When it is selected, the number of balls to be put out and the stopped state are cleared (initialized), and the restriction on the game as the stopped state is released. Here, when clearing (initializing) the amount of paid balls and the stop state, all information related to calculation of the amount of paid balls, such as the counter for stopping, the number of payouts, and the number of shots, is cleared (initialized). In addition, information about the remaining variable time when interrupted at the time of transition to the stopped state, information about "Renso Mode" (high probability state), information about hold, after moving to the stopped state or power off However, when the power is turned off and then turned back on, information about the remaining variable time when such an interruption occurs, information about "Renso Mode" (high probability state), and information about suspension will be lost. By doing so, it is assumed to start in a low-probability state with no hold. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 129(I), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no pending display and the decorative symbols are stopped at the initial symbols.

On the other hand, if you select a power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and clears (initializes) the amount of balls and the stop state when the power is turned off and then turned back on after moving to the stop state. , the amount of balls to be put out and the stopped state are cleared (initialized), so that the restriction on the game as the stopped state is lifted. In addition, information about the remaining variable time when interrupted at the time of transition to the stopped state, information about "Renso Mode" (high probability state), information about hold, after moving to the stopped state or power off However, even when the power is turned off and then turned back on, information about the remaining variable time at the time of such interruption, information about "Renso mode" (high probability state), and information about suspension are maintained. By doing so, it is assumed that there is a high probability state, that there is a hold, and that the state is restarted in the middle of the previous fluctuation. In other words, at the point of transition to the stop state, the remaining variable time when the timing of the variable time is stopped (interrupted) is stored in the RAM built in the main control board 1310, but the power is turned on again. After that, the variable display of the decorative design and the variable display of the second decorative design are executed for the remaining variable time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 129(I′), the effect display device 1600 restores and displays the image relating to the “Renso mode” (high probability state), and displays the decorative pattern in a variable manner based on the information relating to the suspension. And the variable display of the second decorative pattern is restarted. If you select a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the amount of balls and the stop state, it is recommended that you return to the previous game before returning the various effects displays after turning the power off and then turning it back on. A special return notification (image and sound to the effect that the game will return to the state before the game restriction) may be performed.

Also, in the above, when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, the stop state occurs immediately. Alternatively, the start timing of the stopping state may be delayed until the end of the big win game. That is, in the middle of a plurality of rounds in the jackpot game, when the amount of output balls reaches a specific value, the jackpot game may be continued until the final round is finished. In such a case, even after the amount of payout balls reaches a specific value, the payout amount of prize balls increases the amount of payout balls, but such an increase in the amount of payout balls is allowed. In addition, after waiting for the end of the jackpot game, the game goes into a stopping state accompanied by "game stop" and "fire stop". As a result, the game is not restricted in the middle of the jackpot game, and there is no disadvantage in obtaining prize balls, so that the player is less likely to be dissatisfied.

In addition, in the above-described fourth embodiment, a game machine (a so-called enclosed game machine, a management game machine) that circulates and uses game balls without paying out prize balls as actual balls outside the game machine will be described. However, the above-mentioned "technique for generating a stop state based on the amount of played balls (amounts of played balls A, B)" is not limited to such types of gaming machines, but can be applied to conventional type gaming machines A type of game machine that pays out prize balls). In addition, when applying to a conventional type game machine, it is preferable to set the occurrence timing of the stop state and the game control during the stop state as follows.

That is, the conventional type game machine has a payout control board instead of the frame control board 740, and the payout control board uses the game balls stored in the ball tank on the back side of the game machine as prize balls. It is common to be able to control the dispensing device that dispenses out. Then, the prize balls put out to the ball receiving tray on the front side of the game machine are given to the player as actual balls. A larger time lag occurs than in a game machine of a type that circulates game balls until the game balls are paid out. In particular, it is conceivable that a plurality of game balls enter the big winning hole 2005 during the big winning game and many of the winning balls are stored as unpaid. Even after the start of , there is a possibility that many prize balls will remain unpaid and stored. In such a case, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side is stopped with the start of the stop state, and at the same time the payout process on the payout control board is performed. If the game is also stopped, there is a risk that the player will not be able to obtain the profit that the player should originally obtain (the prize balls that are stored as unpaid). Therefore, in the case of applying the "technique for generating a stop state based on the amount of paid balls (amounts of paid balls A and B)" to a conventional type gaming machine, the following two patterns of control methods are conceivable.

First, as the first pattern, the "number of payouts" to be calculated by the stop counter is set to the number of actually paid out. Specifically, a ball sensor for detecting the number of game balls sent out by the payout device toward the ball receiving tray is provided, and the detection result of the ball sensor is reflected in the "number of payouts." As a result, the number of unpaid prize balls can be reduced as compared with calculating the stopping counter based on the prize ball information in the main control board 1310 .

Further, as a second pattern, even if the game is stopped in the stop state, only "payout of unpaid prize balls" continues. The game is completely stopped when there are no more unpaid prize balls. Note that the second pattern may be used together with the first pattern.

(Addition of restriction clear pattern table 4)
In the above, limit clear pattern tables 1 to 3 are provided as limit clear pattern tables with different clearing conditions for "amount of balls to be paid out calculated before the start of the stop state" and "restrictions on games during the stop state." However, a restriction clear pattern table 4 may be provided separately. Even in such a case, the hall manager can select one of the limit clear pattern tables 1 to 4 by operating the operable limit clear pattern selection switch. However, as for the limit clear pattern table, only the limit clear pattern table 4 may be used from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM for storing various processing programs.

FIG. 130 shows the limit clear pattern table 4 selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "4". When this restriction clear pattern table 4 is selected, it is made possible to select whether to maintain or clear the "restrictions on games during the stop state" on the gaming hall side when the power is turned off and then turned on again. However, the ``amount of balls paid out calculated before the start of the stoppage state'' is always cleared when the power is turned off and then turned on again.

In the power-on pattern 1, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "the amount of balls to be played before the start of the stop state and after the start of the stop state" is cleared. (initialization), and on the other hand, the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit green light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls to be played has been cleared. The stop state is maintained." (corresponding to clear notification 1 and progress impossible notification, which will be described later). In addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating a method of clearing the stoppage state may be added to the hall manager.

In the power-on pattern 2, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized). And "restrictions on games during stoppage state" are also cleared (initialized). Specifically, when the game is restricted by the above-described restriction pattern 1, the game is "stopped". If the game is restricted by the pattern 3, the game is "stopped", but by clearing the stop state, the "shooting stop" is released, and if the game is restricted by the restriction pattern 3 , "Stop game" and "Stop firing", but by clearing the stop state, "Stop playing" and "Stop firing" are released, and in either case, the main control board 1310 side It is possible to restart the game (main game). In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stop state have been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image "The amount of balls put out and the state of the stop has been cleared." (Equivalent to clear notification 2, which will be described later).

In the power-on pattern 3, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized). And "restrictions on games during stoppage state" are also cleared (initialized). In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stop state have been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image "The amount of balls put out and the state of the stop has been cleared." . (Equivalent to clear notification 2, which will be described later).

In the power-on pattern 4, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "the amount of balls to be played before the start of the stop state and after the start of the stop state" is cleared. (initialization), and on the other hand, the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls to be played has been cleared. The stop state is maintained." (corresponding to clear notification 1 and game disabled notification, which will be described later). In addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating a method of clearing the stoppage state may be added to the hall manager.

In the power-on pattern 5, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "amount of balls output before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state" We also maintain the "restrictions on playing in the middle". In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light for a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. The sound "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stopping is maintained." is output, and the effect display device 1600 displays the message image "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stopping is maintained." ing.

As described above, in the restriction clear pattern table 4, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, or the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 2 and 3. Clear (initialize) the state or clear (initialize )are doing. This prevents the hall manager from forgetting to clear the ball payout amount when the power is turned on, such as when the hall is opened, and prevents the occurrence of a stoppage state due to the payout ball amount reaching a specific value immediately after opening the hall. be able to. It should be noted that when the power-on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the above-described ball extraction process is only executed and the game is not started. The amount of balls released after the state was started is maintained without clearing (initializing).

In addition, in the restriction clear pattern table 4, when the power is turned on, only when the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) like the power-on patterns 2 and 3, the "restriction of the game during the stop state" is cleared. (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are maintained. In other words, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the "restrictions on games during stoppage" on the gaming hall side when the power is turned off and then turned back on. For example, in the event that a pause state has already occurred, if it is desired to release the restriction on the game, after turning off the power, the power-on operation may be performed so as to clear the "restriction on the game during the pause state". When it is desired to maintain the restriction, after the power is turned off, the power-on operation is performed so as to maintain the "restriction of the game during the stop state". It should be noted that, when the power is turned on, if the power-on pattern 5 is selected, the above-described ball removal process is executed and the game is not started. It is maintained without (initialization).

(Notification regarding the amount of balls to be played when an abnormality is detected)
In this example, it is possible to detect an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration while the power is turned on, and it is determined whether or not an abnormality has been detected. Further, depending on the type of abnormality, the progress of the game is stopped when the abnormality is detected, and the game cannot be restarted unless the power is turned on again. However, when the power is turned on again, for example, as is clear from the restriction clear pattern table 4, depending on the mode of operation at the time of power-on, "before the stop state is started or after the stop state is started This will result in clearing (initializing) the amount of balls to be played" and "restrictions on games during the stop state". For this reason, by deliberately causing an abnormality at the stage before the ball output approaches a specific value and moving to the stop state, or during the stop state, the hall manager is forced to turn on the power again, and "the stop state starts." There is a possibility that a new fraudulent attempt will be made to clear (initialize) the amount of balls to be put out before or after the start of the stop state and the “restrictions on games during the stop state”. In this example, in order to prevent such new fraud, when an abnormality is detected, "the amount of balls released before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state" and "the number of games during the stop state" A case of executing notification regarding "restriction" will be described below.

In addition, in this example, while the power is turned on, abnormality determination is performed to determine whether or not an abnormality has been detected. ing. Detection of minor abnormalities includes opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and removal of the frame decoration member. Then, when a slight abnormality is detected, the progress of the game is not stopped. Also, when a minor anomaly is detected, an anomaly notification is executed to inform the outside that a minor anomaly has occurred. By doing so, the anomaly notification is terminated. In other words, when a minor abnormality is detected, there is a possibility that the main body frame 4 has been opened from the outer frame 2 by an illegal act, but the main body frame 4 has not been opened from the outer frame 2. Since it is easy to confirm whether or not there is an abnormality, the anomaly notification is terminated at a predetermined timing.

On the other hand, detection of a serious abnormality includes detection of magnetism, vibration, and radio waves with respect to the pachinko machine 1 . The pachinko machine 1 of this example is provided with a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor for detecting vibration, and a radio wave sensor for detecting illegal radio waves. , making it possible to detect radio waves. When a serious abnormality is detected, the progress of the game is stopped because there is a high possibility that the magnetism, vibration, and radio waves were applied not by the work of the hall manager but by an illegal act. . In addition, when a serious abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to inform the outside that a serious abnormality has occurred. never ends. Therefore, if a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power supply to end the abnormality notification, and then turn on the power supply again so that the progress of the game can be resumed. I have to.

Regarding the abnormality notification, not only the members on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 such as the effect display device 1600 but also the members on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 such as the back side of the main body frame 4 and the back side of the game board 5 are used. and running. Thereby, for example, even if the hall manager is working on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred.

131 to 133 are time charts showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when minor or severe abnormalities occur. In this example, the behavior of the pachinko machine when a minor abnormality occurs during the normal state or the stop state, the behavior of the pachinko machine when a severe abnormality occurs during the normal state, and the severe abnormality during the stop state The behavior of the pachinko machine in this case will be explained in order. It should be noted that the normal state is a state in which the number of balls to be played is not in a stop state before reaching a specific value. It may be either a standby state that is not

Also, at timing t1, when it is determined that the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on the balls entering the winning opening, it is determined that the stopping flag has been turned ON, and the game shifts to the stopping state. The case has already been described with reference to FIG. In other words, regarding the behavior of the pachinko machine in the non-stopped state (normal state) before the ball output reaches a specific value, and in the stopped state when there are no minor or severe abnormalities, Since it has already been explained, the explanation is omitted here. However, in FIG. 126, at timing t1, after shifting to the stopping state, no abnormality determination is made as to whether or not an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected, but in this example, even during the stopping state Abnormality determination is performed, and abnormality notification is performed to inform the outside that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, in this example, when the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value, the restriction pattern 3 is selected to perform both "game stop" and "fire stop" as restrictions on the game in the stop state. When the power is turned on again after the power is cut off, the limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table. The case where 1 and 4 are selected and the case where power-on patterns 2 and 3 that clear the amount of paid balls and the stoppage state are selected are explained.

FIG. 131 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a slight abnormality occurs during the normal state or stop state.

First, before the timing t1 at which the stop state is entered, the normal state (not the stop state) is controlled. The behavior in the normal state (state not in the stop state) is as described above.

Here, a case where a slight abnormality is detected at timing tx in the normal state (not in the stop state) will be described. When a slight abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to inform the outside that the abnormality has occurred, and the effect display device 1600 and the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame decoration member) , the lamp B (the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), the speaker, and the external terminal board perform the operation when an error occurs as an abnormality notification. On the other hand, regarding the progress of the game and other points other than the execution of the abnormality notification, there is no change from the situation in which the slight abnormality was not detected before the timing tx, and the behavior of the normal state (not the stop state) shall be maintained.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5), and the speaker At the timing tx, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed. For example, when detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 as a minor abnormality, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "door open error" as the error display A, and also displays the current situation. As display A, display the message "remaining until game limit + XX shots" to indicate the remaining amount of balls to be played until the game is restricted (remaining amount of balls to be played until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value). I am trying to Specifically, the advance notice display is executed after the remaining ball payout amount reaches 5000 until the payout amount reaches a specific value. For example, when a slight abnormality is detected when the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value of 50,000, the effect display device 1600 displays the current situation display A as "remaining until the game limit is reached." +50000 shots" is displayed. The current state display A indicates the remaining amount of paid balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, but the amount of paid balls at that time may be indicated.

As described above, when a slight abnormality is detected during the normal state (not the stop state), the effect display device 1600 displays not only the error display A but also the current situation display A, thereby continuing the game. It shows the remaining payout amount until the limit (the remaining payout amount until the payout amount reaches a specific value). At this time, if the power is cut off, the detection of the minor abnormality is eliminated, but when the power is turned on again in the power-on patterns 1 to 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, the ball output amount is cleared. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine whether or not to turn on the power again after grasping the remaining amount of balls to be put out until the game is restricted.

Prior to the timing t1 at which the game is shifted to the stop state, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some members such as the effect display device 1600 to give advance notice in order to notify that the amount of balls paid out has approached a specific value. It makes the action of time executable. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a message "remaining until the game limit + 00 shots" is displayed in a specific display area as an advance notification display. This specific display area is set as a part of the display area in the effect display device 1600, and is a display area used for displaying when the amount of balls paid out approaches a specific value. It is a fixed area that remains unchanged even in the game state. If a slight abnormality is detected during execution of such advance notice display, the effect display device 1600 may display the same data as the advance notice display as the current situation display A. good. Further, when the current status display A is displayed by using the advance notice display, it is configured to be displayed in a layer higher (front side) than the layer that displays the other effect images, and in this example, The current status display A is displayed as the highest layer, and the display is controlled so that it can be reliably continuously recognized during the execution of the abnormality notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the current status display A from becoming unrecognizable.

In addition, in this example, regarding the start operation at the time of advance notice (operation at the time of start of advance notice), in addition to the advance notice display using the effect display device 1600, the lamp B (mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5) The LED flashes for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) as an advance notice light emission. This makes it easy to recognize that the amount of paid balls has approached the specific value.

Also, in this example, the advance notice display is executed after the remaining amount of payout balls reaches 5,000 until the payout amount reaches the specific value. Details of the advance notice display will be given later. However, the game ends when the number of remaining balls exceeds 5,000. Further, the advance notice display cannot be erased after a predetermined time has passed or by an administrator's operation. On the other hand, when a minor abnormality occurs or when a serious abnormality described later occurs, the current situation display A is executed. Even if it changes, it never ends. Further, the current status display A can be erased, for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed until the error display A is terminated, or when an error is resolved by an administrator's operation. As a result, it is possible to distinguish between the advance notice display and the current situation display A.

In addition, in this example, the current situation display A is executed by the effect display device 1600, but not the display member on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but on the back side of the main body frame 4, the back side of the game board 5, or the like. A display member on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 may be used to indicate the remaining amount of paid balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. In addition, even when the current situation display A is executed by the effect display device 1600, the current situation display A may be the remaining amount of paid balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, or according to the amount of paid balls. (For example, if the remaining amount of balls to be played is between 0 and 5000, A is displayed) may be displayed. As a result, only the hall manager can check the current status display A, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent attempts to know the number of balls paid out by deliberately causing an abnormality.

In addition, in this example, when a minor abnormality occurs or when a serious abnormality described later occurs, the current situation display A is executed by the effect display device 1600. However, for example, a conventional type game In the case of a frequently occurring operational abnormality (error) such as the top tray becoming full in a game machine (a game machine of the type that pays out prize balls as real balls outside the game machine), the effect display device 1600 , the current status display A is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the current situation display A from being displayed frequently.

Further, in this example, when a minor abnormality occurs or when a serious abnormality described later occurs, the current situation display A is executed by the effect display device 1600. However, for example, when a RAM error occurs Even in this case, the current situation display A is executed on the effect display device 1600 assuming that a serious abnormality has occurred. However, when a rumble error occurs, there is a possibility that the memory itself regarding the number of balls paid out is abnormal.

In addition, at the timing tx, the lamps A and B light up or blink in a single color as error light emission, and the speaker outputs a sound "Door opening error" as an error sound. I'm trying

A security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing tx. As a result, when a minor abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can recognize that a minor abnormality has occurred.

Further, in this example, although the anomaly notification is started at the timing tx, the anomaly notification is terminated after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. That is, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), the speaker, and the external terminal board , to return to normal operation. However, if it is detected that a minor abnormality such as closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is resolved before the predetermined period elapses, the abnormality notification is terminated at that point.

Next, at timing t1, it is determined that the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value due to the payout of the winning balls based on the winning balls entering the winning opening, but the main control board 1310 detects the entering of the winning opening. Occasionally, the stop flag is turned ON, and the game shifts to a "stop state" in which restriction pattern 3 is applied to perform both "game stop" and "fire stop". The behavior of the stop state is as described above.

Here, a case where a minor abnormality is detected at timing ty during the stop state will be described. When a slight abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to notify the occurrence of the abnormality to the outside, and the performance display device 1600 executes the operation when the error occurs as the abnormality notification. On the other hand, other than the execution of the abnormality notification, such as disabling the progress of the game, there is no change from the situation in which the slight abnormality was not detected before the timing ty, and the behavior of the stopping state is maintained. It is assumed that

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 is executing the operation when an error occurs at the timing tx. For example, when detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 as a minor abnormality, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "door open error" as the error display A, and also displays the current situation. As the display B, display a message ``The game limit has been reached'' to indicate that the game has already been shifted to the stop state and the game is restricted (that the number of balls paid out has reached a specific value). I'm trying

As described above, when a slight abnormality is detected during the stop state, the effect display device 1600 displays not only the error display A but also the current situation display B, and the game is already shifted to the stop state. is restricted (after the amount of balls paid out reaches a specific value). At this time, if the power is turned on again, the detection of the minor abnormality is canceled, but when the power is turned on again with the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, the game restriction during the stop state is maintained. On the other hand, when the power is turned on again in the power-on patterns 2 and 3, the restrictions on the game during the stop state are cleared. In this regard, in this example, after the hall manager grasps that the game has already been shifted to the stop state and the game is restricted, it is necessary to determine in which power-on pattern the power can be turned on again. can be done.

In this example, only the effect display device 1600 is used to perform the abnormality notification, and the members other than the effect display device 1600 are prioritized to perform actions when progress is impossible. As a result, even when a slight abnormality is detected during the stop state, it is possible to easily grasp that the game has already been shifted to the stop state and the game is restricted.

Further, in this example, when a minor abnormality occurs during the stop state, or when a serious abnormality described later occurs, the current situation display B is executed. , the game does not end even if the number of balls to be played changes after that. Further, the current status display B can be erased, for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed until the error display A is terminated, or when an abnormality is resolved by an administrator's operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the current situation display B from being displayed more than necessary.

In addition, in this example, when a minor abnormality occurs during the stopping state or when a serious abnormality described later occurs, the current situation display B is executed on the effect display device 1600. For example, In the event of a frequently occurring operational error (error) such as the upper tray becoming full in a conventional type gaming machine (a type of gaming machine that pays out real balls outside the gaming machine), The effect display device 1600 does not execute the current situation display B. As a result, it is possible to prevent the current situation display B from being displayed frequently.

In addition, in this example, when a minor abnormality occurs during the stopping state, or when a serious abnormality described later occurs, the present situation display B is executed on the effect display device 1600. For example, Even when a RAM error occurs, the effect display device 1600 executes the current situation display B assuming that a serious abnormality has occurred. However, when a ram error occurs, there is a possibility that the memory itself regarding the stopping state is abnormal, so the effect display device 1600 may not execute the current situation display B. FIG.

In addition, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing t1, the speaker performs an action when progress is impossible. It is outputting a voice saying. However, such sound for impeding progress may be terminated after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the start of output. As a result, the sound for impossibility of progress is not continued to be output after shifting to the stop state, and it is possible to prevent the players playing with other pachinko machines 1 from being hindered.

In addition, from the timing t1 when the stop state is entered, the external terminal board is in a forced output state in which a security signal is forcibly output. , the security signal being output is terminated and a new security signal is not output, and the security signal being output is continuously output. As a result, the hole side does not misunderstand that the stopping state has ended.

Further, in this example, although the anomaly notification is started at the timing ty, the anomaly notification is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. In other words, the performance display device 1600 is returned to the operation when progress is impossible. However, if it is detected that a minor abnormality such as closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is resolved before the predetermined period elapses, the abnormality notification is terminated at that point.

Next, after shifting to the stopping state, the power is turned off at timing t2, and the power is turned on again at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned on again, the restriction clear pattern table 4 is used as the restriction clear pattern table.

First, the power is turned on again at timing t3, and the case where power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as the power-on pattern for clearing the number of balls paid out and the stop state will be described. When power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized). The amount of balls to be put out” and the “restrictions on games during the stop state” are also cleared (initialized). Therefore, regardless of which of the power-on patterns 2 and 3 is selected, by clearing the 'restriction of the game in the stop state', the normal state (state not in the stop state) is controlled. That is, it is possible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior in the normal state (state not in the stop state) is as described above.

Effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of game board 5), and speaker at time t3 , clear notification 2 is executed. For example, in the effect display device 1600, as an initial display, in addition to displaying a predetermined combination of decorative symbols, as a clear notification 2, "limit clear has been completed." message is displayed. As a result, the hall manager can confirm that the amount of balls put out and the stoppage state have been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding the clear notification 2, when it is not in the stop state when the power is cut off, it is not necessary to notify that the stop state has been cleared. You may make it notify.

Further, in the lamps A and B, the LED lights up or flashes in red as the clear notification 2 at timing t3.

At timing t3, the loudspeaker outputs a voice saying "restriction cleared" as clear notification 2 to indicate that the ball payout amount and the stoppage state have been cleared.

Also, in this example, the clear notification 2 is started at the timing t3, but the clear notification 2 is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. That is, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker I am trying to get it working again. However, the normal operation may be started before the clear notification 2 is finished. Further, the clear notification 2 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be continuously displayed even after a predetermined period of time has passed. Then, such a clear notification 2 may be erased by an administrator's operation. As a result, unless the clear notification 2 is erased by the administrator's operation, the clear notification 2 remains displayed, making it difficult for fraud to occur.

Next, at timing t3', the power is turned on again. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as the power-on pattern, in which the number of balls put out is cleared but the stop state is maintained. will be explained. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "amount of balls to be put out before start of stop state or after start of stop state". is cleared (initialized), and on the other hand, the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are maintained. Therefore, regardless of which of the power-on patterns 1 and 4 is selected, the behavior of the idle state is maintained by maintaining the "restrictions on games during the idle state." In other words, it is impossible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior of the stop state is as described above.

Effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of game board 5), and speaker at timing t3' , clear notification 1 is executed. For example, in the effect display device 1600, as the clear notification 1, a message "the amount of paid balls has been cleared" is displayed to indicate that the amount of paid balls has been cleared. As a result, the hall manager can confirm that the ball payout amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding the clear notification 1, when the game is in the stopped state when the power is cut off, it may be notified that the stopped state has been maintained, and not only that the amount of balls paid out has been cleared, but also the number of balls paid out at the time of clearing. You may make it notify an amount.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at timing t3', the green LED lights or blinks as the clear notification 1. FIG.

At timing t3', the loudspeaker outputs a voice saying "the amount of paid balls has been cleared" as clear notification 1 to indicate that the amount of paid balls has been cleared.

Also, in this example, the clear notification 1 is started at the timing t3, but the clear notification 1 is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. That is, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker I'm trying to get it back to working. However, the operation when progress is impossible may be started before the clear notification 1 ends.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "game is restricted" as the progress impossibility notification (progress impossibility display). In addition to this, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "If you clear the ram, you will be in a normal state." I have to. As a result, the hall manager can understand that the stop state cannot be cleared unless the power-on patterns 2 and 3 with RAM clear are selected when the power is turned on again.

Also, regarding the speaker, when executing the action when the progress is impossible, the sound "Playing is restricted because the daily ball limit has been reached" is output as a progress impediment notification (sound for the impossibility of progress). ing. However, although it was stated above that such sounds for impeding progress may be terminated after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the output was started, Even if the output of the sound for impossibility ends, the sound for impossibility of progress may be output again when the power is turned on again at timing t3'. In such a case, when a predetermined period of time elapses from timing t3', the output of the sound for impossibility of progress is terminated. As a result, when the power is turned on again, the sound indicating the impossibility of progress is output again, so that it is possible to easily grasp that the stop state has not been cleared and the game is restricted.

In this example, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected when the power is turned on again, the number of balls output is cleared but the stop state is maintained. Method notification is being executed, and clear notification 1 is being executed with priority over progress impossibility notification and clear method notification. As a result, the hall manager can confirm that the ball payout amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. As another example, the progress impossibility notification and the clearing method notification may be executed in parallel with the clearing notification 1, or the clearing notification 1, the progress impossibility notification, and the clearing method notification may be executed alternately. good. In addition, when the progress impossibility notification and the clearing method notification are executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, the clear notification 1 is executed for some of the plurality of members, and the progress impossibility notification and the clearing method notification are executed for the remaining members. may be executed, or the clear notification 1 may be executed in a part of the area and the progress impossibility notification or the clear method notification may be executed in the remaining area, even though the members are the same. Further, even when the progress impossibility notification and the clearing method notification are executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, the clear notification 1 may end after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. Also, the clearing method notification may end after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses.

FIG. 132 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during normal operation.

First, before the timing tx at which a serious abnormality is detected, control is made to the normal state (the non-stop state). The behavior in the normal state (state not in the stop state) is as described above.

Here, a case where a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx in the normal state (not in the stop state) will be described. When a serious abnormality is detected, the game ball cannot be shot, and the game (main game) on the side of the main control board 1310 cannot proceed. In other words, when a serious abnormality occurs, the variable display of the special symbols and the big win game are not executed, and even if there is a start prize, the variable display of the special symbols is not newly started.

In addition, when a serious abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to inform the outside that the abnormality has occurred. , as an anomaly notification, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5), and the speaker At the timing tx, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed. For example, when magnetism is detected as a serious abnormality, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Magnetic Abnormality" as error display B, and displays current situation display A until the game is restricted. The message "remaining until game limit + 00 shots" is displayed so as to indicate the remaining amount of balls to be put out (the amount of balls to be put out until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value).

As described above, when a serious abnormality is detected during the normal state (not the stop state), the effect display device 1600 displays not only the error display B but also the current situation display A, thereby continuing the game. It shows the remaining payout amount until the limit (the remaining payout amount until the payout amount reaches a specific value). At this time, if the power is cut off, the detection of the serious abnormality is eliminated, but when the power is turned on again in the power-on patterns 1 to 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, the ball output amount is cleared. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine whether or not to turn on the power again after grasping the remaining amount of balls to be put out until the game is restricted.

In addition, before moving to the stop state, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some members such as the effect display device 1600 to notify that the amount of balls paid out approaches a specific value. making the action executable. Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, a message "remaining until the game limit + 00 shots" is displayed in a specific display area as an advance notification display. This specific display area is set as a part of the display area in the effect display device 1600, and is a display area used for displaying when the amount of balls paid out approaches a specific value. It is a fixed area that remains unchanged even in the game state. When a serious abnormality is detected during execution of such advance notice display, the effect display device 1600 may display the same data as the advance notice display as the current situation display A. good. In addition, when displaying the current situation display A by using the advance notice display, it is configured to be displayed in a layer higher (front side) than the layer that displays other effect images, and in this example, The current status display A is displayed as the highest layer, and the display is controlled so that it can be reliably continuously recognized during the execution of the abnormality notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the current status display A from becoming unrecognizable.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at the timing tx, the LED lights or blinks in a single color as error light emission.

In addition, in the lamp C, as the function display unit 1400, the status indicator, the normal symbol indicator, the normal reservation indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special number indicator, the second special symbol indicator, the second A special hold number indicator, a round indicator, etc. are provided, but all of their LEDs are lit. However, as another example, the function display unit 1400 is provided with an LED dedicated to anomaly notification, and when a serious abnormality is detected, the LED dedicated to anomaly notification is turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. can be

In addition, the speaker outputs a voice saying "A magnetic abnormality has occurred" as an error sound.

Also, the movable body is in an inoperable state at the timing tx. For example, when the movable body is in motion at the timing tx, the movable body is forcibly stopped in the middle of the motion. However, as another example, after the timing tx, the movable body may be stopped after returning the movable body that is not in the initial position to the initial position. As a result, even if the movable body is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the timing tx, the movable body returns to the initial position after the timing tx, and the effect display device 1600 executes It is possible to make it difficult to overlook the error display B and the current situation display A that are displayed.

A security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing tx. As a result, when a serious abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can recognize that a serious abnormality has occurred.

Also, when a serious abnormality is detected at the timing tx, when the player operates the handle 160, the game balls are not allowed to be shot to the game area 5a.

In addition, when a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx, the number of game balls B that entered the entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) (number of entering balls) and paid out as prize balls The number of game balls B (number of payouts) is not counted. In other words, it is disabled to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, and is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. However, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) is counted, and by calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering, It may be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, when a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls for those that have detected balls entering the winning opening before timing tx. The number of game balls paid out as prize balls can be added to the number of balls possessed by the player. As a result, the player can obtain prize balls for the number of game balls until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value. On the other hand, at timing tx, after detecting a serious abnormality, when a ball entering the winning hole is detected, the predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player is determined. cannot be added to However, if a serious abnormality is detected at the timing tx, it may be configured not to detect the ball entering the winning hole. Even if a ball enters a winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls and are not added to the number of balls possessed by the player.

Also, when a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed as abnormality notification, but at timing ty after that, another serious abnormality is detected. In such a case, the operation at the time of error occurrence is not changed, and execution is continued. However, after detecting a severe abnormality at the timing tx, another severe abnormality may not be detected.

Also, in this example, although the anomaly notification is started at the timing tx, the anomaly notification is not terminated even after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed. For this reason, when a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power supply to end the abnormality notification, and then turn on the power supply again so that the progress of the game can be resumed. I have to.

Next, after detecting a serious abnormality in the normal state (not in the stopping state), at timing t2, the power is cut off to end the abnormality notification, and at timing t3 after that, the power is turned on. I am re-inserting. In this example, when the power is turned on again, the restriction clear pattern table 4 is used as the restriction clear pattern table.

First, the power is turned on again at timing t3, and the case where power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as the power-on pattern for clearing the number of balls paid out and the stop state will be described. When power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized). The amount of balls to be put out” and the “restrictions on games during the stop state” are also cleared (initialized). In this example, when the power is cut off at timing t2, the state is not in the stop state in the first place. Regardless of whether or not, it is controlled to the normal state (state not to stop). That is, it is possible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior in the normal state (state not in the stop state) is as described above.

Effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of game board 5), and speaker at time t3 , clear notification 2 is executed. For example, in the effect display device 1600, as an initial display, in addition to displaying a predetermined combination of decorative symbols, as a clear notification 2, "limit clear has been completed." message is displayed. As a result, the hall manager can confirm that the amount of balls put out and the stoppage state have been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding the clear notification 2, since it is not in the stop state when the power is cut off, it is not necessary to notify that the stop state has been cleared, or that the amount of balls played has been cleared, or the number of balls played at the time of clearing. You may make it notify.

Further, in the lamps A and B, the LED lights up or flashes in red as the clear notification 2 at timing t3.

At timing t3, the loudspeaker outputs a voice saying "restriction cleared" as clear notification 2 to indicate that the ball payout amount and the stoppage state have been cleared.

Also, in this example, the clear notification 2 is started at the timing t3, but the clear notification 2 is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. That is, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker I am trying to get it working again. However, the normal operation may be started before the clear notification 2 is finished. Further, the clear notification 2 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be continuously displayed even after a predetermined period of time has passed. Then, such a clear notification 2 may be erased by an administrator's operation. As a result, unless the clear notification 2 is erased by the administrator's operation, the clear notification 2 remains displayed, making it difficult to commit fraudulent acts.

Next, at timing t3', the power is turned on again. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as the power-on pattern, in which the number of balls put out is cleared but the stop state is maintained. will be explained. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "amount of balls to be put out before start of stop state or after start of stop state". is cleared (initialized), and on the other hand, the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are maintained. In this example, when the power is cut off at timing t2, the state is not in the stop state in the first place. Regardless of whether or not, it is controlled to the normal state (state not to stop). That is, it is possible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior in the normal state (state not in the stop state) is as described above.

Effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of game board 5), and speaker at timing t3' , clear notification 1 is executed. For example, in the effect display device 1600, as the clear notification 1, a message "the amount of paid balls has been cleared" is displayed to indicate that the amount of paid balls has been cleared. As a result, the hall manager can confirm that the ball payout amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding the clear notification 1, when the game is in the stopped state when the power is cut off, it may be notified that the stopped state has been maintained, and not only that the ball payout amount has been cleared, but also the ball payout at the time of clearing. You may make it notify an amount.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at timing t3', the green LED lights or blinks as the clear notification 1. FIG.

At timing t3', the loudspeaker outputs a voice saying "the amount of paid balls has been cleared" as clear notification 1 to indicate that the amount of paid balls has been cleared.

Also, in this example, the clear notification 1 is started at the timing t3, but the clear notification 1 is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. That is, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker I am trying to get it working again. However, the normal operation may be started before the clear notification 1 is finished.

FIG. 133 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during the stop state.

First, before the timing tx at which a serious abnormality is detected, the stop state is controlled. The behavior of the stop state is as described above.

Here, a case where a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx during the stop state will be described. When a serious abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to notify the occurrence of the abnormality to the outside, and the performance display device 1600 executes the operation when the error occurs as the abnormality notification. On the other hand, except for the execution of the abnormality notification, such as disabling the progress of the game, there is no change from the situation where no serious abnormality was detected before the timing tx, and the behavior of the stop state is maintained. It is assumed that

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 is executing the operation when an error occurs at the timing tx. For example, when magnetism is detected as a serious abnormality, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "magnetism abnormality" as error display B, and also shifts to a stopped state as current situation display B. The message "game limit is reached" is displayed to indicate that the game is limited (after the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value).

As described above, when a serious abnormality is detected during the stop state, the effect display device 1600 displays not only the error display B but also the current situation display B, and the game is already shifted to the stop state. is restricted (after the amount of balls paid out reaches a specific value). At this time, if the power is turned on again, the detection of the serious abnormality is canceled, but when the power is turned on again in the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, the game restriction in the stop state is maintained. On the other hand, when the power is turned on again in the power-on patterns 2 and 3, the restrictions on the game during the stop state are cleared. In this regard, in this example, after the hall manager grasps that the game has already been shifted to the stop state and the game is restricted, it is necessary to determine in which power-on pattern the power can be turned on again. can be done.

Further, in this example, only the effect display device 1600 is used to perform the abnormality notification, and the members other than the effect display device 1600 are prioritized to perform the operations when progress is impossible. As a result, even when a serious abnormality is detected during the stop state, it is possible to easily grasp that the game has already been shifted to the stop state and the game is restricted.

Also, from the timing t1 when the stop state is entered, the external terminal board is in a forcible output state where the security signal is forcibly output. , the security signal being output is terminated and a new security signal is not output, and the security signal being output is continuously output. As a result, the hole side does not misunderstand that the stopping state has ended.

Also, in this example, although the anomaly notification is started at the timing tx, the anomaly notification is not terminated even after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed. For this reason, when a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power supply to end the abnormality notification, and then turn on the power supply again so that the progress of the game can be resumed. I have to.

Next, after a serious abnormality is detected during the stopping state, the power is turned off at timing t2 to end the abnormality notification, and the power is turned on again at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned on again, the restriction clear pattern table 4 is used as the restriction clear pattern table.

First, the power is turned on again at timing t3, and the case where power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as the power-on pattern for clearing the number of balls paid out and the stop state will be described. When power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized). The amount of balls to be put out” and the “restrictions on games during the stop state” are also cleared (initialized). Therefore, regardless of which of the power-on patterns 2 and 3 is selected, by clearing the 'restriction of the game in the stop state', the normal state (state not in the stop state) is controlled. That is, it is possible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior in the normal state (state not in the stop state) is as described above.

Effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of game board 5), and speaker at timing t3 , clear notification 2 is executed. For example, in the effect display device 1600, as an initial display, in addition to displaying a predetermined combination of decorative symbols, as a clear notification 2, "limit clear has been completed." message is displayed. As a result, the hall manager can confirm that the ball payout amount and the stoppage state have been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding the clear notification 2, when the game is not in the stop state when the power is cut off, it is not necessary to notify that the stop state has been cleared. You may make it notify.

Further, in the lamps A and B, the LED lights up or flashes in red as the clear notification 2 at timing t3.

At timing t3, the loudspeaker outputs a voice saying "restriction cleared" as clear notification 2 to indicate that the ball payout amount and the stoppage state have been cleared.

Also, in this example, the clear notification 2 is started at the timing t3, but the clear notification 2 is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. That is, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker I am trying to get it working again. However, the clear notification 2 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be continuously displayed even after a predetermined period of time has passed. Further, such a clear notification 2 may be erased by an administrator's operation. As a result, unless the clear notification 2 is erased by the administrator's operation, the clear notification 2 remains displayed, making it difficult to commit fraudulent acts.

Next, at timing t3′, the power is turned on again. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as power-on patterns, in which the number of balls put out is cleared but the stop state is maintained. will be explained. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "amount of balls to be played before starting the stop state or after the start of the stop state". is cleared (initialized), and on the other hand, the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are maintained. Therefore, regardless of which of the power-on patterns 1 and 4 is selected, the behavior of the idle state is maintained by maintaining the "restrictions on games during the idle state." In other words, it is impossible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior of the stop state is as described above.

Effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of game board 5), and speaker at timing t3' , clear notification 1 is executed. For example, in the effect display device 1600, as the clear notification 1, a message "the amount of paid balls has been cleared" is displayed to indicate that the amount of paid balls has been cleared. As a result, the hall manager can confirm that the ball payout amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding the clear notification 1, when the game is in the stopped state when the power is cut off, it may be notified that the stopped state has been maintained, and not only that the amount of balls paid out has been cleared, but also the number of balls paid out at the time of clearing. You may make it notify an amount.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at timing t3', the green LED lights or blinks as the clear notification 1. FIG.

At timing t3', the loudspeaker outputs a voice saying "the amount of balls to be played has been cleared" as clear notification 1 to indicate that the amount of balls to be paid has been cleared.

Also, in this example, the clear notification 1 is started at the timing t3, but the clear notification 1 is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. That is, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker I'm trying to get it back to working. However, the operation when progress is impossible may be started before the clear notification 1 ends.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "game is restricted" as the progress impossibility notification (progress impossibility display). In addition to this, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "If you clear the ram, you will be in a normal state." I have to. As a result, the hall manager can understand that the stop state cannot be cleared unless the power-on patterns 2 and 3 with RAM clear are selected when the power is turned on again.

Also, regarding the speaker, when executing the action when the progress is impossible, the sound "Playing is restricted because the daily ball limit has been reached" is output as a progress impediment notification (sound for the impossibility of progress). ing. However, although it was stated above that such sounds for impeding progress may be terminated after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the output was started, Even if the output of the sound for impossibility ends, the sound for impossibility of progress may be output again when the power is turned on again at timing t3'. In such a case, when a predetermined period of time elapses from timing t3', the output of the sound for impossibility of progress is terminated. As a result, when the power is turned on again, the sound indicating the impossibility of progress is output again, so that it is possible to easily grasp that the stop state has not been cleared and the game is restricted.

In this example, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected when the power is turned on again, the number of balls output is cleared but the stop state is maintained. Method notification is being executed, and clear notification 1 is being executed with priority over progress impossibility notification and clear method notification. As a result, the hall manager can confirm that the ball payout amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. As another example, the progress impossibility notification and the clearing method notification may be executed in parallel with the clearing notification 1, or the clearing notification 1, the progress impossibility notification, and the clearing method notification may be executed alternately. good. In addition, when the progress impossibility notification and the clearing method notification are executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, the clear notification 1 is executed for some of the plurality of members, and the progress impossibility notification and the clearing method notification are executed for the remaining members. may be executed, or the clear notification 1 may be executed in a part of the area and the progress impossibility notification or the clear method notification may be executed in the remaining area, even though the members are the same. Further, even when the progress impossibility notification and the clearing method notification are executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, the clear notification 1 may end after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses.

(When a stop preparation state is provided: Notification regarding the amount of balls to be played when an abnormality is detected during the stop preparation state)
In the above, when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the main control board 1310 is in the stop state and the game is restricted, but the amount of paid balls reaches the specific value during the jackpot game (hitting game). When it does, it may be constructed such that the stop state is not set until the big win game is over, and the game is shifted to the stop state when the big win game is over. For example, when the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value in the middle round of the big win game, the state is not stopped immediately, but is shifted to the stop state by completing the last round of the big win game. In other words, when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value during the big win game, it is possible to obtain the paid balls exceeding the specific value. In this way, the dissatisfaction of the player can be reduced by not ending the jackpot game when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during the jackpot game.

In this example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during the big win game, the game is shifted to a stop preparation state, and the big win game is continued although it is decided to shift to the stop state. As with the stop preparation state, the stop preparation state is configured to be maintained or cleared when the power is turned off and then turned on again.

Specifically, in the restriction clear pattern table 4, when the power is turned on, only when the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) like the power-on patterns 2 and 3, the "restriction of the game during the stop state ” is cleared (initialized), but the stop preparation state is also cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are maintained, but the stop preparation state is also maintained. , is maintained. That is, as with the stop state, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the stop preparation state when the power is turned off and then turned on again. For example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and a stop preparation state is generated, and if you want to clear the stop preparation state, after the power is turned off, the power is turned on so as to clear the stop preparation state. Although it is sufficient to perform an operation, the jackpot game being executed is cleared in accordance with such an operation at the time of turning on the power. On the other hand, when it is desired to maintain the stop preparation state, after the power is turned off, a power-on operation may be performed so as to maintain the stop preparation state. It will be resumed. When the power is turned on, if the power-on pattern 5 is selected, the above-described ball extraction process is executed and the game is not started. maintain.

FIG. 134 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a slight abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state.

First, at the timing t1 during the jackpot game, it is determined that the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value due to the payout of the winning balls based on the winning balls entering the winning opening, but the main control board 1310 determines that the winning ball enters the winning opening. is detected, the stop flag is turned ON, and the state is shifted to the stop preparation state. In addition, before the timing t1 when shifting to the stop preparation state, the game is controlled to the normal state (not the stop state), and the jackpot game is executed. The behavior in the normal state (state not in the stop state) is as described above.

In addition, in the stop preparation state, the jackpot game being executed is continued. Further, in the stop preparation state, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t1, the effect display device 1600 is used to perform standby notification to inform the outside that the number of balls to be paid has already reached a specific value. For example, in the effect display device 1600, in addition to displaying a display (normal display) relating to the jackpot game that is being executed, as a standby display, it indicates that the amount of paid balls has already reached a specific value. is over." is displayed. In this manner, in the stop preparation state, advance notice is given to the effect that the game will shift to the stop state when the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, the progress of the jackpot game, etc., other than the execution of the standby notification, does not change from the situation before the timing t1, and the behavior of the normal state (the state that is not the stopping state) is maintained.

In this example, only the effect display device 1600 is used to execute the standby notification, and the members other than the effect display device 1600 are prioritized to perform normal operations. Thereby, in the stop preparation state, it is possible to easily grasp the information about the jackpot game being executed.

Next, a case where a slight abnormality is detected at timing tx during the stop preparation state will be described. When a slight abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to notify the occurrence of the abnormality to the outside, and the effect display device 1600 and the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame decoration member) , lamp B (the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), the speaker, and the external terminal board, as anomaly notification, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed. On the other hand, regarding the progress of the jackpot game, etc., other than the execution of the abnormality notification, there is no change from the situation in which a slight abnormality was not detected before the timing tx, and the normal state (state that is not stopped). Behavior is to be maintained.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5), and the speaker At the timing tx, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed. For example, when detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 as a minor abnormality, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "door open error" as the error display A, and also displays the current situation. As the display C, a message saying "The jackpot is over and today is over" is displayed to indicate that the amount of paid balls has already reached a specific value.

As described above, when a slight abnormality is detected during the stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 displays not only the error display A but also the current situation display C, and the amount of balls already put out is a specific value. has been reached. At this time, if the power is turned off, the detection of the minor abnormality is resolved, but when the power is turned on again with the power turn-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, the stop preparation state is maintained while the power supply When the power is turned on again in the input patterns 2 and 3, the stop preparation state is cleared. In this regard, in this example, after the hall manager has grasped that the number of balls put out has already reached a specific value and is moving to a stop preparation state, which power-on pattern should the power be turned on again? can decide what

In addition, during the stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 displays, as a standby display, a message ``The jackpot is over and today is over'' to indicate that the number of balls paid out has already reached a specific value. However, if a slight abnormality is detected during such a stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 may display the same data as the standby display as the current situation display C. When the standby display is used to display the current status display C, the current status display C is displayed as the highest layer, and the display is controlled so that it can be continuously recognized during the execution of the abnormality notification. and As a result, it is possible to prevent the current status display C from becoming unrecognizable.

Further, in this example, when a minor abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state, or when a serious abnormality described later occurs, the current situation display C is executed. does not end even if the amount of balls paid out changes after that. Further, the current status display C can be erased, for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed until the error display A is terminated, or when an abnormality is resolved by an administrator's operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the current situation display C from being displayed more than necessary.

Further, in this example, when a minor abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state, or when a severe abnormality described later occurs, the current situation display C is executed on the effect display device 1600. For example, , In the case of a frequently occurring operational error (error) such as the top tray becoming full in conventional type gaming machines , the effect display device 1600 does not execute the current situation display C. As a result, it is possible to prevent the current situation display C from being displayed frequently.

In addition, in this example, when a minor abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state, or when a serious abnormality described later occurs, the current situation display C is executed on the effect display device 1600. Also when a RAM error occurs, the present situation display C is executed on the effect display device 1600 assuming that a serious abnormality has occurred. However, when a ram error occurs, there is a possibility that the memory itself regarding the stop preparation state is abnormal, so the effect display device 1600 may not execute the current situation display C.

In addition, at the timing tx, the lamps A and B light up or blink in a single color as error light emission, and the speaker outputs a sound "Door opening error" as an error sound. I'm trying

A security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing tx. As a result, when a minor abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can recognize that a minor abnormality has occurred.

Moreover, in this example, although the abnormality notification is started at the timing tx, the abnormality notification is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. In other words, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), the speaker, and the external terminal board , to return to normal operation. However, if it is detected that a minor abnormality such as closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 has been resolved before the predetermined period elapses, the abnormality notification is terminated at that point.

Next, at timing tz, it is determined that the big win game has ended. state”. The behavior of the stop state is as described above.

Further, after shifting to the stop state, the power is turned off at timing t2, and the power is turned on again at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned on again, the restriction clear pattern table 4 is used as the restriction clear pattern table. Here, the power is turned on again at the timing t3. As the power-on pattern, the power-on patterns 2 and 3 that clear the number of balls and the stop state are selected, and the timing t3. ', the power is turned on again, and power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as the power-on pattern, in which the number of balls is cleared but the stop state is maintained. However, these behaviors are as explained in FIG.

FIG. 135 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state.

First, before the timing tx at which a serious abnormality is detected, the game is controlled to a stop preparation state and a jackpot game is executed. The behavior of the stop preparation state is as described above.

Here, a case where a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx during the stop preparation state will be described. When a serious abnormality is detected, the game ball cannot be shot, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed. In other words, when a serious abnormality occurs, the jackpot game being executed is stopped.

In addition, when a serious abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is executed to inform the outside that the abnormality has occurred. , as an anomaly notification, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5), and the speaker At the timing tx, the operation at the time of error occurrence is executed. For example, when magnetism is detected as a serious abnormality, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "magnetism abnormality" as the error display B, and also displays the current situation display C as the amount of balls already released. To indicate that a specific value has been reached, a message is displayed that reads, "The jackpot is over and today is over."

As described above, when a serious abnormality is detected during the stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 displays not only the error display A but also the current situation display C, and the amount of balls already put out is a specific value. has been reached. At this time, if the power is cut off, the detection of the serious abnormality is canceled, but when the power is turned on again in the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4, the stop preparation state is maintained, while the power supply When the power is turned on again in the input patterns 2 and 3, the stop preparation state is cleared. In this regard, in this example, after the hall manager has grasped that the number of balls put out has already reached a specific value and is moving to a stop preparation state, which power-on pattern should the power be turned on again? can decide what

In addition, during the stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 displays, as a standby display, a message ``The jackpot is over and today is over'' to indicate that the number of balls paid out has already reached a specific value. However, if a serious abnormality is detected during such a stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 may display the same data as the standby display as the current situation display C. When the standby display is used to display the current status display C, the current status display C is displayed as the highest layer, and the display is controlled so that it can be continuously recognized during the execution of the abnormality notification. and As a result, it is possible to prevent the current status display C from becoming unrecognizable.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at the timing tx, the LED lights or blinks in a single color as error light emission.

In addition, in the lamp C, as the function display unit 1400, the status indicator, the normal symbol indicator, the normal reservation indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special number indicator, the second special symbol indicator, the second A special hold number indicator, a round indicator, etc. are provided, but all of their LEDs are lit. However, as another example, the function display unit 1400 is provided with an LED dedicated to anomaly notification, and when a serious abnormality is detected, the LED dedicated to anomaly notification is turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. can be

Also, the speaker outputs a voice saying "A magnetic abnormality has occurred" as an error sound.

Also, the movable body is in an inoperable state at the timing tx. For example, when the movable body is in motion at the timing tx, the movable body is forcibly stopped in the middle of the motion. However, as another example, after the timing tx, the movable body that is not in the initial position may be returned to the initial position, and then the movable body may be stopped. As a result, even if the movable body is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the timing tx, the movable body returns to the initial position after the timing tx, and the effect display device 1600 executes It is possible to make it difficult to overlook the error display B and the current situation display C that are displayed.

A security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing tx. As a result, when a serious abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can recognize that a serious abnormality has occurred.

Also, when a serious abnormality is detected at the timing tx, when the player operates the handle 160, the game balls are not allowed to be shot to the game area 5a.

In addition, when a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx, the number of game balls B that entered the entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) (number of entering balls) and paid out as prize balls The number of game balls B (number of payouts) is not counted. In other words, it is disabled to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, and is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. However, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) is counted, and by calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering, It may be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, when a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls for those that have detected balls entering the winning opening before timing tx. The number of game balls paid out as prize balls can be added to the number of balls possessed by the player. As a result, the player can obtain prize balls for the number of game balls until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value. On the other hand, at timing tx, after detecting a serious abnormality, when a ball entering the winning hole is detected, the predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player is determined. cannot be added to However, if a serious abnormality is detected at the timing tx, it may be configured not to detect the ball entering the winning hole. Even if a ball enters a winning hole, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls and are not added to the number of balls possessed by the player.

Also, in this example, although the anomaly notification is started at the timing tx, the anomaly notification is not terminated even after a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed. For this reason, when a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power supply to end the abnormality notification, and then turn on the power supply again so that the progress of the game can be resumed. I have to.

Next, after a serious abnormality is detected during the stop preparation state, the power is turned off at timing t2 to end the abnormality notification, and the power is turned on again at timing t3. . In this example, when the power is turned on again, the restriction clear pattern table 4 is used as the restriction clear pattern table.

First, the power is turned on again at timing t3, and the case where power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as the power-on pattern for clearing the number of balls paid out and the stop state will be described. When the power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized), so the information regarding the big win game being executed is cleared. In addition, "the amount of balls to be played before the start of the stop state and after the start of the stop state" and "restrictions on games during the stop state" are cleared (initialized), and the stop preparation state is also: Cleared (initialized). Therefore, regardless of which of the power-on patterns 2 and 3 is selected, by clearing the stop preparation state, the normal state (state not in the stop state) is controlled. That is, it is possible to restart the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. However, the jackpot game that was being executed is not restarted. The behavior in the normal state (state not in the stop state) is as described above.

Effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of game board 5), and speaker at time t3 , clear notification 2 is executed. For example, in the effect display device 1600, as an initial display, in addition to displaying a predetermined combination of decorative symbols, as a clear notification 2, a "restriction" is displayed to indicate that the amount of balls to be played and the state of preparation for stopping are cleared. Cleared." message is displayed. As a result, the hall manager can confirm that the amount of balls put out and the state of preparation for stopping the game have been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding the clear notification 2, when the power is cut off and the game is not ready to stop, it is not necessary to notify that the game has been cleared, or to notify that the amount of balls to be played has been cleared, or to notify that the ball has been paid out at the time of clearing. You may make it notify an amount. As for the clear notification 2, a common notification is executed when the stop state is cleared and when the stop preparation state is cleared, but a different notification may be executed.

Further, in the lamps A and B, the LED lights up or flashes in red as the clear notification 2 at timing t3.

At timing t3, the loudspeaker outputs a voice saying "restriction cleared" as clear notification 2 to indicate that the amount of balls to be put out and the state of preparation for stopping the game have been cleared.

Also, in this example, the clear notification 2 is started at the timing t3, but the clear notification 2 is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. That is, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker I am trying to get it working again. However, the normal operation may be started before the clear notification 2 is finished. Further, the clear notification 2 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be continuously displayed even after a predetermined period of time has passed. Then, such a clear notice 2 may be erased by an administrator's operation. As a result, unless the clear notification 2 is erased by the administrator's operation, the clear notification 2 remains displayed, making it difficult for fraud to occur.

Next, at timing t3', the power is turned on again. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as the power-on pattern, in which the number of balls put out is cleared but the stop state is maintained. will be explained. When power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, since the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, the information regarding the jackpot game being executed is maintained. Clear (initialize) the ``amount of balls to be played before the start of the stoppage state and after the start of the stoppage state,'' while maintaining the ``restrictions on games during the stoppage state.'' However, the state of readiness to stop is also being maintained. Therefore, the stop preparation state is maintained regardless of which of the power-on patterns 1 and 4 is selected. That is, in the stop preparation state, the jackpot game being executed is restarted. The behavior of the stop preparation state is as described above.

Effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of game board 5), and speaker at timing t3' , clear notification 1 is executed. For example, in the effect display device 1600, as the clear notification 1, a message "the amount of paid balls has been cleared" is displayed to indicate that the amount of paid balls has been cleared. As a result, the hall manager can confirm that the ball payout amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. However, regarding the clear notification 1, when the game is in the stopped state when the power is cut off, it may be notified that the stopped state has been maintained, and not only that the ball payout amount has been cleared, but also the ball payout at the time of clearing. You may make it notify an amount.

Further, in the lamps A and B, at timing t3', the green LED lights or blinks as the clear notification 1. FIG.

At timing t3', the loudspeaker outputs a voice saying "the amount of paid balls has been cleared" as clear notification 1 to indicate that the amount of paid balls has been cleared.

Also, in this example, the clear notification 1 is started at the timing t3, but the clear notification 1 is terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. That is, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker I am trying to get it working again. However, the normal operation may be started before the clear notification 1 ends.

Specifically, in the effect display device 1600, in addition to displaying a display (normal display) regarding the restarted jackpot game, as a standby display, " The message "The jackpot is over and today is over" is displayed. In addition to this, the effect display device 1600 displays a message ``If you clear the ram, it will be in a normal state'' so as to show the method of clearing the stop preparation state to the hall manager as a clearing method display. As a result, the hall manager can understand that the stop preparation state cannot be cleared unless power-on patterns 2 and 3 accompanied by RAM clear are selected when the power is turned on again. However, the clearing method notification may be executed after the transition from the stop preparation state to the stop state.

In this example, when the power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected when the power is turned on again, after the clear notification 1 is finished, the effect display device 1600 performs normal display (display regarding the restarted jackpot game). and the standby display are displayed, the normal display and the standby display may be executed in parallel with the clear notification 1 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from missing winning the ball when the jackpot game is restarted.

In addition, in this example, in order to clear the ball output amount but maintain the stop preparation state, after completing the clear notification 1, the standby display notification and the clear method notification are executed. Priority is given to clear notification 1. As a result, the hall manager can confirm that the ball payout amount has been cleared when the power is turned on again. As another example, the standby display notification and the clear method notification may be executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, or the clear notification 1, the standby display notification, and the clear method notification may be alternately switched and executed. good. Also, when the standby display notification and the clear method notification are executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, the clear notification 1 is executed for some members among the plurality of members, and the standby display notification and the clear method notification are executed for the remaining members. may be executed, or the clear notification 1 may be executed in a part of the area, and the standby display notification and the clear method notification may be executed in the remaining area, even though the members are the same. Also, even when the standby display notification and the clear method notification are executed in parallel with the clear notification 1, the clear notification 1 may end after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses. Also, the clearing method notification may end after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses.

FIG. 136 shows an example of a specific effect when a slight abnormality occurs during the normal state or stop state. In this example, 100000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and the restriction pattern 3 is selected as the "limitation pattern" described above. In other words, if the restriction pattern 3 is set, when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value (100,000 shots), the game will be stopped with "game stop" and "fire stop".

As shown in FIG. 136(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (effect based on the variation pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, and in the central area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols change. displaying. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, a variable display of the second decorative pattern is performed. In addition, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, even though the game ball entered the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, the reserved display is displayed for the amount of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 136(B), as a slight abnormality during the normal state, when the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected, the variable display of the decorative pattern is continued, but the effect display device 1600 In the center area, as the error display A, a message is displayed indicating that the body frame 4 is open. In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as the current situation display A, the remaining amount of payout balls until the game is restricted (remaining amount of payout balls until the amount of payout balls reaches a specific value) is displayed as "game limit". +42,000 shots remaining until now" is displayed. The error display A and the current status display A are displayed in a higher layer than information display related to the game such as decorative symbols. Further, the current status display A is displayed at a position that does not overlap the information display and the error display A regarding the game. As a result, when a minor abnormality occurs, it is possible to reliably grasp the amount of balls remaining until the game is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 136(C), when a predetermined error end condition such as closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is established, the effect display device 1600 clears the error display A and the current situation display A.

As shown in FIG. 136(D), when the amount of paid balls approaches a specific value, for example, when the number of balls remaining until the amount of paid balls reaches the specific value becomes "+500 shots", the effect display device 1600 In the upper area of , as an operation at the time of advance notice, an advance notice display of "remaining +500 shots until game limit" is displayed, which indicates the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value. It should be noted that the advance notification display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display of information regarding the game such as decorative patterns.

As shown in FIG. 136(E), when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value, the state is shifted to the stop state and the game is restricted, but the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stop state. . As an image corresponding to the stop state, a message ``game limit'' is displayed, accompanied by ``the game is restricted because the limit of 100,000 balls per day has been reached.'', ``please call a staff member.'' The checkout button is active." is displayed. The settlement button here means the count button switch 180 for executing settlement processing. In addition, when the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays a stop pattern of the decorative pattern, a stop pattern of the second decorative pattern, a pending display, or a pre-announcement display. Regarding the information, when the message "Play limit" is displayed after the amount of balls released reaches a specific value, it will not be displayed (make it invisible), and the message will be displayed on the darkened screen. there is As a result, it is possible to grasp that the number of balls put out has reached a specific value and that the game is restricted, and it is possible to grasp that the game restriction cannot be released without the operation of the hall manager. . Also, it can be understood that the number of balls held by the player can be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180 .

In the above description, before the number of balls to be put out reaches the specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays the stop design of the decorative design, the stop design of the second decorative design, the pending display, and the advance notification display. Such game-related information is executed in such a way that it becomes unrecognizable when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value. However, when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value, part of the game-related information may be made unrecognizable, and other information may be made recognizable. For example, since the advance notice display is information about whether or not to execute the game restriction, it is made unrecognizable, and the decorative pattern stop pattern, the second decorative pattern stop pattern, and the pending display are: You may make it recognizable. This makes it possible to grasp under what circumstances the amount of paid balls reached the specific value even after the amount of paid balls has reached the specific value.

As shown in FIG. 136(F), when detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 as a slight abnormality during the stopping state, the variable display of the decorative pattern is continued, but the effect display device 1600 In the center area, as the error display A, a message is displayed indicating that the body frame 4 is open. In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as the current situation display B, "Game You have reached your limit" message in a specific display area. This specific display area is set as part of the display area in the effect display device 1600, and is a display area that is also used for the advance notice display and the current situation display A described above. It is defined as a fixed area that remains unchanged regardless of the state. These error display A and current situation display B are configured to be displayed on a layer higher (front side) than the layer that displays other effect images such as the image display corresponding to the stop state. , in this example, an error display A and a current status display B are displayed as the highest layer. Further, the current status display B is displayed at a position not overlapping the image display (message) corresponding to the stop state and the error display A. FIG. As a result, when a slight abnormality occurs, it is possible to reliably grasp that the game is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 136(G), when a predetermined error termination condition such as closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is established, the effect display device 1600 clears the error display A and the current situation display B. FIG.

In this example, in order to satisfy a predetermined clear condition for terminating the stop state, it is necessary to turn on the power again according to a predetermined power-on pattern after the power has been turned off. Here, the restriction clear pattern table 4 is used, and power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as power-on patterns when the power is turned on. , power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, in which the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, the number of balls paid out is cleared, but the stop state is maintained.

First, when power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected for clearing the game state at the time of power-off and clearing the number of balls and the stop state when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off after shifting to the stop state, By clearing the stop state, the restrictions on the game in the stop state are lifted. In addition, information on the remaining fluctuation display when interrupted at the time of transition to the stop state and information on hold are retained after transition to the stop state or when the power is turned off, but are turned on again after the power is turned off. In some cases, by clearing the remaining information about the variable display and the information about the suspension at the time of such interruption, it is assumed to start in a low-probability state with no suspension. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136(H-1), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no pending display and the decorative symbols are stopped at the initial symbols. In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as the clear notification 2, there is displayed a message "restriction cleared" indicating that the number of balls to be put out and the stop state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the game such as the decorative pattern, and is displayed at a position not overlapping with the information display regarding the game. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to ascertain with certainty that the amount of balls put out and the stoppage state have been cleared.

On the other hand, when the player selects power-on patterns 1 and 4, which maintain the game state at the time of the power cut-off and clear the number of balls released but maintain the stopped state after shifting to the stopped state, when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off. , the restriction of the game as the stop state is not lifted. Therefore, the effect display device 1600 displays, as the clear notification 1, the message "the amount of paid balls has been cleared" indicating that the amount of paid balls has been cleared, and then displays the image shown in FIG. 136(H-2). I am trying to display it again. In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as a clearing method display, there is displayed a message "If you clear the ram, you will be in a normal state", which indicates how to clear the stop state for the hall manager. This clear method display is displayed in a higher layer than the image display corresponding to the stop state, and is displayed at a position not overlapping the image display (message) corresponding to the stop state. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to ascertain with certainty that the power must be turned on again with RAM clear in order to release the restriction on the game.

FIG. 137 shows an example of a specific effect when a serious abnormality occurs during the normal state or stop state. In this example, 100000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and the restriction pattern 3 is selected as the "limitation pattern" described above. In other words, if the restriction pattern 3 is set, when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value (100,000 shots), the game will be stopped with "game stop" and "fire stop".

First, a case in which a serious abnormality occurs during a normal state will be described. As shown in FIG. 137(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (effect based on the variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, and in the central area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are varied. displaying. Also, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, a variable display of the second decorative pattern is performed. In addition, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, even though the game ball entered the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, the reserved display is displayed for the amount of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 137(B), when magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality in the normal state, the variable display of decorative symbols is stopped, and an error state occurs in which the progress of the game is disabled. , the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Magnetic Abnormality" indicating that magnetism is detected as an error display B, along with the message "Please call the staff" and "Return by turning on the power again & resetting the limit. is displayed. Further, when the magnetism is detected, the effect display device 1600 displays the stop pattern of the decorative pattern, the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern, and the pending display. When the message "magnetism anomaly" is displayed later, it is not displayed (made invisible), and the message is displayed on the darkened screen. As a result, it is possible to detect the magnetism and recognize that an error state has occurred. In addition, it is possible to grasp that the error state cannot be resolved unless the power is turned on again, and that the restriction on the game will be lifted when the power is turned on again.

In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as the current situation display A, the remaining amount of payout balls until the game is restricted (remaining amount of payout balls until the amount of payout balls reaches a specific value) is displayed as "game limit". +42,000 shots remaining until now" is displayed. The error display B and the current status display A are displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the game such as decorative symbols. Further, the current status display A is displayed at a position not overlapping the error display B (message). As a result, when a serious abnormality is detected, it is possible to reliably grasp the amount of balls remaining until the game is restricted.

In this example, it is necessary to turn on the power again after turning off the power in order to satisfy the predetermined clear condition for terminating the error state related to the serious abnormality. Here, the restriction clear pattern table 4 is used, and power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as power-on patterns when the power is turned on. , power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, in which the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, the number of balls paid out is cleared, but the stop state is maintained.

First, when power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected for clearing the game state at the time of power-off and clearing the number of balls and the stop state when the power is turned on again after an error state has occurred, The game can be started by clearing the error state. In addition, the information on the remaining fluctuation display when interrupted at the time of the error state and the information on hold are retained after the error state occurs or when the power is turned off, but after the power is turned off, the information is retained. In some cases, by clearing the remaining information about the variable display and the information about the suspension at the time of such interruption, it is assumed to start in a low-probability state with no suspension. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137(C-1), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no pending display and the decorative symbols are stopped at the initial symbols. In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as the clear notification 2, there is displayed a message "restriction cleared" indicating that the number of balls to be put out and the stop state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the game such as the decorative pattern, and is displayed at a position not overlapping with the information display regarding the game. However, in this example, since it is not in the stopped state at the time when the error state occurs, it is not necessary to display that the stopped state has been cleared as the clear notification 2, and the number of balls paid out has been cleared as the clear notification 2. It is also possible to display the effect and the number of balls released at the time the game is cleared.

Similarly, power-on patterns 1 and 4 were selected to maintain the game state at the time of power-off and clear the number of balls, but maintain the stop state when the power was turned off and then turned back on after an error occurred. In this case, the game can be started by clearing the error state. However, information about the remaining fluctuation display when interrupted at the time of an error state and information about hold are retained after an error state occurs or when the power is turned off, but after the power is turned off Even in such a case, by maintaining the information about the remaining fluctuation display at the time of such interruption and the information about the suspension, there is a suspension and the state in the middle of the previous variation is resumed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137(C-2), the effect display device 1600 restarts the variable display of the decorative symbols and the variable display of the second decorative symbols. In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, a message "The amount of paid balls has been cleared" is displayed as the clear notification 1, indicating that the amount of paid balls has been cleared. This clear notice 1 is displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the game such as the decorative pattern, and is displayed at a position not overlapping with the information display regarding the game. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to ascertain with certainty that the amount of paid balls has been cleared. In this example, the variable display of the decorative symbols and the variable display of the second decorative symbols are resumed before the clear notification 1 is terminated. However, after the clear notification 1 is terminated, the variable display of the decorative symbols Or you may restart the variable display of the second decorative pattern.

Next, a description will be given of a case where a severe abnormality occurs during the stopping state. As shown in FIG. 137(A'), when the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value, the state is shifted to the stopping state and the game is restricted. be. As an image corresponding to the stop state, a message ``Game limit'' is displayed, accompanied by ``Playing is restricted because the limit of 100,000 balls per day has been reached.'', ``Please call a staff member.'', `` The checkout button is active." is displayed. The settlement button here means the count button switch 180 for executing settlement processing. In addition, when the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays a stop pattern of the decorative pattern, a stop pattern of the second decorative pattern, a pending display, or a pre-announcement display. Regarding the information, when the message "Play limit" is displayed after the amount of balls released reaches a specific value, it will not be displayed (make it invisible), and the message will be displayed on the blacked out screen. there is

As shown in FIG. 137(B'), when magnetism is detected as a serious abnormality during the stop state, the effect display device 1600 displays "magnetism abnormality" as an error display B to indicate that magnetism has been detected. Along with this, the messages "Please call the person in charge" and "The power will be restored and the restrictions will be initialized." are displayed. Also, when magnetism is detected, the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stop state. , is not displayed (not visible), and a message is displayed on the darkened screen. As a result, it is possible to detect the magnetism and recognize that an error state has occurred. In addition, it is possible to grasp that the error state cannot be resolved unless the power is turned on again, and that the restriction on the game will be lifted when the power is turned on again.

In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as the current situation display B, "Game You have reached your limit" message in a specific display area. This specific display area is set as a part of the display area in the effect display device 1600, and is a display area that is also used for the advance notice display and the current situation display A described above. It is defined as a fixed area that remains unchanged regardless of the state. These error display B and current situation display B are configured to be displayed on a layer higher (front side) than the layer that displays other effect images such as the image display corresponding to the stop state. , in this example, an error display B and a current status display B are displayed as the highest layer. Further, the current status display B is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the error display B (message). As a result, when a serious abnormality occurs, it is possible to reliably grasp that the game is restricted.

In this example, it is necessary to turn on the power again after turning off the power in order to satisfy the predetermined clear condition for terminating the error state related to the serious abnormality. Here, the restriction clear pattern table 4 is used, and power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as power-on patterns when the power is turned on. , power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, in which the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, the number of balls paid out is cleared, but the stop state is maintained.

First, power-on patterns 2 and 3 were selected to clear the game state at the time of power shutdown and to clear the number of balls and the stop state when the power was turned off and turned back on after an error occurred during the stop state. In this case, the error state is cleared and the stop state is cleared, so that the restriction on the game in the stop state is lifted and the game can be started. In addition, information on the remaining fluctuation display when interrupted at the time of transition to the stop state and information on hold are retained after transition to the stop state or when the power is turned off, but are turned on again after the power is turned off. In some cases, by clearing the remaining information about the variable display and the information about the suspension at the time of such interruption, it is assumed to start in a low-probability state with no suspension. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137(C'-1), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no pending display and the decorative symbols are stopped at the initial symbols. In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as the clear notification 2, there is displayed a message "restriction cleared" indicating that the number of balls to be put out and the stop state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the game such as the decorative pattern, and is displayed at a position not overlapping with the information display regarding the game. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to ascertain with certainty that the amount of balls put out and the stoppage state have been cleared.

On the other hand, power-on patterns 1 and 4 maintain the game state at the time of power cut-off and clear the number of balls to be played but maintain the stop state when the power is turned on again after an error state occurs during the stop state. is selected, the error state is cleared, but the game restriction as the stop state is not lifted. Therefore, the effect display device 1600 displays, as the clear notification 1, the message "The amount of paid balls has been cleared" indicating that the amount of paid balls has been cleared, and then the image shown in FIG. 137 (C'-2). is displayed again. In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as a clearing method display, there is displayed a message "If you clear the ram, you will be in a normal state", which indicates how to clear the stop state for the hall manager. This clear method display is displayed in a higher layer than the image display corresponding to the stop state, and is displayed at a position not overlapping the image display (message) corresponding to the stop state. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to ascertain with certainty that the power must be turned on again with RAM clear in order to release the restriction on the game.

FIG. 138 shows an example of a specific effect when a minor abnormality or a severe abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state. In this example, when the game ball enters the big winning hole during the jackpot game, the number of balls output reaches a specific value, so that the state shifts to the stop preparation state, and after the jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the stop state. do. Also, in this example, 100000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and the restriction pattern 3 is selected as the "limitation pattern" described above. In other words, if the restriction pattern 3 is set, when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value (100,000 shots), the game will be stopped with "game stop" and "fire stop". In addition, in this example, when the lottery result of the special symbol results in a big win, a 10-round big win game of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 138(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (effect based on the variation pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, and in the central area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are varied. displaying. Here, according to the lottery result of the special pattern, or by receiving the game ball B into the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, etc., during the "Renso mode" in which the high probability state continues , "777" is displayed as a decorative design stop design in the central region of the effect display device 1600 by winning the lottery result of the special design. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative design is performed, but since the lottery result of the special design is a win, "O" is displayed as the stop design of the second decorative design. are doing. In addition, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, even though the game ball entered the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, the reserved display is displayed for the amount of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, in the lower right area of the effect display device 1600, a message of "continuous mode" indicating that the "continuous mode" is being displayed, and a game area 5a on the right side of the effect display device 1600 during the jackpot game. A "right-handed" arrow is displayed to instruct the user to aim for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2005 provided in the .

In addition, when the number of balls to be put out approaches a specific value, for example, when the number of balls remaining until the number of balls to be put out reaches the specific value becomes "+1400 shots", the upper area of the effect display device 1600 displays the As the operation of , a pre-announcement display of "remaining +1400 shots until game limit" indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value is displayed. Incidentally, the advance notification display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the jackpot game being executed.

As shown in FIG. 138(B), at the start of the jackpot game, the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" Along with starting to open and close the object winning opening 2006, it is informed that the game ball should aim to enter the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 138(C), due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the big prize opening 2005 during the big win game, the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value is "+0". At the time of "starting" (at the time of transition to the stop preparation state), in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as an operation at the time of advance notification, the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls to be released reaches a specific value A pre-announcement display of "+0 shots remaining until limit" is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example). Here, "8R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19900 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. Then, when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) elapses after the pre-notice display of "remaining +0 shots until game limit" is displayed, the standby display shown in FIG. 138(D) is displayed.

In this example, the total number of prize balls displayed on the performance display device 1600 and the content of the advance notification display are reflected by the amount of the prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the big winning hole 2005. However, regarding the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display, the total number of prize balls is not the time when the game ball enters the big prize hole 2005 when the amount of balls to be output reaches a specific value. The display is continued until a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the number of prize balls and the details of the advance notice display have been reflected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the information on whether or not the number of paid balls has reached the specific value, and to allow the player to surely recognize the reason for starting the stopping state after that.

In the above, regarding the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display, the number of prize balls will be reflected in the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display, not when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value. Although the display is continued until the time, the display may be terminated and the standby display may be displayed at the time when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value. As a result, when the amount of put out balls reaches a specific value, the state shifts to the stop preparation state, but by displaying the standby display at the same time, it is possible to immediately grasp that the state has shifted to the stop preparation state.

In addition, when the amount of output balls reaches a specific value, it shifts to a stop preparation state, but since the jackpot game being executed continues, it is necessary for the player to continue shooting game balls. The "right-handed" arrow that promotes firing is continuously displayed.

As shown in FIG. 138(D), after shifting to the stop preparation state, the upper area of the effect display device 1600 displays a standby display. Specifically, as the standby display, a message is displayed that indicates that the number of balls paid out has already reached a specific value, ie, "The jackpot is over and today is over." As a result, in the stop preparation state, it can be grasped that the game will be restricted by shifting to the stop state when the big win game ends. It should be noted that the standby display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the jackpot game being executed. As a result, it is possible to grasp both the fact that the game has shifted to the stop preparation state and the information regarding the jackpot game being executed. Here, "9R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19915 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 138(E), as a slight abnormality during the stop preparation state, when the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected, the big hit game is continued, but the central region of the effect display device 1600 In this case, as the error display A, a message "Door opening error. Please call a staff member" is displayed to indicate that the body frame 4 is open. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, as the current situation display C, the contents of the standby display are continued, and a message "The jackpot ends and today is over" indicating that the number of balls paid out has already reached a specific value. is displayed. The error display A and the current situation display C are displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the jackpot game. Further, the current status display C is displayed at a position not overlapping the information display and the error display A (message) relating to the jackpot game. As a result, when a slight abnormality occurs, it is possible to know with certainty that the amount of paid balls has already reached a specific value and that the game is ready to stop.

As shown in FIG. 138(F), when a predetermined error termination condition such as closing of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is established, the effect display device 1600 erases the error display A, but the current situation display C is displayed. is continuously displayed as a standby display. Here, "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "20020 GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 138(G), at the end of the jackpot game, the ending display associated with the end of the jackpot game is executed, and in the central area of the effect display device 1600, "Hit end! Good job! Please download the special privilege." !” is displayed. In addition, a camera-readable code is displayed in the lower right area of the effect display area 1600, and by reading the code, it is possible to download the special benefits. This special privilege can be obtained only when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during the jackpot game, thereby reducing the player's dissatisfaction that the game is restricted due to the shift to the stopping state. be able to. Although the standby display is not displayed at the end of the jackpot game, it may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 138(H), after the big win game is over, the state is shifted to the stopping state and the game is restricted, but the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopping state. As an image corresponding to the stop state, a message ``Game limit'' is displayed, accompanied by ``Playing is restricted because the limit of 100,000 balls per day has been reached.'', ``Please call a staff member.'', `` The checkout button is active." is displayed. The settlement button here means the count button switch 180 for executing settlement processing. In addition, the effect display device 1600 does not display the ending display accompanying the end of the jackpot game (makes it invisible) when the message "game limit" is displayed, and displays the message on the screen that has turned dark. I have to. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the number of balls put out has reached a specific value and that the game is restricted, and it is possible to grasp that the game restriction cannot be released without the operation of the hall manager. . Also, it can be understood that the number of balls held by the player can be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180 .

However, in the performance display device 1600, the code displayed during the ending display accompanying the end of the big win game is continued to be displayed even after the image corresponding to the stop state is displayed. Also, the code displayed during the ending display accompanying the end of the jackpot game is displayed at a position that does not overlap the image (message) corresponding to the stop state. As a result, the code can be read without haste even after the transition to the stop state, and the download of the special privilege can be prevented from failing.

Next, a case where a serious abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state will be described. As shown in FIG. 138(E'), when magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality during preparation for stopping, the jackpot game being executed is stopped, and an error state occurs in which the progress of the game is disabled. However, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Magnetic Abnormality" indicating that magnetism has been detected as an error display B, along with the message "Please call the staff" and "Return by turning on the power again & resetting the limit. is displayed. In addition, when magnetism is detected, the effect display device 1600 displays information about the big win game, but for such information display about the big win game, after magnetism is detected, the message "Magnetic Abnormality" is displayed. At that point, the message is displayed on the darkened screen without displaying it (making it invisible). As a result, it is possible to detect the magnetism and recognize that an error state has occurred. In addition, it is possible to grasp that the error state cannot be resolved unless the power is turned on again, and that the restriction on the game will be lifted when the power is turned on again.

In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as the current situation display C, the contents of the standby display are continued, and the message "The jackpot ends and today is over" indicating that the number of balls paid out has already reached a specific value. is displayed. The error display B and the current situation display C are displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the jackpot game. Further, the current status display C is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the error display B (message). As a result, when a serious abnormality occurs, it is possible to know with certainty that the amount of balls paid out has already reached a specific value and that the game is ready to stop.

In this example, it is necessary to turn on the power again after turning off the power in order to satisfy the predetermined clear condition for ending the error state related to the serious abnormality. Here, the restriction clear pattern table 4 is used, and power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as power-on patterns when the power is turned on. , power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, in which the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, the number of balls to be put out is cleared, but the stop state is maintained.

First, select power-on patterns 2 and 3 that clear the game state at the time of power shutdown, and clear the amount of balls and the stop state when the power is turned on again after an error occurs during the stop preparation state. In this case, the error state is cleared and the game can be started, but the stop preparation state is also cleared, so that the planned stop state after the stop preparation state ends. Game restrictions are not enforced. In addition, information about the remaining jackpot game when it was interrupted at the time when the error state occurred and information about the hold are retained after the error state occurred or when the power was turned off, but after the power was turned off. Sometimes, by clearing the information about the remaining jackpot game at the time of such interruption and the information about the suspension, the game is started in a low-probability state with no suspension. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 138(F'-1), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which the decorative symbols are stopped at the initial symbols without any pending display. In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as the clear notification 2, there is displayed a message "restriction cleared" indicating that the number of balls to be put out and the state of preparation for stopping the game have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the game such as the decorative pattern, and is displayed at a position not overlapping with the information display regarding the game. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it is possible to ascertain with certainty that the amount of balls put out and the state of preparation for stopping the game have been cleared.

On the other hand, after an error occurs during the stop preparation state, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the power-on pattern 1 maintains the game state at the time of the power shutdown, clears the number of balls paid out, but maintains the stop state. When 4 is selected, the error state is cleared and the game can be started, but the stop preparation state is not cleared. In addition, information about the remaining jackpot game when it was interrupted at the time when the error state occurred and information about the hold are retained after the error state occurred or when the power was turned off, but after the power was turned off. Even at times, it is possible to resume the interrupted big winning game by maintaining the information about the remaining big winning game at the time of interruption and the information about the suspension. For this reason, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "The amount of paid balls has been cleared" indicating that the amount of paid balls has been cleared as the clear notification 1, and then displays the image shown in FIG. 138 (F'-2). is displayed again. In addition, in the upper area of the performance display device 1600, as a standby display, not only is the message "The jackpot is over, today is the end" indicating that the number of paid balls has already reached a specific value, but also the clearing method is displayed. , a message is displayed that indicates how to clear the stop preparation state for the hall manager, "If you clear the ram, it will return to normal state." This clearing method display is displayed in a higher layer than the information display on the big win game, and is displayed at a position not overlapping with the information display on the big win game. As a result, when the power is turned on again, it can be grasped with certainty that the power must be turned on again with RAM clear in order to clear the stop preparation state.

(Additional example 1 of stop counter)
In the above, for the "counter for stopping", when the power is turned on, if "the amount of balls played before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state" is cleared (initialized), 0 is set as the initial value. It is set so that it is subtracted when the game ball B is shot and added when the prize ball is paid out. Then, when only the number of shots increases from the point at which the stopping counter is 0, the number is counted from 0 in the negative direction. On the other hand, in another example 1, regarding the "stop counter", when the power is turned on, the "amount of balls played before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state" is cleared (initialized). , a default value other than 0 (eg, 100000) is set as an initial value. In such a case, the stopping counter starts from the initial value of 100000 when the power is turned on, and is decremented when the game ball B is shot and incremented when the prize ball is paid out.

Specifically, regarding the amount A of balls to be played, starting from the initial value of the stop counter of 100000, the value at the time when the stop counter reaches the maximum within a period until a predetermined clear condition is satisfied. , is calculated as the difference from the value at the time when the stopping counter is the smallest during the period until the predetermined clear condition is satisfied.

In addition, regarding the amount of balls to be played B, the starting counter value of 100000, which is the initial value, becomes the maximum within the period from the initial value of 100000 until the predetermined clear condition is satisfied. It is calculated as the difference from the value at the time. In another example 1, the maximum difference is stored as the payout amounts A and B, and the stored payout amounts A and B are updated by newly calculating the maximum difference. is the same as when the initial value is 0.

In another example 1, when the amount of paid balls (the amount of paid balls A and B) reaches a specific value, the game is restricted by setting the stop state. If so, it is judged that the number of balls paid out B has reached the specific value when the stop counter reaches 200000 by adding +100000 for the specific value to the initial value of the stop counter of 100000. are doing.

Further, in another example 1, the "counter for stopping" is configured not only to have the initial value of 100000 as a starting point, but also to have 0 as the lowest value. In other words, even if only the number of shots increases after the stop counter reaches 0, the 0 state is maintained without counting in the negative direction from 0. As a result, regarding the ball output B, even if only the number of shots increases after the stop counter reaches 0, when the stop counter reaches 200000 from the point of 0, the ball output B is specified. Since it is determined that the value has been reached, the amount of put out balls B reaches the specific value earlier than in the case of counting from 0 in the negative direction. In other words, by enabling the early occurrence of a stoppage state that enforces game restrictions, a large number of balls will be given to the cheater due to fraudulent acts, etc. It is possible to prevent the reward from being awarded to a legitimate player.

(Additional example 2 of stop counter)
In another example 2, for the "counter for stopping", when the power is turned on, if "amount of balls played before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state" is cleared (initialized), the initial value is 0 is set, and 0 is configured to be the lowest value. In such a case, the stopping counter starts from the initial value of 0 when the power is turned on, and is decremented when the game ball B is fired and added when the prize ball is paid out. Therefore, even if only the number of shots increases, the number of shots is not counted in the negative direction from 0, and the 0 state is maintained.

Further, in another example 2, the amount C of balls paid out is calculated from the stop counter. Regarding the ball output amount C, the starting point is 0, which is the initial value of the stop counter. It is calculated as the difference from the value of In Example 2, the maximum difference is stored as the payout amount C, and the stored and held payout amount C is updated by newly calculating the maximum difference. This is the same as when the lowest value=0 is not provided. Then, when the amount of paid balls C reaches a specific value, the game is stopped and the game is restricted.

Further, in another example 2, when the number of balls to be put out C reaches a specific value, the game is restricted by stopping the game. Starting from 0, which is the initial value of the stop counter, when the stop counter reaches 100,000 by adding +100,000 for the specific value, it is determined that the amount of paid balls C has reached the specific value.

Further, in another example 2, the "counter for stopping" is configured not only with the initial value of 0 as the starting point, but also with 0 as the lowest value. Even if only the number of shots increases after the counter reaches 0, when the stop counter reaches 100000 from the time of 0, it is judged that the amount of balls C has reached a specific value. The amount C of paid balls reaches the specific value earlier than in the case of counting in the negative direction from . In other words, by enabling the early occurrence of a stoppage state that enforces game restrictions, a large number of balls will be given to the cheater due to fraudulent acts, etc. It is possible to prevent the rewards from being given to legitimate players.

As for the "stopping counter", it is subtracted when the game ball B is fired and added when the prize ball is paid out. , may be added by shooting game balls B and subtracted by payout of prize balls. In such a case, for example, if 100000 rounds is selected as the specific value, the stopping counter starts from the initial value of 100000 and subtracts +100000 for the specific value to set the stopping counter to 0. At that point, it is determined that the amount of balls released has reached a specific value. In addition, when applied to Example 2, for example, when the power is turned on, the stop counter starts from the initial value of 100000, and is incremented by shooting the game ball B and decremented by the payout of the prize ball. After the stop counter reaches 100,000, even if only the number of shots increases, the 100,000 state is maintained without counting from 100,000 in the positive direction.

(Regarding changes in advance notice displays)
In this example, the initial value of the "counter for stopping" is set to 0 when "amount of balls to be played before the start of the stopping state or after the starting of the stopping state" is cleared (initialized) when the power is turned on. is set so that it is subtracted when the game ball B is shot and added when the prize ball is paid out. Also, 100000 rounds is selected as the specific value, and when the stopping counter reaches 100000, it is determined that the number of balls issued has reached the specific value, the game is stopped, and the game is restricted. In addition, before the amount of output balls reaches a specific value, a predetermined number (in this example, the number of balls remaining until the amount of output balls reaches the specific value is 5000, that is, the amount of output balls is 95000). ), until the amount of balls released reaches a specific value, as an operation at the time of advance notice, the advance notice is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (in this example, "remaining until game limit + 〇〇 ) is displayed. Further, when the advance notification display is performed, the LED of the lamp B flashes for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) as the advance notification light emission.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 side determines the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value before the game is restricted when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value on the main control board 1310 side. , the pre-flag is turned ON when a game ball enters a prize-winning port such as the big prize-winning port 2005 where the number of remaining balls is "+5000 shots", and the ON information of the pre-flag is sent to the main control board 1310. to the peripheral control board 1510 side. Then, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, when receiving the ON information of the pre-flag, the effect display device 1600 starts pre-announcement display (in this example, "remaining until the game limit + 00 shots"), and the amount of balls to be output is It continues running until it reaches a certain value. It should be noted that the amount of balls to be paid out is calculated on the side of the main control board 1310 based on the stopping counter, which is the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. In other words, regarding the number of remaining balls until the number of balls output reaches a specific value, the more shots are fired, the more the number of balls output decreases and the number of remaining balls increases. The number of balls will decrease.

Then, when the number of remaining balls until the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value becomes "+5000 shots", the effect display device 1600 starts an advance notice display, but after that the number of balls to be put out decreases and the number of balls remaining is reduced. As the number of balls increases, the number of remaining balls exceeds "+5000 shots" and the advance notification display ends, or the number of remaining balls decreases and the number of remaining balls increases to "+5000 shots". , the pre-notification display is started, the pre-flag is frequently switched on the main control board 1310 side, and the ON information of the pre-flag is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side many times. In addition, it becomes difficult to grasp the game state by displaying or not displaying the advance notification display. In this regard, in this example, when the advance notification display is started on the effect display device 1600, even if the number of remaining balls increases after that, the number of remaining balls exceeds "+5000". Until the numerical value (in this example, the number of balls remaining until the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value is 5100, that is, the number of balls to be put out has reached 94900), the advance notification display is not terminated. I'm trying As a result, frequent switching of the pre-flag on the main control board 1310 side does not occur, and it is suppressed that the pre-flag ON information is repeatedly transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, thereby avoiding control burden and control complication. can do. In addition, it is possible to prevent difficulty in grasping the game state by continuously displaying the advance notification display as much as possible. In this example, transition of the advance notice display after the start of the advance notice display will be described below.

FIG. 139 is a time chart showing transition of advance notice display after the start of advance notice display. In this example, a situation is described in which the number of balls released fluctuates around 95000 (the number of remaining balls is 5000).

In (A), when the amount of paid balls reaches 95,000 (the number of remaining balls is 5,000) while the amount of paid balls increases, the main control board 1310 issues a pre-notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the effect display device 1600 starts to display "+5000 shots remaining until the game limit" as an advance notification display. At this time, in the lamp B, the LED flashes for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) as advance notification light emission.

After the start of advance notice display, if the amount of paid balls increases, the main control board 1310 transmits a advance notice update command to the peripheral control board 1510 every time the amount of paid balls increases by 100, and the effect display device 1600 We have updated the display content of the advance notice display. For example, when the number of balls to be put out increases by 100, the effect display device 1600 updates the advance notice display to display "+4900 shots remaining until the game limit", and when the number of balls to be put out increases by 100, the effect display device In 1600, the advance notification display is updated to display "+4800 shots remaining until game limit". Here, the display contents of the advance notification display are updated when the number of balls to be put out increases by 100, and the display contents of the advance notification display are not updated when the number of balls to be put out increases by 1 to 99. As a result, the display content of the advance notice display is not updated in real time when the number of balls paid out increases, and it is possible to prevent the advance notice update command from being repeatedly transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side. , control burden and control complexity can be avoided. In addition, in lamp B, only when the number of balls remaining until the number of balls put out reaches a specific value is 5,000, that is, when the number of balls put out reaches 95,000, the LED lights up as a predetermined notification light. (for example, 2 seconds), and when the number of balls output increases by 100 and the display contents of the advance notification display are updated, lamp B should not emit any light corresponding to the update. I have to.

In (B), after the start of the advance notice display, while the amount of output balls is decreasing, if the amount of output drops below 95,000 (the number of remaining balls exceeds 5,000), the main control board 1310 Therefore, the advance notice end command is not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 continues to display "+5000 shots remaining until the game limit" as the advance notice display. Then, as the number of balls output increases again, the number of balls output exceeds 95,000 (the number of remaining balls is 5,000). (the number of remaining balls exceeds 5,000), but when the amount of balls to be released reaches 95,000 (the number of remaining balls is 5,000), the main control board 1310 sends a pre-announcement start command to the peripheral control board 1510 or a pre-notice Without transmitting the notification end command, the effect display device 1600 continues to display the display of "+5000 shots remaining until the game limit" as the advance notification display. As a result, after starting the advance notice display, the advance notice start command and the advance notice end command are prevented from being repeatedly transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, thereby avoiding control burden and control complication. can be done. In addition, although lamp B emits light in response to the pre-notification start command, it does not emit light in response to the pre-notification end command, thereby suppressing misleading to the outside as if an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. are doing.

In (C), after the advance notice display is started, while the amount of ball output is decreasing, when the amount of output ball reaches 94,900 (the number of remaining balls is 5,100), the main control board 1310 performs peripheral control. A pre-announcement end command is transmitted to the board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 ends the pre-announcement display. Here, after the advance notice display is started, the advance notice display is ended when the number of balls paid out is reduced by 100, and the advance notice display is not ended only when the number of balls paid out is reduced by 1 to 99. . In other words, the period from the start of the advance notice display to the time when the amount of paid balls is reduced by 99 is defined as an end suppression period in which the advance notice display is not ended even if the amount of paid balls falls below 95000 shots. As a result, after the advance notice display is started, it is possible to prevent difficulty in grasping the game state by continuing to display the advance notice display as much as possible while permitting a slight decrease in the number of balls paid out. can. In this example, the ``end suppression period'' that allows the continuous display of the advance notice display is ``until the amount of balls is reduced by 1 to 99'', but is not limited to this. Depending on the performance of the gaming machine, if the amount of decrease in the amount of balls to be played is set appropriately, good.

In this example, regarding the operation at the start of the advance notice, the advance notice display using the effect display device 1600 and the advance notice light emission using the lamp B are executed. Only advance notice display using the effect display device 1600 may be performed, and advance notice light emission may not be performed. As a result, when the amount of balls output increases or decreases beyond the end suppression period described above and the advance notice start command is transmitted several times, the lamp B emits light many times and the game machine is externally displayed as if an abnormality has occurred. Misleading can be suppressed.

In (D), when the amount of paid balls reaches 95000 (the number of remaining balls is 5000) while the amount of paid balls increases again, the main control board 1310 sends a pre-notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510. is transmitted, and the effect display device 1600 starts displaying "+5000 shots remaining until the game limit" as an advance notification display.

In (E), after the advance notification display is started, while the amount of ball output is decreasing, when the amount of output ball reaches 94900 (the number of remaining balls is 5100), the main control board 1310 performs peripheral control. Although the advance notification end command is sent to the board 1510, for some reason, such as a temporary power outage or poor connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 side It is conceivable that an irregularity may occur in which the pre-announcement end command cannot be received normally (the peripheral control board 1510 side may miss the pre-announcement end command). In the event of such an irregularity, if it is normal, retransmission of the advance notification end command, etc., triggered by the number of balls released reaching 94,900 (5,100 remaining balls). However, in this example, the effect display device 1600 does not end the pre-announcement display without intentionally retransmitting at this opportunity. In other words, when such an irregularity occurs, even if the amount of balls released reaches 94,900 (the number of remaining balls is 5,100) and the timing to end the advance notice display comes, the advance notice display will be "game restriction." The display of "+5000 shots left until the end of the round" is continuously displayed. As a result, the pre-announcement end command is resent at an unexpected timing during the progress of the game (for example, when the game ball is not launched, or when no ball is entered into the out hole, etc.), causing the player to feel uncomfortable. We are trying to restrain ourselves from giving.

In (F), in the situation where the above-mentioned irregularities where the advance notification display does not end occur, the amount of balls put out has decreased further, and the number of balls put out has reached 94,800 (the number of balls remaining is 5,200). In this case, the main control board 1310 transmits an advance notice end command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 ends the advance notice display. In this example, assuming that the advance notice display does not end at the timing when it should end, not only the timing when the number of balls paid out reaches 94,900 (the number of balls remaining is 5,100), but also the number of balls paid out reaches 94,800 ( Even when the number of balls remaining is 5200) or the amount of output balls reaches 94700 (the number of balls remaining is 5300), the main control board 1310 preliminarily transmits a pre-announcement end command to the peripheral control board 1510. ing. As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 cannot temporarily receive the advance notice end command and an irregularity in which the advance notice display is not ended occurs, the advance notice display can be ended at a different timing without discomfort. At the same time, it is possible to reliably prevent the advance notification display from being continued without being terminated.

In this example, the timing for sending the advance notification end command in advance is as follows: "the timing when the amount of paid balls reaches 94900 (the number of remaining balls is 5100) - the amount of paid balls reaches 94500 (the number of Although the timing is set in increments of 100 shots until "the timing when the number of shots reaches 5500 shots", the advance notice display may be terminated at another timing. For example, an end operation by the hall manager (for example, an operation such as operating the RAM clear switch 741 or the setting key switch while the power is turned on, or opening the main body frame 4 or the door frame 3) is performed. is forcibly transmitted, and the advance notification display may be forcibly terminated at the time when it should have been originally terminated.

Also, in this example, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot normally receive the pre-announcement end command for some reason, such as a temporary power outage or poor connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 ( In the event that an irregularity occurs in which the peripheral control board 1510 side misses the advance notice end command, as described above, the process of preliminary transmitting the advance notice end command is performed at another opportunity, but the peripheral control board 1510 side In the event of an irregularity in which the advance notice update command cannot be received normally (the advance notice update command is not received on the peripheral control board 1510 side), processing for preliminarily transmitting the advance notice update command at another opportunity is not performed. I try not to For example, after the advance notice display is started, when the amount of output balls increases by 100 and reaches 95100 (the number of remaining balls is 4900), the main control board 1310 sends the peripheral control board 1510 An advance notice update command is transmitted, but if an irregularity occurs in which this advance notice update command cannot be received on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 displays "+5000 shots remaining until the game limit" as the advance notice display. is displayed, and after that, the number of balls released increases by 100 and reaches 95,200 (the number of remaining balls is 4,800). A pre-notification update command corresponding to reaching the limit is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, and the pre-notice display is updated to the display of "+4800 shots remaining until game limit". As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if the number of balls paid out has suddenly increased, and to improve the interest in the game by utilizing the irregularity. In addition, although the lamp B emits light in response to the advance notification start command, it does not emit light in response to the advance notification update command, thereby suppressing misleading to the outside as if an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. are doing.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that the peripheral control board 1510 side will not update the pre-notification display until the ball payout amount reaches a specific value due to some kind of abnormality. For example, the RAM clear switch 741 or the setting key switch is operated while the power is turned on, or the main body frame 4 or the door frame 3 is opened. It is possible to forcibly update the advance notice display by forcibly transmitting the advance notice update command to .

In (G), when the number of balls output reaches 95,000 (the number of remaining balls is 5,000) while the number of balls output increases again, the main control board 1310 sends a pre-notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510. is transmitted, and the effect display device 1600 starts displaying "+5000 shots remaining until the game limit" as an advance notification display.

In (H), after the advance notification display is started, when the number of balls put out increases by 100 and reaches 95100 (the number of balls remaining is 4900), the main control board 1310 performs peripheral control. An advance notice update command is transmitted to the substrate 1510, and the effect display device 1600 updates the advance notice display to the display of "+4900 shots remaining until game limit".

In (I), after updating the display to "+4,900 shots remaining until game limit" as an advance notification display, the amount of shots played decreased while the amount of shots played fell below 95,100 (the number of shots remaining fell below 4,900). In the case of exceeding), the main control board 1310 does not transmit the advance notice demotion command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 continues to display "+4900 shots remaining until the game limit" as the advance notice display. it's shown. As a result, after updating the display of "+4900 shots remaining until the game limit" as the advance notice display, it is possible to prevent the advance notice update command and the advance notice demotion command from being repeatedly transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side. , control burden and control complexity can be avoided. In this example, the advance notice update command used when the amount of balls put out increases (the number of balls remaining decreases) and the advance notice demotion command used when the amount of balls put out decreases (the number of balls left increases) and are separate commands, they may be common commands indicating the display contents of the advance notice display.

In (J), after updating the display to "+4,900 shots remaining until game limit" as an advance notification display, the number of shots played fell below 95,000 while the number of shots played decreased. In the case of exceeding), the main control board 1310 transmits a pre-notice demotion command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 updates the display of "+5000 shots remaining until the game limit" as the pre-notice display. . Here, when the number of balls to be played is 95,100 (4,900 balls remaining), the display is updated to "+4,900 balls remaining until game limit" as the advance notification display, and then when the number of balls to be played is reduced by 100, , The display content of the advance notice display is updated, and the amount of balls paid out is reduced by 1 to 99, but the display content of the advance notice display is not updated. In other words, after updating the display of "+4900 shots remaining until the game limit" as the advance notification display, until the number of balls output is reduced by 99, the display content of the advance notification display is not updated. As a result, it is possible to prevent difficulty in grasping the game state by continuing to display as much as possible after updating to the display of "+4900 shots remaining until game limit" as the advance notification display.

In this example, in (G) to (H), as the amount of ball output increases, the amount of output ball shifts from 95,000 (5,000 remaining balls) to 95,100 (4,900 remaining balls). Until then, the production display device 1600 displays "+5000 shots left until the game limit" as an advance notification display. During the transition from 95,100 balls (4,900 remaining balls) to 95,000 balls (5,000 remaining balls), the effect display device 1600 displays "+4,900 remaining balls until game limit" as an advance notification display. ” is displayed. In this way, even if the interval of the amount of played balls is the same, it is possible to make the content of the advance notice display different depending on whether the amount of played balls is in the process of increasing or decreasing. , the display contents of the advance notification display once displayed can be displayed continuously as much as possible.

In (K), after updating the display to "+5,000 shots remaining until game limit" as the advance notification display, the amount of output balls decreased, and the amount of output balls reached 94,900 (the number of remaining balls was 5,100). In this case, the main control board 1310 transmits an advance notice end command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 ends the advance notice display.

In this example, in (G) to (H), as the amount of ball output increases, the amount of output ball shifts from 95,000 (5,000 remaining balls) to 95,100 (4,900 remaining balls). Until then, the effect display device 1600 displays "+5000 shots remaining until the game limit" as an advance notice display, During the transition from 95,000 balls (5,000 remaining balls) to 94,900 balls (5,100 remaining balls), the effect display device 1600 displays "+5,000 remaining balls until game limit" as an advance notification display. ” is displayed. In this way, even if the interval of the payout amount is different, by making the display content of the advance notice display the same depending on whether the process is in the process of increasing the payout amount or in the process of decreasing the payout amount, The display content of the advance notice display once displayed can be displayed as continuously as possible.

In this example, when a serious abnormality is detected during execution of the advance notice display as described above, the effect display device 1600 uses the same data as the advance notice display as the current situation display A and displays it. However, if a serious abnormality is detected while the end of the advance notice display or the demotion is being suppressed, the current situation display A will use the same data as the advance notice display, but the current situation It is desirable that the display contents of the display A be controlled so as to present an accurate amount of balls paid out to the hall manager. In this way, even if an irregular situation occurs, the hall manager can recognize the correct number of balls to be played through the current situation display A.

Further, in each of the examples described above, the message of advance notice display A is displayed in a specific display area in the highest layer of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the game, and the advance notice display is performed by another effect image. However, a predetermined area that displays an adjustment image (for example, an image corresponding to volume or light intensity, an image related to other adjustments, etc.) that reflects the adjustment operation by the player regarding the effect surface is a specific display If it is provided at a position that overlaps with the area in the front-rear direction, the visibility of the adjustment image will be hindered by the advance notice display at least while the advance notice display is being displayed, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced. . In order to solve this problem, for example, in each of the above examples, the predetermined area for displaying the adjustment image may be provided at a position that does not overlap the specific display area at all in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the adjustment image even while the advance notification display is being displayed, and to avoid a decrease in the interest in the game. Further, if a part of the predetermined area for displaying the adjustment image is provided so as to overlap the specific display area in the front-rear direction, the adjustment image is shifted from the advance notification display at least to the extent that the result of the adjustment operation by the player can be confirmed. (For example, if the adjustment image is a level gauge method, display so that the change in the level gauge can be understood without overlapping, and if the adjustment image is a numerical method, display it so that you can understand which value it is. display so as not to overlap) can be exemplified, and in this case also, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, in each of the examples described above, the message of advance notice display is displayed in a specific display area in the highest layer of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the game, and other effect images are used to indicate the advance notice display. It is assumed that the visibility is not hindered, but it is desirable to continue to display the advance notification display even after shifting to a standby state in which the game is not progressing. As a result, it is possible to prevent a new player from starting a game without recognizing information regarding the amount of balls to be put out, etc. before starting the game. In addition, since the advance notification display is displayed in the highest layer of the effect display device 1600, the visibility of the demonstration image (for example, the effect explanation, the image for advertisement, etc.) performed in the standby state is hindered. Therefore, there is also a concern that the needs of players who want to check the demonstration images cannot be satisfied. In order to solve this problem, for example, in each of the above examples, the advance notification display in a specific display area is hidden so as not to be visible during the entire period or part of the period during which the demonstration image is performed, and at least Resuming the display of advance notice display in a specific display area when a new player performs a predetermined operation (for example, contact before operating the handle 160, adjustment operation, operation of other buttons, etc.) etc. can be exemplified. This satisfies the needs of players who want to check the demonstration image, and prevents new players from starting a game without recognizing information on the amount of balls to be paid out before starting the game.

(Modified example of restriction clear pattern table 4)
As described above in detail, in the restriction clear pattern table 4, regardless of which of the power-on patterns 1 to 4 is selected when the power is turned on, "before the stop state starts or after the stop state starts Clear (initialize) the amount of balls after that. Specifically, in the restriction clear pattern table 4, when the power is turned on, only when the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) like the power-on patterns 2 and 3, the "restriction of the game during the stop state" is set. is cleared (initialized), and along with clearing the number of balls to be played, the stop preparation state is also cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are maintained, but the amount of balls to be played is cleared. In spite of doing so, the state of preparation for cessation is also maintained. That is, as with the stop state, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the stop preparation state when the power is turned off and then turned on again. For example, in a case where the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and a stop preparation state has occurred, when you want to clear the stop preparation state, after the power is turned off, the player who satisfies the starting conditions of the stop preparation state is selected. The power-on operation may be performed so as to clear the amount of balls, but in the restriction clear pattern table 4, the jackpot game being executed is cleared in accordance with such power-on operation. On the other hand, when it is desired to maintain the ready state for stopping, after turning off the power, the power-on operation may be performed so as to maintain the amount of balls put out that satisfies the conditions for starting the ready state for stopping. Along with this, the jackpot game that was being executed is restarted.

As described above, in the restriction clear pattern table 4, it is necessary to maintain the stop preparation state in order to restart the jackpot game that was being executed with the power-on operation. Although the jackpot game being executed is restarted, only the stop preparation state cannot be cleared. In the case of such a configuration, for example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during a jackpot game under conditions such as a trial shooting test at the development stage of the game machine and a stop preparation state occurs, the stop state is not started. Even if it is desired to continue the test firing test, only the stop preparation state cannot be cleared, and the subsequent occurrence of the stop state may hinder the continuous execution of the test firing test. In addition, even if an attempt is made to clear the stop preparation state, the jackpot game is also cleared together with the stop preparation state, and in this case also there is a possibility that the continuation of the trial shooting test is hindered. In view of these circumstances, in this example, with the power-on operation, while restarting the jackpot game that was being executed before the power was cut off, the restriction clear pattern table for the configuration of clearing only the stop preparation state 4 will be described below.

FIG. 140 is a modification of the restriction clear pattern table 4 at power-on. In this example, the limit clear pattern table 4(a) and the limit clear pattern table 4(b) are provided as the limit clear pattern table 4 used when the position of the limit clear pattern selection switch is "4". Depending on whether or not a special external signal is output during the stop preparation state, it is controlled to change which of the limit clear pattern table 4(a) and the limit clear pattern table 4(b) is used. Only when a special external signal is output during the stop preparation state and it is determined when the power is turned on, the jackpot game being executed before the power is turned off is restarted according to the operation when the power is turned on. However, it allows only the stop readiness state to be cleared. Here, the "special external signal" is output through a specific circuit mounted on the main control board 1310, and when a predetermined output requirement is satisfied, the signal is output from the main control board 1310 to an external device such as an external test device. Any signal that is output to the device may be used. In this example, a vacant test circuit is set as a specific circuit formed on the main control board 1310, and by detecting that a test electronic component is mounted on the vacant test circuit, a "specified If the test electronic component is mounted on an empty test circuit, a special external signal is always output to the external test equipment. Moreover, the special external signal may be output from the main control board 1310 to the outside via the external terminal board, or may be directly output from the main control board 1310 to the outside without going through the external terminal board. good too.

FIG. 140(A) shows a modification of the restriction clear pattern table 4, which is selected when the power is turned off under the condition that a special external signal is being output during the stop preparation state, and then the power is turned on again. It shows a limit clear pattern table 4(a), which is a table. In this example, prior to various clearing processes in power-on processing, it is determined whether or not a special external signal is output from the main control board 1310. Based on this determination result, the restriction clear pattern table 4(a) and restriction clear pattern table 4(b).

Power-on pattern 1 of the restriction clear pattern table 4(a) maintains the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on. "Amount of balls" has been cleared (initialized). In addition, the "restrictions on games during stop state" are maintained, but the stop preparation state is cleared (initialized). In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are turned green (when the stop state is maintained) until a predetermined period elapses after the power is turned on. If the game is ready to stop, it will light up in red), and the speaker will output the sound "The amount of balls to be played has been cleared. The state of the game is maintained. (The preparation to stop is cleared)." , and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls to be played has been cleared. The stop state is maintained (the stop preparation state has been cleared)." 1, equivalent to a notice of impossibility of progress). More specifically, if the power is turned off during the stop state, the fact that the stop state is maintained is notified when the power is turned on, and if the power is turned off during the stop preparation state, the stop preparation state is set when the power is turned on. It is notified that the game has been cleared, and in other cases, it is notified only that the amount of paid balls has been cleared. Further, when the power supply is cut off during the suspension state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating a method for clearing the suspension state may be added.

Power-on pattern 2 of the restriction clear pattern table 4(a) clears (initializes) the game state at power-off when the power is turned on. "Amount of balls to be played after starting" is also cleared (initialized). In addition, the "restrictions on games during stop state" and the stop preparation state are also cleared (initialized). Specifically, when the game is restricted by the above-described restriction pattern 1, the game is "stopped". If the game is restricted by the pattern 3, the game is "stopped", but when the stop state is cleared, the "shooting stop" is released. , "Stop game" and "Stop firing", but by clearing the stop state, "Stop playing" and "Stop firing" are released, and in either case, the main control board 1310 side It is possible to restart the game (main game). In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stop state (stopping preparation state) have been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 reads "The amount of balls put out and the stop state (stopping preparation state) has been cleared." (corresponding to clear notification 2). More specifically, if the power is turned off during the pause state, the fact that the pause state has been cleared is notified when the power is turned on. It is notified that the game has been cleared, and in other cases, only the fact that the number of balls to be paid out has been cleared is notified.

Power-on pattern 3 of the restriction clear pattern table 4(a) clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on. "Amount of balls to be played after starting" is also cleared (initialized). In addition, the "restrictions on games during stop state" and the stop preparation state are also cleared (initialized). In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the state of stopping (preparing to stop) has been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 reads "The amount of balls to be put out and the state of stopping (preparing to stop) has been cleared." A message image is displayed. (Equivalent to clear notification 2). More specifically, if the power is turned off during the pause state, the fact that the pause state has been cleared is notified when the power is turned on. It is notified that the game has been cleared, and in other cases, it is notified only that the amount of paid balls has been cleared.

The power-on pattern 4 of the restriction clear pattern table 4(a) maintains the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but "before the stop state starts or after the stop state starts "Amount of balls" has been cleared (initialized). In addition, the "restrictions on games during stop state" are maintained, but the stop preparation state is cleared (initialized). In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, the LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are turned green (when the stop state is maintained) until a predetermined period elapses after the power is turned on. If the game is ready to stop, it will light up in red), and the speaker will output the sound "The amount of balls to be played has been cleared. The state of the game is maintained. (The preparation to stop is cleared)." , and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls to be played has been cleared. The stop state is maintained (the stop preparation state has been cleared)." 1, Equivalent to a game disabled notice). More specifically, if the power is turned off during the stop state, the fact that the stop state is maintained is notified when the power is turned on, and if the power is turned off during the stop preparation state, the stop preparation state is set when the power is turned on. It is notified that the game has been cleared, and in other cases, it is notified only that the amount of paid balls has been cleared. Further, when the power supply is cut off during the suspension state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating a method for clearing the suspension state may be added.

Power-on pattern 5 of the restriction clear pattern table 4(a) maintains the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on. We also maintain the amount of balls released. In addition, the "restrictions on games during stop state" and the stop preparation state are also maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light for a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls to be played and the state of stopping (preparing to stop) is maintained" is output, and the production display device 1600 displays "The amount of balls to be played and the state of stopping (preparing to stop) is maintained." .” message image is displayed. More specifically, if the power is turned off during the stop state, the fact that the stop state is maintained is notified when the power is turned on, and if the power is turned off during the stop preparation state, the stop preparation state is set when the power is turned on. It is notified that the game has been cleared, and in other cases, only the fact that the number of balls to be paid out has been cleared is notified.

In this way, in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a) used under the condition that the special external signal is output, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained like the power-on patterns 1 and 4. or to clear (initialize) the game state when the power is turned off, as in power-on patterns 2 and 3. Clear (initialize) the amount of balls released after the state started. As a result, when the power is turned on during a trial shooting test, etc. during the development stage of the game machine, only the stop preparation state can be cleared. can be avoided. It should be noted that when the power-on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the above-described ball extraction process is only executed and the game is not started. The amount of balls released after the state was started is maintained without clearing (initializing).

In addition, in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a) used under the condition that the special external signal is output, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) like the power-on patterns 2 and 3. ), the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are maintained. In other words, the developer can choose whether to maintain or clear the "restrictions on games during the paused state" when the power is turned off and then turned on again after the power is turned off during trial shooting tests during the development stage of the game machine. It is possible to For example, in the event that a pause state has already occurred, if it is desired to release the restriction on the game, after turning off the power, the power-on operation may be performed so as to clear the "restriction on the game during the pause state". When it is desired to maintain the restriction, after the power is turned off, the power-on operation is performed so as to maintain the "restriction of the game during the stop state". It should be noted that, when the power is turned on, if the power-on pattern 5 is selected, the above-described ball removal process is executed and the game is not started. It is maintained without (initialization).

In addition, in the restriction clear pattern table 4 (a) used under the condition that a special external signal is output, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) like the power-on patterns 2 and 3. ), in addition to clearing (initializing) the "amount of balls released before the start of the stop state and after the start of the stop state", clear (initialize) the stop preparation state. there is On the other hand, when the power is turned on, even if the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, "the ” is not only cleared (initialized), but also the stop preparation state is cleared (initialized). This makes it possible to select whether or not to clear the game state when clearing the stop preparation state under conditions such as test firing tests at the development stage of the game machine, and during normal operation (game It is possible to make a mode suitable for use in a hall, etc.).

FIG. 140(B) shows a modified example of the restriction clear pattern table 4, which is selected when the power is turned off under the condition that no special external signal is output during the stop preparation state and then the power is turned on again. It shows a limit clear pattern table 4(b), which is a table. Note that the power-on patterns 2, 3, and 5 here are the same as in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a) described above, so descriptions thereof are omitted.

Power-on pattern 1 of the restriction clear pattern table 4(b) maintains the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on. 's amount of balls" is cleared (initialized). In addition, the "restrictions on games during stop state" and the stop preparation state are maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit green light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls to be played has been cleared. The state of stopping (preparing to stop) is maintained." (Preparation state) is maintained." is displayed (equivalent to clear notification 1, progress impossible notification). More specifically, if the power is turned off during the stop state, the fact that the stop state is maintained is notified when the power is turned on, and if the power is turned off during the stop preparation state, the stop preparation state is set when the power is turned on. In other cases, only the clearing of the number of balls to be played is notified. Further, when the power supply is cut off during the suspension state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating a method for clearing the suspension state may be added to the hall manager.

The power-on pattern 4 of the restriction clear pattern table 4(b) maintains the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on. 's amount of balls" is cleared (initialized). In addition, the "restrictions on games during the stop state" and the stop preparation state are maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit green light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls to be played has been cleared. The state of stopping (preparing to stop) is maintained." (Preparation state) is maintained." is displayed (corresponding to clear notification 1, game disabled notification). More specifically, if the power is turned off during the stop state, the fact that the stop state is maintained is notified when the power is turned on, and if the power is turned off during the stop preparation state, the stop preparation state is set when the power is turned on. In other cases, only the clearing of the number of balls to be played is notified. Further, when the power supply is cut off during the suspension state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating a method for clearing the suspension state may be added to the hall manager.

As described above, in the restriction clear pattern table 4(b) used under the condition that the special external signal is not output, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared ( If you initialize), not only clear (initialize) "the amount of balls released before the start of the stop state and after the start of the stop state", but also clear (initialize) the stop preparation state are doing. On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the amount of balls to be played before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state ” is cleared (initialized), but the state of preparation for stopping is maintained regardless of the clearing of the amount of balls. For example, when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value during a jackpot game during normal operation (during operation in a game hall, etc.) that is not a trial shooting test, and a state of preparation for stopping is occurring, due to fraudulent behavior by the player If a serious abnormality (magnetism, vibration, radio wave detection, etc.) occurs and you want to eliminate the serious abnormality, you can turn off the power and then perform the power-on operation to eliminate the serious abnormality. Even if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as power-on operations, the stop preparation state is maintained. In other words, although the big win game being executed is restarted, if the stop preparation state is maintained, the state shifts to the stop state at the end of the restarted big win game. In this way, the cheater or the like deliberately causes a severe abnormality during the stop preparation state, thereby causing the hall manager to turn on the power again and clear (initialize) the stop preparation state. Although there is a possibility of fraud, in the case of power-on that contributes to elimination of serious abnormalities, illegal clearing of the stop preparation state is avoided, and the game is terminated when the restarted jackpot game is completed. By doing so, such new fraud can be prevented. In this way, in the restricted clear pattern table 4(b) used under the condition that the special external signal is not output, unlike the case of using the restricted clear pattern table 4(a), during normal operation other than the trial firing test, (during operation in a game hall, etc.).

In the above example, the special external signal is always output under the condition that the test electronic component is mounted on the empty test circuit. Another problem is that the control load on the main control board 1310 increases. In consideration of these points, it is not a configuration that always outputs a special external signal under the condition that the test electronic parts are mounted on the empty test circuit, but only when it is necessary due to the establishment of the predetermined output start conditions. A configuration for outputting a special external signal may be employed. This point will be described below using FIGS. 140(C) and 140(D).

FIG. 141 is a time chart showing that the output of the special external signal is started before the stop preparation state and the stop state are started. Among these, FIG. 141(A) is a time chart when the power is turned off before the start of the stop preparation state and the stop state, and the power is turned on according to the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a) described above. is. Also, FIG. 141(B) is a time chart when the power is turned off after the start of the stop preparation state, and the power is turned on according to the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a).

First, FIG. 141(A) will be described. In FIG. 141(A), although a test electronic component is mounted on an empty test circuit, a special external signal is not always output, and a specific timing before the start of the stop preparation state and the stop state is shown. At (t1), the output of the special external signal is started. The specific timing (t1) in this example is set to be the same timing as the execution condition for the advance notification display described above. That is, as described above, when the number of balls remaining until the number of balls to be paid out reaches a specific value due to winning in the progress of the game, the number of balls remaining becomes "+1500 shots". As an operation of the time, a pre-notice display of "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, which tells the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be released reaches a specific value. A special external signal is output when the number of balls remaining until the value is reached is "+1500 shots". Here, it is conceivable that a predetermined external signal may be output via the external terminal board at the timing of displaying the advance notification display. It is preferable to output the special external signal directly from the main control board 1310 to the outside without going through the external terminal plate.

When the output of the special external signal is started at a specific timing (t1), in the situation such as the test firing test at the development stage of the game machine, the operation of the test equipment etc. that received the special external signal causes the stop preparation state and It becomes possible to grasp that the occurrence of the stopping state is approaching. As a result, the power is turned off (t2) at the stage of grasping the output of the special external signal, and the power is turned on (t3) according to the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4(a) described above, thereby changing the game state. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of the stop preparation state and the stop state without clearing (initializing).

After power-on (t3) in power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a), the output of the special external signal is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed. In this example, since it is determined whether or not the special external signal is output from the main control board 1310 prior to various clearing processes in the power-on process, this determination determines when the output of the special external signal ends. Any time after it is done. However, if the output of the special external signal continues for an unnecessarily long time after power-on (t3) in power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a), the stop preparation state and stop state Therefore, it is desirable to end the output of the special external signal at a relatively early stage (for example, within 5 seconds) after the power is turned on. In addition, although the power is cut off (t2) at the stage of grasping the output of the special external signal, if the power is turned on due to an incorrect power-on pattern and the amount of balls output is maintained, the special external signal will continue to be turned on. It is preferable to output a signal. As a result, if a special external signal is output for a long period of time after the power is turned on by mistake, it is possible to ascertain that the ball output amount has not been cleared (initialized), and to guide the operator to turn off the power again. be possible.

In this way, the special external signal can be output at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the stop preparation state or the start of the stop state, so that the constant output of the special external signal can be avoided. Control load can be suppressed. In addition, it is possible to recognize from the outside at an early stage that the start of the stop preparation state or the start of the stop state is approaching through advance notice display and special external signals, enabling smooth operation such as trial shooting tests at the development stage of the game machine. become. In addition, since the main control board 1310 is designed to output a special external signal to the outside, even if the advance notice display is incomplete at the development stage of the game machine, if a specific timing is set, preparations for stopping can be made. Since it is possible to recognize from the outside at an early stage through a special external signal that the start of the state or the stop state is approaching, it is possible to plan smooth operations such as trial shooting tests at the development stage of the game machine.

Next, FIG. 141(B) will be described. In FIG. 141(B), under the condition that the test electronic component is mounted on the vacant test circuit, the output of the special external signal is started at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the stop preparation state, and the stop preparation is performed. You are powering down after entering the state.

Specifically, the special external signal is not always output while the test electronic component is mounted on the vacant test circuit. Although the output of the external signal is started, the output of the special external signal is continued even after the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during the jackpot game and the stop preparation state occurs (t2). Here, in the stop preparation state, it is conceivable that a predetermined external signal may be output via the external terminal plate. It is preferable to directly output the special external signal from 1310 to the outside without going through the external terminal plate. In addition, in the stop preparation state, as described above, in the effect display device 1600, in addition to displaying the display (normal display) regarding the jackpot game being executed, the number of balls to be put out has already reached a specific value. A standby display saying "The jackpot is over and today is over" is displayed.

After the amount of balls put out during the big win game reaches a specific value and the stop preparation state occurs (t2), when the big win game ends, the state shifts to the stop state. By continuing to output the signal, it is possible to grasp that the occurrence of a stop state is approaching due to the operation of the test equipment, etc. that received the special external signal under the conditions such as the test firing test at the development stage of the game machine. become. As a result, the power is turned off (t3) at the stage when the output of the special external signal is grasped during the stop preparation state, and the power is turned on (t4) according to the power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a). , it is possible to clear the stop preparation state without clearing (initializing) the game state and avoiding the occurrence of the stop state.

Then, when the output of the special external signal is detected during the stop preparation state, the power is turned off (t3). When the stop preparation state is cleared, the jackpot game that was being executed before the power was cut off is not cleared, and after various clearing processes in the processing at the time of turning on the power, the jackpot that was being executed before the power was cut off. I am trying to restart the game. This makes it possible to clear only the stop preparation state even if the amount of ball output reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and the stop preparation state occurs under conditions such as trial shooting tests at the development stage of the game machine. By doing so, the continuous implementation of the test firing test will not be hindered.

After power-on (t4) in power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a), the output of the special external signal is terminated after a predetermined period of time has passed, as described above. Since it is determined whether or not the special external signal is output from the main control board 1310 prior to various clearing processes in the power-on process, the output end time of the special external signal is determined after this determination is made. Any time is fine.

In this way, by configuring so that the output of the special external signal is continued not only before the start of the stoppage preparation state but also after the start of the stoppage preparation state, the standby display that the start of the stoppage state is approaching is displayed. At the same time, it is possible to grasp the situation from the outside at an early stage through a special external signal, and it is possible to plan a smooth operation such as a trial shooting test at the development stage of the game machine.

It should be noted that the specific timing (t1) does not have to be the same timing as the execution condition for the advance notice display described above. The timing may be before the timing, or may be the timing after the execution condition of the advance notice display.

141(A) and 141(B), for example, regardless of whether or not test electronic components are mounted in an empty test circuit, The output/non-output of the special external signal may be switched according to the ON/OFF operation of the output start switch. Specifically, when the output start switch is turned on during the stop preparation state, a specific output requirement is satisfied and a special external signal is output. After the arrival of the specific timing (t1) before the start of the ready state, the specific output requirements are satisfied and the special external signal is output. Even in such a case, constant output of the special external signal can be avoided, and the control load on the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

(Regarding the subtraction adjustment of the amount of balls put out)
As described above in detail, when the amount of balls output reaches a specific value during the jackpot game (hit game), it shifts to a stop preparation state, does not enter the stop state until the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot game ends. By doing so, it is configured to shift to the stopping state. For example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value in the middle round of the big win game, the state is not stopped immediately, but is shifted to the stop preparation state. are doing. In other words, when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value during the jackpot game, it is possible to obtain the paid balls exceeding the specific value.

By the way, "a plurality of holds that are determined to be big hits are stored, and after the jackpot game accompanying the previous hold is completed, the execution of the big win game accompanying the later hold is also confirmed (highly expected display By displaying a plurality of pending displays of the mode, it is possible for the player to recognize the occurrence of multiple jackpots. It is confirmed that the state (Renso mode, etc.) will be shifted to”, and “During the jackpot game, the game ball enters the first V prize opening 2007 or the second V prize opening 2008 and the jackpot game In the case of a situation such as "It is confirmed that the game will shift to a high probability state after the end", it is confirmed that the next big win can be obtained even during the execution of the big win game. However, in spite of the fact that the next big win is confirmed during the big win game, when the amount of output balls reaches a specific value during the big win game and the state shifts to the stop preparation state, the time when the big win game ends. Therefore, since the game cannot be played by shifting to the stopping state, the profit related to the next big win cannot be obtained, and the player is greatly dissatisfied. In this example, in the case where the number of balls put out reaches a specific value during the jackpot game and the state is shifted to the stop preparation state, when the hall manager performs a specific operation, the number of balls put out (the value of the stop counter) is subtracted and adjusted to return to the state (normal state) before the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, thereby canceling the stop preparation state and making it possible to win the next big win after the end of the big win game. to explain.

First, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout ball amount subtraction switch for subtracting and adjusting the payout ball amount (the value of the stop counter) is provided. This ball payout subtraction switch is a work operation unit that the player cannot touch (a button that enables switching between the ON state and the OFF state, and a key that enables switching between the ON state and the OFF state. are provided on the main control board 1310 as key switches, etc.). Then, when the ball output subtraction switch is operated (for example, switching to the OFF state after being ON for 3 seconds or more), the operation signal is input to the main control board 1310, and the current ball output amount is reduced. It is possible to subtract a predetermined number of balls (for example, 1500 shots). In other words, it is possible to subtract a predetermined number of balls (for example, 1500 shots) from the value at the time when the stop counter reaches the maximum.

In this example, when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value during the jackpot game and the state is shifted to the stop preparation state, the operation of the number of balls paid out subtraction switch is enabled during the stop preparation state, and the hall manager By operating the payout ball amount subtraction switch, a predetermined payout amount (for example, 1500 shots) is subtracted from the current payout amount so that the payout amount falls below a specific value. At this time, the stop flag that was turned on at the time of transition to the stop preparation state is turned off, canceling the stop preparation state and returning to the normal state. For example, 100,000 is set as the "specific value", and when the amount of balls put out reaches the specific value (100,000 shots) during a jackpot game, the state shifts to a stop preparation state, but the hall manager operates the ball amount subtraction switch. Then, by subtracting 1,500 shots from the predetermined amount of paid out balls, the amount of paid out balls becomes 98,500 shots, which is lower than the specific value (100,000 shots). Here, when the amount of balls to be put out is reduced so as to fall below a specific value, the preparation state for stopping the game is canceled, but the big win game being executed and the information for winning the next big win are not canceled. . Further, after the payout ball amount is reduced to be less than the specific value, the count of the payout ball amount is restarted with the subtracted payout ball amount as a starting point.

In this way, even when the number of balls put out reaches a specific value during the big win game and the state is shifted to the state of preparation for stopping, the hall manager can operate the number-of-balls-out subtraction switch to bring the state to stop. The game can be continued even after the jackpot game ends, unless the problem is resolved and the number of balls put out reaches the specific value again. As a result, even if the next big win is confirmed during the big win game as described above, the game can be continued after the big win game is over, so that the profit related to the next big win can be obtained. , the player's dissatisfaction can be eliminated. Although the game is continued after the end of the jackpot game, for example, when the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value again during the next jackpot game, the machine shifts to a stop preparation state, and restarts in a state where the jackpot game is not in progress. When the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the game shifts to a stop state.

On the other hand, when the game is not in the ready state, the operation of the ball payout subtraction switch is disabled, and even if the hall manager operates the ball payout subtraction switch, the predetermined ball payout For example, 1500 shots) is not subtracted. Therefore, even if the payout ball amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop state, the predetermined ball payout amount (for example, 1500 shots) is not subtracted from the current ball payout amount. never fall below In other words, the game cannot be restarted because the stop state is maintained without returning to the normal state. In such a case, it is necessary to cut off the power during the stop state, and clear the stop state as well as clear the ball amount when the power is turned on again.

It should be noted that when the payout ball amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop preparation state, a predetermined payout amount (for example, 1500 shots) is subtracted from the current payout amount. is equivalent to the amount of balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game. In this example, the number of balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game is about 1,500, and the number of balls that is subtracted when the number-of-discharge subtraction switch is operated is set to 1,500. As a result, in the case where the amount of put-out balls reaches a specific value during the big win game and the state is shifted to the stop preparation state, if the put-out ball amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop preparation state, the stop stop preparation state is canceled and the big hit is won. During the game, the number of paid balls never reaches the specific value again, and the state does not shift to the stop preparation state. In other words, even when the next big win is confirmed during the big win game as described above, the game can be continued after the big win game is over, and the profit related to the next big win can be obtained. In addition, since the amount of output balls to be subtracted when the output amount subtraction switch is operated is equivalent to the amount of output balls that can be obtained in one big hit game, the amount of output balls will be the specific value again in the next big hit game. is reached, the possibility of shifting to a stop preparation state is high, and when the next big win game ends, the game can be shifted to the stop state and the game can be ended.

Also, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value during the big win game, the state shifts to the stop preparation state, but after shifting to the stop preparation state, the number of balls put out during the big win game (the value of the stop counter) is counted. It is configured not to. In other words, the amount of paid balls is configured so as not to be counted beyond a specific value. For this reason, when the payout ball amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop preparation state, a predetermined ball payout amount (for example, 1500 shots) is subtracted from the specific value that is the current ball payout amount, and the payout amount is specified. I'm trying to get the value down. However, regarding the amount of balls to be put out, the amount of balls to be put out during the big win game (the value of the counter for stopping) may be counted even after shifting to the stop preparation state. In other words, the number of balls released may be counted beyond a specific value. With such a configuration, when the payout ball amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop preparation state, a predetermined payout amount (for example, 1500 shots) is subtracted from the current payout amount that exceeds a specific value, The amount of balls issued is kept below a specific value.

Also, when the ball payout subtraction switch is operated in the stop preparation state, a predetermined ball payout amount (for example, 1500 shots) is subtracted from the current ball payout amount. After the power is cut off during the game, when the power is turned on again, when the ball payout subtraction switch is operated, a predetermined ball payout amount (for example, 1500 shots) is subtracted from the current ball payout amount. good too. With such a configuration, even when the power is turned on again, even if the stop preparation state is maintained, by operating the ball amount subtraction switch when the power is turned on again, the current ball amount will be reduced. is subtracted by a predetermined amount (for example, 1500 shots) so that the amount of paid balls falls below a specific value. In other words, when the payout ball amount subtraction switch is operated when the power is turned on again, the big win game that was being executed when the power was cut off can be resumed in a state where the stop preparation state is canceled. In this way, turning on and off the power is required to enable the operation of the ball payout amount subtraction switch, so that cancellation of the stop preparation state can be strictly managed by the hall manager.

In addition, it is possible to win the next big hit game by operating the ball output subtraction switch during the stop preparation state, and when the next big hit game is executed, the same game situation (the next big hit game It is also conceivable that a situation may occur in which the amount of output balls reaches a specific value during the jackpot game and shifts to a stop preparation state even though the acquisition of is confirmed. In consideration of such a case, it is preferable not to limit the number of receptions of operation of the ball payout subtraction switch (number of subtractions) during the stop preparation state so that the operation can be accepted for each stop preparation state. As a result, even if a similar game situation occurs after the operation of the payout amount subtraction switch, the hall manager can properly manage the game so as not to dissatisfy the player. However, in order to prevent the ball payout subtraction switch from being operated more than once during one stop preparation state, the number of balls paid out will be reduced more than necessary. It is desirable to limit the number of times the quantity subtraction switch is operated (the number of times of subtraction) to only one time.

In addition, when operating the payout amount subtraction switch during the stop preparation state, work by the hall manager is required, so the game by the player is temporarily stopped, but the jackpot game progresses during that work. As a result, there is a risk that the player will be damaged because the ball cannot be obtained during the operation. In order to avoid this, for example, control may be performed to stop the progress of the game including the jackpot game when operating the payout amount subtraction switch during the stop preparation state. For example, if the ball-play amount subtraction switch is turned ON for 3 seconds or longer and then switched to the OFF state to perform the subtraction of the ball-play amount subtraction switch, at least the ball-play amount subtraction switch is turned ON. It can be exemplified that the progress of the game including the jackpot game is stopped during the period. In addition, in order to make the player aware that the jackpot game is not canceled, the progress of the game including the winning game is temporarily stopped while the payout ball amount subtraction switch is in the ON state. It is preferable that a unique notification corresponding to is performed so that the outside can also recognize it.

It should be noted that the amount of balls to be subtracted by operating the ball amount subtraction switch during the stop preparation state is not limited to the above-mentioned "equivalent to the amount of balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game". You may set suitably according to etc. For example, in the case of a game property (for example, a set of 5 jackpot games, etc.) that guarantees the execution of 4 jackpot games after one jackpot game (for example, the amount of balls is 500), 1 time By operating the payout amount subtraction switch, a value exceeding the payout amount (500 shots) that can be obtained in the next one jackpot game (for example, "2000" which is equivalent to the payout amount that can be obtained in four jackpot games) departure") may be subtracted. As a result, the player's dissatisfaction can be eliminated.

(Regarding the transition to a stop-like state after clearing the stop state)
As described above in detail, in the restriction clear pattern table 4, regardless of which of the power-on patterns 1 to 4 is selected when the power is turned on, "before the stop state starts or after the stop state starts Clear (initialize) the amount of balls after that. In addition, in the restriction clear pattern table 4, when the power is turned on, only when the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) like the power-on patterns 2 and 3, the "restriction of the game during the stop state" is cleared. (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are maintained. In other words, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the "restrictions on games during the idle state" when the power is turned off and then turned on again. For example, in the event that a pause state has already occurred, if it is desired to release the restriction on the game, after turning off the power, the power-on operation may be performed so as to clear the "restriction on the game during the pause state". When it is desired to maintain the restriction, after the power is turned off, the power-on operation is performed so as to maintain the "restriction of the game during the stop state".

However, if the hall manager erroneously performs a power-on operation to clear the "restrictions on games during the idle state" after the power is cut off without noticing that the idle state has already occurred, As for the stop state, there is a possibility that the stop state is canceled and the game can be restarted even though the player wants to continue the game. In this example, when the stop state has already occurred, when the power-on operation is performed so as to clear the "restrictions on games during the stop state", the stop state is cleared at that point, but the Regarding the configuration that does not return to the normal state but shifts to a stop-like state that restricts the game in the same way as the stop state, and continues the stop-like state until the hall manager performs a specific operation. to explain.

First, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a stop-like state end switch for ending the stop-like state is provided. This stop-similar state end switch is a work operation unit that the player cannot touch (a button that enables switching between the ON state and the OFF state, and a key that enables switching between the ON state and the OFF state. are provided on the main control board 1310 as key switches, etc.). When the stop-like state end switch is operated during the stop-like state, the operation signal is input to the main control board 1310, and although the game is restricted in the stop-like state, the stop-like state is canceled and the normal state is reached. to enable the game to be resumed. It should be noted that the operation of the stop-similar state end switch is valid during the stop-resembling state, but the operation of the stop-similar state end switch is invalid during the stop state, and the stop-similar state end switch is operated during the stop state. Even if you do, you will not be able to cancel the stop state. Further, the stop-similar state end switch may also be used as the above-described payout amount subtraction switch.

FIG. 142 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when a stop-like state occurs after clearing the stop state when the power is turned on.

First, at the timing t1, it is determined that the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on the balls entering the winning hole. , the stop flag is set to ON, and the restriction pattern 3 is applied to both "stop the game" and "stop shooting". The behavior of the stop state is as described above.

Specifically, in the stop state, the game ball cannot be shot, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed. That is, in the stopping state, no variable display of special symbols or a big win game is executed, and even if there is a start winning, variable display of special symbols is not newly started.

Next, after shifting to the stopping state, the power is turned off at timing t2, and the power is turned on again at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned on again, the limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table, and the power-on patterns 2 and 3 in which the number of balls played and the stop state are cleared are used as the power-on pattern. is selected. For this reason, when the power is turned on again, the game state at the time of power cut-off is cleared (initialized), but "the amount of balls released before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state" and " Restrictions on games during stoppage state” are also cleared (initialized).

In this example, when the power is turned on again, the "restriction of games during the stop state" is cleared (initialized), but it is not immediately returned to the normal state, and the game is restricted in the same way as the stop state. transitioning to a state In such a stop-like state, similarly to the stop state, game balls cannot be shot, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed. In other words, in the stop-like state, the variable display of the special symbols and the jackpot game are not executed, and even if there is a starting prize, the variable display of the special symbols is not newly started. In this way, if the hall manager erroneously performs a power-on operation to clear the "restriction of games during the idle state" after the power is cut off without noticing that the idle state has already occurred. Also, the game is shifted to a stop-like state, and until the hall manager operates the stop-like state end switch, the game is restricted in the same way as the stop state, so that the resumption of the game is strictly managed by the hall manager. can do.

In the stop-similar state, as a mode of reporting to the outside, a notification is made in a mode different from the stop state. Specifically, in the stop-like state, for example, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 LED) and the speaker notify that the game is temporarily restricted until the stop-similar state end switch is operated. In this manner, in the stop-like state, by notifying in a mode different from the stop state, it is possible to surely recognize whether it is in the stop state or after the power supply is cut off during the stop state. In addition, when the power is turned on again, "the amount of balls to be played before the start of the stop state and after the start of the stop state" and "restrictions on games during the stop state" must be cleared (initialized). , it also notifies that the amount of balls released and the stoppage state have been cleared.

It should be noted that the behavior of the stop-like state is substantially the same as the behavior of the stop state, except for the aspect of notifying the outside. Specifically, in the stop-like state, the movable body is put into an inoperable state in which it does not move. In addition, in the stop-like state, the external terminal board is in a forced output state in which a security signal is forcibly output even though an abnormality is not being detected, the setting value is not being changed, or the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation. . As a result, a security signal is output to the hole computer in the stop-like state, and the hole side can recognize that the state has shifted to the stop-like state.

In addition, in the stop-similar state, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls B that were paid out as prize balls (number of payouts) are not included in the calculation. In other words, it is disabled to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, and is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Also, in the stop-like state, even if a ball entering the winning hole is detected, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls and are not added to the number of balls possessed by the player. However, in the stop-similar state, it may be configured not to detect the ball entering the winning hole. , the predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls and are not added to the number of balls possessed by the player. In the stop-like state, the period during which the number of balls held by the player can be calculated by operating the count button switch 180 is set.

Further, in the stop-like state, no abnormality determination is made as to whether or not an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration is detected. That is, in the stop-like state, even if an abnormality is detected, the abnormality is not notified to the outside because the abnormality determination is not performed. In this way, in the stop-like state, the notice of the stop-like state is given priority over the abnormal notice, so that the player and the hall manager are surely recognized that the stop-like state has shifted to the stop-like state. be able to. However, in the stop-like state, it may be configured not to detect an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration. The anomaly notification to be transmitted is not executed.

Next, after transitioning to the stop-like state, at time t4, the stop-like state termination switch is operated. In this example, when the stop-like state end switch is operated during the stop-like state, the stop-like state is canceled to return to the normal state, and the restrictions on the game in the stop-like state are released. The behavior in the normal state is as described above.

Specifically, in the normal state, the game ball can be shot, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. In other words, in the normal state, different from the stop-like state and the stop state, when there is a start winning, the variable display of the special symbols can be started, and when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped with the winning symbols. Then, a normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started.

In addition, when the power is turned on again, "the amount of balls to be played before the start of the stop state and after the start of the stop state" and "restrictions on games during the stop state" must be cleared (initialized). , it is notified that the amount of balls and the stop state have been cleared, but such a notification will be executed when the stop similar state end switch is operated during the stop similar state and returned to the normal state. can be As a result, when the power is turned on again, although the number of balls to be put out and the stop state are cleared, the game shifts to a stop-like state and the game is restricted in the same way as in the stop state. can be prevented.

[Another modified example of the side unit]
Next, another form of side unit 2800H different from the above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145 and the like. FIG. 143 is a schematic perspective view showing the back side of a side unit 2800H of yet another form. FIG. 144 is an enlarged side view in which the vicinity of magnetic sensor 1030H shown in FIG. 143 is enlarged. FIG. 145 is an enlarged plan view in which the vicinity of the sphere sensor 2815H shown in FIG. 143 is enlarged. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800 and the side units 2800B to 2800G described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

The side unit 2800H extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. In addition, the side unit 2800H includes a plurality of (three in this embodiment) general winning openings 2001 that are open to receive the game ball B at all times.

The side unit 2800H of this embodiment includes a unit body 2810A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which obstacle nails are implanted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit body 2810A, An LED board provided between the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820, a magnetic sensor 1030H that detects illegal magnetism (magnetic lines of force) in the vicinity of the general winning opening 2001, and the general winning opening 2001 from the passage exit 2812b A ball sensor 2815H for detecting the discharged game ball B is further provided.

Between the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820, in addition to the LED board, a magnetic sensor 1030H and a ball sensor 2815H are provided (not shown in FIG. 143). The unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and for example, the LED substrate, the magnetic sensor 1030H, the ball sensor 2815H, and the like are visible from the outside of the unit.

The LED board of the side unit 2800H is provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front mounting surface facing the player side, and a connector socket for connection is provided on the back mounting surface opposite to the front mounting surface. A connector pin provided at one end of the sub-wiring 2805 a is inserted into the socket of the connecting connector, and the other end of the sub-wiring 2805 a is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 . That is, the LED board of the side unit 2800H is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the sub wiring 2805a.

The sub-wiring 2805a is, for example, an electric wire covered with an insulator and a protective coating, and in this embodiment, the LED board and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected via three sub-wirings 2805a. Specifically, the three sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board extend to the outside of the side unit 2800H through an opening (not shown) formed in the rear portion of the unit cover 2820 and are connected to the peripheral control board 1510. there is Also, the three sub-wirings 2805a extending to the outside of the side unit 2800H are pulled out to the rear of the side unit 2800H so as to bypass the rear of the ball sensor 2815H and the magnetic sensor 1030H, and then extend toward the starting port unit 2100. It is routed toward the center of the game machine 1 (to the left in the drawing).

As shown in FIG. 77(f), the magnetic sensor 1030H includes a sensor body 1031 for detecting magnetism, a sensor substrate 1032 having a white surface on which the sensor body 1031 is mounted, the sensor substrate 1032 and the sensor. and a sensor case 1033 covering the main body 1031 . In addition to the sensor main body 1031, the sensor substrate 1032 is mounted with an IC, a transistor, a resistor, a diode, a socket for the connector 1032H for connection, and the like. A pin of the connecting connector 1032H provided at one end of the main wiring 2805b is inserted into the socket of the connecting connector 1032H, and the other end of the main wiring 2805b is connected to the main control board 1310. FIG. That is, the sensor board 1032 is connected to the main control board 1310 via the main wiring 2805b.

The main wiring 2805b is, for example, an electric wire covered with an insulator and a protective coating. In this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1030H and the main control board 1310 are connected via two main wirings 2805b. Specifically, the pins of the connector 1032H provided at one end of the two main wirings 2805b extending from the main control board 1310 are connected to the sensor board 1032 via an opening (not shown) formed at the rear of the unit cover 2820. is inserted into the socket of the connector 1032H for connection mounted on the . Two main wires 2805b extending rearward from the magnetic sensor 1030H are folded back so as to bypass the magnetic sensor 1030H, extend forward along the sides of the magnetic sensor 1030H, 1 (to the left in the drawing). Part of the pins of the connector 1032H inserted into the sockets of the connector 1032H protrude rearward from the rear surface of the unit cover 2820 through the opening of the unit cover 2820. FIG.

The ball sensor 2815H includes, for example, a “photosensor having a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion,” a “dielectric sensor that detects changes in induced current,” a “contact sensor that detects contact with a game ball,” and a “detector that detects changes in magnetism.” Any one of a "magnetic sensor for detecting" and a "capacitance sensor for detecting a change in electrostatic capacity" may be employed. Also, the ball sensor 2815H has a sensor substrate, and a socket of the connector 2815Ha for connection is mounted on the sensor substrate. A pin of the connector 2815Ha provided at one end of the main wiring 2805c is inserted into the socket of the connector 2815Ha, and the other end of the main wiring 2805c is connected to the main control board 1310. FIG. That is, the sphere sensor 2815H is connected to the main control board 1310 via the main wiring 2805c.

The main wiring 2805c is, for example, an electric wire covered with an insulator and a protective coating. In this embodiment, the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310 are connected via two main wirings 2805c. Specifically, the pins of the connection connector 2815Ha provided at one end of the two main wires 2805b are inserted into the sockets of the connection connector 2815Ha provided on the ball sensor 2815. As shown in FIG. Also, the two main wires 2805c are led out to the side of the ball sensor 2815H (to the right in the drawing) through an opening formed in the side of the unit cover 2820, and then connected to the ball sensor 2815H and the magnetic sensor 1030H. It is folded back toward the starting port unit 2100 so as to bypass the rear, and is pulled around toward the center of the gaming machine 1 (to the left in the drawing). The pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha inserted into the sockets of the connecting connector 2815Ha are positioned inside the unit cover 2820, unlike the pins of the connecting connector 1032H described above. It does not protrude outside the cover 2820 .

In the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 passes through the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning opening 2001 to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110. It is guided by the ball passage 2812a, flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and is detected by the ball sensor 2815H after being discharged from the passage outlet 2812b opening toward the rear. . Further, in the side unit 2800H of the present embodiment, for example, when a magnet is brought close to the side unit 2800H for the purpose of tampering with the general prize winning opening 2001, the magnet is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030H.

In addition, the main wirings 2805b and 2805c and the sub-wirings 2805a described above are joined along the route in which the wirings extend, and then bundled together by a binding member 2820g such as a binding band, and attached to the unit cover 2820. It may be fixed to the unit cover 2820 via the formed opening 2820f. For example, an external force acting directly on each wiring may cause the pins of the connection connector to come out of the socket of the connection connector. can be suppressed. In addition, each wiring extends on a plane along the back surface or side surface of the unit cover 2820 and then bundled together by the binding member 2820g. It is possible to further prevent the pin from coming out of the socket of the connector for connection.

Here, the electronic parts such as the magnetic sensor 1030H and the ball sensor 2815H described above may be replaced with normal electronic parts when trouble such as damage occurs, for example. 2. Description of the Related Art In some cases, a pin of a connector provided on a wiring is repeatedly inserted into and removed from a socket of a connector provided on an electronic component. In such a case, the fitting between the socket of the connector for connection on the electronic component side and the pin for connection on the wiring side is weakened, and external force such as vibration applied to the game machine may cause the socket of the connector for connection of the electronic component to become loose. There is a risk that the pin of the connector for connecting the wiring may come off. Also, if the pin of the wiring connector is pulled out from the socket of the connector for connecting the electronic parts, there is a possibility that the performance or the game will be defective, and that the player's interest in the game will be reduced.

[Aspect in which the wiring abuts on the pin of the connector for connection]
As shown mainly in FIG. 144, in the side unit 2800H, two main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H come into contact with the pins of the connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H. are arranged as follows. Specifically, at least part of the pins of the connection connector 1032H protrude outside the unit cover 2820 that houses the magnetic sensor 1030H when inserted into the socket of the connection connector 1032H. On the other hand, the two main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H and arranged outside the unit cover 2820 sandwich the two main wirings 2805b extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H outside the pins of the connector 1032H for connection. It is provided so as to abut on the top.

In the side unit 2800H of the present embodiment, the main wiring 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H is arranged so as to abut against the pins of the connector 1032H inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H. Even if an external force is applied to the pins of the connector 1032H so that the sockets of the connector 1032H are pulled out, the two main wires 2805c that contact the pins of the connector 1032H prevent the sockets of the connector 1032H from being pulled out. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connecting connector 1032H from coming out of the connection connector 1032H, thereby suppressing the troubles that occur in the performance or the game, and suppressing the decline in the interest in the game.

In the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, there are two main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H, and the number of the main wirings 2805b is the same as the number of the main wirings 2805b provided with the pins of the connector 1032 inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H. Although one embodiment is shown, it is preferable that the number of main wirings 2805c extending from the sphere sensor 2815H is larger than the number of main wirings 2805b provided with pins of the connecting connector 1032 inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H. Since many main wires 2805c extending from the sphere sensor 2815H are arranged so as to contact the pins of the connector 1032H inserted into the magnetic sensor 1030H, the pins of the connector 1032H are pulled out of the sockets of the connector 1032H. can be further suppressed.

In this embodiment, the two main wirings 2805c extending from the sphere sensor 2815H are arranged so as to sandwich the two main wirings 2805b extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H. 2805c may be arranged so as to abut against a pin of the connector 1032H on either side of the two main wires 2805b extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H. It is possible to prevent the pin from coming off.

Further, in this embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, the magnetic sensor 1030H is provided with the socket for the connector 1032, and the main wiring 2805b is provided with the pin for the connector 1032. A configuration may be adopted in which the pins of the connector 1032 are provided and the sockets of the connector 1032 for connection are provided on the main wiring 2805b. By being provided so as to abut on the socket of the connector 1032H, it is possible to prevent the pin of the connector 1032H from coming out of the socket of the connector 1032H.

Main wiring 2805c connecting ball sensor 2815H and main control board 1310 preferably has a surface color different from that of main wiring 2805b connecting magnetic sensor 1030H and main control board 1310. FIG. In this embodiment, the main wiring 2805c connected to the sphere sensor 2815H has a bright surface color such as white, yellow, pink, or light blue, and the main wiring 2805b connected to the magnetic sensor 1030H has black or brown surface color. It has a dark surface color such as navy blue. Since the surface color of the main wiring 2805b and the surface color of the main wiring 2805c are different, any main wiring 2805b is connected to the magnetic sensor 1030H especially at the position where the main wiring 2805b and the main wiring 2805c are arranged side by side. or the main wiring 2805c connected to the sphere sensor 2815H, for example, it is possible to easily replace the magnetic sensor 1030H and the sphere sensor 2815H. The main wiring 2805c connected to the sphere sensor 2815H may have a dark surface color, and the main wiring 2805b connected to the magnetic sensor 1030H may have a bright surface color.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, the wiring that abuts on the pin of the connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connector 1032H for connection of the magnetic sensor 1030H is the main connector that connects the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310. Although an aspect of wiring 2805c has been shown, the wiring that abuts on the pin of connector 1032H inserted into the socket of connector 1032H of magnetic sensor 1030H is, for example, three subs extending from the LED board of side unit 2800H. It may be the wiring 2805a, and three sub-wirings 2805a are provided so as to contact the pins of the connector 1032H, thereby suppressing the pins of the connector 1032H from coming out of the sockets of the connector 1032H. be able to.

Further, in this embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, the main wiring 2805c of the ball sensor 2815H contacts the pin of the connector 1032H that is inserted into the socket of the connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H connected to the main control board 1310. Although the embodiment has been shown, instead of the magnetic sensor 1030H connected to the main control board 1310, an LED board of the side unit 2800 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via the sub-wiring 2805a may be used. When the main wiring 2805c comes into contact with the pins of the connecting connector inserted into the socket of the connecting connector provided on the LED board, the pins of the connecting connector are pulled out of the socket of the connecting connector provided on the LED board. can be suppressed. Alternatively, another sub-wiring connecting another electronic component and the peripheral control board 1510 may contact the pin of the connecting connector inserted into the socket of the connecting connector provided on the LED board. When another sub-wiring comes into contact with the pins of the connecting connector inserted into the socket of the connecting connector provided on the LED board, the pins of the connecting connector are pulled out from the socket of the connecting connector provided on the LED board. You can prevent it from falling out.

[Aspect in which another wire abuts on the wire extending from the pin of the connector for connection]
As shown mainly in FIG. 145, in the side unit 2800H, the three sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H are connected to the pins of the connector 2815Ha inserted into the socket of the connector 2815Ha of the ball sensor 2815H. It is disposed so as to abut on the two main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H, and prevents the pin of the connector 2815Ha from coming out of the socket of the connector 2815Ha of the ball sensor 2815H.

Specifically, the pins of the connector for connection 2815Ha are positioned inside the unit cover 2820 that houses the ball sensor 2815H in a state where the connector for connection 2815Ha is inserted into the socket of the connector for connection 2815Ha. main wiring 2805c extends from the opening of the unit cover 2820 to the outside of the side unit 2800H. Such two main wirings 2805c extend from the pin of the connector 2815Ha to the outside of the unit cover 2820 along the direction of insertion and removal of the pin of the connector 2815Ha, and then bend along the surface of the unit cover 2820. , extending in the direction of connection with the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, the three sub-wirings 2805a are provided so as to abut on the two main wirings 2805c that bend along the surface of the unit cover 2820 outside the unit cover 2820 from the outside of the bending arc. The three sub-wirings 2805a and the two main wirings 2805c are bundled by a binding member 2820g such as a binding band after the three sub-wirings 2805a abut on the two main wirings 2805c. It may be put together and fixed to the unit cover 2820 via an opening 2820f formed in the unit cover 2820. For example, an external force acting directly on each wiring may cause the pin of the connector for connection to break. Disengagement from the socket of the connector for connection can be suppressed.

In the side unit 2800H of this embodiment, three sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board are provided so as to abut on two main wirings 2805c extending from the pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha inserted into the ball sensor 2815H. Therefore, even if an external force is applied to the pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha so that the pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha are pulled out of the sockets of the connecting connector 2815Ha, the two main pins extending from the pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha are not connected. The three sub-wirings 2805a abutting on the wiring 2805c can prevent the pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha from coming off from the sockets of the connecting connector 2815Ha, which in turn suppresses problems that occur in the performance or the game, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest in the game. can do.

In the side unit 2800H of the present embodiment, there are three sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H, and the number of main wirings 2805c provided with the pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha inserted into the ball sensor 2815H. , the number of sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H is equal to or less than the number of main wirings 2805c provided with pins of the connecting connector 2815Ha inserted into the ball sensor 2815H. It is possible to prevent the pin of the connector 2805Ha from coming out of the socket of the connector 2805Ha.

In the present embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, the sphere sensor 2815H is provided with the socket of the connector 2805Ha for connection, and the main wiring 2805c is provided with the pin of the connector 2805Ha for connection. A configuration in which the pins of the connector 2805Ha are provided and the sockets of the connector 2805Ha for connection are provided on the main wiring 2805c may be used, and the pins of the connector 2805Ha for connection can be prevented from coming off from the sockets for the connector 2805Ha for connection. .

Main wiring 2805c connecting ball sensor 2815H and main control board 1310 preferably has a surface color different from that of sub wiring 2805a connecting the LED board of side unit 2800 and peripheral control board 1510. FIG. In this embodiment, the main wiring 2805c has a bright surface color such as white, yellow, pink, or light blue, and the sub wiring 2805a has a dark surface color such as black, brown, or dark blue. Since the surface color of the main wiring 2805c and the surface color of the sub-wiring 2805a are different, any main wiring can be either the main wiring 2805c or the sub-wiring 2805a at a position where the main wiring 2805b and the sub-wiring 2805a are arranged side by side. It is possible to easily visually recognize whether there is any, and for example, replacement work of the ball sensor 2815H and the LED board of the side unit 2800 can be facilitated. The main wiring 2805c may have a dark surface color, and the sub wiring 2805a may have a light surface color. In addition, the main wiring 2805c and the sub-wiring 2805a have different diameters from the viewpoint that it is possible to easily visually recognize whether an arbitrary main wiring is the main wiring 2805c or the sub-wiring 2805a. However, from the viewpoint of the importance of each wiring, it is desirable that the diameter of the main wiring 2805c is larger than the diameter of the sub wiring 2805a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, two main wirings 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H are shown in contact with the sub wirings 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H. The wiring that abuts on the two main wirings 2805c may be, for example, two main wirings 2805b that connect the magnetic sensor 1030H and the main control board 1310. By being provided so as to abut on the connector 2805Ha, it is possible to prevent the pin of the connector 2805Ha from coming out of the socket of the connector 2805Ha.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the side unit 2800H, two main wirings 2805c connecting the ball sensor 2815H and the main control board 1310 are in contact with the sub-wirings 2805a extending from the LED board of the side unit 2800H. Alternatively, instead of the sphere sensor 2815H, another LED board of the side unit 2800 connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a sub-wiring may be employed. By abutting on the sub-wirings extending from the board, it is possible to prevent the pin of the connecting connector from coming out of the socket of the connecting connector provided on the other LED board. Alternatively, two main wirings extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H and the ball sensor 2815H may be brought into contact with sub-wirings extending from another LED board. It is possible to prevent the pin of the connector for connection from coming off.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the configuration of the side unit 2800H, a mode in which the wiring abuts the pin of the connector for connection and a mode in which another wiring abuts the wiring extending from the pin of the connector for connection has been described. Aspects can also be implemented in other units that have multiple electronic components that are hardwired together, such as the starter unit 2100 that has a ball sensor and a magnetic sensor, for example. In addition, if it is difficult to route each wire even in a unit that has only one electronic component that is connected by wiring, or a unit that has a plurality of electronic components, it is possible to use a wire extending from another unit, for example. Therefore, it is possible to implement a mode in which the wiring is brought into contact with the pin of the connector for connection, and a mode in which the wiring is brought into contact with the wiring extending from the pin of the connection connector.

In the mode in which the wiring abuts the pin of the connecting connector and the mode in which another wiring abuts the wiring extending from the pin of the connecting connector, the type of signal transmitted via the wiring extending from the pin of the connecting connector It is desirable that the type of the signal transmitted through the wiring for suppressing the disconnection of the pin of the connector for connection is different from the type of the signal.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the two main wires 2805c extending from the ball sensor 2815H are arranged so as to contact the pins of the connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connector 1032H of the magnetic sensor 1030H. , the signal when the ball sensor 2815H detects the game ball B changes instantaneously as the game ball B passes, whereas the signal when the magnetic sensor 1030H detects magnetism is Remains in the changed state while detecting magnetism. In this way, when using wiring that transmits different types of signals, if the wiring is arranged in parallel and a large current signal is transmitted, it is necessary to consider noise that affects each other. Conventionally, from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the magnetic sensor 1030H is provided close to the sphere sensor 2815H, and the wiring extending from the magnetic sensor 1030H and the wiring extending from the sphere sensor 2815H are wirings that transmit relatively small current signals. Therefore, in the aspect in which the wiring is in contact with the pins of the connection connector described above, for example, there is no need to use special wiring in consideration of the influence of noise. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connecting connector 1032H inserted into the sockets of the connecting connector 1032H from coming off without providing a special member, and it is also possible to prevent a decrease in productivity.

Similarly, in the aspect in which another wiring contacts the wiring extending from the pin of the connector for connection, for example, no special wiring considering the influence of noise is used. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connecting connector 1032H inserted into the socket of the connecting connector 1032H from coming off without providing a new member for suppressing the drop in productivity.

In addition, in the aspect in which the wiring contacts the pin of the connector for connection described above, and the aspect in which the wiring extending from the pin of the connector for connection contacts other wiring, the pin connected to the magnetic sensor 1030H and the wiring extending from the sphere sensor 2815H , and the wiring extending from the LED board have been exemplified. If it is not something that transmits a large current signal such as a pin connected to the drive motor that moves the drive motor or a wire extending from the drive motor, it is connected to a mechanical sensor (contact type) that detects the operation of the production button of the production operation unit 250. Pins and wires connected to the sensor, pins and wires connected to a distance sensor (infrared sensor) that detects the movement of the player without contact, or pins and wires that are connected to a photosensor that detects the position of the origin of the movable decoration Wiring or the like can also be used.

[Modified example of starting unit]
Next, a starting port unit 2100A having a form different from that described above will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148 and the like. FIG. 146 is a schematic perspective view showing the back side of a different form of starting port unit 2100A. FIG. 147 is an enlarged rear view in which the vicinity of the second start opening sensor 2401A shown in FIG. 146 is enlarged. FIG. 148 is a schematic rear view showing another aspect of main wiring. Here, the same components as those of the starting port unit 2100 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

The starting port unit 2100A is attached to the lower center of the game area 5a and to the right of the side unit 2800H in the game area 5a where the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. The starting port unit 2100A has one starting port 2003A which is always open upward with a width capable of receiving only one game ball B, and the game ball B received in the starting port 2003A is branched in order in the horizontal direction. and a unit main body 2115 that accommodates the branch portion 2111 and forms a passage for the game ball B received in the starting port 2003A.

In addition to the branch portion 2111, the unit main body 2115 accommodates a first starting port sensor 2112, a second starting port sensor 2113, and a magnetic sensor 2114, which will be described later. The unit main body 2115 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the first starter sensor 2112, the second starter sensor 2113, the magnetic sensor 2114, and the like can be seen from the outside of the unit main body 2115. Further, inside the unit main body 2115, there are a passage for guiding the game ball B received in the starting port 2003A to the branching portion 2111, and a game ball branched to the left side (the right side in the drawing) by the branching portion 2111. After guiding B to the first starting opening sensor 2112, the game branched to the left side (right side in the drawing) passage to the outside of the unit main body 2115 and the right side in the front view (left side in the drawing) by the branch part 2111 A passage on the right side (left side in the drawing) for guiding the ball B to the second starting port sensor 2113 and then discharging it to the outside of the unit main body 2115 is formed.

The starting opening unit 2100A detects the game ball B branched to the left in the drawing by the first starting opening sensor 2112 and the branching part 2111 that detects the game ball B branched to the right in the drawing by the branching part 2111. It further has a second starting port sensor 2113 and a magnetic sensor 2114 capable of detecting magnetism in the vicinity of the starting port 2003A.

When the game ball B is detected by the first start sensor 2112, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are added to the number of balls held, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the first In a state where the reserved number of special symbols is less than 4), a lottery for the first special symbol is executed which enables the occurrence of an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. Similarly, when the game ball B is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2113, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are added to the number of balls held, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, , the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4), a lottery for the second special symbols is executed which enables the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Also, the magnetic sensor 2114 detects an illegal magnetism (magnetic lines of force) in the vicinity of the starting port 2003A.

The starting port unit 2100A has connecting means 2116 for connecting each of the first starting port sensor 2112, the second starting port sensor 2113 and the magnetic sensor 2114 to the main control board 1310. FIG. The detection signals from the first starting sensor 2112 and the second starting sensor 2113 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board such as a relay board, and the main control input circuit input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU.

The connection means 2116 includes two main wirings 2116a arranged between the first starting sensor 2112 and the main control board 1310, pins of a connecting connector 2116b attached to the ends of the main wirings 2116a, and first and a socket for connecting connector 2116b attached to the starting port sensor 2112 . The connecting means 2116 includes two main wirings 2116c arranged between the second starting sensor 2113 and the main control board 1310, a connecting connector pin attached to the end of the main wiring 2116c, and a second main wiring 2116c. A connector socket for connection attached to the dual start sensor 2112, two main wires 2116d arranged between the magnetic sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310, and connections attached to the ends of the main wires 2116d. and a socket for a connector 2116 e attached to the magnetic sensor 2114 .

Each of the main wirings 2116 a , 2116 c , 2116 d is, for example, an electric wire covered with an insulator and a protective coating, and routed along a substantially grooved wiring path 2115 a formed on the back surface of the unit body 2115 . After the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join together in the wiring path 2115a, the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are bundled with a binding member such as a binding band, and fixed to the unit main body 2115. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the pins of the connection connector from coming out of the socket of the connection connector due to an external force that directly acts on the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d.

The wiring path 2115a of the unit main body 2115 includes the first starting sensor 2112, the second starting sensor 2113, the magnetic sensor 2114, the passage that guides the game ball B to the branch part 2111, and the game ball B that passes through the first starting sensor 2112. It is formed on the back surface of the passage unit main body 2115 so as to bypass the passage leading to and the passage guiding the game ball B to the second starting hole sensor 2113 . The wiring path 2115a is formed in a substantially groove-like shape on the back surface of the unit body 2115, and the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are routed along the wiring path 2115a inside the back surface of the unit body 2115. there is The unit main body 2115 further has a wall-like contact member 2115b forming part of the side wall of the substantially groove-like wiring path 2115a in the vicinity of the first starting opening sensor 2112 .

[Contact member acting on bent part of wiring]
As shown in FIG. 147, the main wiring 2116a extends from the pin of the connector 2116e inserted into the socket of the connector 2116e of the first starting port sensor 2112 to the main control board via the wiring path 2115a of the unit main body 2115. It extends towards 1310. Specifically, the main wiring 2116a has a bent portion 2116a1 that bends in a direction different from the inserting/removing direction of the connecting connector 2116e in the vicinity of the first starting port sensor 2112, and the bent portion 2116a1 is the end of the main wiring 2116a. The wiring path 2115a is formed from the pin of the connector 2116e for connection provided in the part toward the wiring path 2115a.

The contact member 2115b formed on the unit main body 2115 acts on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, and the connecting connector 2116e provided on the first starting port sensor 2112 and the connecting connector 2116a provided on the main wiring 2116a. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connector 2116e from coming off, thereby preventing troubles in the performance or the game and reducing the interest in the game. Specifically, the contact member 2115b formed in the unit main body 2115 is in contact with the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a extending along the wiring path 2116a from the outside in the radial direction of the bent portion 22116a1. Even if an external force is applied to the pins of the connecting connector 2116e such that the pins of the connecting connector 2116e are pulled out of the socket of the connecting connector 2116e, the contact member 2115b contacts the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a. The external force applied to the pin of the connector 2116e is absorbed by the bending of the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, and it is possible to prevent the pin of the connector 2116e from coming out of the socket of the connector 2116e.

In addition, it is more preferable that the bent portion 21126a1 is pressed against the contact member 2115b. The flexure of the bent portion 2116a1 is more absorbed, and it is possible to suppress the pin of the connector 2116e from coming out of the socket of the connector 2116e.

In this embodiment, the contact member 2115b formed in the unit main body 2115 contacts the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a extending along the wiring path 2116a from the radially outer side of the bent portion 2116a1. , the contact member 2115b formed in the unit body 2115 may be arranged in close proximity to the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a extending along the wiring path 2116a, on the radially outer side of the bent portion 2116a1. Even if an external force is applied to the pins of the connection connector 2116e such that the pins of the connection connector 2116e are pulled out of the sockets of the connection connector 2116e, the contact member 2115b approaches the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a. The external force applied to the pins of the connector 2116e brings the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a into contact with the contact member 2115b. It is possible to prevent the pin of the connector 2116e from coming out of the socket 2116e.

Further, in this embodiment, the contact member 2115b formed on the unit body 2115 is not located on the insertion/extraction direction of the pin of the connector 2116e for connection of the main wiring 2116a. Therefore, when the pin of the connector 2116e for connection of the main wiring 2116a is inserted into or removed from the socket of the connector 2116e for connection of the first starting port sensor 2112, contact between the pin of the connector 2116e and the contact member 2115b can be suppressed. , the pin of the connector 2116e for connection of the main wiring 2116a can be easily inserted/extracted from the socket of the connector 2116e for connection of the first starting port sensor 2112. As shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, after the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join together in the wiring path 2115a, the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are bundled by a binding member such as a binding band to form a unit. Although a mode of being fixed to the main body 2115 has been described, when a plurality of each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are provided, after at least a part of each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are joined, a binding band or the like is attached. The main wires 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d may be bundled by a binding member and fixed to the unit main body 2115. Alternatively, each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d may be bundled by a binding member such as a binding band and fixed to the unit main body. 2115 may be fixed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the contact member 2115b is formed on the unit main body 2115, but the contact member 2115b is formed by the game board 5 (more specifically, the panel plate of the game panel 1100 on the game board 5). 1110), it may be provided on the game board 5 so as to act on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a.

Specifically, a contact portion corresponding to the contact member 2115b acting on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a is formed at the right end portion of the side unit 2800H adjacent to the left side of the starting port unit 2100A. Alternatively, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 may be provided with a contact portion corresponding to the contact member 2215b that acts on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a, or it may be attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The rear unit 3000 may be provided with a contact portion corresponding to the contact member 2215b that acts on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a. It is possible to suppress the disconnection of the pin of the connector 2116e provided on the wiring 2116a, thereby suppressing the inconvenience caused in the performance or the game, and suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game. In addition, the aspect in which the contact member 2115b is formed on the unit main body 2115 has a wider range in which the contact member 2115b can be formed than the aspect in which the contact member 2115b is formed on the outside of the starting port unit 2100A. Excellent ease of design when forming On the other hand, the aspect in which the contact member 2115b is formed outside the starting port unit 2100A does not require the formation of a new contact member 2115b, compared to the aspect in which the contact member 2115b is formed in the unit main body 2115. It is excellent in ease of formation when forming the member 2115b.

Also, in this embodiment, the contact member 211 acts on the bent portion 2116a1 of the main wiring 2116a of the starting port unit 2100A, but this embodiment includes, for example, an LED substrate, a magnetic sensor 1030H, and a ball sensor 2815H. In another unit such as the side unit 2800H, the contact member may act on the bent portion of the main wiring or the sub-wiring. It is possible to prevent the pin of the connector provided for connection from coming off, thereby suppressing troubles that occur in the performance or the game, and suppressing the decline in the interest in the game.

[Contact member acting on detour part of wiring]
As shown in FIG. 148, the main wiring 2116a of this embodiment is connected to the main control board 1310 in the vicinity of the pin of the connector 2116e inserted into the socket of the connector 2116e provided in the first starting port sensor 2112. has a detour portion 2116a2 that is detoured in a different direction (opposite direction in this embodiment) from the direction toward the main control board 1310 and then changed to a connection direction with the main control board 1310. FIG.

The contact member 2115c formed on the unit body 2115 acts on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, and the connecting connector 2116e provided on the first starting port sensor 2112 and the connecting connector 2116e provided on the main wiring 2116a. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connector 2116e from coming off, thereby preventing troubles in the performance or the game and reducing the interest in the game. Specifically, the contact member 2115c formed in the unit main body 2115 abuts the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a from the radially outer side of the detour portion 22116a2, and the pin of the connector 2116e for connection contacts the connector for connection. Even if an external force is applied to the pins of the connecting connector 2116e so that the pins of the connecting connector 2116e are pulled out of the socket of the connecting connector 2116e, the contact member 2115c abuts on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a. is absorbed by the bending of the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a, and it is possible to suppress the pin of the connector 2116e from coming out of the socket of the connector 2116e.

Further, it is more preferable that the detour portion 21126a2 is pressed against the contact member 2115c, and the deformation of the detour portion 2116a2 increases the contact area with the contact member 2115c, and the external force applied to the pin of the connector 2116e is applied to the main wiring 2116a. The bending of the detouring portion 2116a2 absorbs the deformation more and can suppress the pin of the connector 2116e from coming out of the socket of the connector 2116e.

In this embodiment, the contact member 2115c formed on the unit main body 2115 contacts the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a extending along the wiring path 2116a from the radially outer side of the detour portion 2116a2. However, the contact member 2115c formed on the unit main body 2115 may be arranged in close proximity to the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a on the radially outer side of the detour portion 2116a2. Even if the pin of the connector 2116e is pulled out of the socket of the connector 2116e, the contact member 2115c is close to the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a. The detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a and the contact member 2115c are brought into contact with each other by an external force, and the external force applied to the pin of the connector 2116e is absorbed by the deflection of the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connector 2116e from coming off.

Further, in this embodiment, the contact member 2115c formed on the unit main body 2115 is not located on the insertion/extraction direction of the pin of the connector 2116e for connection of the main wiring 2116a. Therefore, when the pin of the connector 2116e for connection of the main wiring 2116a is inserted into or removed from the socket of the connector 2116e for connection of the first starting port sensor 2112, contact between the pin of the connector 2116e and the contact member 2115c can be suppressed. , the pin of the connector 2116e for connection of the main wiring 2116a can be easily inserted/extracted from the socket of the connector 2116e for connection of the first starting port sensor 2112. As shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, after the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d join together in the wiring path 2115a, the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are bundled by a binding member such as a binding band to form a unit. Although a mode of being fixed to the main body 2115 has been described, when a plurality of each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are provided, after at least a part of each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d are joined, a binding band or the like is attached. The main wires 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d may be bundled by a binding member and fixed to the unit main body 2115. Alternatively, each of the main wirings 2116a, 2116c, and 2116d may be bundled by a binding member such as a binding band and fixed to the unit main body. 2115 may be fixed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the contact member 2115c is formed on the unit main body 2115, but the contact member 2115c is formed by the starting port unit 2100A on the game board 5 (more specifically, the panel plate of the game panel 1100 on the game board 5). 1110), it may be provided on the game board 5 so as to act on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a.

Specifically, a contact portion corresponding to the contact member 2215c acting on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a is formed at the right end portion of the side unit 2800H adjacent to the left side of the starting port unit 2100A. Alternatively, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 may be provided with a contact portion corresponding to the contact member 2115c that acts on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a. The unit 3000 may be provided with a contact portion corresponding to the contact member 2115c acting on the detour portion 2116a2 of the main wiring 2116a. It is possible to prevent the pins of the connector 2116e for connection provided in 2116a from being pulled out, which in turn can prevent troubles occurring in the performance or the game and reduce the interest in the game. In addition, the aspect in which the contact member 2115c is formed on the unit main body 2115 has a wider range in which the contact member 2115c can be formed than the aspect in which the contact member 2115c is formed on the outside of the starting port unit 2100A. Excellent ease of design when forming On the other hand, in the aspect in which the contact member 2115c is formed outside the starting port unit 2100A, compared to the aspect in which the contact member 2115c is formed in the unit main body 2115, there is no need to newly form the contact member 2115c. It is excellent in ease of formation when forming the member 2115c.

In addition, in the aspect described above, in which the wiring extending from the connecting member inserted into the connected member of one electronic component acts on the connecting member inserted into the connected member of the other electronic component or the wiring extending from the connecting member, For example, in a unit such as the starting port unit 2100A, it is difficult to suppress the disconnection of the connecting member inserted into the connected member of the electronic component located at the end of the wiring path. In the aspect of the contact member that acts on the detour, for example, in a unit such as the starter unit 2100A, even if the connection member is inserted into the connected member of the electronic component located at the end of the wiring path, the connection member It is possible to suitably suppress the omission.

[Handling of base value in base monitor]
Next, the base monitor of the pachinko machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be explained. In the above-described other embodiments, the base monitor (four 7-segment LEDs) is arranged on the main control board 1310, but the base monitor of the fifth embodiment is arranged on the frame control board 740. It is assumed that there is The basic configuration of the base monitor, such as having four 7-segment LEDs, is common to the other embodiments.

In this example, the frame control board 740 instead of the main control board 1310 manages (calculates and holds) the base values displayed on the base monitor. First, the frame control board 740 controls the number of game balls B entered (the number of entering balls), that is, the game The number of game balls B ejected from the area 5a is counted. Specifically, the number of game balls B detected by the safe ball sensor 606 and the number of game balls B entered into the winning hole are calculated as the number of game balls B entering the winning hole from which prize balls are paid out. The number of game balls B that entered the out hole for collecting the game balls B that did not hit the ball, and the number of game balls B detected by the out ball sensor 605 are counted as the number of entering balls. there is These safe ball sensor 606 and out ball sensor 605 are connected to the frame control board 740 .

In addition, the main control board 1310, when detected by the detection sensor corresponding to the prize winning opening to which the prize balls are paid out (given) by the entering ball, determines the number of the predetermined number of game balls B. It is transmitted to the frame control board 740 as a command. For example, when the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, ten game balls B are put out, and when the game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2002, one game ball B is put out, and the first game ball B is put out. When the game ball B enters the starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, three game balls B are put out, and when the game ball B enters the big winning port 2005 or the accessory winning port 2006, ten balls. It is predetermined to pay out the game balls B of . Then, the frame control board 740 receives the prize ball command, and the number of the game balls B to be paid out (given) as prize balls by entering the winning hole (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts). are counting. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, since real balls are not paid out, the number of game balls B to be paid out (given) as prize balls is determined based on the receipt of the prize ball command by the frame control board 740. The number of balls is added to the number of balls possessed by the player.

Then, the frame control board 740 calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, stores the calculation result as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and is arranged in the frame control board 740. I have it displayed on the base monitor. A formula for calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of hit balls is base value=(number of payouts/number of hit balls)×100. For example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is too large, there is a possibility that only the winning openings from which winning balls are paid out are being entered. By monitoring the information displayed on the base monitor, it is possible to ascertain whether or not the ball has been entered into the winning hole due to fraudulent acts.

In addition, regarding the base value, every time the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 60000 balls, the number of payouts for the number of entering balls is newly calculated. The ratio is calculated, and as for the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls that has become old, the calculation result up to a predetermined number of times is saved as a history. Specifically, in addition to the current base value BL until the number of game balls B entered (the number of balls entered) reaches 60,000, the previous base value BL Three intervals of the value B1, the base value B2 of the time before last, and the base value B3 of the time before last are stored as histories. As for the base value, the current base value BL, the previous base The value B1 and the base value B2 of the time before last are shifted to the base value of the previous time B1, the base value B2 of the time before last, and the base value B3 of the time before last, and the original base value B3 is discarded. Also, in the base monitor, the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value B2 the time before last, and the base value B3 the time before last are switched at regular intervals (for example, 3 seconds) and displayed. ing. Also, in the base monitor, out of the four 7-segment LEDs, two 7-segment LEDs are used to indicate which section the base value is, and the other two 7-segment LEDs are used to indicate the section being displayed. The corresponding base value (calculated result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls) is displayed. Also, the base monitor is a 7-segment LED with a decimal point (so-called dot). is making the dots light up. For example, when displaying the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the base value B2 of the time before last, and the base value B3 of the time before last, the four 7-segment LEDs display "BL.21", "B1 .19”, “B2.17”, and “B3.20” are switched and displayed at regular intervals (for example, 3 seconds). Thus, in this embodiment, by providing control for managing the base value on the side of the main body frame 4 (frame control board 740) instead of on the side of the game board 5 (main control board 1310), the main control board in the game board 5 1310 processing load can be reduced. Also, by providing the base monitor (four 7-segment LEDs) on the side of the main body frame 4 (frame control board 740) instead of on the side of the game board 5 (main control board 1310), the game board 5 can be replaced with respect to the main body frame 4. In this case, the cost of the game board 5 can be reduced by making it possible to use the base monitor on the side of the main body frame 4.例文帳に追加

By the way, when a base monitor is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the game board 5 as in the conventional art, and the base value displayed on the base monitor is managed by the main control board 1310, the main body frame 4, the base value is newly managed from the initial state on the main control board 1310 side of the replaced game board 5 after that. However, when a base monitor is provided in the frame control board 740 provided in the body frame 4 and the base value displayed on the base monitor is managed by the frame control board 740 as in the present embodiment, Even if the game board 5 is replaced with respect to the main body frame 4, the frame control board 740 provided in the main body frame 4 is not replaced. There is a possibility that part of the base value information may be reflected on the game board 5 after replacement, and there is a problem that the reliability and convenience at the time of replacement of the game board 5 are lowered. For example, if the base values of the game board 5 before replacement, such as the past base values B1 to B3 managed by the frame control board 740, are transmitted to the game board 5 after replacement, the base values on the game board 5 after replacement The reliability of the contents of the value is compromised. In this example, when the base value displayed on the base monitor is managed by the frame control board 740, a method for avoiding deterioration of reliability and convenience when replacing the game board 5 will be described below.

In this example, in the main control board 1310, a CPU number (specific information) specific to the CPU (main control MPU) is stored in advance. This CPU number is unique to each main control board 1310 even if it is a game board 5 of the same series, and cannot be rewritten using an external device. Also, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 and stores it in the RAM built in the frame control board 740 . The CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 is retained without being cleared (initialized) even if the power is turned on/off or the RAM clear switch 741 is operated when the power is turned on. Similarly, the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is retained without being cleared (initialized) even if the power is turned on/off or the RAM clear switch 741 is operated when the power is turned on. there is Then, when receiving the CPU number from the main control board 1310, the frame control board 740 determines whether or not the received CPU number matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. Based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not to clear (initialize) the base value stored in the frame control board 740 .

Specifically, when the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 match, the main body frame 4 , it is determined that the game board 5 has not been replaced, and the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained without being cleared. More specifically, all of the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the two-previous base value B2, and the two-previous base value B3 stored as base values are maintained. As a result, when the power is turned on with the same game board 5 attached, or when the game board A attached to the main body frame 4 as the game board 5 is removed while the power is off, the game board A is attached again. If the game board has not been replaced with another game board between the previous power-on and the current power-on, such as when the power is turned on, the base value will continue to be counted from the state where the base value is maintained. , the base value is not cleared unintentionally, and the base value can be continuously transmitted.

On the other hand, if the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 do not match, It is determined that the game board 5 has been replaced, and the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared (initialized). For example, when the game board A attached to the main body frame 4 as the game board 5 is removed and then the game board B having a different CPU number is attached, the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is changed to I am trying to clear it. More specifically, all of the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the pre-previous base value B2, and the pre-previous base value B3 stored as base values are cleared. As a result, after the game board 5 is replaced, the base value of the game board 5 before replacement is not transmitted, and the base value is newly counted from the state in which the base value is initialized. The base value on the game board 5 can be correctly transmitted. In other words, even though the game board 5 is replaced, there is no possibility that part of the base value information of the game board 5 before replacement will be reflected on the game board 5 after replacement. A decrease in reliability and convenience can be avoided.

As for the replacement of the game board 5, it is provided on the game board 5 whether the game board 5 corresponding to the same model series or the game board 5 corresponding to the different model series is replaced. Since the main control board 1310 is changed, the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 do not match. becomes.

When the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 do not match, the frame control board 740 stores the CPU number. In addition to clearing the stored base value, the received CPU number is newly stored in the RAM built in the frame control board 740 . In this example, the number of CPU numbers that can be stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is "1". If it is determined that they do not match, in addition to clearing the base value stored in the frame control board 740, the received CPU number is overwritten in the RAM built in the frame control board 740. I'm trying to remember anew in the form. This eliminates the need for clearing the CPU number and simplifies the control. As a separate example from this example, the number of CPU numbers that can be stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 may be "plural (for example, two)". Even if the game board 5 is erroneously attached to another main body frame 4, it is possible to ensure that the base value is not cleared, and convenience can be improved. However, if the number of CPU numbers that can be stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is set to "multiple (for example, two)", some of the stored multiple CPU numbers can be Alternatively, it is desirable to separately provide processing for optionally clearing all.

Further, in this example, the following control is performed when the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 is removed while the power is turned on. That is, when the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 is removed while the power is turned on, the frame control board 740 does not receive the CPU number, and at this timing, the CPU stored in the frame control board 740 The CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 are maintained without being cleared. Therefore, for example, when the game board A attached to the main body frame 4 as the game board 5 is detached from the main body frame 4 for some reason while the power is turned on (while the power supply to the main body frame 4 continues) ), the frame control board 740 does not receive the CPU number, and the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 are cleared. can be maintained without Thereby, even if the game board 5 is unintentionally removed, the base value can be counted continuously from the state in which the base value is maintained.

In addition, when the game board A attached to the main body frame 4 as the game board 5 is detached from the main body frame 4 for some reason while the power is turned on, and then the game board A is attached to the main body frame 4 again ( When power supply to the game board 5 is resumed while power supply to the main body frame 4 continues, the CPU number is transmitted from the main control board 1310 again. However, when the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number sent again from the main control board 1310 (from the frame control board 740 side, when the second CPU number is received after the power is turned on), the frame control board The CPU number received by the frame control board 740 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 are not checked again. As a result, when the game board 5 is unintentionally removed and the same game board 5 is remounted after that, the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 are cleared. The base value can be counted continuously from the state in which the base value is maintained. As another example, when the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number transmitted again from the main control board 1310 (from the frame control board 740 side, when the second CPU number is received after the power is turned on), The CPU number received by the frame control board 740 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 may be determined again on the side of the frame control board 740 . Even when the judgment is re-executed in this way, if the re-executed judgment result is "match", the CPU number and the base value stored in the frame control board 740 are maintained without being cleared. By doing so, the base value can be counted continuously from the state in which the base value is maintained.

Also, in this example, the number of CPU numbers that can be stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is "1". A is removed, then game board B is attached, then removed, and game board A is attached again. and the CPU number stored in , the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. In other words, if a plurality of different CPU numbers are received on the side of the frame control board 740 while the power is on, a clear abnormality or fraud can be foreseen. Even so, if the game board A is not attached immediately before that, the base value at the time when the game board A was first attached is not maintained.

(When exchanging from game board A1 to game board A2)
FIG. 149 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2 when the power is cut off. Here, the game board A1 is attached to the main body frame 4 before the power is cut off at the timing t1, and after the power is cut off at the timing t1, the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2, A case will be described where the frame control board 740 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 do not match when the power is turned on at timing t2. are doing. In this example, when the game board 5 is replaced, the case where the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2 corresponding to the same model series as the game board A1 is explained. Also when the game board B corresponding to The same behavior is shown from the judgment.

As shown in FIG. 149, before the power is turned off at timing t1, the game board A1 is attached to the main body frame 4, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side is progressed. It is a period in which it is possible to That is, in the state where the game board A1 is attached to the main body frame 4, when there is a start winning, the variable display of the special symbols can be started, and the variable display of the special symbols is stopped when the winning symbols are displayed. A normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started when the player wins.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are enabled, and it is possible to pay out (give) a prize ball by entering the ball. Also, when collecting the game ball B that has entered the various winning openings, the safe ball sensor 606 detects the game ball B that has entered the out opening without entering the various winning openings. , the out-ball sensor 605, and the safe-ball sensor 606 and the out-ball sensor 605 are enabled. As described above in detail, the information detected by these detection sensors is used to calculate the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, as for the effect display device 1600, as a normal operation, when the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, the standby effect in a state of waiting for the start of the variable display of the special symbols (for example, the demonstration effect ), and when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, the peripheral control board 1510 responds to the variable performance (performance based on the variable pattern) based on the reception of the variable pattern command. I'm trying to perform the action to do. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display including the variable display of decorative symbols (for example, ready-to-win effect).

In addition, from the external terminal plate (game ball rental device connection terminal plate 765), it is possible to output a predetermined signal to the hall computer. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped. For example, when there is a start winning, when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed with the winning symbol and the jackpot game is executed, when an abnormality is detected, etc., signals corresponding to them are output. .

Also, before the timing t1, when the player operates the handle 195, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a.

Also, before timing t1, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the game board A1 and stores it in the RAM built in the frame control board 740. FIG. The CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained without being cleared by a predetermined backup power source (not shown) even after the power is cut off at timing t1, and the CPU number is maintained from the game board A1 to the game board A2. , and when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later, it is held without being cleared.

Further, before timing t1, the frame control board 740 calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, and stores the calculation result as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The information is displayed on a base monitor provided on the control board 740 . In other words, before the power is turned off at timing t1, the number of game balls B that entered the entrance (award winning opening, out opening) (the number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls It is possible to count the number of balls (number of payouts) and calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, which can be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. This base value is maintained without being cleared even after the power is turned off at timing t1, and is not cleared even when the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2 and the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later. I'm trying to keep it in place.

Further, before timing t1, the frame control board 740 enables a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when detecting a ball entering the winning hole, and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are enabled. The number of balls can be added to the number of balls held by the player or the number X of balls held by the player. The number of held balls and the number of held balls X are maintained without being cleared by a predetermined backup power supply (not shown) even after the power is cut off at timing t1, and the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2. is held without being cleared even when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later. Further, after the power is turned on at the timing t2, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to settle the number of balls held by operating the counting button switch 180. FIG.

Next, after the power is cut off at timing t1, the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2. Then, with the game board A2 attached to the main body frame 4, the power is turned on at timing t2.

First, at timing t2 when the power is turned on, the CPU number is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740, and the frame control board 740 stores the received CPU number and the frame control board 740. It is determined whether or not the CPU number that is present matches. Here, since the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2 before the power is turned on at the timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 and the frame control board The CPU number stored in 740 and the CPU number stored in 740 are determined not to match, and based on the determination result, the base value stored in frame control board 740 is cleared.

Here, the timing for transmitting the CPU number from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 is a predetermined specific timing t2 immediately after the power is turned on. That is, when the specific timing t2 immediately after the power is turned on, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number and checks whether or not the CPU number matches the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740. Judging. Further, the specific timing t2 is the same timing regardless of the power-on pattern, which will be described later. If the number of balls held is cleared by operating the number of balls storage/display clear switch 743 when the power is turned on before the start of ram clearing, the ball extraction switch 742 must be operated before the number of balls held is cleared when the power is turned on. When the ball extraction mode is started by , the state (change permission state) in which the setting can be changed is started by operating the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch when the power is turned on before the ball extraction mode is started. In some cases, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated by setting it before the start of the change permission state.

As another example, regarding the timing of transmitting the CPU number from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740, in addition to the predetermined specific timing t2 immediately after the power is turned on, the CPU number on the frame control board 740 side For confirmation, the CPU number may be transmitted again from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 after the specific timing t2. Then, when the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number transmitted again from the main control board 1310 (from the frame control board 740 side, when the second CPU number is received after the power is turned on), the frame control board 740 The CPU number received by the frame control board 740 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 may be determined again on the side of the frame control board 740 . Even when the judgment is re-executed in this way, if the re-executed judgment result is "match", the CPU number and the base value stored in the frame control board 740 are maintained without being cleared. I am trying to On the other hand, if the result of the re-executed determination is "mismatched", a clear abnormality or fraud can be foreseen, so the CPU number and base value stored in the frame control board 740 are cleared. .

After the power is turned on at the timing t2, the game board A2 is attached to the main body frame 4, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. That is, in the state where the game board A2 is attached to the main body frame 4, when there is a start winning, the variable display of the special symbols can be started, and the variable display of the special symbols is stopped when the winning symbols are displayed. A normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started when the player wins.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are enabled, and it is possible to pay out (give) a prize ball by entering the ball. Also, when collecting the game ball B that has entered the various winning openings, the safe ball sensor 606 detects the game ball B that has entered the out opening without entering the various winning openings. , the out-ball sensor 605, and the safe-ball sensor 606 and the out-ball sensor 605 are enabled. As described above in detail, the information detected by these detection sensors is used to calculate the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Further, the effect display device 1600 executes display corresponding to clearing of the base value stored in the frame control board 740 at timing t2. Such a display is performed for a predetermined period of time, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as an operation during normal operation, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, a variation display of decorative patterns is included. Effect display (for example, ready-to-win effect) is executed. However, until the predetermined period elapses, a display corresponding to the clearing of the base value stored in the frame control board 740 and an effect display including a variable display of decorative symbols (for example, ready-to-win effect) are displayed. , and the normal operation may be executed simultaneously.

Also, the security signal is output from the external terminal board in response to the clearing of the base value stored in the frame control board 740 at timing t2. This security signal is output when an abnormality is detected, when the setting value is changed, or when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. Even when the base value is cleared, the same security signal is output. . In other words, when the base value is cleared, the security signal is forcibly output even though an abnormality is not detected, the setting value is not being changed, or the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation. As a result, when the base value is cleared, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can recognize that the base value has been cleared. In addition, regarding the security signal, the output is stopped when the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance (the winning entrance, the exit entrance) reaches 300 at timing t3, which will be described later. However, as another example, regardless of whether or not the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 balls, timing t3 The output may be stopped at a predetermined time such that the output is stopped before the timing t3 or after the timing t3. In addition, if the security signal is stopped before the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 balls, the security signal will be turned off after that stop. The security signal may be output again based on the establishment of other conditions to be output (detection of abnormality, etc.). It is also possible to improve the accuracy of monitoring the number of game balls B entering (the number of entering balls) (the number of entering balls) reaches 300. .

In this example, in addition to the security signal, various signals are output from the external terminal board to the hall computer to inform the gaming state, the entry of balls into the prize winning opening, the payout of prize balls, etc., but at timing t3. It is possible to output these signals not only after the output of the security signal is stopped at , but also during the period from timing t2 to t3.

Also, after the power is turned on at the timing t2, when the player operates the handle 195, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a.

Further, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the replaced game board A2, and the received CPU number of the game board A2 is stored in the frame control board 740. By determining that the received CPU number of the game board A1 does not match, the received CPU number of the game board A2 is newly stored in the RAM built in the frame control board 740. there is

Further, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the replaced game board A2, and the received CPU number of the game board A2 is stored in the frame control board 740. The base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared by determining that the CPU number of the game board A1 does not match. More specifically, all of the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the pre-previous base value B2, and the pre-previous base value B3 stored as base values are cleared. As a result, after the game board A2 is replaced, the base value of the game board A1 before replacement is not transmitted, and a new base value is counted from the state in which the base value is initialized. The base value on the game board A2 can be correctly transmitted.

At timing t2, the frame control board 740 clears the base value stored in the frame control board 740, but after timing t2, the frame control board 740 at least The number of game balls B that entered the entrance (winning opening, out opening) is counted, and the number of game balls B entering the entrance (winning opening, out opening) is counted. ) reaches 300 balls. Then, from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) reaches 300 balls at timing t3, Although the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of payouts) are counted, the number of entering balls It is not included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the base monitor, and is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor. The details of this will be described later.

Then, after the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) at timing t3 (number of balls entering) reaches 300 balls, the ball entering ball hole (winning hole, out hole) It is possible to count the number of game balls B that have entered (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that have been paid out as prize balls (number of payouts), and to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls. , allowing it to be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Also, during the period from timing t1 to t2, the game board A1 is replaced with the game board A2, but at timing t2, the number of balls in possession and the number of balls in possession X are held without being cleared. . Then, after the power is turned on at the timing t2, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when detecting a ball entering the winning hole. It is possible to add the number of balls held by the player or the number X of balls held by the player by the number of the game balls that are played. Further, after the power is turned on at the timing t2, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to settle the number of balls held by operating the count button switch 180. FIG.

(When removing the game board A1)
FIG. 150 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game board A1 is detached when the power is turned off. Here, the game board A1 is attached to the main body frame 4 before the power is cut off at the timing t1, and after the power is cut off at the timing t1, the game board A1 is temporarily removed for inspection and the like. After that, when the game board A1 is attached again and the power is turned on at timing t2, in the frame control board 740, the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 are changed. A case where it is determined that they match is described. Note that in this example, the behavior before the power is cut off at timing t1 is the same as in FIG. 149, so the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 150, after the power is turned off at timing t1, the game board A1 is temporarily removed for inspection and the like, and then the game board A1 is attached again. Then, with the game board A1 attached to the main body frame 4, the power is turned on at timing t2.

First, at timing t2 when the power is turned on, the CPU number is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740, and the frame control board 740 stores the received CPU number and the frame control board 740. It is determined whether or not the CPU number that is present matches. Here, since the game board A1 is attached again before the power is turned on at the timing t2, the frame control board 740 stores the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 and the frame control board 740. The CPU number stored in the frame control board 740 is determined to match, and the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained according to the determination result.

After the power is turned on at timing t2, the game board A1 is attached to the main body frame 4, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. That is, in the state where the game board A1 is attached to the main body frame 4, when there is a start winning, the variable display of the special symbols can be started, and the variable display of the special symbols is stopped when the winning symbols are displayed. A normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started when the player wins.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are enabled, and it is possible to pay out (give) a prize ball by entering a ball. Also, when recovering game balls B that have entered various winning holes, the safe ball sensor 606 detects and recovers game balls B that have entered the out holes without entering various winning holes. , the out-ball sensor 605, and the safe-ball sensor 606 and the out-ball sensor 605 are enabled. As described above in detail, the information detected by these detection sensors is used to calculate the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Further, the effect display device 1600 executes display corresponding to maintaining the base value stored in the frame control board 740 at timing t2. Such a display is performed for a predetermined period of time, and after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as an operation during normal operation, for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, a variation display of decorative patterns is included. Effect display (for example, ready-to-win effect) is executed. However, until the predetermined period elapses, a display corresponding to maintaining the base value stored in the frame control board 740 and a production display including a variable display of decorative symbols (for example, ready-to-win production) are displayed. , and the normal operation may be executed simultaneously.

Further, since the base value stored in the frame control board 740 has not been cleared at timing t2, the security signal is not output from the external terminal board. After the power is turned on at the timing t2, it is possible to output various signals for conveying the game state, the entry of the ball into the winning hole, the payout of the prize ball, and the like.

As another example, a security signal may be output from the external terminal board in response to maintaining the base value stored in the frame control board 740 at timing t2. This security signal is output when an abnormality is detected, when the setting value is changed, or when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, and the same security signal is output even when the base value is maintained. . In other words, when the base value is maintained, the security signal is forcibly output even though an abnormality is not detected, the setting value is not being changed, or the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation. As a result, when the base value is maintained, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can recognize that the base value has been maintained. In addition, regarding the security signal, the output is stopped when the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance (the winning entrance, the exit entrance) reaches 300 at timing t3, which will be described later. Alternatively, the output may be stopped before timing t3.

Also, after the power is turned on at the timing t2, when the player operates the handle 195, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a.

Further, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the game board A1 that has been reattached, and the received CPU number of the game board A1 is stored in the frame control board 740. The CPU number of the game board A1 stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained by determining that the CPU number of the game board A1 matches.

Further, at timing t2, the frame control board 740 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 of the game board A1 that has been reattached, and the received CPU number of the game board A1 is stored in the frame control board 740. The base value stored in the frame control board 740 is maintained by determining that the CPU number of the game board A1 matches. More specifically, all of the current base value BL, the previous base value B1, the pre-previous base value B2, and the pre-previous base value B3 stored as base values are maintained. As a result, the reattached game board A1 continues to count the base value from the state in which the base value is maintained, and the base value can be correctly transmitted.

At timing t2, the frame control board 740 maintains the base value stored in the frame control board 740, but after timing t2, the frame control board 740 at least The number of game balls B that entered the entrance (winning opening, out opening) is counted, and the number of game balls B entering the entrance (winning opening, out opening) is counted. ) reaches 300 balls. Then, from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) reaches 300 balls at timing t3, Although the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of payouts) are counted, the number of entering balls It is not included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the base monitor, and is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

Then, after the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) at timing t3 (number of balls entering) reaches 300 balls, the ball entering ball hole (winning hole, out hole) It is possible to count the number of game balls B that have entered (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that have been paid out as prize balls (number of payouts), and to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls. , allowing it to be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor.

In addition, during the period from timing t1 to t2, the game board A1 is removed for inspection, etc., and then the game board A1 is attached again. I try to keep it without clearing it. Then, after the power is turned on at the timing t2, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when detecting a ball entering the winning hole. It is possible to add the number of balls held by the player or the number X of balls held by the player by the number of the game balls that are played. Further, after the power is turned on at the timing t2, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to settle the number of balls held by operating the count button switch 180. FIG.

[Regarding the replenishment period of enclosed balls]
In this example, regarding the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), the number of balls entering the ball hole (winning hole) at timing t3 from the time when the power was turned on at timing t2 Until the number of game balls B that entered (balls entered) reaches 300, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is not calculated and displayed on the base monitor. The reason for this is explained below.

As described above in detail, in this example, a large number (for example, 40 to 60) of game balls B are stored in a row in the circulation path R in the main body frame 4, and circulate inside. I'm trying Then, in the three seals of the gauge part 620 and the enclosed ball amount detection process, it is possible to confirm whether or not the amount (number of balls) of the enclosed game balls B is appropriate. Specifically, in the ball storage passage 604 of the circulating ball path unit 600, when the rearmost part of the game balls B lined up in a row is located between the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622. 2, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is ON and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is OFF, and it is determined that the amount of game balls B is appropriate. Further, when the last part of the game balls B lined up in the ball storage passage 604 is located downstream of the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is OFF and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is turned off. becomes OFF, and it is determined that the amount of game balls B is too small. Further, when the rearmost part of the game balls B arranged in a line in the ball storage passage 604 exceeds the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 and is located upstream of the circulating ball excess sensor 622. , the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is ON and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is ON, and it is determined that the amount of game balls B is excessive.

In the circulation path R in the main body frame 4, if there are no game balls B or the amount of the game balls B is too small, the game balls B need to be replenished. Game balls B can be replenished via 1008 and winning openings (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2003, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005). In addition, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the out ball socket 600a and the safe ball socket 600b are exposed, and the out ball socket 600a and the safe ball socket 600b are exposed. The game ball B can be replenished through the game ball.

On the other hand, in the circulation path R in the main body frame 4, when the amount of the game balls B is excessive and it is desired to discharge the game balls B to the outside, the ball removal shutter 615 is pulled forward to open the ball removal port 613p. The game ball B can be pulled out to the ball receiving tray 720 by turning on the power while turning on the ball extraction switch 742 provided on the frame control board 740 .

By the way, the frame control board 740 controls the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry opening (winning opening, out opening) (number of entering balls), and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of payouts). is counted, but when the hall manager replenishes the game balls B through the out hole 1008 or the prize winning hole, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is calculated and reflected in the base value. The base value will include ball entry information that is not involved in the game.

In this regard, in this example, the number of game balls B that entered the entrance (winning entrance, out exit) at timing t3 from the time when the power was turned on at timing t2 in FIG. 149 or FIG. ) reaches 300 balls, the number of game balls (balls entered) that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) is subject to the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls. Instead, it is not reflected in the base value. In other words, until the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (award winning entrance, out entrance) at timing t3 (the number of entering balls) reaches 300, the number of balls B passes through the out entrance 1008 and the winning entrance. Even if the game ball B is replenished with the game ball B, it is not included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, and is not reflected in the base value. As a result, even when the game ball B is replenished via the out port 1008 or the prize winning port, it is possible to prevent the base value from being calculated including the ball entry information that is not involved in the game. It is possible to maintain a proper base value that does not include incoming ball information. The above-mentioned "300 balls" are managed by the frame control board 740, and the game balls B replenished from the out port 1008 are detected (counted) by the out ball sensor 605 provided on the main body frame 4 side, For the game ball B replenished from the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006, the main body frame 4 It is detected (counted) by a safe ball sensor 606 provided on the side.

In the above, as the period not reflected in the base value, the number of balls (number of balls entered) of the game ball B entering the entrance (winning entrance, out exit) at timing t3 from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 is The number of game balls B (the number of incoming balls) is set to the number of balls (40 to 60 pieces), that is, the number of balls that can be replenished with the game balls B through the out port 1008 or the prize winning port. As a result, even if game balls B are replenished through the out port 1008 or the prize winning port from a state in which there are no game balls B in the circulation path R in the main body frame 4, they will not be involved in those games with respect to the base value. It is possible not to include entry information.

In addition, in this example, out port 1008 has a larger opening than out port 1008 and winning prize port, and it is easy for game ball B to enter. In addition, regarding the period from when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (award winning entrance, out exit) reaches 300 balls at timing t3. is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side. Grant) will be done. Therefore, when the hall manager replenishes the game balls B, it is preferable to replenish the game balls B through the out port 1008 out of the out port 1008 and the prize winning port.

Also, in this example, the period during which the base value is not reflected is the number of game balls B that entered the entrance (winning entrance, out exit) at timing t3 from the time when the power was turned on at timing t2 (entered ball number) reaches 300 balls, and immediately after the hall manager turns on the power, game balls B are replenished via the out port 1008 or the prize winning port. However, as another example, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there is an operation unit for work that cannot be touched by the player (a button that enables switching between the ON state and the OFF state, a key that can be inserted to switch the ON state and the OFF state). A replenishment permitting switch is provided as a key switch or the like for switching between and after power is turned on. Until the number of balls (number of entering balls) reaches 300, even if game balls B are replenished via the out port 1008 or the winning port, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is not calculated. , may not be reflected in the base value. As a result, even when the power is not turned on, the hall manager can appropriately replenish the game balls B through the outlet 1008 or the winning opening.

Further, in this example, the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) at timing t3 reaches 300 after the power is turned on at timing t2. Until then, no base value is displayed on the base monitor, and a special display is displayed in response to the clearing of the base value stored in the frame control board 740 . At this time, as described above in detail, during the period from timing t2 to t3, for example, when the game ball B is detected by the out ball sensor 605 or the safe ball sensor 606, any of the four 7-segment LEDs on the base monitor Alternatively, "8." may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds). As a result, during the period from timing t2 to t3, the display on the base monitor allows the hall manager to check from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 whether or not the game ball B is illegally entered into the out hole 1008 or the winning hole. allows to monitor.

In addition, in this example, the game balls B collected in the out port 1008 are detected (counted) by the out ball sensor 605 provided on the main body frame 4 side, and the general winning port 2001, the normal winning port 2002, the first A game ball B that enters a winning opening such as the starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the prize winning opening 2006 is detected by a safe ball sensor 606 provided on the main body frame 4 side ( These sensors may be provided on the game board 5 side. In addition, a passage is formed so that the game balls B collected in the out port 1008 and the game balls B entering various prize winning ports join together, and one sensor is provided on the passage. It is also possible to count the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) by detection of one sensor (the number of entering balls).

Further, in this example, the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) at timing t3 reaches 300 after the power is turned on at timing t2. Until then, the base monitor does not display the base value. In addition to this, in detail, in the above, "Each time the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 60000 balls, a new number of entering balls For example, from the time when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is newly calculated, the number of game balls B that entered at least the entrance (winning opening, out opening) Until (the number of incoming balls) reaches 1,000, the execution of the display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of incoming balls may be restricted." Regarding the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole), the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entering is not displayed on the base monitor. are subject to the calculation of the ratio of Therefore, if the game ball B is replenished through the out port 1008 or the prize winning port during such a period, the base value includes information on entering balls that are not involved in the game, and the game ball B is replenished. Not suitable for the period. Therefore, from the point of time when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls is newly calculated, at least the number of game balls B entering the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) (the number of entering balls) reaches 1000 balls. In the meantime, it is also possible to notify the administrator that it is an unsuitable period for replenishment of the game balls B. For example, instead of displaying the base value on the base monitor, a special display may be displayed in response to the period being inappropriate for replenishment of the game balls B.

In the above, when the base value stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared when the power is turned on, calculation of the base value for every 60,000 balls is newly started. After that, until the number of game balls B that enter the entrance (winning entrance, out exit) reaches 300 balls, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entrance balls is calculated. However, after exceeding 300 balls, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is subject to calculation. Specifically, after the power is turned on, until the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) reaches 300 balls, the "entering The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls is not calculated and the base value is not displayed on the base monitor." The ratio of the number of payouts is calculated, and the base value is not displayed on the base monitor.” By changing the display mode displayed on the base monitor in accordance with these states, the hall manager can determine which state it is.

Further, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 in which the game balls B circulate within the circulation path R in the main body frame 4 is adopted. is from the time when the power is turned on at timing t2 until the number of game balls B entering the entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) reaches 300 balls at timing t3, The number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) may be included in the calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, and may be reflected in the base value. .

[Regarding the operation of the ball count memory/display clear switch]
Next, the handling of the number of balls held by operating the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 will be described. First, the door frame 3 is provided with a counting button switch 180 that can be operated by the player. As described above in detail, by pressing the counting button switch 180 in a state where there are balls in the possession (the number of balls in the possession>0), information on the number of the balls in the possession can be sent to the game ball lending device 8 for settlement. . Such a number of balls held is stored in the RAM built in the frame control board 740 .

By the way, as an operation check of the pachinko machine 1, for example, when the hall manager puts the game ball B into the winning opening and confirms whether the game progresses normally, the game ball B is paid out (given). However, since such a number of balls is not given to the player, any method other than operating the counting button switch 180 is used to calculate the number of balls. , should be allowed to be cleared by the hall manager. In this regard, in this example, the frame control board 740 is provided with a number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 that can be operated by the hall manager. The number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 can be cleared by operating the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 when the power is turned on. In other words, the number of held balls stored in the frame control board 740 can be selected to be maintained or cleared depending on whether or not the number of balls storage/display clear switch 743 is operated when the power is turned on after the power is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to improve convenience.

FIG. 151 is an enlarged view of the frame control board.

As shown in FIG. 151, the frame control board 740 has, from the left, a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing (ram clearing) information stored in the RAM, and a player's ball stored in the RAM. A ball number storage/display clear switch 743 for clearing the number and clearing the display on the number display section 140 of the door frame 3. A ball extraction switch 742 is provided to be used when the ball is extracted from the ball tray 720 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). These switches are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can be operated by the hall manager.

Also, the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 are provided adjacently to such an extent that a plurality of switches can be operated with one hand. The power switch 751 is provided on the power board 750. The power switch 751 also includes a RAM clear switch 741, a ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and a ball removal switch provided on the frame control board 740. 742 is provided. Therefore, when the power is turned on, a desired switch among the RAM clear switch 741, ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and ball removal switch 742 can be easily operated.

FIG. 152 is a table showing conditions for clearing the number of balls in possession. In this example, it is possible to change the combination of ON-operated switches among the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 as a mode of operation at power-on. Eight types of power-on patterns are provided. Of these, when the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 is turned on when the power is turned on, the number of balls in possession is cleared.

Here, the frame control board 740 stores the number of balls held in the RAM, and maintains (backs up) the number of balls held when the power is cut off. In addition, when the frame control board 740 detects a RAM error such as an abnormal value being included in the RAM, it stores it in the RAM as error information A and When an error other than a RAM error such as "lifting ball jam error", "too few game balls", or "too many game balls" is detected, it is stored as error information B in the RAM. Of these, the error information A is maintained (backed up) when the power is turned off, but the error information B is not maintained (backed up). Further, the frame control board 740 stores error signals relating to error information A and error information B in the RAM when various errors are detected. Among them, the error signal related to the error information A is maintained (backed up) when the power is turned off, but the error signal related to the error information B is not maintained (backed up). The error signal stored in the frame control board 740 is output to the game ball lending device 8 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 765, and furthermore, through the game ball lending device 8, the game hall output to an external device such as a hall computer.

Power-on pattern A is a case in which the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball extraction switch 742 are not turned ON when the power is turned on (when the power switch 751 is operated). It maintains the number of balls stored in 740. Further, while the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are maintained, the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are cleared. That is, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned off and then turned on, so that the fact that the RAM error continues can be grasped, and an error signal related to the error information A is sent to the external device. Output to the device. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, when the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light, and the speaker says, "The number of balls held is maintained. '' is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image ``The number of balls held is maintained''. In this way, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit blue light as a light emission color corresponding to normal power-on when none of the switches are turned on. are doing.

Power-on pattern B is a case in which the RAM clear switch 741 of the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on, and is stored in the frame control board 740. Maintaining the number of balls that are being held. Further, the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared, and the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, the RAM error is resolved by turning ON the RAM clear switch 741 after the power is turned off, and the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared. I am planning to In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, when the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light, and the speaker says, "The number of balls held is maintained. '' is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image ``The number of balls held is maintained''. As described above, the LEDs mounted on various decoration boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in yellow as a light emission color corresponding to turning on the RAM clear switch 741 .

Power-on pattern C is a case where the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 among the RAM clear switch 741, the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball-extraction switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on. The number of balls in possession stored in the board 740 is cleared. Further, while the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are maintained, the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are cleared. That is, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned off and then turned on, so that the fact that the RAM error continues can be grasped, and an error signal related to the error information A is sent to the external device. Output to the device. In addition, as a notification mode to inform the outside, when the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light, and the speaker says, "You have cleared the number of balls you have." ," and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image saying, "The number of balls held has been cleared." As described above, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in red as a light emission color corresponding to turning on the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743. . If the power is cut off in a situation where the number of balls held is not stored in the frame control board 740 and the number of balls storage/display clear switch 743 is turned ON when the power is next turned on, the number of balls held is stored. The same processing as when the control is performed is performed to avoid complication of control.

Power-on pattern D is when the RAM clear switch 741 and the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 out of the RAM clear switch 741, the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball-extraction switch 742 are turned ON when the power is turned on. , and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. Further, the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared, and the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, the RAM error is resolved by turning ON the RAM clear switch 741 after the power is turned off, and the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared. I am planning to In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, when the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are alternately flashed in red and yellow. The number of balls has been cleared." is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image of "The number of balls has been cleared." In this way, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 flash alternately in red and yellow to turn on the RAM clear switch 741 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743. You can notify us that you have done so.

Power-on pattern E is a case in which the ball removal switch 742 among the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on. Maintaining the number of balls that are being held. Further, while the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are maintained, the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are cleared. That is, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned off and then turned on, so that the fact that the RAM error continues can be grasped, and an error signal related to the error information A is sent to the external device. Output to the device. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, when the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit green light, and the speaker says, "The number of balls held is maintained. '' is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image ``The number of balls held is maintained''. As described above, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit green light as a light emission color corresponding to turning on the ball removal switch 742 . When the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON, the ball removal process described above is executed and the enclosed game ball B is discharged from the ball removal opening 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). can be pulled out. It should be noted that the ball extraction process performed by ON operation of the ball extraction switch 742 is not executed in a situation where the number of held balls is stored in the frame control board 740, and in a situation where the number of held balls is not stored in the frame control board 740. It is executed only when (the number of balls possessed is 0). For this reason, the above-mentioned notification "The number of balls in possession is maintained" is substantially a notification indicating that the number of balls in possession is 0 when the ball removal process is executed, and when the ball removal process is not executed. , it becomes a notification indicating that the number of balls held is substantially 1 or more. In such a case, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Ball pulling is disabled." It is possible to display a message image that says,

Power-on pattern F is a case where the ball removal switch 742 and the RAM clear switch 741 out of the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 are turned ON when the power is turned on. The number of balls in possession stored in the control board 740 is maintained. Further, the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared, and the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, the RAM error is resolved by turning ON the RAM clear switch 741 after the power is turned off, and the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared. I am planning to In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, when the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are alternately flashed in green and yellow. The number of balls is maintained." is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image of "The number of balls held is maintained." In this way, by alternately flashing green and yellow LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, it is notified that the ball removal switch 742 and the RAM clear switch 741 have been turned on. can do. When the ball removal switch 742 and the RAM clear switch 741 are turned ON, after the RAM clear is executed, the above-described ball removal processing is executed and the enclosed game ball B is removed from the circulation ball path unit 600. It can be pulled out to the outside (ball receiving tray 720) from the port 613p. The ball removal process may be executed at the same time as the ram clear. As described above, the ball extraction process performed by turning on the ball extraction switch 742 is not executed when the number of balls held is stored in the frame control board 740, and the number of balls held is stored in the frame control board 740. It is executed only in the situation where it is not (the number of balls in possession is 0). Therefore, in the case of power-on pattern F, when the number of balls held is stored in the frame control board 740, the ball removal process is not executed (the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742 is invalidated). Only RAM clearing is executed by turning ON the RAM clear switch 741 . In such a case, as a notification mode to notify the outside, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Ball pulling is disabled." It is possible to display a message image that says,

Power-on pattern G is a case where the ball removal switch 742 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 of the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 are turned ON when the power is turned on. , and the number of balls stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. Further, while the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are maintained, the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are cleared. That is, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned off and then turned on, so that the fact that the RAM error continues can be grasped, and an error signal related to the error information A is sent to the external device. Output to the device. In addition, as a notification mode to inform the outside, when the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light, and the speaker says, "You have cleared the number of balls you have." ," and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image saying, "The number of balls held has been cleared." As described above, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit light in red as a light emission color corresponding to turning on the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743. . When the ball removal switch 742 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 are turned on, priority is given to clearing the number of balls in possession regardless of whether or not there is a ball in the possession. not running. In other words, when the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 is turned ON, the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742 is invalidated, and green is not emitted as the emission color corresponding to the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742. . In such a case, as a notification mode to inform the outside, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Ball extraction has been disabled." ." message image may be displayed.

Power-on pattern H is a case where the RAM clear switch 741, ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and ball extraction switch 742 are all turned ON when the power is turned on. clear the number. Further, the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared, and the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, the RAM error is resolved by turning ON the RAM clear switch 741 after the power is turned off, and the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared. I am planning to In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, when the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are alternately flashed in red and yellow. The number is cleared." is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image saying "The number of balls has been cleared." In this way, the LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are alternately flashed in red and yellow to turn on the RAM clear switch 741 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743. You can notify us that you have done so. When the ball removal switch 742 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 are turned on, priority is given to clearing the number of balls in possession regardless of whether or not there is a ball in the possession. not running. In other words, when the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 is turned ON, the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742 is invalidated, and green is not emitted as the emission color corresponding to the ON operation of the ball removal switch 742. . In such a case, as a notification mode to inform the outside, the speaker outputs a voice saying "Ball extraction has been disabled." ." message image may be displayed.

Regarding the above-described power-on patterns G and H, the ball removal switch 742 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 are turned on, but regardless of whether or not there is a ball in the possession, priority is given to clearing the number of balls in the possession. However, the ball removal process described above is not executed. This is because when the game ball B, which has been subjected to the ball extraction process and is enclosed, is extracted from the ball extraction port 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), even if there is a game ball, Since it is not possible to shoot B and play a game, priority is given to clearing the number of balls in possession.

In the above, when the ball removal switch 742 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 are turned on, priority is given to clearing the number of balls in possession regardless of whether or not there is a ball in the possession, and the above-described ball removal processing is performed. is not executed, but the ball removal process may be executed. Such other examples will be described below as power-on patterns G' and H'.

In the power-on pattern G′, when the power is turned on, the ball removal switch 742 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 of the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 are turned ON. This is the case, and the number of balls in possession stored in the frame control board 740 is cleared. Further, while the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are maintained, the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are cleared. That is, when a RAM error is detected, the error information A is maintained even after the power is turned off and then turned on, so that the fact that the RAM error continues can be grasped, and an error signal related to the error information A is sent to the external device. Output to the device. In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, when the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are alternately flashed in green and red. The number is cleared." is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image saying "The number of balls has been cleared." In this way, by alternately flashing green and red LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, the ball removal switch 742 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 are turned on. You can notify us that you have done so. When the ball removal switch 742 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 are turned ON, regardless of whether or not there is a ball in the possession, after the number of balls in the possession is cleared, the ball removal process described above is executed. The game ball B that has been executed and enclosed can be pulled out from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720).

The power-on pattern H' is a case where all of the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball extraction switch 742 are turned ON when the power is turned on. Clear the number of balls. Further, the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared, and the error information B and the error signal related to the error information B are also cleared. In other words, even if a RAM error is detected, the RAM error is resolved by turning ON the RAM clear switch 741 after the power is turned off, and the error information A and the error signal related to the error information A are cleared. I am planning to In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, when the power is turned on, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 flash alternately in red, green, and yellow. The number of balls in possession has been cleared." is output, and the effect display device 1600 also displays a message image of "The number of balls in possession has been cleared." In this way, by alternately flashing red and yellow LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, the ball removal It is possible to notify that all the switches 742 have been turned on. When the ball removal switch 742 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 are turned on, regardless of whether or not there is a ball in the possession, after the number of balls in the possession is cleared, the above-described ball removal processing is performed. The game ball B that has been executed and enclosed can be pulled out from the ball outlet 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720).

With regard to the above-described power-on patterns G' and H', when the ball removal switch 742 and the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 are turned ON, the number of balls in the possession is cleared regardless of whether or not there are balls in the possession. After execution, the above-described ball removal processing is executed. As a result, when the ball removal process is executed and the enclosed game ball B is removed from the ball removal port 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), the ball is no longer held and the game is forcibly played. It is possible to put the ball B into a state in which it cannot be launched.

[Regarding the operation of the counting button switch]
Next, the settlement of the number of balls held by operating the count button switch 180 will be described. First, the door frame 3 is provided with a counting button switch 180 that can be operated by the player. By pressing the count button switch 180 when there are balls in hand (number of balls > 0), information on the number of balls in hand can be sent to the game ball lending device 8 for settlement. The number of balls held is stored in the RAM built in the frame control board 740 .

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the handle touch sensor 162 detects the contact (touch) of the player to the handle 160, and the handle 160 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 162 detects the contact of the player. Then, the detection of the handle rotation sensor 163 is accepted, and the driving of the firing solenoid 553 is controlled with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160, and the game ball B can be hit. Then, when the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, and the number of balls possessed by the player is reduced by one. I am trying to subtract. However, after the firing solenoid 553 is controlled to be driven and before the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been fired from the ball launch pad 552b, the count button switch 180 is operated and all holdings are performed. When the number of balls is settled, the number of balls in possession becomes zero, and when the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects it, the number of balls in possession cannot be subtracted by one, resulting in a problem.

In addition, the game ball B, which was not hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 even though it was shot from the ball shooting unit 550 (ball shooting table 552b), is recovered as a foul ball by the foul ball after being collected by the foul ball. It is detected by the sensor 607 and the number of balls possessed by the player is increased by one. However, if the counting button switch 180 is operated and all the balls in possession are calculated after the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b and before it is detected as a foul ball by the foul ball sensor 607, To solve the problem that the number of possessed balls becomes 1 after settlement of the number of possessed balls, and the settlement operation of the player becomes complicated. In this regard, in this example, not only while the contact with the handle 160 is detected by the handle touch sensor 162, but also until a predetermined time (for example, 1200 ms) elapses after contact with the handle 160 is not detected. Between the time and the time after the discharge subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been fired from the ball launch pad 552b until a predetermined time (for example, 1200 ms) has passed, the number of balls held is settled. It is controlled to prohibit counting. After the counting prohibited state is canceled, control is made to the counting permitted state in which the number of balls in possession can be settled. As a result, during the period from when the firing solenoid 553 is controlled to drive until the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been fired from the ball launch pad 552b, the counting is prohibited. Therefore, even if the counting button switch 180 is operated, the number of held balls is not calculated, and it is possible to prevent troubles in counting the number of held balls. Further, in this example, it is set to be longer than the "longest time from ball launch pad 552b to detection by foul ball sensor 607" when a foul ball is generated after game ball B is launched from ball launch pad 552b. is set to the predetermined time (1200 ms) described above. Therefore, even if a foul ball is generated after the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the count button switch 180 is operated because the counting is prohibited when the foul ball is generated. Even so, the number of possessed balls is not settled, and it is possible to prevent the number of possessed balls from increasing by one after the settlement of the number of possessed balls. As a result, it is possible to improve the reliability of the calculation of the number of balls in possession.

FIG. 153 is a time chart showing establishment of conditions for generating a counting permission state in which the number of balls in possession can be settled. First, after the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, contact with the handle 160 by the handle touch sensor 162 is not detected, and then a predetermined time (for example, 1200 ms) elapses. A case in which the conditions for generating the count-permitted state are satisfied as the time elapses will be described with reference to FIG. 153(A).

First, the handle touch sensor 162 is turned ON when the player's contact (touch) to the handle 160 is detected. When the handle 160 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 162 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation sensor 163 is received, and the game ball B is touched with strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160. is driven, the firing solenoid 553 is turned ON at timing t1. When the shooting solenoid 553 is turned ON at timing t1, the game ball B is shot from the ball launch pad 552b. , the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t2. At timing t2 when the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off, the number of balls possessed by the player is subtracted by one. Then, when the launch subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t2, the game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b, and the launch subtraction sensor 554 becomes ON again.

Here, the frame control board 740 controls the number of balls held while the handle touch sensor 162 is ON and 1200 ms after the handle touch sensor 162 is turned OFF until 1200 ms has passed with the handle touch sensor 162 turned OFF. It is controlled in a count prohibition state that prohibits the settlement of the bill. On the other hand, when 1200 ms elapses after the handle touch sensor 162 has been turned off, the number of balls in possession is controlled to a counting permission state in which the number of balls can be settled. In other words, if the steering wheel touch sensor 162 is turned ON within 1200 ms after turning OFF, the count prohibition state is continued. However, in order to start the counting permission state, the firing subtraction sensor 554 must not turn from ON to OFF (ball launch pad The condition is that the launch subtraction sensor 554 does not detect that the game ball B has been launched from 552b.

In addition, the frame control board 740 controls a count prohibition state that prohibits settlement of the number of balls in possession for 1200 ms after the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off. On the other hand, when 1200 ms have elapsed since the firing subtraction sensor 554 was turned off, control is made to allow the number of balls held to be calculated. In other words, if the discharge subtraction sensor 554 is turned off again within 1200 ms after it was turned off, the count prohibition state is continued. However, in order to start the counting permission state, the handle touch sensor 162 must not turn ON (no contact with the handle 160 must be detected) within 1200 ms after the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF. ) is a condition.

Further, if the handle 160 continues to rotate while the handle touch sensor 162 is detecting the player's contact, the game ball B will be shot at intervals of 600 ms. On the other hand, in this example, during the period from when the steering wheel touch sensor 162 is turned off until 1200 ms has passed since it has been turned off, and from when the firing subtraction sensor 554 has been turned off until 1200 ms has passed, This 1200 ms is set to be longer than the game ball B firing interval of 600 ms. In other words, during the period from when the handle touch sensor 162 is turned off until 1200 ms has passed since it remains off, or until 1200 ms has passed since the discharge subtraction sensor 554 has been turned off, the game ball B is fired. is completely stopped, and after it is judged that the shooting of the game ball B is completely stopped, the counting permission state is entered.

Then, when the shooting solenoid 553 is turned ON at timing t3, the game ball B is shot from the ball launch pad 552b. , the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t4. At timing t4 when the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off, the number of balls possessed by the player is subtracted by one. When the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t4, the game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b, and the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns ON again, but after the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t4. stops touching the handle 160, the handle touch sensor 162 is turned off at timing t5. When 1200 ms has elapsed since the handle touch sensor 162 was turned off at timing t5, the count permission flag is turned on at timing t6 to control the count permission state in which the number of balls held can be settled. However, after the handle touch sensor 162 turns OFF at timing t5, the launch subtraction sensor 554 does not change from ON to OFF (the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b). not).

In the counting permission state, when contact with the handle 160 is detected and the handle touch sensor 162 is turned ON, the counting permission flag is turned OFF, and the counting is prohibited again.

In the above, the count prohibition state is controlled during the period from when the firing solenoid 553 is controlled to drive until the firing subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been fired from the ball launch pad 552b. Therefore, even if the counting button switch 180 is operated, the number of held balls is not calculated, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles in counting the number of held balls. Further, in this example, it is set to be longer than the "longest time from ball launch pad 552b to detection by foul ball sensor 607" when a foul ball is generated after game ball B is launched from ball launch pad 552b. 1200 ms is set as the above-mentioned predetermined time. Therefore, even if a foul ball is generated after the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the count button switch 180 is operated because the count is prohibited at the time when the foul ball is generated. Even so, the number of possessed balls is not settled, and it is possible to prevent the number of possessed balls from increasing by one after the settlement of the number of possessed balls.

In addition, as described above, the handle 160 is provided with the firing stop switch 161 that stops the driving of the firing solenoid 553 when pressed by the player. Even if the firing stop switch 161 is operated during detection, the ON detection of the handle touch sensor 162 is continued, and the period during which the handle touch sensor 162 is ON is processed. As a result, it is possible to control the count prohibition state described above, including the period during which the firing stop switch 161 is operated during a series of firing operations, and achieve the same effect as described above. Also, if only the firing stop switch 161 is operated while the handle touch sensor 162 has not detected the player's contact, the player has no intention of firing (unintentionally touching the firing stop switch 161). It is treated as a period in which the steering wheel touch sensor 162 is OFF. As a result, it is possible to control the above-described counting permission state including the period in which only the firing stop switch 161 is operated without a series of firing operations, and the same effect as described above can be achieved. As another example, when the firing stop switch 161 is operated while the handle touch sensor 162 is detecting the contact of the player, the handle touch sensor 162 is turned off from ON, and the handle touch sensor 162 is turned off. You may make it process as a period when it is. As a result, even when it is desired to temporarily settle the number of balls held while continuing to operate the handle 160 (without changing the amount of rotation of the handle 160), it is possible to shift to the counting permission state described above. Convenience can be improved to meet the needs of players.

In this example, while the handle touch sensor 162 is ON, and after 1200 ms has passed since the handle touch sensor 162 was turned OFF, the number of balls held is calculated. Although it is controlled to prohibit counting, the steering wheel rotation sensor 163, which detects the rotation of the steering wheel 160, is ON instead of the steering wheel touch sensor 162, and the steering wheel rotation sensor 163 is OFF. , and until 1200 ms has elapsed while the switch is OFF, control may be performed so that the measurement is prohibited. Even in such a case, similar effects can be obtained.

Next, before the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, contact with the handle 160 by the handle touch sensor 162 becomes non-detected, and the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects. With reference to FIG. 153B, a case where the condition for generating the count-permitted state is satisfied after a predetermined time (for example, 1200 ms) has elapsed will be described.

First, the handle touch sensor 162 is turned ON when the player's contact (touch) to the handle 160 is detected. When the handle 160 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 162 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation sensor 163 is received, and the game ball B is touched with strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160. is driven, the firing solenoid 553 is turned ON at timing t1. When the shooting solenoid 553 is turned ON at timing t1, the game ball B is shot from the ball launch pad 552b. , the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off at timing t3. At timing t3 when the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off, the number of balls possessed by the player is subtracted by one.

Then, by stopping the contact with the handle 160 during the period from when the firing solenoid 553 is turned ON at the timing t1 until the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned OFF at the timing t3, the handle touch sensor 162 is turned OFF at the timing t2. become. Then, when 1200 ms elapses without the firing subtraction sensor 554 turning OFF again after the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t3, the counting permission flag is turned ON at timing t4, and the number of balls held can be settled. is controlled in a state where counting is permitted. However, after the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off at timing t3, the handle touch sensor 162 is not turned on (contact with the handle 160 is not detected).

Although the handle touch sensor 162 is not turned ON after the firing subtraction sensor 554 turns OFF at timing t3, if the handle touch sensor 162 turns ON before 1200 ms elapses at timing t4, The counting of 1200ms is to be terminated. At this time, at timing t4, there is no control to allow counting. However, when the contact with the steering wheel 160 is less than 4 ms and the ON state of the steering wheel touch sensor 162 is less than 4 ms, the counting of 1200 ms is continued, and the counting permission state is controlled at the timing t4. In addition, even if the steering wheel touch sensor 162 is turned ON by detecting contact with the steering wheel 160 in the counting permission state, if the ON state of the steering wheel touch sensor 162 is less than 4 ms, the counting permission flag is turned ON. It is left as it is, and the counting permission state is continued. In this way, short-term contact with the handle 160 is excluded because there is a possibility that the player unintentionally touched the handle 160 .

In this example, during the period from when the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off until 1200 ms elapses, the count prohibition state is set to prohibit the adjustment of the number of balls held, but the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned off. After that, the game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b, and the measurement prohibition state may be controlled until 1200 ms after the launch subtraction sensor 554 is turned ON again. Even in such a case, similar effects can be obtained.

Next, with regard to the number of balls held, by pressing the counting button switch 180 in a state where there are balls held (the number of balls held > 0) in the counting permitted state, information on the number of balls held is sent to the game ball lending device 8 . can be sent to and settled. At this time, the number of held balls to be settled differs depending on whether the operation mode of the count button switch 180 is a short push or a long push. Specifically, when the pressing time of the counting button switch 180 is less than 500 ms, it is determined that the pressing is short, and control is performed so that one of the number of balls in possession is calculated. On the other hand, when the pressing time of the counting button switch 180 is 500 ms or more, it is determined that the pressing is long, and control is performed so that 250 balls out of the number of balls held are settled. However, when the number of held balls is less than 250 and the button is pressed for 500 ms or more, control is performed so that all the number of held balls is settled. As a result, when adjusting the number of balls held, the adjustment can be completed as soon as possible, and convenience can be improved.

FIG. 154 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the counting button switch is operated. First, the case where the counting button switch 180 is pressed for a short time will be described with reference to FIG. 154(A).

First, when the counting button switch 180 is operated in the counting enabled state, the counting button switch 180 is turned ON. When the pressing time of the counting button switch 180 is less than 500 ms, it is determined that the pressing is short, and after stopping the pressing of the counting button switch 180, one of the number of balls held is calculated. are doing. In addition, the shooting of the game ball B by operating the handle 160 is disabled from the start of pressing the count button switch 180 to the completion of the settlement of one ball in the number of possessed balls. Thus, by disabling the launch of the game ball B during the settlement of the number of possessed balls, the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, and the number of possessed balls is calculated. can be prevented from occurring in counting the number of balls held.

Also, if the count button switch 180 is pressed for a short period of time of less than 500 ms and is pressed twice in succession, after stopping the first pressing, two balls out of the number of balls held are calculated. controlled to Here, after stopping the first pressing, it is the case that the second pressing occurs before the completion of the calculation of the number of balls held, and the calculation continues from the first calculation. , so that the second payment is made. Also, the shooting of the game ball B by operating the handle 160 is disabled during the period from the start of pressing the count button switch 180 for the first time until the two balls in the number of possession balls are settled.

Next, the case where the counting button switch 180 is pressed for a long time will be described with reference to FIG. 154(B).

First, when the counting button switch 180 is operated in the counting enabled state, the counting button switch 180 is turned ON. If the pressing time of the counting button switch 180 is 500 ms or more, it is determined that the pressing is long at 500 ms, and control is performed so that 250 balls out of the number of balls held are settled at that time. Further, the shooting of game balls B by operating the handle 160 is disabled during the period from when the counting button switch 180 is started to be pressed until the balance of 250 balls in possession is completed. Thus, by disabling the launch of the game ball B during the settlement of the number of possessed balls, the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, and the number of possessed balls is calculated. can be prevented from occurring in counting the number of held balls without subtracting .

Also, if the pressing time of the counting button switch 180 is 500 ms or longer, it is determined that the pressing is long at 500 ms. Each time the button is continuously pressed for 300 ms, it is determined to be a long press, and 250 settlements are performed sequentially from the first 250 settlements. In this way, the determination of the second and subsequent long presses is set to 300 ms, which is shorter than the determination of the first long press, so that the number of balls in possession can be adjusted to approach zero in a short period of time. Also, during the period from when the counting button switch 180 starts to be pressed until the number of 250 balls corresponding to the number of long presses is completed, the shooting of game balls B by operating the handle 160 is disabled. ing.

In this example, it is disabled to shoot the game ball B by operating the handle 160 during the period from when the counting button switch 180 is started to be pressed until the number of balls held corresponding to the pressing time is completed. However, the shooting of the game ball B by operating the handle 160 may be disabled only during the period from the start of the calculation of the number of balls corresponding to the pressing time of the counting button switch 180 to the completion thereof. Even in such a case, similar effects can be obtained.

Also, if the pressing time of the counting button switch 180 is less than 500 ms, it is determined that the pressing is short, and after the pressing of the counting button switch 180 is stopped, a sound "beep" is output from the speaker. Also, if the pressing time of the counting button switch 180 is 500 ms or longer, it is determined that the pressing is long at 500 ms, and a voice saying "The balls are being adjusted" is output from the speaker. Then, if it is determined that the long press has been made at the point of 500 ms, and if the button is continued to be pressed, the voice "The number of balls in possession is being calculated" is repeated from the speaker until the calculation of the number of balls in possession is completed. ing. In this way, by making the output sound from the speaker differ depending on whether the count button switch 180 is pressed for a short time or a long time, the number of balls held is calculated either by 1 or by 250. It is possible to clearly grasp whether

Further, although details will be described later, in this example, even when the game board 5 is detached from the main body frame 4, the count button switch 180 is operated to allow the number of balls held to be settled. On the other hand, the sound output when the counting button switch 180 is pressed short or long is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the operation information transmitted from the frame control board 740 to the peripheral control board 1510. will be Therefore, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the peripheral control board 1510 does not operate, so that it is impossible to output sound when the count button switch 180 is pressed for a short time or a long time. end up Therefore, in this example, when the counting button switch 180 is pressed for a short time or a long time, a notification is sent on the side of the frame control board 740 in addition to the notification on the side of the peripheral control board 1510 .

That is, the count button switch 180 of this example incorporates an LED, and the frame control board 740 controls light emission of the LED of the count button switch 180 . The light emission color of the count button switch 180 indicates whether or not the number of balls in possession can be settled and the state of the settlement. Specifically, the count button switch 180 emits light in blue when the number of balls held is zero, and emits light in red when the count button switch 180 is turned on while there are balls held (number of balls > 0). It emits green light when the count button switch 180 is not turned ON in a state where there are balls in hand (the number of balls in hand>0). Thereby, it is possible to intuitively grasp whether or not there is a number of balls that can be settled, and whether or not the number of balls is being settled. In addition, when the count button switch 180 is not turned ON while there is a ball in the possession (the number of balls in the possession > 0), when the count button switch 180 is pressed for a short time, a single green light is emitted (for example, it lights up in 1 second and then goes out). When the counting button switch 180 is pressed for a long time, it emits green light a plurality of times (for example, a lighting mode in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated for one second). Therefore, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, whether the number of possessed balls is settled by 1 or 250 is clearly grasped using the counting button switch 180 itself. can do. As described above in detail, even if the count button switch 180 is turned on while counting is prohibited, the number of balls held is not calculated. It is determined that the counting button switch 180 has been made to emit light in red.

The light emission of the counting button switch 180 described above is configured such that the light emission color is reflected by surrounding members. Specifically, the standing wall behind the counting button switch 180 is white so that the emitted light is reflected. As a result, even from a distance, the hall manager can confirm the color of light emitted from the count button switch 180, and can monitor whether or not there is fraudulent settlement of the ball in possession. In this example, the count button switch 180 has a built-in LED, but an LED is provided in the vicinity of the count button switch 180, and the light emission color of the LED indicates whether or not the number of balls in possession can be adjusted. may

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a number-of-balls-in-hand display portion 140 for displaying the number of balls in one's possession. When the number of held balls is calculated by depressing the count button switch 180, the number of held balls displayed in the number of held balls display section 140 is subtracted and displayed. The number-of-balls display unit 140 is composed of a 6-digit 7-segment LED. That is, the number-of-balls display unit 140 can display up to six digits as the number of balls-in-hand.

Also, when the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the ball removal process described above is executed and the enclosed game ball B is ejected from the ball removal port 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray). 720), but during the ball removal process, the number of balls in possession is not displayed in the number of balls in possession display section 140, and a special display of "-" is executed. It should be noted that during the ball removal process, although the game ball B is not stopped being shot, the game is stopped and, for example, even if there is a start winning prize, no game ball is paid out, and there is no lottery or fluctuation related to special symbols. It is in a state where normal games cannot be played, such as when there is no display. Also, when the ball removal switch 742 is turned on to turn on the power, the ball removal process is started on condition that the number of balls in the player's possession is zero. Therefore, during the ball removal process, the number of balls in the possession is zero, and the number of balls in the possession is not displayed on the number-of-balls display section 140, thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem.

In addition, when an error occurs, the number-of-balls-in-hand display unit 140 continues to display the number of balls-in-hand, and does not perform error display. This makes it possible to check the number of balls held even during the occurrence of an error. However, when an error for stopping the game occurs, the number of balls in possession may not be displayed on the number of balls in possession display section 140, and an error display may be executed. When such an error occurs, not only is the game stopped, but also the ON operation of the count button switch 180 is invalidated, making it impossible to settle the number of balls in possession. In other words, when an error to stop the game occurs, since the ON operation of the count button switch 180 is invalid, there is no need to check the number of balls held, and the number of balls held is displayed on the number display unit 140. The harmful effects of not doing so will not occur.

Specifically, if a fraudulent act is detected by a magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc., or if a RAM error such as an abnormal value is detected in the RAM, an error that stops the game occurs. Then, an error display is executed in the number of balls in possession display section 140, and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is invalidated. However, when a fraudulent act is detected, an error display is not executed on the number of balls display unit 140, and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is validated. An error display may be performed on the number-of-balls display unit 140, and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 may be invalidated. As a result, when an error is displayed on the number-of-balls display unit 140, it is possible to grasp that a RAM error has been detected. Further, when a RAM error is detected, error display is not executed in the number display unit 140, and the ON operation of the count button switch 180 is validated. An error display may be performed on the number-of-balls display unit 140, and the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 may be invalidated. As a result, when a fraudulent act is detected, it is possible to prevent the number of balls in possession that may have been awarded due to the fraudulent act from being settled.

In addition, the frame control board 740, when the count button switch 180 is turned on, sends information about the number of balls held to the game ball lending device 8 for settlement. If it is not connected, the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is disabled. When such a disconnection error with the game ball lending device 8 occurs, error information is transmitted from the frame control board 740 to the main control board 1310, and the game is stopped. Also, the frame control board 740 disables the ON operation of the counting button switch 180 when the connection with the main control board 1310 is not connected. When such a disconnection error with the main control board 1310 occurs, the game is stopped and an error display is performed on the base monitor. In addition, the base monitor is composed of four 7-segment LEDs, and when a disconnection error with the main control board 1310 occurs, the base value being displayed is switched to an error display. By increasing the number of 7-segment LEDs in the base monitor, it is possible to simultaneously display the base value and the error display when a disconnection error with the main control board 1310 occurs. For example, when increasing the number of 7-segment LEDs in the base monitor, it is conceivable to use the same number of 6-digit 7-segment LEDs as the number display unit 140. and the number-of-balls display unit 140 can display similar displays (for example, number-of-balls display, error display, or display indicating ball removal processing, etc.). It is possible to check the same display from both the front and the back side, and it can be used as a substitute when either one fails.

[About the operation of the ball removal switch]
Next, the ejection of the game ball B to the outside by operating the ball extraction switch 742 will be described. First, the ball extraction switch 742 is provided on the frame control board 740 . When the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the above-described ball removal processing is executed. On the condition that there is, the ball removal process is started. During this ball removal process, the game balls B enclosed in the circulation path R of the body frame 4 can be removed from the ball removal opening 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). Also, during the ball removal process, although the shooting of the game ball B is not stopped, the game is stopped and, for example, even if there is a start winning, the game ball is not paid out, and the lottery or fluctuation related to the special symbol is performed. It is in a state where normal games cannot be played, such as when there is no display.

Specifically, during the ball extraction process, the game ball B is controlled to a special mode in which the game ball B can be shot even though the number of balls held is zero. In such a special mode, the game ball B can be launched from the ball launch pad 552b. Since the shutter 571 is in the closed position, the foul ball is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being ejected from the foul unit 570 to the outside. As a result, it is possible to create a state in which there is no game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b even though the number of balls held is zero. In addition, although the game ball B can be shot during the ball removal process, since the game is stopped, the ball removal work of the hall manager during the ball removal process is not hindered, which improves convenience. can be improved.

FIG. 155 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when it shifts to the ball extraction state when the power is turned on. Here, after the power is turned off at timing t1, the ball extraction switch 742 is turned ON without turning ON the RAM clear switch 743 at timing t2 when the power is turned on, and the state is shifted to the ball extraction state. .

In addition, the frame control board 740 can detect circulatory system errors and errors other than circulatory errors. Circulatory system errors include lift-related errors such as "lifting ball gami error", circulatory system error A including door opening errors, "lifting entrance ball out", "launch ball out", " It is made possible to detect circulatory system errors B, including errors related to the amount of enclosed game balls such as "too few game balls" and "too many game balls". Further, as an error other than circulation, an error C other than circulation, which includes a communication error with the main control board 1310, can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 155, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed before the power is turned off at timing t1. That is, in a normal state, when there is a start winning, the variable display of the special symbols can be started, and when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols, the big win game can be started. You can play normal games.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to various winning holes are enabled, and it is possible to start variable display of special symbols and pay out (give) prize balls by entering balls.

Also, before timing t1, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to determine whether errors A and B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation have been detected. Then, when it is determined that the circulatory system errors A and B and the error C other than the circulatory system are detected, the effect display device 1600, the lamps A and B, the speaker, etc. are used to perform the abnormality notification. I have to. Of these, if it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected, when the power is turned off at timing t1 or when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later, I am trying to clear the information. On the other hand, when it is determined that the circulatory system error B or the non-circulatory error C is detected, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, and after the power is turned off at timing t1, However, when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later, it is determined whether to hold or clear the RAM clear switch 743 depending on whether or not the RAM clear switch 743 is operated. there is

Also, effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of game board 5), lamp C (function display unit 1400 The LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate of (1), the speaker, and the movable body perform their normal operations before timing t1. The lamp C is controlled by the main control board 1310, while the other members are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Here, regarding the lamp C, a plurality of LEDs in the function display unit 1400 are lit up or blinked as the game progresses. On the other hand, for the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, when the variable display of special symbols is not executed, a standby effect (for example, a demonstration When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command, the variation performance (performance based on the variation pattern) is performed. I am trying to perform the corresponding action. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display including the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, ready-to-win effect), and the lamps A and B execute the effect display device. The LED lights up and blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600, and the speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. A predetermined action is performed in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

In addition, the external terminal board can output predetermined signals to the hall computer, and by receiving these signals at the hall computer, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 can also be grasped on the hall side. ing. For example, when there is a start winning, when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols and the jackpot game is executed, when an abnormality is detected, etc., signals corresponding to them are output. .

Also, before the timing t1, when the player operates the handle 195, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a.

Also, on the base monitor, the number of game balls B entered into the ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of payouts) are displayed. is counted, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is calculated, and the calculation result is displayed as a base value. This base value is held without being cleared even after power is turned off at timing t1, and is held without being cleared even when power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later.

Further, before timing t1, the frame control board 740 enables a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when detecting a ball entering the winning hole, and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are enabled. The number of balls can be added to the number of balls held by the player or the number X of balls held by the player. The number of held balls and the number of held balls X are kept without being cleared even after the power is turned off at timing t1, and are held without being cleared even when the power is turned on at timing t2, which will be described later. I have to. Also, before timing t1, the frame control board 740 allows the number of balls held to be settled by operating the counting button switch 180. FIG.

Next, after the power is turned off at timing t1, the ball removal flag is turned on by turning on the ball removal switch 742 at time t2 when the power is turned on, and the ball removal state is entered. Here, it is determined whether or not the number of balls in the possession is zero at the timing t2 when the ball removal switch 742 is turned on to turn on the power, and only when the number of balls in the possession is zero, the ball is removed. are migrating. In the ball extraction state, the ball extraction process described above is executed, and the game balls B enclosed in the circulation path R of the main body frame 4 are ejected from the ball extraction opening 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray). 720). Also, at timing t2, the RAM clear switch 743 is not turned ON, and the RAM clear flag is OFF.

First, after shifting to the ball-out state at timing t2, it is a game restricted period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed while the game ball B can be shot. In other words, after the power supply is shut off at timing t1, the variable display of the special symbols and the big winning game are not executed, and even if there is a start winning, the variable display of the special symbols is not newly started.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to various winning holes are disabled, and it is impossible to start variable display of special symbols and to pay out (give) prize balls by entering balls. As a result, the game is stopped in the state where the ball is pulled out, and, for example, even if there is a starting prize, the game ball is not paid out, and the normal game is performed such that the lottery and variable display regarding special symbols are not performed. It is possible to make it impossible to increase or decrease the number of balls held.

Further, after transitioning to the ball extraction state at timing t2, the frame control board 740 determines whether errors A and B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation have been detected. It is possible to determine whether or not it has been detected. On the other hand, it is disabled to determine whether or not the circulatory system error B and the non-circulatory error C are detected. Here, among the errors A in the circulatory system, for lifting-related errors such as "lifting ball jam error", although the lifting motor 664 operates when the ball is pulled out, it is related to the operation of the lifting motor 664. If the lift motor 664 is operated while the abnormality is still occurring, the lift motor 664 and the like may be damaged. can do. In addition, among the errors A in the circulatory system, regarding the door opening error, there is a possibility that the door frame 3 will be opened when the ball is pulled out, and the game board 5 etc. will be tampered with. By doing so, it is possible to prevent fraud. In addition, as a circulatory system error B, errors related to the enclosed amount such as "out of the ball at the entrance", "out of the launch ball", "insufficient game ball", "excessive game ball", etc. When the game ball B is pulled out to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), the enclosed game ball B is reduced, and by disabling such determination, the game ball B can be smoothly pulled out. . In addition, as an error C other than circulation, for a communication error with the main control board 1310, by disabling such determination, even if the connection with the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 is not connected , allowing a ball-out condition to occur.

Then, when it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected, the effect display device 1600, the lamps A and B, the speaker, etc. are used to issue an anomaly notification. Here, when it is determined that the circulatory system error A is detected, the circulatory system error is detected when the power is turned off at timing t3, which will be described later, or when the power is turned on at timing t4, which will be described later. Clear information about A.

Note that if it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected before timing t1, the circulatory system may clears the information about error A in . However, if the circulatory system error A has not been resolved at time t2, it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected again, and the abnormality notification is executed. Further, when it is determined that the circulatory system error B and the non-circulatory error C are detected before the timing t1, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, and the timing If the RAM clear switch 743 is not operated at t2 when the power is turned on, the information on the circulatory system error B and the non-circulatory error C is held without being cleared. However, in the state of ball extraction, abnormality notification is not executed based on the storage of such determination results.

Also, effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of game board 5), lamp C (function display unit 1400 (LED mounted on the light emitting board), the speaker, and the movable body perform the operation for the ball extraction state at the timing t2. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "a ball is being pulled out" as the ball pulling state display. Further, the lamps A and B are designed to emit green light for the bulb-out state (see power-on pattern F in FIG. 151). Further, regarding the lamp C, all the LEDs, including the symbol LEDs indicating the fluctuation display of the special symbols and the result of the variation, and the state LEDs indicating the game state, of the function display unit 1400 are lit up. In addition, the speaker outputs a voice saying "the ball is being pulled out" as the sound for the ball being pulled out.

In the above, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5), and the speaker During the operation for status, the volume and the amount of light are kept constant at the maximum output so that even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the volume and the amount of light do not change. In this way, by maximizing the output of the sound volume and the amount of light, it becomes easier to notice the occurrence of the ball missing state, and it is possible to prevent illegal attempts to cause the ball missing state. Further, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation can be received and the volume and light quantity can be internally adjusted, but the sound volume and light quantity during execution are not reflected. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when returning to normal operation. It will happen. It should be noted that when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated during the operation for the ball empty state, the operation itself may not be accepted. Further, the effect display device 1600 may be configured such that the amount of light changes when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Further, the movable body is prevented from moving after the ball is pulled out at the timing t2. When the power is normally turned on, the movable body performs an initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to adjust to the initial position. Since the movable body does not move immediately, the initial movement of the movable body is not performed at the time of transition to the ball extraction state. In other words, if the movable body is not at the initial position at the time of transition to the ball-extracted state, it remains stopped at that position during the ball-extracted state.

Further, after shifting to the ball extraction state at timing t2, the external terminal board is in a forced output state in which a security signal is forcibly output. As a result, a security signal is output to the hole computer in the state of the ball being pulled out, and the hole side can grasp that the state of the ball being pulled out has occurred.

Further, after shifting to the ball drawing state at the timing t2, when the hall manager operates the handle 195, the game ball B can be shot. It should be noted that in the ball-out state, the game ball B can be launched, but the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position by opening the door frame 3, and the game ball B can be launched from the ball launch pad 552b. is shot, it is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being ejected from the foul unit 570 to the outside. As a result, it is possible to create a state in which there is no game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b. Also, in this example, in order to make the game ball B absent from the ball launch pad 552b in the ball-out state, the hall manager needs to operate the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B. The game ball B may be automatically shot without the operation of 195.

In addition, after the transition to the ball-out state at the timing t2, the number of game balls B that have entered the entrance (award winning entrance, out exit) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls The number of balls (number of payouts) is not counted. In other words, it is disabled to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, and is not reflected in the base value. However, after the transition to the ball-pulled state at timing t2, the base value before timing t1 is held without being cleared. Also, while the ball is being pulled out, the base value is not displayed on the base monitor, and a special display of "-" is executed in response to the occurrence of the ball being pulled out.

In addition, after the transition to the ball drawing state at the timing t2, since the ball entering the winning hole is not detected, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player and the number of balls held by the player are not detected. It does not add to the number X. However, after the transition to the ball drawing state at timing t2, the number of balls in possession and the number of balls in possession prior to timing t1 and the number of balls X are held without being cleared. In addition, while the ball is being pulled out, the number of balls is not displayed on the number of balls in the possession display section 140, and a special display of "-" is executed in response to the occurrence of the ball being pulled out. Further, while the ball is being pulled out, the frame control board 740 disables the operation of the counting button switch 180 to settle the number of balls held. For this reason, the number of balls in possession does not increase or decrease during the occurrence of the ball-out state, and the problem caused by not displaying the number of balls in possession in the number-of-balls display section 140 does not occur.

Next, after the power is cut off at timing t3, the ball removal switch 742 is not turned ON when the power is turned on at timing t4, the ball removal flag is turned OFF, the RAM clear switch 743 is not turned ON, The RAM clear flag is set to OFF. As a result, after the power is turned on at the timing t4, the normal state is maintained as before the power is turned off at the timing t1.

It should be noted that, in the ball extraction state, the game balls B are extracted from the circulation path R to the ball receiving tray 720, and if there are no game balls B in the circulation path R or there are few game balls B, the power is turned on at timing t4. Later, it is necessary to replenish the game balls B through the out ball receiving port 600a and the safe ball receiving port 600b.

Further, if it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected before timing t3, the circulatory system will clears the information about error A in . However, if the circulatory system error A has not been resolved at timing t4, it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected again, and the abnormality notification is executed. Further, when it is determined that the circulatory system error B and the non-circulatory error C are detected before the timing t1, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, and the timing If the RAM clear switch 743 is not operated at t2 when the power is turned on, the information on the circulatory system error B and the non-circulatory error C is held without being cleared. The information about the circulatory error B and the non-circulatory error C is not cleared if the RAM clear switch 743 is not operated when the power is turned on at timing t4 after the power is turned off at timing t3. I try to keep it. Then, after the power is turned on at the timing t4, the abnormality notification is executed based on the storage of such determination results.

Further, after the power is turned on at timing t4, the movable body performs an initial operation to determine whether or not the movable body operates normally and to align the movable body with the initial position.

FIG. 156 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the ball is pulled out when the power is turned on. Here, after the power is turned off at timing t1, the RAM clear switch 743 is turned ON and the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON at time t2 when the power is turned on, and the state is shifted to the ball removal state. It should be noted that the processing before the power is turned off at timing t1 is the same as in FIG. 155, so the description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 156, after the power is turned off at timing t1, the ball extraction flag is turned ON by turning on the ball extraction switch 742 at timing t2 when the power is turned on, and the state is shifted to the ball extraction state. In this ball extraction state, the above-described ball extraction processing is executed, and the game balls B enclosed in the circulation path R of the main body frame 4 are released from the ball extraction opening 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (the ball receiving tray 720). ). Also, at timing t2, the RAM clear flag is turned ON by turning ON the RAM clear switch 743 .

First, after shifting to the ball-out state at timing t2, it is a game restricted period in which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed while the game ball B can be shot. In other words, after the power supply is shut off at timing t1, the variable display of the special symbols and the big winning game are not executed, and even if there is a start winning, the variable display of the special symbols is not newly started.

In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to various winning holes are disabled, and it is impossible to start variable display of special symbols and to pay out (give) prize balls by entering balls. As a result, the game is stopped in the state where the ball is pulled out, and, for example, even if there is a starting prize, the game ball is not paid out, and the normal game is performed such that the lottery and variable display regarding special symbols are not performed. It is possible to make it impossible to increase or decrease the number of balls held.

Further, after transitioning to the ball extraction state at timing t2, the frame control board 740 determines whether errors A and B in the circulation system and error C other than circulation have been detected. It is possible to determine whether or not it has been detected. On the other hand, it is disabled to determine whether or not the circulatory system error B and the non-circulatory error C are detected. Here, among the errors A in the circulatory system, for lifting-related errors such as "lifting ball jam error", although the lifting motor 664 operates when the ball is pulled out, it is related to the operation of the lifting motor 664. If the lift motor 664 is operated while the abnormality is still occurring, the lift motor 664 and the like may be damaged. can do. In addition, among the errors A in the circulatory system, regarding the door opening error, there is a possibility that the door frame 3 will be opened when the ball is pulled out, and the game board 5 etc. will be tampered with. By doing so, it is possible to prevent fraud. In addition, as a circulatory system error B, errors related to the enclosed amount such as "out of the ball at the entrance", "out of the launch ball", "insufficient game ball", "excessive game ball", etc. When the game ball B is pulled out to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), the enclosed game ball B is reduced, and by disabling such determination, the game ball B can be smoothly pulled out. . In addition, as an error C other than circulation, for a communication error with the main control board 1310, by disabling such determination, even if the connection with the main control board 1310 of the game board 5 is not connected , allowing the ball-out condition to occur.

Then, when it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected, the effect display device 1600, the lamps A and B, the speaker, etc. are used to issue an anomaly notification. Here, when it is determined that the circulatory system error A is detected, the circulatory system error is detected when the power is turned off at timing t3, which will be described later, or when the power is turned on at timing t4, which will be described later. Clear information about A.

Note that if it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected before timing t1, the circulatory system may clears the information about error A in . However, if the circulatory system error A has not been resolved at time t2, it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected again, and the abnormality notification is executed. Further, when it is determined that the circulatory system error B and the non-circulatory error C are detected before the timing t1, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740. When the RAM clear switch 743 is operated at timing t2 when the power is turned on, the information on the circulatory system error B and the error C other than the circulatory system is cleared.

Also, effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of game board 5), lamp C (function display unit 1400 (LED mounted on the light emitting board), the speaker, and the movable body, at timing t2, the operation for the ball extraction state and the operation for the ram clear state are executed together. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays messages such as "the ball is being pulled out" and "the ram is cleared" as the ball-draw state display and the ram-clear display. Further, the lamps A and B are alternately flashing in green and yellow as light emission for the bulb-out state and light emission for the ram-clear state (see power-on pattern G in FIG. 151). Further, regarding the lamp C, all the LEDs, including the symbol LEDs indicating the fluctuation display of the special symbols and the result of the variation, and the state LEDs indicating the game state, of the function display unit 1400 are lit up. In addition, from the speaker, as the sound for the ball-draw state and the sound for the ram-clear state, voices such as "ball-draw state is occurring" and "ram-cleared" are output.

In the above, the effect display device 1600, the lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the frame decoration member), the lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5), and the speaker During the operation for the state and the operation in the RAM clear state, the volume and the amount of light are kept constant at the maximum output so that even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the volume and the amount of light do not change. In this way, by maximizing the volume and light intensity, it becomes easier to notice the occurrence of the ball missing state and ram clear, and it is possible to prevent illegal attempts to cause the ball missing state and ram clear. Further, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation can be received and the volume and light quantity can be internally adjusted, but the sound volume and light quantity during execution are not reflected. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when returning to normal operation. It will happen. It should be noted that when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated during the operation for the ball empty state, the operation itself may not be accepted. Further, the effect display device 1600 may be configured such that the amount of light changes when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Further, the movable body is prevented from moving after the ball is pulled out at the timing t2. When the power is normally turned on, the movable body performs an initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to adjust to the initial position. Since the movable body does not move immediately, the initial movement of the movable body is not performed at the time of transition to the ball extraction state. In other words, if the movable body is not at the initial position at the time of transition to the ball-extracted state, it remains stopped at that position during the ball-extracted state.

Further, after shifting to the ball extraction state at timing t2, the external terminal board is in a forced output state in which a security signal is forcibly output. As a result, a security signal is output to the hole computer in the state of the ball being pulled out, and the hole side can grasp that the state of the ball being pulled out has occurred.

Further, after shifting to the ball drawing state at the timing t2, when the hall manager operates the handle 195, the game ball B can be shot. It should be noted that in the ball-out state, the game ball B can be launched, but the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position by opening the door frame 3, and the game ball B can be launched from the ball launch pad 552b. is shot, it is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being ejected from the foul unit 570 to the outside. As a result, it is possible to create a state in which there is no game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b. Also, in this example, in order to make the game ball B absent from the ball launch pad 552b in the ball-out state, the hall manager needs to operate the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B. The game ball B may be automatically shot without the operation of 195.

In addition, after the transition to the ball-out state at the timing t2, the number of game balls B that have entered the entrance (award winning entrance, out exit) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls The number of balls (number of payouts) is not counted. In other words, it is disabled to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, and is not reflected in the base value. However, after the transition to the ball-pulled state at timing t2, the base value before timing t1 is held without being cleared. Also, while the ball is being pulled out, the base value is not displayed on the base monitor, and a special display of "-" is executed in response to the occurrence of the ball being pulled out.

In addition, after the transition to the ball drawing state at the timing t2, since the ball entering the winning hole is not detected, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player and the number of balls held by the player are not detected. It does not add to the number X. However, after the transition to the ball drawing state at timing t2, the number of balls in possession and the number of balls in possession prior to timing t1 and the number of balls X are held without being cleared. In addition, while the ball is being pulled out, the number of balls is not displayed on the number of balls in the possession display section 140, and a special display of "-" is executed in response to the occurrence of the ball being pulled out. Further, while the ball is being pulled out, the frame control board 740 disables the operation of the counting button switch 180 to settle the number of balls held. For this reason, the number of balls in possession does not increase or decrease during the occurrence of the ball-out state, and the problem caused by not displaying the number of balls in possession in the number-of-balls display section 140 does not occur.

Next, after the power is cut off at timing t3, the ball removal switch 742 is not turned ON when the power is turned on at timing t4, the ball removal flag is turned OFF, the RAM clear switch 743 is not turned ON, The RAM clear flag is set to OFF. As a result, after the power is turned on at timing 4, the normal state is the same as before the power is turned off at timing t1.

It should be noted that, in the ball extraction state, the game balls B are extracted from the circulation path R to the ball receiving tray 720, and if there are no game balls B in the circulation path R or there are few game balls B, the power is turned on at timing t4. Later, it is necessary to replenish the game balls B through the out ball receiving port 600a and the safe ball receiving port 600b.

Further, if it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected before timing t3, the circulatory system will clears the information about error A in . However, if the circulatory system error A has not been resolved at timing t4, it is determined that the circulatory system error A has been detected again, and the abnormality notification is executed. Further, when it is determined that the circulatory system error B and the non-circulatory error C are detected before the timing t1, the determination result is stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740. When the RAM clear switch 743 is operated at timing t2 when the power is turned on, the information on the circulatory system error B and the error C other than the circulatory system is cleared. Therefore, after the power is turned on at the timing t4, the information about the circulatory system error B and the non-circulatory error C prior to the timing t1 is not retained.

Further, after the power is turned on at timing t4, the movable body performs an initial operation to determine whether or not the movable body operates normally and to align the movable body with the initial position.

In this example, when the power is turned on by turning on the ball extraction switch 742, the state is shifted to the ball extraction state on the condition that the number of balls in the player's possession is zero. While the ball is being pulled out, the count button switch 180 is operated to make it impossible to settle the number of balls. Therefore, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring due to the inability to settle the number of balls held during the occurrence of the ball missing state.

Further, in this example, the above-described ball removal process is executed during the period from when the ball removal switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and the game ball B is transferred from the circulation path R to the ball receiving tray 720. , the lift motor 664 remains in operation. In this regard, regarding the operation of the lifting motor 664, for example, when 300 game balls B (a specific number) circulate after the ball extraction switch 742 is turned ON when the power is turned on, or for 10 minutes (a specific time) ), the operation may be stopped and the ball extraction state may be terminated. Regarding this specific number and specific time, all the number (40 to 60) of game balls B stored in the circulation route R can be pulled out from the circulation route R to the ball receiving tray 720. is set to be As a result, the lifting motor 664 does not remain in operation after the start of the ball extraction state, and it is possible to prevent failures due to long-term operation. Even after the operation of the lifting motor 664 is stopped, the game cannot be started in the same way as when the ball is pulled out. there is As a result, even after the operation of the lifting motor 664 is stopped, it is possible to grasp the occurrence of the ball extraction state. However, after stopping the operation of the lifting motor 664, the game may be started without turning the power off and then on again.

Also, in this example, when the ball draw switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the ball draw state. is displayed. As a result, the number of held balls can be confirmed from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by the number of held balls displayed on the base monitor without confirming the number of held balls displayed on the number of held balls display section 140.例文帳に追加can. Although the base monitor of this example is composed of four 7-segment LEDs, it is composed of 6-digit 7-segment LEDs like the ball number display unit 140, and the number of balls is the same. (6 digits) is preferable.

In this example, in addition to displaying the base value on the base monitor, the number of balls held is displayed on the base monitor when the ball extraction switch 742 is turned on at normal times. In addition to this, the base monitor does not display the base value while the ball is being pulled out, and a special display of "-" corresponding to the occurrence of the ball being pulled out is executed. In addition, when the frame control board 740 detects an error A or B in the circulatory system and an error C other than the circulatory system, the base monitor does not display the base value, and an error code indicating the type of error is displayed. it's shown. The order of priority of such a display is as follows: display during the state of missing a ball>display of the number of balls held>display of an error code>base value. For this reason, in this example, it is possible to determine whether or not error A in the circulatory system has been detected while the ball is being pulled out, for example. The error code is not displayed in the , and the display during the ball extraction state is executed. As another example, if error A in the circulatory system occurs while the ball is being pulled out, an error code will be displayed on the base monitor. You may make it notify to that effect. In this case, for example, it is possible to alternately switch the display between the display during the occurrence of the ball extraction state and the display of the error code. Also, even if the ball draw switch 742 is turned on while the ball is drawn out, the number of balls held is not displayed on the base monitor, and the display during the ball drawn state is executed. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify that the ball is being pulled out.

[About the magnetic sensor that covers the periphery of the foul ball sensor]
In the above-described embodiment, the game balls B used in the pachinko machine 1 are not limited to stainless balls made of stainless steel. It states that it is permissible to do so. Thus, when the iron ball SB is used as the game ball B, cheating by the magnet M (so-called magnet goto) becomes possible. Fraud detection by radio wave sensors is required. In addition, since there is a possibility that fraudulent acts are carried out on the circulation path of the game balls B on the side of the main body frame 4, there is a sensor (fire Subtraction sensor 554, foul ball sensor 607, launching sensor 704, etc.) requires a magnet sensor (magnetic sensor 1030) that covers the periphery.

In this example, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 are provided in the pachinko machine 1. As the magnetic sensors 1030, a magnetic sensor 1030a provided on the game board 5 side and a magnetic sensor 1030b provided on the body frame 4 side are used. and are provided. Here, the magnetic sensor 1030a and the magnetic sensor 1030b have the same configuration as the magnetic sensor 1030 described above. For example, the magnetic sensor 1030a and the magnetic sensor 1030b are rectangular in plan view and formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a height lower than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and are a gourd shape combining two spheres with a diameter of about 10 cm. is the same as the configuration of the magnetic sensor 1030 described above in that it has a detection area DA of .

First, the magnetic sensor 1030a provided on the game board 5 side is provided so as to cover various winning openings. It makes it possible to detect illicit magnetism. Such a magnetic sensor 1030a is connected to the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 side, and the main control board 1310 determines whether or not magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030a.

FIG. 157 is a diagram in which magnetic sensors are provided around a foul ball sensor. As shown in FIG. 157, the magnetic sensor 1030b provided on the side of the body frame 4 is provided so as to cover at least the periphery of the foul ball sensor 607, and detects an illegal magnetism to the foul ball sensor 607. making it possible. Such a magnetic sensor 1030b is connected to the frame control board 740 on the main body frame 4 side, and the frame control board 740 determines whether or not magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030b.

By the way, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 having the circulation path R in the main body frame 4 (game machine frame), the area around the foul ball sensor 607 in the circulation path unit 600 is particularly susceptible to fraud. First, when the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the number of balls possessed by the player is subtracted by one, while the foul unit 570 launches the game ball to the outside. When the foul ball sensor 607 detects that the foul ball has been sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without any foul balls, the number of balls possessed by the player is increased by one. For this reason, for example, a game ball B launched from the ball launch pad 552b is attracted by the magnet M, guided to the foul ball sensor 607 to be detected many times, and a plurality of balls in possession are added. can be considered. Also, if the game ball B dropped (supplied) from the ball feeding unit 700 is attracted by the magnet M before it is detected by the launch subtraction sensor 554 and is poured into the foul ball sensor 607, the possession ball will not be subtracted. can be fraudulently added to In this regard, in this example, the magnetic sensor 1030b is provided so as to cover the periphery of the foul ball sensor 607, so that the act of detecting illegal magnetism to the foul ball sensor 607 and illegally adding the number of balls held can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to improve the reliability of the number of balls held.

FIG. 158 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor. First, the case where magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030a provided on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 158(A).

As shown in FIG. 158(A), when the magnetic sensor 1030a provided on the game board 5 side detects magnetism at timing t1, the magnetic sensor 1030a is activated while enabling the execution of the game on the main control board 1310. is executing a magnetic anomaly notification A that notifies that magnetism has been detected. In addition, the frame control board 740 enables addition to the number of balls in possession and settlement of the number of balls in possession.

Specifically, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at timing t1, the main control board 1310 sets a period during which the game (main game) can proceed. In other words, even if there is a magnetic anomaly to the winning opening, the variable display of the special symbols can be started when there is a start winning, and when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped with the winning symbols. Then, a normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started. In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to various winning holes are enabled, and it is possible to start variable display of special symbols and pay out (give) prize balls by entering balls.

Further, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at the timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 uses the effect display device 1600, the lamp, the speaker, etc. to notify the magnetic abnormality notification A that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected the magnetism. running Accordingly, it is possible to ascertain that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected magnetism, and to confirm whether or not fraudulent activity has been carried out.

Also, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at timing t1, the external terminal board outputs a security signal. Thus, when magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can recognize that magnetic sensor 1030a has detected magnetism.

Further, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at the timing t1, the frame control board 740 allows the game ball to be shot to the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 195. FIG. In addition, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when detecting a ball entering the winning hole. It is possible to add to the number of balls held by the player or the number X of balls held. Also, the frame control board 740 enables the number of balls held to be settled by operating the count button switch 180 .

In this example, the magnetic anomaly notification A is terminated when a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has passed since the magnetic sensor 1030a detected magnetism at timing t1. However, as another example, the magnetic anomaly notification A may be ended by turning on the power again after turning off the power. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably grasp that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected magnetism.

Also, in this example, when the magnetic sensor 1030a detects magnetism at the timing t1, the main control board 1310 sets the period during which the game (main game) can proceed. It may be a period during which it is impossible to At this time, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are disabled, and it is impossible to start variable display of special symbols and to pay out (give) prize balls by entering balls. As a result, after the magnetic sensor 1030a detects the magnetism, it is possible to prevent fraudulent games from being played until it is confirmed whether fraudulent activity is being performed.

Next, the case where magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030b provided on the body frame 4 side will be described with reference to FIG. 158(B).

As shown in FIG. 158(B), when the magnetic sensor 1030b provided on the side of the body frame 4 detects magnetism at timing t1, the magnetic sensor 1030b is activated while enabling the execution of the game on the main control board 1310. is executing a magnetic anomaly notification B that informs that the magnetism has been detected. On the other hand, it is possible to launch the game ball B from the frame control board 740 and add it to the number of balls in possession, but it is impossible to settle the number of balls in possession.

Specifically, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at timing t1, the main control board 1310 sets a period during which the game (main game) can proceed. That is, even if a magnetic abnormality occurs with respect to the foul ball sensor 607, the variable display of the special symbols can be started when there is a start winning, and the variable display of the special symbols will be stopped with the winning symbols. A normal game can be played in which a jackpot game can be started when the player wins. In addition, the detection sensors corresponding to various winning holes are enabled, and it is possible to start variable display of special symbols and pay out (give) prize balls by entering balls.

In addition, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at the timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 uses the effect display device 1600, the lamp, the speaker, etc. to notify that the magnetic sensor 1030a has detected magnetism. running Accordingly, it is possible to ascertain that the magnetic sensor 1030b has detected magnetism, and to confirm whether or not a fraudulent act has been carried out. In addition, by making the magnetic abnormality notification different depending on whether the magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030a or the magnetism is detected by the magnetic sensor 1030b, it is possible to grasp which region the magnetism is detected.

Further, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at timing t1, the external terminal board outputs a security signal. Thus, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism, a security signal is output to the hall computer, and the hall side can recognize that the magnetic sensor 1030b has detected magnetism.

Further, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at the timing t1, the frame control board 740 allows the game ball to be shot to the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 195. FIG. In addition, the frame control board 740 makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when detecting a ball entering the winning hole. It is possible to add to the number of balls held by the player or the number X of balls held.

Also, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at the timing t1, the frame control board 740 disables the operation of the counting button switch 180 to calculate the number of balls held. In this way, when the magnetism of the foul ball sensor 607 is detected, it is possible to increase or decrease the number of possession balls, but since it is impossible to adjust the number of possession balls, it is possible to determine whether the number of possession balls has been illegally added. Until this is confirmed, it is possible to prevent illegal attempts to settle the number of balls held.

In this example, the magnetic anomaly notification B is terminated when a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes) has passed since the magnetic sensor 1030b detected magnetism at timing t1. However, as another example, the magnetic anomaly notification B may be terminated by turning on the power again after turning off the power. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably grasp that the magnetic sensor 1030b has detected magnetism. In addition, the member used for the notification may be different between when the magnetic anomaly notification A is executed and when the magnetic anomaly notification B is executed, and the end condition of the notification may be made different.

In this example, when the magnetic sensor 1030b detects magnetism at the timing t1, the main control board 1310 sets the period during which the game (main game) can be progressed. It may be a period during which it is impossible to At this time, the detection sensors corresponding to the various winning holes are disabled, and it is impossible to start variable display of special symbols and to pay out (give) prize balls by entering balls. As a result, after the magnetic sensor 1030b detects the magnetism, it is possible to prevent fraudulent games from being played until it is confirmed whether fraudulent activity is being performed.

As described above, when the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side detects magnetism, the magnetic abnormality notification A is executed. It is possible to implement restrictions corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side, such as generating a period in which it is impossible to proceed with the main game. On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 1030b on the side of the body frame 4 detects magnetism, the magnetic anomaly notification B is executed. , the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the body frame 4 side can be executed. Then, when the magnetic sensor 1030b on the side of the main body frame 4 detects magnetism during the execution of the magnetic abnormality notification A, in addition to the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the side of the game board 5, the magnetic field on the side of the main body frame 4 The restriction corresponding to sensor 1030b is enforced. On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 1030a on the side of the game board 5 detects magnetism during the execution of the magnetic abnormality notification B, in addition to the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the side of the body frame 4, the magnetic field on the side of the game board 5 The restriction corresponding to sensor 1030a is enforced. In this way, even if one magnetic sensor detects magnetism and then the other magnetic sensor detects magnetism, the restrictions that are already in place will not be relaxed, so it will act as a deterrent against fraud. can do.

Note that the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main body frame 4 side may be configured to be executed with priority over the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the game board 5 side. That is, when the magnetic sensor 1030b on the side of the main body frame 4 detects magnetism during the execution of the magnetic anomaly notification A, the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030a on the side of the game board 5 ends, and the magnetic sensor on the side of the main body frame 4 He is trying to switch to the limit corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b. On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 1030a on the side of the game board 5 detects magnetism during the execution of the magnetic abnormality notification B, the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the side of the main body frame 4 is continuously executed, and the game board 5 A new restriction corresponding to the side magnetic sensor 1030a is not executed. In this way, even when one magnetic sensor detects magnetism and then the other magnetic sensor detects magnetism, priority is given to the restriction corresponding to the magnetic sensor 1030b on the main body frame 4 side. Fraudulent acts such as using the magnet M around the ball sensor 607 can be reliably prevented.

[About the behavior of various switches when the game board is not installed]
Next, in a situation where the game board 5 is not attached to the body frame 4, the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 provided on the frame control board 740 of the body frame 4 are activated. is operated. As described above in detail, the frame control board 740 includes a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing (ram clearing) information stored in the RAM, clearing the number of balls held by the player stored in the RAM, etc. The number of balls storage/display clear switch 743 for clearing the display of the number of balls displayed in the door frame 3, and the enclosed game ball B is released from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiver). A ball extraction switch 742 is provided for use when the ball is extracted to the tray 720). These switches are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can be operated by the hall manager.

By the way, the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball extraction switch 742 must be turned ON when the power is turned on. is assumed to be installed. However, when the game board 5 is installed, it may be difficult to perform maintenance on the main body frame 4 side. As a result, the main body frame 4 side cannot be sufficiently maintained, and the reliability and convenience of the pachinko machine 1 may deteriorate. For example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not mounted, if the ON operation of the ball extraction switch 742 is invalidated, the game ball B enclosed in the circulation path R is extracted to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). Therefore, inspection of the inside of the circulation route R may become difficult. In addition, if for some reason the power supply to the game board 5 is interrupted while the power supply to the main body frame 4 continues, the situation becomes the same as if the game board 5 is not attached. If the ON operation of these switches is invalidated in , maintenance on the body frame 4 side cannot be sufficiently performed, and there is a risk that the reliability and convenience of the pachinko machine 1 will be lowered. In this regard, in this example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not mounted or in a situation where the energization of the game board 5 is interrupted while the main body frame 4 is still energized, the RAM clear switch 741 and the number of balls By validating the ON operation of the memory/display clear switch 743 and the ball removal switch 742, the main body frame 4 side can be sufficiently maintained, and reliability and convenience can be improved. For example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not mounted, when the ball removal switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on, the game balls B enclosed in the circulation path R are removed to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). This makes it possible to easily inspect the inside of the circulation route R.

FIG. 159 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when various switches are operated when the power is turned on with no game board attached.

FIG. 159(A) shows the case where the RAM clear switch 741 is turned ON at timing t1 when the power is turned on under the condition that the game board 5 is not mounted. When the RAM clear switch 741 is turned ON at timing t1 when the power is turned on, the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 741 is validated and the information stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is cleared. That is, the RAM clear switch 741 validates the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 741 regardless of whether or not the game board 5 is attached when the power is turned on. As a result, the information stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 can be cleared even when the game board 5 is not attached when the power is turned on or when the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on. Therefore, after the game board 5 is installed, it is possible to prevent the game from being illegally played based on the information before installation.

Among the information stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740, the number of balls held is retained without being cleared even if the RAM clear switch 741 is turned ON at timing t1 when the power is turned on. Such a number of balls in possession can be displayed on the number of balls in possession display section 140 regardless of whether or not the game board 5 is attached when the power is turned on. The number of balls held can be cleared by turning on the RAM clear switch 741 and the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 at the same time as the power is turned on at timing t1.

FIG. 159(B) shows a case where the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 is turned on at timing t1 when the power is turned on under the condition that the game board 5 is not mounted. When the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 is turned ON at timing t1 when the power is turned on, the ON operation of the ball number storage/display clear switch 743 is validated, and the memory stored in the RAM of the frame control board 740 is activated. Clear the number of balls. That is, the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 validates the ON operation of the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 regardless of whether or not the game board 5 is attached when the power is turned on. As a result, even if the game board 5 is not attached when the power is turned on or the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, the manager can clear the number of balls held, and the game board 5 is not installed or the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on. You can clear the remaining balls, etc.).

FIG. 159(C) shows the case where the ball extraction switch 742 is turned ON at timing t1 when the power is turned on in a situation where the game board 5 is not mounted. When the ball extraction switch 742 is turned on at timing t1 when the power is turned on, the ON operation of the ball extraction switch 742 is validated, the state is shifted to the ball extraction state, and the game ball B enclosed in the circulation path R is removed. It is possible to extract the balls from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (the ball receiving tray 720). That is, the ball extraction switch 742 validates the ON operation of the ball extraction switch 742 regardless of whether or not the game board 5 is attached when the power is turned on. As a result, even if the game board 5 is not attached when the power is turned on or the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, the ball is removed, and the game enclosed in the circulation path R is shifted to the state. The balls B can be pulled out to the outside (the ball receiving tray 720), and the inside of the circulation route R can be easily inspected.

In addition, during the ball extraction state, the game ball B can be shot when the game board 5 is mounted, but when the game board 5 is not mounted or when the power is turned on, the game board 5 is energized. Even in a situation where the game ball B is not released, it is possible to launch the game ball B.例文帳に追加Specifically, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position due to the opening of the door frame 3 during the ball extraction state, and when the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the foul unit The ball 570 is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being hit to the outside. As a result, even when the game board 5 is not mounted, the game ball B is not present on the ball launch pad 552b.

In this example, as a configuration related to the handle 160, a firing control unit that detects the handle touch sensor 162 and the handle rotation sensor 163 and controls the driving of the firing solenoid 553 is provided. 740. Further, the shooting control unit outputs a detection signal to the main control board 1310 and the frame control board 740 when the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's contact (touch) to the handle 160 . When the detection signal is input, the main control board 1310 outputs a firing permission signal to the firing control section. Similarly, when the detection signal is input, the frame control board 740 outputs a firing control signal. It is outputting a launch permission signal toward the part. In the firing control unit, the handle rotation sensor 163 detects the rotation of the handle 160 while both the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 and the firing permission signal from the frame control board 740 are being input. At times, the driving of the shooting solenoid 553 is controlled so that the game ball B is shot. In the main control board 1310, when an error such as game stop occurs, the shooting permission signal is not output to the shooting control unit, and shooting of the game ball B is not permitted. Similarly, in the frame control board 740, when an error related to frame control occurs, the firing permission signal is not output to the firing control section, and the shooting of the game ball B is not permitted.

In the above configuration, when the game board 5 is not installed or the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 is not connected, and the main control board 1310 outputs a firing permission signal. Can not do it. However, since the firing permission signal from the frame control board 740 can be output, in this example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed, when the ball extraction switch 742 is turned on at timing t1 when the power is turned on, , the shooting of the game ball B is allowed only by the output of the shooting permission signal from the frame control board 740. - 特許庁As a result, even when the game board 5 is not mounted or the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, the game ball B can be launched and there is no game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b. state can be made. As another example, in a situation where the game board 5 is not mounted, instead of the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310, the frame control board 740 may output a firing permission signal for the ball extraction state. good. In the case of such another example, the firing control unit receives both the firing permission signal from the frame control board 740 and the firing permission signal for the ball extraction state from the frame control board 740. During the period, when the handle rotation sensor 163 detects the rotation of the handle 160, it is conceivable that the driving of the shooting solenoid 553 is controlled and the game ball B is shot. As a result, in the same manner as described above, even in a situation where the game board 5 is not mounted or a situation where the game board 5 is not energized when the power is turned on, the game ball B can be launched and placed on the ball launch pad 552b. It is possible to make a state in which there is no game ball B.

FIG. 159(D) shows the case where the count button switch 180 is turned ON at timing t1 in a situation where the game board 5 is not attached or the game board 5 is not energized after the power is turned on. When the count button switch 180 is turned ON at timing t1, the ON operation of the count button switch 180 is validated, and control is made to a counting permission state in which the number of balls in possession can be settled. In other words, the ON operation of the count button switch 180 is valid in a situation where the game board 5 is not attached or in a situation where the game board 5 is not energized after the power is turned on. As a result, even when the game board 5 is not mounted or the game board 5 is not energized after the power is turned on, the number of balls held can be calculated, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged. can do.

Note that the counting button switch 180 may be configured as follows as another example depending on the situation when maintenance of the body frame 4 is performed.

That is, FIG. 159(D') shows the case where the counting button switch 180 is turned ON after the power is turned on at the timing t1 in the situation where the game board 5 is not installed. When the count button switch 180 is turned ON after the power is turned on at timing t1, the ON operation of the count button switch 180 is invalidated, and control is made to a count prohibition state that prohibits settlement of the number of balls held. In other words, if the game board 5 is attached when the power is turned on, the subsequent ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is validated. , the ON operation of the count button switch 180 is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the number of held balls from being illegally calculated while the hall manager is conducting an inspection under the condition that the game board 5 is not installed.

FIG. 159(E) shows a state in which the game board 5 is attached, the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 after the power is turned on at the timing t1, and the game board 5 is not attached. , the counting button switch 180 is turned ON at timing t2. When the count button switch 180 is turned ON at timing t2, the ON operation of the count button switch 180 is validated, and control is made to a counting permission state in which the number of balls in possession can be settled. That is, if the game board 5 is not mounted when the power is turned on, the subsequent ON operation of the counting button switch 180 is invalidated, whereas the game board 5 is mounted when the power is turned on, but the game is played after that. When the board 5 is removed, the ON operation of the count button switch 180 is enabled in a situation where the game board 5 is not attached. As a result, even if the hall manager removes the game board 5 for inspection while the player is playing a game under the condition that the game board 5 is installed, the number of balls held can be settled. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, when the game board 5 is installed, when the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 are turned ON when the power is turned on, or when the counting button switch 180 is turned ON after the power is turned on When operated, the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 on the side of the game board 5 are used to indicate that the ram has been cleared, that the number of balls in possession has been cleared, that a state of missing balls has occurred, and the number of balls in possession, respectively. The notification of the settlement is executed. Here, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 include the performance display device 1600, LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5 and the door frame 3, speakers, and the like. However, in a situation where the game board 5 is not installed, even if various switches are turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot perform the notification using the member instructing the operation, and any state occurs. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to understand whether

In this regard, in this example, when the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball removal switch 742 are turned ON when the power is turned on, or when the counting button switch 180 is turned ON after the power is turned on, In addition to the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 on the game board 5 side, the members instructed to operate by the frame control board 740 on the main body frame 4 side are used to indicate that the ram has been cleared, that the number of balls held has been cleared, A notification is made to the effect that a state of missing a ball has occurred and that the number of balls in possession has been settled. Here, the members whose operation is instructed by the frame control board 740 include the base monitor, the ball number display section 140, the LED built in the counting button switch 180, and the like. For example, when the RAM clear switch 741, the ball number storage/display clear switch 743, and the ball extraction switch 742 are turned ON when the power is turned on, the corresponding display is executed in the ball number display unit 140. FIG. Further, when the ball extraction switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on, the base monitor also displays a display indicating that the ball is being extracted. Further, the LED of the count button switch 180 indicates whether or not the number of balls in possession can be settled, and the state of settlement by the operation of the count button switch 180 . Therefore, even in a situation where the game board 5 is not mounted, when various switches are turned on, the frame control board 740 can perform the notification using the member instructing the operation, and any It becomes clear whether the state has occurred, and the confusion of the hall manager can be avoided.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine, but the game machine is not limited to this, and the game is a pachislot machine or a game that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is applied to a so-called enclosed type game machine or a game machine called a management game machine in which the player does not touch the game balls B, but this is the case. , but may be applied to a gaming machine in which the player can touch the game ball B, and in this case also, the same effects as described above can be achieved. In this game machine, for example, a game ball stored in a plate of a door frame is driven into a game area of a game board by a player's operation, and the driven game ball is provided within the game area. There is a pachinko machine that pays out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the winning opening to a tray of a door frame when the game balls are accepted into the winning opening.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 body frame 5 game board 5a game area 100 door frame body 102 projection 102a guide surface 550 ball shooting unit (ball shooting means)
570 Foul Unit (ball circulation means)
600 circulation ball path unit (ball circulation means)
650 ball lifting unit (ball circulation means)
681 Kuma cassette (removable unit)
681b Connecting hole 681c Positioning hole 686 Kuma motor base (lock means, lock piece)
686b Locating pin (insert)
692 rotary joint (insert)
693 cassette pressing piece (pressing piece)
694 Nairatch (fixing means)
695 spring 700 ball feeding unit (ball circulation means)

Claims (1)

In a game machine equipped with a variable winning opening that allows a ball to be entered at the time of a big hit,
a prize ball awarding means for awarding a prize ball based on the winning to the variable prize opening;
difference ball determination means for determining whether or not the difference ball for a predetermined period has reached a specific value;
a game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
prepared,
The difference ball is a difference between a first count value counted based on the game balls consumed in the game and a second count value counted based on the prize balls,
The specific value is a value preset based on a difference when at least the second count value is greater than the first count value,
The game control means controls subsequent games in a restrained manner when the difference ball determination means determines that the difference ball has reached the specific value,
outputting a special signal to the outside when it is determined by the differential ball determination means that the differential ball has reached a special value smaller than the specific value;
A predetermined notification is performed when the special signal is output,
A gaming machine, wherein the suppression mode can be canceled by a predetermined operation.

Images